Siemens water-cooled units Operating Instructions
Below you will find brief information for water-cooled units. This document provides instructions for installation, operation, and maintenance of water-cooled units. The document includes information about installing the units, connecting them to a water-cooling system, and basic function checks.
advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of
1023
Technical Data
17.3
10.99
Notes regarding water-cooled units
Other conditions
affecting operation
The unit is to be connected to an existing external cooling-water circuit.
The construction of this cooling-water circuit under the aspects of
♦ open or closed circuit
♦ choice and juxtaposition of materials
♦ composition of cooling water
♦ cooling-water cooling (recooling, supply of fresh cooling water)
♦ and others
have an important effect on the safe functioning and service life of the
whole installation.
WARNING
The warnings given under “Standard units" apply.
Installation and servicing work on the water cooling system must be
performed with the power disconnected.
There must be no condensation on the units (also applies to standard
units).
17.3.1
Notes regarding installation and components
A closed-circuit water-cooling system of stainless steel with water/water
heat exchanger is recommended for the converters.
To prevent electrochemical corrosion and transfer of vibration,
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES are to be connected to water supply
and return lines by flexible, electrically non-conducting hose. The
hose length (in total) should be > 1.5 m.
If plastic piping is used in the installation, this hose is not necessary.
The water hoses should be connected up before the converter is
installed.
If hose clips are used, they should be checked for tightness at threemonthly intervals.
17-14
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Technical Data
Wall penetration
Flexible connection
(hose > 1.5m,
electr. non-conduc.)
Return
Infeed
e.g. piping
1)
Cooling-water circuit
2) Amot valve
SIMOVERT
converter
Mounting cabinet
Fig. 17-2
Cooling-water circuit for SIMOVERT converters
The operating pressure is to be adjusted according to the flow
conditions in the supply and return sides of the water cooling system.
The volume of cooling water per unit time is to be set to within the
values given in Table 17-15.
This can be done, for example, by means of valves with flowmeter
(e.g. as made by “OSTACO Armaturen AG”, CH-8902 Urdorf,
Tel. ++4117355555).
The flowmeters made by GPI (5252 East 36th Street North Wichita,
KS USA 67220-3205 Tel.: 316-686-7361, Fax.: 316-686-6746) have
also proved very effective.
The user must take measures to ensure that the max. permissible
operating pressure (≤ 1 bar) is not exceeded. Use must be made of a
pressure regulating device.
Closed-circuit cooling systems are to be provided with pressure
balancing devices with safety valve (≤ 3 bar) and air venting devices.
The air must be let out of the cooling system while filling is in progress.
To ensure that the necessary volume keeps flowing, flushback filters
should be fitted instead of the normal pipe strainer. Flushback filters
automatically take care of the return flow.
These are manufactured by, for example, Benckiser GmbH,
Industriestrasse 7, D-6905 Schriesheim Tel.: +49-6203-730.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
17-15
Technical Data
10.99
ASI 1 Information Bulletin E20125-C6038-J702-A1-7400 of February
1997 contains information about suggested plant configurations for
various applications.
Water piping must be laid with extreme care. The pipes must be
properly secured mechanically and checked for leakage.
Water pipes must under no circumstances make contact with live parts
(insulation clearance: at least 13 mm).
17.3.2
Application
In application, the same general conditions apply as to standard units
(with air cooling), with the exception of the cooling conditions described
below.
Water is normally used as the cooling medium (see Section "Coolant").
Antifreeze is added only in exceptional cases.
Within a cooling water temperature range of from + 5 °C to + 38 °C, the
unit can be operated at 100% rated current.
If higher cooling water temperatures are necessary, the unit operating
current must be reduced as shown in Figures 2 and 3 (Curve 1).
This applies only where water is used as the cooling medim (see notes
in Section "Anti-condensation, Antifreeze").
Derating Curve IP22
Permissible rated current in %
105
100
95
1
90
85
80
75
70
65
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Supply temperature in °C
Water
20 % Mixture -10 °C
34 % Mixture -20 °C
44 % Mixture -30 °C
Fig. 17-3
17-16
Reduction curve applying to installation in IP22 cabinets
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Technical Data
Derating Curve Water IP54
Permissible rated current in %
105
100
95
1
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Supply temperature in °C
Water
20 % Mixture -10 °C
33 % Mixture -20 °C
44 % Mixture -30 °C
Fig. 17-4
NOTE
Reduction curve 2 applying to installation in IP54 cabinets
The maximum coolant temperature is 50 °C for IP22 cubicles and 46 °C
for IP54 cubicles!
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
17-17
Technical Data
17.3.3
10.99
Coolant
Normal service water or a water-antifreeze mixture (see Section
"Antifreeze additive") can be used as coolant.
17.3.3.1
Definition of cooling water
Chemically neutrally reacting, clean water free of solid substances
(mains water).
IMPORTANT
Max. grain size of any entrained particles
≤ 0.1 mm
pH value
6.0 to 8.0
Chloride
< 40 ppm
Sulfate
< 50 ppm
Dissolved substances
< 340 ppm
Total hardness
< 170 ppm
Conductivity (water only, also see Section
"Antifreeze additive")
< 500 µS/cm
Cooling water inlet temperature
+ 5 ... 38 °C
Cooling water temperature rise per unit (rated
operation)
∆ T ≈ 5 °C
Operating pressure
≤ 1 bar
Operating pressures higher than 1 bar are not permissible!
If the system is operating at a higher pressure, the supply pressure
must be reduced to 1 bar at each unit.
The heat sink material is not seawater-proof, i.e. it must not be cooled
directly with seawater!
Filters (sieves) with a mesh size of < 100 µm are to be fitted in the unit
water systems (see Section “Notes regarding installation and
components”)!
If there is a risk of freezing, appropriate counter-measures should be
taken for operation, storage and transport, e.g. draining and blowing out
with air, extra heaters, etc.
WARNING
The warning notes for "standard units" apply.
Installation and servicing work on the water systems must always be
performed with the electric power disconnected.
17-18
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
17.3.3.2
Technical Data
Antifreeze additive
By the use of antifreeze, the lower operating temperature limit can be
reduced from + 5 °C to 0 °C, and when not operating the system is
protected against freezing at temperatures down to − 30 °C.
Because of its physical properties (heat absorption, thermal
conductivity, viscosity), antifreeze reduces cooling system efficiency. It
should only be used when absolutely necessary.
Reduction curves for antifreeze are given in the Section "Application"
(Fig. 17-3 and 17-4). Without derating, premature aging of unit
components cannot be ruled out. Converter tripping by the
overtemperature protection must also be expected.
WARNING
Operation at temperatures of < 0 °C is not permitted, not even with
antifreeze!
Use of other media can shorten the service life.
If less that 20 % Antifrogen N is added to the cooling water, the risk of
corrosion is increased, which can shorten the service life.
If more than 30 % Antifrogen N is added to the cooling water, this will
have an adverse effect on heat dissipation and hence on the proper
functioning of the unit. It must always be kept in mind that a higher
pumping capacity is required when Antifrogen N is added to the cooling
water.
When antifreeze is used, no potential differences must occur in the
whole cooling system. If necessary, the components must be
connected with an equipotential bonding strip.
NOTE
Where antifreeze is concerned, pay attention to the information given in
the safety data sheet!
Antifrogen N (made by Hoechst) is preferred for use as antifreeze.
The safety data sheet is appended.
Background:
Antifrogen N was thoroughly analysed for this application. Special
attention was given to compatibility with other materials and to
environmental and health aspects. Furthermore, many years of
experience have been gained with Antifrogen N, and the definition of
cooling water is based on this antifreeze agent.
In order to obtain the benefit of the good anti-corrosive properties of
Antifrogen N and water mixtures, the concentration of the mixture must
be at least 20 %.
The use of antifreeze places higher demands on cooling system
tightness because the surface tension of the Antifrogen and water
mixture is about 100 times smaller than that of pure water.
Hotwater-proof asbestos-based seals are suitable. For seals with
packing glands, graphite cord can be used. For pipe joints where hemp
is used, coating the hemp with fermit or fermitol has proved effective.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
17-19
Technical Data
WARNING
10.99
Antifrogen N can give rise to leakage at polytetrafluorethylene seals.
Proportion of
Antifrogen N
added [%]
Kinematic
viscosity
[mm²/s]
Relative
pressure loss
0
1.8
1.09
20
3.5
1.311
-10
34
4.72
1.537
-20
45
7.73
1.743
-30
Table 17-16
Antifreeze
protection to
[°C]
Antifrogen N material data at T = 0 °C coolant temperature
More than 45 % impedes heat dissipation and hence proper functioning
of the unit.
It must always be kept in mind that the pumping capacity required
for using Antifrogen N additive must be adjusted, and the
backpressure arising in the unit must also be taken into account.
The necessary coolant flow volume must be attained under all
circumstances.
The electrical conductivity of the coolant is increased when antifreeze is
added to the cooling water. Antifrogen N contains inhibitors to
counteract the attendant increased propensity for electrochemical
corrosion.
To prevent weakening of the inhibitors and the corrosion that would
then result, the following measures are necessary:
1. When the cooling system is drained, it must either be refilled with
the same mixture within 14 days, or it must be flushed out with water
several times and the heat sinks must then be blow through with
compressed air.
2. The water and Antifrogen N mixture must be renewed every 3 to 5
years.
If other antifreeze agents are used, they must be ethylene glycol
based. They must also have been approved by reputable companies in
the automotive industry (GM, Ford, Chrysler).
Example: DOWTHERM SR-1.
Concerning the electrical conductivity of the antifreeze and water
mixture, the antifreeze manufacturer’s guidelines apply.
The water that is mixed with the antifreeze must strictly comply with the
defnition given in the Section "Definition of cooling water".
WARNING
Use of other agents can shorten the service life.
Mixing different antifreeze agents is not permitted under any
circumstances.
17-20
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Technical Data
17.3.4
Protection against condensation
Special measures are necessary to prevent condensation.
Condensation occurs when the cooling water inlet temperature is
considerably lower than the room temperature (air temperature). The
permissible temperature difference between cooling water and air
varies according to the relative humidity φ of the room air. The
temperature at which moist air will deposit droplets of water is called
the dew point.
The following table lists the dew points (in °C) for an atmospheric
pressure of
1 bar (≈ height 0 to 500 m above sea level). If the cooling water
temperature is lower than the value given, condensation must be
expected, i.e. the cooling water temperture must always be ≥ dew point.
Room
temp.
°C
φ=
20 %
φ=
30 %
φ=
40 %
φ=
50 %
φ=
60 %
φ=
70 %
φ=
80 %
φ=
85 %
φ=
90 %
φ=
95 %
φ=
100 %
10
<0
<0
<0
0.2
2.7
4.8
6.7
7.6
8.4
9.2
10
20
<0
2
6
9.3
12
14.3
16.4
17.4
18.3
19.1
20
25
0.6
6.3
10.5
13.8
16.7
19.1
21.2
22.2
23.2
24.1
24.9
30
4.7
10.5
14.9
18.4
21.3
23.8
26.1
27.1
28.1
29
29.9
35
8.7
14.8
19.3
22.9
26
28.6
30.9
32
33
34
34.9
38
11.1
17.4
22
25.7
28.8
31.5
33.8
34.9
36
36.9
37.9
40
12.8
19.1
23.7
27.5
30.6
33.4
35.8
36.9
37.9
38.9
39.9
45
16.8
23.3
28.2
32
35.3
38.1
40.6
41.8
42.9
43.9
44.9
50
20.8
27.5
32.6
36.6
40
42.9
45.5
46.6
47.8
48.9
49.9
Table 17-17
Dew point temperature as a function of relative humidity φ and room
temperature at an altitude of 0 m above sea level
The dew point also depends on the absolute pressure, i.e. on altitude.
The dew points for low atmospheric pressures lie below the value for
sea level, and it is therefore always sufficient to plan the cooling water
supply temperature for an altitude of 0 m.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
17-21
Technical Data
10.99
Various measures can be taken to afford protection against
condensation:
1. The simplest precaution is to fit a temperature-controlled valve
arrangement in the water supply, e.g. bypass method (see Fig.
17-2) with the designation “amot valve” (available from: Ing. Büro
Neundörfer, Fichtenstr.5, D-91094 Langensendelbach,
Tel.: +49-9133-3497). This method has the disadvantage that the
water temperature is always adjusted to the temperature set on the
bypass valve. This temperature is in the vicinity of the maximum
attainable room temperature (at which condensation is most likely to
occur), which means that the unit is always under maximum thermal
stress.
2. Water temperature control places considerably less stess on the
units. The water temperature is controlled as a function of room
temperature. This method is certainly to be preferred where there
are high room temperatures, low water temperatures and high
humidities.
3. Physical dehumidifying. This is only effective in closed rooms. It
comprises operating an air/water heat exchanger with cold water to
constantly condense the moisture out of the room air.
4. A humidity alarm can be installed to give a warning when
condensation is imminent. Such an alarm is available from
ENDRICH (Tel.: +49-07452-6007-0); when the temperature falls to
within 2 K of dew point, a signal contact closes.
17-22
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
17.3.5
Technical Data
Notes on materials
Cooling water installations with copper pipes and/or copper joints are to
be avoided and are possible only if special measures are taken, e.g.
closed cooling circuit, full filtering (i.e. copper ions are filtered out),
water additives (such as the products of “Schilling Chemie GmbH”,
PO Box 1136, D-71687 Freiberg, Tel. +49-7141-703-0).
The hose connection nozzles on the heat sink side must be of stainless
steel or heavy gauge aluminium. Under no circumstances may the
connection nozzles be of brass or copper.
PVC hoses are not suitable for use with antifreeze!
Hard PVC pipes are suitable for use with the antifreeze agents listed in
Section "Antifreeze additive".
IMPORTANT
The water cooling system must not contain any zinc at all.
Where antifreeze is used, please note:
zinc reacts with all glycol-based inhibitors.
Never use galvanized pipes for this reason!
If the plant incorporates normal iron pipes or cast iron
accessories (e.g. motor housings), a separate cooling system with
water/water heat exchangers is to be installed for the converters.
If a heat exchanger made of CuNi 90/10 is used, be sure to pay
attention to the water conductivity (hose) (see Section "Note regarding
installation and components").
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
17-23
Technical Data
17.3.6
10.99
Cabinet design an connection system
♦ Components not mounted on the heat sink, e.g. the electronic
devices and the DC link capacitors, are cooled by the heat
exchangers at the heat sink fins.
When a chassis unit is installed in a cubicle, make sure that the air
discharged by the fan can enter the inside of the chassis. For this
reason, there must be a clearance of at least 130 mm between top
of chassis and cubicle roof (or existing cover) for applications with
degrees of protection > IP42.
The compartmentalizations to be fitted to units with air-cooling are
counterproductive here! They must not be fitted.
♦ The units require no external cooling air.
It must nevertheless be kept in mind that additional heat losses of
other components in the cubicle, such as reactors, cannot be
extracted!
♦ The temperature of the cooling air circulating inside the chassis is
monitored with a sensor.
♦ If an application with degree of protection IP54 is set up, it is
necessary to close the gaps between the chassis side walls and the
cubicle walls.
♦ In cubicle systems, partition walls up to the top cover plate are to be
fitted between the units.
♦ If the units are operated with degree of protection IP54, the air
temperature inside the units during rated operation is distinctly
higher than the water supply temperature.
♦ One-inch internal threads are provided for the water connection.
The connection nipples must be of stainless steel or heavy gauge
aluminium. Ideally, flat seals should be used.
♦ If the connectors supplied with the units are used, they should be
sealed with Loctite 542.
♦ The “Goldschlange” (gold snake) hose made by Paguag is
recommended.
♦ For the joint, use is made of an NW25 screw-type sleeve for
“Goldschlange” hose with inside piece of V2A and a double nipple of
V2A.
♦ Cooling water supply (blue) and return (red) are to be connected in
accordance with the colour coding, which is to be found next to the
1-inch water connection beneath the heat sink.
17-24
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
Active Front End (AFE)
AFE Rectifier / Regenerative Feedback Unit
Chassis Type E to G
AC - DC
UDC
Edition: AB
Order No.: 6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
These Operating Instructions are valid for software release V2.0 or higher.
We reserve the right to make changes to functions, technical data, standards, drawings and parameters.
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its
contents is not permitted without express written authority.
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design,
are reserved.
We have checked the contents of this document to ensure that
they coincide with the described hardware and software.
However, differences cannot be completely excluded, so that we
do not accept any guarantee for complete conformance.
However, the information in this document is regularly checked
and necessary corrections will be included in subsequent
editions. We are grateful for any recommendations for
improvement.
Siemens AG 1999 All rights reserved
SIMOVERT Registered Trade Mark
10.99
Contents
Contents
1
DEFINITIONS AND WARNINGS ..................................................................... 1-1
2
DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................. 2-1
3
INITIAL START-UP .......................................................................................... 3-1
4
TRANSPORT, STORAGE, UNPACKING........................................................ 4-1
5
INSTALLATION................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1
Installing the units ............................................................................................. 5-1
5.2
Minimum clearances ......................................................................................... 5-2
6
INSTALLATION IN CONFORMANCE WITH EMC REGULATIONS .............. 6-1
7
CONNECTING-UP AND WIRING .................................................................... 7-1
7.1
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
Connection overviews....................................................................................... 7-2
Mains connection modules ............................................................................... 7-2
AFE Inverter ...................................................................................................... 7-5
Connection overview of the AFE rectifier/regenerative feedback unit .............. 7-7
7.2
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
7.2.5
Power connections............................................................................................ 7-9
AFE rectifier/regenerative feedback unit........................................................... 7-9
AFE choke ...................................................................................................... 7-10
Auxiliary power supply, precharging ............................................................... 7-11
Maximum cross-sections ................................................................................ 7-11
Protective conductor connection..................................................................... 7-11
7.3
7.3.1
7.3.2
Control terminals ............................................................................................. 7-12
Mains connection module ............................................................................... 7-12
Standard connections of the AFE inverter ...................................................... 7-12
7.4
Connecting up control cables.......................................................................... 7-14
7.5
Terminal assignments..................................................................................... 7-14
7.6
Digital inputs/outputs....................................................................................... 7-18
8
BASIC FUNCTION CHECK ............................................................................. 8-1
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
1
Contents
10.99
9
EXPLANATION OF TERMINOLOGY AND FUNCTIONALITY
OF THE AFE..................................................................................................... 9-1
10
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS................................................................................. 10-1
11
PARAMETERIZATION................................................................................... 11-1
11.1
Setting parameters via the PMU ..................................................................... 11-2
11.2
11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.3
11.2.4
11.2.5
11.2.6
"Start-up" parameterization............................................................................. 11-5
Function selection (P052) ............................................................................... 11-6
Factory setting (P052 = 1) (Parameter reset) ................................................. 11-6
Initialization (MLFB input) (P052 = 2) ............................................................. 11-7
Download (P052 = 3) ...................................................................................... 11-9
Hardware configuration (P052 = 4)............................................................... 11-10
Closed-loop control settings (P052 = 5)........................................................ 11-11
12
PARAMETER LIST ........................................................................................ 12-1
12.1
General visualization parameters ................................................................... 12-2
12.2
General parameters ........................................................................................ 12-4
12.3
Drive data........................................................................................................ 12-6
12.4
Hardware configuration................................................................................... 12-8
12.5
Closed-loop control ......................................................................................... 12-9
12.6
Functions....................................................................................................... 12-14
12.7
Setpoint channel ........................................................................................... 12-15
12.8
Control and status bit connections................................................................ 12-17
12.9
Analog inputs/outputs ................................................................................... 12-25
12.10
Interface configuration .................................................................................. 12-27
12.11
Diagnostic functions...................................................................................... 12-31
12.12
Gating unit..................................................................................................... 12-34
12.13
Factory parameters....................................................................................... 12-34
12.14
Profile parameters......................................................................................... 12-35
2
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Contents
13
PROCESS DATA............................................................................................ 13-1
13.1
13.1.1
13.1.2
13.1.3
13.1.4
13.1.5
Control word.................................................................................................... 13-1
Display of control word on PMU seven-segment display ............................... 13-2
Control word 1 (visualization parameter r550 or r967) ................................... 13-3
Control word 2 (visualization parameter r551)................................................ 13-4
Sources for control words 1 and 2 .................................................................. 13-5
Description of the control word bits................................................................. 13-9
13.2
13.2.1
13.2.2
13.2.3
Status word ................................................................................................... 13-14
Status word 1 (visualization parameter r552 or r968)................................... 13-14
Status word 2 (visualization parameter r553) ............................................... 13-16
Description of the status word bits ................................................................ 13-18
14
FAULTS AND ALARMS................................................................................. 14-1
14.1
Faults .............................................................................................................. 14-1
14.2
Alarms ............................................................................................................. 14-6
14.3
Fatal errors (FF).............................................................................................. 14-8
15
MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................. 15-1
15.1
Mains connection module ............................................................................... 15-2
15.2
15.2.1
15.2.2
15.2.3
15.2.4
15.2.5
15.2.6
15.2.7
15.2.8
15.2.9
15.2.10
15.2.11
15.2.12
AFE inverter maintenance .............................................................................. 15-3
Replacing the fan ............................................................................................ 15-3
Replacing the starting capacitor ..................................................................... 15-3
Replacing the capacitor battery ...................................................................... 15-4
Replacing the SML and the SMU ................................................................... 15-4
Removing and installing the module busbars (from type G).......................... 15-5
Replacing the balancing resistor..................................................................... 15-6
Replacing the IVI............................................................................................. 15-6
Replacing the VDU and the VDU resistor....................................................... 15-7
Replacing the PSU.......................................................................................... 15-7
Replacing the IGD........................................................................................... 15-8
Replacing the IGBT module............................................................................ 15-9
Replacing the PMU ....................................................................................... 15-10
15.3
15.3.1
15.3.2
15.3.3
15.3.4
Fuses ............................................................................................................ 15-11
DC fuses ....................................................................................................... 15-11
Fan fuses of the AFE inverters ..................................................................... 15-12
Fuses of the auxiliary power supply of the mains connection module ......... 15-13
Main fuses..................................................................................................... 15-14
16
FORMING ....................................................................................................... 16-1
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
3
Contents
10.99
17
TECHNICAL DATA ........................................................................................ 17-1
17.1
Mains connection module ............................................................................... 17-1
17.2
AFE inverter .................................................................................................... 17-5
17.3
17.3.1
17.3.2
17.3.3
17.3.3.1
17.3.3.2
17.3.4
17.3.5
17.3.6
Notes regarding water-cooled units .............................................................. 17-14
Notes regarding installation and components............................................... 17-14
Application..................................................................................................... 17-16
Coolant.......................................................................................................... 17-18
Definition of cooling water.............................................................................17-18
Antifreeze additive ........................................................................................17-19
Protection against condensation................................................................... 17-21
Notes on materials ........................................................................................ 17-23
Cabinet design an connection system .......................................................... 17-24
17.4
AFE chokes................................................................................................... 17-25
18
ENVIRONMENTAL FRIENDLINESS ............................................................. 18-1
19
CERTIFICATES.............................................................................................. 19-1
20
BLOCK DIAGRAMS....................................................................................... 20-1
21
DIMENSION DRAWINGS............................................................................... 21-1
21.1
AFE power supply module .............................................................................. 21-1
21.2
AFE inverter .................................................................................................... 21-1
4
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
1
Definitions and Warnings
Definitions and Warnings
Qualified personnel
For the purpose of this documentation and the product warning labels,
a "Qualified person" is someone who is familiar with the installation,
mounting, start-up, operation and maintenance of the product. He or
she must have the following qualifications:
♦ Trained or authorized to energize, de-energize, ground and tag
circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety
procedures.
♦ Trained or authorized in the proper care and use of protective
equipment in accordance with established safety procedures.
♦ Trained in rendering first aid.
DANGER
For the purpose of this documentation and the product warning labels,
"Danger" indicates death, severe personal injury or substantial property
damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
For the purpose of this documentation and the product warning labels,
"Warning" indicates death, severe personal injury or property damage
can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
For the purpose of this documentation and the product warning labels,
"Caution" indicates that minor personal injury or material damage can
result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTE
For the purpose of this documentation, "Note" indicates important
information about the product or about the respective part of the
documentation which is essential to highlight.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
1-1
Definitions and Warnings
WARNING
10.99
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during
operation.
Non-observance of the warnings can thus result in severe personal
injury or property damage.
Only qualified personnel should work on or around the equipment
This personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all warning and
maintenance procedures contained in this documentation.
The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on
correct transport, proper storage and installation as well as careful
operation and maintenance.
NOTE
This documentation does not purport to cover all details on all types of
the product, nor to provide for every possible contingency to be met in
connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems
arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes,
the matter should be referred to the local SIEMENS sales office.
The contents of this documentation shall not become part of or modify
any prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales
contract contains the entire obligation of SIEMENS AG. The warranty
contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of
SIEMENS AG. Any statements contained herein do not create new
warranties or modify the existing warranty.
1-2
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Definitions and Warnings
Components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge (ESD)
CAUTION
The board contains components which can be destroyed by
electrostatic discharge. These components can be easily destroyed if
not carefully handled. If you have to handle electronic boards, please
observe the following:
Electronic boards should only be touched when absolutely necessary.
The human body must be electrically discharged before touching an
electronic board.
Boards must not come into contact with highly insulating materials - e.g.
plastic parts, insulated desktops, articles of clothing manufactured from
man-made fibers.
Boards must only be placed on conductive surfaces.
Boards and components should only be stored and transported in
conductive packaging (e.g. metalized plastic boxes or metal
containers).
If the packing material is not conductive, the boards must be wrapped
with a conductive packaging material, e.g. conductive foam rubber or
household aluminium foil.
The necessary ESD protective measures are clearly shown again in the
following diagram:
♦ a = Conductive floor surface
♦ b = ESD table
♦ c = ESD shoes
♦ d = ESD overall
♦ e = ESD chain
♦ f = Cubicle ground connection
d
d
b
b
d
e
e
f
a
f
f
c
c
Sitting
Standing
Fig. 1-1
a
f
f
c
a
Standing / Sitting
ESD protective measures
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
1-3
Definitions and Warnings
10.99
Safety and Operating Instructions
for Drive Converters
(in conformity with the low-voltage directive 73/23/EEC)
1. General
4. Installation
In operation, drive converters, depending on their degree
of protection, may have live, uninsulated, and possibly
also moving or rotating parts, as well as hot surfaces.
The installation and cooling of the appliances shall be in
accordance with the specifications in the pertinent
documentation.
In case of inadmissible removal of the required covers, of
improper use, wrong installation or maloperation, there is
the danger of serious personal injury and damage to
property.
The drive converters shall be protected against
excessive strains. In particular, no components must be
bent and/or isolating distances altered in the course of
transportation or handling. No contact shall be made with
electronic components and contacts.
For further information, see documentation.
All operations serving transport, installation and
commissioning as well as maintenance are to be carried
out by skilled technical personnel (observe IEC 364 or
CENELEC HD 384 or DIN VDE 0100 and IEC Report
664 or DIN VDE 0110 and national accident prevention
rules).
Drive converters contain electrostatic sensitive
components which are liable to damage through
improper use. Electronic components must not be
mechanically damaged or destroyed (potential health
risks).
For the purposes of these basic safety instructions,
"skilled technical personnel" means persons who are
familiar with the installation, mounting, commissioning
and operation of the product and have the qualifications
needed for the performance of their functions.
When working on live drive converters, the applicable
national accident prevention rules (e.g. VBG 4) must be
complied with.
2. Intended use
Drive converters are components designed for inclusion
in electrical installations or machinery.
5. Electrical connection
The electrical installation shall be carried out in
accordance with the relevant requirements (e.g. crosssectional areas of conductors, fusing, PE connection).
For further information, see documentation.
In case of installation in machinery, commissioning of the
drive converter (i.e. the starting of normal operation) is
prohibited until the machinery has been proved to
conform to the provisions of the EC directive 89/392/EEC
(Machinery Safety Directive - MSD). Account is to be
taken of EN 60204.
Instructions for the installation in accordance with EMC
requirements, such as screening, grounding, location of
filters and wiring, are contained in the drive converter
documentation. They must always be complied with, also
for drive converters bearing a CE marking. Observance
of the limit values required by the EMC law is the
responsibility of the manufacturer of the installation or
machine.
Commissioning (i.e. the start of normal operation) is
admissible only where conformity with the EMC directive
(89/336/EEC) has been established.
6. Operation
The drive converters meet the requirements of the lowvoltage directive 73/23/EEC. They are subject to the
harmonized standards of the series prEN 50178/DIN
VDE 0160 in conjunction with EN 60439-1/DIN VDE
0660 Part 500 and EN 60146/DIN VDE 0558.
The technical data as well as information concerning the
supply conditions shall be taken from the rating plate and
from the documentation and shall be strictly observed.
3. Transport, storage
The instructions for transport, storage and proper use
shall be complied with.
The climatic conditions shall be in conformity with prEN
50178.
Installations which include drive converters shall be
equipped with additional monitoring and protective
devices in accordance with the relevant applicable safety
requirements, e.g. Act respecting technical equipment,
accident prevention rules, etc. Changes to the drive
converters by means of the operating software are
permissible.
After disconnection of the drive converters from the
voltage supply, live appliance parts and power terminals
must not be touched immediately because of possibly
energized capacitors. In this regard, the corresponding
signs and markings on the drive converter must be
respected.
During operation, all covers and doors shall be kept
closed.
7. Maintenance and servicing
The manufacturer’s documentation shall be followed.
Keep these safety instructions in a safe place!
1-4
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
2
Description
Description
The AFE (Active Front End) rectifier/regenerative feedback units
belonging to the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES series are power
electronics devices that are available as cabinet and chassis units.
The units can be operated on a 3-phase mains with or without an
earthed neutral point.
The series of units is broken down into the following voltage ranges:
♦ 400 V mains voltage range:
3AC 380 V (− 20 %) to 460 V (+ 5 %)
♦ 500 V mains voltage range:
3AC 500 V (− 20 %) to 575 V (+ 5 %)
♦ 690 V mains voltage range:
3AC 660 V (− 20 %) to 690 V (+ 5 %)
The core component of the AFE rectifier/regerative feedback unit
consists of a voltage source converter with the CUSA control unit and it
generates a controlled DC voltage, the so-called DC link voltage, from a
3-phase mains.
This DC link voltage is kept constant almost independently of the mains
voltage (also in the event of regenerative feedback). The prerequisite
for this is that the DC voltage setpoint is within the operating range
defined below.
DC link voltage
operating range
Minimum:
Maximum:
Operating principle
1.5 times the rms value of the applied mains voltage.
Explanation: the DC link voltage of the AFE inverter must
at least be greater than the peak rectified value of the
applied mains voltage to ensure that the power system is
no longer controlled via the freewheeling diodes of the
IGBT switches.
for the 400 V mains voltage range: 740 V DC
500 V mains voltage range:
920 V DC
690 V mains voltage range:
1100 V DC
On the 3-phase end, a mains angle-oriented high-speed vector control
is subordinate to the DC link voltage control and impresses an almost
sinusoidal current on the network so as to minimise system
perturbations with the aid of the subsequently connected Clean Power
filter.
The vector control also enables setting of the power factor cos phi, and
thus reactive power compensation, but the operating current
requirement has priority.
The VSB module (Voltage Sensing Board), functions as the network
angle sensor, similarly to the principle of an encoder.
For safety reasons, an AFE rectifier/regenerative feedback unit must be
connected to the mains via a main contactor; see figure 2-1.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
2-1
Description
10.99
6
VSB
CUSA
Precharging contactor
RV
Line supply
connection
C / L+
L1, L2, L3
L1
Main contactor
L2
Filter
contactor
U2
V2
W2
DC units
connection
D/L-
CF
PE
Precharging and main contactor
Fig. 2-1
Configuration
Clean Power Filter
AFE inverter with CUSA
Basic circuit
Both one and several inverters can be connected to the output.
The maximum connected power of the inverters may amount to 4 times
the rated power of the AFE inverter. The sum of active power extracted
from the network must not exceed the rated power of the AFE, and this
must be ensured by configuration of the system.
The AFE is suitable for coupling several inverters to a common DC
busbar. This allows energy to be transferred between motoring and
generating drives, thus providing a power-saving feature.
Line voltage dips can be bridged in voltage step-up operation without
altering the DC link voltage value. This can be achieved up to 65 % of
rated line voltage without additional components on condition that the
power balance defined by Equation 1 can be maintained.
3 ⋅ Vline ⋅ Imax = Vd ⋅ Id
Equation 1
To bridge line voltage dips below 65 % of rated line voltage, the
auxiliary power supply must be supported by an external UPS or similar
to prevent the contactors from dropping out.
2-2
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Operation and
control options
Description
The unit can be controlled and operated via
♦ the parameterization unit (PMU)
♦ an optional operator control panel (OP1S)
♦ the terminal strip
♦ a serial interface
In combination with automation systems, the AFE rectifier/regenerative
feedback unit is controlled via optional interfaces and technology
boards.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
2-3
10.99
3
Initial start-up
Initial start-up
Unpack and check the
units
After removing the packaging, check that the unit is
intact and undamaged. Only intact units may be started
up. Please also check that all the necessary option
boards are present and correct.
See section
"Transport,
Storage,
Unpacking"
Fit the main
components of the unit
and install options that
have not already been
fitted
Retrofit any optional boards which have not yet been
installed, if necessary. Then install the units taking into
account the requirements at the point of installation and
the EMC instructions.
See section
"Installation"
and "Installation
in Conformance
with EMC
Regulations"
Wire the main
components of the unit
and connect the PE
conductor and the
power cables
Beginning with the PE conductor, connect the power
cables and the power wiring of the AFE chokes. It is
advisable to not yet connect the DC link module.
Use only the included cable harnesses for further
internal wiring of the main conponents. In this step, do
not yet connect the control and communication cables.
Exception: OP1S if the unit is to be parametrized via
OP1S.
See chapters
"Connecting and
wiring" and
"Installation in
conformance
with EMC
Regulations"
Form the DC link
capacitors, if necessary
If the unit’s DC link was de-energized for more than a
year, the DC link capacitors must be formed again. .
See section
"Forming"
Connect the 230 V AC
auxiliary voltage or the
24 V DC and the mains
voltage
Note: under no circumstances must the main contactor
-K1 and the precharging contactor -K2 be connected in
this phase; therefore, check the unit before connecting
the mains voltage.
After checking the cabling for correct connection and
secure attachment, connect the mains voltage or the
auxiliary power supply. After the electronics power
supply has been started, the unit initializes itself. The
action can take several seconds. The drive status is
subsequently shown on the PMU.
If necessary, carry out
parameter reset to
factory setting
If the PMU does not show status °009 after completion
of the unit initialization, or if the unit has already been
See section
parameterized before, you should carry out a parameter "Parameterization"
reset to factory setting.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
See chapter
entitled "Basic
function check"
3-1
Initial start-up
10.99
WARNING
Carry out the basic
function check
It must be ensured that no danger for
persons and equipment can occur by
energizing the power and the unit.
You are advised to only connect the
invertors after completing the basic
function checks of the AFE rectifier/
regenerative feedback unit.
Further start-up and parameterization according to
your specific requirements
3-2
See chapter
entitled "Basic
function check"
siehe "Ans
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
4
Transport
Storage
Transport, Storage, Unpacking
Transport, Storage, Unpacking
The units and components are packed in the manufacturing plant
corresponding to that specified when ordered. A packing label is
located on the outside of the packaging. Please observe the
instructions on the packaging for transport, storage and professional
handling.
Vibrations and jolts must be avoided during transport. If the unit is
damaged, you must inform your shipping company immediately.
The units and components must be stored in clean, dry rooms.
Temperatures between -25 °C (-13 °F) and +70 °C (158 °F) are
permissible. Temperature fluctuations must not be more than 30 K per
hour.
NOTE
If the storage period of one year is exceeded, the unit must be newly
formed.
Unpacking
The packaging comprises board and corrugated paper. It can be
disposed of corresponding to the appropriate local regulations for the
disposal of board products. The units and components can be installed
and commissioned after they have been unpacked and checked to
ensure that everything is complete and that they are not damaged.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
4-1
Transport, Storage, Unpacking
10.99
FKBL = cable harness
Options
-F21...F22
-T10
FKBL1
~
-G10
-F11...F12
U3AC mains
~
-X1
U1/L1
V1/L2
W1/L3
FKBL2
=
CUSA control / control unit
4
FKBL3
VSB
6
6
-F41
-Q1
C/L+
-R1...R3
-K4
-F1...F3
-K1
UDC
-L1
-F42
-L2
-K7
D/L−
-R7...R9
-C4...C5
AFE mains connection module
AFE choke
AFE inverter
AFE rectifier/regenerative feedback unit (chassis type)
Scope of delivery
♦ AFE mains connection module with
• FKBL1 – cable harness 1:
Internal connection, to be laid by the customer,
(2.5 m long) from the control transformer -T10 to the fan supply
AFE inverter 230 V
Internal terminals: -X40 1/5 to -X18 1/5
• FKBL2 – cable harness 2:
Internal connection, to be laid by the customer,
(max. length 2.5 m, with extension cable harness,
Control line from -K4 and 24 V power supply -G10
to AFE inverter -X9 4/5 1/2
Terminal: X9 4/5 (contact -K4)
Terminal: X9 1/2 +24 V /electronic ground
• AFE choke
Power wiring to be laid by the customer
Cable harness is not included in the scope of delivery
See power connections for details of the cross section
♦ AFE inverter with
• FKBL3 - cable harness 3:
Internal connection, to be laid by the customer (2.5 m long)
Signal cable from VSB to the CUSA control module
♦ Operating instructions
6SE708_-_CX86-2AA0: only included in the scope of delivery if
ordered separately.
♦ Options
Board electronic box, e.g. PROFIBUS
4-2
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Installation
5
Installation
5.1
Installing the units
WARNING
Safe converter operation requires that the equipment is mounted and
commissioned by qualified personnel taking into account the warning
information provided in these Operating Instructions.
The general and domestic installation and safety regulations for work
on electrical power equipment (e.g. VDE) must be observed as well as
the professional handling of tools and the use of personal protective
equipment.
Death, severe bodily injury or significant material damage could result if
these instructions are not followed.
Clearances
When placing the AFE inverter, make sure that the DC link connection
is on the upper side of the unit and the AFE choke connection is on the
bottom side of the unit.
The mains connection module may only be installed vertically, not
overhead.
When mounting in switch cabinets, you must leave a clearance at the
top and the bottom of the units for cooling.
The minimum clearances for cooling the built-in units must be
observed.
Please refer to the dimension drawings on the following pages for
details of these minimum clearances.
When mounting in switch cabinets, the cabinet cooling must be
dimensioned according to the dissipated power. Please refer to the
Technical Data in this regard.
Requirements at the
point of installation
♦ Foreign particles
The units must be protected against the ingress of foreign particles
as otherwise their function and operational safety cannot be
ensured.
♦ Dust, gases, vapors
Equipment rooms must be dry and dust-free. Ambient and cooling
air must not contain any electrically conductive gases, vapors and
dusts which could diminish the functionality. If necessary, filters
should be used or other corrective measures taken.
♦ Ambient climate
The built-in units must only be operated in an ambient climate
conforming to DIN IEC 721-3-3 Class 3K3. For cooling air
temperatures of more than 40°C (104°F) and installation altitudes
higher than 1000 m, derating is required.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
5-1
Installation
10.99
Cabinet ventilation
Notes on cabinet
installation (air
cooling)
5.2
The cabinet ventilation must be designed according to the dissipated
power.
Refer to the chapter entitled "Technical data" in the AFE inverter
operating instructions and the description of the mains connection
module.
Minimum clearances
350 mm
Mounting surface
Cooling air
Type
E, F G
Clearances 400 320
[mm]
Fig. 5-1
Minimum clearances for cooling air requirement (types E, F, G)
The following are required for mounting:
♦ Dimension drawing for the relevant construction type
♦ M8 or M10 screws, refer to dimension drawing for the quantity
5-2
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Installation
Cutouts for
M8 screw
h
H
Mounting surface
DimenType
sions
F
G
[mm] E
a
45
45 119
c
b
c
a
350
b
a
B
Side view
Fig. 5-2
180 270
10
10
270
25
508
B
270 360
H
1050 1050 1450
h
1025 1025 1375
Front view
Dimension drawing: AFE inverter, types E, F and G
max. width
1280 mm
1310 mm
d
Mounting surface
Cutouts for
M8 screws
DimenType
sions
F
G
[mm] E
a
33 28,8 28,75
15 mm
a
T
b
a
b
d
173 382,4 444,5
29
B
239 440
502
T
408 440
459
max. width
274 440 580,4
B
Side view
Fig. 5-3
Front view
Dimension drawings of the main connection modules
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
5-3
Installation
10.99
a1
a1
a2
d2
h3
h1
d2
h2
d1
d1
n1
n2
l
b
Fig. 5-4
Dimension drawings of the AFE chokes
Type
[kW]
Voltage
[V]
l
[mm]
b
[mm]
n1
[mm]
n2
[mm]
h1
[mm]
h2
[mm]
h3
[mm]
a1
[mm]
a2
[mm]
d1
d2
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
460
460
460
460
460
460
460
460
575
575
575
575
575
575
575
575
690
690
690
690
690
690
690
300
355
355
355
420
420
480
480
300
300
355
355
355
420
420
480
355
355
355
420
420
480
480
177
178
193
193
212
212
274
274
177
177
178
193
193
212
212
274
178
193
193
212
212
274
274
240
264
264
264
316
316
400
400
240
240
264
264
264
316
316
400
264
264
264
316
316
400
400
145
140
155
155
170
170
220
220
145
145
140
155
155
170
170
220
140
155
155
170
170
220
220
267
340
335
355
384
384
380
380
267
267
332
332
332
384
384
380
332
330
335
384
384
380
380
62
82
78
78
87
87
95
95
62
62
78
78
78
87
87
95
78
78
78
87
87
95
95
166
190
195
195
228
228
200
200
166
166
190
195
195
228
228
200
190
195
195
228
228
200
200
100
120
120
120
140
140
160
160
100
100
120
120
120
140
140
160
120
120
120
140
140
160
160
106
106
136
139
153
153
185
185
106
106
110
136
139
153
153
185
110
136
139
153
153
185
185
M10
M10
M10
M10
M10
M10
M12
M12
M10
M10
M10
M10
M10
M10
M10
M12
M10
M10
M10
M10
M10
M12
M12
M8
M8
M8
M8
M12
M12
M12
M12
M8
M8
M8
M8
M12
M12
M12
M12
M8
M8
M12
M12
M12
M12
M12
Table 5-1
Connection dimensions of the chokes
Copper straps for current connection:
♦ Strap 20 mm x 3 mm:
♦ Strap 30 mm x 5 mm:
♦ Strap 40 mm x 6 mm:
5-4
up to 55 kW
75 kW and 90 kW
from 110 kW
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Partition measures
Installation
Door/roof openings
An underpressure is created in the openings of the cabinet doors due to
the flow of air. This is dependent on the volumetric flow and the
hydraulic cross-section of the openings.
The flow causes a build-up (over) pressure in the roof or in the top
cover.
As a result of the difference in pressure between the overpressure at
the top and the underpressure at the bottom of the cabinet, a flow of air
is created inside the unit, a so-called arcing short-circuit. This can be
stronger or weaker depending on the volumetric flow and the door/roof
opening cross-section.
As a result of the flow inside the unit, air which is already pre-heated
enters the heat sinks which causes an excessively high component
temperature rise. In addition, a different, more unfavourable operating
point is set for the fan.
If the units are operated with an arcing short-circuit, this will result in the
failure of the units or in their destruction!
An arcing short-circuit must be prevented by the provision of
partitions.
The switch cabinets adjacent to the inverter cabinets must also be
taken into consideration in this case.
Partitions should be executed up to the cabinet frame and should be
designed in such a way that the discharged air flow is taken around the
cabinet beams and not pressed into them.
Partitions are necessary with all types of protection higher than IP20.
Opening cross
sections
The necessary opening cross sections are 0.26 m2.
The indicated opening cross-section is made up of several holes. In
order to keep the pressure loss here to a minimum, the cross-sectional
surface has to be at least 280 mm2 per hole (e.g. 7 mm x 40 mm).
The opening and hole cross-sections ensure functioning even with high
types of protection.
These are implemented by using wire-lattices (wire fabric DIN 4189St-vzk-1x0.28) in front of the openings or the filters indicated in the
following. If finer filters are used, the filter surface and thus the opening
cross-section (upwards) have to be adapted accordingly.
If filters are used, the intervals for their replacement must be
observed!
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
5-5
Installation
10.99
Filters
The following filter mat is approved for use:
FIBROIDELASTOV made by DELBAG-Luftfilter GMBH
Technical filter data in accordance with DIN 24185:
Design
FIBROID ELASTOV 10
Filter class
EU 2
Volumetric flow V
(m3/h) x m2
2500 - 10000
Initial pressure difference ∆pA
Pa
9 - 46
End pressure difference ∆pE
Average degree of separation
Pa
300
%
72
Dust storage capability
g/m 2
Fire behaviour (DIN 53438)
F1/K1
Heat resistance max.
°C
80
Humidity resistance (rel. humidity)
%
100
Dimensions:
Order No.:
1000 x 1500 x 10 mm
16 065 81
Initial pressure difference ∆pA [Pa]
Manufacturer:
DELBAG-Luftfilter GMBH
Holzhauser Strasse 159
D-13509 Berlin 27
Telephone: (030) 4381-0
Fax:
(030) 4381-222
100
80
60
40
20
0
0
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
Volumetric flow V [(m³/h) x m²]
Fig. 5-5
5-6
Data sheet of the filter mat
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Water cooling
Installation
The units with water cooling (MLFB Annex: -1AC0) are suitable for
installing in an enclosed cabinet (IP54). The mains filter connection
module is identical for water and air cooling. The components not
mounted on the heat sink, such as the electronics and the DC link
capacitors are cooled by heat transfer at the heat sink fins. To enable
this heat transfer to take place, air circulation inside the unit is
necessary.
Therefore, when installing the chassis unit in a cabinet, you must make
sure that the air being discharged from the fan can flow into the inside
of the chassis. The partitions to be provided in units with air cooling
are a disturbing factor in this case! They should not be mounted.
For an application in the types of protection > IP40, a distance of at
least 90 mm must be observed between the top of the units and the top
of the cabinet.
The units do not require external cooling air.
Additional losses cannot be dissipated!
Built-in components
in the roof section
1-inch internal threads are envisaged for the water connection. The
connecting nipples should be made of stainless steel or thick-walled
aluminium. Ideally, the connection should have flat seals. If the
connecting pieces enclosed with the units are used, these should be
sealed with Loctite 542 or with teflon tape.
Cooling water infeed (blue) and return (red) must be connected
according to the color scheme! The color markings can be found next to
the 1-inch water connection below the heat sink.
If components are built into a cabinet roof section (DC bus, DC 24 V
supply), these should be placed in the center if possible so that the air
leaving the fans can reach the openings in the roof cover unobstructed.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
5-7
10.99
6
Installation in Conformance with EMC Regulations
Installation in Conformance with EMC
Regulations
The following contains a summary of general information and
guidelines which will make it easier for you to comply with EMC and CE
regulations.
♦ Pay attention to a good conductive connection between the housing
of the mains connection module and the AFE inverters and the
mounting surface. The use of mounting surfaces with good
conducting properties (e.g. galvanized steel plate) is recommended.
If the mounting surface is insulated (e.g. by paint), use contact
washers or serrated washers.
♦ All of the metal cabinet parts must be connected through the largest
possible surface area and must provide good conductivity.
If necessary, use contact washers or serrated washers.
♦ Connect the cabinet doors to the cabinet frame using grounding
strips which must be kept as short as possible.
♦ All signal cables must be shielded. Separate the signal cables
according to signal groups.
Do not route cables with digital signals unshielded next to cables
with analog signals. If you use a common signal cable for both, the
individual signals must be shielded from each other.
♦ Power cables must be routed separately away from signal cables
(at least 20 cm apart). Provide partitions between signal cables and
power cables. The partitions must be grounded.
♦ Connect the reserve cables/conductors to ground at both ends to
achieve an additional shielding effect.
♦ Lay the cables close to grounded plates as this will reduce the
injection of undesired signals.
♦ Use cables with braided shields. Cables with foil shields have a
shielding effect which is worse by a factor of five.
♦ Contactor operating coils that are connected to the same supply
network as the inverter or that are located in close proximity of the
inverter must be connected to overvoltage limiters (e.g. RC circuits,
varistors).
You will find further information in the brochure "Installation Instructions
for EMC-correct Installation of Drives"
(Order No.: 6SE7087-6CX87-8CE0).
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
6-1
10.99
7
WARNING
Connecting-up and wiring
Connecting-up and wiring
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES converters are operated at high
voltages.
The equipment must always be disconnected from the supply before
any work is carried out!
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to work on this equipment!
Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in death, severe
personal injury or substantial property damage.
Owing to the DC link capacitors, the equipment may remain at a
hazardous voltage for up to 5 minutes after disconnection of the power
supply. For this reason, wait for at least 5 minutes before commencing
work on the converter or DC link terminals.
Voltage may be present at the power and control terminals even when
the motor is stopped.
When working on the open converter, remember that live parts are
exposed.
The user is responsible for ensuring that all equipment is installed and
connected up in accordance with the approved codes of practice of the
country concerned and any other regional or local codes that may
apply. Special attention must be paid to proper conductor sizing, fusing,
grounding, isolation and disconnection measures and to overcurrent
protection.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-1
Connecting-up and wiring
10.99
7.1
Connection overviews
7.1.1
Mains connection modules
AFE choke connection
-A1
L1
-L1
-A52
-C4
-K4
-K7
-R1 - 3
-R7 - 9
-X19
C4, K7, R7 ... R9
Clean Power filter
Precharging
R1 ... R3, K4
-K1
VSB
-G10 -X20
-K10
-X50
-X40
-X40
-F21/F22
-T10
-F21, F22
-X50
-X30
Option: EMC filter
-Z1
-F11/F12
-X30
-F11, F12
-F1 -F2 -F3
-Q1
-X1
-F1 ... F3
U1/L1 V1/L2 W1/L3
-Q1
-Z1
Front view
Mains connection
Fig. 7-1
7-2
Connection overview: AFE mains connection module, design E
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Connecting-up and wiring
AFE choke connection
-A1
A1
-A52
-C4 - C5
-K4
-K7
-R1 - 3
-R7 - 9
-X19
-L1
-K1
L1
C4...C5, K7, R7 ... R9
Clean Power filter
Precharging
R1 ... R3, K4
-K10
-F11/F12 -F21/F22
-X30
-X40
-X50
VSB
-X30
-F11, F12
-X20
-T10
-X40
-F21, F22
-X50
-Z1
-G10
-F1 -F2 -F3
-Q1
-X1
Option: EMC filter
-Z1
U1/L1 V1/L2 W1/L3
-F1 ... F3
-Q1
Front view
Mains connection
Fig. 7-2
Connection overview: AFE mains connection module, design F
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-3
Connecting-up and wiring
10.99
AFE choke connection
-A1
-A52
-C4 - 5
-K4
-K7
-R1 - 3
-R7 - 9
-X19
-L1
-K10
-X40
VSB
C4...C5, K7, R7...R9
Clean Power filter
Precharging
R1 ... R3, K4
-K1
-X30
L1
-F21/F22
-X50
-X30
-F11, F12
-F11/F12
-T10
-X20
-X40
-F21, F22
-X50
-G10
-Z1
-F2 -F3
-F1
-Q1
-X1 U1/L1
Option:
EMC filter
-Z1
V1/L2
-F1 ... F3
W1/L3
-Q1
Mains connection
Fig. 7-3
7-4
Connection overview: AFE mains connection module, design G
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
7.1.2
Connecting-up and wiring
AFE Inverter
PE1 / GND
DC link
connection
Aux. contactor, external
DC24 V supply X9
Fan supply X18:1/5
PMU
X300
X108
CUSA
X100
X101
X102
Mounting position 3
Mounting position 2
Shield connection
for control cables
AFE choke connection
PE2 / GND
Fig. 7-4
Connection overview: AFE inverter, designs E and F
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-5
Connecting-up and wiring
10.99
DC link
connection
PE1 / GND
PMU
X300
X108
CUSA
X100
X101
X102
Aux. contactor, external
DC24 V supply X9
Mounting position 3
Mounting position 2
Fan supply X18:1/5
Shield connection
for control cables
AFE choke connection
PE2 / GND
Fig. 7-5
7-6
Connection overview: AFE inverter design G
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Connecting-up and wiring
Connection overview of the AFE rectifier/regenerative feedback
unit
Output: -G10
Prewired in the standard
24 V DC
Input:
version.
-X30 Control transf. -T10
1-2 1L1
3 PE AC 380...690 V
7
4-5 1L2
Mains conn. module
7-8 1L3
with Clean Power filter
Mains acquisition VSB,
Prewired in the standard
Output:
Auxiliary power supply
version.
-X40 Control transf. -T10 230 V / 24 V
230 V AC from -T10
230 V AC 50/60 Hz
1-2 LH1
5-6 LH2
6
to -F21, F22
11-12-13 LH1
15-16-17 LH2
Check-back
-X50 Main switch -Q1
-Q1
2
3
1
1
8
5
AFE inverter
with CUSA control
cable
harness 1
Control
-X9 1,2 24 V
4.5 precharging
4 line
cable
harness 2
Signal cable
6
screened
12 cable
harness 3 -X18
1/5
Fan
CU
Control
connections
CUSA
X100: SST2
X101: Bin.input
X102:Bin.output
A-output
Main contactor -K1
-L1
13
-K1
12
13
4
230 V AC power supply
10
-X9
-X20
1-2 P24
5-6 M24
-X40
Prewired in the standard
version.
VSB
7.1.3
11
11
AFE choke
UAC
PE connection
Contact directly
via mounting
face
3
U1/L1 V1/L2 W1/L3
-X1
Mains connection
Directly on the main switch -Q1
3 AC 50 / 60 Hz
UDC
C/L + D/L DC link connection
Connection tabs C, D top
2
1
Fig. 7-6
External connections:
Mains connection:
1
See power connections for
cross-section
Screw dimensions:
Design
E
F
Screw
M6
M10
3
5
Connection overview: AFE rectifier/regenerative feedback unit
2
G
M10
PE connection:
see Installation in Conformance with
EMC Regulations
-X50:
Main switch check-back signal
Main contactor check-back signal
4
6
7
8
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
DC link connection:
See power connections for
cross-section
Screw dimensions:
Design
E
F
Screw
M10
M10
CUSA control connections:
see Control Connections
G
M12
Auxiliary power supply connections
already wired
in the standard versions
7-7
Connecting-up and wiring
10.99
Internal connection wiring for on-site assembly
AFE inverter fan supply:
10
2-pole cable harness FKBL1 (2.5 m long) from -X40 1/5 -> -X18 1/5
24 V power supply and precharging contacter control:
11
4-pole cable harness FKBL2 with connector -X9 (connector type Phönix 2.5 mm 2), 0.5 m
long
If the length is not sufficient, the included extension cable (2.5 m) can be used.
Signal connection of mains connection module and AFE inverter:
12
6-pole screened signal cable (2.5 m) with connectors -X102, -X101, -X100
(connector type Phönix 1.5 mm2)
Fit the screen on both ends!
Power wiring of AFE choke -L2:
13
See power connectons for the cross-section
Screws:
Design:
E
F
G
Choke -L1:
M10
M10
M12
AFE choke -L2:
M8
M8
M12
AFE inverter -G1:
M10
M10
M12
Connection sketch:
-L1
-L2
1U1
1U2
1U1
1V1
1V2
1V1
1W
1
1W
2
1W
1
AFE mains connect. module AFE choke
Connection to mains-end choke
Clean Power filter
7-8
-X2
U2 /
T1
V2 / T2
W2 /
T3
AFE inv.
Connection to
AFE inverter
output
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
7.2
Connecting-up and wiring
Power connections
NOTE
The connection cross-sections are determined for copper cables at
40 °C (104 °F) ambient temperature (according to DIN VDE 0298 Part
4 / 02.88 Group 5).
Supply terminals
The supply terminals are marked as follows:
Mains connections: -X1
U1 / L1
V1 / L2
DC link connection AFE-inverter:
C / L+
D / L-
PE1
PE2
PE connection:
directly via mounting surface and/or via
7.2.1
AFE rectifier/regenerative feedback unit
Mains voltage 380 V to 460 V
Order number for AFE
rectifier/regenerative feedback
unit
Mains connection module
Position 1
6SE71...
W1 / L3
Output end DC
Mains connection
to main switch-Q1
in the mains
DC link connection
connection 3 ph. AC mains
module
Rated output
Cross
end
current
section
Cross section
VDE
AWG
VDE AWG
[A]
[mm²]
MCM
[A]
[mm²] MCM
Type
Rated input
current
AFE- inverter
Position 2
6SE70...
31-0EE83-2NA0
31-0EE80
45 kW / 400 V
92
1x35
1x0
105
1x50
1x00
31-2EF83-2NA0
31-2EF80
55 kW / 400 V
124
1x50
1x00
140
1x70
1x000
31-5EF83-2NA0
31-5EF80
75 kW / 400 V
146
1x70
1x000
165
2x50
2x00
31-8EF83-2NA0
31-8EF80
90 kW / 400 V
186
2x50
2x00
215
2x50
2x00
32-1EG83-2NA0
32-1EG80
110 kW / 400 V
210
2x50
2x00
240
2x70
2x000
32-6EG83-2NA0
32-6EG80
132 kW / 400 V
260
2x70
2x000
300
2x95
2x4/0
33-2EG83-2NA0
33-2EG80
160 kW / 400 V
315
2x95
2x4/0
360
2x120 2x300
33-7EG83-2NA0
33-7EG80
200 kW / 400 V
370
2x120
2x300
425
2x120 2x300
Mains voltage 500 V to 575 V
26-1FE83-2NA0
26-1FE80
37 kW / 500 V
61
1x25
1x2
66
1x35
26-6FE83-2NA0
26-6FE80
45 kW / 500 V
66
1x25
1x2
75
1x35
1x0
28-0FF83-2NA0
28-0FF80
55 kW / 500 V
79
1x35
1x0
90
1x50
1x00
31-1FF83-2NA0
31-1FF80
75 kW / 500 V
108
1x50
1x00
120
1x50
1x00
31-3FG83-2NA0
31-3FG80
90 kW / 500 V
128
1x50
1x00
145
1x70
1x000
31-6FG83-2NA0
31-6FG80
110 kW / 500 V
156
1x95
1x4/0
175
2x50
2x00
32-0FG83-2NA0
32-0FG80
132 kW / 500 V
192
2x50
2x00
220
2x70
2x000
32-3FG83-2NA0
32-3FG80
160 kW / 500 V
225
2x50
2x00
250
2x70
2x000
1x0
Mains voltage 660 V to 690 V
26-0HF83-2NA0
26-0HF80
55 kW / 690 V
60
1x25
1x2
66
1x25
1x2
28-2HF83-2NA0
28-2HF80
75 kW / 690 V
82
1x35
1x0
90
1x50
1x00
31-0HG83-2NA0
31-0HG80
90 kW / 690 V
97
1x50
1x00
105
1x70
1x000
31-2HG83-2NA0
31-2HG80
110 kW / 690 V
118
1x50
1x00
130
2x35
2x0
31-5HG83-2NA0
31-5HG80
132 kW / 690 V
145
1x70
1x000
160
2x50
2x00
31-7HG83-2NA0
31-7HG80
160 kW / 690 V
171
1x95
1x4/0
190
2x50
2x00
32-1HG83-2NA0
32-1HG80
200 kW / 690 V
208
2x50
2x00
230
2x70
2x000
Table 7-1
Conductor cross-sections: AFE rectifier/regenerative feedback unit
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-9
Connecting-up and wiring
7.2.2
10.99
AFE choke
AFE choke
Type [kW]
Rated current
[A]
Connection crosssection
Securing
screw
VDE
[mm²]
AWG
MCM
[∅]
1x0
M8
Mains voltage 380 V to 460 V
45
92
1x35
55
124
1x50
2x00
M8
75
146
1x70
2x000
M8
90
186
2x50
2x00
M8
110
210
2x50
2x00
M12
132
260
2x70
2x000
M12
160
315
2x95
2x4/0
M12
200
370
2x120
2x300
M12
Mains voltage 500 V to 575 V
37
61
1x25
1x2
M8
45
66
1x25
1x2
M8
55
79
1x35
1x0
M8
75
108
1x50
1x00
M8
90
128
1x50
1x00
M12
110
156
1x95
1x4/0
M12
132
192
2x50
2x00
M12
160
225
2x50
2x00
M12
M8
Mains voltage 660 V to 690 V
55
60
1x25
1x2
75
82
1x35
1x0
M8
90
97
1x50
1x00
M12
110
118
1x50
1x00
M12
132
145
1x70
1x000
M12
160
171
1x95
1x4/0
M12
200
208
2x50
2x00
M12
Table 7-2
7-10
Conductor cross-sections: AFE chokes
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Connecting-up and wiring
7.2.3
Auxiliary power supply, precharging
X9 - external
DC 24 V supply,
precharging
contactor control
The 5-pole terminal strip is used for connecting up a 24 V voltage
supply and for connecting a precharging contactor.
The connections for the contactor control are floating.
The position of the terminal strip can be seen from the connection
overviews.
Terminal
5
4
3
2
1
Designation
Meaning
Range
5
Precharge contr. Precharging contactor control
AC 230 V
4
Precharge contr. Precharging contactor control
1 kVA
3
n.c.
Not connected
2
0V
Reference potential
0V
1
+24 V (in)
24 V voltage supply
DC24 V ≤ 3,5 A
Connectable cross-section: 2,5 mm² (AWG 12)
Table 7-3
Fan supply
7.2.4
See section "Connection overviews"
A 2-pole cable harness is included, which is connected to one end of
the mains connection module -X40 and which is reeled up by
approximately 2.50 m. This cable (cross-section 2 x 1.5 mm 2) must be
connected to the AFE inverter -X18 1/5 (screwed connection).
Maximum cross-sections
Possible connection
cross-sections,
screw connection
7.2.5
Connection of external DC 24 V aux. voltage supply and precharging
contactor control
Type
Order number
Max. connection crosssections
mm² to VDE
AWG
Screw
connection
E
6SE703_-__E_0
2 x 70
2 x 00
M10
F
6SE703_-__F_0
2 x 70
2 x 00
M10
G
6SE703_-__G_0
2 x 150
2 x 300
M12
Protective conductor connection
In the case of the mains connection module, directly via the mounting
surface.
In the case of the AFE inverter, PE1 and PE2 need not be connected if
contact via the mounting surface is insured.
NOTE
Attention must be paid to ensuring that earthing of the mains
connection module and of the AFE inverter is at the same potential and,
if necessary, equipotential bonding must be provided for.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-11
Connecting-up and wiring
10.99
7.3
Control terminals
7.3.1
Mains connection module
No external control connections except:
- Main switch check-back signal
- Main contacter check-back signal
cf. chapter entitled "Connection overviews"
7.3.2
Standard connections of the AFE inverter
The basic version of the converter features the following control
terminals on the CUSA board:
♦ Control terminal strips X100, X101 and X102 on CUSA electronics
board
♦ Connection for OP1S operator control panel
♦ One serial interface (USS bus, RS485)
♦ Serial interfaces RS485 and RS232 (SCom1) on PMU X300
CAUTION
The CUSA board contains components which can be destroyed by
electrostatic discharge. These components can be very easily
destroyed if not handled with caution.
See also ESD precautions outlined in Section "Definitions and
warnings".
Connectors for
control terminal
strip
Die Stecker für die Steuerklemmenleiste werden mitgeliefert und sind
am Formkabel FKBL3 bereits vorverdrahtet (siehe Kapitel
"Anschlußschema".
Cables with cross-sections from 0.14 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 (AWG: 26 to
16), or 1 mm2 (AWG: 18) can be connected using stranded wire with
lugs to the connectors (recommended: 0.5 mm 2 (AWG: 20)). The
connectors can be identified by the pin numbers (Table 7-4), connector
positions on the board are shown in Fig. 7-7.
Two screen clamps and four cable ties are required from the loose
components supplied to connect the control cables.
Connector X9 is needed to control the pre-charging operation and to
connect an external power supply (see Fig. 7-7).
Connector
Label
X100
eight-pin, coded
1
2
3
CU
6
7
8
X101
eight-pin, coded
13
14
15
CU
18
19
20
X102
ten-pin
25
26
27
28
CU
31
32
33
34
Table 7-4
7-12
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Connecting-up and wiring
PMU
-X100
-X101
-X102
Fig. 7-7
View of CUSA
X100
RS485P
1
Reference potential
RS485
Pre-assigned
for converter
Control of
main contactor
2
Microcontroller
A
Slot E
B
3
C
4
D
Slot G
PMU
5
serial
interface 1
USS
RS232
RS485
6
7
8
X101
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RS485N
RS232 TxD
P5V
13
P24
14
M
15
M
16
24V
Digital
inputs:
17
I ≤ 12 mA
18
24V
5V
In
5V
In
5V
19
24V
20
24V
5V
In
5V
In
X102
Pre-assigned
for special
applications
25
Pre-assigned
for converter:
Voltage sensing
27
Digital output 3
I ≤ 20 mA
Pre-assigned
for converter:
Voltage sensing
Digital output 4
I ≤ 20 mA
Analog output:
8 bits + sign
I ≤ 5 mA
26
A
≥1
+5V
AUX
AUX
Switch for USS bus terminator
AI 1
D
A
C
D
28
P24
29
Out
30
AI 2
D
31
A
P24
32
33
Out
AO
D
34
A
Fig. 7-8
B
In
24V
Pre-assigned
for converter:
24 V monitoring
X300
RS485P
RS232 RxD
n.c.
Serial interface 2
USS (RS485)
non-floating
RS485N
0...+10 V
list
View of standard terminals
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-13
Connecting-up and wiring
7.4
NOTE
10.99
Connecting up control cables
Generally, control lines that are connected to the AFE inverter must be
shielded to achieve maximum possible interference immunity. The
shield must be grounded at both ends.
To avoid noise coupling, control wires which are directly connected to
the chassis should be separated from power wiring by a minimum
distance of 20 cm.
Control and power cables must cross each other at an angle of 90°.
7.5
X100 control
terminal strip
Terminal assignments
The terminals on the control terminal strip are as follows:
Terminal
Name
Function
1
Transmit and receive line -RS485, differential input
/ output, positive (RS485/T+)
2
Transmit and receive line -RS485, differential input
/ output, negative (RS485/T-)
3
Transmit output RS485 Standard,
differential output, positive (RS485T+)
4
Transmit output RS485 Standard,
differential output, negative (RS485T-)
5 *)
M RS485
Reference potential RS485
6
Digital output 2, (changeover) reference contact
7
Digital output 2, (changeover) NO contact
8 **)
Digital output 2, (changeover) NC contact
Possible cross-section: 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)
In the assembled state, terminal 1 is at the top.
*)
An identical interface to the type on connector -X100 is available on connector -X300
on the parameterizing unit. Only one of these two interfaces may be used, see
Section "Interfaces".
Digital output 1 is available on -X9:4,5
**) Load capability of digital outputs:
AC 60 V, 60 VA, cos ϕ = 1
AC 60 V, 16 VA, cos ϕ = 0,4
DC 60 V, 24 W
Inductive loads, e.g. contactors, relays, for DC voltage loads, must be damped using a
diode or varistor, and for AC loads, with a varistor or RC element.
Table 7-5
7-14
Control terminal strip X100
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
X101 control
terminal strip
Connecting-up and wiring
The terminals on the control terminal strip are as follows:
Terminal
Name
Function
Range
13
P24 AUX
Aux. voltage supply
DC 24 V / 150 mA
14
M24 AUX
Reference potential
0V
15
Reference potential for
digital inputs 1 to 5 with
ext. signal voltage
16
Digital input 1
Signal sensitivity of
digital inputs:
17
Digital input 2
•
H = 24 V
(13 V to 33 V)
18
Digital input 3
•
Imax = 15.7 mA
19 *)
Digital input 4
•
L=0V
(− 0.6 V to 3 V)
20
Digital input 5
Possible cross-section: 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)
In the assembled state, terminal 1 is at the top.
*)
Must be used to monitor the ext. 24 V supply P576.1 = 1004;
P576.2 = 1004).
Table 7-6
Control terminal strip X101
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-15
Connecting-up and wiring
X102 -control
terminal strip
10.99
The terminals on the control terminal strip are as follows:
Terminal
Name
Function
Range
25
Cannot be
used
Analog input 3
0 V to 5 V
26
Cannot be
used
Analog input 4
0 V to 5 V
27
Assigned
Analog input 1
0 V to ± 10 V
28
Assigned
Reference potential for
analog inputs 1, 3
29
Digital output 3
Imax = 20 mA
0 V to ± 10 V
30
Assigned
Analog input 2
31
Assigned
Reference potential for
analog inputs 2, 4
32
Digital output 4
33 *)
Reference potential for
analog output 1,
digital output 3,
digital output 4
34 *)
Analog output 1
Imax = 20 mA
0 V to 10 V
Rating
≤ 5 mA equals > 2 kΩ
Possible cross-section: 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)
*)
NOTE:
To increase the noise immunity of the signals, an isolating amplifier should be
connected between the analog output and measuring unit for cables > 4 m.
Table 7-7
7-16
Control terminal strip X102
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Connecting-up and wiring
X300 serial interface
5
9
A serial connection to an automation unit or PC can be made via
connector X300 on the PMU. The unit can therefore be controlled and
operated from the central control station or control room.
Pin
Name
Function
1
n.c.
Not assigned
2
RS232 RxD
Receive data via RS232
RS232
3
RS485 P
Data via RS485
RS485
4
RTS
Request to send, for direction
reversal with interface converters
5
M5V
Reference potential for P5V
0V
1
6
Range
6
P5V
5 V aux. voltage supply
+5 V, Imax = 200 mA
7
RS232 TxD
Transmit data via RS232
RS232
8
RS485 N
Data via RS485
RS485
9
Table 7-8
Reference potential for RS232 or
RS485 interface
(with RF suppression for EMC)
Serial interface X300
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-17
Connecting-up and wiring
7.6
Digital inputs
10.99
Digital inputs/outputs
Four parameterizable digital inputs (24 V) are available on the
control terminal strip (-X101) of the CUSA board. These inputs can be
used to input commands, external faults/alarms and for returning status
data to the AFE inverter’s control word.
Connection:
See Section "Connecting up control cables".
Parameterization: See Section "Control and status words".
Factory setting (valid for standby operation):
Digital
Command
input
HIGH
Control
LOW
word bit
1
ON
OFF1
0
P554.2 = 1001
(standby)
2
ON
OFF2 (electrical)
1
P555.2 = 1002
(standby)
7
P565.2 = 1003
(standby)
30
P590 = 1005
3
Acknowledge
5
Table 7-9
Digital outputs
Basic setting
Digital inputs
Connector
Pin
HIGH
Signal
LOW
Status
word bit
Parameter
3
-X102
29
Fault
3
603.1
= 1003
4
-X102
32
Operation
2
602.1
= 1004
Table 7-10
7-18
Standby setting
Digital outputs 1 and 2 on the AFE inverter are pre-wired for the
precharging and main contactors. For safety reasons, they cannot be
wired up for other purposes.
Two further digital outputs are available for optional functions.
Factory setting:
Digital
output
NOTE
Parameter
Digital outputs
Faults, alarms and starting lockout (HIGH active) are displayed as
LOW active via the terminal strip (digital outputs). See Section
"Status word".
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Basic converter
interface SCom1
Connecting-up and wiring
The USS protocol (universal serial interface) is implemented on the
basic converter interface SCom1.
The following documentation is available depending on the particular
application of the SCom1 basic converter interface:
♦ Connection of a PC / PG with SIMOVIS software for startup/servicing/operation:
The documentation is provided on SIMOVIS floppy disks in files
BEDANLTG.TXT (ASCII format) and BEDANLTG.WRI (WRITE
format).
♦ Connection of higher-level PLCs with USS protocol:
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Application of serial interfaces with USS protocol
Order No.: 6SE7087-6CX87-4KB0
Additional general comments regarding connection and
parameterization:
Connection: See Section "Control terminals"
NOTE
A communication link can be made either via the terminal strip on the
CU -X100 (RS485 Standard) or the interface connection on the PMU
-X300 (9-pin SUB D connector / RS232 or RS485 (V24)).
Only one of the above possible connections may be used!
A four-wire connection can be implemented when the SCom2 is
connected via the terminal strip (-X100) on the CUSA board.
Switchover between two-wire and four-wire connection is automatic.
NOTE
The bus terminations (150 Ω in total) must be set for the last bus station
(slave). For positioning of jumpers on S1, see Fig. 7-1.
SCom1: Close jumpers S1.1 and S1.2 of DIP-FIX S1 on the CUSA.
Dual-port Ram
(DPR für SCB, TSY,
CB, TB)
The dual-port RAM is the internal interface on the CUSA (-X107) for
connection of option boards via the LBA (Local Bus Adapter, option) of
the electronics box.
Available option boards:
♦ TSY (Tachometer and Synchronization Board)
♦ TB (Technology Board)
♦ SCB (Serial Communication Board)
♦ CB (Communication Board)
For further information about connecting option boards and
parameterizing the interface, see also the operating instructions for the
relevant boards.
For additional information, see Section "Control and status words".
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-19
10.99
Basic function check
8
Basic function check
WARNING
It imperative to observe the procedure described here for initial
commissioning of the equipment.
Options
-F21...F22
-T10
cable harness 1
~
-G10
-F11...F12
U3AC mains
~
-X1
U1/L1
V1/L2
W1/L3
=
VSB
cable harness 2
4
cable harness 3
6
CUSA control/control section
6
-F41
-Q1
C/L+
-R1...R3
-K4
-F1...F3
-K1
UDC
-L1
-F42
-L2
-K7
-R7...R9
Mains connection
Directly to main
switch -Q1
D/L−
DC link connection
Connection tabs
C, D top
-C4...C5
AFE mains connection module
AFE choke
AFE inverter
AFE rectifier/regenerative feedback unit (chassis unit)
Please check:
Starting point:
1. Main switch-Q1 is open
2. Mains is connected to the main switch-Q1 (-X1 U1/L1
V1/L2 W1/L3), rotating clockwise (L1, L2, L3)
3. Internal wiring is completed;
cable harnesses FKBL 1...3 are firmly seated
4. AFE choke power wiring (cf. section entitled "Connection
schematic")
Check phase assignments:
Connection:
Mains choke -L1 U2 with AFE inverter -X2 U2/T1
V2 with AFE inverter -X2 V2/T2
W2 with AFE inverter -X2 W2/T3
5. DC link connection not yet connected to motor inverter
6. No further control cables are connected, no
communication
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-1
Basic function check
Preliminary check
10.99
♦ Main contactor -K1 and precharging contactor -K4 must be open
♦ Main switch must be open
♦ Mains voltage must be applied to the main switch
♦ Ensure clockwise rotating field
♦ Control panel (PMU) must still be dark
♦ Control transformer -T10 must be wired in accordance with the
following table:
Mains voltage [V]
Lh1
Lh2
380
4
5
400
3
5
415
2
5
440
1
5
460
4
6
480
3
6
500
2
6
525
1
6
550
4
7
575
3
7
600
1
7
630
4
8
660
3
8
690
1
8
♦ Fuses -F11, -F12 and -F21, -F22 must be connected
♦ Internal wiring must be completed.
Activating main
switch -Q1
♦ Control transformer -T10 supplies 230 V AC
• to the fan of the AFE inverter
• to the DC power supply -G10
• to the switching contact for the precharging contactor
X9: 4: 230 V,
X9: 5 coil of contactor -K4
♦ 24 V power supply -G10 supplies to AFE inverter
-X9: 1 (P24) 2:(M24)
♦ On the AFE inverter, the control panel (PMU) lights up, initialisation
has been completed after several seconds and the status message:
0009 = READY FOR ON appears on the PMU.
If the READY FOR ON message does not appear, check all contacts,
fuses and voltages once again and replace CUSA if necessary.
Parameter reset
8-2
P052 = 1
Reset is run
P052 automatically returns to 0.
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Basic function check
Disabling control of
the AFE inverter
P561 = 0
NOTE
If this is not observed, the fuse may blow or the Clean Power filter
may be subjected to increased stress.
Checking actual
value acquisition
and precharging
Issue the ON command via PMU (by default, ON command P554
already set on PMU)
♦ Reaction: Precharging begins with picking up of the contactor -K4,
and the DC link voltage (see display parameter r006)
rises within approximately 1 second to the final value,
approximately 1.35 times the mains voltage. The main
contactor -K1 is connected once the final value has been
reached.
♦ Contacts: cf. section entitled "Control connections"
Main contactor ON command from CUSA X100 terminal
6 (M24)-7 signal from normally-open CUSA binary output
2
This command is forwarded to the mains angle
acquisition circuit
VSB: connector
X3:
terminal 5 signal
X3:
terminal 1 M24
Output to potential-free contact VSB:
X2 terminal 1: Transformer voltage -T10 230 V AC
X2 terminal 3: to coil of main contactor -K1
♦ Reaction: Once the main contactor -K1 has picked up, the
precharging contactor -K4 opens after approx. 500 ms.
♦ Status:
0011 "Ready to Run"
The AFE inverter is now in the "Ready to Run " state and
the following actual values must be correctly displayed:
r032: Mains frequency tolerance ± 2 %
r030: Mains voltage, currently applied
RMS value tolerance ± 2 %
If the fault F004 occurs, check the mains direction of rotation, check
the main contactor’s contacts and check the mains voltage.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-3
Basic function check
Enabling control
10.99
⇒ After successful precharging and actual value check
P561 = 1
♦ Reaction:
The AFE inverter pulse is audibly and evenly
The DC link voltage (r006) goes to the value P071 x
P125, and is stable with slight fluctuations ± approx.
1%.
The current consumption of the AFE inverter (r004)
should be no greater than 20% of the rated current of
the unit (cf. P072).
♦ Fault:
Replace CUSA or VSB in the event of clear deviations
in the current consumption.
The basic function check of the AFE rectifier/regerative feedback
unit has been completed and the unit is operable.
Commissioning can now take place depending on project planning.
8-4
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
9
Explanation of terminology and functionality of the AFE
Explanation of terminology and
functionality of the AFE
Operating modes of ♦ Operating modes are set via P164 "Operating mode"
the AFE
♦ See Section "Function diagrams"
rectifier/regenerative
♦ Applications:
feedback unit
• Supplying the voltage-source DC link of SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES series 6SE70 converters.
• Reactive power compensation
• Regenerative feedback from a DC voltage source to the supply
system
♦ Operating modes:
• Operating mode "cos(phi) control " (P164 = 1, factory setting):
The sinusoidal line current is controlled with an adjustable
cos(phi) (P120). For a cos(phi) of 1, only active power is taken
from or regenerated to the line. A cos(phi) of + 0.8 results in a
distribution of the line current into 80 % active current and 60 %
reactive current (inductive, as cos(phi) is positive). The sign
serves only to distinguish between inductive and capacitive
reactive power. In this mode, therefore, a change in the active
power automatically changes the reactive power. A higher-level
closed-loop DC link voltage controller controls the DC link
voltage to the setpoint (r447). The output of this closed-loop DC
link voltage controller is the setpoint for the active current.
• Operating mode "Reactive power compensation" (P164 = 0):
The reactive power can be input as either capacitive or inductive
(P122) (± 140 % of AFE rated apparent power) and is
independent of the active power. A higher-level DC link voltage
controller controls the DC link voltage to the setpoint (r447). The
output of this DC link voltage controller is the setpoint for the
active current. If the "sum“ (square-root of the sum of the
squares of the absolute values) of the active and reactive power
is greater than the maximum apparent power of the AFE, the
reactive power is limited (= Line current management).
• Operating mode "Current control" (P164 = 2):
The active line current can be externally specified via a setpoint
node (P486). The DC link voltage is not controlled and is given
by an external voltage source (e.g. master Master AFE).
♦ Operating mode: "regenerative partial load" (P164 = 3):
In this operating mode, active power is fed back into the mains as from
Ud > Udset.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-1
Explanation of terminology and functionality of the AFE
Indexed parameters
10.99
These parameters are divided into various "indices" (i001, i002, etc.). A
separate parameter value can be assigned to each index.
The meaning of the "indices" of the relevant parameter (parameter
number) can be found in Section "Parameter List".
Example:
Index 1
P683
i001 = 0 Bus address of serial interface
SCom1 (CU)
Index 2
i002 = 2 Bus address of serial interface
Data sets
on the SCB board
"Indexed" parameters are divided according to data sets (indexed).
♦ GRD/RES (basic or reserve setting):
These data sets make it possible, e.g. to switch from manual to
automatic mode.
♦ RDS (reserve data set) 1 or 2:
Two reserve data sets can be parameterized, e.g. for alternating
operation of different converter types on one AFE.
The data sets are selected via the "control word" and read out in r012
and r152, see Section "Function diagrams".
9-2
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Fig. 10-1
0
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
r126
0
SST1
CB/TB
SCB 1 with SCI (Slave 1)
SCB 1 with SCI (Slave 2)
SCB1/SCB2 (peer-to-peer)
SCB 2 (USS)
P125
Vd(set)
factor
X
2002 to 2016
3002 to 3016
4101 to 4103
4201 to 4203
4501 to 4505
4502 to 4516
0000
1001
X
RES
BAS
Src Vd setpoint Vd setpoint Kp
P443
P444
Kp
2002 to 2016
3002 to 3016
4101 to 4103
4201 to 4203
4501 to 4505
4502 to 4516
0000
RES
BAS
I(reactive,act)
r256
I(active,act)
r264
V(supply)
r030
Θ Phase angle
Src I setpoint I setpoint Kp
P486
P487
Kp
Current transformation
SST1
CB/TB
SCB 1 with SCI (Slave 1)
SCB 1 with SCI (Slave 2)
SCB1/SCB2 (peer-to-peer)
SCB 2 (USS)
Phase current 3
Line filter
pre-control
Line synchronization
2 x r030
2 x P071
r447
r490
Vd(set)
limitation
–
r303
Vd(act)
+
Vd(set)
r139
Ti
PI controller
Kp
In
P072
r004
Output current
Imax(set)
r174
I(active,set)
r263
Vn P071
In P072
Fn P078
Operating mode
Reactive power
cos(phi)
Line filter C
P164
P122
P120
P080
I(reactive,set)
r255
Gating unit
I(reactive,set)
calculation
Control factor
r764
r004
r180
Vd(act) Firing angle limit
Vd correction
and
voltage limiting
I(max,mot)
P160
P161
I(max,gen)
P
i²t calculation
0: Vd control
1: Current control
0
1
P164
P587
r255
I(reactive,set)
Kp Kp dyn Ti
P129.x P130.x P131.x
r263
I(active,set)
Current controller
K
Θ Phase angle
r032 Line frequency
10
Phase current 1
P081
Line filter L
Analog input 2
Vsb
Analog input 1
Vsa
Line frequency
r032
10.99
Function diagrams
Function diagrams
Block diagram of the AFE control
10-1
10-2
Fig. 10-2
Analog output
3
2
1
0
...
...
Content of parameter 001
0
Fig. 10-3
BASIC
RESV
CU-AA gain
P656
Parameters involved:
P120, P121, P122, P124, P129, P130, P131, P160,
P161, P164, P173, P326, P366, P408, P517, P518
Switchover of reserve data set (RDS)
Parameters involved:
P443, P444, P486, P487, P554 to P589
Switchover, basic/reserve setting (Basic/Resv)
Fields which can be switched over
have a shaded background.
...
...
CU-AA act. values
P655
CU-AA offset
P657
#
i.001
i.001
RESV
i.002
1
RDS 2
i.002
BASIC
-10 V
+10 V
RESV
BASIC
r152 Active RDS
0
1
i.001
Src RDS bit 0
Control word bit 18
P578.x
i.002
0
1
0
1
Src basic/reserve
Control word bit 30
P590
values [%]
( Parameter
100 %
Src basic/reserve
Control word bit 30
P590
Smoothing
20 ms
Voff =
x Gain [V]
) + Offset [V]
to the terminal
strip
Function diagrams
10.99
Basic/reserve changeover
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
11
Parameterization
Parameterization
The functions stored in the converters are adjusted to suit specific
applications by means of parameters. Every parameter is uniquely
identified by its name and number. In addition to a parameter name and
number, many parameters also have a parameter index. Using these
indices, it is possible to store several values for a parameter under one
parameter number.
Parameter numbers consist of a letter and a three-digit number. Upper
case letters P, U, H and L are the codes for settable parameters and
lower case letters r, n, d and c the codes for non-settable visualization
parameters.
Examples
DC link voltage r006 = 541
Parameter name:
Parameter number:
Parameter index:
Parameter value:
DC link voltage
r006
No index
541 V
Src ON/OFF1 P554.2 = 20
Parameter name:
Parameter number:
Parameter index:
Parameter value:
Src ON/OFF1
P554
2
20
Parameters can be entered via
♦ the PMU parameterizing unit integrated in the converter front panel,
♦ the control terminal strip of the closed-loop control module CUSA
(see Section "Control terminals"),
♦ easily via the optional OP1S operator panel,
♦ the serial interfaces RS485 and RS232 at -X300 on the PMU or
♦ on a PC with the SIMOVIS service program (Version 5.3 or higher).
The parameters stored in the converters can be altered only under
particular conditions. The following conditions must be fulfilled before
parameter settings can be changed:
♦ The relevant parameter must be a settable parameter (identifiable
by upper case code letters in parameter number).
♦ Parameterization authorization must be set
(P053 = 6 for parameterization via PMU or OP1S).
♦ Changes to parameter settings must be permitted by the current
converter status (initial parameter settings must be set with the
converter switched off).
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
11-1
Parameterization
11.1
10.99
Setting parameters via the PMU
The parameterization unit (PMU) is provided for direct
parameterization, operation and visualization of the converter/inverter.
It is an integral component of basic units and features a four-digit,
seven-segment display and several keys.
Raise key
Seven-segment display for:
Drive statuses
Alarms and
faults
Reversing key
ON key
Parameter numbers
Toggle key
OFF key
Parameter indices
Lower key
X300
Parameter values
Fig. 11-1
Key
Meaning
Function
•
Switch on device (standard)
•
With active fault: Return to fault display
•
Command is executed when key is released
OFF key
•
Switch off device with OFF1 or OFF2 depending on
parameterization (P554 to P557). Command is executed when
key is released.
Reversing key
•
No function
Toggle key
•
For switching between parameter number and parameter
value in the sequence indicated (command becomes effective
when the key is released).
•
If fault display is active: For acknowledging the fault
ON key
Raise key
Lower key
Hold toggle key
and depress raise
or lower key
Table 11-1
11-2
PMU parameterization unit
Increase the display value:
•
Press and release: Increase value by one increment
•
Hold down: Value is increased rapidly
Reduce the display value:
•
Press and release: Decrease value by one increment
•
Hold down: Value is decreased rapidly
•
Press and hold P, then press second key. The command is
executed when key is released (e.g. quick toggle).
Control elements on the PMU
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Toggle key
(P key)
Parameterization
Since the seven-segment display on the PMU has only four digits, the 3
descriptive elements of a parameter, i.e.
♦ parameter number,
♦ parameter index (for an indexed parameter) and
♦ parameter value
cannot be displayed simultaneously. It is therefore necessary to switch
between the 3 elements. The toggle key is provided for this purpose.
After the desired level has been selected, the parameter number can
be adjusted with the Raise or Lower key.
Using the toggle key, you can switch
•
from the parameter number to the
parameter index
•
from the parameter index to the
parameter value
•
from the parameter value to the
parameter number
If the parameter is not indexed, the
toggle key switches directly from the
parameter number to the parameter
value.
NOTE
Parameter number
P
P
Parameter
value
Parameter
index
P
If you change the value of a parameter, the new value normally
becomes operative immediately. However, in the case of confirmation
parameters (identified by an asterisk " * " in the Parameter List), the
new value does not take effect until you switch from the parameter
value to the parameter number.
Changes to parameter settings made via the PMU are always stored in
the non-volatile EEPROM after confirmation by the toggle key.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
11-3
Parameterization
10.99
Example
The following example shows the sequence of operator inputs via the
PMU required to select operating mode "Reactive power
compensation".
Closed-loop control settings
∇
P052
Ì
Î
0000
∇
Ì P Î
Ì
...
∇
Set P052 to 5:
Î
0001
Ì P Î
0005
P052
Increase number to P164: Select operating mode
...
∇
∇
Ì
Î
P052
P164
Set P164 to 0:
Reactive power compensation
Ì ∇ Î
Ì P Î
P164
1
Return to P052:
Ì P Î
0
P164
Function selection
Ì ∇ ... ∇ Î
P164
P052
Set P052 to 0:
Return to previous operating state
Ì ∇ ... ∇ Î
Ì P Î
P052
11-4
0005
Ì P Î
0000
P052
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Parameterization
11.2
"Start-up" parameterization
Select language:
0 = Deutsch, 1 = English, 2 = Espanol, 3 = Fracais, 4 = Italiano
P050 =
Access level "Expert Mode"
P051 = 3
Option boards?
no
Possible option boards: SCB, CB, TB, TSY
yes
P052 = 4
P090 =
P091 =
other parameters depending on option
P052 = 5
Select "Hardware Configuration"
Define and parameterize option boards:
Option boards:
0: None
1: CB
2: TB
3: SCB
4: TSY
(right-hand slot P090, centre slot P091)
Menu selection "Closed-loop control settings":
If fault "Fxxx" appears, see Section "Fault and alarm
messages"
P071 =
Input rated supply voltage in V
P078 =
Input line frequency in Hz
P164 =
Operating
mode:
P052 = 0
0: Reactive power compensation mode
1: cos(phi) mode
2: Current control
3: Regenerative partial load
Select function "Return"
End
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
11-5
Parameterization
11.2.1
10.99
Function selection (P052)
Start-up functions are selected via parameter P052. These provide
start-up variants specially adapted to start-up mode.
Access stage 2 (P051 = 2) must be enabled and the AFE infeed must
not be set to OPERATION (014).
The following functions are available:
Precondition
♦ Return from function selection
(P052 = 0)
♦ Factory setting
(P052 = 1)
♦ Initialization
(P052 = 2)
♦ Download
(P052 = 3)
♦ Hardware configuration
(P052 = 4)
♦ Closed-loop control setting
(P052 = 5)
♦ Forming
(P052 = 20)
The "Factory setting" and "Forming" functions are reset automatically
on completion, i.e. P052 = 0 (return)!
All other functions must be reset manually.
11.2.2
Factory setting (P052 = 1) (Parameter reset)
Function
This function resets all parameters (see Section "Parameter List") to
their factory values (supplied defaults). Please note the setting of P077!
The "Factory setting" function can be selected in operating states
CONTROL SETTINGS (005), FAULT (007), STARTING LOCKOUT
(008) or READY FOR ON (009).
This function sets some converter data according to the device type
(dependent on MLFB / P070).
Condition
Result
P052 = 1
P
11-6
Select factory setting (Parameter reset)
The numbers of the newly set parameters are displayed
consecutively:
♦ All parameters set to factory values acc. to Parameter List
(even board configuration P090/P091)
♦ Device data (derived from MLFB of converter (P070))
P071 Rated supply voltage
P072 AFE current (n)
P078 Line frequency (n)
♦ Open-loop/closed-loop control parameters
P173 Imax (maximum current)
When the parameter have been set to their factory values, status
display STARTING LOCKOUT (008) or READY FOR ON (009)
appears.
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Parameterization
11.2.3
Initialization (MLFB input) (P052 = 2)
Function
Condition
Result
This function is used to alter the order number (device type) of the
converter.
"Initialization" can be selected in operating states CONTROL
SETTINGS (005), FAULT (007), STARTING LOCKOUT (008) or
READY FOR ON (009).
When the order number is changed, only some parameters are reset
to their factory values (shipped status of converter) as a function of the
new order number. The process data connection remains unchanged.
P051 = 3
Access level "Expert Mode"
(to change P070)
P052 = 2
Select Initialization
P070 =
Specify MLFB
(= Order No. of the AFE inverter, see rating plate)
When the CU board is changed, the appropriate MLFB for the
converter must be entered. When setting parameters via PMU,
enter the corresponding code number (PWE) according to the
table below.
Rated voltage 3 AC 380 V (-20 %) to 460 V (+5 %)
Order number
Type power
Rated current
[kW]
[A]
31-0EE80
45
92
75
31-2EF80
55
124
83
31-5EF80
75
146
91
31-8EF80
90
186
99
32-1EG80
110
210
103
32-6EG80
132
260
109
33-2EG80
160
315
113
33-7EG80
200
370
117
6SE70..
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
PWE
11-7
Parameterization
10.99
Rated voltage 3 AC 500 V (-20 %) to 575 V (+5 %)
Order number
Type power
Rated current
[kW]
[A]
26-1FE80
37
61
61
26-6FE80
45
66
63
28-0FF80
55
79
69
31-1FF80
75
108
79
31-3FG80
90
128
85
31-6FG80
110
156
95
32-0FG80
132
192
101
32-3FG80
160
225
105
6SE70..
PWE
Rated voltage 3 AC 660 V (-20 %) to 690 V (+5 %)
Order number
Type power
Rated current
[kW]
[A]
26-0HF80
55
60
59
28-2HF80
75
82
73
6SE70..
P052 = 0
P
11-8
PWE
31-0HG80
90
97
77
31-2HG80
110
118
81
31-5HG80
132
145
89
31-7HG80
160
171
97
32-1HG80
200
208
107
Select "Return"
The operating display appears and, if the MLFB has been
altered, the following parameters are set to new values
:
Converter and motor data (as derived from converter MLFB
(P070) ) and open-loop and closed-loop control parameters
("Automatic parameterization" on all data sets analogous to
selection of "Factory setting" function).
The process data connections (e.g. analog inputs/outputs)
remain unchanged.
On completion of initialization, status display STARTING LOCKOUT
(008) or READY FOR ON (009) appears.
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Parameterization
11.2.4
Download (P052 = 3)
Function
This function is used to read and alter parameters by means of a PC
connected to the SCom1 basic converter interface.
Parameters can be "downloaded" in the FAULT (007), STARTING
LOCKOUT (008) or READY FOR ON (009) states.
Condition
P052 = 3
P
P052 = 0
Select "Download"
The operating display (021) appears.
Using a PC connected to basic converter interface SST1 and
an appropriate application program (e.g. SIMOVIS), it is now
possible to read and alter all parameters irrespective of the
selected control mode, etc.
Select "Return"
P
After Return, the STARTING LOCKOUT (008) or READY FOR ON
(009) display appears.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
11-9
Parameterization
11.2.5
10.99
Hardware configuration (P052 = 4)
Function
Condition
Result
The purpose of this function is to define option boards (SCB, TSY, CB,
TB) installed in the electronics box of the converter.
The "Hardware configuration" function can be selected in the FAULT
(007), STARTING LOCKOUT (008) or READY FOR ON (009) states.
The LBA bus link (Local Bus Adapter) is required additionally to install
option boards in the electronics box. See Section "Interfaces".
All parameters which can be written in the "Hardware configuration"
state ("H", see right-hand column in "Parameter List") can be altered.
P052 = 4
Select "Hardware configuration"
P051 = 3
Access level "Expert Mode"
(to be able to alter the following parameters)
P090 =
P091 =
Board in slot 2 ( RIGHT in electronics box)
Board in slot 3 ( CENTRE in electronics box!)
Parameter values for P090/P091:
0: No option board
1: CB Communication Board
2: TB Technology Board (P090 only)
3: SCB Serial Communication Board
4: TSY Digital Tacho and Synchronization Board
NOTE
Slot in electronics box
Boards
Left
Slot 1 (CU)
CUSA
Centre
Slot 3 (options)
CB / SCB1 / SCB2 / (TSY, not with TB)
Right
Slot 2 (options)
CB / SCB1 / SCB2 / TSY / TB
♦ Only one of each option board type may be inserted in the
electronics box at one time.
♦ Technology boards (e.g. T300) must always be inserted in slot 2.
The TSY board may not be inserted at the same time as a TB.
♦ If only one option board is in use, it must always be inserted in slot 2.
♦ Other parameters depending on option boards
(see relevant Operating Instructions or Parameter List).
♦ Make selection between:
11-10
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Parameterization
P052 = 5
Select "Closed-loop control settings"
(see Section "Closed-loop control settings")
P052 = 0
Select "Return"
The operating display (r000) appears. At the same time,
parameters and internal quantities are set to new values
depending on the function selection.
P
The hardware is initialized.
If one of the fault messages F050/F070/F080 appears, see Section
"Fault and alarm messages".
On completion of the selected function, operating display STARTING
LOCKOUT (008) or READY FOR ON (009) appears.
11.2.6
Closed-loop control settings (P052 = 5)
Function
This function is used to alter the closed-loop control settings (AFE
data).
The "Closed-loop control settings" can be made in the FAULT (007),
STARTING LOCKOUT (008) or READY FOR ON (009).
All parameters which can be written in the "Closed-loop control
settings" state ("A", see right-hand column in Parameter List) can be
altered by this function.
"Closed-loop control settings" is terminated by resetting the status
(P052 = 0) with calculation of internal quantities.
Condition
Result
P052 = 5
Select "Closed-loop control settings"
P051 = 3
Access level "Expert Mode"
(in case parameters which require Export Mode need to be
altered)
Change selected parameters which can be altered in the "Closed-loop
control settings" state.
P052 = 0
P
Select "Return"
The operating display (r000) appears. At the same time,
parameters and internal quantities are set to new values
depending on the function selection.
On completion of the selected function, operating display STARTING
LOCKOUT (008) or READY FOR ON (009) appears.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
11-11
10.99
Parameter list
12
Parameter list
General Visualization Parameters
to 49
Analog Input/Output
from 650
General Parameters
from 50
Interface Configuration
from 680
Drive Data
from 70
Diagnostic Functions
from 720
Hardware Configuration
from 89
Gating Unit
from 760
Motor Data
from 100
Factory Parameters
from 780
Control
from 150
Special Parameters
from 800
Functions
from 330
Profile Parameters
from 900
Setpoint Channel
from 410
Tech Board Parameters
from 1000
Control and Status Bit Connections
from 550
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
−300.00 to 300.00
[Hz]
2
25)/ BR4)
25)/ BR4)
Key to parameter list
Example:
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P999
*1)
"Parameter Name in OP1”
3E7Hex
RDS(2) parameter6)
"Description”
Type=I2; 2)
PKW: 1Hex=0.01 Hz;
i001=50.00
_/_
_/_
i002=50.00
or:
←7)
PZD Gr.: 03)
1) Confirmation parameter: Does not become active until confirmation (press
P
key)
2) Parameter type
O2
Unsigned 16-bit value
I2
Signed 16-bit value
L2
Nibble-coded quantity
V2
Bit-coded quantity
3) Normalization group for PZD
PZD group
PZD normalization
0 as PKW normalization
61000Hex = P072 I(n,AFE)
71000Hex = P071 V(n,supply)
Abbreviations: PZD
Process Data
PKW
Parameter Characteristic Value
4) Operating states:
U
H
A
B
R
MLFB Input (initialization)
Hardware Configuration
Control Settings
Ready (including Fault)
Run
5) Minimum access level which is needed to read or write a parameter.
1
Operation via PMU/OP
2
Standard Mode
3
Expert Mode
6) Abbreviations for indexed parameters
RDS(2)
B/R
Reserve data set parameter with 2 indices, switched over via control word 2, bit 18
Parameter with switchover option for basic and reserve setting in control word 2, bit 30
7) Parameter value is set to a default after initialization. Default settings are determined by the converter MLFB.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-1
Parameter list
12.1
10.99
General visualization parameters
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
r000
r001
1Hex
r004
4Hex
r006
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
Operation Display
Displays the operating status, fault and alarm messages
See Section “Operator control" for a description
−
1 /UHABR
Operating status
Visualization parameter indicating the current operating state
of the AFE
Description
0 = AFE MLFB input
1 = AFE initialization
2 = Hardware initialization
3 = Closed-loop control initialization
4 = Hardware settings (H)
5 = Closed-loop control settings (A)
7 = Fault
8 = Starting lockout
9 = Ready for ON
10 = DC-link precharging
11 = Ready to run
14 = Run
18 = Forming
21 = Downloading parameter settings ....
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 16384
Type = O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: 0
−
2 /UHABR
−
2 / BR
−
2 / BR
−
2 / BR
Output Amps
AFE output current (fundamental r.m.s.)
Note:
The displayed value corresponds to the current at
the inverter (CT). The line current at the AFE input
deviates from this value by the current component
which flows through the filter capacitor.
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4 * P072
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 A
PZD Gr.: 6
6Hex
DC Bus Volts
Actual DC-link voltage value
Display quantity for the PMU and OP.
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4*P071
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=1 V
PZD Gr.: 7
r010
AFE utilization
AHex
12-2
Thermal AFE utilization as a result of an I2t calculation of the
output current.
Loading the AFE with maximum current for
• 30 seconds activates an alarm (P622) and for
• 60 seconds to a reduction in the load current to 91 % of
AFE rated current.
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 16384 %
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1 %
PZD Group: 0
_/_
_/_
MLFB Input
Init. MLFB
H/W Init
System Init
H/W Setting
System Set.
Fault
ON locked
Rdy ON
Precharging
Rdy Run
Operation
Capacitor
forming
Download
[A]
[V]
[%]
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
r012
Base/Reserve
CHex
r013
DHex
r030
1EHex
r032
20Hex
Basic/reserve settings of the process data connections for
setpoints and control word bits
Parameter values:
0: Basic setting
1: Reserve setting
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 16384
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: 0
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
Line volts
Actual line voltage (fundamental r.m.s.)
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4 * P071
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1 V
PZD Gr.: 7
Line frequency
Actual frequency of line voltage
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 163.84 Hz
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.01 Hz PZD Gr.: 0
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
read:
write:
−
2 / BR
3
2 / BR
−
2 / BR
−
2 / BR
_/_
_/_
Basic
Reserve
Operat. hours
Display of hours run with enabled inverter (in Run operating
state).
Indices:
i001 = Days: Days (0...9999)
i002 = Hrs.: Hours (0...24)
i003 = Sec.: Seconds (0...3600)
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: 0
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
d
h
s
[V]
[Hz]
12-3
Parameter list
12.2
10.99
General parameters
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P050
*
32Hex
P051
*
33Hex
P052
*
34Hex
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
Language
Plain text display language on the optional OP operator panel
and in the SIMOVIS PC program
Parameter values:
0: German
1: English
2: Spanish
3: French
4: Italian
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: -
0 to 5
−
0
2 /UHABR
2 /UHABR
Access Level
Access level setting; the higher the access level, the more
parameters can be accessed for reading and writing.
Parameter values:
1: Operation via PMU/ OP
2: Standard mode
3: Expert mode
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: -
1 to 3
−
2
1 /UHABR
1 /UHABR
Function Select
Selection of various commissioning steps and special
functions.
Parameter values:
0 = Return to the previously active drive status from one of
the functions described below.
0 to 20
−
0
2 /UHABR
2 /UHAB
1=
Par. Reset
2=
3=
Parameter Reset: All parameters are reset to their
original settings (factory settings). According to the
Profibus profile for variable speed drives this function is
also accessible via parameter P970. On completion of
this function, the parameter is automatically reset to 0.
Enable MLFB setting mode (switch to MLFB Input
operating status). The function can be deselected only
by resetting the parameter to 0 (Return).
Download/upread (switch to Download operating status).
The function can be deselected only by resetting the
parameter to 0 (Return).
4 = Hardware configuration (switch to Hardware Settings
operating status). The function can be deselected only
by resetting the parameter to 0 (Return).
5 = Closed-loop control settings (switch to Closed-Loop
Control Settings operating status to parameterize plant
data). The parameter must be reset to 0 (Return) to exit
the function without modifying parameters internally.
20 = Forming
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: -
12-4
_/_
_/_
Deutsch
English
Espanol
Francais
Italiano
Operation
Standard
Expert
Return
Set MLFB
Download
H/W Setting
Drive Setting
Capacitor
forming
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
*:conf-P
P053
*
Parameter access
0 to 31
−
1 /UHABR
6
1 /UHABR
35Hex
This parameter can always be written at any time from any
interface.
Parameter values:
0: None
1: COM BOARD
(CB)
2: BASE KEYPAD
(PMU)
4: BASE SERIAL (SST1)
(SST1 and OP)
8: Serial I/O (SCB with USS) (SCB)
16: TECH BOARD
(TB)
Setting instructions:
• Every interface is numerically coded.
• Entering the number or the product of several different
numbers assigned to different interfaces releases the
relevant interface(s) for utilization as a parameterizing
interface.
Example:
A factory setting of 6 indicates that interfaces BASE
KEYPAD (PMU) and BASE SERIAL (SST1) are released
as parameterizing interfaces.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
P054
OP Backlight
Backlighting for operator panel
Parameter values:
0 = Panel is always backlit
1 = Panel is only backlit when in use
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
−
0
3 / BR
3 / BR
36Hex
Release of interfaces for parameterization.
0 to 1
_/_
_/_
PZD Gr.: -
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-5
Parameter list
12.3
10.99
Drive data
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P070
*
46Hex
MLFB(6SE70..)
MLFB (order number) of basic unit
For parameter values, see Section "Initialization"
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: -
P071
47Hex
90 to 1320
Line volts
[V]
Line supply voltage for AFE (r.m.s. of line-to-line voltage)
This parameter specifies the incoming AC supply voltage.
It is used to calculate the setpoint DC link voltage (P125) and
the thresholds for fault messages "Line supply overvoltage",
"Line supply undervoltage" (P074) and "DC link undervoltage".
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1 V
PZD Gr.: 0
P072
AFE current(n)
AFE rated output current
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 A
48Hex
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
0 to 255
−
0
3 /U BR
3 /U
−
←
2 / ABR
2/ A
4.0 to 6540.0
−
2 /U ABR
[A]
←
4 /U
_/_
_/_
PZD Gr.: 0
P074
Undervoltage threshold
6 to 100
−
4AHex
Response threshold for shutdown on line undervoltage. The
line supply voltage (P071) is the reference quantity.
Note:
P155: Maximum power failure time
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1 %
PZD Gr.: −
[%]
65
2 / BR
2 / BR
P077
*
FactSettingType
Selective factory setting
This parameter can be changed in the "MLFB Input" state
(P052). If no MLFB has yet been entered, the selected factory
setting type becomes effective immediately an MLFB number
is entered and "MLFB Input" deselected (P052=0).
It is possible to activate a specific factory setting by selecting
"Par. Reset" (P052 = 1 or P970 = 0). This action does not,
however, change the setting in P077.
Parameter values:
0: Current factory setting remains valid.
1: AFE with OP:
⇒not currently implemented
2: AFE cabinet unit with terminal strip:
This setting initializes the following parameters to values
other than zero:
P554, P566, P603
3: Current factory setting remains valid.
3: AFE cabinet unit with OP:
⇒not currently implemented
Type:O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: -
0 to 4
−
0
3 /U BR
3 /U
Line frequency
Frequency of incoming AC supply
50 to 60
−
2 / ABR
[Hz]
50
2/ A
0.000 to 10.000
−
3 / BR
0.000
3 / BR
4DHex
P078
4EHex
Type=O2;
P080
50Hex
12-6
PKW: 1HEX=1 Hz
PZD Gr.: −
Line filter C/mF
Capacitance of the filter capacitors of one phase of the AFE
line filter in mF for a "star circuit configuration". If the line filter
capacitors are connected in a “delta configuration”, then 300%
of the value must be parameterized.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.001
PZD Gr.: 0
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
*:conf-P
P081
Line filter L/mH
0.000 to 20.000
−
3 / BR
←
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
0.0
3/ B
−
3 / H BR
Inductance L of AFE filter reactor in mH.
_/_
_/_
51Hex
Type=O2;
r082
52Hex
P083
PKW: 1HEX=0.001
PZD Gr.: 0
Line filter L/%
Inductance L of AFE filter reactor in % (calculated from P081).
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 1638.4 %
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 %
PZD Gr.: 0
[%]
0.0 to 1000.0
[ohms]
R precharging
Precharging resistance in ohms.
53Hex
Type=O2;
r089
59Hex
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 Ohm
PZD Gr.: 0
Board Position 1
Board in slot 1 (left) in electronics box
Parameter values:
0 = None (formal setting only)
6 = CUSA board for AFE
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 16384
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: 0
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
None
AFE
12-7
Parameter list
12.4
10.99
Hardware configuration
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P090
*
5AHex
P091
*
5BHex
12-8
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
Board Position 2
PCB in slot #2 (right) of the electronics box
Parameter values:
0 = No option board
1 = Communication Board (CB)
2 = Technology Board (TB)
3 = Serial Communication Board (SCB)
4 = Digital Tacho and Synchronization Board (TSY)
Setting instruction:
The following are the only permissible board/slot
combinations:
Slot 3 (P091)
Slot 2 (P090)
CB
TB
SCB
TSY
SCB
CB
CB
TB
SCB
TB
CB
SCB
CB
TSY
TSY
CB
SCB
TSY
TSY
SCB
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
0 to 4
−
0
3 / H BR
3/H
Board Position 3
Board in slot 3 (centre) in electronics box
For description, see P090 (board position 2).
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
0 to 4
−
0
3 / H BR
3/H
_/_
_/_
None
CB
TB
SCB
TSY
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
12.5
Parameter list
Closed-loop control
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P120
78Hex
P122
7AHex
r123
7BHex
P124
7CHex
P125
7DHex
r126
7EHex
P129
81Hex
P130
82Hex
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
CosPhi set
Power factor cos(PHI) setpoint.
Parameter values: 0.800 ... 1.000 ⇒ inductive
-0.800 ... -1.000 ⇒ capacitive
RDS(2) parameter
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.001 PZD Gr.: 4000HEX=4
−1.000 to 1.000
2
i001=1.000
i002=1.000
3 / BR
3 / BR
React. pow.(set)
Reactive power setpoint for “reactive power compensation”
mode (P164 = 0).
Parameter values: Reactive power setpoint < 0 ⇒ inductive
Reactive power setpoint > 0⇒ capacitive
RDS(2) parameter
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1 % PZD Gr.: 4000HEX = 400%
−140.0 to 140.0
[%]
2
i001=0.0
i002=0.0
3 / BR
3 / BR
Reactive power/kVAr
[kVAr]
−
3 / BR
Sm.react.pow.
Smoothing time constant for reactive power setpoint specified
in P122.
RDS(2) parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1 ms
PZD Gr.: 0
0 to 900
[ms]
2
i001=50
i002=50
3 / BR
Vd(set) factor
Factor for the fixed setpoint of the DC link voltage. The line
supply voltage (P071) is the reference quantity.
Visualization parameters:
r126: Vd fixed setpoint
r447: Vd setpoint of setpoint node (P443)
r139: Vd setpoint
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01
PZD Gr.: −
1.42 to 1.90
−
1.58
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
_/_
_/_
Reactive power setpoint in kVAr calculated from P122 (for the
line supply voltage P071) for “reactive power compensation”
mode (P164 = 0)
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 1638.4 kVA
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1 kVA
PZD Gr.: 0
Vd (set, par)
Fixed setpoint for the DC link voltage setpoint V (calculated
from P125)
Note:
Settable via P125 Vd(set) factor
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4 x P071
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1 V
PZD Gr.: 7
3 / BR
3 / BR
[V]
Vd reg. Kp
Gain of DC-link voltage (Vd) controller
RDS(2) parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1
PZD Gr.: 0
0.0 to 31.9
2
i001=2.0
i002=2.0
3/
3/
Vd reg. Kp dyn
Dynamic gain of DC-link voltage (Vd) controller
RDS(2) parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1
PZD Gr.: 0
0.0 to 31.9
2
i001=10.0
i002=10.0
3 / BR
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
BR
BR
3 / BR
12-9
Parameter list
10.99
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P131
Vd regulator Ti
Integration time constant of the DC-link voltage (Vd) controller
RDS(2) parameter
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 ms
PZD Gr.: 0
83Hex
r139
8BHex
r150
96Hex
Ud (set)
Setpoint of DC-link voltage in V
Note:
The Vd setpoint (r139) can be higher than the set
Vd setpoint (r447). For a high line supply voltage
and/or a high capacitive reactive current, the DC
link voltage is automatically increased so that a
minimum modulation reserve is maintained.
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4 x P071
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1 V
PZD Gr.: 7
Control status
Status word of the closed-loop control
Parameter values:
Bit00 = 1: Initialization of closed-loop control complete
Bit01 = 1: Ext. 24V power supply faulted
Bit02 =
Reserved
Bit03 = 1: Precharging completed
Bit04 = 1: Active current >= 0 (motoring, rectifier operation)
Bit05 = 1: Reactive current >= 0 (capacitive)
Bit06 = 1: Active current at limit
Bit07 = 1: Reactive current at limit
Bit08 = 1: Absolute current value at limit (r174)
Bit09 = 1: Smoothed line supply voltage < 80 % of P071
Bit10 = 1: Smoothed line supply voltage > 105 or 110 % of
P071
Bit11 = 1: Control factor at limit
Bit12 = 1 Ud2t integrator increasing
Bit13 = 1 DC link voltage < 90% of setpoint
Bit14 = 1 DC link voltage > 110% of setpoint
Bit15 = 1 Smoothed line supply voltage < P074
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
0.5 to 100.0
[ms]
2
i001=20.0
i002=20.0
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
2 / ABR
_/_
_/_
3 / BR
[V]
Coding of bits on the PMU:
15
14
7
6
13
12
5
4
11
10
3
2
Type=V2; PKW: 1HEX=1
r152
98Hex
12-10
9
1
8
0
PZD Gr.: 0
Active RDS
Active reserve data set of the AFE
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 16384
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: 0
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P155
max. t. pow.fail
9BHex
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
0 to 3000
[ms]
−
100
3 / BR
3 / BR
I start(mot,max)
Maximum current limit for motor operation.
The line current is limited by this parameter.
RDS(2) parameter
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 %
PZD: 4000HEX = 400 %
0.0 to 150.0
[%]
2
i001=150.0
i002=150.0
3 / ABR
3/ A
I start(gen,max)
Maximum regenerative current limit.
−150.0 to 0.0
2
3 / ABR
[%]
i001=-150.0
i002=-150.0
3/ A
0 to 2
2
i001=1
i002=1
3 / ABR
3/ A
Maximum time until the power failure fault (F009) or line
supply undervoltage fault (F004) is output.
If the unsmoothed line supply voltage falls below the threshold
parameterized in P074, the inverter firing pulses are inhibited.
The main contactor remains closed. If the line supply voltage
does not increase above the minimum threshold (P074) within
the maximum time for a power failure, the power failure fault
F009 is output and the main contactor is opened (deenergized).
If the smoothed line supply voltage falls below the threshold
parameterized in P074, fault message F004 "line supply
undervoltage" is output.
Type=O2;
P160
A0Hex
P161
PKW: 1HEX=1 s
ZD-Gr.: 0
A1Hex
The regenerative feedback current is limited to the value set
here..0
RDS(2) parameter
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 %
PZD: 4000HEX = 400 %
P164
Operating mode
Selection of the operating mode
Parameter values:
0: Operating mode “reactive power compensation”
The setpoint for the reactive power can be set via P122.
1: Operating mode "cos(PHI)"
The setpoint for the cos(PHI) can be set via P120.
2: Operating mode "closed-loop current control"
The source of the current setpoint must be entered via
P486.
3: Regenerative partial load
RDS(2) parameter
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: −
A4Hex
_/_
_/_
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-11
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
P173
ADHex
r174
AEHex
r179
B3Hex
r255
FFHex
r256
100Hex
r263
107Hex
r264
108Hex
12-12
10.99
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
Imax
1 to 30000
2
3 / BR
Maximum current (fundamental r.m.s.)
Setpoint for current limitation (Imax controller) to protect the
AFE.
Maximum 1.36 x conv.current(n) (P072).
Visualization parameters: r174: Actually applied maximum
current setpoint (taking derating
into account)
Note:
The maximum current set here must always be so
high so that the AFE can handle the power
demanded by the drive. If the drive demands more
current than the maximum current set here, the AFE
shuts down with the “overload” fault (F013).
RDS(2) parameter
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1 A
PZD Gr.: 6
[A]
i001=←
i002=←
3 / BR
Imax(set)
[A]
Maximum current (setpoint applied)
Setpoint applied for current limiting (Imax controller); takes into
account the effect of the I²t calculation
Note:
P173 (parameterized maximum current setpoint)
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 40 x P072
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1 A
PZD Gr.: 6
−
3 / BR
Output Amps (rms)
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
Output current (fundamental rms) (fast actual value for
automation purposes)
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4*P072
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 A
PZD Gr.: 6
I (reactive,set)
Reactive current component setpoint.
Limited by the maximum current (r174) and the active current
setpoint (r263).
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4 x P072
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 A
PZD Gr.: 6
I (reactive,act)
Actual value of reactive current component
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4 x P072
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 A
PZD Gr.: 6
I (active,set)
Setpoint of active current component.
Limited by the maximum current (r174).
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4 x P072
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 A
PZD Gr.: 6
I (active,act)
Actual value of active current component
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4 x P072
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 A
PZD Gr.: 6
_/_
_/_
[A]
[A]
[A]
[A]
[A]
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
r303
Vd(act)
Actual unsmoothed DC-link voltage value
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4 x P071
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=1 V
PZD Gr.: 7
12FHex
P308
Sampling Time
Basic sampling time T0.
134Hex
Setting instructions:
• When the sampling time is reduced, the available
computing time should be checked via parameter r725 in
the "Run" state. At least 5 % of the available computing
time should always be left in reserve to avoid any delayed
(slow) execution of operator inputs.
• If fault F042 "Computing time" occurs, the sampling time
setting must be increased again.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 ms
PZD Gr.: −
P325
MC switch-on del
Delay time for closing (energizing) the main contactor.
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
−
3 / BR
0.8 to 4.0
−
3 / ABR
[ms]
1.5
3/ A
0.0 to 30.0
−
3 / BR
[s]
0.0
3/ B
[V]
145Hex
By delaying energization of the main contactor, it is possible to
charge the DC link up to the line voltage peak value via the
precharging resistors. This measure will be necessary if the
external DC-link capacitance connected to the AFE is
significantly higher than that of the AFE.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 s
PZD Gr.: −
P326
Max.pre-chrg. t.
Maximum precharging time
If the DC link is not successfully precharged within this period,
fault message Precharging (F002) or, if the line voltage is too
low, fault message Line Voltage (F004) is activated.
RDS(2) parameter
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 s
PZD Gr.: 0
0.1 to 30.0
[s]
2
i001=3.0
i002=3.0
3 / BR
3/ B
MCInvEnableDel
0.08 to 5.00
−
4 / BR
Delay between activation of the main contactor and enabling
of the inverter.
By increasing this time, it is possible to ensure that the DC link
is charged up completely to the peak value of the mains
voltage. This is necessary if the external DC link capacity
connected to the AFE is considerably greater than that of the
AFE. The set time should always be at least 100 ms greater
than the time that the main contactor needs to close the
contacts.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.o1 s
PZD-Gr.: −
[s]
0.40
4 / BR
146Hex
P329
149Hex
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
_/_
_/_
12-13
Parameter list
12.6
10.99
Functions
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P366
16EHex
P387
183Hex
P408
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
Auto Restart
Automatic restart (WEA) after power failure
Parameter values:
0 = Inhibited
1 = Power failure acknowledgement only after power
recovery
2 = AFE is restarted after power recovery
CAUTION: External safety devices must be provided to
ensure that the AFE does not start accidentally
when P366 = 2!
RDS(2) parameter
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: -
0 to 2
2
i001=0
i002=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
Vd minimum
Response threshold for shutdown
DC-link undervoltage in closed-loop current control mode
(P164 = 2). The line supply voltage is the reference quantity
(P071).
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1 %
PZD Gr.: −
5 to 140
[%]
−
100
3 / BR
3 / BR
Forming time
DC link forming time
1.0 to 600.0
2
2 / ABR
[min]
i001=10.0
i002=10.0
2 / AB
0.0 to 6.5
[s]
−
0.0
3 / BR
3/ B
198Hex
This parameter defines the forming period for the DC link
when P052=20.
RDS parameter
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 min PZD Gr.: 0
P409
Line contac. del.
Delay time for commencement of precharging process.
This parameter can be used to implement a time-graded
sequence for starting up a number of drive units.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 s
PZD Gr.: −
199Hex
12-14
_/_
_/_
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
12.7
Parameter list
Setpoint channel
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
Range
[Unit]
*:conf-P
Description
Value Texts
P443
Src. Ud (set)
0 to 4545
*
1BBHex
Source for the DC-link voltage setpoint.
Parameter values:
1001:
Fixed setpoint
Other values: Acc. to process data connections of setpoint
channel.
B/R parameter
Type=L2;
PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P444
Vd (set) Kp
Gain for the DC-link voltage setpoint.
B/R parameter
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 %
PZD: 4000HEX = 400 %
1BCHex
r447
1BFHex
P486
*
1E6Hex
Vd (set,source)
Setpoint of DC-link voltage from setpoint nodes.
The Vd setpoint is always limited to sensible values so as to
prevent shutdown on faults as a result of impermissibly high
setpoints.
Minimum value: Peak value of line voltage = 1.42 x r030
Maximum value: 2x rated line voltage = 2 x P071
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4*P071
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1 V
PZD Gr.: 7
Src.curr.setp.
Source for the setpoint of the active (line) current
The parameterized active current setpoint is effective only in
"Closed-loop current control" (P164 = 2) or "Slave AFE"
modes (CW2, bit 27).
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
2
3 / BR
i001=1001
i002=1001
3 / BR
0.0 to 300.0
2
3 / BR
[%]
i001=100.0
i002=100.0
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
0 to 4545
2
i001=0
i002=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
−300.0 to 300.0
[%]
2
i001=100.0
i002=100.0
3 / BR
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
_/_
_/_
[V]
Parameter values acc. to process data connections of setpoint
channel.
B/R parameter
Type=L2;
PKW format(HEX)=param. value
PZD Gr.: 0
P487
1E7Hex
r490
1EAHex
Curr.setp. Kp
Gain for the setpoint of the active (line) current in "Closed-loop
current control" (P164 = 2) or "Slave AFE" modes (CW2, bit
27).
B/R parameter
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 %
PZD: 4000HEX = 400 %
Curr.setp.
Active (line) current setpoint in "Closed-loop current control"
(P164 = 2) or "Slave AFE" modes (CW2, bit 27).
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 400 %
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 %
PZD: 4000HEX = 400 %
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
[A]
12-15
Parameter list
10.99
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
Range
[Unit]
*:conf-P
Description
Value Texts
P517
205Hex
P518
206Hex
12-16
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
0.00 to 100.00
SetActValDev.Ud
[%]
Setpoint/actual value deviation in DC-link voltage Vd
In the case of a large deviation between Vd setpoint and
actual value, message "Setpoint actual value deviation" (status
word 1, bits 8 (r552) is activated.
Cf. P518 Minimum time of setpoint/actual value deviation
Ref. quantity: Vd(set) (r126)
RDS(2) parameter
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.01 % PZD Gr.: 0
2
i001=2.00
i002=2.00
3 / BR
3/ B
Deviation Time
0.0 to 10.00
2
3 / BR
Minimum time for setpoint/actual value deviation
When there is a deviation between the setpoint/actual value
(P517), the message "Setpoint/actual value deviation" (status
word 1 bit 8 (r552)) is output when the time in P518 runs out.
RDS(2) parameter
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.01 s
PZD Gr.: 0
[s]
i001=0.10
i002=0.10
3/ B
_/_
_/_
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
12.8
Parameter list
Control and status bit connections
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
r550
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
Control Word 1
Display of control word 1, bits 0 to 15 (see Section "Control
word").
Type=V2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: 0
−
2 / BR
Control Word 2
Display of control word 2, bits16 to 31 (see Section "Control
word").
Type=V2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: 0
−
2 / BR
Status Word 1
Display of status word 1, bits 0 to 15 (see Section "Control
word").
Type=V2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: 0
−
2 / BR
r553
Status Word 2
−
2 / BR
229Hex
Display of status word 2, bits 16 to 31 (see Section "Control
word").
Type=V2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: 0
226Hex
r551
227Hex
r552
228Hex
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
P554
*
22AHex
Src ON/OFF1
0 to 5001
Source for ON/OFF1 command (control word 1, bit 0)
See Section "Control word" for details
Parameter values: 0:
OFF1
1:
Illegal setting
1001: Digital input 1 CUSA
1003: Digital input 3 CUSA
1010: ON/OFF keys PMU
2001: SST1, word 1,bit 0
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word"
(process data connections of control word)
Note:
A value of 4101 or 4201 is recommended in
conjunction with the inputs of the serial IO system.
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param. value PZD Gr.: 0
2
i001=1010
i002=1001
2 / BR
2 / BR
P555
*
22BHex
Src1 OFF2(coast)
Source 1 of the OFF2 control command (control word 1, bit 1)
See Section "Control word" for details
1 to 5001
2
i001=1
i002=1002
2 / BR
2 / BR
1 to 5001
2
i001=1
i002=1
2 / BR
2 / BR
_/_
_/_
Parameter values: 0:
Illegal setting
1:
Operating condition
1002: Digital input 2 CUSA
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word"
(process data connections of control word)
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param. value PZD Gr.: 0
P556
*
22CHex
Src2 OFF2 (coast)
Source 2 of the OFF2 control command (control word 1, bit 1)
See P555 for description
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param. value
PZD Gr.: 0
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-17
Parameter list
10.99
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
P557
Src3 OFF2 (coast)
1 to 5001
*
22DHex
Source 3 of the OFF2 control command (control word 1, bit 1)
See P555 for description
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P561
*
231Hex
Src InvRelease
0 to 5001
Source for the inverter enable command (control word 1, bit 3)
See Section "Control word" for details
Parameter values: 0: Disable inverter
1: Automatically when delay timers run
down
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word"
(process data connections of control word)
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
2
i001=1
i002=1
3 / BR
3 / BR
P565
*
235Hex
Src1 Fault Reset
Source 1 of "Acknowledge" control command (control word 1,
bit 7)
See Section "Control word" for details
2
i001=0
i002=1003
2 / BR
2 / BR
0 to 5001
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
2
2 / BR
i001=1
i002=1
2 / BR
_/_
_/_
Parameter values: 0:
No source selected
1:
Illegal setting
1003: Digital input 3 on CUSA
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word"
(process data connections of control word)
Note: The "Acknowledge" control command is edge-triggered.
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P566
Src2 Fault Reset
*
236Hex
Source 2 of "Acknowledge" control command (control word 1,
bit 7)
See P565 for description
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P567
*
237Hex
Src3 Fault Reset
Source 3 of "Acknowledge" control command (control word 1,
bit 7)
See P565 for description
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P568
*
238Hex
Src Jog1 ON
0 to 5001
Source for the Inching 1 setpoint (control word 1, bit 8)
See Section "Control word" for details
Parameter values: 0:
No inching
1:
Illegal setting
2001: SST1, word 1 bit 8
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word"
(process data connections of control word)
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
12-18
0 to 5001
0 to 5001
2
2 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
2 / BR
2
i001=2001
i002=2001
2 / BR
2 / BR
2
i001=0
i002=0
2 / BR
2 / BR
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
P569
Src Jog2 ON
0 to 5001
*
239Hex
Source for the Inching 2 setpoint (control word 1, bit 8)
See Section "Control word" for details
Parameter values: 0:
No inching
1:
Illegal setting
2001: SST1, word 1, bit 8
Other values:
read:
write:
2
2 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
2 / BR
_/_
_/_
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word"
(process data connections of control word)
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P572
Src.regen.enable
*
23CHex
Source for control command "Regenerative feedback enabled"
(control word 1, bit 12)
Parameter values: 0:
Regenerative feedback disabled
1:
Regenerative feedback enabled
2001: SST1, word 1, bit 8
Other values:
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
0 to 5001
2
2 / BR
i001=1
i002=1
2 / BR
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word"
(process data connections of control word)
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P575
*
23FHex
Src No Ext Fault1
1 to 5001
Source for control command "External fault 1" (control word 1,
bit 15)
An L signal causes the drive to shut down on faults.
Parameter values: 0:
Illegal setting
1:
No fault
1001: CUSA digital input 1
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word"
(process data connections of control word)
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
2
i001=1
i002=1
2 / BR
2 / BR
P576
*
240Hex
Src. ext. 24V ok
Source for the bit for monitoring the external 24 V power
supply.
This bit is connected to digital input 4 on the CUSA at the
factory.
2
i001=1004
i002=1004
3 / BR
3 / BR
0 to 5001
Parameter values: 0:
Ext. 24V not o.k.
1:
Ext. 24V o.k.
1001: CUSA digital input 1
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word"
(process data connections of control word)
B/R parameter
Type=L2;PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-19
Parameter list
10.99
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
P578
Src. RDS bit 0
0 to 5001
*
242Hex
Source for bit 0 for selection of reserve data set (RDS)
(control word 2, bit 18)
Parameter values: 0: RDS bit 0 has a value of 0
1: RDS bit 0 has a value of 1
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word"
(process data connections of control word)
Note:
The reserve data set cannot be altered in Run
mode. Any change to the bit setting will not take
effect until the "Ready" state is reached.
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param. value
PZD Gr.: 0
2
3 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
3 / BR
P586
*
24AHex
Src No ExtFault2
1 to 5001
Source for control command "External fault 2" (control word 2,
bit 26)
An L signal causes the device to shut down on faults if:
• the DC link has been precharged (operating state > 10) and
• the 200 ms delay timer after precharging has run down
2
i001=1
i002=1
2 / BR
2 / BR
_/_
_/_
Parameter values: 0:
Illegal setting
1:
No fault
1004: CUSA digital input 4
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word"
(process data connections of control word)
B/R parameter
Type=L2;PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P587
*
24BHex
Src.slave AFE
0 to 5001
Source for "Master/slave AFE" switchover (control word 2, bit
27)
Parameter values:
0: Master AFE (int. current setpoint)
1: Slave AFE (ext. current setpoint)
1002: CUSA digital input 2
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word"
(process data connections of control word)
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
2
i001=0
i002=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
P588
*
24CHex
Src No Ext Warn1
Source for control command "External alarm 1" (control word 2,
bit 28)
2
i001=1
i002=1
3 / BR
3 / BR
1 to 5001
Parameter values: 0:
Illegal setting
1:
No alarm
1002: CUSA digital input 2
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word"
(process data connections of control word)
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
12-20
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
P589
Src No Ext Warn2
1 to 5001
*
24DHex
Source for control command "External alarm 2" (control word 2,
bit 29)
Parameter values: 0: Illegal setting
1: No alarm
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word"
(process data connections of control word)
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param. value
PZD Gr.: 0
P590
Src Base/Reserve
*
24EHex
Source for basic / reserve setting switchover command (control
word 2, bit 30)
Parameter values: 0:
Basic setting
1:
Reserve setting
1005: CUSA digital input 5
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word"
(process data connections of control word)
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P600
Dst Ready for ON
*
258Hex
Destination of the status bit ’Ready for ON’ (status word 1, bit
0)
Power is ON, the drive can be switched on.
Parameter values:
Depending on the selected index, all settings specified in
Section "Status word" (process data connections of status
word) may be parameterized.
Indices: i001: GG:
Select a terminal on the basic unit
i002: SCI:
Select a terminal on SCI1/2
i003: TSY: Select a terminal on TSY
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P601
Dst Rdy for Oper
*
259Hex
Destination of status bit "Ready to Run" (status word 1, bit 1)
The DC link is charged, the pulses can be enabled.
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P602
*
25AHex
Dst Operation
Destination of status bit "Run" (status word 1, bit 2)
The device is running.
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P603
*
25BHex
Dst Fault
Destination of status bit "Fault" (status word 1, bit 3)
Note:
The active status (bit has H level) is output via the
terminal in inverted form (broken-wire proof).
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
0 to 5001
0 to 5002
0 to 5002
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
2
3 / BR
i001=1
i002=1
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
1005
3 / BR
3
3 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
3
3 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
0 to 5002
3
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
2 / BR
2 / BR
0 to 5002
3
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
2 / BR
2 / BR
_/_
_/_
12-21
Parameter list
10.99
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
P604
Dst NO OFF2
0 to 5002
*
25CHex
Destination of the status bit ’No OFF2 command’ (status word
1, bit 4)
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P606
*
25EHex
Dst ON blocked
Destination of the status bit "Starting lockout active" (status
word 1, bit 6)
Note:
The active status (bit has H level) is output via the
terminal in inverted form (broken-wire proof).
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P607
*
25FHex
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
3
3 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
0 to 5002
3
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
Dst Warning
Destination of the status bit "Alarm" (status word 1, bit 7)
Note:
The active status (bit has H level) is output via the
terminal in inverted form (broken-wire proof).
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
0 to 5002
3
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
2 / BR
2 / BR
P608
Trg Bit Deviat.
0 to 5002
3
3 / BR
*
260Hex
Destination of the status bit "DC-link voltage setpoint = Actual
DC-link voltage’ (status word 1, bit 8) - cf. P517; see Section
"Status word" for details
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
P611
*
263Hex
0 to 5002
Dst Low Voltage
Destination of the status bit "Low voltage’ (status word 1, bit 11)
Note:
The active status (bit has H level) is output via the
terminal in inverted form (broken-wire proof).
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
3
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
P612
Dst Contactor
*
264Hex
Destination of the status bit "Energize main contactor’
(status word 1, bit 12); H level: Energize contactor!
CAUTION: For safety reasons, this status bit is always
connected to digital output 2 on the CUSA board
on the AFE. It is not possible or permissible to
connect the bit in any other way as it protects the
AFE against damage by preventing the main
contactor from closing before the DC link has
been charged.
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P614
Dst.Gen.Mot.
*
266Hex
Destination of the status bit "Generator/motor operation" (status
word 1, bit 14)
Meaning:
L: Motor-mode operation (rectifier)
H: Generator-mode operation (regen. feedback)
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
12-22
0 to 5002
0 to 5002
3
3 / BR
i001=1002
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
3
3 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
_/_
_/_
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
*:conf-P
P618
DstCurrLimAct.
0 to 5002
*
26AHex
Destination of the status bit "Current limit active’
(status word 2, Bit 18)
Note:
The active status (bit has H level) is output via the
terminal in inverted form (broken-wire proof).
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
3
i001=0
i002=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
P619
*
26BHex
Dst Ext Fault 1
Destination of the status bit "External fault 1 active’
(status word 2, bit 19)
i003=0
0 to 5002
Note:
The active status (bit has H level) is output via the
terminal in inverted form (broken-wire proof).
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P620
Dst Ext Fault 2
*
26CHex
Destination of the status bit "External fault 2 active’
(status word 2, bit 20)
Notes:
• The active status (bit has H level) is output via
the terminal in inverted form (broken-wire
proof).
• The device accepts the fault after 200 ms
provided that an ON command is active.
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P621
*
26DHex
Dst Ext Warning
Destination of the status bit "External alarm active’
(status word 2, bit 21)
0 to 5002
3
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
3
3 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
0 to 5002
3
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
3
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
3
3 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
Note:
The active status (bit has H level) is output via the
terminal in inverted form (broken-wire proof).
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P622
*
26EHex
Dst.warn.i2tAFE
Destination of the status bit "Inverter overload alarm"
(status word 2, bit 22); cf. r010 (AFE utilization)
Note:
The active status (bit has H level) is output via the
terminal in inverted form (broken-wire proof).
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: -
0 to 5002
P623
DstFltOvertmpAFE
0 to 5002
*
26FHex
Destination of the status bit "Inverter overtemperature fault"
(status word 2, bit 23)
Note:
The active status (bit has H level) is output via the
terminal in inverted form (broken-wire proof).
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
_/_
_/_
12-23
Parameter list
10.99
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
P624
DstWarOvertmpAFE
0 to 5002
*
270Hex
Destination of the status bit "Inverter overtemperature alarm"
(status word 2, bit 24)
Note:
The active status (bit has H level) is output via the
terminal in inverted form (broken-wire proof).
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P629
*
275Hex
DstPrechrgContEn
Destination of the status bit “Precharging contactor energized”
(status word 2, bit 29)
0 to 5002
Caution:
For safety reasons, this status bit on the AFE is
always connection to digital output 1 on the PEU.
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P631
Dst Pre-Charging
*
277Hex
Destination connection for the status bit "Precharging active"
(status word 2, bit 31)
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
12-24
0 to 5002
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
3
3 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
3
i001=1001
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
3
3 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
_/_
_/_
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
12.9
Parameter list
Analog inputs/outputs
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P655
*
28FHex
P656
290Hex
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
CUA AnaOut ActVal
Actual value output via the analog output of the CUSA
Setting instruction: Enter the number of the parameter whose
value is to be displayed.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: 0
0 to 999
−
303
2 / BR
2 / BR
CUSA AnalogOutGain
Gain factor of the analog output on the CUSA, see Section
"Analog outputs"
−320.00 to
320.00
−
10.00
2 / BR
2 / BR
_/_
_/_
[V]
Parameter values:
P656 = calculated output voltage when parameter value is set to
100 %
The calculation formula for the output voltage is as follows:
PWE
⋅ P656 + P657
Vout =
100 %
Note:
The output voltage at the analog output can be
maximum ± 10 V.
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.01 V
PZD Gr.: 0
P657
291Hex
P660
294Hex
CUSA AnalogOutOffs
Offset of the analog output on the CU, cf. P656
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.01 V
PZD Gr.: 0
−100.00 to
100.00
[V]
−
0.00
2 / BR
2 / BR
SCI AnalogInConf
Configuration of the analog inputs on the SCI1 boards, defining
the type of input signals:
Parameter values Terminals
Terminals
X428/3, 6, 9
X428/5, 8, 11
0: − 10 V ... + 10 V
−20 mA ... + 20 mA
1: 0 V ... + 10 V
0 mA ... + 20 mA
2: 4 mA ... + 20 mA
Notes:
• Only one signal can be processed per input. A choice of
voltage or current signals can be evaluated.
• Voltage and current signals must be connected to different
terminals.
• Settings 1 and 2 allow only unipolar signals to be used, i.e.
the internal process quantities are also unipolar.
• When setting 2 is selected, an input current of < 2 mA
causes a shutdown on faults (open-wire monitoring).
• Offset adjustment of the analog inputs is parameterized via
parameter P662.
Indices:
i001: Sl11
Slave 1, analog input 1
i002: Sl12
Slave 1, analog input 2
i003: Sl13
Slave 1, analog input 3
i004: Sl21
Slave 2, analog input 1
i005: Sl22
Slave 2, analog input 2
i006: Sl23
Slave 2, analog input 3
Precondition:
The associated SCB board must be logged on
via P090 or P091.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
0 to 2
6
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
i004=0
i005=0
i006=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
−10 V...+10 V
0 V...+10 V
4 mA...20 mA
12-25
Parameter list
10.99
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P661
SCI AnaInSmooth
Smoothing time constant of analog inputs on SCI boards
Formula: T=2 ms x 2P661
Indices: See P660
295Hex
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
0 to 15
PZD Gr.: -
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
6
3 / BR
i001=2
i002=2
i003=2
i004=2
i005=2
i006=2
3 / BR
P662
SCI AnalogInOffs
−20.00 to 20.00
6
3 / BR
[V]
i001=0.00
i002=0.00
i003=0.00
i004=0.00
i005=0.00
i006=0.00
3 / BR
296Hex
Zero offset of analog inputs on SCI boards
See SCI Operator’s Guide for setting instructions
Indices: See P660
0 to 1999
6
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
i004=0
i005=0
i006=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
−320.00 to
320.00
6
3 / BR
i001=10.00
i002=10.00
i003=10.00
i004=10.00
i005=10.00
i006=10.00
3 / BR
−100.00 to
100.00
[V]
6
3 / BR
i001=0.00
i002=0.00
i003=0.00
i004=0.00
i005=0.00
i006=0.00
3 / BR
Type=I2;
P664
*
298Hex
PKW: 1HEX=0.01 V
PZD: 4000HEX=160 V
SCI AnaOutActVal
Output of actual values via analog outputs on SCI boards
Setting instruction: Enter the number of the parameter whose
value is to be output. See SCI Operator’s Guide for details.
Indices:
i001: Sl11
Slave 1, analog output 1
i002: Sl12
Slave 1, analog output 2
i003: Sl13
Slave 1, analog output 3
i004: Sl21
Slave 2, analog output 1
i005: Sl22
Slave 2, analog output 2
i006: Sl23
Slave 2, analog output 3
Precondition:
The associated SCB board must be logged on
via P090 or P091.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
P665
299Hex
SCI AnaOut Gain
Gain for analog outputs via the SCI slaves
Setting instruction: See SCI Operator’s Guide
Indices: See P664
Type=I2;
P666
29AHex
PZD: 4000HEX=160
SCI AnaOut Offs
Offset of analog outputs on SCI boards
Setting instruction: See SCI Operator’s Guide
Indices: See P664
Type=I2;
12-26
PKW: 1HEX=0.01
PKW: 1HEX=0.01 V
PZD: 4000HEX=160 V
_/_
_/_
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
12.10
Parameter list
Interface configuration
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
P680
SCom1 Act Value
0 to 999
*
2A8Hex
Output of actual values via serial interface SST1
Defines which parameter must be transferred at which telegram
position.
Notes:
• Status word 1 (r968) should be assigned to
word 1.
• In the case of double word parameters (type I4),
the associated parameter number must be
entered in two consecutive words or else only the
most significant word will be transferred.
• The length (number of words) of the process data
section in the telegram is set via P685, index i001.
Indices: i001 = W01: Word 01 of (process data section)
of the telegram
i002 = W02: Word 02 of (process data section)
of the telegram
...
i016 = W16: Word 16 of (process data section)
of the telegram
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
P682
SCB Protocol
2AAHex
P683
*
2ABHex
P684
*
2ACHex
The SCB board can be operated as a
• master for the SCI boards or as a
• communications board (see SCB Operator’s Guide).
Parameter values: 0 = Master for SCI boards
1 = 4-wire USS
2 = 2-wire USS
3 = Peer to Peer
4 = Not assigned
5 = Not assigned
Precondition: The associated SCB board must be logged on
via P090 or P091
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: SCom/SCB BusAddr
Bus address of serial interfaces (see Section "Serial interfaces")
0 to 5
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
read:
write:
0 to 31
1 to 13
_/_
_/_
16
3 / BR
i001=968
i002=0
i003=0
i004=0
i005=0
i006=0
i007=0
i008=0
i009=0
i010=0
i011=0
i012=0
i013=0
i014=0
i015=0
i016=0
3 / BR
−
3 / H BR
0
3/H
SCI module
4-wire USS
2-wire USS
Peer-2-Peer
Option 1
Option 2
Indices: i001 = SST1: Bus address of serial interface 1 (CUSA)
i002 = SCB: Bus address of SCB if P682 = 1, 2
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: SCom/SCB Baud
Baud rate of serial interfaces
Parameter values: 1:
300 baud
8:
38400 baud
2:
600 baud
9:
57600 baud
3: 1200 baud
10: 76800 baud
4: 2400 baud
11: 93750 baud
5: 4800 baud
12: 115200 baud
6: 9600 baud
13: 187500 baud
7: 19200 baud
Indices: i001 = SST1: Baud rate of ser. interface 1 (CUSA)
i002 = SCB: Baud rate of SCB if P682 = 1, 2, 3
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
2
3 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
3 / BR
2
i001=6
i002=6
3 / BR
3 / BR
12-27
Parameter list
10.99
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
*:conf-P
Description
P685
*
2ADHex
SCom/SCB PCV
0 to 127
Number of words (16-bit) in PKW section in the net data block of
the telegram (see Section "Serial interfaces")
Parameter values: 0:
No PKW section
3, 4: PKW section is 3 (ident.,
ind,value), 4 words long
127: Variable PKW length for transmission
of parameter description and texts.
P686
*
2AEHex
Indices: i001 = SST1: Serial interface 1 (CUSA)
i002 = SCB: SCB if P682 = 1, 2
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: SCom/SCB # PrDat
Number of words (16-bit) of process data section in the net data
block of the telegram (see Section "Serial interfaces").
Indices: i001 =
SST1:
Serial interface 1 (CUSA)
i002 =
SCB:
SCB if P682 = 1, 2, 3
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
P687
*
2AFHex
SCom/SCB TlgOFF
Telegram failure time for CUSA and SCB
Shutdown on faults occurs if no correct telegram is received
within the specified time.
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
2
i001=127
i002=127
3 / BR
3 / BR
0 to 16
2
i001=2
i002=2
3 / BR
3 / BR
0 to 6500
[ms]
2
i001=0
i002=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
0 to 1
5
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
i004=0
i005=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
Setting instructions:
• Value 0: No monitoring and no fault shutdown; parameterize
for sporadic (acyclic) telegrams (e.g. OP on SST1).
• If a TB is installed in slot 2 and an SCB in slot 3, then the
setting in i002 is irrelevant.
Indices: i001 = SST1: Serial interface 1 (CUSA)
i002 = SCB: SCB
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0 ms PZD: 4000HEX=1638.4 ms
P689
2B1Hex
SCB Peer2PeerExt
Direct transfer of peer-to-peer receive data of the SCB.
Identification of words in received peer-to-peer telegram which
must be transferred on directly.
Param. values:
0: No immediate transfer (to CUSA only)
1: Direct transfer (incl. transfer to CUSA)
Indices: i001 = W01: Word 01 of (process data section
of telegram)
i002 = W02: Word 02 of (process data section
of telegram)
...
i005 = W05: Word 05 of (process data section
of telegram)
Precondition: P682 = 3 (peer-to-peer protocol)
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
12-28
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
_/_
_/_
10.99
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P690
*
2B2Hex
SCB Act Values
Output of actual values via the serial interface of the SCB board
Defines which parameter must be transferred at which telegram
position.
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
0 to 999
16
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
i004=0
i005=0
i006=0
i007=0
i008=0
i009=0
i010=0
i011=0
i012=0
i013=0
i014=0
i015=0
i016=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
0 to 999
16
i001=968
i002=0
i003=0
i004=0
i005=0
i006=0
i007=0
i008=0
i009=0
i010=0
i011=0
i012=0
i013=0
i014=0
i015=0
i016=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
• Status word 1 (r968) should be assigned to
word 1.
• In the case of double word parameters (type I4),
the associated parameter number must be
entered in two consecutive words or else only the
most significant word will be transferred.
• The length (number of words) of the process data
section in the telegram is set via P685, index i002.
Indices: i001 = W01: Word 01 of (process data section)
of the telegram
i002 = W02: Word 02 of (process data section)
of the telegram
...
i016 = W16: Word 16 of (process data section)
of the telegram
CAUTION: When P682 = 3 (peer-to-peer protocol), a
maximum of 5 words can be transferred (i001 to
i005).
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
Notes:
P694
*
2B6Hex
CB/TB Act Values
Output of actual values via CB or TB
Defines which parameter must be transferred at which telegram
position.
• Status word 1 (r968) should be assigned to
word 1.
• In the case of double word parameters (type I4),
the associated parameter number must be
entered in two consecutive words or else only the
most significant word will be transferred.
Indices: i001= W01: Word 01 of (process data section)
of the telegram
i002= W02: Word 02 of (process data section)
of the telegram
...
i016= W16: Word 16 of (process data section)
of the telegram
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
Notes:
P695
CB/TB TlgOFFTime
0 to 6500
−
3 / BR
*
2B7Hex
Telegram failure time for CB and TB
Shutdown on faults occurs if no correct telegram is received
within the specified time.
Setting instructions:
Value 0:
No monitoring and no fault shutdown;
parameterize for sporadic (acyclic) telegrams.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0 ms PZD: 4000HEX=1638.4 ms
[ms]
10
3 / BR
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-29
_/_
_/_
Parameter list
10.99
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
*:conf-P
Description
P696
CB Parameter 1
Communication Board parameter 1
Refer to documentation of installed COM BOARD
Setting instructions:
• This parameter is relevant only if a Communication Board is
configured and parameterized (P090 or P091 = 1)
• The validity of the setting is monitored by the board.
• If the value is not accepted by the COM BOARD, fault 80
with fault value 5 is displayed.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
0 to 65535
−
0
3 / H BR
3/H
CB Parameter 2
Communication Board parameter 2
See P696
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
0 to 65535
−
0
3 / H BR
3/H
CB Parameter 3
Communication Board parameter 3
See P696
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
0 to 65535
−
0
3 / H BR
3/H
CB Parameter 4
Communication Board parameter 4
See P696
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
0 to 65535
−
0
3 / H BR
3/H
P700
CB Parameter 5
0 to 65535
−
3 / H BR
0
3/H
2BCHex
Communication Board parameter 5
See P696
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
2B8Hex
P697
2B9Hex
P698
2BAHex
P699
2BBHex
_/_
_/_
CB Parameter 6
Communication Board parameter 6
See P696
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
0 to 65535
−
0
3 / H BR
3/H
P702
CB Parameter 7
0 to 65535
−
3 / H BR
0
3/H
2BEHex
Communication Board parameter 7
See P696
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
P701
2BDHex
CB Parameter 8
Communication Board parameter 8
See P696
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
0 to 65535
−
0
3 / H BR
3/H
CB Parameter 9
Communication Board parameter 9
See P696
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
0 to 65535
−
0
3 / H BR
3/H
P705
CB Parameter 10
0 to 65535
−
3 / H BR
0
3/H
2C1Hex
Communication Board parameter 10
See P696
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
5
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
i004=0
i005=0
3 / H BR
3/H
P703
2BFHex
P704
2C0Hex
P706
2C3Hex
CB Parameter 11
Communication Board parameter 11
Indices: i001 - i005
See P696
Type=O2;
12-30
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
0 to 65535
PZD Gr.: 0
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Parameter list
12.11
Diagnostic functions
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
r720
2D0Hex
r721
2D1Hex
r722
2D2Hex
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
SW Version
Software version of the PCBs in positions 1 to 3 of the
electronics box
Indices: i001: SPl1: Software version of board in
slot 1
i002: SPl2: Software version of board in
slot 2
i003: SPl3: Software version of board in
slot 3
Note:
The TSY board has no software version.
The equivalent identifier is always 0.0.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1
PZD Gr.: 0
3
3 /U BR
SW Generat.Date
Date of creation of the CUSA software
Indices: i001: Year: Year
i002: Mon.: Month
i003: Day: Day
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
3
3 /U BR
SW ID
3
3 /U BR
3
3 /U BR
_/_
_/_
Expanded software version code of the PCBs in positions 1 to 3
of the electronics box
Indices: i001: SPl1: Software code of board in slot 1
i002: SPl2: Software code of board in slot 2
i003: SPl3: Software code of board in slot 3
Note:
The TSY board has no software code.
The equivalent code is always 0.0.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1
PZD Gr.: 0
r723
2D3Hex
PCB Code
Identification code of boards in slots 1, 2 and 3 of the electronics
box.
Indices: i001: SPl1: PCB code of board in slot 1
i002: SPl2: PCB code of board in slot 2
i003: SPl3: PCB code of board in slot 3
PCB codes:
CU:
100 - 109
CB:
140 - 149
TB:
130 - 139
SCB: 120 - 129
TSY: 110 - 119
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-31
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
r725
CalcTimeHeadroom
2D5Hex
r730
2DAHex
12-32
10.99
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
Available CPU computation time reserve on CUSA as % of total
computing power. Relevant parameters are sampling time
(P308) and pulse frequency (P761).
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 16384 %
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0 %
PZD Gr.: 0
SCB Diagnosis
SCB diagnostic information
All values displayed in hexadecimal notation
Displayed numbers overflow at FF Hex.
The meaning of individual indices depends of the selected SCB
protocol (P682).
Indices:
i001: flTC Number of error-free telegrams
i002: Terr Number of errored telegrams
i003: Voff USS:
Number of byte frame errors
SCI boards: Number of slave power outages
i004: Toff USS:
Number of overrun errors
SCI boards: Number of fiber optic link interrupts
i005: PnoSUSS:
Parity error
SCI boards: Number of missing response
telegrams
i006: STxL USS:
STX error
SCI boards: Number of search telegrams for
slave acceptance
i007: ETX ETX-error
i008: BcCCUSS:
Block check error
SCI boards: Number of configuration telegrams
i009: L/KL USS/Peer to Peer: Incorrect telegram length
SCI boards: Highest terminal numbers
required acc. to PZD
connection (P554 to P631)
i010: T/An USS:
Timeout
SCI boards: Analog inputs/outputs required
acc. to PZD connection
of setpoint channel and actual value
output via SCI (P664).
i011: Res1 Reserved
i012: Res2 Reserved
i013: Warn SCB-DPR alarm word
i014: Sl1? Setting indicating whether slave 1 is needed and, if
yes, of what type
0: No slave needed
1: SCI1
2: SCI2
i015: Sl2? Setting indicating whether slave 2 is needed and, if
yes, of what type
0: No slave needed
1: SCI1
2: SCI2
i016: IniF SCI boards: Initialization error
Type=L2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
−
3 / BR
24
3 / H BR
_/_
_/_
[%]
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
r731
CB/TB Diagnosis
2DBHex
For detailed information please refer to the operating manuals of
the relevant Com board (CB) or Tech board (TB).
Type=L2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
r748
2ECHex
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
Trip Time
Times of fault events (reading of hours run counter (r013) at the
time a fault occurred)
Indices:
Day
Hours
Seconds
Latest fault (1)
i001=S1-d
i002=S1-h
i003=S1-s
Last acknowledged fault (2)
i004=S2-d
i005=S2-h
i006=S2-s
2nd last acknowledged fault (3) i007=S3-d
i008=S3-h
i009=S3-s
...
...
...
...
Oldest stored fault (8)
i022=S8-d
i023=S8-h
i024=S8-s
Description of faults in:
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
32
3 / H BR
24
2 / BR
_/_
_/_
r947
Fault number
r949
Fault value
r951
Fault number list
P952 Number of faults
PZD Gr.: 0
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-33
Parameter list
12.12
10.99
Gating unit
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
r764
Modulation Depth
Control factor of closed-loop control for gating unit.
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 400 %
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 %
PZD: 4000HEX=400 %
2FCHex
12.13
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
−
3 / BR
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
[%]
Factory parameters
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P789
0 to 65535
−
0
3 / BR
4 / BR
315Hex
RAM Access Value
Content of a memory location on the CUSA board
Type=L2; PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P799
*
31FHex
Special Access
Parameter for special access
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0
0 to 65535
−
0
3 / BR
3 / BR
12-34
_/_
_/_
_/_
_/_
PZD Gr.: 0
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
12.14
Parameter list
Profile parameters
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
*:conf-P
Description
P918
CB Bus Address
Protocol-dependent bus address for communication boards: see
board documentation
Note:
The validity of the bus address is monitored by the
Com Board. If its value is not accepted by COM
BOARD, fault F080 with fault value 5 is displayed
Precondition: P090 = 1 or P091 = 1 (Communication board
logged on)
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
0 to 200
−
3
3 / H BR
3/H
P927
*
39FHex
Parameter Access
Enabling of interfaces for parameterization
See P053 for description.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
0 to 31
−
6
3 / BR
3 / BR
P928
*
3A0Hex
Src Base/Reserve
Source for basic/reserve setting switchover command (control
word 2, bit 30); this parameter is identical to P590.
See P590 for description.
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
0 to 5001
−
1005
3 / BR
3 / BR
396Hex
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-35
_/_
_/_
Parameter list
10.99
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
r947
Fault Memory
3B3Hex
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
64
2 / BR
Fault Value
Fault value of faults, facilitates troubleshooting for a variety of
parameters.
The fault values are stored in the same indices as the
associated fault numbers (r947) - see example in r947.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
64
3 / BR
Fault Texts
List of fault texts; every fault text is stored under the same index
as its fault number.
Example (cf. r947): Fault 35 is stored in r947, i009.
This is (r951, i035): ’Ext.fault1’.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
116
2 / BR
Display of faults which caused the last 8 fault events (r748); up
to 8 faults can be stored for each event. Each fault has its own
fault number (see list of faults, Section 7). For plain text
information associated with fault numbers: See r951.
Indices:
Latest fault (1)
Last acknowledged fault (2)
2nd last acknowledged fault (3)
...
Oldest fault stored (8)
Fault 1
Fault 8
i001=S1-1
i008=S1-8
i009=S2-1
i016=S2-8
i017=S3-1
i024=S3-8
Fault 2
...
i002=S1-2 ...
i010=S2-2 ...
i018=S3-2 ...
i057=S8-1 i058=S8-2 ...
i064=S8-8
Notes: A value of "0" means "No fault".
In the event of a power failure, only the current and last
acknowledged fault are stored. Indices 17 to 64 are then
reset to 0. See P952 for the number of stored fault events.
Example of a fault:
Last acknowledged fault (2)
Index
r947
r949
Index
r748
9
35
0
4
62
10
37
2
5
1
11
0
0
6
7
12
13
14
15
16
Fault time (r748): after 62 days, 1 hour, 7 sec
operating hours
Faults occurrences (r947):
Fault value (r949):
35
No further details
37
2
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
r949
3B5Hex
r951
3B7Hex
12-36
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
_/_
_/_
10.99
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
*:conf-P
P952
# of Faults
0 to 8
−
2 / BR
*
3B8Hex
Number of faults
Contains the number of fault events stored in the fault memory
(max. 8).
If the parameter is set to "0", the entire contents of the diagnostic
memory (r748 - fault time, r947 - fault number, r949 - fault value)
are erased.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
0
2 / BR
r953
Warning Param1
Alarm parameter 1
If one of the alarms numbered from 1 to 16 occurs, the
corresponding bar in the 7-segment display lights up.
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
3B9Hex
16
15
8
7
14
13
6
5
Type=V2;
r954
3BAHex
12
11
4
3
10
2
9
1
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
Warning Param2
Alarm parameter 2
If one of the alarms numbered from 17 to 32 occurs, the
corresponding bar in the 7-segment display lights up.
32
31
24
23
30
29
22
21
Type=V2;
28
27
20
19
26
25
18
17
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
r955
Warning Param3
3BBHex
Alarm parameter 3
If one of the alarms numbered from 33 to 48 occurs, the
corresponding bar in the 7-segment display lights up.
48
47
40
39
46
45
38
37
Type=V2;
r956
3BCHex
62
61
54
53
Type=V2;
3BDHex
42
41
34
33
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
Warning Param4
Alarm parameter 4
If one of the alarms numbered from 49 to 64 occurs, the
corresponding bar in the 7-segment display lights up.
64
63
56
55
r957
44
43
36
35
60
59
52
51
58
57
50
49
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
Warning Param5
Alarm parameter 5
If one of the alarms numbered from 65 to 80 occurs, the
corresponding bar in the 7-segment display lights up.
80
79
72
71
78
77
70
69
Type=V2;
76
75
68
67
74
73
66
65
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-37
_/_
_/_
Parameter list
10.99
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
*:conf-P
Description
r958
Warning Param6
3BEHex
Alarm parameter 6 (CB alarms)
If one of the alarms numbered from 81 to 96 occurs, the
corresponding bar in the 7-segment display lights up.
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
Profile #
Profibus-specific parameter
Note:
This parameter cannot be selected on the PMU;
the value cannot be displayed on the OP.
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 16384
Type=OS; PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
−
3 / BR
r967
Control Word 1
−
2 / BR
3C7Hex
Visualization parameter for control word 1 (bits 0 - 15)
Identical to r550 (control word 1)
Type=V2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
−
2 / BR
96
95
88
87
94
93
86
85
Type=V2;
r959
3BFHex
92
91
84
83
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
90
89
82
81
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
Warning Param7
Alarm parameter 6 (TB alarms 1)
If one of the alarms numbered from 97 to 112 occurs, the
corresponding bar in the 7-segment display lights up.
112
110
111
109
102
104
101
103
Type=V2;
108
106
107
105
100
98
97
99
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
r960
Warning Param8
3C0Hex
Alarm parameter 6 (TB alarms 2)
If one of the alarms numbered from 113 to 128 occurs, the
corresponding bar in the 7-segment display lights up.
128
126
127
125
118
120
117
119
Type=V2;
r964
3C4Hex
124
122
123
121
116
114
113
115
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
Drive ID
Drive identification
Character string of the "Text" type. The first 2 characters contain
the Ident number for drive identification on the Profibus. The
remaining 24 characters contain the model name for displaying
the drive model on visualization systems.
Parameter values:
2 Byte: Ident number: 8022Hex
24 Byte: Model name (drive type): "MASTERDRIVES FC"
Note:
This parameter cannot be selected on the PMU;
the value cannot be displayed on the OP.
Type=VS; PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
r965
3C5Hex
r968
3C8Hex
12-38
Status Word 1
Visualization parameter for status word 1 (bits 0 - 15)
Identical to r552 (status word 1)
Type=V2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
_/_
_/_
10.99
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P970
Factory Settings
Parameter reset to factory settings
*
3CAHex
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
0 to 1
−
3/ B
1
3/ B
−
0
3 / BR
3 / BR
Parameter values:
0: Parameter reset: All parameters are reset to their original
values (factory settings). This parameter is then
automatically reset to "1".
1: No parameter reset
Note: The same function can be selected with P052 = 1.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0 to 1
P971
*
3CBHex
EEPROM Saving
Transfer to the EEPROM of parameter values stored in the RAM
(to protect data when power is disconnected/fails) when the
value of parameter changes from 0 to 1.
The parameter must be set to 0 manually.
Parameter values:
0: Change parameters
1: Save parameters
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
r980
Par # List Pt1
List of available parameter numbers, part 1
The parameter numbers are listed in ascending sequence.
The first 0 to appear in the list indicates that no further
parameters are available.
Indices:
The value range of the index extends from 1 to 116.
Index 116 has the special function of referring to the parameter
number which contains the next part of the complete list. A value
of 0 stored in index 116 indicates that there are no further parts
of the complete list.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
116
3 / BR
Par # List Pt2
List of available parameter numbers, part 2
See r980.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
116
3 / BR
Par # List Pt3
List of available parameter numbers, part 3
See r980.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
116
3 / BR
r983
Par # List Pt4
116
3 / BR
3D7Hex
List of available parameter numbers, part 4
See r980.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
r984
Par # List Pt5
116
3 / BR
3D8Hex
List of available parameter numbers, part 5
See r980.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
116
3 / BR
3D4Hex
r981
3D5Hex
r982
3D6Hex
r985
3D9Hex
Par # List Pt6
List of available parameter numbers, part 6
See r980.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-39
_/_
_/_
Parameter list
10.99
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
r986
Par # List Pt7
3DAHex
List of available parameter numbers, part 7
See r980.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
r987
3DBHex
r988
3DCHex
r989
3DDHex
r990
3DEHex
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
116
3 / BR
Par # List Pt8
List of available parameter numbers, part 8
See r980.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
116
3 / BR
Par # List Pt9
List of available parameter numbers, part 9
See r980.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
116
3 / BR
Par # List Pt10
List of available parameter numbers, part 10
See r980.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
116
3 / BR
Par # List chg1
116
3 / BR
116
3 / BR
116
3 / BR
List of altered parameters, part 1
The parameter numbers are listed in ascending sequence.
The first 0 to appear in the list indicates that no further
parameters are available.
Indices:
The value range of the index extends from 1 to 116.
Index 116 has the special function of referring to the parameter
number which contains the next part of the complete list. A value
of 0 stored in index 116 indicates that there are no further parts
of the complete list.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
r991
3DFHex
r992
3E0Hex
12-40
Par # List chg2
List of altered parameters, part 2
See r990.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
Par # List chg3
List of altered parameters, part 3
See r990.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
PZD Gr.: 0
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
_/_
_/_
10.99
Process data
13
Process data
13.1
Control word
Introduction and
example of
application
Example of source
connection
Command
ON/OFF1 (GRD)
Operating states can be read in visualization parameter r001: e.g.
READY FOR ON: r001 = 009
The functional sequences are described in the order in which they
occur.
An individual source can be parameterized for every control command
(fixed values, digital inputs, PMU, PZD part of the telegram from the
automation devices).
The selection parameters for the sources are, with the exception of
P590 and P591, indexed 2x as follows:
Index i001: Basic setting (GRD)
Index i002: Reserve setting (RES)
One parameter is available to "connect up“ the source(s) for the control
commands.
The basic setting for the ON command (control word bit 0, control word
1) must be "connected up“ to digital input 1 of the CU (terminal
-X101:16):
Control word 1 table shows that the factory setting of parameter P554.1
is 1010 for the basic setting of the ON command source.
Table A for the possible sources of the ON command specifies that
1010 is the "PMU operator control panel“ source.
Look for the parameter value for the required source in Tables X and A.
The result for digital input 1 (BE1) on the CU can be found in Table X, it
is 1001.
This parameter value must now be entered in parameter P554.1.
Parameter Possible sources
P554.1
Tab. X,A
Parameter value Required source connection
1001
BE1 terminal -X101:16
A HIGH signal at terminal -X101:16 switches on the converter while a
LOW signal switches it off.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-1
Process data
NOTES
10.99
♦ Multiple connections are permitted!
♦ The control word commands "OFF2“ (bit 1), "OFF3“ (bit 2) and
"Acknowledge“ (bit 7) are always simultaneously effective from 3
sources (can be parameterized)!
♦ "Acknowledge“ (bit 7) is always additionally effective from the PMU!
♦ If the "ON“ command (bit 0) is connected to a serial interface
(SCom, CB/TB, SCB-SCom), then an "OFF2" or "OFF3" command
must also be parameterized on the terminal strip. Otherwise, the
converter cannot be switched off via a defined command in the
event of a communications failure!
13.1.1
Display of control word on PMU seven-segment display
15
12
5
7
6
9
11
13
14
3
4
0
28
21
22
25
27
29
30
23
1
2
Control word 1
13-2
31
8
10
19
20
24
26
17
18
16
Control word 2
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
13.1.2
Process data
Control word 1 (visualization parameter r550 or r967)
The factory setting applies only when P077 = 0.
Designation
High / Low values
Parameter No.
Fact. setting
Bit No. (meaning)
(1 = High, 0 = Low)
GRD (RES)
GRD (RES)
sources
(P077 = 0)
see 8.1.4
P554.1 (2)
1010 (1001)
Tab. X,A
P555.1 (2)
0001 (1002)
Tab. X,B
P556.1 (2)
0001 (0001)
Tab. X,B
P557.1 (2)
0001 (0001)
Tab. X,B
P561.1 (2)
0001 (0001)
Tab. X,F
P565.1 (2)
0000 (1003)
Tab. X,C
P566.1 (2)
0000 (0000)
Tab. X,C
P567.1 (2)
2001 (2001)
Tab. X,C
ON / OFF1 (stop)
0
OFF2 (electrical)
1
ON
OFF1
1
0
ON
OFF2
1
3
&
Reserved
2
Inverter enable
0
Possible
Enabled
Inhibited
1
0
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
Reserved
6
Acknowledge
ON
1
7
0
1010 (fixed)
Inching 1 1)
8
Inching 2 1)
9
PZD control by PLC
10
Inching 1 ON
Inching 1 OFF
1
0
Inching 2 ON
Inching 2 OFF
1
0
Control
No control
1
0
P568.1 (2)
0000 (0000)
Tab. X,C
P569.1 (2)
0000 (0000)
Tab. X,C
SCom1/2
≥1
CB / TB
SCB 2
Reserved
11
Reserved
12
Reserved
13
Reserved
14
External fault 1
15
No fault
External fault 1
1
0
P575.1 (2)
0001 (0001)
Tab. X,D
1) There is no inching setpoint 1 or inching setpoint 2 on the AFE
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-3
Process data
13.1.3
10.99
Control word 2 (visualization parameter r551)
The factory setting applies only when P077 = 0.
Designation
High / Low values
Parameter No.
Fact. setting
Bit No. (meaning)
(1 = High, 0 = Low)
GRD (RES)
GRD (RES)
sources
(P077 = 0)
see 8.1.4
P576.1 (2)
1004 (1004)
Tab. X,I
P578.1 (2)
0000 (0000)
Tab. X,I
P586.1 (2)
0001 (0001)
Tab. X,G
P587.1 (2)
0000 (0000)
Tab. X,I
P588.1 (2)
0001 (0001)
Tab. X,G
P589.1 (2)
0001 (0001)
Tab. X,G
1005
Tab. X,I
Ext. 24 V
16
3)
Ext. 24 V ok
Ext. 24 V not ok
1
0
Reserved
17
Reserve data set
18
4)
RDS 2
RDS 1
1
0
19
Reserved
20
Reserved
21
Reserved
22
Reserved
23
Reserved
24
Reserved
25
Reserved
External fault 2
26
Slave AFE
27
External alarm 1
28
External alarm 2
29
Basic / reserve
30
31
Possible
5)
No fault
External fault 2
1
0
Slave AFE
Master AFE
1
0
No alarm
External alarm 1
1
0
No alarm
External alarm 2
1
0
Reserve setting
Basic setting
1
0
P590
Reserved
3) On MASTERDRIVES CUVC, this bit corresponds to bit 0 for the data set of the
setpoint channel
4) On MASTERDRIVES CUVC, this bit corresponds to bit 0 for the data set of the motor
5) The AFE always uses a main contactor without check-back
13-4
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
13.1.4
Process data
Sources for control words 1 and 2
Table X (external terminals)
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
4101
4102
4103
4104
4105
4106
4107
4108
4109
4110
4111
4112
4113
4114
4115
4116
4201
4202
4203
4204
4205
4206
4207
4208
4209
4210
4211
4212
4213
4214
4215
4216
5001
BE1 terminal -X101:16
BE2 terminal -X101:17
BE3 terminal -X101:18
Assigned
BE5 terminal -X101:20
SCI, slave1, terminal 01
SCI, slave1, terminal 02
SCI, slave1, terminal 03
SCI, slave1, terminal 04
SCI, slave1, terminal 05
SCI, slave1, terminal 06
SCI, slave1, terminal 07
SCI, slave1, terminal 08
SCI, slave1, terminal 09
SCI, slave1, terminal 10
SCI, slave1, terminal 11
SCI, slave1, terminal 12
SCI, slave1, terminal 13
SCI, slave1, terminal 14
SCI, slave1, terminal 15
SCI, slave1, terminal 16
SCI, slave2, terminal 01
SCI, slave2, terminal 02
SCI, slave2, terminal 03
SCI, slave2, terminal 04
SCI, slave2, terminal 05
SCI, slave2, terminal 06
SCI, slave2, terminal 07
SCI, slave2, terminal 08
SCI, slave2, terminal 09
SCI, slave2, terminal 10
SCI, slave2, terminal 11
SCI, slave2, terminal 12
SCI, slave2, terminal 13
SCI, slave2, terminal 14
SCI, slave2, terminal 15
SCI, slave2, terminal 16
TSY, terminal 1
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-5
Process data
10.99
Table A
0000
1010
2001
3001
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
Constant value 0
PMU operator panel
SCom1 word 1
CB/TB word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 4
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5
Table B
0001
1010
2001
3001
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
Constant value 1
PMU operator panel
SCom1 word 1
CB/TB word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 4
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5
Table C
0000
2001
3001
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
Constant value 0
SCom1 word 1
CB/TB word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 4
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5
Table D
0001
2001
3001
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
13-6
Constant value 1
SCom1 word 1
CB/TB word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 4
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Process data
Table E
0000
0001
1010
2001
3001
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
Constant value 0
Constant value 1
PMU operator panel
SCom1 word 1
CB/TB word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 4
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5
Table F
0000
0001
2001
3001
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
Constant value 0
Constant value 1
SCom1 word 1
CB/TB word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 4
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5
Table G
0001
2004
3004
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
Constant value 1
SCom1 word 4
CB/TB word 4
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 4
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5
Table H
0001
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
No MC checkback
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 4
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-7
Process data
10.99
Table I
0000
0001
2004
3004
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
13-8
Constant value 0
Constant value 1
SCom1 word 4
CB/TB word 4
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 4
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
13.1.5
Process data
Description of the control word bits
Bit 0: ON / OFF1 command (↑ "ON") / (L "OFF1")
Condition
Positive edge change from L to H (L → H) in READY FOR ON (009)
state.
Result
♦ PRECHARGING (010)
The precharging contactor is closed.
The DC link is precharged, the main contactor then closed and the
precharging contactor opened.
♦ READY TO RUN (011)
♦ RUN (014).
Bit 1: OFF2 command (L "OFF2") (electrical)
Condition
Result
LOW signal
♦ The inverter pulses are inhibited and the main contactor opened.
♦ STARTING LOCKOUT (008) until the command is withdrawn.
NOTE
The OFF2 command is simultaneously effective from three sources
(P555, P556 and P557)!
Bit 2: Reserved
Bit 3: Inverter enable command (H "Inverter enable") / (L "Inverter inhibit")
Condition
Result
Condition
Result
HIGH signal and READY TO RUN (011)
♦ RUN (014)
The inverter pulses are enabled.
LOW signal
♦ In RUN (014):
Change to READY TO RUN (011) display, inverter pulses are
inhibited.
Bit 4: Reserved
Bit 5: Reserved
Bit 6: Reserved
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-9
Process data
10.99
Bit 7: Acknowledge command (↑ "Acknowledge")
Condition
Positive edge change from L to H (L → H) in FAULT (007) state.
Result
♦ Reset all current faults after they have been transferred to the
diagnostics memory.
♦ STARTING LOCKOUT (008) if no further faults are active.
♦ FAULT (007) if other faults are still active.
NOTE
The acknowledge command is simultaneously effective from three
sources (P565, P566 and P567) and always from the PMU!
Bit 8: Inching 1 ON command (↑ "Inching 1 ON") / (L "Inching 1 OFF")
Condition
Positive edge change from L to H (L → H) in the READY FOR ON state
(009).
Result
♦ An ON command is automatically issued (refer to control word bit 0).
LOW signal
Condition
Result
♦ An OFF1 command is automatically issued (refer to control word
bit 0).
Bit 9: Inching 2 ON command (↑ "Inching 2 ON") / (L "Inching 2 OFF")
Condition
Positive edge change from L to H (L → H) in the READY FOR ON state
(009).
Result
♦ An ON command is automatically issued (refer to control word bit 0).
LOW signal
Condition
Result
♦ An OFF1 command is automatically issued (refer to control word
bit 0).
Bit 10: Control via PLC command (H "Control via PLC")
Condition
HIGH signal; The process data PZD (control word, setpoints) sent via
the SCom1 interface of the CU, the CB/TB interface (option) and the
SCom/SCB interface (option) are evaluated only in the case of an
accepted command.
Result
♦ When several interfaces are in operation, only the process data of
the interfaces sending an H signal are evaluated.
♦ With an L signal, the last values remain in the appropriate dual-port
RAM of the interface.
NOTE
13-10
An H signal is displayed in visualization parameter r550 "Control
word 1" if one of the interfaces sends an H signal!
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Process data
Bit 11: Reserved
Bit 12: Regenerative feedback enable command (H "Regenerative feedback enable")
Condition
Result
HIGH signal
♦ Regenerative feedback operation is enabled.
Bit 13: Reserved
Bit 14: Reserved
Bit 15: External fault 1 command (L "External fault 1")
Condition
Result
LOW signal
♦ FAULT (007) and fault message (F035).
The inverter pulses are inhibited and the main contactor opened.
See Section "Fault and alarm messages"
Bit 16: Monitoring of external 24 V voltage supply (L "24V not o.k." /
H "24V o.k.")
Condition
Result
LOW signal
♦ Alarm A039 in operating states STARTING LOCKOUT (008) and
READY FOR ON (009).
♦ Fault F007 in operating states PRECHARGING (010), READY TO
RUN (011) and RUN (014).
Bit 17: Reserved
Bit 18: Reserve data set RDS bit 0 command (L "RDS1" / H "RDS2")
Condition
READY FOR ON (009), PRECHARGING (010) or READY TO RUN
(011)
A HIGH signal activates RDS2, and a LOW signal RDS1.
Result
♦ The parameter settings of the appropriate reserve data set in the
setpoint channel and closed-loop/open-loop control are activated.
See Section "Function diagrams".
Bit 19: Reserved
Bit 20: Reserved
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-11
Process data
10.99
Bit 21: Reserved
Bit 22: Reserved
Bit 23: Reserved
Bit 24: Reserved
Bit 25: Reserved
Bit 26: External fault 2 command (L "External fault 2")
Condition
LOW signal; Command is not activated until converter switches to
READY TO RUN (011) and elapse of a 200 ms timer.
Result
♦ FAULT (007) and fault message (F036).
The inverter pulses are inhibited and the main contactor (if installed)
opened.
See Section "Fault and alarm messages".
Bit 27: Slave/master drive command (H "Slave AFE") / (L "Master drive")
Slave AFE
♦ The closed-loop control operates with an external line active current
setpoint.
The DC link voltage is specified by the master AFE.
Master AFE
♦ The closed-loop control operates with an internal line active current
setpoint (= output of DC link voltage controller). The DC link voltage
is maintained constantly at the set value.
Bit 28: External alarm 1 command (L "External alarm 1")
Condition
Result
LOW signal
♦ The converter continues to operate in its current status. An alarm
message (A015) is output.
See Section "Fault and alarm messages".
Bit 29: External alarm 2 command (L "External alarm 2")
Condition
Result
13-12
LOW signal
♦ The converter continues to operate in its current status. An alarm
message (A016) is output.
See Section "Fault and alarm messages".
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Process data
Bit 30: Select reserve/basic setting (H "Reserve setting") / (L "Basic setting")
Condition
Result
Condition
Result
HIGH signal
♦ The parameter values for the reserve setting for the control word
itself, the setpoint channel and closed-loop control are activated.
LOW signal
♦ The parameter values for the basic setting for the control word itself,
the setpoint channel and closed-loop control are activated.
Bit 31: Reserved
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-13
Process data
13.2
10.99
Status word
Introduction and
example of
application
Example of wiring to
a destination
Status words are process data as defined by the explanation in Section
"Process data".
A "destination" at which the bit status can be identified (digital outputs
of CUSA, SCI 1/2 terminals, TSY terminals) can be parameterized for
each bit in a status word.
One parameter is available for "wiring up" the destination for each
status bit.
As shown below, the selection parameters have three indices:
Index i001 Selection of a terminal on the CUSA / PEU board
(basic unit)
Index i002 Selection of a terminal on the SCI 1/2 board (option)
Index i003 Selection of a terminal on the TSY board (option)
The message "motor operation" (status word 1, bit 14) must be "wired
up" to digital output 3 (BA3) on the CUSA (terminal X102:29/33) as a
high-active signal:
♦ "Wiring" of a status bit to a digital output on the CUSA is
parameterized via index i001.
♦ The table for status word 1 indicates that the message "Motor
operation" is assigned to parameter P614.
♦ Look for the parameter value for the desired destination in the same
table. The result is 1003 for digital output 3 on the CU.
This parameter value must now be set in parameter P614.1.
Bit #
Meaning
Parameter
Bit 14
Motor operation
P614.1
Parameter value Desired destination connection
1003
BA3 terminal -X102:29/33
When a High signal is applied to terminal -X102:29/33, the AFE
operates in generator mode and, in the case of a Low signal, in motor
mode.
If a value assigned to a terminal (digital output BA) is allocated to a
destination once in a selection parameter, then it will not be available in
the same index of any other selection parameter as a terminal is only
suitable for the output of one status bit.
NOTE
Faults, alarms and starting lockout (HIGH active) are displayed as
LOW active via the terminal strip (digital outputs).
This also applies to any option boards!
See Section "Digital outputs".
13.2.1
Status word 1 (visualization parameter r552 or r968)
PMU display
"Status word 1"
15
6
13-14
12
5
7
9
11
13
14
3
4
8
10
1
2
0
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Bit #
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Process data
Value
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 12
0
Not ready for ON
1
Ready to RUN
0
Not ready to RUN
1
Run
0
Inv. pulses inhibited
1
Fault
0
No fault
1
No OFF2
0
Bit 15
Value
Destination
P600.x
0000
No destination
1001
Assigned (precharging)
1002
Assigned (main contactor)
x=1
1003
BA3, -X102:29/33
1004
BA4, -X102:32/33
0000
No destination
4101
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA1
OFF2
4102
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA2
Reserved
4103
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA3
4104
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA4
4105
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA5
4106
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA6
4107
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA7
4108
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA8
4109
SCI 2 only, slave 1, BA9
4110
SCI 2 only, slave 1, BA10
4111
SCI 2 only, slave 1, BA11
4112
SCI 2 only, slave 1, BA12
4201
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA1
4202
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA2
4203
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA3
P601.x
P602.x
P603.x
1
Starting lockout
0
No starting lockout
1
Alarm
0
No alarm
1
No setp./act.v. deviation
0
Setp./act. val. deviation
1
PZD control requested
0
(not permitted)
P604.x
P606.x
P607.x
P608.x
always 1
x=2
Reserved
1
"Undervoltage" fault
0
No "Undervolts." fault
1
MC energized
0
MC not energized
4204
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA4
Reserved
4205
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA5
4206
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA6
Bit 13
Bit 14 1)
destin.
Ready for ON
Bit 10
Bit 11
Select
0 = Low
1
Bit 5
Bit 6
1 = High
P611.x
P612.x
1
Generator operation
P614.x
0
Motor operation
4207
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA7
Reserved
4208
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA8
4209
SCI 2 only, slave 2, BA9
4210
SCI 2 only, slave 2, BA10
4211
SCI 2 only, slave 2, BA11
4212
SCI 2 only, slave 2, BA12
0000
No destination
5001
TSY, BA1
5002
TSY, BA2
x=3
1) This bit corresponds to bit "CW/CCW rotation" on the MASTERDRIVES CUVC
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-15
Process data
13.2.2
10.99
Status word 2 (visualization parameter r553)
PMU display
"Status word 2"
31
22
13-16
28
21
23
25
27
29
30
19
20
24
26
17
18
16
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Bit #
Process data
Value
1 = High
Select
0 = Low
destin.
Bit 16
Reserved
Bit 17
Reserved
Bit 18 2)
Bit 19
Bit 20
Bit 21
Bit 22
Bit 23
Bit 24
Value
x=1
1
Current limit active
0
Current limit not active
1
External fault 1
0
No external fault 1
1
External fault 2
0
No external fault 2
1
External alarm
0
No external alarm
1
AFE i2t alarm
0
No AFE i2t alarm
1
AFE overtemp. fault
0
No AFE overtemp. fault
1
AFE overtemp. alarm
0
No AFE overtemp. alarm
Destination
0000
No destination
1001
Assigned
1002
Assigned
1003
BA3, -X102:29/33
P619.x
1004
BA4, -X102:32/33
P620.x
0000
No destination
4101
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA1
4102
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA2
4103
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA3
4104
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA4
4105
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA5
4106
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA6
4107
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA7
4108
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA8
4109
SCI 2 only, slave 1, BA9
4110
SCI 2 only, slave 1, BA10
P618.x
P621.x
P622.x
P623.x
P624.x
Bit 25
Reserved
Bit 26
Reserved
4111
SCI 2 only, slave 1, BA11
Bit 27
Reserved
4112
SCI 2 only, slave 1, BA12
Bit 28
Reserved
4201
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA1
4202
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA2
Bit 29 3)
1
PC contactor energized
0
PC cntact. not energized
4203
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA3
Reserved
4204
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA4
4205
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA5
4206
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA6
4207
SCI 1/2, Slave 2, BA7
4208
SCI 1/2, Slave 2, BA8
4209
SCI 2 only, Slave 2, BA9
4210
SCI 2 only, Slave 2, BA10
4211
SCI 2 only, Slave 2, BA11
4212
SCI 2 only, Slave 2, BA12
0000
No destination
5001
TSY, BA1
5002
TSY, BA2
Bit 30
Bit 31
x=2
1
Precharging active
0
Precharging not active
P629.x
P631.x
x=3
2)
3)
This bit corresponds to "Overspeed" bit on the MASTERDRIVES CUVC
This bit corresponds to "Bypassing contactor energized" bit on the MASTERDRIVES
CUVC
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-17
Process data
13.2.3
10.99
Description of the status word bits
Bit 0: "Ready for ON" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
STARTING LOCKOUT (008) or READY FOR ON (009) state
♦ The power supply, open-loop control and closed-loop control are all
operative.
♦ The inverter pulses are inhibited.
Bit 1: "Ready to Run" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
PRECHARGING (010) or READY TO RUN (011) state
♦ The power supply, open-loop control and closed-loop control are all
operative.
♦ The converter is switched on.
♦ Precharging has been completed.
♦ The AFE inverter pulses are disabled and Ud control is disabled.
Bit 2: "Run" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
RUN state (014)
♦ The converter is in operation.
♦ The AFE inverter pulses are enabled.
♦ Ud control is in operation.
Bit 3: "Fault" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
FAULT state (007)
♦ A fault (fault type irrelevant) has occurred.
Output at terminal strip (CUSA, TSY, SCI1/2) with L signal.
Bit 4: "OFF2" signal (L)
LOW signal
Meaning
OFF2 command is active
♦ An OFF2 command (control word bit 1) has been issued.
Bit 5: Reserved
13-18
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Process data
Bit 6: "Starting lockout" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
STARTING LOCKOUT state (008)
♦ The power supply, open-loop control and closed-loop control are all
operative.
♦ The signal is continuously applied as long as an OFF2 command via
control word bit 1 or an ON command via control word bit 0 is active
(edge evaluation).
Output at terminal strip (CUSA, SCB1) with L signal.
Bit 7: "Alarm" signal" (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
Alarm (Axxx)
♦ An alarm (type irrelevant) has occurred.
♦ This signal remains active until the cause has been eliminated.
Output at terminal strip (CUSA, SCB1) with L signal.
Bit 8: "Setpoint/actual value deviation" signal (L)
LOW signal
Meaning
"Setpoint/actual value deviation" alarm (A034)
♦ There is currently a deviation between the Vd setpoint and Vd actual
value which is greater than the setting in P517 (set/act.val.dev. Vd)
and active for longer than P518 (set/act.val.dev.time).
♦ The bit is reset to an H signal as soon as the deviation decreases to
below the setting in parameter P517.
Bit 9: "PZD control requested" signal (H)
HIGH signal
This signal is always active.
Bit 10: Reserved
Bit 11: "Undervoltage fault" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
"Undervoltage in DC link" fault (F008)
♦ The DC link voltage has dropped below the permissible limit value.
See Section "Fault and alarm messages"
Output at terminal strip (CUSA, TSY, SCI1/2) with L signal.
Bit 12: "MC energized" signal (H)
HIGH signal
The main contactor is energized.
WARNING
On the AFE, this status bit is always connected to digital output 2 on
the CUSA. A different wiring is not possible and is also not allowed
because the AFE inverter might be destroyed if the main contactor is
activated before the DC link has been precharged.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-19
Process data
10.99
Bit 13: Reserved
Bit 14: "Motor operation" signal (L)
LOW signal
AFE operates in rectifier mode (active current >= 0)
Bit 15: Reserved
Bit 16: Reserved
Bit 17: Reserved
Bit 18: "Current limit active" signal (L)
LOW signal
Meaning
AFE operates at the present current limit setting
♦ If the AFE output current is limited, the DC-link voltage can no
longer be regulated to the selected setpoint.
Output at terminal strip (CUSA, SCB1) with L signal.
Bit 19: "External fault 1" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
" External fault 1"
♦ An "External fault 1" is active in control word bit 1.
Output at terminal strip (CUSA, SCB1) with L signal.
Bit 20: "External fault 2" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
" External fault 2"
♦ An "External fault 2" is active in control word bit 26.
Output at terminal strip (CUSA, SCB1) with L signal.
Bit 21: "External alarm" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
"External alarm"
♦ An "External alarm 1" is active in control word bit 28 or an "External
alarm 2" in control word bit 29.
Output at terminal strip (CUSA, SCB1) with L signal.
Bit 22: "AFE i2t alarm" signal (H)
HIGH signal
"AFE i2t alarm" (A025)
Meaning
♦ If the converter continues to operate under the current load
conditions, the AFE will be thermally overloaded.
Output at terminal strip (CUSA, SCB1) with L signal.
13-20
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Process data
Bit 23: "AFE overtemperature fault" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
"Inverter temperature too high" fault (F023)
♦ The inverter temperature limit value has been exceeded.
See Section "Fault and alarm messages".
Output at terminal strip (CUSA, SCB1) with L signal.
Bit 24: "AFE overtemperature alarm" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
"Inverter temperature too high" alarm (A022)
♦ Alarm-tripping temperature threshold of inverter has been exceeded.
See Section "Fault and alarm messages".
Output at terminal strip (CUSA, SCB1) with L signal
Bit 25: Reserved
Bit 26: Reserved
Bit 27: Reserved
Bit 28: Reserved
Bit 29: "PC energized" signal (H)
HIGH signal
The precharging contactor is energized.
WARNING
The status bit is always connected to terminal -X9 on the AFE. A
different wiring is not possible and is also not allowed because the AFE
inverter might be destroyed if the main contactor is activated before the
DC link has been precharged.
Bit 30: Reserved
Bit 31: "Precharging active" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
PRECHARGING state (010)
♦ The DC link is precharged as soon as an ON command is issued.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-21
10.99
Faults and alarms
14
Faults and alarms
14.1
Faults
General information about faults
The available information for each fault event comprises the following
parameters:
Parameter
r947
Fault number
r949
Fault value
r951
Fault texts
P952
Number of faults
r748
Fault time
If a fault message is not acknowledged before the electronics supply
voltage is disconnected, then the same fault message will be active
again when the supply is next turned on. The drive cannot be started
until the message has been acknowledged (exception: Automatic
restart function is selected, see P366).
Fault messages
No.
Description of fault
Remedial measures
F002
Precharging
The DC-link voltage failed to reach the minimum limit (≈
P071 line supply voltage) during precharging.
The maximum precharging time (P326) has been
exceeded.
Check the line voltage,
compare with P071 Line voltage
Check the maximum precharging time (P326);
F003
Line overvoltage
Check the line voltage,
The voltage at the input terminals is higher than the
response threshold (110 % or 120 % of P071 in inverter
disabled or Run states).
compare with P071 Line voltage
The voltage at the input terminals is higher than the
maximum voltage limit + 5 % (E.g.: 460 V + 5 % = 483 V)
and DC-link voltage is higher than the maximum
continuous permissible value.
Line voltage
range
Max. contin. perm. Vd Max. contin. perm. Vd
at III >90% P072
at III ≤ 90% P072
380 V to 460 V
500 V to 575 V
660 V to 690 V
F004
740 V
922 V
1100 V
760 V
947 V
1130 V
Line undervoltage
Check the line voltage
Check P074
The voltage at the input terminals is less than the
response threshold (50 % of P071 during precharging and
Compare with P071 Line voltage
P074 in operation). The line supply undervoltage fault is
Check the line phase sequence
also activated if Vsupply < 80 % of P071 and if F013
occurs.
If the fault occurs immediately after the drive is started up
(for the first time), then the phase sequence may be
incorrect. The line must always be connected in a CW
phase sequence.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
14-1
Faults and alarms
10.99
Fault messages
No.
F006
Description of fault
Remedial measures
DC-link overvoltage
The drive has been shut down due to an excessive DClink voltage.
Line voltage range
I Shutdown threshold
380 V to 460 V
I
approx. 820 V
500 V to 575 V
I
approx. 1020 V
660 V to 690 V
I
approx. 1220 V
F007
Regenerative feedback power of the connected converter
is greater than that of the AFE.
Check the following parameters:
• P572 Source regeneration enable
• P161 Max. generator current limit of AFE
• P173 Maximum current
Electrical off
Check the external voltage supply
Failure of the electronic voltage supply -G10 in the mains
connection module (external 24 V)
Check the wiring (hardware and software) for the ext.
24 V monitoring function (software FS: 576 = 1004 =
digital input 4).
F008
DC-link undervoltage
Check
The DC-link voltage has dropped below the minimum limit • the main contactor control in cases where the fault
value (≈ line supply voltage)
occurs immediately after precharging
• P160 Maximum motor current limit
• P173 Maximum current
F009
Supply failure
The line voltage has remained below the undervoltage
threshold (P074) for longer than the maximum line failure
period (P155).
The line failure fault is also activated if the line voltage
frequency drops below 40 Hz or exceeds 70 Hz.
F011
F013
F023
Check
• the line voltage and line frequency
Compare with
• the threshold in Undervoltage threshold P074
• the maximum Line failure time P155
• the Line voltage P071
Overcurrent
The drive has been shut down as a result of overcurrent.
The trip threshold has been exceeded.
Check
Overload
The maximum current parameterized in P173 has been
exceeded by more than 10% or the load in regenerative
feedback mode was so high that the DC-link voltage has
reached its maximum value.
Check
Inverter temp.
Measure inlet or ambient air temperature. Apply reduction
curves when ϑ >40 ºC.
+ Section "Technical Data" in Operator's Guide
The inverter temperature has exceeded its maximum
limit.
r949 = 1 Inverter temperature limit is exceeded
r949 = 2 Sensor 1: Break in sensor lead or sensor
defective
r949 = 18 Sensor 2: Break in sensor lead or sensor
defective
• the main contactor control in cases where the fault
occurs immediately after precharging
• the AFE output for short circuit or earth fault
• the maximum current P173 IMaximum current
• the AFE load
Check
• whether fan -E1 is connected and/or rotating in the
correct direction.
• the air inlet and outlet openings for dirt/blockage.
• the temperature sensor connected to -X30
r949 = 34 Sensor 3: Break in sensor lead or sensor
defective
r949 = 50 Sensor 4: Break in sensor lead or sensor
defective
F024
Overload precharging resistor
Check
Precharging resistor protection has responded during DC- • for high-resistance short circuit or earth fault during
forming or WEA
link forming and automatic restart (WEA).
•
whether line voltage < 80 % during WEA
Fault F024 occurs when IΙI > 1 % P072 for longer than
1.5 × P326.
14-2
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Faults and alarms
Fault messages
No.
F025
Description of fault
UCE Ph. L1
A UCE shutdown has occurred in phase L1
F026
UCE Ph. L2
A UCE shutdown has occurred in phase L2
F027
F029
F030
UCE Ph. L3
Remedial measures
Check
• phase L1 for short circuit or earth fault
(-X2:U2 - including motor).
• the contacts on the CU.
Check
• phase L2 for short circuit or earth fault
(-X2:V2 - including motor).
• the contacts on the CU.
A UCE shutdown has occurred in phase L3
Check
• phase L3 for short circuit or earth fault
(-X2:W2 - including motor).
• the contacts on the CU.
Meas. val. sensing
Defect in the measured value sensing circuit
A fault has occurred in the measured value sensing
circuit.
• (r949 = 1) Offset cannot be adjusted in phase L1.
• (r949 = 2) Offset cannot be adjusted in phase L2.
• (r949 = 3) Offset cannot be adjusted in phases L1 and
L3.
Defect in the power section (valve is not blocking)
DC-link short circuit
Check the DC link
A short circuit has been detected during DC-link
precharging.
F035
Ext. fault 1
Parameterizable external fault input 1 has been activated
F036
Ext. fault 2
Parameterizable external fault input 2 has been activated
F039
DC link ground fault
An earth fault has been detected during DC-link
precharging
Check
• whether an external fault has occurred
• whether the lead to the appropriate digital input is
interrupted
• P575 Src No Ext Fault1
+ Section "Digital inputs" in Operator’s Guide
Check
• whether an external fault has occurred
• whether the lead to the appropriate digital input is
interrupted
• P586 Src No Ext Fault2
+ Section "Digital inputs" in Operator’s Guide
Check:
Maximum connected inverter power greater than
4 x AFE inverter power?
If No: Check the DC link
If Yes: Contact your local SIEMENS AG branch
F040
AS internal
Incorrect operating status
Replace the CUSA (-A10) board
F041
EEprom fault
A fault occurred as values were been saved to the
EEPROM
Replace the CUSA (-A10) board
F042
Comp. time
Computation time problems
Reduce the computation time load, increase P308
Sampling time,
check r725 Available computation time.
F045
Opt.brd.HW
A hardware fault occurred as an option board was being
accessed
Replace the CUSA board
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
Check the connection between the subrack and option
boards
14-3
Faults and alarms
10.99
Fault messages
No.
Description of fault
Remedial measures
F046
Par.con.
Switch the device off and on again.
Replace the CUSA (-A10) board.
F047
Int.comp.time
Replace the CUSA (-A10) board.
F048
Interf. pulse freq
Fault during power OFF or pulse inhibit
Switch the device off and the on again.
Replace the CUSA (-A10) board if the fault occurs again.
F049
SW release
The SW versions of the EPROMs on the CU are different.
• Replace the language EPROM
The fault occurs as a result of the comparison of the
language EPROM and CU software.
F050
TSY init.
Check whether
• the TSY is correctly inserted
• the parameter is set correctly for the installed board
TSY board initialization error
P090 Board Position 2 − P091 Board position 3
r723 PCB Code − 724 PCB Code
F060
MLFB missing
This fault is set if the MLFB = 0 (0.0 kW) when the device
exits the INITIALIZATION state. MLFB = order number.
Enter the appropriate MLFB in parameter P070 MLFB
(6SE70..) after acknowledgement in INITIALIZATION.
(MLFB can be entered only if the appropriate access
levels are set in the two access parameters.)
F062
Multiparal.
• Check ImPI and the communications card and if
required, replace
Fault in connection with the multiparallel circuit has been
detected
• Check configuration and connections of the
multiparallel circuit
• Check parameter settings (P070 "MLFB(6SE70..)")
• Replace the CUSA (-A10).
• Replace the ImPI
F065
INT1 telegram
No telegram has been received on interface 1
(SCom1/USS protocol) within the telegram failure period.
• Check the connection CU -X100:1 to 5 or check
connection PMU -X300.
• Check P687.01"SCom/SCB TlgOFF"
• Replace the CUSA (-A10).
F070
SCB init.
r949 = 1 or 2
• Check the contacts on the SCB and whether the board
slot matches the appropriate parameter setting.
• r723 PCB Code ,
• r724 PCB Code and
• P090 Board Position 2, • P091 Board Position 3
SCB board initialization error
r949 = 5 Error in initialization data
• Check parameters P682 and P684
r949 = 6 Timeout during initialization and
r949 = 10 Error in configuration channel
• Check parameters P090, P091, P682 and P684
SCB heartb.
• Replace the SCB
SCB is no longer processing the monitoring counter
(heartbeat counter).
• Check the connection between the subrack and option
board
F073
Aninput1 SL1
Amps at analog input 1, slave1, have dropped below 4mA
Check connection from signal source to SCI1
(slave 1) -X428:4, 5.
F074
Aninput2 SL1
Amps at analog input 2, slave1, have dropped below 4mA
Check connection from signal source to SCI1
(slave 2) -X428:7, 8.
F075
Aninput3 SL1
Amps at analog input 3, slave1, have dropped below 4mA
Check connection from signal source to SCI1
(slave 3) -X428:10, 11.
F072
14-4
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Faults and alarms
Fault messages
No.
Description of fault
F076
Aninput1 SL2
Amps at analog input 1, slave2, have dropped below 4mA
Check connection from signal source to SCI1
(slave1) -X428:4, 5.
F077
Aninput2 SL2
Amps at analog input 2, slave2, have dropped below 4mA
Check connection from signal source to SCI1
(slave 2) -X428:7,8.
F078
Aninput3 SL2
Amps at analog input 3, slave2, have dropped below 4mA
Check connection from signal source to SCI1
(slave 3) -X428:10, 11.
F079
SCB telegram
•
•
•
•
A telegram has not been received from the SCB (USS,
peer-to-peer, SCI) within the telegram failure time.
F080
TB/CB init.
Board initialization error at the DPR interface
Remedial measures
Check the connections of the SCB1(2).
Check P687.01"SCom/SCB TlgOFF".
Replace the SCB1(2).
Replace the CU (-A10).
r949 = 1 TB/CB not inserted or TB/CB board code
incorrect
r949 = 2 TB is not compatible
r949 = 3 CB is not compatible
r949 = 5 Error in initialization data
Check contacts on the T300 / CB board and whether the
board slot matches the appropriate parameter setting;
• P090 Board Position 2, • P091 Board Position 3
• r723 PCB Code,
• r724 PCB Code
r949 = 6 Timeout during initialization
r949 = 10 Error in configuration channel
Check the CB initialization parameters;
• P918 CB Bus Address,
• 696 to P705 CB Parameters 1 to 10
F081
F082
F091
TB/CB heartb.
TB or CB is no longer processing the monitoring counter
• Replace the TB or CB
TB/CB Tlgr.
• Check the connections of the CB/TB.
No new process data have been received from the TB or
CB within the telegram failure time.
• Check P695 "CB/TB TlgOFFTime".
Form.interrupt
Forming of the DC link has been interrupted.
• Depending on the fault
r949 = 1
r949 = 2
r949 = 3
r949 = 4
F255
Abortion due to another fault
Abortion because Vd too low
Abortion by OFF command
Abortion because no ON command within 20 s
of forming function selection
Fault in NOVRAM
• Check the connection between the subrack and option
board
• Replace the CB.
• Replace the TB.
• Line voltage too low or incorrect line voltage (P071)
parameterized
• OFF command
• No ON command
Switch the device off and then on again.
Replace the CU if the fault occurs again.
Table 14-1
Fault numbers, causes and their counter-measures
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
14-5
Faults and alarms
14.2
10.99
Alarms
An alarm message is periodically displayed on the PMU by A=alarm
and a 3-digit number. An alarm cannot be acknowledged. It is
automatically deleted once the cause has been removed. Several
alarms can be active simultaneously, in which case they are displayed
one after another.
If the AFE inverter is operated with the OP1S control panel, the warning
is displayed in the bottom line of the operation display. The red LED
also flashes (refer to the OP1S Operating Instructions).
Alarm messages
Alarm
No.
ParamNo.
Description
Remedial measures
Bit No.
A001
P953
0
A015
P953
14
A016
P953
15
A020
P954
3
A021
P954
4
A022
P954
5
A025
P954
8
14-6
Comp. time
CU board comp. time utilization too high
Check r725 Available computation time.
Increase P308 Sampling time
Ext. alarm 1
Parameterizable, external alarm input 1
has been activated
External alarm is active. Check whether the lead to
the appropriate digital input is interrupted.
Check parameter P588 Src No Ext Warn1
+ Section "Digital inputs" in Operator’s Guide
Ext. alarm 2
Parameterizable, external alarm input 2
has been activated
External alarm is active. Check whether the lead to
the appropriate digital input is interrupted.
Check parameter P589 Src No Ext Warn2.
+ Section "Digital inputs" in Operator’s Guide
Overcurrent
An overcurrent has been detected.
Check the driven load for an overload condition.
• Are the dynamic requirements too high?
Overvoltage
Check the line voltage.
A DC-link overvoltage condition has been detected.
• Are the dynamic requirements too high?
Inv.temp.
The alarm activation threshold has been exceeded.
Check r011 AFE temperature.
Measure inlet or ambient air temperature. Apply
reduction curves when ϑ >40 ºC.
+ Section "Technical Data" in Operator's Guide
Check
• whether fan -E1 is connected and/or rotating in
the correct direction.
• the air inlet and outlet openings for dirt/blockage.
• the temperature sensor connected to -X30
I2t- inv.
The inverter will be thermally overloaded if it
continues to operate under the current load
conditions.
Check whether the rated output current or peak
current (operating class II) is (was) too high.
Check r010 AFE Utilization
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Faults and alarms
Alarm messages
Alarm
No.
ParamNo.
Description
Remedial measures
Bit No.
A039
P955
Electrical off
The electronics voltage supply is not o.k.
P955
7
A047
• the ext. 24 V voltage supply -G1
• the digital input and signal lead for monitoring of
the ext. 24 V voltage supply
6
A040
Check
P955
Supply voltage
The voltage at the input terminals is outside the
rated range (< 80 % or > 110 % of P071) in
operation
Check
Reactive current limited
The reactive current of the AFE is limited.
Check the
• the line voltage
• P071 Line voltage
• line voltage (r030)
• maximum current (P173)
14
• motor-mode current limit (P160)
• generator-mode current limit (P161)
A048
P955
15
A049
P956
0
A050
P956
1
A051
P956
2
A052
P956
3
A053
P956
4
A057
P956
8
Vd2t integrator
The monitoring function of the maximum
continuous DC link voltage (using the Vd2tintegrator) has reached 50 % of the final value. If
the high DC link voltage is caused by a high
capacitive reactive current, then this might be
limited (A047). If the high DC link voltage is caused
by a high line voltage (r030), the line overvoltage
fault (F003) message will be activated eventually
(depending on the amplitude of Vd).
Check the
• line voltage (r030)
• DC-link voltage (r006)
No slave
On the ser. I/O (SCB1 with SCI1/2), no slave is
connected or fiber optic is interrupted or no supply
to slaves.
P660 SCI AnalogInConf
• Check slave.
• Check fiber optic.
Slave incorrect
On the ser. I/O, the slaves connected do not
correspond to the parameter setting (slave number
or slave type).
Check P660 SCI AnalogInConf
Peer bdrate
Baud rate for peer connection is too high or
different.
Match baud rates of SCB boards involved in the
link P684 SCom/SCB Baud
Peer PZD-L
PZD length set too high for peer connection (>5).
Reduce the number of words
P686 SCom/SCB # PrDat..
Peer Lng f.
The PZD lengths of the sender and receiver in the
peer connection do not match.
Match word lengths of sender and receiver
P686 SCom/SCB # PrDat
TB-Param
Alarm occurs if a TB is logged on and connected,
but it does not respond to parameter jobs from the
PMU, SCom1 or SCom2 within 6 s.
Replace TB configuration (software).
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
14-7
Faults and alarms
10.99
Alarm messages
Alarm
No.
ParamNo.
Description
Remedial measures
Bit No.
A065
P957
0
WEA active
The WEA option (P366) restarts the drive. No time
monitor is activated when the DC link is
precharging.
The automatic restart process can be aborted with
an OFF command.
r958
A081..
A096
0...15
A097..
A112
0...15
A113..
A128
r959
r960
0...15
The WEA function can place
operating personnel at risk.
Check whether you really need
to use WEA.
Change P366 WEA if
necessary.
CB alarm
See Operator’s Guide for CB board
TB alarm 1
See Operator’s Guide for TB board
TB alarm 2
See Operator’s Guide for TB board
Table 14-2
14.3
CAUTION
Alarm numbers, causes and their counter-measures
Fatal errors (FF)
Fatal errors are serious hardware or software errors which no longer
permit normal operation of the unit. They only appear on the PMU in
the form "FF<No>". The software is re-booted by actuating any key on
the PMU.
FFxx
Fault message
Switch device off and on again. Call service
department if fatal fault is displayed again
FF01
Time sector overflow
A non-removable time sector overflow has been identified
in the higher priority time sectors.
Increase sampling time (P308) or reduce pulse
frequency (P761)
FF03
Access error option board
A fatal fault has occurred as external option boards (CB,
TB, SCB, TSY ..) were being accessed
Replace the CUSA
Replace the CUSA
Replace the LBY
Replace the option board
FF06
Stack overflow
Stack overflow.
FFxx
Any other fatal fault.
Increase sampling time (P308) or reduce pulse
frequency (P761)
Replace the CUSA
Table 14-3
14-8
Replace the CUSA
Fatal errors
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
15
WARNING
Maintenance
Maintenance
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES units are operated at high voltages.
All work carried out on or with the equipment must conform to all the
national electrical codes (VBG 4 in Germany).
Maintenance and service work may only be executed by qualified
personnel.
Only spare parts authorized by the manufacturer may be used.
The prescribed maintenance intervals and also the instructions for
repair and replacement must be complied with.
Hazardous voltages are still present in the drive units up to 5 minutes
after the converter has been powered down due to the DC link
capacitors. Thus, the unit or the DC link terminals must not be worked
on until at least after this delay time.
The power terminals and control terminals can still be at hazardous
voltage levels even when the motor is stationary.
If it is absolutely necessary that the drive converter be worked on when
powered-up:
♦ Never touch any live parts.
♦ Only use the appropriate measuring and test equipment and
protective clothing.
♦ Always stand on an ungrounded, isolated and ESD-compatible pad.
If these warnings are not observed, this can result in death, severe
bodily injury or significant material damage.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
15-1
Maintenance
10.99
15.1
Mains connection module
Refer to the chapter entitled "Connecting-up and wiring" for the
positions and equipment designation of the electrical components in the
mains connection module.
The mains connection module contains the following components:
Item
Equipment designation
Brief description
1
-A52
VSB module
Mains angle acquisition
2
-Q1
Switch-disconnector
Main switch
3
-Q1#
Control lever
Main switch accessory 1 N/O + 1 N/C
4
-F1...F3
Main fuses
Input fuses
5
-F21, F22
Fuse-type switch-disconnectors for control transformer
6
-F21, F22 #
Fuse
AM104 4A 14x51
7
-F11, F12
Fuse-type switch-disconnector
for DC power supply
8
-F11, F12 #
Fuse
AM144 4A 14x51
9
-T10
230 V control transformer
Auxiliary supply for fan AFE, contactor
relay, power supply
10
-K1
Main contactor
Main contactor 230 V, 50/60 Hz
11
-K1 -Z1
Varistor
Main contactor accessory
12
-K10
Contactor relay
for main contactor 6 N/O + 2 N/C 24 V
13
-K1 -V1
Suppression diode
Accessory -K10
14
-G10
Power supply
Controlled power supply 24 V DC, 6 A
15
-L1
Commutating reactor
Clean Power filter
16
-L2
Choke
Part of Clean Power filter
17
-K7
Contactor
Filter contactor 230 V, 50/60 Hz
18
-K4
Contactor
Precharging contactor 230 V, 50/60 Hz
19
-Z4
Varistor
for contactor 230 V, 50/60 Hz
20
-C4
Capacitor
Part of Clean Power filter
21
-R7...R9
Resistor
Filter resistors of Clean Power filter
22
-R1...R3
Resistor
Precharging resistors of Clean Power filter
Table 15-1
15-2
Components of the mains connection module
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Maintenance
15.2
AFE inverter maintenance
15.2.1
Replacing the fan
The fan is designed for an operating time of L10 ≥ 35 000 hours at an
ambient temperature of Tu = 40 °C. It should be replaced in good time
to maintain the availability of the unit.
The fan assembly consists of:
♦ the fan housing
♦ a fan
The fan assembly is installed between the capacitor battery and the
motor connection.
Replacement
♦ Withdraw connector X20.
♦ Remove the cable fastening.
♦ Undo the two M6x12 Torx screws.
♦ Pull out the fan assembly towards the front.
♦ Install the new fan assembly in reverse sequence.
Prior to start-up, check that the fan can run freely and check for correct
direction of air flow.
The air must be blown upwards out of the unit.
Torx M6x12
Torx M6x12
Fan
Fig. 15-1
15.2.2
Fan housing
Fan assembly
Replacing the starting capacitor
The starting capacitor is
♦ next to the fan connection (types E - G)
♦ Withdraw the plug connections on the starting capacitor.
♦ Unscrew the starting capacitor.
♦ Install the new starting capacitor in reverse sequence (4.5 Nm).
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
15-3
Maintenance
15.2.3
10.99
Replacing the capacitor battery
The unit is an assembly which consists of the DC link capacitors, the
capacitor support and the DC link bus module.
Construction types
E and F
♦ Disconnect the electrical connection to the inverter bus module.
♦ Undo the mechanical interlock.
♦ Swing the capacitor battery out towards the front and lift the unit out
towards the top.
Construction type G
♦ Remove the connection for the balancing resistor (cable lug M6).
♦ Detach the mechanical fastening.
♦ Swing the capacitor battery out towards the front and lift the unit at
an angle of 45 ° out of the converter.
15.2.4
Replacing the SML and the SMU
SML: Snubber Module Lower
SMU: Snubber Module Upper
♦ Remove the capacitor battery.
♦ Undo the fixing screws (4 x M8, 8 - 10 Nm or 4 x M6, 2.5 - 5 Nm,
1 x M4, max 1.8 Nm).
♦ Remove the modules.
Install the new modules in the reverse sequence.
15-4
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
15.2.5
Removal
Maintenance
Removing and installing the module busbars
(from type G)
♦ Remove the capacitor battery.
♦ Undo the screws of the module busbars.
M8 power connections
M6 fastening on spacers
M4 circuit.
♦ Take out the insulation of the SMU / SML.
♦ Lift out the module busbars.
Installation
NOTE
The spacing between the plus busbar and the minus busbar must be at
least 4 mm. In order to install the module busbars, you must therefore
use a template, e.g. a 4 mm thick piece of plastic.
♦ Place the module busbars and SMU/SML insulation on spacer bolts
and fix in place (M6).
♦ Place the template instead of the DC link bus module in the module
busbars.
♦ Locate the SMU and SML and tighten the modular connections (M8,
8 - 10 Nm, M6, 2.5 - 5 Nm).
♦ Screw the nuts tight on the spacer bolts (6 Nm).
♦ Connect the circuit resistors (M4, 1.8 Nm).
♦ Tighten the power connections (M8, 13 Nm).
♦ Remove the template from the module busbars.
Template 4 mm
Module
screw connection −
Module screw
connection
+
4
Fig. 15-2
Installing the module busbars
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
15-5
Maintenance
15.2.6
10.99
Replacing the balancing resistor
The balancing resistor is situated in the rear installation level on the
heat sink between the inverter modules, i.e. behind the capacitor
battery and the module busbars.
♦ Remove the capacitor battery.
♦ Undo the fixing screws and take out the balancing resistor.
♦ Install the new component in reverse sequence.
♦ The balancing resistor is tightened with 1.8 Nm.
Coat the base plate evenly and thinly with a thermo-lubricant, paying
attention to correct contact assignment!
15.2.7
Replacing the IVI
IVI: Inverter-Value Interface (interface board for the power section)
The IVI board is screwed on at the rear of the electronics box.
♦ Withdraw the connections X205, X206, X208, X31 and X33 from the
IVI board.
♦ Remove the capacitor battery (types E and F).
♦ Disconnect the fiber-optic cables (type G with with rated input
voltage 3 ph. AC 660 - 690 V).
♦ Remove the PSU together with its insulation (type G)
♦ Take all the units out of the electronics box and place them on a
suitable surface which is not statically charged.
♦ Undo the two fixing screws of the electronics box.
♦ Push the electronics box out of its interlock and remove it towards
the front.
♦ Pull out the ABO adaption board.
♦ Unscrew the IVI board and take it out.
♦ Install the new IVI in reverse sequence.
15-6
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
15.2.8
Maintenance
Replacing the VDU and the VDU resistor
VDU: Voltage-Dividing Unit
The VDU and the VDU resistor are only found on converters with higher
supply voltages. The VDU bracket is an integral component of the
electronics slide-in unit.
VDU
♦ Detach the plug-in connections.
♦ Undo the fixing screw.
♦ Take out the VDU.
♦ Install the new VDU in the reverse sequence.
VDU resistor
♦ Unscrew the cable fasteners.
♦ Detach the plug-in connections.
♦ Take out the VDU resistor.
♦ Install the new VDU resistor in the reverse sequence.
15.2.9
Replacing the PSU
PSU: Power Supply Unit
♦ Withdraw connectors X18, X258 and X70 ab.
♦ Remove the Torx screw with ground connection from the side panel.
♦ Push the PSU out of its locking pins and take it out sideways and
frontwards under the input bus.
♦ Install the new PSU in the reverse sequence.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
15-7
Maintenance
15.2.10
10.99
Replacing the IGD
IGD: IGBT Gate Drive
Construction types
E and F
♦ The IGD board is mounted directly on the IGBT modules.
♦ Take out the capacitor battery.
♦ Remove the electronics box with IVI board for type E.
♦ Mark the output wiring U2/T1, V2/T2 and W2/T3 and disconnect it.
♦ Remove the inverter bus module after unscrewing the twelve M6
screws.
♦ Withdraw connector X295.
♦ Undo the fixing screws and remove the IGD board.
Construction type G
♦
The IGD board is mounted directly on the IGBT modules.
♦
Take out the capacitor battery.
♦
Remove the SML and SMU modules.
♦
Remove the inverter bus module.
♦
Remove the fiber-optic cables or the connector X295.
♦
Withdraw connectors X290 and X291.
♦ Undo the fixing screws and remove the IGD board.
Unscrew the fixing screws and remove the IGD board.
NOTE
15-8
The spacing between the plus busbar and the minus busbar must be at
least 4 mm. In order to install the module busbars, you must therefore
use a template, e.g. a 4 mm thick piece of plastic.
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
15.2.11
Maintenance
Replacing the IGBT module
Replacement is carried out as in the case of the IGD board, with the
following additions:
♦ Remove the fixing screws of the faulty IGBT module and take it out.
♦ Install a new IGBT module, paying attention to the following:
• Coat the contact surfaces thinly and evenly with a thermolubricant.
• Tighten the fixing screws of the IGBT module with 5 Nm,
observing the sequence of tightening.
1
4
3
2
3
C
E
6
1
2
5
4
Screw on IGBT module:
1. Hand-tighten (~ 0.5 Nm)
Sequence 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6
2. Tighten with 5 Nm
(MLFB 6SE7031-8EF80: 2.5 - 3.5 Nm)
Sequence 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6
Fig. 15-3
Screwing on the IGBT module
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
15-9
Maintenance
15.2.12
10.99
Replacing the PMU
♦ Remove the ground cable on the side panel.
♦ Carefully press the snap catches on the adapter section together,
remove the PMU with adapter section from the electronics box.
♦ Withdraw connector X108 on the CUx board.
♦ Carefully lift forward the PMU out of the adapter section using a
screwdriver.
♦ Install the new PMU in the reverse sequence
Adapter section
PMU
Snap catches
E-box
Fig. 15-4
15-10
PMU with adapter section on the electronics box
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Maintenance
15.3
Fuses
15.3.1
DC fuses
Order No.
Fuse
6SE70...
gR (SITOR)
[A]
North-America
Type
[A]
Type
[V]
Line voltage 3AC 380 V to 460 V
31-0EE80
160 3NE3224
31-2EF80
250 3NE3227
31-5EF80
250 3NE3227
31-8EF80
315 3NE3230-0B
32-1EG80
450 3NE3233
32-6EG80
450 3NE3233
33-2EG80
500 3NE3334-0B
33-7EG80
500 3NE3334-0B
250
350
350
450
550
550
630
630
170M3716
170M3718
170M3718
170M3720
170M6709
170M6709
170M6710
170M6710
660
660
660
660
660
660
660
660
Line voltage 3AC 500 V to 575 V
[A]
Type
26-1FE80
125 3NE3222
26-6FE80
160 3NE3224
28-0FF80
160 3NE3224
31-1FF80
200 3NE3225
31-3FG80
200 3NE3225
31-6FG80
250 3NE3227
32-0FG80
400 3NE3232-0B
32-3FG80
400 3NE3232-0B
[A]
160
160
250
350
350
350
450
450
Type
170M3714
170M3714
170M3716
170M3718
170M3718
170M3718
170M6707
170M6707
[V]
660
660
660
660
660
660
660
660
Line voltage 3AC 660 V to 690 V
26-0HF80
125 3NE3222
28-2HF80
160 3NE3224
31-0HG80
200 3NE3225
31-2HG80
200 3NE3225
31-5HG80
315 3NE3230-0B
31-7HG80
315 3NE3230-0B
32-1HG80
400 3NE3232-0B
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
15-11
Maintenance
15.3.2
10.99
Fan fuses of the AFE inverters
Line voltage 3AC 380 V to 460 V
Order No.
6SE70..
Fan Fuse
(F1 / F2)
31-0EE80
31-0EE80-1AA0
FNQ-R-2
31-2EF80
31-2EF80-1AA0
FNQ-R-2
31-5EF80
31-5EF80-1AA0
FNQ-R-2
31-8EF80
31-8EF80-1AA0
FNQ-R-2
32-1EG80
32-1EG80-1AA0
FNQ-R-5
32-6EG80
32-6EG80-1AA0
FNQ-R-5
33-2EG80
33-2EG80-1AA0
FNQ-R-5
33-7EG80
33-7EG80-1AA0
FNQ-R-5
Manufacturer:
FNQ-R- Bussmann
Line voltage 3AC 500 V to 575 V
Order No.
6SE70..
Fan Fuse
(F1 / F2)
26-1FE80
26-1FE80-1AA0
FNQ-R-2
26-6FE80
26-6FE80-1AA0
FNQ-R-2
28-0FF80
28-0FF80-1AA0
FNQ-R-2
31-1FF80
31-1FF80-1AA0
FNQ-R-2
31-3FG80
31-3FG80-1AA0
FNQ-R-5
31-6FG80
31-6FG80-1AA0
FNQ-R-5
32-0FG80
32-0FG80-1AA0
FNQ-R-5
32-3FG80
32-3FG80-1AA0
FNQ-R-5
Manufacturer:
15-12
FNQ-R- Bussmann
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Maintenance
Line voltage 3AC 660 V to 690 V
Order No.
6SE70..
Fan Fuse
(F1 / F2)
26-0HF80
26-0HF80-1AA0
FNQ-R-2
28-2HF80
28-2HF80-1AA0
FNQ-R-2
31-0HG80
31-0HG80-1AA0
FNQ-R-5
31-2HG80
31-2HG80-1AA0
FNQ-R-5
31-5HG80
31-5HG80-1AA0
FNQ-R-5
31-7HG80
31-7HG80-1AA0
FNQ-R-5
32-1HG80
32-1HG80-1AA0
FNQ-R-5
Manufacturer:
15.3.3
FNQ-R- Bussmann
Fuses of the auxiliary power supply of the mains connection
module
Equipment designation
Fuse
-F11, F12
AM144 4A 14x51
-F21, F22
AM104 4A 10x38
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
15-13
Maintenance
15.3.4
10.99
Main fuses
Line voltage 3AC 380 V to 460 V
Type power [kW]
Main fuses (-F1...F3)
45
690 V / 100 A
3NE1021-0
55
690 V / 160 A
3NE1224-0
75
690 V / 160 A
3NE1224-0
90
690 V / 200 A
3NE1225-0
110
690 V / 250 A
3NE1227-0
132
690 V / 310 A
3NE1230-0
160
690 V / 350 A
3NE1331-0
200
690 V / 400 A
3NE1332-0
Line voltage 3AC 500 V to 575 V
Type power [kW]
Main fuses (-F1...F3)
37
690 V / 80 A
3NE1820-0
45
690 V / 80 A
3NE1820-0
55
690 V / 100 A
3NE1021-0
75
690 V / 125 A
3NE1022-0
90
690 V / 160 A
3NE1224-0
112
690 V / 200 A
3NE1225-0
132
690 V / 250 A
3NE1227-0
160
690 V / 250 A
3NE1227-0
Line voltage 3AC 660 V to 690 V
Type power [kW]
15-14
Main fuses (-F1...F3)
55
690 V / 80 A
3NE1820-0
75
690 V / 100 A
3NE1021-0
90
690 V / 125 A
3NE1022-0
110
690 V / 160 A
3NE1224-0
132
690 V / 160 A
3NE1224-0
160
690 V / 200 A
3NE1225-0
200
690 V / 250 A
3NE1227-0
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
16
Forming
Forming
How the serial
number is made up
For units in the 400 V and 690 V voltage classes (cf. 9th digit of the
MLFB, letter E or H), the DC link capacitors must be formed again after
an idle period of more than 2 years.
For units in the 500 V voltage class (cf. 9th digit of the MLFB, letter F),
the DC link capacitors must be formed again after an idle period of
more than 1 year.
If this is not carried out, the unit can be damaged when the line voltage
is powered up.
If the unit was started-up within one year after having been
manufactured, the DC link capacitors do not have to be re-formed. The
date of manufacture of the unit can be read from the serial number.
(Example: A-J60147512345)
Digit
Example
Meaning
1 and 2
A-
Place of manufacture
3
J
1997
K
1998
L
1999
M
2000
4
1 to 9
January to September
O
October
N
November
D
December
5 to 14
6
Not relevant for forming
Forming time
in hours
5
4
V
0
50
3
2
40
/
0V
Fig. 16-1
2
V
Off-circuit idle
time in years
1
1
6 90
3
4
5
Forming time depending on the idle time of the AFE inverter
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
16-1
Forming
10.99
P408
P052 = 20
P key
Set forming time (60.0 to 600.0 minutes)
Select "Form DC link"
The operating display appears:
The AFE must be switched on within 20 s or else a shutdown
on faults (F091) will occur (fault value 4).
Switch on AFE
NOTE:
While forming is in progress, the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
MC/VC must not be switched on!
- The DC link forming operation is carried out
(forming period as set in P408).
- During the forming period set in P408, the pre-charging
contactor is energized and de-energized in such a way that
the DC link capacitor is charged up to the line voltage
peak value.
- The current limit set in P160 is not effective with respect to
the forming operation!
End
16-2
On completion of the function, operating display "Ready" (009)
appears.
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Technical Data
17
Technical Data
17.1
Mains connection module
EU low-voltage directive
73/23/EEC and RL93/68/EEC
EN 50178
EU machine directive 89/392/EEC
EN 60204-1
Type of cooling
Air cooling
Permissible ambient and coolingmedium temperature
•
during operation
•
during storage, transport
0° C to +50° C (32° F to 114° F)
-25° C to +70° C (-13° F to 158° F)
Installation height
See AFE inverter
Permissible humidity rating
Relative humidity
Climatic class
Class 3K3 to DIN IEC 721-3-3 (during operation)
Pollution degree
Pollution degree 2 to IEC 664-1 (DIN VDE 0110. Part 1).
≤ 95 % during transport and storage
≤ 85 % during operation (moisture
condensation not permissible)
Moisture condensation during operation is not permissible
Overvoltage category
Category III to IEC 664-1 (DIN VDE 0110, Part 2)
Degree of protection
to EN 60529
IP00
Radio interference suppression
to EN 61800-3
Standard
Options
No radio interference suppression
Radio interference suppression filter for Class A1 to EN 55011
Table 17-1
Mains connection modules: general technical data
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
17-1
Technical Data
10.99
Designation
Order No.
Value
6SE71...
Rated voltage
Rated frequency
Rated current
[V]
3 AC 380 (-20 %) to 460 (+5 %)
[Hz]
50 / 60
[A]
Rated output
31-0EE83-2NA0 31-2EF83-2NA0 31-5EF83-2NA0 31-8EF83-2NA0
[kVA]
92
124
146
186
58...70
78...95
90...110
115...135
Auxiliary current supply
[V]
DC 24 (20 - 30), approx. 1 A
Auxiliary current supply fan
[V]
AC 230, approx. 0.5 A
Power loss
[kW]
0.25
0.33
0.38
0.48
E
F
F
F
• Width
• Height
• Depth
274
1310
408
440
1310
440
440
1310
440
440
1310
440
Weight incl. AFE choke approx. [kg]
110
170
170
178
Type of construction
Dimensions
[mm]
Table 17-2
Mains connection modules (380 V to 460 V, Part 1)
Designation
Order No.
Value
6SE71...
Rated voltage
Rated frequency
Rated current
[V]
3 AC 380 (-20 %) to 460 (+5 %)
[Hz]
50 / 60
[A]
Rated output
32-1EG83-2NA0 32-6EG83-2NA0 33-2EG83-2NA0 33-7EG83-2NA0
[kVA]
210
260
315
370
130...160
160...195
195...235
230...280
Auxiliary current supply
[V]
DC 24 (20 - 30), approx. 1 A
Auxiliary current supply fan
[V]
AC 230, approx. 0.5 A
Power loss
[kW]
0.55
0.67
0.82
0.97
G
G
G
G
• Width
• Height
• Depth
580
1339
459
580
1339
459
580
1339
459
580
1339
459
Weight incl. AFE choke approx. [kg]
240
245
295
300
Type of construction
Dimensions
[mm]
Table 17-3
17-2
Mains connection modules (380 V to 460 V, Part 2)
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Technical Data
Designation
Order No.
Value
6SE71...
Rated voltage
Rated frequency
Rated current
[V]
3 AC 500 (-20 %) to 575 (+5 %)
[Hz]
50 / 60
[A]
Rated output
26-1FE83-2NA0 26-6FE83-2NA0 28-0FF83-2NA0 31-1FF83-2NA0
[kVA]
61
66
79
108
50...58
55...63
65...75
90...103
Auxiliary current supply
[V]
DC 24 (20 - 30), approx. 1 A
Auxiliary current supply fan
[V]
AC 230, approx. 0.5 A
Power loss
[kW]
0.21
0.23
0.27
0.38
E
E
F
F
• Width
• Height
• Depth
274
1310
408
274
1310
408
440
1310
440
440
1310
440
Weight incl. AFE choke approx. [kg]
101
105
155
170
Type of construction
Dimensions
[mm]
Table 17-4
Mains connection modules (500 V to 575 V, Part 1)
Designation
Order No.
Value
6SE71...
Rated voltage
Rated frequency
Rated current
[V]
3 AC 500 (-20 %) to 575 (+5 %)
[Hz]
50 / 60
[A]
Rated output
31-3FG83-2NA0 31-6FG83-2NA0 32-0FG83-2NA0 32-3FG83-2NA0
[kVA]
128
156
192
225
106...160
130...149
160...183
185...214
Auxiliary current supply
[V]
DC 24 (20 - 30), approx. 1 A
Auxiliary current supply fan
[V]
AC 230, approx. 0.5 A
Power loss
[kW]
0.45
0.55
0.81
0.95
G
G
G
G
• Width
• Height
• Depth
580
1339
459
580
1339
459
580
1339
459
580
1339
459
Weight incl. AFE choke approx. [kg]
223
240
245
285
Type of construction
Dimensions
[mm]
Table 17-5
Mains connection modules (500 V to 575 V, Part 2)
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
17-3
Technical Data
10.99
Designation
Order No.
Value
6SE71...
Rated voltage
Rated frequency
Rated current
[V]
3 AC 660 (-20 %) to 690 (+5 %)
[Hz]
50 / 60
[A]
Rated output
26-0HF83-2NA0 28-2HF83-2NA0 31-0HG83-2NA0 31-2HG83-2NA0
[kVA]
60
82
97
118
65...68
88...93
105...110
127...134
Auxiliary current supply
[V]
DC 24 (20 - 30), approx. 1 A
Auxiliary current supply fan
[V]
AC 230, approx. 0.5 A
Power loss
[kW]
0.27
0.37
0.44
0.53
E
E
G
G
• Width
• Height
• Depth
440
1310
440
440
1310
440
580
1339
459
580
1339
459
Weight incl. AFE choke approx. [kg]
155
170
219
240
Type of construction
Dimensions
[mm]
Table 17-6
Mains connection modules (660 V to 690 V, Part 1)
Designation
Order No.
Value
6SE71...
Rated voltage
Rated frequency
Rated current
[V]
3 AC 660 (-20 %) to 690 (+5 %)
[Hz]
50 / 60
[A]
Rated output
31-5HG83-2NA0 31-7HG83-2NA0 32-1HG83-2NA0
[kVA]
145
171
208
157...165
185...195
225...235
Auxiliary current supply
[V]
DC 24 (20 - 30), approx. 1 A
Auxiliary current supply fan
[V]
AC 230, approx. 0.5 A
Power loss
[kW]
0.66
0.78
0.95
G
G
G
• Width
• Height
• Depth
580
1339
459
580
1339
459
580
1339
459
Weight incl. AFE choke approx. [kg]
245
295
295
Type of construction
Dimensions
[mm]
Table 17-7
17-4
Mains connection modules (660 V to 690 V, Part 2)
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
17.2
Technical Data
AFE inverter
EU low-voltage directive
73/23/EEC and RL93/68/EEC
EN 50178
EU directive EMC 89/336/EEC
EN 61800-3
EU machine directive 89/392/EEC
EN 60204-1
Approval
UL:
CSA:
Type of cooling
Air cooling with built-in fan
E 145 153
LR 21 927
Permissible ambient and coolingmedium temperature
•
during operation
0° C to +40° C (32° F to 104° F)
(up to 50 °C, see Fig. „Derating curves“)
•
during storage
-25° C to +70° C (-13° F to 158° F)
•
during transport
-25° C to +70° C (-13° F to 158° F)
Installation height
≤ 1000 m above sea level (100 % load capability)
> 1000 m to 3500 m above sea level
(for load capability. see Fig. „Derating curves“)
Permissible humidity rating
Relative humidity
Climatic class
Class 3K3 to DIN IEC 721-3-3 (during operation)
Pollution degree
Pollution degree 2 to IEC 664-1 (DIN VDE 0110. Part 1).
Moisture condensation during operation is not permissible
Overvoltage category
Category III to IEC 664-1 (DIN VDE 0110, Part 2)
Degree of protection
EN 60529
IP00
Class of protection
Class 1 to IEC 536 (DIN VDE 0106, Part 1)
Shock protection
to EN 60204-1 and DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 (VBG4)
Radio interference suppression
to EN 61800-3
•
Standard
No radio interference suppression
•
Options
≤ 95 %
≤ 85 %
during transport and storage
during operation (moisture
condensation not permissible)
Radio interference suppression filter for Class A1 to EN 55011
Interference immunity
Industrial to EN 61800-3
Paint finish
For interior installation
Mechanical specifications
•
Vibrations
to DIN IEC 68-2-6
During stationary use:
Constant amplitude
- of deflection
0.075 mm in the frequency range 10 Hz to 58 Hz
- of acceleration
9.8 m/s² in the frequency range > 58 Hz to 500 Hz
During transport:
•
- of deflection
3.5 mm in the frequency range 5 Hz to 9 Hz
- of acceleration
9.8 m/s² in the frequency range > 9 Hz to 500 Hz
Shocks
to DIN IEC 68-2-27 / 08.89
30 g, 16 ms half-sine shock
Table 17-8
AFE inverter, general data
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
17-5
Technical Data
10.99
Permissible rated output voltage in %
acc. to VDE 0110 / IEC 664-1
(not necessary acc. to UL / CSA)
100
75
50
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
Installation altitude above sea level in m
Permissible rated current in %
100
75
50
25
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
Temp
[°C]
Derating
factor K2
50
0.76
45
0.879
40
1.0
35
1.125 *
30
1.25 *
25
1.375 *
* See the
following
Note
Cooling-medium temp. in °C
Permissible rated current in %
100
Altitude
[m]
Derating
factor K1
1000
1.0
2000
0.9
3000
0.845
4000
0.8
90
80
70
60
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
Installation altitude above sea level in m
Fig. 17-1
Derating curves
The derating of the permissible rated current for installation altitudes of
over 1000 m and at ambient temperatures below 40 °C is calculated as
follows:
Total derating = Deratingaltitude x Deratingambient temperature
K = K1 x K2
NOTE
It must be borne in mind that total derating must not be greater than 1!
Example:
Altitude: 3000 m
Ambient temperature: 35 °C
K1 = 0.845
K2 = 1.125
⇒ Total derating = 0.845 x 1.125 = 0.95
17-6
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Technical Data
Designation
Order No.
Value
6SE70... 31-0EE80
Rated voltage
31-2EF80
31-8EF80
32-1EG80
32-6EG80
[V]
• Input
• Output
Rated frequency
31-5EF80
3 AC 380 (-20 %) to 460 (+5 %)
DC 600 to 740
[Hz]
Rated current
50 / 60
[A]
• Input
• Output
3 AC
DC
92
105
124
140
146
165
186
215
210
240
260
300
Rated output
[kVA]
58...70
78...95
90...110
115...135
130...160
160...195
Auxiliary current supply
[V]
DC 24 (20 - 30)
• Max. aux. curr. requirement [A]
Standard version at 20 V
1.7
2.1
2.3
• Max. aux. curr. requirement [A]
Maximum version at 20 V
2.7
3.2
3.5
Auxiliary current supply fan [V]
1 AC or 2 AC 230
• Aux. curr. requirem. at 50 Hz [A]
0.43
0.80
0.95
• Aux. curr. requirem. at 60 Hz [A]
0.49
1.2
1.4
Pulse frequency
[kHz]
3
3
3
3
3
3
Load class II to EN 60 146-1-1
Base load current
[A]
0.91 x rated output current
Base load duration
[s]
240
Overload current
[A]
1.36 x rated output current
Overload duration
[s]
60
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor conv. cosϕU
< 0.98
≥ 0.98
Efficiency η (rated operation)
Power loss
[kW]
1.05
1.35
1.56
1.70
2.18
2.75
Cooling-air requirement [m³/s]
0.10
0.14
0.14
0.14
0.31
0.31
Sound pressure levels, types of construction, dimensions, weights
Sound pressure level IP00[dB(A)]
69
69
69
69
80
80
Type of construction
E
F
F
F
G
G
270
1050
350
360
1050
350
360
1050
350
360
1050
350
508
1450
450
508
1450
450
55
65
65
65
155
155
Dimensions
[mm]
• Width
• Height
• Depth
Weight approx.
[kg]
Table 17-9
Air-cooled AFE inverters (Part 1)
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
17-7
Technical Data
10.99
Designation
Order No.
Value
6SE70... 33-2EG80
Rated voltage
33-7EG80
[V]
• Input
• Output
Rated frequency
3 AC 380 (-20 %) to 460 (+5 %)
DC 600 to 740
[Hz]
Rated current
50 / 60
[A]
• Input
• Output
3 AC
DC
315
360
370
425
Rated output
[kVA]
195...235
230...280
Auxiliary current supply
[V]
DC 24 (20 - 30)
• Max. aux. curr. requirement [A]
Standard version at 20 V
2.3
• Max. aux. curr. requirement [A]
Maximum version at 20 V
3.5
Auxiliary current supply fan [V]
1 AC or 2 AC 230
• Aux. curr. requirem. at 50 Hz [A]
0.95
• Aux. curr. requirem. at 60 Hz [A]
1.4
Pulse frequency
[kHz]
3
3
Load class II to EN 60 146-1-1
Base load current
[A]
0.91 x rated output current
Base load duration
[s]
240
Overload current
[A]
1.36 x rated output current
Overload duration
[s]
60
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor conv. cosϕU
< 0.98
Efficiency η (rated operation)
≥ 0.98
Power loss
[kW]
3.47
4.05
Cooling-air requirement [m³/s]
0.41
0.41
Sound pressure levels, types of construction, dimensions, weights
Sound pressure level IP00[dB(A)]
82
82
Type of construction
G
G
508
1450
450
508
1450
450
155
155
Dimensions
[mm]
• Width
• Height
• Depth
Weight approx.
[kg]
Table 17-10
17-8
Air-cooled AFE inverters (Part 2)
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Technical Data
Designation
Order No.
Value
6SE70...
Rated voltage
26-1FE80
26-6FE80
31-1FF80
31-3FG80
31-6FG80
[V]
• Input
• Output
Rated frequency
28-0FF80
3 AC 500 (-20 %) to 575 (+5 %)
DC 750 to 920
[Hz]
Rated current
50 / 60
[A]
• Input
• Output
3 AC
DC
61
66
66
75
79
90
108
120
128
145
156
175
Rated output
[kVA]
50...58
55...63
65...75
90...103
106...160
130...149
Auxiliary current supply
[V]
DC 24 (20 - 30)
• Max. aux. curr. requirement [A]
Standard version at 20 V
1.7
2.1
2.3
• Max. aux. curr. requirement [A]
Maximum version at 20 V
2.7
3.2
3.5
Auxiliary current supply fan [V]
1 AC or 2 AC 230
• Aux. curr. requirem. at 50 Hz [A]
0.43
0.80
0.95
• Aux. curr. requirem. at 60 Hz [A]
0.49
1.2
1.4
Pulse frequency
[kHz]
3
3
3
3
3
3
Load class II to EN 60 146-1-1
Base load current
[A]
0.91 x rated output current
Base load duration
[s]
240
Overload current
[A]
1.36 x rated output current
Overload duration
[s]
60
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor conv. cosϕU
< 0.98
Efficiency η (rated operation)
≥ 0.98
Power loss
[kW]
0.75
0.84
1.04
1.50
1.80
2.18
Cooling-air requirement [m³/s]
0.10
0.10
0.14
0.14
0.31
0.31
Sound pressure levels, types of construction, dimensions, weights
Sound pressure level IP00[dB(A)]
69
69
69
69
80
80
Type of construction
E
E
F
F
G
G
270
1050
350
270
1050
350
360
1050
350
360
1050
350
508
1450
450
508
1450
450
55
55
65
65
155
155
Dimensions
[mm]
• Width
• Height
• Depth
Weight approx.
[kg]
Table 17-11
Air-cooled AFE inverters (Part 3)
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
17-9
Technical Data
10.99
Designation
Order No.
Value
6SE70... 32-0FG80
Rated voltage
32-3FG80
[V]
• Input
• Output
Rated frequency
3 AC 500 (-20 %) to 575 (+5 %)
DC 750 to 920
[Hz]
Rated current
50 / 60
[A]
• Input
• Output
3 AC
DC
192
220
225
250
Rated output
[kVA]
160...183
185...214
Auxiliary current supply
[V]
DC 24 (20 - 30)
• Max. aux. curr. requirement [A]
Standard version at 20 V
2.3
• Max. aux. curr. requirement [A]
Maximum version at 20 V
3.5
Auxiliary current supply fan [V]
1 AC or 2 AC 230
• Aux. curr. requirem. at 50 Hz [A]
0.95
• Aux. curr. requirem. at 60 Hz [A]
1.4
Pulse frequency
[kHz]
3
3
Load class II to EN 60 146-1-1
Base load current
[A]
0.91 x rated output current
Base load duration
[s]
240
Overload current
[A]
1.36 x rated output current
Overload duration
[s]
60
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor conv. cosϕU
< 0.98
≥ 0.98
≥ 0.97
[kW]
2.82
3.40
Cooling-air requirement [m³/s]
0.41
0.41
Efficiency η (rated operation)
Power loss
Sound pressure levels, types of construction, dimensions, weights
Sound pressure level IP00[dB(A)]
82
82
Type of construction
G
G
508
1450
450
508
1450
450
155
155
Dimensions
[mm]
• Width
• Height
• Depth
Weight approx.
[kg]
Table 17-12
17-10
Air-cooled AFE inverters (Part 4)
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Technical Data
Designation
Order No.
Value
6SE70... 26-0HF80
Rated voltage
28-2HF80
31-2HG80
31-5HG80
31-7HG80
[V]
• Input
• Output
Rated frequency
31-0HG80
3 AC 660 (-20 %) to 690 (+5 %)
DC 1035 to 1100
[Hz]
Rated current
50 / 60
[A]
• Input
• Output
3 AC
DC
60
66
82
90
97
105
118
130
145
160
171
190
Rated output
[kVA]
65...68
88...93
105...110
127...134
157...165
185...195
Auxiliary current supply
[V]
DC 24 (20 - 30)
• Max. aux. curr. requirement [A]
Standard version at 20 V
2.1
2.3
• Max. aux. curr. requirement [A]
Maximum version at 20 V
3.2
3.5
Auxiliary current supply fan [V]
1 AC or 2 AC 230
• Aux. curr. requirem. at 50 Hz [A]
0.80
0.95
• Aux. curr. requirem. at 60 Hz [A]
1.2
1.4
Pulse frequency
[kHz]
3
3
3
3
3
3
Load class II to EN 60 146-1-1
Base load current
[A]
0.91 x rated output current
Base load duration
[s]
240
Overload current
[A]
1.36 x rated output current
Overload duration
[s]
60
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor conv. cosϕU
< 0.98
Efficiency η (rated operation)
≥ 0.98
Power loss
[kW]
0.90
1.24
1.68
2.03
2.43
3.05
Cooling-air requirement [m³/s]
0.14
0.14
0.31
0.31
0.41
0.41
Sound pressure levels, types of construction, dimensions, weights
Sound pressure level IP00[dB(A)]
69
69
80
80
82
82
Type of construction
F
F
G
G
G
G
360
1050
350
360
1050
350
508
1450
450
508
1450
450
508
1450
450
508
1450
450
65
65
155
155
155
155
Dimensions
[mm]
• Width
• Height
• Depth
Weight approx.
[kg]
Table 17-13
Air-cooled AFE inverters (Part 5)
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
17-11
Technical Data
10.99
Designation
Order No.
Value
6SE70... 32-1HG80
Rated voltage
[V]
• Input
• Output
Rated frequency
3 AC 660 (-20 %) to 690 (+5 %)
DC 1035 to 1100
[Hz]
Rated current
50 / 60
[A]
• Input
• Output
3 AC
DC
208
230
Rated output
[kVA]
225...235
Auxiliary current supply
[V]
DC 24 (20 - 30)
• Max. aux. curr. requirement [A]
Standard version at 20 V
2.3
• Max. aux. curr. requirement [A]
Maximum version at 20 V
3.5
Auxiliary current supply fan [V]
1 AC or 2 AC 230
• Aux. curr. requirem. at 50 Hz [A]
1.1
• Aux. curr. requirem. at 60 Hz [A]
1.4
Pulse frequency
[kHz]
3
Load class II to EN 60 146-1-1
Base load current
[A]
0.91 x rated output current
Base load duration
[s]
240
Overload current
[A]
1.36 x rated output current
Overload duration
[s]
60
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor conv. cosϕU
< 0.98
Efficiency η (rated operation)
≥ 0.98
Power loss
[kW]
3.70
Cooling-air requirement [m³/s]
0.41
Sound pressure levels, types of construction, dimensions, weights
Sound pressure level IP00[dB(A)]
82
Type of construction
G
Dimensions
[mm]
• Width
• Height
• Depth
Weight approx.
508
1450
450
[kg]
250
Table 17-14
17-12
Air-cooled AFE inverters (Part 6)
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Water-cooled AFE
inverters
Technical Data
Order No.
Power loss
[kW]
Cooling
water
requirement
[L/min]
Maximum
additional heat
dissipation at Tair
≤ 30 °C [kW]
12
12
12
12
26
26
26
26
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
12
12
12
26
26
26
26
26
0.7
0.7
0.7
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
12
12
26
26
26
26
26
0.7
0.7
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
Rated input voltage 3 AC 380 to 460 V
6SE7031-0EE80-1AA0
6SE7031-2EF80-1AA0
6SE7031-5EF80-1AA0
6SE7031-8EF80-1AA0
6SE7032-1EG80-1AA0
6SE7032-6EG80-1AA0
6SE7033-2EG80-1AA0
6SE7033-7EG80-1AA0
1.05
1.35
1.56
1.70
2.18
2.75
3.47
4.05
Rated input voltage 3 AC 500 to 575 V
6SE7026-1FE80-1AA0
6SE7026-6FF80-1AA0
6SE7028-0FF80-1AA0
6SE7031-1FF80-1AA0
6SE7031-3FG80-1AA0
6SE7031-6FG80-1AA0
6SE7032-0FG80-1AA0
6SE7032-3FG80-1AA0
0.75
0.84
1.04
1.50
1.80
2.18
2.82
3.40
Rated input voltage 3 AC 660 to 690 V
6SE7026-0HF80-1AA0
6SE7028-2HF80-1AA0
6SE7031-0HG80-1AA0
6SE7031-2HG80-1AA0
6SE7031-5HG80-1AA0
6SE7031-7HG80-1AA0
6SE7032-1HG80-1AA0
Table 17-15
NOTE
0.90
1.24
1.68
2.03
2.43
3.05
3.70
Water-cooled AFE inverter
The units are identical in design to the air-cooled AFE inverters. Instead
of the heat sink for air, an air/water cooler has been installed.
All the technical data not listed in Table 17-15 for a particular unit are
the same as those of the air-cooled AFE-inverter. The first 12 positions
of the Order No. are identical.
The supplement "-1AA0” indicates water cooling.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
17-13
Technical Data
17.3
10.99
Notes regarding water-cooled units
Other conditions
affecting operation
The unit is to be connected to an existing external cooling-water circuit.
The construction of this cooling-water circuit under the aspects of
♦ open or closed circuit
♦ choice and juxtaposition of materials
♦ composition of cooling water
♦ cooling-water cooling (recooling, supply of fresh cooling water)
♦ and others
have an important effect on the safe functioning and service life of the
whole installation.
WARNING
The warnings given under “Standard units" apply.
Installation and servicing work on the water cooling system must be
performed with the power disconnected.
There must be no condensation on the units (also applies to standard
units).
17.3.1
Notes regarding installation and components
A closed-circuit water-cooling system of stainless steel with water/water
heat exchanger is recommended for the converters.
To prevent electrochemical corrosion and transfer of vibration,
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES are to be connected to water supply
and return lines by flexible, electrically non-conducting hose. The
hose length (in total) should be > 1.5 m.
If plastic piping is used in the installation, this hose is not necessary.
The water hoses should be connected up before the converter is
installed.
If hose clips are used, they should be checked for tightness at threemonthly intervals.
17-14
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Technical Data
Wall penetration
Flexible connection
(hose > 1.5m,
electr. non-conduc.)
Return
Infeed
e.g. piping
1)
Cooling-water circuit
2) Amot valve
SIMOVERT
converter
Mounting cabinet
Fig. 17-2
Cooling-water circuit for SIMOVERT converters
The operating pressure is to be adjusted according to the flow
conditions in the supply and return sides of the water cooling system.
The volume of cooling water per unit time is to be set to within the
values given in Table 17-15.
This can be done, for example, by means of valves with flowmeter
(e.g. as made by “OSTACO Armaturen AG”, CH-8902 Urdorf,
Tel. ++4117355555).
The flowmeters made by GPI (5252 East 36th Street North Wichita,
KS USA 67220-3205 Tel.: 316-686-7361, Fax.: 316-686-6746) have
also proved very effective.
The user must take measures to ensure that the max. permissible
operating pressure (≤ 1 bar) is not exceeded. Use must be made of a
pressure regulating device.
Closed-circuit cooling systems are to be provided with pressure
balancing devices with safety valve (≤ 3 bar) and air venting devices.
The air must be let out of the cooling system while filling is in progress.
To ensure that the necessary volume keeps flowing, flushback filters
should be fitted instead of the normal pipe strainer. Flushback filters
automatically take care of the return flow.
These are manufactured by, for example, Benckiser GmbH,
Industriestrasse 7, D-6905 Schriesheim Tel.: +49-6203-730.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
17-15
Technical Data
10.99
ASI 1 Information Bulletin E20125-C6038-J702-A1-7400 of February
1997 contains information about suggested plant configurations for
various applications.
Water piping must be laid with extreme care. The pipes must be
properly secured mechanically and checked for leakage.
Water pipes must under no circumstances make contact with live parts
(insulation clearance: at least 13 mm).
17.3.2
Application
In application, the same general conditions apply as to standard units
(with air cooling), with the exception of the cooling conditions described
below.
Water is normally used as the cooling medium (see Section "Coolant").
Antifreeze is added only in exceptional cases.
Within a cooling water temperature range of from + 5 °C to + 38 °C, the
unit can be operated at 100% rated current.
If higher cooling water temperatures are necessary, the unit operating
current must be reduced as shown in Figures 2 and 3 (Curve 1).
This applies only where water is used as the cooling medim (see notes
in Section "Anti-condensation, Antifreeze").
Derating Curve IP22
Permissible rated current in %
105
100
95
1
90
85
80
75
70
65
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Supply temperature in °C
Water
20 % Mixture -10 °C
34 % Mixture -20 °C
44 % Mixture -30 °C
Fig. 17-3
17-16
Reduction curve applying to installation in IP22 cabinets
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Technical Data
Derating Curve Water IP54
Permissible rated current in %
105
100
95
1
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Supply temperature in °C
Water
20 % Mixture -10 °C
33 % Mixture -20 °C
44 % Mixture -30 °C
Fig. 17-4
NOTE
Reduction curve 2 applying to installation in IP54 cabinets
The maximum coolant temperature is 50 °C for IP22 cubicles and 46 °C
for IP54 cubicles!
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
17-17
Technical Data
17.3.3
10.99
Coolant
Normal service water or a water-antifreeze mixture (see Section
"Antifreeze additive") can be used as coolant.
17.3.3.1
Definition of cooling water
Chemically neutrally reacting, clean water free of solid substances
(mains water).
IMPORTANT
Max. grain size of any entrained particles
≤ 0.1 mm
pH value
6.0 to 8.0
Chloride
< 40 ppm
Sulfate
< 50 ppm
Dissolved substances
< 340 ppm
Total hardness
< 170 ppm
Conductivity (water only, also see Section
"Antifreeze additive")
< 500 µS/cm
Cooling water inlet temperature
+ 5 ... 38 °C
Cooling water temperature rise per unit (rated
operation)
∆ T ≈ 5 °C
Operating pressure
≤ 1 bar
Operating pressures higher than 1 bar are not permissible!
If the system is operating at a higher pressure, the supply pressure
must be reduced to 1 bar at each unit.
The heat sink material is not seawater-proof, i.e. it must not be cooled
directly with seawater!
Filters (sieves) with a mesh size of < 100 µm are to be fitted in the unit
water systems (see Section “Notes regarding installation and
components”)!
If there is a risk of freezing, appropriate counter-measures should be
taken for operation, storage and transport, e.g. draining and blowing out
with air, extra heaters, etc.
WARNING
The warning notes for "standard units" apply.
Installation and servicing work on the water systems must always be
performed with the electric power disconnected.
17-18
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
17.3.3.2
Technical Data
Antifreeze additive
By the use of antifreeze, the lower operating temperature limit can be
reduced from + 5 °C to 0 °C, and when not operating the system is
protected against freezing at temperatures down to − 30 °C.
Because of its physical properties (heat absorption, thermal
conductivity, viscosity), antifreeze reduces cooling system efficiency. It
should only be used when absolutely necessary.
Reduction curves for antifreeze are given in the Section "Application"
(Fig. 17-3 and 17-4). Without derating, premature aging of unit
components cannot be ruled out. Converter tripping by the
overtemperature protection must also be expected.
WARNING
Operation at temperatures of < 0 °C is not permitted, not even with
antifreeze!
Use of other media can shorten the service life.
If less that 20 % Antifrogen N is added to the cooling water, the risk of
corrosion is increased, which can shorten the service life.
If more than 30 % Antifrogen N is added to the cooling water, this will
have an adverse effect on heat dissipation and hence on the proper
functioning of the unit. It must always be kept in mind that a higher
pumping capacity is required when Antifrogen N is added to the cooling
water.
When antifreeze is used, no potential differences must occur in the
whole cooling system. If necessary, the components must be
connected with an equipotential bonding strip.
NOTE
Where antifreeze is concerned, pay attention to the information given in
the safety data sheet!
Antifrogen N (made by Hoechst) is preferred for use as antifreeze.
The safety data sheet is appended.
Background:
Antifrogen N was thoroughly analysed for this application. Special
attention was given to compatibility with other materials and to
environmental and health aspects. Furthermore, many years of
experience have been gained with Antifrogen N, and the definition of
cooling water is based on this antifreeze agent.
In order to obtain the benefit of the good anti-corrosive properties of
Antifrogen N and water mixtures, the concentration of the mixture must
be at least 20 %.
The use of antifreeze places higher demands on cooling system
tightness because the surface tension of the Antifrogen and water
mixture is about 100 times smaller than that of pure water.
Hotwater-proof asbestos-based seals are suitable. For seals with
packing glands, graphite cord can be used. For pipe joints where hemp
is used, coating the hemp with fermit or fermitol has proved effective.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
17-19
Technical Data
WARNING
10.99
Antifrogen N can give rise to leakage at polytetrafluorethylene seals.
Proportion of
Antifrogen N
added [%]
Kinematic
viscosity
[mm²/s]
Relative
pressure loss
0
1.8
1.09
20
3.5
1.311
-10
34
4.72
1.537
-20
45
7.73
1.743
-30
Table 17-16
Antifreeze
protection to
[°C]
Antifrogen N material data at T = 0 °C coolant temperature
More than 45 % impedes heat dissipation and hence proper functioning
of the unit.
It must always be kept in mind that the pumping capacity required
for using Antifrogen N additive must be adjusted, and the
backpressure arising in the unit must also be taken into account.
The necessary coolant flow volume must be attained under all
circumstances.
The electrical conductivity of the coolant is increased when antifreeze is
added to the cooling water. Antifrogen N contains inhibitors to
counteract the attendant increased propensity for electrochemical
corrosion.
To prevent weakening of the inhibitors and the corrosion that would
then result, the following measures are necessary:
1. When the cooling system is drained, it must either be refilled with
the same mixture within 14 days, or it must be flushed out with water
several times and the heat sinks must then be blow through with
compressed air.
2. The water and Antifrogen N mixture must be renewed every 3 to 5
years.
If other antifreeze agents are used, they must be ethylene glycol
based. They must also have been approved by reputable companies in
the automotive industry (GM, Ford, Chrysler).
Example: DOWTHERM SR-1.
Concerning the electrical conductivity of the antifreeze and water
mixture, the antifreeze manufacturer’s guidelines apply.
The water that is mixed with the antifreeze must strictly comply with the
defnition given in the Section "Definition of cooling water".
WARNING
Use of other agents can shorten the service life.
Mixing different antifreeze agents is not permitted under any
circumstances.
17-20
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Technical Data
17.3.4
Protection against condensation
Special measures are necessary to prevent condensation.
Condensation occurs when the cooling water inlet temperature is
considerably lower than the room temperature (air temperature). The
permissible temperature difference between cooling water and air
varies according to the relative humidity φ of the room air. The
temperature at which moist air will deposit droplets of water is called
the dew point.
The following table lists the dew points (in °C) for an atmospheric
pressure of
1 bar (≈ height 0 to 500 m above sea level). If the cooling water
temperature is lower than the value given, condensation must be
expected, i.e. the cooling water temperture must always be ≥ dew point.
Room
temp.
°C
φ=
20 %
φ=
30 %
φ=
40 %
φ=
50 %
φ=
60 %
φ=
70 %
φ=
80 %
φ=
85 %
φ=
90 %
φ=
95 %
φ=
100 %
10
<0
<0
<0
0.2
2.7
4.8
6.7
7.6
8.4
9.2
10
20
<0
2
6
9.3
12
14.3
16.4
17.4
18.3
19.1
20
25
0.6
6.3
10.5
13.8
16.7
19.1
21.2
22.2
23.2
24.1
24.9
30
4.7
10.5
14.9
18.4
21.3
23.8
26.1
27.1
28.1
29
29.9
35
8.7
14.8
19.3
22.9
26
28.6
30.9
32
33
34
34.9
38
11.1
17.4
22
25.7
28.8
31.5
33.8
34.9
36
36.9
37.9
40
12.8
19.1
23.7
27.5
30.6
33.4
35.8
36.9
37.9
38.9
39.9
45
16.8
23.3
28.2
32
35.3
38.1
40.6
41.8
42.9
43.9
44.9
50
20.8
27.5
32.6
36.6
40
42.9
45.5
46.6
47.8
48.9
49.9
Table 17-17
Dew point temperature as a function of relative humidity φ and room
temperature at an altitude of 0 m above sea level
The dew point also depends on the absolute pressure, i.e. on altitude.
The dew points for low atmospheric pressures lie below the value for
sea level, and it is therefore always sufficient to plan the cooling water
supply temperature for an altitude of 0 m.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
17-21
Technical Data
10.99
Various measures can be taken to afford protection against
condensation:
1. The simplest precaution is to fit a temperature-controlled valve
arrangement in the water supply, e.g. bypass method (see Fig.
17-2) with the designation “amot valve” (available from: Ing. Büro
Neundörfer, Fichtenstr.5, D-91094 Langensendelbach,
Tel.: +49-9133-3497). This method has the disadvantage that the
water temperature is always adjusted to the temperature set on the
bypass valve. This temperature is in the vicinity of the maximum
attainable room temperature (at which condensation is most likely to
occur), which means that the unit is always under maximum thermal
stress.
2. Water temperature control places considerably less stess on the
units. The water temperature is controlled as a function of room
temperature. This method is certainly to be preferred where there
are high room temperatures, low water temperatures and high
humidities.
3. Physical dehumidifying. This is only effective in closed rooms. It
comprises operating an air/water heat exchanger with cold water to
constantly condense the moisture out of the room air.
4. A humidity alarm can be installed to give a warning when
condensation is imminent. Such an alarm is available from
ENDRICH (Tel.: +49-07452-6007-0); when the temperature falls to
within 2 K of dew point, a signal contact closes.
17-22
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
17.3.5
Technical Data
Notes on materials
Cooling water installations with copper pipes and/or copper joints are to
be avoided and are possible only if special measures are taken, e.g.
closed cooling circuit, full filtering (i.e. copper ions are filtered out),
water additives (such as the products of “Schilling Chemie GmbH”,
PO Box 1136, D-71687 Freiberg, Tel. +49-7141-703-0).
The hose connection nozzles on the heat sink side must be of stainless
steel or heavy gauge aluminium. Under no circumstances may the
connection nozzles be of brass or copper.
PVC hoses are not suitable for use with antifreeze!
Hard PVC pipes are suitable for use with the antifreeze agents listed in
Section "Antifreeze additive".
IMPORTANT
The water cooling system must not contain any zinc at all.
Where antifreeze is used, please note:
zinc reacts with all glycol-based inhibitors.
Never use galvanized pipes for this reason!
If the plant incorporates normal iron pipes or cast iron
accessories (e.g. motor housings), a separate cooling system with
water/water heat exchangers is to be installed for the converters.
If a heat exchanger made of CuNi 90/10 is used, be sure to pay
attention to the water conductivity (hose) (see Section "Note regarding
installation and components").
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
17-23
Technical Data
17.3.6
10.99
Cabinet design an connection system
♦ Components not mounted on the heat sink, e.g. the electronic
devices and the DC link capacitors, are cooled by the heat
exchangers at the heat sink fins.
When a chassis unit is installed in a cubicle, make sure that the air
discharged by the fan can enter the inside of the chassis. For this
reason, there must be a clearance of at least 130 mm between top
of chassis and cubicle roof (or existing cover) for applications with
degrees of protection > IP42.
The compartmentalizations to be fitted to units with air-cooling are
counterproductive here! They must not be fitted.
♦ The units require no external cooling air.
It must nevertheless be kept in mind that additional heat losses of
other components in the cubicle, such as reactors, cannot be
extracted!
♦ The temperature of the cooling air circulating inside the chassis is
monitored with a sensor.
♦ If an application with degree of protection IP54 is set up, it is
necessary to close the gaps between the chassis side walls and the
cubicle walls.
♦ In cubicle systems, partition walls up to the top cover plate are to be
fitted between the units.
♦ If the units are operated with degree of protection IP54, the air
temperature inside the units during rated operation is distinctly
higher than the water supply temperature.
♦ One-inch internal threads are provided for the water connection.
The connection nipples must be of stainless steel or heavy gauge
aluminium. Ideally, flat seals should be used.
♦ If the connectors supplied with the units are used, they should be
sealed with Loctite 542.
♦ The “Goldschlange” (gold snake) hose made by Paguag is
recommended.
♦ For the joint, use is made of an NW25 screw-type sleeve for
“Goldschlange” hose with inside piece of V2A and a double nipple of
V2A.
♦ Cooling water supply (blue) and return (red) are to be connected in
accordance with the colour coding, which is to be found next to the
1-inch water connection beneath the heat sink.
17-24
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
17.4
Technical Data
AFE chokes
Designation
Type (Rated output)
Rated voltage
Rated frequency
Rated current
Value
[kW]
[Hz]
50 / 60
[A]
Dimensions
[mm]
• Length
• Width
• Height
[kg]
Rated voltage
Rated frequency
Rated current
90
92
124
146
186
0.25
0.29
0.33
0.38
300
177
267
355
178
340
355
193
335
355
193
335
50
70
70
78
160
200
AFE chokes (380 V to 460 V, Part 1)
Designation
Type (Rated output)
75
3 AC 380 (-20 %) to 460 (+5 %)
[kW]
Table 17-18
55
[V]
Power loss
Weight approx.
45
Value
[kW]
110
132
[V]
3 AC 380 (-20 %) to 460 (+5 %)
[Hz]
50 / 60
[A]
210
260
315
370
Power loss
[kW]
0.55
0.63
0.68
0.85
Dimensions
[mm]
420
212
384
420
212
384
480
272
380
480
272
380
95
100
150
155
55
75
• Length
• Width
• Height
Weight approx.
Table 17-19
[kg]
AFE chokes (380 V to 460 V, Part 2)
Designation
Type (Rated output)
Rated voltage
Rated frequency
Rated current
Value
[kW]
3 AC 500 (-20 %) to 575 (+5 %)
[Hz]
50 / 60
[A]
[kW]
Dimensions
[mm]
• Length
• Width
• Height
Table 17-20
45
[V]
Power loss
Weight approx.
37
[kg]
61
66
79
108
0.20
0.21
0.29
0.33
300
177
267
300
177
267
355
178
332
355
193
332
41
45
55
70
AFE chokes (500 V to 575 V, Part 1)
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
17-25
Technical Data
10.99
Designation
Type (Rated output)
Rated voltage
Rated frequency
Rated current
Value
[kW]
90
110
[V]
3 AC 500 (-20 %) to 575 (+5 %)
[Hz]
50 / 60
160
[A]
128
156
192
225
Power loss
[kW]
0.38
0.485
0.58
0.62
Dimensions
[mm]
355
193
332
420
212
384
420
212
384
480
274
380
78
95
100
140
90
110
• Length
• Width
• Height
Weight approx.
Table 17-21
[kg]
AFE chokes (500 V to 575 V, Part 2)
Designation
Type (Rated output)
Rated voltage
Rated frequency
Rated current
Value
[kW]
[Hz]
50 / 60
[A]
[kW]
Dimensions
[mm]
Table 17-22
75
3 AC 660 (-20 %) to 690+5 %)
Power loss
Weight approx.
55
[V]
• Length
• Width
• Height
[kg]
60
82
97
118
0.33
0.34
0.35
0.535
355
178
332
355
193
330
355
193
335
420
212
384
55
70
74
95
AFE chokes (660 V to 690 V, Part 1)
Designation
Type (Rated output)
Rated voltage
Rated frequency
Rated current
Value
[kW]
132
160
200
[V]
3 AC 660 (-20 %) to 690 (+5 %)
[Hz]
50 / 60
[A]
145
171
208
Power loss
[kW]
0.58
0.59
0.66
Dimensions
[mm]
420
212
384
480
274
380
480
274
380
100
150
150
• Length
• Width
• Height
Weight approx.
Table 17-23
17-26
132
[kg]
AFE chokes (660 V to 690 V, Part 2)
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
18
Environmental Friendliness
Environmental Friendliness
Environmental
aspects during
development
The number of components has been significantly reduced over earlier
converter series by the use of highly integrated components and the
modular design of the complete series. Thus, the energy requirement
during production has been reduced.
Special significance was placed on the reduction of the volume, weight
and variety of metal and plastic components.
Plastic components
used
ABS:
PMU board
LOGO
LDPE: Capacitor ring
PA6.6: Fuse holder, mounting strip,
capacitor holder, cable holder,
terminal blocks, terminal strip,
supports, PMU adapter, covers,
cable holders
PC: Covers
PP: Insulating plates
bus retrofit
PS: Fan housing
UP: Clamping section
fastening bolts,
tensioning washer
Halogen-containing flame retardants were, for all essential
components, replaced by environmentally-friendly flame retardants.
Environmental compatibility was an important criterion when selecting
the supplied components.
Environmental
aspects during
production
Purchased components are generally supplied in recyclable packaging.
Surface finishes and coatings were eliminated with the exception of the
galvanized sheet steel side panels.
ASIC devices and SMD devices were used on the boards.
The production is emission-free.
Environmental
aspects for disposal
The unit can be broken down into recyclable mechanical components
as a result of easily releasable screw and snap connections.
The plastic components are to DIN 54840 and have a recycling symbol.
Units should be disposed of through certified disposal companies.
Addresses are available from your local Siemens partner.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
18-1
10.99
19
Certificates
Certificates
Automation and Drives
Confirmation
Erlangen, 01.05.1998
This confirms that
Equipment
• Type
AC drive converter
• Order No.
6SE70...
SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES
is manufactured in conformance with DIN VDE 0558, Part 2 and EN 60204, Part 6.2
(= DIN VDE 0113, Part 6.2).
This equipment fulfills the protection requirements against electric shock according
to DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 when the following safety rules are observed:
• Service work in operation is only permissible at the electronics box
• The converter must be switched into a no-voltage condition and isolated from
the supply when replacing any part/component
• All panels must be closed during operation.
Thus, this equipment conforms to the appropriate regulations in Germany according
to VBG 4 §2 (2) (VBG is a German regulatory body for safety-related issues).
The local operating regulations (e.g. EN 50110-1, EN 50110-2) must be observed
when operating the equipment.
A&D DS A P1
Mickal
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
19-1
Certificates
10.99
Automation and Drives
Test certificate
Erlangen, 01.05.1998
Equipment
AC drive converter
• Type
SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES
• Order No.:
6SE70...
1)
The routine testing according to these
test instructions
475 100.9000.00 QP size A - D
476 100.9000.00 QP size E - G
476 200.9000.00 QP size J - L
Test contents:
I. Insulationstest
• refer to EN 50178, Part 9.4.5.2
and UL508/CSA 22.2-14.M 91,
Part 6.8
II. Functions test
acc. to EN 50178
•
•
•
•
III. RUN-IN
IV. Functions test
acc. to EN 50178
Initialization and start-up
Customer terminals
Power section inspection
Inspection of protection and
monitoring devices
• Continuous test > 5 hours
ambient temperature 55 °C
• see II. Functions test
The equipment complied with the test requirements.
The test results are documented within the production data base
1) For complete type, serial number and technical data please see rating plate.
A&D DS A PE D P
Schlögel
19-2
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.99
Certificates
Factory certificate
*
regarding electromagnetic compatability
4SE.476 000 0001.00 WB EMV
Manufacturer:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Automation & Drives Group
Address:
Business Division
Variable-speed drives
Sub-Division
AC-Drive systems
P.O. Box 3269
D-91050 Erlangen
Product name:
SIMOVERT
Type 6SE70 Chassis units AC-AC and DC-AC
When correctly used, the designated product fulfills all the requirements of
Directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility.
We confirm the conformance of the above designated product with the Standards:
EN 61800-3
10-1996
EN 61000-4-2 (old IEC 801-2)
EN 61000-4-4 (old IEC 801-4)
EN 61000-4-5 (old IEC 801-5)
IEC 1000-4-3 (old IEC 801-3)
EN 55011
(DIN VDE 0875 Part 11)
Note:
These instructions relating to EMC-correct installation, correct operation,
connecting-up conditions and associated instructions in the product
documentation supplied must be observed.
Erlangen, 01.05.1998
H. Mickal
A&D DS A P1
*) acc. to EN 10204 (DIN 50049)
This declaration does not guarantee any features.
A&S DS 4102x
Copyright () SIEMENS AG 1997 All rights reserved
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
Page 1 of 1
19-3
10.99
20
Block diagrams
Block diagrams
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
20-1
10.99
Dimension drawings
21
Dimension drawings
21.1
AFE power supply module
Type of
construction 1 (E)
480 676.9210.00 MB
Type of
construction 2 (F)
480 654.9210.00 MB
Type of
construction 3 (G)
480 657.9210.00 MB
21.2
AFE inverter
Type of
construction E
476 245.9000.00 MB
Type of
construction F
476 254.9000.00 MB
Type of
construction G
476 256.9000.00 MB
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
21-1
The following editions have been published so far:
Edition
Internal Item Number
AB
GWE-476 200 4000.76 J AB-76
Version AB consists of the following chapters:
Chapter
Changes
Pages
Version date
4
10.99
1
Definitions and Warnings
first edition
2
Description
first edition
3
10.99
3
First Start-up
first edition
2
10.99
4
Transport, Storage, Unpacking
first edition
2
10.99
5
Installation
first edition
7
10.99
6
Installation in Conformance with EMC Regulations
first edition
1
10.99
7
Connecting-up and Wiring
first edition
19
10.99
8
Basic Function Check
first edition
4
10.99
9
Explanation of Terminology and Functionality of the AFE
first edition
2
10.99
10
Function Diagrams
first edition
2
10.99
11
Parameterization
first edition
11
10.99
12
Parameter List
first edition
40
10.99
13
Process Data
first edition
21
10.99
14
Faults and Warnings
first edition
8
10.99
15
Maintenance
first edition
14
10.99
16
Forming
first edition
2
10.99
17
Technical Data
first edition
26
10.99
18
Environmental Friendliness
first edition
1
10.99
19
Certificates
first edition
3
10.99
20
Block Diagrams
first edition
15
10.99
21
Dimension Drawings
first edition
7
10.99
Group: Automation and Drives (A&D)
Division: Variable-Speed Drive Systems
Postfach 3269, D-91050 Erlangen
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Subject to change
Order No.: 6SE7087-6CX86-2AA0
Printed in the federal Republic of Germany
10.99
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Betriebsanleitung
Operating Instructions
Active Front End (AFE)
AFE-Einspeise-Rückspeiseeinheit
AFE Rectifier / Regenerative Feedback Unit
Kompaktgerät Bauform A bis D / Compact Type A to D
AC - DC
UDC
Ausgabe / Edition: AA
Bestell-Nr. / Order No.: 6SE7087-6KD80
Diese Betriebsanleitung gilt für den Gerätesoftwarestand ab V2.1.
Änderungen von Funktionen, technischen Daten, Normen, Zeichnungen und Parametern vorbehalten.
These Operating Instructions are valid for software release V2.1.
We reserve the right to make changes to functions, technical data, standards, drawings and parameters.
Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung dieser Unterlage, Verwertung
und Mitteilung ihres Inhalts nicht gestattet, soweit nicht ausdrücklich zugestanden. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte vorbehalten, insbesondere für den Fall der
Patenterteilung oder GM-Eintragung.
Wir haben den Inhalt der Druckschrift auf Übereinstimmung mit
der beschriebenen Hard- und Software überprüft. Dennoch können Abweichungen nicht ausgeschlossen werden, so daß wir für
die vollständige Übereinstimmung keine Garantie übernehmen.
Die Angaben in dieser Druckschrift werden jedoch regelmäßig
überprüft und notwendige Korrekturen sind in den nachfolgenden
Auflagen enthalten. Für Verbesserungsvorschläge sind wir
dankbar.
SIMOVERT ist ein Warenzeichen von Siemens
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its
contents is not permitted without express written authority.
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design,
are reserved.
We have checked the contents of this document to ensure that
they coincide with the described hardware and software.
However, differences cannot be completely excluded, so that we
do not accept any guarantee for complete conformance.
However, the information in this document is regularly checked
and necessary corrections will be included in subsequent
editions. We are grateful for any recommendations for
improvement.
Siemens AG 2001 All rights reserved
SIMOVERT Registered Trade Mark
01.2001
Contents
Contents
1
DEFINITIONS AND WARNINGS......................................................................1-1
2
DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................2-1
3
INITIAL START-UP...........................................................................................3-1
4
TRANSPORT, STORAGE, UNPACKING ........................................................4-1
5
INSTALLATION ................................................................................................5-1
5.1
Installing the units and major system components ...........................................5-1
5.2
Installing the optional boards.............................................................................5-8
6
INSTALLATION IN CONFORMANCE WITH EMC REGULATIONS...............6-1
7
CONNECTING-UP AND WIRING.....................................................................7-1
7.1
7.1.1
7.1.2
Connection overviews .......................................................................................7-2
AFE inverter.......................................................................................................7-2
Supply voltage sensing (VSB)...........................................................................7-4
7.2
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
Power connections ............................................................................................7-5
AFE inverter and reactor ...................................................................................7-5
Auxiliary power supply, precharging via terminal strip X9.................................7-6
Protective conductor connection .......................................................................7-6
7.3
7.3.1
Control terminals ...............................................................................................7-7
Standard connections of the AFE inverter ........................................................7-7
7.4
Connecting up control cables ............................................................................7-9
7.5
Terminal assignments .......................................................................................7-9
7.6
Digital inputs/outputs .......................................................................................7-13
7.7
Voltage Sensing Board (VSB) .........................................................................7-15
7.8
Connection and configuration example...........................................................7-17
8
BASIC FUNCTION CHECK..............................................................................8-1
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
1
Contents
01.2001
9
EXPLANATION OF TERMINOLOGY AND FUNCTIONALITY OF THE AFE ...9-1
10
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS .................................................................................10-1
11
PARAMETERIZATION ...................................................................................11-1
11.1
Setting parameters via the PMU .....................................................................11-2
11.2
11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.3
11.2.4
11.2.5
11.2.6
"Start-up" parameterization .............................................................................11-5
Function selection (P052)................................................................................11-6
Factory setting (P052 = 1) (Parameter reset)..................................................11-6
Initialization (MLFB input) (P052 = 2)..............................................................11-7
Download (P052 = 3).......................................................................................11-8
Hardware configuration (P052 = 4) .................................................................11-9
Closed-loop control settings (P052 = 5) ........................................................11-10
12
PARAMETER LIST .........................................................................................12-1
12.1
General visualization parameters....................................................................12-2
12.2
General parameters ........................................................................................12-4
12.3
Drive data ........................................................................................................12-6
12.4
Hardware configuration ...................................................................................12-8
12.5
Closed-loop control..........................................................................................12-9
12.6
Functions .......................................................................................................12-14
12.7
Setpoint channel............................................................................................12-15
12.8
Control and status bit connections ................................................................12-17
12.9
Analog inputs/outputs ....................................................................................12-25
12.10
Interface configuration...................................................................................12-27
12.11
Diagnostic functions ......................................................................................12-31
12.12
Gating unit .....................................................................................................12-34
12.13
Factory parameters .......................................................................................12-34
12.14
Profile parameters .........................................................................................12-35
2
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Contents
13
PROCESS DATA............................................................................................13-1
13.1
13.1.1
13.1.2
13.1.3
13.1.4
13.1.5
Control word ....................................................................................................13-1
Display of control word on PMU seven-segment display................................13-2
Control word 1 (visualization parameter r550 or r967)....................................13-3
Control word 2 (visualization parameter r551) ................................................13-4
Sources for control words 1 and 2...................................................................13-5
Description of the control word bits .................................................................13-9
13.2
13.2.1
13.2.2
13.2.3
Status word....................................................................................................13-14
Status word 1 (visualization parameter r552 or r968) ...................................13-14
Status word 2 (visualization parameter r553)................................................13-16
Description of the status word bits ................................................................13-18
14
FAULTS AND ALARMS .................................................................................14-1
14.1
Faults ...............................................................................................................14-1
14.2
Alarms .............................................................................................................14-7
14.3
Fatal errors (FF) ..............................................................................................14-9
15
MAINTENANCE ..............................................................................................15-1
15.1
Replacing the fan.............................................................................................15-2
15.2
Replacing the PMU..........................................................................................15-4
15.3
Replacing the DC link fuses ............................................................................15-5
16
FORMING........................................................................................................16-1
17
TECHNICAL DATA.........................................................................................17-1
18
ENVIRONMENTAL FRIENDLINESS..............................................................18-1
19
CERTIFICATES ..............................................................................................19-1
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
3
01.2001
1
Definitions and Warnings
Definitions and Warnings
Qualified personnel
For the purpose of this documentation and the product warning labels,
a "Qualified person" is someone who is familiar with the installation,
mounting, start-up, operation and maintenance of the product. He or
she must have the following qualifications:
♦ Trained or authorized to energize, de-energize, ground and tag
circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety
procedures.
♦ Trained or authorized in the proper care and use of protective
equipment in accordance with established safety procedures.
♦ Trained in rendering first aid.
DANGER
indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result in property damage.
NOTICE
NOTICE used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential
situation which, if not avoided, may result in an undesirable result or
state.
NOTE
For the purpose of this documentation, "Note" indicates important
information about the product or about the respective part of the
documentation which is essential to highlight.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
1-1
Definitions and Warnings
WARNING
01.2001
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during
operation.
Non-observance of the warnings can thus result in severe personal
injury or property damage.
Only qualified personnel should work on or around the equipment
This personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all warning and
maintenance procedures contained in this documentation.
The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on
correct transport, proper storage and installation as well as careful
operation and maintenance.
NOTE
This documentation does not purport to cover all details on all types of
the product, nor to provide for every possible contingency to be met in
connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems
arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes,
the matter should be referred to the local SIEMENS sales office.
The contents of this documentation shall not become part of or modify
any prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales
contract contains the entire obligation of SIEMENS AG. The warranty
contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of
SIEMENS AG. Any statements contained herein do not create new
warranties or modify the existing warranty.
1-2
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Definitions and Warnings
Components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge (ESD)
CAUTION
The board contains components which can be destroyed by
electrostatic discharge. These components can be easily destroyed if
not carefully handled. If you have to handle electronic boards, please
observe the following:
Electronic boards should only be touched when absolutely necessary.
The human body must be electrically discharged before touching an
electronic board.
Boards must not come into contact with highly insulating materials - e.g.
plastic parts, insulated desktops, articles of clothing manufactured from
man-made fibers.
Boards must only be placed on conductive surfaces.
Boards and components should only be stored and transported in
conductive packaging (e.g. metalized plastic boxes or metal
containers).
If the packing material is not conductive, the boards must be wrapped
with a conductive packaging material, e.g. conductive foam rubber or
household aluminum foil.
The necessary ESD protective measures are clearly shown again in the
following diagram:
♦ a = Conductive floor surface
♦ b = ESD table
♦ c = ESD shoes
♦ d = ESD overall
♦ e = ESD chain
♦ f = Cubicle ground connection
d
d
b
b
d
e
e
f
a
f
f
c
c
Sitting
Standing
Fig. 1-1
a
f
f
c
a
Standing / Sitting
ESD protective measures
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
1-3
Definitions and Warnings
01.2001
Safety and Operating Instructions
for Drive Converters
(in conformity with the low-voltage directive 73/23/EEC)
1. General
4. Installation
In operation, drive converters, depending on their degree
of protection, may have live, uninsulated, and possibly
also moving or rotating parts, as well as hot surfaces.
The installation and cooling of the appliances shall be in
accordance with the specifications in the pertinent
documentation.
In case of inadmissible removal of the required covers, of
improper use, wrong installation or maloperation, there is
the danger of serious personal injury and damage to
property.
The drive converters shall be protected against
excessive strains. In particular, no components must be
bent and/or isolating distances altered in the course of
transportation or handling. No contact shall be made with
electronic components and contacts.
For further information, see documentation.
All operations serving transport, installation and
commissioning as well as maintenance are to be carried
out by skilled technical personnel (observe IEC 364 or
CENELEC HD 384 or DIN VDE 0100 and IEC Report
664 or DIN VDE 0110 and national accident prevention
rules).
Drive converters contain electrostatic sensitive
components which are liable to damage through
improper use. Electronic components must not be
mechanically damaged or destroyed (potential health
risks).
For the purposes of these basic safety instructions,
"skilled technical personnel" means persons who are
familiar with the installation, mounting, commissioning
and operation of the product and have the qualifications
needed for the performance of their functions.
When working on live drive converters, the applicable
national accident prevention rules (e.g. VBG 4) must be
complied with.
2. Intended use
Drive converters are components designed for inclusion
in electrical installations or machinery.
5. Electrical connection
The electrical installation shall be carried out in
accordance with the relevant requirements (e.g. crosssectional areas of conductors, fusing, PE connection).
For further information, see documentation.
In case of installation in machinery, commissioning of the
drive converter (i.e. the starting of normal operation) is
prohibited until the machinery has been proved to
conform to the provisions of the EC directive 89/392/EEC
(Machinery Safety Directive - MSD). Account is to be
taken of EN 60204.
Instructions for the installation in accordance with EMC
requirements, such as screening, grounding, location of
filters and wiring, are contained in the drive converter
documentation. They must always be complied with, also
for drive converters bearing a CE marking. Observance
of the limit values required by the EMC law is the
responsibility of the manufacturer of the installation or
machine.
Commissioning (i.e. the start of normal operation) is
admissible only where conformity with the EMC directive
(89/336/EEC) has been established.
6. Operation
The drive converters meet the requirements of the lowvoltage directive 73/23/EEC. They are subject to the
harmonized standards of the series prEN 50178/DIN
VDE 0160 in conjunction with EN 60439-1/DIN VDE
0660 Part 500 and EN 60146/DIN VDE 0558.
The technical data as well as information concerning the
supply conditions shall be taken from the rating plate and
from the documentation and shall be strictly observed.
3. Transport, storage
The instructions for transport, storage and proper use
shall be complied with.
The climatic conditions shall be in conformity with prEN
50178.
Installations which include drive converters shall be
equipped with additional monitoring and protective
devices in accordance with the relevant applicable safety
requirements, e.g. Act respecting technical equipment,
accident prevention rules, etc. Changes to the drive
converters by means of the operating software are
permissible.
After disconnection of the drive converters from the
voltage supply, live appliance parts and power terminals
must not be touched immediately because of possibly
energized capacitors. In this regard, the corresponding
signs and markings on the drive converter must be
respected.
During operation, all covers and doors shall be kept
closed.
7. Maintenance and servicing
The manufacturer’s documentation shall be followed.
Keep these safety instructions in a safe place!
1-4
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
2
Description
Description
The AFE (Active Front End) rectifier/regenerative feedback units
belonging to the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES series are power
electronics devices that are available as cabinet, chassis and as
compact units.
The compact units described below are available only in the 400 V
mains voltage range.
The units can be operated on a 3-phase mains with or without an
earthed neutral point.
♦ 400 V mains voltage range:
3AC 380 V (− 20 %) to 460 V (+ 5 %)
The core component of the AFE rectifier/regenerative feedback unit
consists of a voltage source converter with the CUSA control unit and it
generates a controlled DC voltage, the so-called DC link voltage, from a
3-phase mains.
This DC link voltage is kept constant almost independently of the mains
voltage (also in the event of regenerative feedback). The prerequisite
for this is that the DC voltage setpoint is within the operating range
defined below.
DC link voltage
operating range
Minimum:
Maximum:
Operating principle
1.5 times the rms value of the applied mains voltage.
Explanation: the DC link voltage of the AFE inverter must
at least be greater than the peak rectified value of the
applied mains voltage to ensure that the power system is
no longer controlled via the freewheeling diodes of the
IGBT switches.
for the 400 V mains voltage range: 740 V DC
On the 3-phase end, a mains angle-oriented high-speed vector control
is subordinate to the DC link voltage control and impresses an almost
sinusoidal current on the network so as to minimize system
perturbations with the aid of the subsequently connected Clean Power
filter.
The vector control also enables setting of the power factor cos phi, and
thus reactive power compensation, but the operating current
requirement has priority.
The VSB module (Voltage Sensing Board), functions as the network
angle sensor, similarly to the principle of an encoder.
For safety reasons, an AFE rectifier/regenerative feedback unit must be
connected to the mains via a main contactor; see figure 2-1. For this
reason, an external 24 V power supply is always needed to supply the
VSB module and the AFE unit.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
2-1
Description
01.2001
6
VSB
CUSA
Precharging contactor
RV
Line supply
connection
C / L+
L1, L2, L3
U2
V2
W2
DC units
connection
Main contactor
D/LCF
PE
Precharging and main contactor Clean Power Filter
Fig. 2-1
Configuration
AFE reactor
AFE inverter with CUSA
and fuses
Basic circuit
Both one and several inverters can be connected to the output.
The maximum connected power of the inverters may amount to 4 times
the rated power of the AFE inverter. The total active power drawn from
the mains supply must not continuously exceed the rated power of the
AFE; the plant must be configured to meet this requirement.
The AFE is suitable for coupling several inverters to a common DC
busbar. This allows energy to be transferred between motoring and
generating drives, thus providing a power-saving feature.
Line voltage dips can be bridged in voltage step-up operation without
altering the DC link voltage value. This can be achieved up to 65 % of
rated line voltage without additional components on condition that the
power balance defined by Equation 1 can be maintained.
3 ⋅ Vline ⋅ Imax = Vd ⋅ Id
To bridge line voltage dips below 65 % of rated line voltage, the
auxiliary power supply must be supported by an external UPS or similar
to prevent the contactors from dropping out.
2-2
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Operation and
control options
Description
The unit can be controlled and operated via
♦ the parameterization unit (PMU)
♦ an optional operator control panel (OP1S)
♦ the terminal strip
♦ a serial interface
In combination with automation systems, the AFE rectifier/regenerative
feedback unit is controlled via optional interfaces (e.g. PROFIBUS) and
technology boards (e.g. T100, T300).
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
2-3
01.2001
3
Initial start-up
Initial start-up
Unpack and check the
units
After removing the packaging, check that the unit is
intact and undamaged. Only intact units may be started
up. Please also check that the unit has been supplied
complete.
See section
"Transport,
Storage,
Unpacking"
Fit the main
components of the unit
and install options that
have not already been
fitted
Retrofit any optional boards which have not yet been
installed, if necessary. Then install the units taking into
account the requirements at the point of installation and
the EMC instructions.
See section
"Installation"
and "Installation
in Conformance
with EMC
Regulations"
Wire the main
components of the unit
and connect the PE
conductor and the
power cables
Beginning with the PE conductor, connect the power
cables and the power wiring of the AFE chokes. It is
advisable to not yet connect the DC link module.
In this step, do not yet connect the control and
communication cables at the plant end. Exception:
OP1S if the unit is to be parametrized via OP1S.
See chapters
"Connecting and
wiring" and
"Installation in
conformance
with EMC
Regulations"
Form the DC link
capacitors, if necessary
If the unit’s DC link was de-energized for more than a
year, the DC link capacitors must be formed again. .
See section
"Forming"
Connect the 230 V AC
auxiliary voltage or the
24 V DC and the mains
voltage
Note: under no circumstances must the main contactor
and the precharging contactor be connected in this
phase; therefore, check the unit before connecting the
mains voltage.
After checking the cabling for correct connection and
secure attachment, connect the mains voltage or the
auxiliary power supply. After the electronics power
supply has been started, the unit initializes itself. The
action can take several seconds. The drive status is
subsequently shown on the PMU.
If necessary, carry out
parameter reset to
factory setting
See chapter
entitled "Basic
function check"
If the PMU does not show status °009 after completion
of the unit initialization, or if the unit has already been
See section
parameterized before, you should carry out a parameter "Parameterization"
reset to factory setting.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
3-1
Initial start-up
01.2001
WARNING
Carry out the basic
function check
It must be ensured that no danger for
persons and equipment can occur by
energizing the power and the unit.
You are advised to only connect the
invertors after completing the basic
function checks of the AFE rectifier/
regenerative feedback unit.
Further start-up and parameterization according to
your specific requirements
3-2
Operating Instructions
See chapter
entitled "Basic
function check"
siehe "Ans
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
4
Transport, Storage, Unpacking
Transport, Storage, Unpacking
Transport
Storage
The units and components are packed in the manufacturing plant
corresponding to that specified when ordered. A packing label is
located on the outside of the packaging. Please observe the
instructions on the packaging for transport, storage and professional
handling.
Vibrations and jolts must be avoided during transport. If the unit is
damaged, you must inform your shipping company immediately.
The units and components must be stored in clean, dry rooms.
Temperatures between -25 °C (-13 °F) and +70 °C (158 °F) are
permissible. Temperature fluctuations must not be more than 30 K per
hour.
NOTE
If the device has been stored for longer than the maximum permissible
storage period of two years, it must be formed again.
Unpacking
The packaging comprises board and corrugated paper. It can be
disposed of corresponding to the appropriate local regulations for the
disposal of board products. The units and components can be installed
and commissioned after they have been unpacked and checked to
ensure that everything is complete and that they are not damaged.
Scope of delivery
♦ AFE inverter with CUSA control module
♦ Operating instructions
6SE708_-_KD80: only included in the scope of delivery if ordered
separately.
♦ Options
Board electronic box, e.g. PROFIBUS, must be ordered separately
♦ The line voltage sensing board (VSB) is not included in the scope
of supply and must be ordered separately.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
4-1
01.2001
Installation
5
Installation
5.1
Installing the units and major system components
WARNING
Safe converter operation requires that the equipment is mounted and
commissioned by qualified personnel taking into account the warning
information provided in these Operating Instructions.
The general and domestic installation and safety regulations for work
on electrical power equipment (e.g. VDE) must be observed as well as
the professional handling of tools and the use of personal protective
equipment.
Death, severe bodily injury or significant material damage could result if
these instructions are not followed.
Clearances
When placing the AFE inverter, make sure that the DC link connection
is on the upper side of the unit and the AFE reactor connection is on
the bottom side of the unit.
When mounting in switch cabinets, you must leave a clearance at the
top and the bottom of the units for cooling.
The minimum clearances for cooling the built-in units must be
observed.
Please refer to the dimension drawings on the following pages for
details of these minimum clearances.
When mounting in switch cabinets, the cabinet cooling must be
dimensioned according to the dissipated power. Please refer to the
Technical Data in this regard.
Requirements at the
point of installation
♦ Foreign particles
The units must be protected against the ingress of foreign particles
as otherwise their function and operational safety cannot be
ensured.
♦ Dust, gases, vapors
Equipment rooms must be dry and dust-free. Ambient and cooling
air must not contain any electrically conductive gases, vapors and
dusts which could diminish the functionality. If necessary, filters
should be used or other corrective measures taken.
♦ Ambient climate
The built-in units must only be operated in an ambient climate
conforming to DIN IEC 721-3-3 Class 3K3. For cooling air
temperatures of more than 40°C (104°F) and installation altitudes
higher than 1000 m, derating is required.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
5-1
Installation
01.2001
100 mm
Mounting
surface
250 mm
Cooling air
Fig. 5-1
Mounting
Minimum clearances for cooling
The unit is mounted directly to a mounting surface, for which you
require the following:
♦ G-type mounting rail according to EN50035 with screws for fixing at
the top
♦ One M6 screw for types A to C, two M6 screws for type D, for fixing
at the bottom
♦ Dimension drawing for types A, B and for types C, D.
5-2
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Installation
Mounting surface
425 mm
425 mm
G-type rail according to EN50035
Cutouts for
M6 screws
45 mm
90 mm
350 mm
Type A
Side view
67.5 mm
135 mm
Type B
Front view (without front panel)
Fig. 5-2
Mounting surface
600 mm
600 mm
G-type rail according to EN50035
Dimension drawings for installation of types A, B
Cutouts for
M6 screws
90 mm
180 mm
350 mm
Type C
Side view
45 mm
180 mm
270 mm
Type D
Front view (without front panel)
Fig. 5-3
Dimension drawings for installation of types C, D
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
5-3
Installation
01.2001
a1
a1
a2
d2
h1
h3
d2
h2
d1
d1
n1
n2
l
b
Fig. 5-4
Dimension drawings of the AFE reactors
Type
[kW]
Voltage
[V]
l
[mm]
b
[mm]
n1
[mm]
n2
[mm]
h1
[mm]
h2
[mm]
h3
[mm]
a1
[mm]
a2
[mm]
d1
d2
5.5
11
22
37
460
460
460
460
270
300
360
380
122
142
136
161
240
240
310
310
96
116
98
123
250
240
300
300
52
70
70
135
155
155
100
120
130
135
110
115
115
*)
*)
M11
M10
M10
M9
M9
M9
*)
This reactor has 2.5 mm2 terminals
Table 5-1
5-4
Connection dimensions of the reactors
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Installation
A
V
B
D
C
L1
L
Dimensions
Resistance
[Ω]
L±2
[mm]
L1 ± 2
[mm]
A
[mm]
B
[mm]
C
[mm]
D
[mm]
V
[deg.]
Weight
[g]
6SX7010-0AC81
22
150
132
40
20.6
5
4.3
65
185
6SX7010-0AC80
10
165
147
40
20.6
5
4.3
65
220
Fig. 5-5
Pre-charging resistors
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
5-5
Installation
01.2001
3.00
115.00
C2
C1
C6
C5
C4
C9
C8
C7
73.00
X2
85.00
C3
76.00
X1
X3
SIEMENS 6SX7010-0FB10
GWE - ...............................
Rating plate
15.00
99.00
154.00
Mounting hole 4.8 mm
35.00 mm
All measurements in mm
Capacitors mounted with
fusion adhesive
Fig. 5-6
5-6
Basic interference suppression board
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Fig. 5-7
VSB
mount
plate
side section
shock-hazard
protection
Installation
MLFB
01.2001
Rail mounting
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
5-7
Installation
5.2
WARNING
01.2001
Installing the optional boards
The boards may only be replaced by qualified personnel.
It is not permitted to withdraw or insert the boards under voltage.
The electronics box of the unit contains up to three slots in which you
can insert optional boards.
The LBA (Local Bus Adapter) can hold either the adapter board (ADB)
or optional boards.
An ADB (Adapter Board) can accommodate up to two optional boards.
Slot 1
Slot 3
Slot 2
Fig. 5-8
Location of slots for compact units
NOTE
Slot 2 can be used for technology boards (T100, T300, TSY).
Slots 2 and 3 can also be used for communication boards SCB1 and
SCB2.
WARNING
The unit has hazardous voltage levels up to 5 minutes after it has been
powered down due to the DC link capacitors. The unit must not be
opened until at least after this delay time.
5-8
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Installation
CAUTION
The optional boards contain components which could be damaged by
electrostatic discharge. These components can be very easily
destroyed if not handled with caution. You must observe the ESD
cautionary measures when handling these boards.
Disconnecting the
unit from the supply
Disconnect the unit from the incoming power supply. Remove the 24 V
voltage supply for the electronics.
Open the front panel.
Remove the adapter board from the electronics box as follows:
Preparing
installation
♦ Undo the two fixing screws on the handles above and below the
adapter board.
♦ Pull the adapter board out of the electronics box using the handles.
Installing the
optional board
NOTE
♦ Place the adapter board on a grounded working surface.
Insert the optional board from the right onto the 64-pole system
connector on the adapter board. The view shows the installed state.
Screw the optional board tight at the fixing points in the front section of
the optional board using the two screws attached.
The optional board must be pressed tightly onto the plug connector, it is
not sufficient to simply tighten the screws!
Re-installing the unit Re-install the adapter board in the electronics box as follows:
♦ Insert the adapter board into mounting position 2 or 3.
NOTE
Mounting position 3 cannot be used until at least one adapter board has
been installed at mounting position 2. Boards should first be installed in
mounting position 2, before mounting position 3 is used.
♦ Secure the adapter board at the handles with the fixing screws.
Re-connect the previously removed connections.
Check that all the connecting cables and the shield sit properly and are
in the correct position.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
5-9
Installation
NOTE
01.2001
AFE inverters cannot be configured, i.e. all additional optional boards
for the electronics box must be ordered separately. They will be
supplied separately packed for installation on site.
The following optional boards are available:
♦ CBP2 communication board
♦ PROFIBUS
♦ CBC communication board
♦ CAN bus
♦ Technology boards: T100, T300, TSY
♦ Interface boards: SCB1 / SCB2
♦ Interface boards: SCI1 / SCI2
An LBA bus adapter is always required for all supplementary boards.
An ADB adapter board is needed additionally for the communication
boards.
CAUTION:
5-10
The following cannot be installed in the AFE: SIMOLINK
SLB, EB1 and EB2 terminal expansion boards!
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
6
Installation in Conformance with EMC Regulations
Installation in Conformance with EMC
Regulations
The following contains a summary of general information and
guidelines which will make it easier for you to comply with EMC and CE
regulations.
♦ Make sure that the AFE unit is conductively bonded with the
mounting surface. The use of mounting surfaces with good
conducting properties (e.g. galvanized steel plate) is recommended.
If the mounting surface is insulated (e.g. by paint), use contact
washers or serrated washers.
♦ All of the metal cabinet parts must be connected through the largest
possible surface area and must provide good conductivity.
If necessary, use contact washers or serrated washers.
♦ Connect the cabinet doors to the cabinet frame using grounding
strips which must be kept as short as possible.
♦ All signal cables must be shielded. Separate the signal cables
according to signal groups.
Do not route cables with digital signals unshielded next to cables
with analog signals. If you use a common signal cable for both, the
individual signals must be shielded from each other.
♦ Power cables must be routed separately away from signal cables
(at least 20 cm apart). Provide partitions between signal cables and
power cables. The partitions must be grounded.
♦ Connect the reserve cables/conductors to ground at both ends to
achieve an additional shielding effect.
♦ Lay the cables close to grounded plates as this will reduce the
injection of undesired signals.
♦ Use cables with braided shields. Cables with foil shields have a
shielding effect which is worse by a factor of five.
♦ Contactor operating coils that are connected to the same supply
network as the AFE-inverter or that are located in close proximity of
the inverter must be connected to overvoltage limiters (e.g. RC
circuits, varistors).
You will find further information in the brochure "Installation Instructions
for EMC-correct Installation of Drives"
(Order No.: 6SE7087-6CX87-8CE0).
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
6-1
01.2001
7
WARNING
Connecting-up and wiring
Connecting-up and wiring
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES converters are operated at high
voltages.
The equipment must always be disconnected from the supply before
any work is carried out!
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to work on this equipment!
Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in death, severe
personal injury or substantial property damage.
Owing to the DC link capacitors, the equipment may remain at a
hazardous voltage for up to 5 minutes after disconnection of the power
supply. For this reason, wait for at least 5 minutes before commencing
work on the converter or DC link terminals.
Voltage may be present at the power and control terminals even when
the motor is stopped.
When working on the open converter, remember that live parts are
exposed.
The user is responsible for ensuring that all equipment is installed and
connected up in accordance with the approved codes of practice of the
country concerned and any other regional or local codes that may
apply. Special attention must be paid to proper conductor sizing, fusing,
grounding, isolation and disconnection measures and to overcurrent
protection.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-1
Connecting-up and wiring
01.2001
7.1
Connection overviews
7.1.1
AFE inverter
Aux. contactor, external
DC24 V supply X9
U 1 V1 W1 PE1 C
DC link
connection X3
L1 L2 L3
D
L+ L-
Mounting position 3
Mounting position 2
PMU connection X108
Mount. pos. 1 (CUSA)
X100/X101
X102
AFE reactor
connection X2
Shield connections
for control cables
Fig. 7-1
7-2
T1 T2 T3
U2 V2 W2 PE2
Connection overview for types A, B and C
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Connecting-up and wiring
Aux. contactor, external
DC24 V supply X9
DC link
connection X3
-F101
-F102
Connection fan 230 V
Fan fuses
PE1
C
D
L+ L-
Mounting position 1 (CUSA)
Mount. pos. 3
Mount. pos. 2
PMU connection X108
X100/X101
X102
T1 T2
T3
AFE reactor
connection X2
U2 V2 W2 PE2
Shield connections
for control cables
Fig. 7-2
NOTE
Connection overview for type D
An external aux. voltage of 230 V AC must be connected to F101 and
F102 in the case of type of construction D. The aux. voltage is needed
for the fan in the unit.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-3
Connecting-up and wiring
7.1.2
01.2001
Supply voltage sensing (VSB)
Supply voltage- X1
3AC
Main contactor relay - X2
X3 - Terminal CUSA
X4 - Target frequency
Not needed for AFE
X5 - Shield
Fig. 7-3
7-4
View of the VSB optional board
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
7.2
Connecting-up and wiring
Power connections
NOTE
The connection cross-sections are determined for copper cables at
40 °C (104 °F) ambient temperature (according to DIN VDE 0298 Part
4 / 02.88 Group 5).
Supply terminals
The supply terminals are marked as follows:
AFE reactor
U2/T1
V2/T2
DC link connection AFE-inverter:
C / L+
D / L-
PE1
PE2
PE connection:
directly via mounting surface and/or via
7.2.1
AFE inverter and reactor
Mains voltage 380 V to 460 V
Order number for AFE inverter
AFE reactor
6SE70...
W2/T3
AFE reactor
connection
3 AC 400 V
Cross section
Basic
inverter
unit rating
AFE- inverter
6SE70...
[kW]
[A]
VDE
[mm²]
AWG
MCM
Output end DC
DC link connection
Rated output
Cross
current
section
VDE AWG
[A]
[mm²] MCM
21-3ES87-1FG0
21-0EA81
4
10.2
1.5
16
11.2
21-3ES87-1FG0
21-3EB81
5.5
13.2
2.5
14
14.5
4
10
22-6ES87-1FG0
21-8EB81
7.5
17.5
2.5
14
20
4
10
22-6ES87-1FG0
22-6EC81
11
25.5
6
8
28
10
6
24-7ES87-1FG0
23-4EC81
15
34
10
6
37.5
10
6
24-7ES87-1FG0
24-7ED81
22
47
16
4
52
25
2
27-2ES87-1FG0
26-0ED81
30
59
25
2
66
35
0
27-2ES87-1FG0
27-2ED81
37
72
25
2
80
35
0
Table 7-1
1.5
16
Conductor cross-sections: AFE rectifier/regenerative feedback unit
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-5
Connecting-up and wiring
7.2.2
01.2001
Auxiliary power supply, precharging via terminal strip X9
X9 - external DC24 V
supply, precharging
control
1
The 9-pin terminal strip is provided to connect the 24 V voltage supply.
The voltage supply is always required for AFE inverters.
The connections for the precharging contactor energizing circuit are
floating.
The "Safe OFF" function cannot be utilized for AFE inverters. For this
reason, care must be taken to ensure that the factory-installed jumper
between "Terminal X9/5 and X9/6" is safely contacted.
Terminal
Designation
Description
Range
3
1
+24 V (in)
24 V voltage supply
DC 24 V ≤ 2.5 A
4
2
0V
Reference potential
0V
5
3
"Safe OFF"
7
4
"Safe OFF"
8
5
Not connected
9
6
Not connected
2
6
7
PC energizing
circuit
Precharging contactor
energizing circuit
8
n.c.
Not connected
9
PC energizing
circuit
Precharging contactor
energizing circuit
DC30 V, 0.5 A
Connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Table 7-2
WARNING
7.2.3
Connection of external aux. voltage supply DC 24 V, precharging
contactor energizing circuit
The relay on PEU -X9:7.9 is only suitable for switching voltages up to
30 V with a 9-pole terminal strip!
Protective conductor connection
Due to the discharge currents caused by the RI suppression capacitors,
a minimum conductor cross-section of 10 mm2 must be used in
accordance with VDE 0160. In the case of mains connections with a
cross-section of less than 10 mm2, the following measures can be
taken:
♦ If the device is mounted against an earthed surface in a strongly
conductive connection, the cross-section of the PE conductor may
be the same as that of the mains conductor.
♦ If it is installed as an insulated unit or has a weak conductive
connection to the mounting surface, a separate PE conductor with a
cross-section of 10 mm2 can be used instead of the PE conductor
from the mains connection.
7-6
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Connecting-up and wiring
7.3
Control terminals
7.3.1
Standard connections of the AFE inverter
The basic version of the converter features the following control
terminals on the CUSA board:
♦ Control terminal strips X100, X101 and X102 on CUSA electronics
board
♦ Connection for OP1S operator control panel
♦ One serial interface (USS bus, RS485)
♦ Serial interfaces RS485 and RS232 (SCom1) on PMU X300
CAUTION
The CUSA board contains components which can be destroyed by
electrostatic discharge. These components can be very easily
destroyed if not handled with caution.
See also ESD precautions outlined in Section "Definitions and
warnings".
Connectors for
control terminal
strip
The connectors for the control terminal strip are supplied separately
packed.
Cables with cross-sections from 0.14 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 (AWG: 26 to
16), or 1 mm2 (AWG: 18) can be connected using stranded wire with
lugs to the connectors (recommended: 0.5 mm 2 (AWG: 20)). The
connectors can be identified by the pin numbers (Table 7-3), connector
positions on the board are shown in Fig. 7-4.
Connector X9 is needed to control the pre-charging operation and to
connect an external power supply (see Fig. 7-4).
Connector
Label
X100
eight-pin, coded
1
2
3
CU
6
7
8
X101
eight-pin, coded
13
14
15
CU
18
19
20
X102
ten-pin
25
26
27
28
CU
31
32
33
34
Table 7-3
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-7
Connecting-up and wiring
01.2001
PMU
-X100
-X101
-X102
Fig. 7-4
View of CUSA
X100
RS485P
1
Reference potential
RS485
Pre-assigned
for converter
Control of
main contactor
2
Microcontroller
A
Slot E
B
3
C
4
D
Slot G
PMU
5
serial
interface 1
USS
RS232
RS485
6
7
8
X101
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RS485N
RS232 TxD
P5V
13
P24
14
M
15
M
16
24V
Digital
inputs:
17
I ≤ 12 mA
18
24V
5V
In
5V
In
5V
19
24V
20
24V
5V
In
5V
In
X102
Pre-assigned
for special
applications
25
Pre-assigned
for converter:
Voltage sensing
27
Digital output 3
I ≤ 20 mA
Pre-assigned
for converter:
Voltage sensing
Digital output 4
I ≤ 20 mA
Analog output:
8 bits + sign
I ≤ 5 mA
26
30
31
34
AUX
7-8
Switch for USS bus terminator
AI 1
D
A
C
D
P24
Out
AI 2
D
A
P24
Out
AO
D
A
Fig. 7-5
≥1
+5V
32
33
A
AUX
28
29
B
In
24V
Pre-assigned
for converter:
24 V monitoring
X300
RS485P
RS232 RxD
n.c.
Serial interface 2
USS (RS485)
non-floating
RS485N
0...+10 V
list
View of standard terminals
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
7.4
NOTE
Connecting-up and wiring
Connecting up control cables
Generally, control lines that are connected to the AFE inverter must be
shielded to achieve maximum possible interference immunity. The
shield must be grounded at both ends.
To avoid noise coupling, control wires which are directly connected to
the chassis should be separated from power wiring by a minimum
distance of 20 cm.
Control and power cables must cross each other at an angle of 90°.
7.5
X100 control
terminal strip
Terminal assignments
The terminals on the control terminal strip are as follows:
Terminal
Name
Function
1
Transmit and receive line -RS485, differential input
/ output, positive (RS485/T+)
2
Transmit and receive line -RS485, differential input
/ output, negative (RS485/T-)
3
Transmit output RS485 Standard,
differential output, positive (RS485T+)
4
Transmit output RS485 Standard,
differential output, negative (RS485T-)
5 *)
M RS485
Reference potential RS485
6
Digital output 2, (changeover) reference contact
7
Digital output 2, (changeover) NO contact
8 **)
Digital output 2, (changeover) NC contact
Possible cross-section: 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)
In the assembled state, terminal 1 is at the top.
*)
An identical interface to the type on connector -X100 is available on connector -X300
on the parameterizing unit. Only one of these two interfaces may be used, see
Section "Interfaces".
Digital output 1 is available on -X9:4,5
**) Load capability of digital outputs:
AC 60 V, 60 VA, cos ϕ = 1
AC 60 V, 16 VA, cos ϕ = 0.4
DC 60 V, 24 W
Inductive loads, e.g. contactors, relays, for DC voltage loads, must be damped using a
diode or varistor, and for AC loads, with a varistor or RC element.
Table 7-4
Control terminal strip X100
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-9
Connecting-up and wiring
X101 control
terminal strip
01.2001
The terminals on the control terminal strip are as follows:
Terminal
Name
Function
Range
13
P24 AUX
Aux. voltage supply
DC 24 V / 150 mA
14
M24 AUX
Reference potential
0V
15
Reference potential for
digital inputs 1 to 5 with
ext. signal voltage
16
Digital input 1
Signal sensitivity of
digital inputs:
17
Digital input 2
•
H = 24 V
(13 V to 33 V)
18
Digital input 3
•
Imax = 15.7 mA
19 *)
Digital input 4
•
L=0V
(− 0.6 V to 3 V)
20
Digital input 5
Possible cross-section: 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)
In the assembled state, terminal 1 is at the top.
*) NOTE:
Table 7-5
7-10
Must be used to monitor the ext. 24 V supply P576.1 = 1004; P576.2 = 1004).
Control terminal strip X101
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
X102 -control
terminal strip
Connecting-up and wiring
The terminals on the control terminal strip are as follows:
Terminal
Name
Function
Range
25
Cannot be
used
Analog input 3
0 V to 5 V
26
Cannot be
used
Analog input 4
0 V to 5 V
27
Assigned
Analog input 1
0 V to ± 10 V
28
Assigned
Reference potential for
analog inputs 1, 3
29
Digital output 3
Imax = 20 mA
0 V to ± 10 V
30
Assigned
Analog input 2
31
Assigned
Reference potential for
analog inputs 2, 4
32
Digital output 4
33 *)
Reference potential for
analog output 1,
digital output 3,
digital output 4
34 *)
Analog output 1
Imax = 20 mA
0 V to 10 V
Rating
≤ 5 mA equals > 2 kΩ
Possible cross-section: 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)
*)
NOTE:
To increase the noise immunity of the signals, an isolating amplifier should be
connected between the analog output and measuring unit for cables > 4 m.
Table 7-6
Control terminal strip X102
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-11
Connecting-up and wiring
X300 serial interface
5
9
01.2001
A serial connection to an automation unit or PC can be made via
connector X300 on the PMU. The unit can therefore be controlled and
operated from the central control station or control room.
Pin
Name
Function
1
n.c.
Not assigned
2
RS232 RxD
Receive data via RS232
RS232
3
RS485 P
Data via RS485
RS485
4
RTS
Request to send, for direction
reversal with interface converters
5
M5V
Reference potential for P5V
0V
1
6
6
P5V
5 V aux. voltage supply
+5 V, Imax = 200 mA
7
RS232 TxD
Transmit data via RS232
RS232
8
RS485 N
Data via RS485
RS485
9
Table 7-7
7-12
Range
Reference potential for RS232 or
RS485 interface
(with RF suppression for EMC)
Serial interface X300
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
7.6
Digital inputs
Connecting-up and wiring
Digital inputs/outputs
Four parameterizable digital inputs (24 V) are available on the
control terminal strip (-X101) of the CUSA board. These inputs can be
used to input commands, external faults/alarms and for returning status
data to the AFE inverter’s control word.
Connection:
See Section "Connecting up control cables".
Parameterization: See Section "Control and status words".
Factory setting (valid for standby operation):
Digital
Command
input
HIGH
Control
LOW
word bit
1
ON
OFF1
0
P554.2 = 1001
(standby)
2
ON
OFF2 (electrical)
1
P555.2 = 1002
(standby)
7
P565.2 = 1003
(standby)
30
P590 = 1005
3
Acknowledge
5
Table 7-8
Digital outputs
Parameter
Standby setting
Basic setting
Digital inputs
Digital outputs 1 and 2 on the AFE inverter are pre-wired for the
precharging and main contactors. For safety reasons, they cannot be
wired up for other purposes.
Two further digital outputs are available for optional functions.
Factory setting:
Digital
output
Connector
Pin
HIGH
Signal
LOW
Status
word bit
Parameter
3 *)
-X102
29
Fault
3
603.1
= 1003
4
-X102
32
Operation
2
602.1
= 1004
*) Current carrying capability up to max. 20 mA
Table 7-9
NOTE
Digital outputs
Faults, alarms and starting lockout (HIGH active) are displayed as
LOW active via the terminal strip (digital outputs). See Section
"Status word".
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-13
Connecting-up and wiring
Basic converter
interface SCom1
01.2001
The USS protocol (universal serial interface) is implemented on the
basic converter interface SCom1.
The following documentation is available depending on the particular
application of the SCom1 basic converter interface:
♦ Connection of a PC / PG with SIMOVIS software for startup/servicing/operation:
The documentation is provided on SIMOVIS floppy disks in files
BEDANLTG.TXT (ASCII format) and BEDANLTG.WRI (WRITE
format).
♦ Connection of higher-level PLCs with USS protocol:
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Application of serial interfaces with USS protocol
Order No.: 6SE7087-6CX87-4KB0
Additional general comments regarding connection and
parameterization:
Connection: See Section "Control terminals"
NOTE
A communication link can be made either via the terminal strip on the
CU -X100 (RS485 Standard) or the interface connection on the PMU
-X300 (9-pin SUB D connector / RS232 or RS485 (V24)).
Only one of the above possible connections may be used!
A four-wire connection can be implemented when the SCom2 is
connected via the terminal strip (-X100) on the CUSA board.
Switchover between two-wire and four-wire connection is automatic.
NOTE
The bus terminations (150 Ω in total) must be set for the last bus station
(slave). For positioning of jumpers on S1, see Fig. 7-1.
SCom1: Close jumpers S1.1 and S1.2 of DIP-FIX S1 on the CUSA.
Dual-port Ram
(DPR for SCB, TSY,
CB, TB)
The dual-port RAM is the internal interface on the CUSA (-X107) for
connection of option boards via the LBA (Local Bus Adapter, option) of
the electronics box.
Available option boards:
♦ TSY (Tachometer and Synchronization Board)
♦ TB (Technology Board)
♦ SCB (Serial Communication Board)
♦ CB (Communication Board)
For further information about connecting option boards and
parameterizing the interface, see also the operating instructions for the
relevant boards.
For additional information, see Section "Control and status words".
7-14
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
7.7
Connecting-up and wiring
Voltage Sensing Board (VSB)
The supply voltage is sensed using the analog board VSB (Voltage
Sensing Board) via the two analog inputs on control board CUSA.
Furthermore, the 24 V power supply is monitored on this board and a
relay provided to control the main contactor.
M
N15 Vsa Vsb OK MI HS P15 P24
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
X4
X3
X1
7
Fig. 7-6
4
X5
X2
1
3
1
View of option board VSB
The cable connections between the VSB board (connector X3) and the
CUSA must be screened.
The screen must always be bonded over a large area at both cable
ends.
For safety reasons, the main contactor is always controlled via binary
output 2 and the precharging contactor via binary output 1. Digital
outputs 1 and 2 may not be parameterized for other purposes. The two
analog inputs are also permanently assigned to line supply voltage
sensing and therefore cannot be used for other functions.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-15
Connecting-up and wiring
Connector
assignments
01.2001
VSB
X3
-15 V output
10
CUSA
Line voltage component Vsa
9
X102:27
Analog input 1
Line voltage component Vsb
8
X102:30
Analog input 2
Ext. 24 V monitor (OK)
7
X101:19
Digital input 4
Ref. ground for Vsa, Vsb
6
X102:28/31
Ref. AI 1 and 2
Main contactor control
5
X100:7
NO contact BO2
15 V output
4
Input for 24 V ext.
3
External 24 V power supply
24 V ground
2
External M24 power supply
24 V ground
1
X100:6
Line
Main contactor
Main contactor
X2
1
Not assigned
Reference BO2
AC 230 V
2
Coil
3
1 kVA
X1
Line voltage
1
Not assigned
2
Not assigned
3
Line voltage
4
Not assigned
5
Not assigned
6
Line voltage
7
Phase L1
Phase L2
Phase L3
X4
Disabled for AFE
1
Disabled for AFE
2
Earthing point / screen earth
7-16
X5
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
< 13 >: DC link
Power connection
DC output
< 15 > Factory setting
< 25 >: Serial interface
RS485
< 4 >: Digital outputs
< 3 >: Analog output
< 2 >: Digital inputs
< 1 >: Line angle
< 57 >: AFE inverter
< 21 >: AFE reactor
< 23 >: Precharging resistors
< 20 >: Main contactor
< 22 >: Precharging contactor
< 23 >
< 22 >
-K4
<9>
-Z1
-R1
-R2
-U1-X1:
< 13 >
-F41...
-F44
-X2: U2 V2
T1 T2
-L2
-K1
<8>
-F1...3
PE1
-U1
< 57 >
-R3
2
1
< 9 >: EMC filter
< 7 > -Q1
4
3
< 8 >: Fuses
6
< 7 >: Main switch
2
1
C/L+
5
L1
5
6
L3
3
4
L2
1
2
4
M
W2
T3
< 21 >
VSB3
VSB2
VSB1
< 20 >
-X9:7
-K4
-U1
-A52
-G10
-U1
-X9: 2
-X9: 1
1P24
PE
-X1:
VSB1
VSB2
VSB3
6
5
PE
VSB
-X2:
-K1
5
1
4
7
-X9:9
2
31
32
1M
A2
A1
3
1
< 12 >
-X3:
-U1
-F101
-F102
M
2
3
M
P24
1M
1P24
5
1
7
8
6
9
H_S
M
P24V_OK
Vb
MI
Va
< 12 >: Power connection
3-ph. AC
-U1-A10
<1>
-X100:
CUSA
-X102:
only tpye D
-X101:
<2>
27
-10....+10V
AC230V 50/60Hz
28
30
31
M
-10....+10V
M
-X100:
<4>
<2>
-X308:
-X300:
-A30
< 15 >
-X108:
< 25 >
<4>
<3>
-X101:
-X102:
RS485 R+
RS485 RRS485 T+
RS485 TRS485 M
1
2
3
4
5
3PE AC380-460V 50/60Hz
19
DI 4
M24 AUX
M
3
D/L-
8
7
6
DO23
DO22
DO21
1...26
DI 2
P24 AUX
DI 3
DI 1
DI 5 BAS/RES
14
15
17
13
18
16
20
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
DO 3
DO 4
M
0...10V
Fig. 7-7
29
32
33
34
7.8
QUIT
ON/OFF1
01.2001
Connecting-up and wiring
Connection and configuration example
Compact AFE: circuit example
7-17
01.2001
Basic function check
8
Basic function check
WARNING
It imperative to observe the procedure described here for initial
commissioning of the equipment.
3AC mains supply
Main switch -Q1
Semiconductor
fuses
Main contactor -K1
Precharging resistors
Precharging contactor -K4
AFE reactor -L2
VSB
CUSA
Voltage sensing
board
AFE inverter
with control board CUSA
and DC fuses
Udc
Please check:
Starting point:
1. Main switch-Q1 is open
2. Mains is connected to the main switch-Q1, rotating clockwise (L1, L2, L3)
3. Internal wiring is completed:
• 24 V power supply
• 230 V control voltage for fan (cf. Chapter 7, VSB -> CUSA)
4. AFE reactor power wiring
Check phase assignments:
Connection:
AFE reactor -L2 Phase L1 with AFE inverter -X2 U2/T1
Phase L2 with AFE inverter -X2 V2/T2
Phase L3 with AFE inverter -X2 W2/T3
5. DC link connection not yet connected to load-side inverter
6. No further control cables are connected, no communication
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-1
Basic function check
Preliminary check
01.2001
♦ Main contactor -K1 and precharging contactor -K4 must be open
♦ Main switch must be open
♦ Mains voltage must be applied to the main switch
♦ Ensure clockwise rotating field
♦ Control panel (PMU) must still be dark
Activating main
switch -Q1
♦ 30 V AC control voltage for fan in type of construction D is
connected
(construction types A to C have 24 V fan only)
♦ 230 V AC for external 24 V power supply is connected (if available)
♦ 24 V power supply active
AFE inverter
X9:1 (P24)
X9:2 (M24)
and on VSB
X3:1 (M24)
X3:3 (P24)
♦ at switching contact
X9:7 24 V is applied
X9:9 coil of contactor -K4
♦ On the AFE inverter, the control panel (PMU) lights up, initialization
has been completed after several seconds and the status message:
0009 = READY FOR ON appears on the PMU.
If the READY FOR ON message does not appear, check all contacts,
fuses and voltages once again and replace CUSA if necessary.
Parameter reset
P052 = 1
Reset is run
P052 automatically returns to 0.
Disabling control of
the AFE inverter
P561 = 0
Enter rated voltage of supply systems (parameter P071)
8-2
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Checking actual
value acquisition
and precharging
Basic function check
Issue the ON command via PMU (by default, ON command P554
already set on PMU)
♦ Reaction: Precharging begins with picking up of the contactor -K4,
and the DC link voltage (see display parameter r006)
rises within approximately 1 second to the final value,
approximately 1.35 times the mains voltage. The main
contactor -K1 is connected once the final value has been
reached.
♦ Contacts: cf. section entitled "Control connections"
Main contactor ON command from CUSA X100 terminal
6 (M24)-7 signal from normally-open CUSA binary output
2
This command is forwarded to the mains angle
acquisition circuit
VSB: connector
X3:
terminal 5 signal
X3:
terminal 1 M24
Output to potential-free contact VSB:
X2 terminal 1: 24 V
X2 terminal 3: to coil of main contactor -K1
♦ Reaction: Once the main contactor -K1 has picked up, the
precharging contactor -K4 opens after approx. 500 ms.
♦ Status:
0011 "Ready to Run"
The AFE inverter is now in the "Ready to Run " state and
the following actual values must be correctly displayed:
r032: Mains frequency tolerance ± 2 %
r030: Mains voltage, currently applied
RMS value tolerance ± 2 %
If the fault F004 occurs, check the mains direction of rotation, check
the main contactor’s contacts and check the mains voltage.
Enabling control
⇒ After successful precharging and actual value check
P561 = 1
♦ Reaction:
The AFE inverter pulse is audibly and evenly
The DC link voltage (r006) goes to the value P071 x
P125, and is stable with slight fluctuations ± approx.
1%.
The current consumption of the AFE inverter (r004)
should be no greater than 20% of the rated current of
the unit (cf. P072).
♦ Fault:
Replace CUSA or VSB in the event of clear deviations
in the current consumption.
The basic function check of the AFE rectifier/regenerative
feedback unit has been completed and the unit is operable.
Commissioning can now take place depending on project planning.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-3
01.2001
9
Explanation of terminology and functionality of the AFE
Explanation of terminology and
functionality of the AFE
Operating modes of ♦ Operating modes are set via P164 "Operating mode"
the AFE
♦ See Section "Function diagrams"
rectifier/regenerative
♦ Applications:
feedback unit
• Supplying the voltage-source DC link of SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES series 6SE70 inverters.
• Reactive power compensation
• Regenerative feedback from a DC voltage source to the supply
system
♦ Operating modes:
• Operating mode "cos(phi) control " (P164 = 1, factory setting):
The sinusoidal line current is controlled with an adjustable
cos(phi) (P120). For a cos(phi) of 1, only active power is taken
from or regenerated to the line. A cos(phi) of + 0.8 results in a
distribution of the line current into 80 % active current and 60 %
reactive current (inductive, as cos(phi) is positive). The sign
serves only to distinguish between inductive and capacitive
reactive power. In this mode, therefore, a change in the active
power automatically changes the reactive power. A higher-level
closed-loop DC link voltage controller controls the DC link
voltage to the setpoint (r447). The output of this closed-loop DC
link voltage controller is the setpoint for the active current.
• Operating mode "Reactive power compensation" (P164 = 0):
The reactive power can be input as either capacitive or inductive
(P122) (± 140 % of AFE rated apparent power) and is
independent of the active power. A higher-level DC link voltage
controller controls the DC link voltage to the setpoint (r447). The
output of this DC link voltage controller is the setpoint for the
active current. If the "sum“ (square-root of the sum of the
squares of the absolute values) of the active and reactive power
is greater than the maximum apparent power of the AFE, the
reactive power is limited (= Line current management).
• Operating mode "Current control" (P164 = 2):
The active line current can be externally specified via a setpoint
node (P486). The DC link voltage is not controlled and is given
by an external voltage source (e.g. master Master AFE).
♦ Operating mode: "regenerative partial load" (P164 = 3):
In this operating mode, active power is fed back into the mains as from
Ud > Udset.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-1
Explanation of terminology and functionality of the AFE
Indexed parameters
01.2001
These parameters are divided into various "indices" (i001, i002, etc.). A
separate parameter value can be assigned to each index.
The meaning of the "indices" of the relevant parameter (parameter
number) can be found in Section "Parameter List".
Example:
Index 1
P683
i001 = 0 Bus address of serial interface
SCom1 (CU)
Index 2
i002 = 2 Bus address of serial interface
Data sets
on the SCB board
"Indexed" parameters are divided according to data sets (indexed).
♦ GRD/RES (basic or reserve setting):
These data sets make it possible, e.g. to switch from manual to
automatic mode.
♦ RDS (reserve data set) 1 or 2:
Two reserve data sets can be parameterized, e.g. for alternating
operation of different converter types on one AFE.
The data sets are selected via the "control word" and read out in r012
and r152, see Section "Function diagrams".
9-2
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Fig. 10-1
0
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
r126
0
SST1
CB/TB
SCB 1 with SCI (Slave 1)
SCB 1 with SCI (Slave 2)
SCB1/SCB2 (peer-to-peer)
SCB 2 (USS)
P125
Vd(set)
factor
X
2002 to 2016
3002 to 3016
4101 to 4103
4201 to 4203
4501 to 4505
4502 to 4516
0000
1001
X
RES
BAS
Src Vd setpoint Vd setpoint Kp
P443
P444
Kp
2002 to 2016
3002 to 3016
4101 to 4103
4201 to 4203
4501 to 4505
4502 to 4516
0000
RES
BAS
I(reactive,act)
r256
I(active,act)
r264
V(supply)
r030
Θ Phase angle
Src I setpoint I setpoint Kp
P486
P487
Kp
Current transformation
SST1
CB/TB
SCB 1 with SCI (Slave 1)
SCB 1 with SCI (Slave 2)
SCB1/SCB2 (peer-to-peer)
SCB 2 (USS)
Phase current 3
Line filter
pre-control
Line synchronization
2 x r030
2 x P071
r447
r490
Vd(set)
limitation
–
r303
Vd(act)
+
Vd(set)
r139
Ti
PI controller
Kp
In
P072
r004
Output current
Imax(set)
r174
I(active,set)
r263
Vn P071
In P072
Fn P078
Operating mode
Reactive power
cos(phi)
Line filter C
P164
P122
P120
P080
I(reactive,set)
r255
Gating unit
I(reactive,set)
calculation
Control factor
r764
r004
r180
Vd(act) Firing angle limit
Vd correction
and
voltage limiting
I(max,mot)
P160
P161
I(max,gen)
P
i²t calculation
0: Vd control
1: Current control
0
1
P164
P587
r255
I(reactive,set)
Kp Kp dyn Ti
P129.x P130.x P131.x
r263
I(active,set)
Current controller
K
Θ Phase angle
r032 Line frequency
10
Phase current 1
P081
Line filter L
Analog input 2
Vsb
Analog input 1
Vsa
Line frequency
r032
01.2001
Function diagrams
Function diagrams
Block diagram of the AFE control
10-1
10-2
Fig. 10-2
Analog output
3
2
1
0
...
...
Content of parameter 001
0
Fig. 10-3
BASIC
RESV
CU-AA gain
P656
Operating Instructions
Parameters involved:
P120, P121, P122, P124, P129, P130, P131, P160,
P161, P164, P173, P326, P366, P408, P517, P518
Switchover of reserve data set (RDS)
Parameters involved:
P443, P444, P486, P487, P554 to P589
Switchover, basic/reserve setting (Basic/Resv)
Fields which can be switched over
have a shaded background.
...
...
CU-AA act. values
P655
CU-AA offset
P657
#
i.001
i.001
RESV
i.002
1
RDS 2
i.002
BASIC
-10 V
+10 V
RESV
BASIC
r152 Active RDS
0
1
i.001
Src RDS bit 0
Control word bit 18
P578.x
i.002
0
1
0
1
Src basic/reserve
Control word bit 30
P590
values [%]
( Parameter
100 %
Src basic/reserve
Control word bit 30
P590
Smoothing
20 ms
Voff =
x Gain [V]
) + Offset [V]
to the terminal
strip
Function diagrams
01.2001
Basic/reserve changeover
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
11
Parameterization
Parameterization
The functions stored in the converters are adjusted to suit specific
applications by means of parameters. Every parameter is uniquely
identified by its name and number. In addition to a parameter name and
number, many parameters also have a parameter index. Using these
indices, it is possible to store several values for a parameter under one
parameter number.
Parameter numbers consist of a letter and a three-digit number. Upper
case letters P, U, H and L are the codes for settable parameters and
lower case letters r, n, d and c the codes for non-settable visualization
parameters.
Examples
DC link voltage r006 = 632
Parameter name:
Parameter number:
Parameter index:
Parameter value:
DC link voltage
r006
No index
632 V
Src ON/OFF1 P554.2 = 1001
Parameter name:
Parameter number:
Parameter index:
Parameter value:
Src ON/OFF1
P554
2
1001
Parameters can be entered via
♦ the PMU parameterizing unit integrated in the converter front panel,
♦ the control terminal strip of the closed-loop control module CUSA
(see Section "Control terminals"),
♦ easily via the optional OP1S operator panel,
♦ the serial interfaces RS485 and RS232 at -X300 on the PMU or
♦ on a PC with the SIMOVIS service program (Version 5.3 or higher).
The parameters stored in the converters can be altered only under
particular conditions. The following conditions must be fulfilled before
parameter settings can be changed:
♦ The relevant parameter must be a settable parameter (identifiable
by upper case code letters in parameter number).
♦ Parameterization authorization must be set
(P053 = 6 for parameterization via PMU or OP1S).
♦ Changes to parameter settings must be permitted by the current
converter status (initial parameter settings must be set with the
converter switched off).
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
11-1
Parameterization
11.1
01.2001
Setting parameters via the PMU
The parameterization unit (PMU) is provided for direct
parameterization, operation and visualization of the converter/inverter.
It is an integral component of basic units and features a four-digit,
seven-segment display and several keys.
Raise key
Seven-segment display for:
Drive statuses
Alarms and
faults
Reversing key
ON key
Parameter numbers
Toggle key
OFF key
Parameter indices
Lower key
X300
Parameter values
Fig. 11-1
Key
Meaning
Function
•
Switch on device (standard)
•
With active fault: Return to fault display
•
Command is executed when key is released
OFF key
•
Switch off device with OFF1 or OFF2 depending on
parameterization (P554 to P557). Command is executed when
key is released.
Reversing key
•
No function
Toggle key
•
For switching between parameter number and parameter
value in the sequence indicated (command becomes effective
when the key is released).
•
If fault display is active: For acknowledging the fault
ON key
Raise key
Lower key
Hold toggle key
and depress raise
or lower key
Table 11-1
11-2
PMU parameterization unit
Increase the display value:
•
Press and release: Increase value by one increment
•
Hold down: Value is increased rapidly
Reduce the display value:
•
Press and release: Decrease value by one increment
•
Hold down: Value is decreased rapidly
•
Press and hold P, then press second key. The command is
executed when key is released (e.g. quick toggle).
Control elements on the PMU
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Toggle key
(P key)
Parameterization
Since the seven-segment display on the PMU has only four digits, the 3
descriptive elements of a parameter, i.e.
♦ parameter number,
♦ parameter index (for an indexed parameter) and
♦ parameter value
cannot be displayed simultaneously. It is therefore necessary to switch
between the 3 elements. The toggle key is provided for this purpose.
After the desired level has been selected, the parameter number can
be adjusted with the Raise or Lower key.
Using the toggle key, you can switch
•
from the parameter number to the
parameter index
•
from the parameter index to the
parameter value
•
from the parameter value to the
parameter number
If the parameter is not indexed, the
toggle key switches directly from the
parameter number to the parameter
value.
NOTE
Parameter number
P
P
Parameter
value
Parameter
index
P
If you change the value of a parameter, the new value normally
becomes operative immediately. However, in the case of confirmation
parameters (identified by an asterisk " * " in the Parameter List), the
new value does not take effect until you switch from the parameter
value to the parameter number.
Changes to parameter settings made via the PMU are always stored in
the non-volatile EEPROM after confirmation by the toggle key.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
11-3
Parameterization
01.2001
Example
The following example shows the sequence of operator inputs via the
PMU required to select operating mode "Reactive power
compensation".
Closed-loop control settings
∇
P052
É
Ë
0000
∇
É P Ë
É
...
∇
Set P052 to 5:
Ë
0001
É P Ë
0005
P052
Increase number to P164: Select operating mode
...
∇
∇
É
Ë
P052
P164
Set P164 to 0:
Reactive power compensation
É ∇ Ë
É P Ë
P164
1
Return to P052:
É P Ë
0
P164
Function selection
É ∇ ... ∇ Ë
P164
P052
Set P052 to 0:
Return to previous operating state
É ∇ ... ∇ Ë
É P Ë
P052
11-4
0005
É P Ë
0000
P052
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Parameterization
11.2
"Start-up" parameterization
Select language:
0 = Deutsch, 1 = English, 2 = Espanol, 3 = Fracais, 4 = Italiano
P050 =
Access level "Expert Mode"
P051 = 3
Option boards?
no
Possible option boards: SCB, CB, TB, TSY
yes
P052 = 4
P090 =
P091 =
other parameters depending on option
P052 = 5
Select "Hardware Configuration"
Define and parameterize option boards:
Option boards:
0: None
1: CB
2: TB
3: SCB
4: TSY
(right-hand slot P090, centre slot P091)
Menu selection "Closed-loop control settings":
If fault "Fxxx" appears, see Section "Fault and alarm
messages"
P071 =
Input rated supply voltage in V
P078 =
Input line frequency in Hz
P164 =
Operating
mode:
P052 = 0
0: Reactive power compensation mode
1: cos(phi) mode
2: Current control
3: Regenerative partial load
Select function "Return"
End
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
11-5
Parameterization
11.2.1
01.2001
Function selection (P052)
Start-up functions are selected via parameter P052. These provide
start-up variants specially adapted to start-up mode.
Access stage 2 (P051 = 2) must be enabled and the AFE infeed must
not be set to OPERATION (014).
The following functions are available:
Precondition
♦ Return from function selection
(P052 = 0)
♦ Factory setting
(P052 = 1)
♦ Initialization
(P052 = 2)
♦ Download
(P052 = 3)
♦ Hardware configuration
(P052 = 4)
♦ Closed-loop control setting
(P052 = 5)
♦ Forming
(P052 = 20)
The "Factory setting" and "Forming" functions are reset automatically
on completion, i.e. P052 = 0 (return)!
All other functions must be reset manually.
11.2.2
Factory setting (P052 = 1) (Parameter reset)
Function
This function resets all parameters (see Section "Parameter List") to
their factory values (supplied defaults). Please note the setting of P077!
The "Factory setting" function can be selected in operating states
CONTROL SETTINGS (005), FAULT (007), STARTING LOCKOUT
(008) or READY FOR ON (009).
This function sets some converter data according to the device type
(dependent on MLFB / P070).
Condition
Result
P052 = 1
P
11-6
Select factory setting (Parameter reset)
The numbers of the newly set parameters are displayed
consecutively:
♦ All parameters set to factory values acc. to Parameter List
(even board configuration P090/P091)
♦ Device data (derived from MLFB of converter (P070))
P071 Rated supply voltage
P072 AFE current (n)
P078 Line frequency (n)
♦ Open-loop/closed-loop control parameters
P173 Imax (maximum current)
When the parameter have been set to their factory values, status
display STARTING LOCKOUT (008) or READY FOR ON (009)
appears.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Parameterization
11.2.3
Initialization (MLFB input) (P052 = 2)
Function
Condition
Result
This function is used to alter the order number (device type) of the
converter.
"Initialization" can be selected in operating states CONTROL
SETTINGS (005), FAULT (007), STARTING LOCKOUT (008) or
READY FOR ON (009).
When the order number is changed, only some parameters are reset
to their factory values (shipped status of converter) as a function of the
new order number. The process data connection remains unchanged.
P051 = 3
Access level "Expert Mode"
(to change P070)
P052 = 2
Select Initialization
P070 =
Specify MLFB
(= Order No. of the AFE inverter, see rating plate)
When the CU board is changed, the appropriate MLFB for the
converter must be entered. When setting parameters via PMU,
enter the corresponding code number (PWE) according to the
table below.
Rated voltage 3 AC 380 V (-20 %) to 460 V (+5 %)
Order number
Type power
Rated current
[kW]
[A]
21-0EA81
4
10.2
12
21-3EB81
5.5
13.2
19
21-8EB81
7.5
17.5
26
22-6EC81
11
25.5
36
23-4EC81
15
34
43
24-7ED81
22
47
53
26-0ED81
30
59
57
27-2ED81
37
72
67
6SE70..
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
PWE
11-7
Parameterization
01.2001
P052 = 0
The operating display appears and, if the MLFB has been
altered, the following parameters are set to new values
:
Converter and motor data (as derived from converter MLFB
(P070) ) and open-loop and closed-loop control parameters
("Automatic parameterization" on all data sets analogous to
selection of "Factory setting" function).
The process data connections (e.g. analog inputs/outputs)
remain unchanged.
On completion of initialization, status display STARTING LOCKOUT
(008) or READY FOR ON (009) appears.
P
11.2.4
Select "Return"
Download (P052 = 3)
This function is used to read and alter parameters by means of a PC
connected to the SCom1 basic converter interface.
Parameters can be "downloaded" in the FAULT (007), STARTING
LOCKOUT (008) or READY FOR ON (009) states.
Function
Condition
P052 = 3
P
P052 = 0
Select "Download"
The operating display (021) appears.
Using a PC connected to basic converter interface SST1 and
an appropriate application program (e.g. SIMOVIS), it is now
possible to read and alter all parameters irrespective of the
selected control mode, etc.
Select "Return"
P
After Return, the STARTING LOCKOUT (008) or READY FOR ON
(009) display appears.
11-8
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Parameterization
11.2.5
Hardware configuration (P052 = 4)
Function
Condition
Result
The purpose of this function is to define option boards (SCB, TSY, CB,
TB) installed in the electronics box of the AFE inverter.
The "Hardware configuration" function can be selected in the FAULT
(007), STARTING LOCKOUT (008) or READY FOR ON (009) states.
The LBA bus link (Local Bus Adapter) is required additionally to install
option boards in the electronics box. See Section "Interfaces".
All parameters which can be written in the "Hardware configuration"
state ("H", see right-hand column in "Parameter List") can be altered.
P052 = 4
Select "Hardware configuration"
P051 = 3
Access level "Expert Mode"
(to be able to alter the following parameters)
P090 =
P091 =
Board in slot 2 ( RIGHT in electronics box)
Board in slot 3 ( CENTRE in electronics box!)
Parameter values for P090/P091:
0: No option board
1: CB Communication Board
2: TB Technology Board (P090 only)
3: SCB Serial Communication Board
4: TSY Digital Tacho and Synchronization Board
NOTE
Slot in electronics box
Boards
Left
Slot 1 (CU)
CUSA
Center
Slot 3 (options)
CB / SCB1 / SCB2 / (TSY, not with TB)
Right
Slot 2 (options)
CB / SCB1 / SCB2 / TSY / TB
♦ Only one of each option board type may be inserted in the
electronics box at one time.
♦ Technology boards (e.g. T300) must always be inserted in slot 2.
The TSY board may not be inserted at the same time as a TB.
♦ If only one option board is in use, it must always be inserted in slot 2.
♦ Other parameters depending on option boards
(see relevant Operating Instructions or Parameter List).
♦ Make selection between:
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
11-9
Parameterization
01.2001
P052 = 5
Select "Closed-loop control settings"
(see Section "Closed-loop control settings")
P052 = 0
Select "Return"
The operating display (r000) appears. At the same time,
parameters and internal quantities are set to new values
depending on the function selection.
P
The hardware is initialized.
If one of the fault messages F050/F070/F080 appears, see Section
"Fault and alarm messages".
On completion of the selected function, operating display STARTING
LOCKOUT (008) or READY FOR ON (009) appears.
11.2.6
Closed-loop control settings (P052 = 5)
Function
This function is used to alter the closed-loop control settings (AFE
data).
The "Closed-loop control settings" can be made in the FAULT (007),
STARTING LOCKOUT (008) or READY FOR ON (009).
All parameters which can be written in the "Closed-loop control
settings" state ("A", see right-hand column in Parameter List) can be
altered by this function.
"Closed-loop control settings" is terminated by resetting the status
(P052 = 0) with calculation of internal quantities.
Condition
Result
P052 = 5
Select "Closed-loop control settings"
P051 = 3
Access level "Expert Mode"
(in case parameters which require Export Mode need to be
altered)
Change selected parameters which can be altered in the "Closed-loop
control settings" state.
P052 = 0
P
Select "Return"
The operating display (r000) appears. At the same time,
parameters and internal quantities are set to new values
depending on the function selection.
On completion of the selected function, operating display STARTING
LOCKOUT (008) or READY FOR ON (009) appears.
11-10
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Parameter list
12
Parameter list
General Visualization Parameters
to 49
Analog Input/Output
from 650
General Parameters
from 50
Interface Configuration
from 680
Drive Data
from 70
Diagnostic Functions
from 720
Hardware Configuration
from 89
Gating Unit
from 760
Motor Data
from 100
Factory Parameters
from 780
Control
from 150
Special Parameters
from 800
Functions
from 330
Profile Parameters
from 900
Setpoint Channel
from 410
Tech Board Parameters
from 1000
Control and Status Bit Connections
from 550
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
−300.00 to 300.00
[Hz]
2
25)/ BR4)
25)/ BR4)
Key to parameter list
Example:
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P999
*1)
"Parameter Name in OP1”
3E7Hex
RDS(2) parameter6)
"Description”
Type=I2; 2)
PKW: 1Hex=0.01 Hz;
i001=50.00
_/_
_/_
i002=50.00
or:
←7)
PZD Gr.: 03)
1) Confirmation parameter: Does not become active until confirmation (press
P
key)
2) Parameter type
O2
Unsigned 16-bit value
I2
Signed 16-bit value
L2
Nibble-coded quantity
V2
Bit-coded quantity
3) Normalization group for PZD
PZD group
PZD normalization
0 as PKW normalization
61000Hex = P072 I(n,AFE)
71000Hex = P071 V(n,supply)
Abbreviations: PZD
Process Data
PKW
Parameter Characteristic Value
4) Operating states:
U
H
A
B
R
MLFB Input (initialization)
Hardware Configuration
Control Settings
Ready (including Fault)
Run
5) Minimum access level which is needed to read or write a parameter.
1
Operation via PMU/OP
2
Standard Mode
3
Expert Mode
6) Abbreviations for indexed parameters
RDS(2)
B/R
Reserve data set parameter with 2 indices, switched over via control word 2, bit 18
Parameter with switchover option for basic and reserve setting in control word 2, bit 30
7) Parameter value is set to a default after initialization. Default settings are determined by the converter MLFB.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-1
Parameter list
12.1
01.2001
General visualization parameters
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
r000
r001
1Hex
r004
4Hex
r006
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
Operation Display
Displays the operating status, fault and alarm messages
See Section “Operator control" for a description
−
1 /UHABR
Operating status
Visualization parameter indicating the current operating state
of the AFE
Description
0 = AFE MLFB input
1 = AFE initialization
2 = Hardware initialization
3 = Closed-loop control initialization
4 = Hardware settings (H)
5 = Closed-loop control settings (A)
7 = Fault
8 = Starting lockout
9 = Ready for ON
10 = DC-link precharging
11 = Ready to run
14 = Run
18 = Forming
21 = Downloading parameter settings ....
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 16384
Type = O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: 0
−
2 /UHABR
−
2 / BR
−
2 / BR
−
2 / BR
Output Amps
AFE output current
Note:
The displayed value corresponds to the current at
the inverter (CT). The line current at the AFE input
deviates from this value by the current component
which flows through the filter capacitor.
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4 * P072
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 A
PZD Gr.: 6
6Hex
DC Bus Volts
Actual DC-link voltage value
Display quantity for the PMU and OP.
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4*P071
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=1 V
PZD Gr.: 7
r010
AFE utilization
AHex
12-2
Thermal AFE utilization as a result of an I2t calculation of the
output current.
Loading the AFE with maximum current for
• 30 seconds activates an alarm (P622) and for
• 60 seconds to a reduction in the load current to 89 % of
AFE rated current.
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 16384 %
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1 %
PZD Group: 0
_/_
_/_
MLFB Input
Init. MLFB
H/W Init
System Init
H/W Setting
System Set.
Fault
ON locked
Rdy ON
Precharging
Rdy Run
Operation
Capacitor
forming
Download
[A]
[V]
[%]
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
r012
Base/Reserve
CHex
r013
DHex
r030
1EHex
r032
20Hex
Basic/reserve settings of the process data connections for
setpoints and control word bits
Parameter values:
0: Basic setting
1: Reserve setting
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 16384
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: 0
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
Line volts
Actual line voltage (fundamental r.m.s.)
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4 * P071
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1 V
PZD Gr.: 7
Line frequency
Actual frequency of line voltage
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 163.84 Hz
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.01 Hz PZD Gr.: 0
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
read:
write:
−
2 / BR
3
2 / BR
−
2 / BR
−
2 / BR
_/_
_/_
Basic
Reserve
Operat. hours
Display of hours run with enabled inverter (in Run operating
state).
Indices:
i001 = Days: Days (0...9999)
i002 = Hrs.: Hours (0...24)
i003 = Sec.: Seconds (0...3600)
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: 0
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
d
h
s
[V]
[Hz]
12-3
Parameter list
12.2
01.2001
General parameters
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P050
*
32Hex
P051
*
33Hex
P052
*
34Hex
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
Language
Plain text display language on the optional OP operator panel
and in the SIMOVIS PC program
Parameter values:
0: German
1: English
2: Spanish
3: French
4: Italian
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: -
0 to 5
−
0
2 /UHABR
2 /UHABR
Access Level
Access level setting; the higher the access level, the more
parameters can be accessed for reading and writing.
Parameter values:
1: Operation via PMU/ OP
2: Standard mode
3: Expert mode
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: -
1 to 3
−
2
1 /UHABR
1 /UHABR
Function Select
Selection of various commissioning steps and special
functions.
Parameter values:
0 = Return to the previously active drive status from one of
the functions described below.
0 to 20
−
0
2 /UHABR
2 /UHAB
1=
Par. Reset
2=
3=
Parameter Reset: All parameters are reset to their
original settings (factory settings). According to the
Profibus profile for variable speed drives this function is
also accessible via parameter P970. On completion of
this function, the parameter is automatically reset to 0.
Enable MLFB setting mode (switch to MLFB Input
operating status). The function can be deselected only
by resetting the parameter to 0 (Return).
Download/upread (switch to Download operating status).
The function can be deselected only by resetting the
parameter to 0 (Return).
4 = Hardware configuration (switch to Hardware Settings
operating status). The function can be deselected only
by resetting the parameter to 0 (Return).
5 = Closed-loop control settings (switch to Closed-Loop
Control Settings operating status to parameterize plant
data). The parameter must be reset to 0 (Return) to exit
the function without modifying parameters internally.
20 = Forming
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: -
12-4
_/_
_/_
Deutsch
English
Espanol
Francais
Italiano
Operation
Standard
Expert
Return
Set MLFB
Download
H/W Setting
Drive Setting
Capacitor
forming
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
*:conf-P
P053
*
Parameter access
0 to 31
−
1 /UHABR
6
1 /UHABR
35Hex
This parameter can always be written at any time from any
interface.
Parameter values:
0: None
1: COM BOARD
(CB)
2: BASE KEYPAD
(PMU)
4: BASE SERIAL (SST1)
(SST1 and OP)
8: Serial I/O (SCB with USS) (SCB)
16: TECH BOARD
(TB)
Setting instructions:
• Every interface is numerically coded.
• Entering the number or the product of several different
numbers assigned to different interfaces releases the
relevant interface(s) for utilization as a parameterizing
interface.
Example:
A factory setting of 6 indicates that interfaces BASE
KEYPAD (PMU) and BASE SERIAL (SST1) are released
as parameterizing interfaces.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
P054
OP Backlight
Backlighting for operator panel
Parameter values:
0 = Panel is always backlit
1 = Panel is only backlit when in use
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
−
0
3 / BR
3 / BR
36Hex
Release of interfaces for parameterization.
0 to 1
_/_
_/_
PZD Gr.: -
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-5
Parameter list
12.3
01.2001
Drive data
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P070
*
46Hex
MLFB(6SE70..)
MLFB (order number) of basic unit
For parameter values, see Section "Initialization"
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: -
P071
47Hex
90 to 1320
Line volts
[V]
Line supply voltage for AFE (r.m.s. of line-to-line voltage)
This parameter specifies the incoming AC supply voltage.
It is used to calculate the setpoint DC link voltage (P125) and
the thresholds for fault messages "Line supply overvoltage",
"Line supply undervoltage" (P074) and "DC link undervoltage".
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1 V
PZD Gr.: 0
P072
AFE current(n)
AFE rated output current
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 A
48Hex
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
0 to 255
−
0
3 /U BR
3 /U
−
←
2 / ABR
2/ A
4.0 to 6540.0
−
2 /U ABR
[A]
←
4 /U
_/_
_/_
PZD Gr.: 0
P074
Undervoltage threshold
6 to 100
−
4AHex
Response threshold for shutdown on line undervoltage. The
line supply voltage (P071) is the reference quantity.
Note:
P155: Maximum power failure time
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1 %
PZD Gr.: −
[%]
65
2 / BR
2 / BR
P077
*
FactSettingType
Selective factory setting
This parameter can be changed in the "MLFB Input" state
(P052). If no MLFB has yet been entered, the selected factory
setting type becomes effective immediately an MLFB number
is entered and "MLFB Input" deselected (P052=0).
It is possible to activate a specific factory setting by selecting
"Par. Reset" (P052 = 1 or P970 = 0). This action does not,
however, change the setting in P077.
Parameter values:
0: Current factory setting remains valid.
1: AFE with OP:
⇒not currently implemented
2: AFE cabinet unit with terminal strip:
This setting initializes the following parameters to values
other than zero:
P554, P566, P603
3: Current factory setting remains valid.
3: AFE cabinet unit with OP:
⇒not currently implemented
Type:O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: -
0 to 4
−
0
3 /U BR
3 /U
Line frequency
Frequency of incoming AC supply
50 to 60
−
2 / ABR
[Hz]
50
2/ A
0.000 to 10.000
−
3 / BR
0.000
3 / BR
4DHex
P078
4EHex
Type=O2;
P080
50Hex
12-6
PKW: 1HEX=1 Hz
PZD Gr.: −
Line filter C/mF
Capacitance of the filter capacitors of one phase of the AFE
line filter in mF for a "star circuit configuration". If the line filter
capacitors are connected in a “delta configuration”, then 300%
of the value must be parameterized.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.001
PZD Gr.: 0
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
*:conf-P
P081
Line filter L/mH
0.000 to 20.000
−
3 / BR
←
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
0.0
3/ B
−
3 / H BR
Inductance L of AFE filter reactor in mH.
_/_
_/_
51Hex
Type=O2;
r082
52Hex
P083
PKW: 1HEX=0.001
PZD Gr.: 0
Line filter L/%
Inductance L of AFE filter reactor in % (calculated from P081).
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 1638.4 %
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 %
PZD Gr.: 0
[%]
0.0 to 1000.0
[ohms]
R precharging
Precharging resistance in ohms.
53Hex
Type=O2;
r089
59Hex
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 Ohm
PZD Gr.: 0
Board Position 1
Board in slot 1 (left) in electronics box
Parameter values:
0 = None (formal setting only)
6 = CUSA board for AFE
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 16384
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: 0
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
None
AFE
12-7
Parameter list
12.4
01.2001
Hardware configuration
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P090
*
5AHex
P091
*
5BHex
12-8
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
Board Position 2
PCB in slot #2 (right) of the electronics box
Parameter values:
0 = No option board
1 = Communication Board (CB)
2 = Technology Board (TB)
3 = Serial Communication Board (SCB)
4 = Digital Tacho and Synchronization Board (TSY)
Setting instruction:
The following are the only permissible board/slot
combinations:
Slot 3 (P091)
Slot 2 (P090)
CB
TB
SCB
TSY
SCB
CB
CB
TB
SCB
TB
CB
SCB
CB
TSY
TSY
CB
SCB
TSY
TSY
SCB
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
0 to 4
−
0
3 / H BR
3/H
Board Position 3
Board in slot 3 (center) in electronics box
For description, see P090 (board position 2).
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
0 to 4
−
0
3 / H BR
3/H
_/_
_/_
None
CB
TB
SCB
TSY
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
12.5
Parameter list
Closed-loop control
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P120
78Hex
P122
7AHex
r123
7BHex
P124
7CHex
P125
7DHex
r126
7EHex
P129
81Hex
P130
82Hex
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
CosPhi set
Power factor cos(PHI) setpoint.
Parameter values: 0.800 ... 1.000 ⇒ inductive
-0.800 ... -1.000 ⇒ capacitive
RDS(2) parameter
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.001 PZD Gr.: 4000HEX=4
−1.000 to 1.000
2
i001=1.000
i002=1.000
3 / BR
3 / BR
React. pow.(set)
Reactive power setpoint for “reactive power compensation”
mode (P164 = 0).
Parameter values: Reactive power setpoint < 0 ⇒ inductive
Reactive power setpoint > 0⇒ capacitive
RDS(2) parameter
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1 % PZD Gr.: 4000HEX = 400%
−140.0 to 140.0
[%]
2
i001=0.0
i002=0.0
3 / BR
3 / BR
Reactive power/kVAr
[kVAr]
−
3 / BR
Sm.react.pow.
Smoothing time constant for reactive power setpoint specified
in P122.
RDS(2) parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1 ms
PZD Gr.: 0
0 to 900
[ms]
2
i001=50
i002=50
3 / BR
Vd(set) factor
Factor for the fixed setpoint of the DC link voltage. The line
supply voltage (P071) is the reference quantity.
Visualization parameters:
r126: Vd fixed setpoint
r447: Vd setpoint of setpoint node (P443)
r139: Vd setpoint
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01
PZD Gr.: −
1.42 to 1.90
−
1.58
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
_/_
_/_
Reactive power setpoint in kVAr calculated from P122 (for the
line supply voltage P071) for “reactive power compensation”
mode (P164 = 0)
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 1638.4 kVA
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1 kVA
PZD Gr.: 0
Vd (set, par)
Fixed setpoint for the DC link voltage setpoint V (calculated
from P125)
Note:
Settable via P125 Vd(set) factor
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4 x P071
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1 V
PZD Gr.: 7
3 / BR
3 / BR
[V]
Vd reg. Kp
Gain of DC-link voltage (Vd) controller
RDS(2) parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1
PZD Gr.: 0
0.0 to 31.9
2
i001=2.0
i002=2.0
3/
3/
Vd reg. Kp dyn
Dynamic gain of DC-link voltage (Vd) controller
RDS(2) parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1
PZD Gr.: 0
0.0 to 31.9
2
i001=10.0
i002=10.0
3 / BR
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
BR
BR
3 / BR
12-9
Parameter list
01.2001
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P131
Vd regulator Ti
Integration time constant of the DC-link voltage (Vd) controller
RDS(2) parameter
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 ms
PZD Gr.: 0
83Hex
r139
8BHex
r150
96Hex
Ud (set)
Setpoint of DC-link voltage in V
Note:
The Vd setpoint (r139) can be higher than the set
Vd setpoint (r447). For a high line supply voltage
and/or a high capacitive reactive current, the DC
link voltage is automatically increased so that a
minimum modulation reserve is maintained.
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4 x P071
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1 V
PZD Gr.: 7
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
0.5 to 100.0
[ms]
2
i001=20.0
i002=20.0
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
2 / ABR
_/_
_/_
3 / BR
[V]
Control status
Status word of the closed-loop control
Parameter values:
Bit00 = 1: Initialization of closed-loop control complete
Bit01 = 1: Ext. 24V power supply faulted
Bit02 =
Reserved
Bit03 = 1: Precharging completed
Bit04 = 1: Active current >= 0 (motoring, rectifier operation)
Bit05 = 1: Reactive current >= 0 (capacitive)
Bit06 = 1: Active current at limit
Bit07 = 1: Reactive current at limit
Bit08 = 1: Absolute current value at limit (r174)
Bit09 = 1: Smoothed line supply voltage < 80 % of P071
Bit10 = 1: Smoothed line supply voltage > 105 or 110 % of
P071
Bit11 = 1: Control factor at limit
Bit12 = 1 Ud2t integrator increasing
Bit13 = 1 DC link voltage < 90% of setpoint
Bit14 = 1 DC link voltage > 110% of setpoint
Bit15 = 1 Smoothed line supply voltage < P074
Coding of bits on the PMU:
15
14
7
6
13
12
5
4
11
10
3
2
Type=V2; PKW: 1HEX=1
r152
98Hex
12-10
9
1
8
0
PZD Gr.: 0
Active RDS
Active reserve data set of the AFE
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 16384
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: 0
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P155
max. t. pow.fail
9BHex
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
0 to 3000
[ms]
−
100
3 / BR
3 / BR
I start(mot,max)
Maximum current limit for motor operation.
The line current is limited by this parameter.
RDS(2) parameter
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 %
PZD: 4000HEX = 400 %
0.0 to 150.0
[%]
2
i001=150.0
i002=150.0
3 / ABR
3/ A
I start(gen,max)
Maximum regenerative current limit.
−150.0 to 0.0
2
3 / ABR
[%]
i001=-150.0
i002=-150.0
3/ A
0 to 2
2
i001=1
i002=1
3 / ABR
3/ A
Maximum time until the power failure fault (F009) or line
supply undervoltage fault (F004) is output.
If the unsmoothed line supply voltage falls below the threshold
parameterized in P074, the inverter firing pulses are inhibited.
The main contactor remains closed. If the line supply voltage
does not increase above the minimum threshold (P074) within
the maximum time for a power failure, the power failure fault
F009 is output and the main contactor is opened (deenergized).
If the smoothed line supply voltage falls below the threshold
parameterized in P074, fault message F004 "line supply
undervoltage" is output.
Type=O2;
P160
A0Hex
P161
PKW: 1HEX=1 s
ZD-Gr.: 0
A1Hex
The regenerative feedback current is limited to the value set
here..0
RDS(2) parameter
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 %
PZD: 4000HEX = 400 %
P164
Operating mode
Selection of the operating mode
Parameter values:
0: Operating mode “reactive power compensation”
The setpoint for the reactive power can be set via P122.
1: Operating mode "cos(PHI)"
The setpoint for the cos(PHI) can be set via P120.
2: Operating mode "closed-loop current control"
The source of the current setpoint must be entered via
P486.
3: Regenerative partial load
RDS(2) parameter
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: −
A4Hex
_/_
_/_
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-11
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
P173
ADHex
r174
AEHex
r179
B3Hex
r255
FFHex
r256
100Hex
r263
107Hex
r264
108Hex
12-12
01.2001
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
Imax
1 to 30000
2
3 / BR
Maximum current (fundamental r.m.s.)
Setpoint for current limitation (Imax controller) to protect the
AFE.
Maximum 1.6 x conv.current(n) (P072).
Visualization parameters: r174: Actually applied maximum
current setpoint (taking derating
into account)
Note:
The maximum current set here must always be so
high so that the AFE can handle the power
demanded by the drive. If the drive demands more
current than the maximum current set here, the AFE
shuts down with the “overload” fault (F013). Note
P160/161 as well!
RDS(2) parameter
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1 A
PZD Gr.: 6
[A]
i001=136
i002=136
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
Imax(set)
_/_
_/_
[A]
Maximum current (setpoint applied)
Setpoint applied for current limiting (Imax controller); takes into
account the effect of the I²t calculation
Note:
P173 (parameterized maximum current setpoint)
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 40 x P072
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1 A
PZD Gr.: 6
Output Amps (rms)
Output current (fundamental rms) (fast actual value for
automation purposes)
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4*P072
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 A
PZD Gr.: 6
I (reactive,set)
Reactive current component setpoint.
Limited by the maximum current (r174) and the active current
setpoint (r263).
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4 x P072
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 A
PZD Gr.: 6
I (reactive,act)
Actual value of reactive current component
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4 x P072
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 A
PZD Gr.: 6
I (active,set)
Setpoint of active current component.
Limited by the maximum current (r174).
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4 x P072
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 A
PZD Gr.: 6
I (active,act)
Actual value of active current component
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4 x P072
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 A
PZD Gr.: 6
[A]
[A]
[A]
[A]
[A]
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
r303
Vd(act)
Actual unsmoothed DC-link voltage value
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4 x P071
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=1 V
PZD Gr.: 7
12FHex
P308
Sampling Time
Basic sampling time T0.
134Hex
Setting instructions:
• When the sampling time is reduced, the available
computing time should be checked via parameter r725 in
the "Run" state. At least 5 % of the available computing
time should always be left in reserve to avoid any delayed
(slow) execution of operator inputs.
• If fault F042 "Computing time" occurs, the sampling time
setting must be increased again.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 ms
PZD Gr.: −
P325
MC switch-on del
Delay time for closing (energizing) the main contactor.
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
−
3 / BR
0.8 to 4.0
−
3 / ABR
[ms]
1.5
3/ A
0.0 to 30.0
−
3 / BR
[s]
0.0
3/ B
[V]
145Hex
By delaying energization of the main contactor, it is possible to
charge the DC link up to the line voltage peak value via the
precharging resistors. This measure will be necessary if the
external DC-link capacitance connected to the AFE is
significantly higher than that of the AFE.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 s
PZD Gr.: −
P326
Max.pre-chrg. t.
Maximum precharging time
If the DC link is not successfully precharged within this period,
fault message Precharging (F002) or, if the line voltage is too
low, fault message Line Voltage (F004) is activated.
RDS(2) parameter
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 s
PZD Gr.: 0
0.1 to 30.0
[s]
2
i001=3.0
i002=3.0
3 / BR
3/ B
MCInvEnableDel
0.08 to 5.00
−
4 / BR
Delay between activation of the main contactor and enabling
of the inverter.
By increasing this time, it is possible to ensure that the DC link
is charged up completely to the peak value of the mains
voltage. This is necessary if the external DC link capacity
connected to the AFE is considerably greater than that of the
AFE. The set time should always be at least 100 ms greater
than the time that the main contactor needs to close the
contacts.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.o1 s
PZD-Gr.: −
[s]
0.40
4 / BR
146Hex
P329
149Hex
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
_/_
_/_
12-13
Parameter list
12.6
01.2001
Functions
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P366
16EHex
P387
183Hex
P408
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
Auto Restart
Automatic restart (WEA) after power failure
Parameter values:
0 = Inhibited
1 = Power failure acknowledgement only after power
recovery
2 = AFE is restarted after power recovery
CAUTION: External safety devices must be provided to
ensure that the AFE does not start accidentally
when P366 = 2!
RDS(2) parameter
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: -
0 to 2
2
i001=0
i002=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
Vd minimum
Response threshold for shutdown
DC-link undervoltage in closed-loop current control mode
(P164 = 2). The line supply voltage is the reference quantity
(P071).
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1 %
PZD Gr.: −
5 to 140
[%]
−
100
3 / BR
3 / BR
Forming time
DC link forming time
1.0 to 600.0
2
2 / ABR
[min]
i001=10.0
i002=10.0
2 / AB
0.0 to 6.5
[s]
−
0.0
3 / BR
3/ B
198Hex
This parameter defines the forming period for the DC link
when P052=20.
RDS parameter
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 min PZD Gr.: 0
P409
Line contac. del.
Delay time for commencement of precharging process.
This parameter can be used to implement a time-graded
sequence for starting up a number of drive units.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 s
PZD Gr.: −
199Hex
12-14
Operating Instructions
_/_
_/_
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
12.7
Parameter list
Setpoint channel
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
Range
[Unit]
*:conf-P
Description
Value Texts
P443
Src. Ud (set)
0 to 4545
*
1BBHex
Source for the DC-link voltage setpoint.
Parameter values:
1001:
Fixed setpoint
Other values: Acc. to process data connections of setpoint
channel.
B/R parameter
Type=L2;
PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P444
Vd (set) Kp
Gain for the DC-link voltage setpoint.
B/R parameter
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 %
PZD: 4000HEX = 400 %
1BCHex
r447
1BFHex
P486
*
1E6Hex
Vd (set,source)
Setpoint of DC-link voltage from setpoint nodes.
The Vd setpoint is always limited to sensible values so as to
prevent shutdown on faults as a result of impermissibly high
setpoints.
Minimum value: Peak value of line voltage = 1.42 x r030
Maximum value: 2x rated line voltage = 2 x P071
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 4*P071
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1 V
PZD Gr.: 7
Src.curr.setp.
Source for the setpoint of the active (line) current
The parameterized active current setpoint is effective only in
"Closed-loop current control" (P164 = 2) or "Slave AFE"
modes (CW2, bit 27).
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
2
3 / BR
i001=1001
i002=1001
3 / BR
0.0 to 300.0
2
3 / BR
[%]
i001=100.0
i002=100.0
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
0 to 4545
2
i001=0
i002=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
−300.0 to 300.0
[%]
2
i001=100.0
i002=100.0
3 / BR
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
_/_
_/_
[V]
Parameter values acc. to process data connections of setpoint
channel.
B/R parameter
Type=L2;
PKW format(HEX)=param. value
PZD Gr.: 0
P487
1E7Hex
r490
1EAHex
Curr.setp. Kp
Gain for the setpoint of the active (line) current in "Closed-loop
current control" (P164 = 2) or "Slave AFE" modes (CW2, bit
27).
B/R parameter
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 %
PZD: 4000HEX = 400 %
Curr.setp.
Active (line) current setpoint in "Closed-loop current control"
(P164 = 2) or "Slave AFE" modes (CW2, bit 27).
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 400 %
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 %
PZD: 4000HEX = 400 %
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
[A]
12-15
Parameter list
01.2001
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
Range
[Unit]
*:conf-P
Description
Value Texts
P517
205Hex
P518
206Hex
12-16
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
0.00 to 100.00
SetActValDev.Ud
[%]
Setpoint/actual value deviation in DC-link voltage Vd
In the case of a large deviation between Vd setpoint and
actual value, message "Setpoint actual value deviation" (status
word 1, bits 8 (r552) is activated.
Cf. P518 Minimum time of setpoint/actual value deviation
Ref. quantity: Vd(set) (r126)
RDS(2) parameter
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.01 % PZD Gr.: 0
2
i001=2.00
i002=2.00
3 / BR
3/ B
Deviation Time
0.0 to 10.00
2
3 / BR
Minimum time for setpoint/actual value deviation
When there is a deviation between the setpoint/actual value
(P517), the message "Setpoint/actual value deviation" (status
word 1 bit 8 (r552)) is output when the time in P518 runs out.
RDS(2) parameter
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.01 s
PZD Gr.: 0
[s]
i001=0.10
i002=0.10
3/ B
Operating Instructions
_/_
_/_
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
12.8
Parameter list
Control and status bit connections
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
r550
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
Control Word 1
Display of control word 1, bits 0 to 15 (see Section "Control
word").
Type=V2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: 0
−
2 / BR
Control Word 2
Display of control word 2, bits16 to 31 (see Section "Control
word").
Type=V2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: 0
−
2 / BR
Status Word 1
Display of status word 1, bits 0 to 15 (see Section "Control
word").
Type=V2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: 0
−
2 / BR
r553
Status Word 2
−
2 / BR
229Hex
Display of status word 2, bits 16 to 31 (see Section "Control
word").
Type=V2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: 0
226Hex
r551
227Hex
r552
228Hex
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
P554
*
22AHex
Src ON/OFF1
0 to 5001
Source for ON/OFF1 command (control word 1, bit 0)
See Section "Control word" for details
Parameter values: 0:
OFF1
1:
Illegal setting
1001: Digital input 1 CUSA
1003: Digital input 3 CUSA
1010: ON/OFF keys PMU
2001: SST1, word 1,bit 0
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word" (process data connections of control
word)
Note:
A value of 4101 or 4201 is recommended in
conjunction with the inputs of the serial IO system.
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param. value PZD Gr.: 0
2
i001=1010
i002=1001
2 / BR
2 / BR
P555
*
22BHex
Src1 OFF2(coast)
Source 1 of the OFF2 control command (control word 1, bit 1)
See Section "Control word" for details
1 to 5001
2
i001=1
i002=1002
2 / BR
2 / BR
1 to 5001
2
i001=1
i002=1
2 / BR
2 / BR
_/_
_/_
Parameter values: 0:
Illegal setting
1:
Operating condition
1002: Digital input 2 CUSA
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word" (process data connections of control
word)
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param. value PZD Gr.: 0
P556
*
22CHex
Src2 OFF2 (coast)
Source 2 of the OFF2 control command (control word 1, bit 1)
See P555 for description
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param. value
PZD Gr.: 0
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-17
Parameter list
01.2001
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
P557
Src3 OFF2 (coast)
1 to 5001
*
22DHex
Source 3 of the OFF2 control command (control word 1, bit 1)
See P555 for description
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P561
*
231Hex
Src InvRelease
0 to 5001
Source for the inverter enable command (control word 1, bit 3)
See Section "Control word" for details
Parameter values: 0: Disable inverter
1: Automatically when delay timers run
down
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word" (process data connections of control
word)
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
2
i001=1
i002=1
3 / BR
3 / BR
P565
*
235Hex
Src1 Fault Reset
Source 1 of "Acknowledge" control command (control word 1,
bit 7)
See Section "Control word" for details
2
i001=0
i002=1003
2 / BR
2 / BR
0 to 5001
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
2
2 / BR
i001=1
i002=1
2 / BR
_/_
_/_
Parameter values: 0:
No source selected
1:
Illegal setting
1003: Digital input 3 on CUSA
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word" (process data connections of control
word)
Note: The "Acknowledge" control command is edge-triggered.
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P566
Src2 Fault Reset
*
236Hex
Source 2 of "Acknowledge" control command (control word 1,
bit 7)
See P565 for description
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P567
*
237Hex
Src3 Fault Reset
Source 3 of "Acknowledge" control command (control word 1,
bit 7)
See P565 for description
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P568
*
238Hex
Src Jog1 ON
0 to 5001
Source for the Inching 1 setpoint (control word 1, bit 8)
See Section "Control word" for details
Parameter values: 0:
No inching
1:
Illegal setting
2001: SST1, word 1 bit 8
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word" (process data connections of control
word)
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
12-18
Operating Instructions
0 to 5001
0 to 5001
2
2 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
2 / BR
2
i001=2001
i002=2001
2 / BR
2 / BR
2
i001=0
i002=0
2 / BR
2 / BR
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
P569
Src Jog2 ON
0 to 5001
*
239Hex
Source for the Inching 2 setpoint (control word 1, bit 8)
See Section "Control word" for details
Parameter values: 0:
No inching
1:
Illegal setting
2001: SST1, word 1, bit 8
Other values:
read:
write:
2
2 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
2 / BR
_/_
_/_
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word" (process data connections of control
word)
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P572
Src.regen.enable
*
23CHex
Source for control command "Regenerative feedback enabled"
(control word 1, bit 12)
Parameter values: 0:
Regenerative feedback disabled
1:
Regenerative feedback enabled
2001: SST1, word 1, bit 8
Other values:
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
0 to 5001
2
2 / BR
i001=1
i002=1
2 / BR
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word" (process data connections of control
word)
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P575
*
23FHex
Src No Ext Fault1
1 to 5001
Source for control command "External fault 1" (control word 1,
bit 15)
An L signal causes the drive to shut down on faults.
Parameter values: 0:
Illegal setting
1:
No fault
1001: CUSA digital input 1
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word" (process data connections of control
word)
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
2
i001=1
i002=1
2 / BR
2 / BR
P576
*
240Hex
Src. ext. 24V ok
Source for the bit for monitoring the external 24 V power
supply.
This bit is connected to digital input 4 on the CUSA at the
factory.
2
i001=1004
i002=1004
3 / BR
3 / BR
0 to 5001
Parameter values: 0:
Ext. 24V not o.k.
1:
Ext. 24V o.k.
1004: CUSA digital input 4
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word" (process data connections of control
word)
B/R parameter
Type=L2;PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-19
Parameter list
01.2001
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
P578
Src. RDS bit 0
0 to 5001
*
242Hex
Source for bit 0 for selection of reserve data set (RDS)
(control word 2, bit 18)
Parameter values: 0: RDS bit 0 has a value of 0
1: RDS bit 0 has a value of 1
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word" (process data connections of control
word)
Note:
The reserve data set cannot be altered in Run
mode. Any change to the bit setting will not take
effect until the "Ready" state is reached.
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param. value
PZD Gr.: 0
2
3 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
3 / BR
P586
*
24AHex
Src No ExtFault2
1 to 5001
Source for control command "External fault 2" (control word 2,
bit 26)
An L signal causes the device to shut down on faults if:
• the DC link has been precharged (operating state > 10) and
• the 200 ms delay timer after precharging has run down
2
i001=1
i002=1
2 / BR
2 / BR
_/_
_/_
Parameter values: 0:
Illegal setting
1:
No fault
1002: CUSA digital input 2
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word" (process data connections of control
word)
B/R parameter
Type=L2;PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P587
*
24BHex
Src.slave AFE
0 to 5001
Source for "Master/slave AFE" switchover (control word 2, bit
27)
Parameter values:
0: Master AFE (int. current setpoint)
1: Slave AFE (ext. current setpoint)
1002: CUSA digital input 2
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word" (process data connections of control
word)
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
2
i001=0
i002=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
P588
*
24CHex
Src No Ext Warn1
Source for control command "External alarm 1" (control word 2,
bit 28)
2
i001=1
i002=1
3 / BR
3 / BR
1 to 5001
Parameter values: 0:
Illegal setting
1:
No alarm
1002: CUSA digital input 2
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word" (process data connections of control
word)
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
12-20
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
P589
Src No Ext Warn2
1 to 5001
*
24DHex
Source for control command "External alarm 2" (control word 2,
bit 29)
Parameter values: 0: Illegal setting
1: No alarm
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word" (process data connections of control
word)
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param. value
PZD Gr.: 0
P590
Src Base/Reserve
*
24EHex
Source for basic / reserve setting switchover command (control
word 2, bit 30)
Parameter values: 0:
Basic setting
1:
Reserve setting
1005: CUSA digital input 5
Other values:
See permissible settings in Section "Control
word" (process data connections of control
word)
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P600
Dst Ready for ON
*
258Hex
Destination of the status bit ’Ready for ON’ (status word 1, bit
0)
Power is ON, the drive can be switched on.
Parameter values:
Depending on the selected index, all settings specified in
Section "Status word" (process data connections of status
word) may be parameterized.
Indices: i001: GG:
Select a terminal on the basic unit
i002: SCI:
Select a terminal on SCI1/2
i003: TSY: Select a terminal on TSY
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P601
Dst Rdy for Oper
*
259Hex
Destination of status bit "Ready to Run" (status word 1, bit 1)
The DC link is charged, the pulses can be enabled.
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P602
*
25AHex
Dst Operation
Destination of status bit "Run" (status word 1, bit 2)
The device is running.
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P603
*
25BHex
Dst Fault
Destination of status bit "Fault" (status word 1, bit 3)
Note:
The active status (bit has H level) is output via the
terminal in inverted form (broken-wire proof).
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
0 to 5001
0 to 5002
0 to 5002
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
2
3 / BR
i001=1
i002=1
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
1005
3 / BR
3
3 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
3
3 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
0 to 5002
3
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
2 / BR
2 / BR
0 to 5002
3
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
2 / BR
2 / BR
_/_
_/_
12-21
Parameter list
01.2001
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
P604
Dst NO OFF2
0 to 5002
*
25CHex
Destination of the status bit ’No OFF2 command’ (status word
1, bit 4)
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P606
*
25EHex
Dst ON blocked
Destination of the status bit "Starting lockout active" (status
word 1, bit 6)
Note:
The active status (bit has H level) is output via the
terminal in inverted form (broken-wire proof).
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P607
*
25FHex
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
3
3 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
0 to 5002
3
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
Dst Warning
Destination of the status bit "Alarm" (status word 1, bit 7)
Note:
The active status (bit has H level) is output via the
terminal in inverted form (broken-wire proof).
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
0 to 5002
3
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
2 / BR
2 / BR
P608
Trg Bit Deviat.
0 to 5002
3
3 / BR
*
260Hex
Destination of the status bit "DC-link voltage setpoint = Actual
DC-link voltage’ (status word 1, bit 8) - cf. P517; see Section
"Status word" for details
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
P611
*
263Hex
0 to 5002
Dst Low Voltage
Destination of the status bit "Low voltage’ (status word 1, bit 11)
Note:
The active status (bit has H level) is output via the
terminal in inverted form (broken-wire proof).
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
3
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
P612
Dst Contactor
*
264Hex
Destination of the status bit "Energize main contactor’
(status word 1, bit 12); H level: Energize contactor!
CAUTION: For safety reasons, this status bit is always
connected to digital output 2 on the CUSA board
on the AFE. It is not possible or permissible to
connect the bit in any other way as it protects the
AFE against damage by preventing the main
contactor from closing before the DC link has
been charged.
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P614
Dst.Gen.Mot.
*
266Hex
Destination of the status bit "Generator/motor operation" (status
word 1, bit 14)
Meaning:
L: Motor-mode operation (rectifier)
H: Generator-mode operation (regen. feedback)
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
12-22
0 to 5002
0 to 5002
Operating Instructions
3
3 / BR
i001=1002
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
3
3 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
_/_
_/_
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
*:conf-P
P618
DstCurrLimAct.
0 to 5002
*
26AHex
Destination of the status bit "Current limit active’
(status word 2, Bit 18)
Note:
The active status (bit has H level) is output via the
terminal in inverted form (broken-wire proof).
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
3
i001=0
i002=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
P619
*
26BHex
Dst Ext Fault 1
Destination of the status bit "External fault 1 active’
(status word 2, bit 19)
i003=0
0 to 5002
Note:
The active status (bit has H level) is output via the
terminal in inverted form (broken-wire proof).
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P620
Dst Ext Fault 2
*
26CHex
Destination of the status bit "External fault 2 active’
(status word 2, bit 20)
Notes:
• The active status (bit has H level) is output via
the terminal in inverted form (broken-wire
proof).
• The device accepts the fault after 200 ms
provided that an ON command is active.
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P621
*
26DHex
Dst Ext Warning
Destination of the status bit "External alarm active’
(status word 2, bit 21)
0 to 5002
3
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
3
3 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
0 to 5002
3
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
3
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
3
3 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
Note:
The active status (bit has H level) is output via the
terminal in inverted form (broken-wire proof).
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P622
*
26EHex
Dst.warn.i2tAFE
Destination of the status bit "Inverter overload alarm"
(status word 2, bit 22); cf. r010 (AFE utilization)
Note:
The active status (bit has H level) is output via the
terminal in inverted form (broken-wire proof).
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: -
0 to 5002
P623
DstFltOvertmpAFE
0 to 5002
*
26FHex
Destination of the status bit "Inverter overtemperature fault"
(status word 2, bit 23)
Note:
The active status (bit has H level) is output via the
terminal in inverted form (broken-wire proof).
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
_/_
_/_
12-23
Parameter list
01.2001
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
P624
DstWarOvertmpAFE
0 to 5002
*
270Hex
Destination of the status bit "Inverter overtemperature alarm"
(status word 2, bit 24)
Note:
The active status (bit has H level) is output via the
terminal in inverted form (broken-wire proof).
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P629
*
275Hex
DstPrechrgContEn
Destination of the status bit “Precharging contactor energized”
(status word 2, bit 29)
0 to 5002
Caution:
For safety reasons, this status bit on the AFE is
always connection to digital output 1 on the PEU.
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P631
Dst Pre-Charging
*
277Hex
Destination connection for the status bit "Precharging active"
(status word 2, bit 31)
Parameter values, indices as for P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
12-24
0 to 5002
Operating Instructions
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
3
3 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
3
i001=1001
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
3
3 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
3 / BR
_/_
_/_
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
12.9
Parameter list
Analog inputs/outputs
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P655
*
28FHex
P656
290Hex
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
CUA AnaOut ActVal
Actual value output via the analog output of the CUSA
Setting instruction: Enter the number of the parameter whose
value is to be displayed.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1
PZD Gr.: 0
0 to 999
−
303
2 / BR
2 / BR
CUSA AnalogOutGain
Gain factor of the analog output on the CUSA, see Section
"Analog outputs"
−320.00 to
320.00
−
10.00
2 / BR
2 / BR
_/_
_/_
[V]
Parameter values:
P656 = calculated output voltage when parameter value is set to
100 %
The calculation formula for the output voltage is as follows:
PWE
⋅ P656 + P657
Vout =
100 %
Note:
The output voltage at the analog output can be
maximum ± 10 V.
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.01 V
PZD Gr.: 0
P657
291Hex
P660
294Hex
CUSA AnalogOutOffs
Offset of the analog output on the CU, cf. P656
Type=I2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.01 V
PZD Gr.: 0
−100.00 to
100.00
[V]
−
0.00
2 / BR
2 / BR
SCI AnalogInConf
Configuration of the analog inputs on the SCI1 boards, defining
the type of input signals:
Parameter values Terminals
Terminals
X428/3, 6, 9
X428/5, 8, 11
0: − 10 V ... + 10 V
−20 mA ... + 20 mA
1: 0 V ... + 10 V
0 mA ... + 20 mA
2: 4 mA ... + 20 mA
Notes:
• Only one signal can be processed per input. A choice of
voltage or current signals can be evaluated.
• Voltage and current signals must be connected to different
terminals.
• Settings 1 and 2 allow only unipolar signals to be used, i.e.
the internal process quantities are also unipolar.
• When setting 2 is selected, an input current of < 2 mA
causes a shutdown on faults (open-wire monitoring).
• Offset adjustment of the analog inputs is parameterized via
parameter P662.
Indices:
i001: Sl11
Slave 1, analog input 1
i002: Sl12
Slave 1, analog input 2
i003: Sl13
Slave 1, analog input 3
i004: Sl21
Slave 2, analog input 1
i005: Sl22
Slave 2, analog input 2
i006: Sl23
Slave 2, analog input 3
Precondition:
The associated SCB board must be logged on
via P090 or P091.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
0 to 2
6
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
i004=0
i005=0
i006=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
−10 V...+10 V
0 V...+10 V
4 mA...20 mA
12-25
Parameter list
01.2001
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P661
SCI AnaInSmooth
Smoothing time constant of analog inputs on SCI boards
Formula: T=2 ms x 2P661
Indices: See P660
295Hex
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
0 to 15
PZD Gr.: -
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
6
3 / BR
i001=2
i002=2
i003=2
i004=2
i005=2
i006=2
3 / BR
P662
SCI AnalogInOffs
−20.00 to 20.00
6
3 / BR
[V]
i001=0.00
i002=0.00
i003=0.00
i004=0.00
i005=0.00
i006=0.00
3 / BR
296Hex
Zero offset of analog inputs on SCI boards
See SCI Operator’s Guide for setting instructions
Indices: See P660
0 to 1999
6
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
i004=0
i005=0
i006=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
−320.00 to
320.00
6
3 / BR
i001=10.00
i002=10.00
i003=10.00
i004=10.00
i005=10.00
i006=10.00
3 / BR
−100.00 to
100.00
[V]
6
3 / BR
i001=0.00
i002=0.00
i003=0.00
i004=0.00
i005=0.00
i006=0.00
3 / BR
Type=I2;
P664
*
298Hex
PKW: 1HEX=0.01 V
PZD: 4000HEX=160 V
SCI AnaOutActVal
Output of actual values via analog outputs on SCI boards
Setting instruction: Enter the number of the parameter whose
value is to be output. See SCI Operator’s Guide for details.
Indices:
i001: Sl11
Slave 1, analog output 1
i002: Sl12
Slave 1, analog output 2
i003: Sl13
Slave 1, analog output 3
i004: Sl21
Slave 2, analog output 1
i005: Sl22
Slave 2, analog output 2
i006: Sl23
Slave 2, analog output 3
Precondition:
The associated SCB board must be logged on
via P090 or P091.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
P665
299Hex
SCI AnaOut Gain
Gain for analog outputs via the SCI slaves
Setting instruction: See SCI Operator’s Guide
Indices: See P664
Type=I2;
P666
29AHex
PZD: 4000HEX=160
SCI AnaOut Offs
Offset of analog outputs on SCI boards
Setting instruction: See SCI Operator’s Guide
Indices: See P664
Type=I2;
12-26
PKW: 1HEX=0.01
PKW: 1HEX=0.01 V
PZD: 4000HEX=160 V
Operating Instructions
_/_
_/_
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
12.10
Parameter list
Interface configuration
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
P680
SCom1 Act Value
0 to 999
*
2A8Hex
Output of actual values via serial interface SST1
Defines which parameter must be transferred at which telegram
position.
Notes:
• Status word 1 (r968) should be assigned to
word 1.
• In the case of double word parameters (type I4),
the associated parameter number must be
entered in two consecutive words or else only the
most significant word will be transferred.
• The length (number of words) of the process data
section in the telegram is set via P685, index i001.
Indices: i001 = W01: Word 01 of (process data section)
of the telegram
i002 = W02: Word 02 of (process data section)
of the telegram
...
i016 = W16: Word 16 of (process data section)
of the telegram
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
P682
SCB Protocol
2AAHex
P683
*
2ABHex
P684
*
2ACHex
The SCB board can be operated as a
• master for the SCI boards or as a
• communications board (see SCB Operator’s Guide).
Parameter values: 0 = Master for SCI boards
1 = 4-wire USS
2 = 2-wire USS
3 = Peer to Peer
4 = Not assigned
5 = Not assigned
Precondition: The associated SCB board must be logged on
via P090 or P091
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: SCom/SCB BusAddr
Bus address of serial interfaces (see Section "Serial interfaces")
0 to 5
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
read:
write:
0 to 31
1 to 13
_/_
_/_
16
3 / BR
i001=968
i002=0
i003=0
i004=0
i005=0
i006=0
i007=0
i008=0
i009=0
i010=0
i011=0
i012=0
i013=0
i014=0
i015=0
i016=0
3 / BR
−
3 / H BR
0
3/H
SCI module
4-wire USS
2-wire USS
Peer-2-Peer
Option 1
Option 2
Indices: i001 = SST1: Bus address of serial interface 1 (CUSA)
i002 = SCB: Bus address of SCB if P682 = 1, 2
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: SCom/SCB Baud
Baud rate of serial interfaces
Parameter values: 1:
300 baud
8:
38400 baud
2:
600 baud
9:
57600 baud
3: 1200 baud
10: 76800 baud
4: 2400 baud
11: 93750 baud
5: 4800 baud
12: 115200 baud
6: 9600 baud
13: 187500 baud
7: 19200 baud
Indices: i001 = SST1: Baud rate of ser. interface 1 (CUSA)
i002 = SCB: Baud rate of SCB if P682 = 1, 2, 3
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
2
3 / BR
i001=0
i002=0
3 / BR
2
i001=6
i002=6
3 / BR
3 / BR
12-27
Parameter list
01.2001
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
*:conf-P
Description
P685
*
2ADHex
SCom/SCB PCV
0 to 127
Number of words (16-bit) in PKW section in the net data block of
the telegram (see Section "Serial interfaces")
Parameter values: 0:
No PKW section
3, 4: PKW section is 3 (ident.,
ind,value), 4 words long
127: Variable PKW length for transmission
of parameter description and texts.
P686
*
2AEHex
Indices: i001 = SST1: Serial interface 1 (CUSA)
i002 = SCB: SCB if P682 = 1, 2
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: SCom/SCB # PrDat
Number of words (16-bit) of process data section in the net data
block of the telegram (see Section "Serial interfaces").
Indices: i001 =
SST1:
Serial interface 1 (CUSA)
i002 =
SCB:
SCB if P682 = 1, 2, 3
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
P687
*
2AFHex
SCom/SCB TlgOFF
Telegram failure time for CUSA and SCB
Shutdown on faults occurs if no correct telegram is received
within the specified time.
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
2
i001=127
i002=127
3 / BR
3 / BR
0 to 16
2
i001=2
i002=2
3 / BR
3 / BR
0 to 6500
[ms]
2
i001=0
i002=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
0 to 1
5
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
i004=0
i005=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
Setting instructions:
• Value 0: No monitoring and no fault shutdown; parameterize
for sporadic (acyclic) telegrams (e.g. OP on SST1).
• If a TB is installed in slot 2 and an SCB in slot 3, then the
setting in i002 is irrelevant.
Indices: i001 = SST1: Serial interface 1 (CUSA)
i002 = SCB: SCB
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0 ms PZD: 4000HEX=1638.4 ms
P689
2B1Hex
SCB Peer2PeerExt
Direct transfer of peer-to-peer receive data of the SCB.
Identification of words in received peer-to-peer telegram which
must be transferred on directly.
Param. values:
0: No immediate transfer (to CUSA only)
1: Direct transfer (incl. transfer to CUSA)
Indices: i001 = W01: Word 01 of (process data section
of telegram)
i002 = W02: Word 02 of (process data section
of telegram)
...
i005 = W05: Word 05 of (process data section
of telegram)
Precondition: P682 = 3 (peer-to-peer protocol)
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
12-28
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
_/_
_/_
01.2001
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P690
*
2B2Hex
SCB Act Values
Output of actual values via the serial interface of the SCB board
Defines which parameter must be transferred at which telegram
position.
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
0 to 999
16
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
i004=0
i005=0
i006=0
i007=0
i008=0
i009=0
i010=0
i011=0
i012=0
i013=0
i014=0
i015=0
i016=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
0 to 999
16
i001=968
i002=0
i003=0
i004=0
i005=0
i006=0
i007=0
i008=0
i009=0
i010=0
i011=0
i012=0
i013=0
i014=0
i015=0
i016=0
3 / BR
3 / BR
• Status word 1 (r968) should be assigned to
word 1.
• In the case of double word parameters (type I4),
the associated parameter number must be
entered in two consecutive words or else only the
most significant word will be transferred.
• The length (number of words) of the process data
section in the telegram is set via P685, index i002.
Indices: i001 = W01: Word 01 of (process data section)
of the telegram
i002 = W02: Word 02 of (process data section)
of the telegram
...
i016 = W16: Word 16 of (process data section)
of the telegram
CAUTION: When P682 = 3 (peer-to-peer protocol), a
maximum of 5 words can be transferred (i001 to
i005).
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
Notes:
P694
*
2B6Hex
CB/TB Act Values
Output of actual values via CB or TB
Defines which parameter must be transferred at which telegram
position.
• Status word 1 (r968) should be assigned to
word 1.
• In the case of double word parameters (type I4),
the associated parameter number must be
entered in two consecutive words or else only the
most significant word will be transferred.
Indices: i001= W01: Word 01 of (process data section)
of the telegram
i002= W02: Word 02 of (process data section)
of the telegram
...
i016= W16: Word 16 of (process data section)
of the telegram
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
Notes:
P695
CB/TB TlgOFFTime
0 to 6500
−
3 / BR
*
2B7Hex
Telegram failure time for CB and TB
Shutdown on faults occurs if no correct telegram is received
within the specified time.
Setting instructions:
Value 0:
No monitoring and no fault shutdown;
parameterize for sporadic (acyclic) telegrams.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0 ms PZD: 4000HEX=1638.4 ms
[ms]
10
3 / BR
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-29
_/_
_/_
Parameter list
01.2001
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
*:conf-P
Description
P696
CB Parameter 1
Communication Board parameter 1
Refer to documentation of installed COM BOARD
Setting instructions:
• This parameter is relevant only if a Communication Board is
configured and parameterized (P090 or P091 = 1)
• The validity of the setting is monitored by the board.
• If the value is not accepted by the COM BOARD, fault 80
with fault value 5 is displayed.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
0 to 65535
−
0
3 / H BR
3/H
CB Parameter 2
Communication Board parameter 2
See P696
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
0 to 65535
−
0
3 / H BR
3/H
CB Parameter 3
Communication Board parameter 3
See P696
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
0 to 65535
−
0
3 / H BR
3/H
CB Parameter 4
Communication Board parameter 4
See P696
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
0 to 65535
−
0
3 / H BR
3/H
P700
CB Parameter 5
0 to 65535
−
3 / H BR
0
3/H
2BCHex
Communication Board parameter 5
See P696
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
2B8Hex
P697
2B9Hex
P698
2BAHex
P699
2BBHex
_/_
_/_
CB Parameter 6
Communication Board parameter 6
See P696
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
0 to 65535
−
0
3 / H BR
3/H
P702
CB Parameter 7
0 to 65535
−
3 / H BR
0
3/H
2BEHex
Communication Board parameter 7
See P696
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
P701
2BDHex
CB Parameter 8
Communication Board parameter 8
See P696
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
0 to 65535
−
0
3 / H BR
3/H
CB Parameter 9
Communication Board parameter 9
See P696
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
0 to 65535
−
0
3 / H BR
3/H
P705
CB Parameter 10
0 to 65535
−
3 / H BR
0
3/H
2C1Hex
Communication Board parameter 10
See P696
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
5
i001=0
i002=0
i003=0
i004=0
i005=0
3 / H BR
3/H
P703
2BFHex
P704
2C0Hex
P706
2C3Hex
CB Parameter 11
Communication Board parameter 11
Indices: i001 - i005
See P696
Type=O2;
12-30
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
0 to 65535
PZD Gr.: 0
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Parameter list
12.11
Diagnostic functions
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
r720
2D0Hex
r721
2D1Hex
r722
2D2Hex
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
SW Version
Software version of the PCBs in positions 1 to 3 of the
electronics box
Indices: i001: SPl1: Software version of board in
slot 1
i002: SPl2: Software version of board in
slot 2
i003: SPl3: Software version of board in
slot 3
Note:
The TSY board has no software version.
The equivalent identifier is always 0.0.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1
PZD Gr.: 0
3
3 /U BR
SW Generat.Date
Date of creation of the CUSA software
Indices: i001: Year: Year
i002: Mon.: Month
i003: Day: Day
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
3
3 /U BR
SW ID
3
3 /U BR
3
3 /U BR
_/_
_/_
Expanded software version code of the PCBs in positions 1 to 3
of the electronics box
Indices: i001: SPl1: Software code of board in slot 1
i002: SPl2: Software code of board in slot 2
i003: SPl3: Software code of board in slot 3
Note:
The TSY board has no software code.
The equivalent code is always 0.0.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1
PZD Gr.: 0
r723
2D3Hex
PCB Code
Identification code of boards in slots 1, 2 and 3 of the electronics
box.
Indices: i001: SPl1: PCB code of board in slot 1
i002: SPl2: PCB code of board in slot 2
i003: SPl3: PCB code of board in slot 3
PCB codes:
CU:
100 - 109
CB:
140 - 149
TB:
130 - 139
SCB: 120 - 129
TSY: 110 - 119
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-31
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
r725
CalcTimeHeadroom
2D5Hex
r730
2DAHex
12-32
01.2001
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
Available CPU computation time reserve on CUSA as % of total
computing power. Relevant parameters are sampling time
(P308) and pulse frequency (P761).
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 16384 %
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0 %
PZD Gr.: 0
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
−
3 / BR
24
3 / H BR
_/_
_/_
[%]
SCB Diagnosis
SCB diagnostic information
All values displayed in hexadecimal notation
Displayed numbers overflow at FF Hex.
The meaning of individual indices depends of the selected SCB
protocol (P682).
Indices:
i001: flTC Number of error-free telegrams
i002: Terr Number of errored telegrams
i003: Voff USS:
Number of byte frame errors
SCI boards: Number of slave power outages
i004: Toff USS:
Number of overrun errors
SCI boards: Number of fiber optic link interrupts
i005: PnoSUSS:
Parity error
SCI boards: Number of missing response
telegrams
i006: STxL USS:
STX error
SCI boards: Number of search telegrams for
slave acceptance
i007: ETX ETX-error
i008: BcCCUSS:
Block check error
SCI boards: Number of configuration telegrams
i009: L/KL USS/Peer to Peer: Incorrect telegram length
SCI boards: Highest terminal numbers
required acc. to PZD
connection (P554 to P631)
i010: T/An USS:
Timeout
SCI boards: Analog inputs/outputs required
acc. to PZD connection
of setpoint channel and actual value
output via SCI (P664).
i011: Res1 Reserved
i012: Res2 Reserved
i013: Warn SCB-DPR alarm word
i014: Sl1? Setting indicating whether slave 1 is needed and, if
yes, of what type
0: No slave needed
1: SCI1
2: SCI2
i015: Sl2? Setting indicating whether slave 2 is needed and, if
yes, of what type
0: No slave needed
1: SCI1
2: SCI2
i016: IniF SCI boards: Initialization error
Type=L2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
r731
CB/TB Diagnosis
2DBHex
For detailed information please refer to the operating manuals of
the relevant Com board (CB) or Tech board (TB).
Type=L2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
r748
2ECHex
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
Trip Time
Times of fault events (reading of hours run counter (r013) at the
time a fault occurred)
Indices:
Day
Hours
Seconds
Latest fault (1)
i001=S1-d
i002=S1-h
i003=S1-s
Last acknowledged fault (2)
i004=S2-d
i005=S2-h
i006=S2-s
2nd last acknowledged fault (3) i007=S3-d
i008=S3-h
i009=S3-s
...
...
...
...
Oldest stored fault (8)
i022=S8-d
i023=S8-h
i024=S8-s
Description of faults in:
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
32
3 / H BR
24
2 / BR
_/_
_/_
r947
Fault number
r949
Fault value
r951
Fault number list
P952 Number of faults
PZD Gr.: 0
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-33
Parameter list
12.12
01.2001
Gating unit
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
r764
Modulation Depth
Control factor of closed-loop control for gating unit.
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 400 %
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=0.1 %
PZD: 4000HEX=400 %
2FCHex
12.13
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
−
3 / BR
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
[%]
Factory parameters
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P789
0 to 65535
−
0
3 / BR
4 / BR
315Hex
RAM Access Value
Content of a memory location on the CUSA board
Type=L2; PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
P799
*
31FHex
Special Access
Parameter for special access
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0
0 to 65535
−
0
3 / BR
3 / BR
12-34
_/_
_/_
_/_
_/_
PZD Gr.: 0
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
12.14
Parameter list
Profile parameters
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
*:conf-P
Description
P918
CB Bus Address
Protocol-dependent bus address for communication boards: see
board documentation
Note:
The validity of the bus address is monitored by the
Com Board. If its value is not accepted by COM
BOARD, fault F080 with fault value 5 is displayed
Precondition: P090 = 1 or P091 = 1 (Communication board
logged on)
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
0 to 200
−
3
3 / H BR
3/H
P927
*
39FHex
Parameter Access
Enabling of interfaces for parameterization
See P053 for description.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
0 to 31
−
6
3 / BR
3 / BR
P928
*
3A0Hex
Src Base/Reserve
Source for basic/reserve setting switchover command (control
word 2, bit 30); this parameter is identical to P590.
See P590 for description.
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=param.value
PZD Gr.: 0
0 to 5001
−
1005
3 / BR
3 / BR
396Hex
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-35
_/_
_/_
Parameter list
01.2001
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
r947
Fault Memory
3B3Hex
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
64
2 / BR
Fault Value
Fault value of faults, facilitates troubleshooting for a variety of
parameters.
The fault values are stored in the same indices as the
associated fault numbers (r947) - see example in r947.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
64
3 / BR
Fault Texts
List of fault texts; every fault text is stored under the same index
as its fault number.
Example (cf. r947): Fault 35 is stored in r947, i009.
This is (r951, i035): ’Ext.fault1’.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
116
2 / BR
Display of faults which caused the last 8 fault events (r748); up
to 8 faults can be stored for each event. Each fault has its own
fault number (see list of faults, Section 7). For plain text
information associated with fault numbers: See r951.
Indices:
Latest fault (1)
Last acknowledged fault (2)
2nd last acknowledged fault (3)
...
Oldest fault stored (8)
Fault 1
Fault 8
i001=S1-1
i008=S1-8
i009=S2-1
i016=S2-8
i017=S3-1
i024=S3-8
Fault 2
...
i002=S1-2 ...
i010=S2-2 ...
i018=S3-2 ...
i057=S8-1 i058=S8-2 ...
i064=S8-8
Notes: A value of "0" means "No fault".
In the event of a power failure, only the current and last
acknowledged fault are stored. Indices 17 to 64 are then
reset to 0. See P952 for the number of stored fault events.
Example of a fault:
Last acknowledged fault (2)
Index
r947
r949
Index
r748
9
35
0
4
62
10
37
2
5
1
11
0
0
6
7
12
13
14
15
16
Fault time (r748): after 62 days, 1 hour, 7 sec
operating hours
Faults occurrences (r947):
Fault value (r949):
35
No further details
37
2
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
r949
3B5Hex
r951
3B7Hex
12-36
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
_/_
_/_
01.2001
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
Description
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
*:conf-P
P952
# of Faults
0 to 8
−
2 / BR
*
3B8Hex
Number of faults
Contains the number of fault events stored in the fault memory
(max. 8).
If the parameter is set to "0", the entire contents of the diagnostic
memory (r748 - fault time, r947 - fault number, r949 - fault value)
are erased.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
0
2 / BR
r953
Warning Param1
Alarm parameter 1
If one of the alarms numbered from 1 to 16 occurs, the
corresponding bar in the 7-segment display lights up.
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
3B9Hex
16
15
8
7
14
13
6
5
Type=V2;
r954
3BAHex
12
11
4
3
10
2
9
1
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
Warning Param2
Alarm parameter 2
If one of the alarms numbered from 17 to 32 occurs, the
corresponding bar in the 7-segment display lights up.
32
31
24
23
30
29
22
21
Type=V2;
28
27
20
19
26
25
18
17
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
r955
Warning Param3
3BBHex
Alarm parameter 3
If one of the alarms numbered from 33 to 48 occurs, the
corresponding bar in the 7-segment display lights up.
48
47
40
39
46
45
38
37
Type=V2;
r956
3BCHex
62
61
54
53
Type=V2;
3BDHex
42
41
34
33
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
Warning Param4
Alarm parameter 4
If one of the alarms numbered from 49 to 64 occurs, the
corresponding bar in the 7-segment display lights up.
64
63
56
55
r957
44
43
36
35
60
59
52
51
58
57
50
49
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
Warning Param5
Alarm parameter 5
If one of the alarms numbered from 65 to 80 occurs, the
corresponding bar in the 7-segment display lights up.
80
79
72
71
78
77
70
69
Type=V2;
76
75
68
67
74
73
66
65
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-37
_/_
_/_
Parameter list
01.2001
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
*:conf-P
Description
r958
Warning Param6
3BEHex
Alarm parameter 6 (CB alarms)
If one of the alarms numbered from 81 to 96 occurs, the
corresponding bar in the 7-segment display lights up.
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
−
3 / BR
Profile #
Profibus-specific parameter
Note:
This parameter cannot be selected on the PMU;
the value cannot be displayed on the OP.
Analog output: 100 % with code number (PWE) = 16384
Type=OS; PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
−
3 / BR
r967
Control Word 1
−
2 / BR
3C7Hex
Visualization parameter for control word 1 (bits 0 - 15)
Identical to r550 (control word 1)
Type=V2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
−
2 / BR
96
95
88
87
94
93
86
85
Type=V2;
r959
3BFHex
92
91
84
83
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
90
89
82
81
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
Warning Param7
Alarm parameter 6 (TB alarms 1)
If one of the alarms numbered from 97 to 112 occurs, the
corresponding bar in the 7-segment display lights up.
112
110
111
109
102
104
101
103
Type=V2;
108
106
107
105
100
98
97
99
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
r960
Warning Param8
3C0Hex
Alarm parameter 6 (TB alarms 2)
If one of the alarms numbered from 113 to 128 occurs, the
corresponding bar in the 7-segment display lights up.
128
126
127
125
118
120
117
119
Type=V2;
r964
3C4Hex
124
122
123
121
116
114
113
115
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
Drive ID
Drive identification
Character string of the "Text" type. The first 2 characters contain
the Ident number for drive identification on the Profibus. The
remaining 24 characters contain the model name for displaying
the drive model on visualization systems.
Parameter values:
2 Byte: Ident number: 8022Hex
24 Byte: Model name (drive type): "MASTERDRIVES FC"
Note:
This parameter cannot be selected on the PMU;
the value cannot be displayed on the OP.
Type=VS; PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
r965
3C5Hex
r968
3C8Hex
12-38
Status Word 1
Visualization parameter for status word 1 (bits 0 - 15)
Identical to r552 (status word 1)
Type=V2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
_/_
_/_
01.2001
Parameter list
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
P970
Factory Settings
Parameter reset to factory settings
*
3CAHex
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
0 to 1
−
3/ B
1
3/ B
−
0
3 / BR
3 / BR
Parameter values:
0: Parameter reset: All parameters are reset to their original
values (factory settings). This parameter is then
automatically reset to "1".
1: No parameter reset
Note: The same function can be selected with P052 = 1.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0 to 1
P971
*
3CBHex
EEPROM Saving
Transfer to the EEPROM of parameter values stored in the RAM
(to protect data when power is disconnected/fails) when the
value of parameter changes from 0 to 1.
The parameter must be set to 0 manually.
Parameter values:
0: Change parameters
1: Save parameters
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: -
r980
Par # List Pt1
List of available parameter numbers, part 1
The parameter numbers are listed in ascending sequence.
The first 0 to appear in the list indicates that no further
parameters are available.
Indices:
The value range of the index extends from 1 to 116.
Index 116 has the special function of referring to the parameter
number which contains the next part of the complete list. A value
of 0 stored in index 116 indicates that there are no further parts
of the complete list.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
116
3 / BR
Par # List Pt2
List of available parameter numbers, part 2
See r980.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
116
3 / BR
Par # List Pt3
List of available parameter numbers, part 3
See r980.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
116
3 / BR
r983
Par # List Pt4
116
3 / BR
3D7Hex
List of available parameter numbers, part 4
See r980.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
r984
Par # List Pt5
116
3 / BR
3D8Hex
List of available parameter numbers, part 5
See r980.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
116
3 / BR
3D4Hex
r981
3D5Hex
r982
3D6Hex
r985
3D9Hex
Par # List Pt6
List of available parameter numbers, part 6
See r980.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-39
_/_
_/_
Parameter list
01.2001
PNU
Parameter Name in OP1
*:conf-P
Description
r986
Par # List Pt7
3DAHex
List of available parameter numbers, part 7
See r980.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
r987
3DBHex
r988
3DCHex
r989
3DDHex
r990
3DEHex
Range
[Unit]
Value Texts
# of Indices
Factory
Settings
read:
write:
116
3 / BR
Par # List Pt8
List of available parameter numbers, part 8
See r980.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
116
3 / BR
Par # List Pt9
List of available parameter numbers, part 9
See r980.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
116
3 / BR
Par # List Pt10
List of available parameter numbers, part 10
See r980.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
116
3 / BR
Par # List chg1
116
3 / BR
116
3 / BR
116
3 / BR
List of altered parameters, part 1
The parameter numbers are listed in ascending sequence.
The first 0 to appear in the list indicates that no further
parameters are available.
Indices:
The value range of the index extends from 1 to 116.
Index 116 has the special function of referring to the parameter
number which contains the next part of the complete list. A value
of 0 stored in index 116 indicates that there are no further parts
of the complete list.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
r991
3DFHex
r992
3E0Hex
12-40
Par # List chg2
List of altered parameters, part 2
See r990.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
Par # List chg3
List of altered parameters, part 3
See r990.
Type=O2;
PKW: 1HEX=1.0
PZD Gr.: 0
PZD Gr.: 0
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
_/_
_/_
01.2001
Process data
13
Process data
13.1
Control word
Introduction and
example of
application
Example of source
connection
Command
ON/OFF1 (GRD)
Operating states can be read in visualization parameter r001: e.g.
READY FOR ON: r001 = 009
The functional sequences are described in the order in which they
occur.
An individual source can be parameterized for every control command
(fixed values, digital inputs, PMU, PZD part of the telegram from the
automation devices).
The selection parameters for the sources are, with the exception of
P590 and P591, indexed 2x as follows:
Index i001: Basic setting (GRD)
Index i002: Reserve setting (RES)
One parameter is available to "connect up“ the source(s) for the control
commands.
The basic setting for the ON command (control word bit 0, control word
1) must be "connected up“ to digital input 1 of the CU (terminal
-X101:16):
Control word 1 table shows that the factory setting of parameter P554.1
is 1010 for the basic setting of the ON command source.
Table A for the possible sources of the ON command specifies that
1010 is the "PMU operator control panel“ source.
Look for the parameter value for the required source in Tables X and A.
The result for digital input 1 (BE1) on the CU can be found in Table X, it
is 1001.
This parameter value must now be entered in parameter P554.1.
Parameter Possible sources
P554.1
Tab. X,A
Parameter value Required source connection
1001
BE1 terminal -X101:16
A HIGH signal at terminal -X101:16 switches on the converter while a
LOW signal switches it off.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-1
Process data
NOTES
01.2001
♦ Multiple connections are permitted!
♦ The control word commands "OFF2“ (bit 1), "OFF3“ (bit 2) and
"Acknowledge“ (bit 7) are always simultaneously effective from 3
sources (can be parameterized)!
♦ "Acknowledge“ (bit 7) is always additionally effective from the PMU!
♦ If the "ON“ command (bit 0) is connected to a serial interface
(SCom, CB/TB, SCB-SCom), then an "OFF2" or "OFF3" command
must also be parameterized on the terminal strip. Otherwise, the
converter cannot be switched off via a defined command in the
event of a communications failure!
13.1.1
Display of control word on PMU seven-segment display
15
12
5
7
6
9
11
13
14
3
4
31
1
2
0
22
Control word 1
13-2
28
21
23
25
27
29
30
8
10
19
20
24
26
17
18
16
Control word 2
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
13.1.2
Process data
Control word 1 (visualization parameter r550 or r967)
The factory setting applies only when P077 = 0.
Designation
High / Low values
Parameter No.
Fact. setting
Bit No. (meaning)
(1 = High, 0 = Low)
GRD (RES)
GRD (RES)
sources
(P077 = 0)
see 8.1.4
P554.1 (2)
1010 (1001)
Tab. X,A
P555.1 (2)
0001 (1002)
Tab. X,B
P556.1 (2)
0001 (0001)
Tab. X,B
P557.1 (2)
0001 (0001)
Tab. X,B
P561.1 (2)
0001 (0001)
Tab. X,F
P565.1 (2)
0000 (1003)
Tab. X,C
P566.1 (2)
0000 (0000)
Tab. X,C
P567.1 (2)
2001 (2001)
Tab. X,C
ON / OFF1 (stop)
0
OFF2 (electrical)
1
ON
OFF1
1
0
ON
OFF2
1
3
&
Reserved
2
Inverter enable
0
Possible
Enabled
Inhibited
1
0
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
Reserved
6
Acknowledge
ON
1
7
0
1010 (fixed)
Inching 1 1)
8
Inching 2 1)
9
PZD control by PLC
10
Inching 1 ON
Inching 1 OFF
1
0
Inching 2 ON
Inching 2 OFF
1
0
Control
No control
1
0
P568.1 (2)
0000 (0000)
Tab. X,C
P569.1 (2)
0000 (0000)
Tab. X,C
SCom1/2
≥1
CB / TB
SCB 2
Reserved
11
Reserved
12
Reserved
13
Reserved
14
External fault 1
15
No fault
External fault 1
1
0
P575.1 (2)
0001 (0001)
Tab. X,D
1) There is no inching setpoint 1 or inching setpoint 2 on the AFE
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-3
Process data
13.1.3
01.2001
Control word 2 (visualization parameter r551)
The factory setting applies only when P077 = 0.
Designation
High / Low values
Parameter No.
Fact. setting
Bit No. (meaning)
(1 = High, 0 = Low)
GRD (RES)
GRD (RES)
sources
(P077 = 0)
see 8.1.4
P576.1 (2)
1004 (1004)
Tab. X,I
P578.1 (2)
0000 (0000)
Tab. X,I
P586.1 (2)
0001 (0001)
Tab. X,G
P587.1 (2)
0000 (0000)
Tab. X,I
P588.1 (2)
0001 (0001)
Tab. X,G
P589.1 (2)
0001 (0001)
Tab. X,G
1005
Tab. X,I
Ext. 24 V
16
3)
Ext. 24 V ok
Ext. 24 V not ok
1
0
Reserved
17
Reserve data set
18
4)
RDS 2
RDS 1
1
0
19
Reserved
20
Reserved
21
Reserved
22
Reserved
23
Reserved
24
Reserved
25
Reserved
External fault 2
26
Slave AFE
27
External alarm 1
28
External alarm 2
29
Basic / reserve
30
31
Possible
5)
No fault
External fault 2
1
0
Slave AFE
Master AFE
1
0
No alarm
External alarm 1
1
0
No alarm
External alarm 2
1
0
Reserve setting
Basic setting
1
0
P590
Reserved
3) On MASTERDRIVES CUVC, this bit corresponds to bit 0 for the data set of the
setpoint channel
4) On MASTERDRIVES CUVC, this bit corresponds to bit 0 for the data set of the motor
5) The AFE always uses a main contactor without check-back
13-4
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
13.1.4
Process data
Sources for control words 1 and 2
Table X (external terminals)
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
4101
4102
4103
4104
4105
4106
4107
4108
4109
4110
4111
4112
4113
4114
4115
4116
4201
4202
4203
4204
4205
4206
4207
4208
4209
4210
4211
4212
4213
4214
4215
4216
5001
BE1 terminal -X101:16
BE2 terminal -X101:17
BE3 terminal -X101:18
Assigned
BE5 terminal -X101:20
SCI, slave1, terminal 01
SCI, slave1, terminal 02
SCI, slave1, terminal 03
SCI, slave1, terminal 04
SCI, slave1, terminal 05
SCI, slave1, terminal 06
SCI, slave1, terminal 07
SCI, slave1, terminal 08
SCI, slave1, terminal 09
SCI, slave1, terminal 10
SCI, slave1, terminal 11
SCI, slave1, terminal 12
SCI, slave1, terminal 13
SCI, slave1, terminal 14
SCI, slave1, terminal 15
SCI, slave1, terminal 16
SCI, slave2, terminal 01
SCI, slave2, terminal 02
SCI, slave2, terminal 03
SCI, slave2, terminal 04
SCI, slave2, terminal 05
SCI, slave2, terminal 06
SCI, slave2, terminal 07
SCI, slave2, terminal 08
SCI, slave2, terminal 09
SCI, slave2, terminal 10
SCI, slave2, terminal 11
SCI, slave2, terminal 12
SCI, slave2, terminal 13
SCI, slave2, terminal 14
SCI, slave2, terminal 15
SCI, slave2, terminal 16
TSY, terminal 1
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-5
Process data
01.2001
Table A
0000
1010
2001
3001
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
Constant value 0
PMU operator panel
SCom1 word 1
CB/TB word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 4
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5
Table B
0001
1010
2001
3001
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
Constant value 1
PMU operator panel
SCom1 word 1
CB/TB word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 4
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5
Table C
0000
2001
3001
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
Constant value 0
SCom1 word 1
CB/TB word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 4
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5
Table D
0001
2001
3001
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
13-6
Constant value 1
SCom1 word 1
CB/TB word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 4
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Process data
Table E
0000
0001
1010
2001
3001
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
Constant value 0
Constant value 1
PMU operator panel
SCom1 word 1
CB/TB word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 4
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5
Table F
0000
0001
2001
3001
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
Constant value 0
Constant value 1
SCom1 word 1
CB/TB word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 4
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5
Table G
0001
2004
3004
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
Constant value 1
SCom1 word 4
CB/TB word 4
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 4
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5
Table H
0001
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
No MC checkback
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 4
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-7
Process data
01.2001
Table I
0000
0001
2004
3004
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
13-8
Constant value 0
Constant value 1
SCom1 word 4
CB/TB word 4
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 1
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 4
SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
13.1.5
Process data
Description of the control word bits
Bit 0: ON / OFF1 command (↑ "ON") / (L "OFF1")
Condition
Positive edge change from L to H (L → H) in READY FOR ON (009)
state.
Result
♦ PRECHARGING (010)
The precharging contactor is closed.
The DC link is precharged, the main contactor then closed and the
precharging contactor opened.
♦ READY TO RUN (011)
♦ RUN (014).
Bit 1: OFF2 command (L "OFF2") (electrical)
Condition
Result
LOW signal
♦ The inverter pulses are inhibited and the main contactor opened.
♦ STARTING LOCKOUT (008) until the command is withdrawn.
NOTE
The OFF2 command is simultaneously effective from three sources
(P555, P556 and P557)!
Bit 2: Reserved
Bit 3: Inverter enable command (H "Inverter enable") / (L "Inverter inhibit")
Condition
Result
Condition
Result
HIGH signal and READY TO RUN (011)
♦ RUN (014)
The inverter pulses are enabled.
LOW signal
♦ In RUN (014):
Change to READY TO RUN (011) display, inverter pulses are
inhibited.
Bit 4: Reserved
Bit 5: Reserved
Bit 6: Reserved
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-9
Process data
01.2001
Bit 7: Acknowledge command (↑ "Acknowledge")
Condition
Positive edge change from L to H (L → H) in FAULT (007) state.
Result
♦ Reset all current faults after they have been transferred to the
diagnostics memory.
♦ STARTING LOCKOUT (008) if no further faults are active.
♦ FAULT (007) if other faults are still active.
NOTE
The acknowledge command is simultaneously effective from three
sources (P565, P566 and P567) and always from the PMU!
Bit 8: Inching 1 ON command (↑ "Inching 1 ON") / (L "Inching 1 OFF")
Condition
Positive edge change from L to H (L → H) in the READY FOR ON state
(009).
Result
♦ An ON command is automatically issued (refer to control word bit 0).
LOW signal
Condition
Result
♦ An OFF1 command is automatically issued (refer to control word
bit 0).
Bit 9: Inching 2 ON command (↑ "Inching 2 ON") / (L "Inching 2 OFF")
Condition
Positive edge change from L to H (L → H) in the READY FOR ON state
(009).
Result
♦ An ON command is automatically issued (refer to control word bit 0).
LOW signal
Condition
Result
♦ An OFF1 command is automatically issued (refer to control word
bit 0).
Bit 10: Control via PLC command (H "Control via PLC")
Condition
HIGH signal; The process data PZD (control word, setpoints) sent via
the SCom1 interface of the CU, the CB/TB interface (option) and the
SCom/SCB interface (option) are evaluated only in the case of an
accepted command.
Result
♦ When several interfaces are in operation, only the process data of
the interfaces sending an H signal are evaluated.
♦ With an L signal, the last values remain in the appropriate dual-port
RAM of the interface.
NOTE
13-10
An H signal is displayed in visualization parameter r550 "Control
word 1" if one of the interfaces sends an H signal!
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Process data
Bit 11: Reserved
Bit 12: Regenerative feedback enable command (H "Regenerative feedback enable")
Condition
Result
HIGH signal
♦ Regenerative feedback operation is enabled.
Bit 13: Reserved
Bit 14: Reserved
Bit 15: External fault 1 command (L "External fault 1")
Condition
Result
LOW signal
♦ FAULT (007) and fault message (F035).
The inverter pulses are inhibited and the main contactor opened.
See Section "Fault and alarm messages"
Bit 16: Monitoring of external 24 V voltage supply (L "24V not o.k." /
H "24V o.k.")
Condition
Result
LOW signal
♦ Alarm A039 in operating states STARTING LOCKOUT (008) and
READY FOR ON (009).
♦ Fault F007 in operating states PRECHARGING (010), READY TO
RUN (011) and RUN (014).
Bit 17: Reserved
Bit 18: Reserve data set RDS bit 0 command (L "RDS1" / H "RDS2")
Condition
READY FOR ON (009), PRECHARGING (010) or READY TO RUN
(011)
A HIGH signal activates RDS2, and a LOW signal RDS1.
Result
♦ The parameter settings of the appropriate reserve data set in the
setpoint channel and closed-loop/open-loop control are activated.
See Section "Function diagrams".
Bit 19: Reserved
Bit 20: Reserved
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-11
Process data
01.2001
Bit 21: Reserved
Bit 22: Reserved
Bit 23: Reserved
Bit 24: Reserved
Bit 25: Reserved
Bit 26: External fault 2 command (L "External fault 2")
Condition
LOW signal; Command is not activated until converter switches to
READY TO RUN (011) and elapse of a 200 ms timer.
Result
♦ FAULT (007) and fault message (F036).
The inverter pulses are inhibited and the main contactor (if installed)
opened.
See Section "Fault and alarm messages".
Bit 27: Slave/master drive command (H "Slave AFE") / (L "Master drive")
Slave AFE
♦ The closed-loop control operates with an external line active current
setpoint.
The DC link voltage is specified by the master AFE.
Master AFE
♦ The closed-loop control operates with an internal line active current
setpoint (= output of DC link voltage controller). The DC link voltage
is maintained constantly at the set value.
Bit 28: External alarm 1 command (L "External alarm 1")
Condition
Result
LOW signal
♦ The converter continues to operate in its current status. An alarm
message (A015) is output.
See Section "Fault and alarm messages".
Bit 29: External alarm 2 command (L "External alarm 2")
Condition
Result
13-12
LOW signal
♦ The converter continues to operate in its current status. An alarm
message (A016) is output.
See Section "Fault and alarm messages".
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Process data
Bit 30: Select reserve/basic setting (H "Reserve setting") / (L "Basic setting")
Condition
Result
Condition
Result
HIGH signal
♦ The parameter values for the reserve setting for the control word
itself, the setpoint channel and closed-loop control are activated.
LOW signal
♦ The parameter values for the basic setting for the control word itself,
the setpoint channel and closed-loop control are activated.
Bit 31: Reserved
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-13
Process data
13.2
01.2001
Status word
Introduction and
example of
application
Example of wiring to
a destination
Status words are process data as defined by the explanation in Section
"Process data".
A "destination" at which the bit status can be identified (digital outputs
of CUSA, SCI 1/2 terminals, TSY terminals) can be parameterized for
each bit in a status word.
One parameter is available for "wiring up" the destination for each
status bit.
As shown below, the selection parameters have three indices:
Index i001 Selection of a terminal on the CUSA / PEU board
(basic unit)
Index i002 Selection of a terminal on the SCI 1/2 board (option)
Index i003 Selection of a terminal on the TSY board (option)
The message "motor operation" (status word 1, bit 14) must be "wired
up" to digital output 3 (BA3) on the CUSA (terminal X102:29/33) as a
high-active signal:
♦ "Wiring" of a status bit to a digital output on the CUSA is
parameterized via index i001.
♦ The table for status word 1 indicates that the message "Motor
operation" is assigned to parameter P614.
♦ Look for the parameter value for the desired destination in the same
table. The result is 1003 for digital output 3 on the CU.
This parameter value must now be set in parameter P614.1.
Bit #
Meaning
Parameter
Bit 14
Motor operation
P614.1
Parameter value Desired destination connection
1003
BA3 terminal -X102:29/33
When a High signal is applied to terminal -X102:29/33, the AFE
operates in generator mode and, in the case of a Low signal, in motor
mode.
If a value assigned to a terminal (digital output BA) is allocated to a
destination once in a selection parameter, then it will not be available in
the same index of any other selection parameter as a terminal is only
suitable for the output of one status bit.
NOTE
Faults, alarms and starting lockout (HIGH active) are displayed as
LOW active via the terminal strip (digital outputs).
This also applies to any option boards!
See Section "Digital outputs".
13.2.1
Status word 1 (visualization parameter r552 or r968)
PMU display
"Status word 1"
15
6
13-14
12
5
7
Operating Instructions
9
11
13
14
3
4
8
10
1
2
0
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Bit #
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Process data
Value
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 12
0
Not ready for ON
1
Ready to RUN
0
Not ready to RUN
1
Run
0
Inv. pulses inhibited
1
Fault
0
No fault
1
No OFF2
0
Bit 15
Value
Destination
P600.x
0000
No destination
1001
Assigned (precharging)
1002
Assigned (main contactor)
x=1
1003
BA3, -X102:29/33
1004
BA4, -X102:32/33
0000
No destination
4101
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA1
OFF2
4102
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA2
Reserved
4103
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA3
4104
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA4
4105
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA5
4106
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA6
4107
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA7
4108
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA8
4109
SCI 2 only, slave 1, BA9
4110
SCI 2 only, slave 1, BA10
4111
SCI 2 only, slave 1, BA11
4112
SCI 2 only, slave 1, BA12
4201
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA1
4202
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA2
4203
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA3
P601.x
P602.x
P603.x
1
Starting lockout
0
No starting lockout
1
Alarm
0
No alarm
1
No setp./act.v. deviation
0
Setp./act. val. deviation
1
PZD control requested
0
(not permitted)
P604.x
P606.x
P607.x
P608.x
always 1
x=2
Reserved
1
"Undervoltage" fault
0
No "Undervolts." fault
1
MC energized
0
MC not energized
4204
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA4
Reserved
4205
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA5
4206
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA6
Bit 13
Bit 14 1)
destin.
Ready for ON
Bit 10
Bit 11
Select
0 = Low
1
Bit 5
Bit 6
1 = High
P611.x
P612.x
1
Generator operation
P614.x
0
Motor operation
4207
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA7
Reserved
4208
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA8
4209
SCI 2 only, slave 2, BA9
4210
SCI 2 only, slave 2, BA10
4211
SCI 2 only, slave 2, BA11
4212
SCI 2 only, slave 2, BA12
0000
No destination
5001
TSY, BA1
5002
TSY, BA2
x=3
1) This bit corresponds to bit "CW/CCW rotation" on the MASTERDRIVES CUVC
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-15
Process data
13.2.2
01.2001
Status word 2 (visualization parameter r553)
PMU display
"Status word 2"
31
22
13-16
28
21
23
Operating Instructions
25
27
29
30
19
20
24
26
17
18
16
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Bit #
Process data
Value
1 = High
Select
0 = Low
destin.
Bit 16
Reserved
Bit 17
Reserved
Bit 18 2)
Bit 19
Bit 20
Bit 21
Bit 22
Bit 23
Bit 24
Value
x=1
1
Current limit active
0
Current limit not active
1
External fault 1
0
No external fault 1
1
External fault 2
0
No external fault 2
1
External alarm
0
No external alarm
1
AFE i2t alarm
0
No AFE i2t alarm
1
AFE overtemp. fault
0
No AFE overtemp. fault
1
AFE overtemp. alarm
0
No AFE overtemp. alarm
Destination
0000
No destination
1001
Assigned
1002
Assigned
1003
BA3, -X102:29/33
P619.x
1004
BA4, -X102:32/33
P620.x
0000
No destination
4101
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA1
4102
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA2
4103
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA3
4104
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA4
4105
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA5
4106
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA6
4107
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA7
4108
SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA8
4109
SCI 2 only, slave 1, BA9
4110
SCI 2 only, slave 1, BA10
P618.x
P621.x
P622.x
P623.x
P624.x
Bit 25
Reserved
Bit 26
Reserved
4111
SCI 2 only, slave 1, BA11
Bit 27
Reserved
4112
SCI 2 only, slave 1, BA12
Bit 28
Reserved
4201
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA1
4202
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA2
Bit 29 3)
1
PC contactor energized
0
PC cntact. not energized
4203
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA3
Reserved
4204
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA4
4205
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA5
4206
SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA6
4207
SCI 1/2, Slave 2, BA7
4208
SCI 1/2, Slave 2, BA8
4209
SCI 2 only, Slave 2, BA9
4210
SCI 2 only, Slave 2, BA10
4211
SCI 2 only, Slave 2, BA11
4212
SCI 2 only, Slave 2, BA12
0000
No destination
5001
TSY, BA1
5002
TSY, BA2
Bit 30
Bit 31
x=2
1
Precharging active
0
Precharging not active
P629.x
P631.x
x=3
2)
3)
This bit corresponds to "Overspeed" bit on the MASTERDRIVES CUVC
This bit corresponds to "Bypassing contactor energized" bit on the MASTERDRIVES
CUVC
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-17
Process data
13.2.3
01.2001
Description of the status word bits
Bit 0: "Ready for ON" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
STARTING LOCKOUT (008) or READY FOR ON (009) state
♦ The power supply, open-loop control and closed-loop control are all
operative.
♦ The inverter pulses are inhibited.
Bit 1: "Ready to Run" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
PRECHARGING (010) or READY TO RUN (011) state
♦ The power supply, open-loop control and closed-loop control are all
operative.
♦ The converter is switched on.
♦ Precharging has been completed.
♦ The AFE inverter pulses are disabled and Ud control is disabled.
Bit 2: "Run" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
RUN state (014)
♦ The converter is in operation.
♦ The AFE inverter pulses are enabled.
♦ Ud control is in operation.
Bit 3: "Fault" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
FAULT state (007)
♦ A fault (fault type irrelevant) has occurred.
Output at terminal strip (CUSA, TSY, SCI1/2) with L signal.
Bit 4: "OFF2" signal (L)
LOW signal
Meaning
OFF2 command is active
♦ An OFF2 command (control word bit 1) has been issued.
Bit 5: Reserved
13-18
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Process data
Bit 6: "Starting lockout" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
STARTING LOCKOUT state (008)
♦ The power supply, open-loop control and closed-loop control are all
operative.
♦ The signal is continuously applied as long as an OFF2 command via
control word bit 1 or an ON command via control word bit 0 is active
(edge evaluation).
Output at terminal strip (CUSA, SCB1) with L signal.
Bit 7: "Alarm" signal" (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
Alarm (Axxx)
♦ An alarm (type irrelevant) has occurred.
♦ This signal remains active until the cause has been eliminated.
Output at terminal strip (CUSA, SCB1) with L signal.
Bit 8: "Setpoint/actual value deviation" signal (L)
LOW signal
Meaning
"Setpoint/actual value deviation" alarm (A034)
♦ There is currently a deviation between the Vd setpoint and Vd actual
value which is greater than the setting in P517 (set/act.val.dev. Vd)
and active for longer than P518 (set/act.val.dev.time).
♦ The bit is reset to an H signal as soon as the deviation decreases to
below the setting in parameter P517.
Bit 9: "PZD control requested" signal (H)
HIGH signal
This signal is always active.
Bit 10: Reserved
Bit 11: "Undervoltage fault" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
"Undervoltage in DC link" fault (F008)
♦ The DC link voltage has dropped below the permissible limit value.
See Section "Fault and alarm messages"
Output at terminal strip (CUSA, TSY, SCI1/2) with L signal.
Bit 12: "MC energized" signal (H)
HIGH signal
The main contactor is energized.
WARNING
On the AFE, this status bit is always connected to digital output 2 on
the CUSA. A different wiring is not possible and is also not allowed
because the AFE inverter might be destroyed if the main contactor is
activated before the DC link has been precharged.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-19
Process data
01.2001
Bit 13: Reserved
Bit 14: "Motor operation" signal (L)
LOW signal
AFE operates in rectifier mode (active current >= 0)
Bit 15: Reserved
Bit 16: Reserved
Bit 17: Reserved
Bit 18: "Current limit active" signal (L)
LOW signal
Meaning
AFE operates at the present current limit setting
♦ If the AFE output current is limited, the DC-link voltage can no
longer be regulated to the selected setpoint.
Output at terminal strip (CUSA, SCB1) with L signal.
Bit 19: "External fault 1" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
" External fault 1"
♦ An "External fault 1" is active in control word bit 1.
Output at terminal strip (CUSA, SCB1) with L signal.
Bit 20: "External fault 2" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
" External fault 2"
♦ An "External fault 2" is active in control word bit 26.
Output at terminal strip (CUSA, SCB1) with L signal.
Bit 21: "External alarm" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
"External alarm"
♦ An "External alarm 1" is active in control word bit 28 or an "External
alarm 2" in control word bit 29.
Output at terminal strip (CUSA, SCB1) with L signal.
Bit 22: "AFE i2t alarm" signal (H)
HIGH signal
"AFE i2t alarm" (A025)
Meaning
♦ If the converter continues to operate under the current load
conditions, the AFE will be thermally overloaded.
Output at terminal strip (CUSA, SCB1) with L signal.
13-20
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Process data
Bit 23: "AFE overtemperature fault" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
"Inverter temperature too high" fault (F023)
♦ The inverter temperature limit value has been exceeded.
See Section "Fault and alarm messages".
Output at terminal strip (CUSA, SCB1) with L signal.
Bit 24: "AFE overtemperature alarm" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
"Inverter temperature too high" alarm (A022)
♦ Alarm-tripping temperature threshold of inverter has been exceeded.
See Section "Fault and alarm messages".
Output at terminal strip (CUSA, SCB1) with L signal
Bit 25: Reserved
Bit 26: Reserved
Bit 27: Reserved
Bit 28: Reserved
Bit 29: "PC energized" signal (H)
HIGH signal
The precharging contactor is energized.
WARNING
The status bit is always connected to terminal -X9 on the AFE. A
different wiring is not possible and is also not allowed because the AFE
inverter might be destroyed if the main contactor is activated before the
DC link has been precharged.
Bit 30: Reserved
Bit 31: "Precharging active" signal (H)
HIGH signal
Meaning
PRECHARGING state (010)
♦ The DC link is precharged as soon as an ON command is issued.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-21
01.2001
Faults and alarms
14
Faults and alarms
14.1
Faults
General information about faults
The available information for each fault event comprises the following
parameters:
Parameter
r947
Fault number
r949
Fault value
r951
Fault texts
P952
Number of faults
r748
Fault time
If a fault message is not acknowledged before the electronics supply
voltage is disconnected, then the same fault message will be active
again when the supply is next turned on. The drive cannot be started
until the message has been acknowledged (exception: Automatic
restart function is selected, see P366).
Fault messages
No.
Description of fault
Remedial measures
F002
Precharging
The DC-link voltage failed to reach the minimum limit (≈
P071 line supply voltage) during precharging.
The maximum precharging time (P326) has been
exceeded.
Check the line voltage,
compare with P071 Line voltage
Check the maximum precharging time (P326);
F003
Line overvoltage
Check the line voltage,
The voltage at the input terminals is higher than the
response threshold (110 % or 120 % of P071 in inverter
disabled or Run states).
compare with P071 Line voltage
The voltage at the input terminals is higher than the
maximum voltage limit + 5 % (E.g.: 460 V + 5 % = 483 V)
and DC-link voltage is higher than the maximum
continuous permissible value.
Line voltage
range
Max. contin. perm. Vd Max. contin. perm. Vd
at III >90% P072
at III ≤ 90% P072
380 V to 460 V
500 V to 575 V
660 V to 690 V
F004
740 V
922 V
1100 V
760 V
947 V
1130 V
Line undervoltage
Check the line voltage
The voltage at the input terminals is less than the
response threshold (cf. P074 in operation). The line
supply undervoltage fault is also activated if Vsupply < 80
% of P071 and if F013 occurs.
Check P074
Compare with P071 Line voltage
Check the line phase sequence
If the fault occurs immediately after the drive is started up
(for the first time), then the phase sequence may be
incorrect. The line must always be connected in a CW
phase sequence.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
14-1
Faults and alarms
01.2001
Fault messages
No.
F006
Description of fault
Remedial measures
DC-link overvoltage
The drive has been shut down due to an excessive DClink voltage.
Line voltage range
I Shutdown threshold
380 V to 460 V
I
approx. 820 V
500 V to 575 V
I
approx. 1020 V
660 V to 690 V
I
approx. 1220 V
F007
Regenerative feedback power of the connected converter
is greater than that of the AFE.
Check the following parameters:
• P572 Source regeneration enable
• P161 Max. generator current limit of AFE
• P173 Maximum current
Electrical off
Check the external voltage supply
Failure of the electronic voltage supply -G10 in the mains
connection module (external 24 V)
Check the wiring (hardware and software) for the ext.
24 V monitoring function (software FS: 576 = 1004 =
digital input 4).
F008
DC-link undervoltage
Check
The DC-link voltage has dropped below the minimum limit • the main contactor control in cases where the fault
value (≈ line supply voltage)
occurs immediately after precharging
• P160 Maximum motor current limit
• P173 Maximum current
F009
Supply failure
The line voltage has remained below the undervoltage
threshold (P074) for longer than the maximum line failure
period (P155).
The line failure fault is also activated if the line voltage
frequency drops below 40 Hz or exceeds 70 Hz.
F011
F013
F023
Check
• the line voltage and line frequency
Compare with
• the threshold in Undervoltage threshold P074
• the maximum Line failure time P155
• the Line voltage P071
Overcurrent
The drive has been shut down as a result of overcurrent.
The trip threshold has been exceeded.
Check
Overload
The maximum current parameterized in P173 has been
exceeded by more than 10% or the load in regenerative
feedback mode was so high that the DC-link voltage has
reached its maximum value.
Check
Inverter temp.
Measure inlet or ambient air temperature. Apply reduction
curves when ϑ >40 ºC.
+ Section "Technical Data" in Operator's Guide
The inverter temperature has exceeded its maximum
limit.
r949 = 1 Inverter temperature limit is exceeded
r949 = 2 Sensor 1: Break in sensor lead or sensor
defective
r949 = 18 Sensor 2: Break in sensor lead or sensor
defective
• the main contactor control in cases where the fault
occurs immediately after precharging
• the AFE output for short circuit or earth fault
• the maximum current P173 IMaximum current
• the AFE load
Check
• whether fan -E1 is connected and/or rotating in the
correct direction.
• the air inlet and outlet openings for dirt/blockage.
• the temperature sensor connected to -X30
r949 = 34 Sensor 3: Break in sensor lead or sensor
defective
r949 = 50 Sensor 4: Break in sensor lead or sensor
defective
F024
Overload precharging resistor
Check
Precharging resistor protection has responded during DC- • for high-resistance short circuit or earth fault during
forming or WEA
link forming and automatic restart (WEA).
•
whether line voltage < 80 % during WEA
Fault F024 occurs when IΙI > 1 % P072 for longer than
1.5 × P326.
14-2
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Faults and alarms
Fault messages
No.
F025
Description of fault
UCE Ph. L1
A UCE shutdown has occurred in phase L1
F026
UCE Ph. L2
A UCE shutdown has occurred in phase L2
F027
F029
F030
UCE Ph. L3
Remedial measures
Check
• phase L1 for short circuit or earth fault
(-X2:U2 - including motor).
• the contacts on the CU.
Check
• phase L2 for short circuit or earth fault
(-X2:V2 - including motor).
• the contacts on the CU.
A UCE shutdown has occurred in phase L3
Check
• phase L3 for short circuit or earth fault
(-X2:W2 - including motor).
• the contacts on the CU.
Meas. val. sensing
Defect in the measured value sensing circuit
A fault has occurred in the measured value sensing
circuit.
• (r949 = 1) Offset cannot be adjusted in phase L1.
• (r949 = 2) Offset cannot be adjusted in phase L2.
• (r949 = 3) Offset cannot be adjusted in phases L1 and
L3.
Defect in the power section (valve is not blocking)
DC link short-circuit
Check the DC link
A DC link short circuit has been detected:
Check the load connected to the DC link
• (r949 = 1) A short circuit was detected during
precharging of the DC link.
• (r949 = 2) A short circuit was detected during forming
of the DC link.
• (r949 = 3) A short circuit was detected in drive
operation.
F035
Ext. fault 1
Parameterizable external fault input 1 has been activated
F036
Ext. fault 2
Parameterizable external fault input 2 has been activated
F039
DC link ground fault
An earth fault has been detected during DC-link
precharging
Check
• whether an external fault has occurred
• whether the lead to the appropriate digital input is
interrupted
• P575 Src No Ext Fault1
+ Section "Digital inputs" in Operator’s Guide
Check
• whether an external fault has occurred
• whether the lead to the appropriate digital input is
interrupted
• P586 Src No Ext Fault2
+ Section "Digital inputs" in Operator’s Guide
Check:
Maximum connected inverter power greater than
4 x AFE inverter power?
If No: Check the DC link
If Yes: Contact your local SIEMENS AG branch
F040
AS internal
Incorrect operating status
Replace the CUSA (-A10) board
F041
EEprom fault
A fault occurred as values were been saved to the
EEPROM
Replace the CUSA (-A10) board
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
14-3
Faults and alarms
01.2001
Fault messages
No.
Description of fault
Remedial measures
F042
Comp. time
Computation time problems
Reduce the computation time load, increase P308
Sampling time,
check r725 Available computation time.
F045
Opt.brd.HW
A hardware fault occurred as an option board was being
accessed
Replace the CUSA board
F046
Par.con.
Switch the device off and on again.
Replace the CUSA (-A10) board.
F047
Int.comp.time
Replace the CUSA (-A10) board.
F048
Interf. pulse freq
Fault during power OFF or pulse inhibit
Switch the device off and the on again.
Replace the CUSA (-A10) board if the fault occurs again.
F049
SW release
The SW versions of the EPROMs on the CU are different.
• Replace the language EPROM
Check the connection between the subrack and option
boards
The fault occurs as a result of the comparison of the
language EPROM and CU software.
F050
TSY init.
Check whether
• the TSY is correctly inserted
• the parameter is set correctly for the installed board
TSY board initialization error
P090 Board Position 2 − P091 Board position 3
r723 PCB Code − 724 PCB Code
F060
MLFB missing
This fault is set if the MLFB = 0 (0.0 kW) when the device
exits the INITIALIZATION state. MLFB = order number.
Enter the appropriate MLFB in parameter P070 MLFB
(6SE70..) after acknowledgement in INITIALIZATION.
(MLFB can be entered only if the appropriate access
levels are set in the two access parameters.)
F062
Multiparal.
• Check ImPI and the communications card and if
required, replace
Fault in connection with the multiparallel circuit has been
detected
• Check configuration and connections of the
multiparallel circuit
• Check parameter settings (P070 "MLFB(6SE70..)")
• Replace the CUSA (-A10).
• Replace the ImPI
F065
INT1 telegram
No telegram has been received on interface 1
(SCom1/USS protocol) within the telegram failure period.
• Check the connection CU -X100:1 to 5 or check
connection PMU -X300.
• Check P687.01"SCom/SCB TlgOFF"
• Replace the CUSA (-A10).
F070
SCB init.
SCB board initialization error
r949 = 1 or 2
• Check the contacts on the SCB and whether the board
slot matches the appropriate parameter setting.
• r723 PCB Code ,
• r724 PCB Code and
• P090 Board Position 2, • P091 Board Position 3
r949 = 5 Error in initialization data
• Check parameters P682 and P684
r949 = 6 Timeout during initialization and
r949 = 10 Error in configuration channel
• Check parameters P090, P091, P682 and P684
14-4
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Faults and alarms
Fault messages
No.
Description of fault
Remedial measures
SCB heartb.
• Replace the SCB
SCB is no longer processing the monitoring counter
(heartbeat counter).
• Check the connection between the subrack and option
board
F073
Aninput1 SL1
Amps at analog input 1, slave1, have dropped below 4mA
Check connection from signal source to SCI1
(slave 1) -X428:4, 5.
F074
Aninput2 SL1
Amps at analog input 2, slave1, have dropped below 4mA
Check connection from signal source to SCI1
(slave 2) -X428:7, 8.
F075
Aninput3 SL1
Amps at analog input 3, slave1, have dropped below 4mA
Check connection from signal source to SCI1
(slave 3) -X428:10, 11.
F076
Aninput1 SL2
Amps at analog input 1, slave2, have dropped below 4mA
Check connection from signal source to SCI1
(slave1) -X428:4, 5.
F077
Aninput2 SL2
Amps at analog input 2, slave2, have dropped below 4mA
Check connection from signal source to SCI1
(slave 2) -X428:7,8.
F078
Aninput3 SL2
Amps at analog input 3, slave2, have dropped below 4mA
Check connection from signal source to SCI1
(slave 3) -X428:10, 11.
F079
SCB telegram
•
•
•
•
F072
A telegram has not been received from the SCB (USS,
peer-to-peer, SCI) within the telegram failure time.
F080
TB/CB init.
Board initialization error at the DPR interface
F081
F082
Check the connections of the SCB1(2).
Check P687.01"SCom/SCB TlgOFF".
Replace the SCB1(2).
Replace the CU (-A10).
r949 = 1 TB/CB not inserted or TB/CB board code
incorrect
r949 = 2 TB is not compatible
r949 = 3 CB is not compatible
r949 = 5 Error in initialization data
Check contacts on the T300 / CB board and whether the
board slot matches the appropriate parameter setting;
• P090 Board Position 2, • P091 Board Position 3
• r723 PCB Code,
• r724 PCB Code
r949 = 6 Timeout during initialization
r949 = 10 Error in configuration channel
Check the CB initialization parameters;
• P918 CB Bus Address,
• 696 to P705 CB Parameters 1 to 10
TB/CB heartb.
TB or CB is no longer processing the monitoring counter
• Replace the TB or CB
TB/CB Tlgr.
• Check the connections of the CB/TB.
No new process data have been received from the TB or
CB within the telegram failure time.
• Check P695 "CB/TB TlgOFFTime".
• Replace the CB.
• Replace the TB.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
• Check the connection between the subrack and option
board
14-5
Faults and alarms
01.2001
Fault messages
No.
F091
Description of fault
Abortion due to another fault
Abortion because Vd too low
Abortion by OFF command
Abortion because no ON command within 20 s
of forming function selection
Fault in NOVRAM
• Line voltage too low or incorrect line voltage (P071)
parameterized
• OFF command
• No ON command
Switch the device off and then on again.
Replace the CU if the fault occurs again.
Table 14-1
14-6
• Depending on the fault
Form.interrupt
Forming of the DC link has been interrupted.
r949 = 1
r949 = 2
r949 = 3
r949 = 4
F255
Remedial measures
Fault numbers, causes and their counter-measures
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Faults and alarms
14.2
Alarms
An alarm message is periodically displayed on the PMU by A=alarm
and a 3-digit number. An alarm cannot be acknowledged. It is
automatically deleted once the cause has been removed. Several
alarms can be active simultaneously, in which case they are displayed
one after another.
If the AFE inverter is operated with the OP1S control panel, the warning
is displayed in the bottom line of the operation display. The red LED
also flashes (refer to the OP1S Operating Instructions).
Alarm messages
Alarm
No.
ParamNo.
Description
Remedial measures
Bit No.
A001
P953
0
A015
P953
14
A016
P953
15
A017
P954
0
A020
P954
3
A021
P954
4
A022
P954
5
A025
P954
8
Comp. time
CU board comp. time utilization too high
Check r725 Available computation time.
Increase P308 Sampling time
Ext. alarm 1
Parameterizable, external alarm input 1
has been activated
External alarm is active. Check whether the lead to
the appropriate digital input is interrupted.
Check parameter P588 Src No Ext Warn1
+ Section "Digital inputs" in Operator’s Guide
Ext. alarm 2
Parameterizable, external alarm input 2
has been activated
External alarm is active. Check whether the lead to
the appropriate digital input is interrupted.
Check parameter P589 Src No Ext Warn2.
+ Section "Digital inputs" in Operator’s Guide
Power section supply
Check the power supply to the power section
A UCE error is being detected on pulse disabling.
The power supply to the power section is
interrupted.
On compact units:
Check jumper between -X9.5 and -X9.6
Overcurrent
An overcurrent has been detected.
Check the driven load for an overload condition.
• Are the dynamic requirements too high?
Overvoltage
Check the line voltage.
A DC-link overvoltage condition has been detected.
• Are the dynamic requirements too high?
Inv.temp.
The alarm activation threshold has been exceeded.
Check r011 AFE temperature.
Measure inlet or ambient air temperature. Apply
reduction curves when ϑ >40 ºC.
+ Section "Technical Data" in Operator's Guide
Check
• whether fan -E1 is connected and/or rotating in
the correct direction.
• the air inlet and outlet openings for dirt/blockage.
• the temperature sensor connected to -X30
I2t- inv.
The inverter will be thermally overloaded if it
continues to operate under the current load
conditions.
Check whether the rated output current or peak
current (operating class II) is (was) too high.
Check r010 AFE Utilization
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
14-7
Faults and alarms
01.2001
Alarm messages
Alarm
No.
ParamNo.
Description
Remedial measures
Bit No.
A039
P955
Electrical off
The electronics voltage supply is not o.k.
Check
• the ext. 24 V voltage supply -G1
• the digital input and signal lead for monitoring of
the ext. 24 V voltage supply
6
A040
P955
7
A046
P955
13
A047
P955
Supply voltage
The voltage at the input terminals is outside the
rated range (< 80 % or > 110 % of P071) in
operation
Check
Current asymmetry
There is an asymmetry of > 25% I(conv. rated)
between the output currents
Check:
• mains supply terminals
• mains voltages in individual phases
Reactive current limited
The reactive current of the AFE is limited.
Check the
• the line voltage
• P071 Line voltage
• line voltage (r030)
• maximum current (P173)
14
• motor-mode current limit (P160)
• generator-mode current limit (P161)
A048
P955
15
A049
P956
0
A050
P956
1
A051
P956
2
A052
P956
A053
P956
3
4
A057
P956
8
14-8
Vd2t integrator
The monitoring function of the maximum
continuous DC link voltage (using the Vd2tintegrator) has reached 50 % of the final value. If
the high DC link voltage is caused by a high
capacitive reactive current, then this might be
limited (A047). If the high DC link voltage is caused
by a high line voltage (r030), the line overvoltage
fault (F003) message will be activated eventually
(depending on the amplitude of Vd).
Check the
• line voltage (r030)
• DC-link voltage (r006)
No slave
On the ser. I/O (SCB1 with SCI1/2), no slave is
connected or fiber optic is interrupted or no supply
to slaves.
P660 SCI AnalogInConf
• Check slave.
• Check fiber optic.
Slave incorrect
On the ser. I/O, the slaves connected do not
correspond to the parameter setting (slave number
or slave type).
Check P660 SCI AnalogInConf
Peer bdrate
Baud rate for peer connection is too high or
different.
Match baud rates of SCB boards involved in the
link P684 SCom/SCB Baud
Peer PZD-L
PZD length set too high for peer connection (>5).
Reduce the number of words
P686 SCom/SCB # PrDat..
Peer Lng f.
The PZD lengths of the sender and receiver in the
peer connection do not match.
Match word lengths of sender and receiver
P686 SCom/SCB # PrDat
TB-Param
Alarm occurs if a TB is logged on and connected,
but it does not respond to parameter jobs from the
PMU, SCom1 or SCom2 within 6 s.
Replace TB configuration (software).
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Faults and alarms
Alarm messages
Alarm
No.
ParamNo.
Description
Remedial measures
Bit No.
A065
P957
0
WEA active
The WEA option (P366) restarts the drive. No time
monitor is activated when the DC link is
precharging.
The automatic restart process can be aborted with
an OFF command.
r958
A081..
A096
0...15
A097..
A112
0...15
A113..
A128
r959
r960
0...15
The WEA function can place
operating personnel at risk.
Check whether you really need
to use WEA.
Change P366 WEA if
necessary.
CB alarm
See Operator’s Guide for CB board
TB alarm 1
See Operator’s Guide for TB board
TB alarm 2
See Operator’s Guide for TB board
Table 14-2
14.3
CAUTION
Alarm numbers, causes and their counter-measures
Fatal errors (FF)
Fatal errors are serious hardware or software errors which no longer
permit normal operation of the unit. They only appear on the PMU in
the form "FF<No>". The software is re-booted by actuating any key on
the PMU.
FFxx
Fault message
Switch device off and on again. Call service
department if fatal fault is displayed again
FF01
Time sector overflow
A non-removable time sector overflow has been identified
in the higher priority time sectors.
Increase sampling time (P308) or reduce pulse
frequency (P761)
FF03
Access error option board
A fatal fault has occurred as external option boards (CB,
TB, SCB, TSY ..) were being accessed
Replace the CUSA
Replace the CUSA
Replace the LBY
Replace the option board
FF06
Stack overflow
Stack overflow.
FFxx
Any other fatal fault.
Increase sampling time (P308) or reduce pulse
frequency (P761)
Replace the CUSA
Table 14-3
Replace the CUSA
Fatal errors
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
14-9
01.2001
15
WARNING
Maintenance
Maintenance
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES units are operated at high voltages.
All work carried out on or with the equipment must conform to all the
national electrical codes (VBG 4 in Germany).
Maintenance and service work may only be executed by qualified
personnel.
Only spare parts authorized by the manufacturer may be used.
The prescribed maintenance intervals and also the instructions for
repair and replacement must be complied with.
Hazardous voltages are still present in the drive units up to 5 minutes
after the converter has been powered down due to the DC link
capacitors. Thus, the unit or the DC link terminals must not be worked
on until at least after this delay time.
The power terminals and control terminals can still be at hazardous
voltage levels even when the motor is stationary.
If it is absolutely necessary that the drive converter be worked on when
powered-up:
♦ Never touch any live parts.
♦ Only use the appropriate measuring and test equipment and
protective clothing.
♦ Always stand on an ungrounded, isolated and ESD-compatible pad.
If these warnings are not observed, this can result in death, severe
bodily injury or significant material damage.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
15-1
Maintenance
15.1
01.2001
Replacing the fan
Construction types
A to C
The fan is designed for an operating time of L10 ≥ 35 000 hours at an
ambient temperature of Tu = 40 °C. It should be replaced in good time
to maintain the availability of the unit.
The units have a fan which operates as soon as the unit is connected to
the voltage supply.
The fan is located on the bottom of the unit.
Replace the fan as follows:
♦ Undo the two M4x49 Torx screws
♦ Pull out the protective cover together with the fan from underneath
♦ Withdraw fan connector X20
♦ Install the fan in reverse sequence.
X20
M4 x 49
Torx T20
and
spring washer
Protective cover
Fan E1
M4 x 49 / Torx T20
and spring washer
Fig. 15-1
Construction type D
Cover and fan for housing size A to C
The fan is screwed onto a bracket and is located at the bottom section
of the unit.
Replace the fan as follows:
♦ Withdraw fan connector X20.
♦ Unscrew the two M5x16 Torx screws at the bottom of the unit.
♦ Pull the bracket out of the unit from underneath.
♦ Unscrew the M4 fan screws.
♦ Install the fan in reverse sequence.
15-2
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Maintenance
Fan
M4 screw (Torx T20)
Captive washer
Bracket
Washer
Spring washer
Washer
Spring washer
M5x16
Torx T25
Fig. 15-2
Replacing the fan
fuse (type D)
M5x16
Torx T25
Fan with bracket for housing size D
The fuses are located in the upper section of the unit in a fuse holder.
You have to open the fuse holder to replace the fuses.
Fuse link
Fuse holder
closed
Fig. 15-3
Fuse holder
open
Fuse holder for housing size D
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
15-3
Maintenance
15.2
01.2001
Replacing the PMU
Replacing the PMU
♦ Turn the snaps on the front cover by 90 °
♦ Open up the front cover
♦ Withdraw connector X108 on the CU (Control Unit)
♦ Remove ribbon cable from the guide hooks
♦ Carefully press the snap catches upwards on the inner side of the
front cover using a screwdriver
♦ Tilt the PMU and remove it
♦ Install new PMU in reverse sequence.
Rear side of the
front cover
Snap catches
PMU-board
Fig. 15-4
15-4
Replacing the PMU
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
15.3
Maintenance
Replacing the DC link fuses
Construction types
A and B
Construction types
C and D
The DC link fuses are not accessible on types A and B. They must
therefore only be replaced by the service personnel.
The position of the fuses can be seen from the relevant block diagram.
Procedure:
♦ Remove side plate
♦ Replace the defective fuses:
• Fuses F1 and F2 on type C
• Fuses F1, F3 or F1 to F4 on type D
Type of construction C
Type of construction D
F1
F2
FB1
F4
F3
F2
F1
Fig. 15-5
Replacement fuses
Position of the DC link fuses
Inverter MLFB
Fuse
Part ID
Fuse
order number
6SE7026-0ED81
6SE7027-2ED81
80 A, 700 V
F1, F2, F3, F4
6SY7000-0AC73
6SE7022-6EC81
6SE7023-4EC81
100 A, 700 V
F1, F2
6SY7000-0AC72
6SE7024-7ED81
100 A, 700 V
F1, F3
6SY7000-0AC72
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
15-5
01.2001
16
Forming
Forming
The DC link capacitors in units of the 400 V compact class must be
reformed if the device has been out of service or in storage for more
than 2 years.
If this is not carried out, the unit can be damaged when the line voltage
is powered up.
If the unit was started-up within one year after having been
manufactured, the DC link capacitors do not have to be re-formed. The
date of manufacture of the unit can be read from the serial number.
How the serial
number is made up
(Example: A-J60147512345)
Digit
Example
Meaning
1 and 2
A-
Place of manufacture
3
J
1997
K
1998
L
1999
M
2000
4
1 to 9
January to September
O
October
N
November
D
December
5 to 14
6
Not relevant for forming
Forming time
in hours
5
4
3
0
40
2
Off-circuit idle
time in years
1
1
Fig. 16-1
V
2
3
4
5
Forming time depending on the idle time of the AFE inverter
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
16-1
Forming
01.2001
P408
P052 = 20
P key
Set forming time (60.0 to 600.0 minutes)
Select "Form DC link"
The operating display appears:
The AFE must be switched on within 20 s or else a shutdown
on faults (F091) will occur (fault value 4).
Switch on AFE
NOTE:
While forming is in progress, the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
MC/VC must not be switched on!
- The DC link forming operation is carried out
(forming period as set in P408).
- During the forming period set in P408, the pre-charging
contactor is energized and de-energized in such a way that
the DC link capacitor is charged up to the line voltage
peak value.
- The current limit set in P160 is not effective with respect to
the forming operation!
End
16-2
On completion of the function, operating display "Ready" (009)
appears.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
17
Technical Data
Technical Data
EU low-voltage directive
73/23/EEC and RL93/68/EEC
EN 50178
EU directive EMC 89/336/EEC
EN 61800-3
EU machine directive 89/392/EEC
EN 60204-1
Approval
UL:
CSA:
Type of cooling
Air cooling with built-in fan
In progress, technically prepared
In progress, technically prepared
Permissible ambient and coolingmedium temperature
•
during operation
0° C to +40° C (32° F to 104° F)
(up to 50 °C, see Fig. „Derating curves“)
•
during storage
-25° C to +70° C (-13° F to 158° F)
•
during transport
-25° C to +70° C (-13° F to 158° F)
Installation height
≤ 1000 m above sea level (100 % load capability)
> 1000 m to 3500 m above sea level
(for load capability. see Fig. „Derating curves“)
Permissible humidity rating
Relative humidity
Climatic class
Class 3K3 to DIN IEC 721-3-3 (during operation)
Pollution degree
Pollution degree 2 to IEC 664-1 (DIN VDE 0110. Part 1).
Moisture condensation during operation is not permissible
≤ 95 %
≤ 85 %
during transport and storage
during operation (moisture
condensation not permissible)
Overvoltage category
Category III to IEC 664-1 (DIN VDE 0110, Part 2)
Degree of protection
EN 60529
IP00
Class of protection
Class 1 to IEC 536 (DIN VDE 0106, Part 1)
Shock protection
to EN 60204-1 and DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 (VBG4)
Radio interference suppression
to EN 61800-3
•
Standard
No radio interference suppression
•
Options
Radio interference suppression filter for Class A1 to EN 55011
Interference immunity
Industrial to EN 61800-3
Paint finish
For interior installation
Mechanical specifications
•
Vibrations
to DIN IEC 68-2-6
During stationary use:
Constant amplitude
- of deflection
0.075 mm in the frequency range 10 Hz to 58 Hz
- of acceleration
9.8 m/s² in the frequency range > 58 Hz to 500 Hz
During transport:
•
- of deflection
3.5 mm in the frequency range 5 Hz to 9 Hz
- of acceleration
9.8 m/s² in the frequency range > 9 Hz to 500 Hz
Shocks
to DIN IEC 68-2-27 / 08.89
30 g, 16 ms half-sine shock
Table 17-1
AFE inverter, general data
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
17-1
Technical Data
01.2001
Permissible rated output voltage in %
acc. to VDE 0110 / IEC 664-1
(not necessary acc. to UL / CSA)
100
75
50
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
Installation altitude above sea level in m
Permissible rated current in %
100
Temp
[°C]
Derating
factor K2
50
0.76
75
50
25
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
45
0.879
40
1.0
35
1.125 *
30
1.25 *
25
1.375 *
* See the
following
Note
Cooling-medium temp. in °C
Permissible rated current in %
100
Altitude
[m]
Derating
factor K1
1000
1.0
2000
0.9
3000
0.845
4000
0.8
90
80
70
60
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
Installation altitude above sea level in m
Fig. 17-1
Derating curves
The derating of the permissible rated current for installation altitudes of
over 1000 m and at ambient temperatures below 40 °C is calculated as
follows:
Total derating = Deratingaltitude x Deratingambient temperature
K = K1 x K2
NOTE
It must be borne in mind that total derating must not be greater than 1!
Example:
Altitude: 3000 m
Ambient temperature: 35 °C
K1 = 0.845
K2 = 1.125
⇒ Total derating = 0.845 x 1.125 = 0.95
17-2
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Technical Data
Designation
Order No.
Value
6SE70... 21-0EA81
Rated voltage
21-3EB81
22-6EC81
23-4ED81
24-7ED81
[V]
• Input
• Output
Rated frequency
21-8EB81
3 AC 380 (-20 %) to 460 (+5 %)
DC 600 to 740
[Hz]
Rated current
50 / 60
[A]
• Input
• Output
3 AC
DC
10.2
11.2
13.2
14.5
Rated output
[kVA]
6.7...8
8.6...10.4
Auxiliary current supply
[V]
17.5
19
25.5
28
34
37.5
47
52
11.5...13.8 16.7...20.1 22.3...26.8
30.8...37
DC 24 (20 - 30)
• Max. aux. curr. requirement [A]
Standard version at 20 V
1.7
2.1
2.3
• Max. aux. curr. requirement [A]
Maximum version at 20 V
2.7
3.2
3.5
Auxiliary current supply fan [V]
1 AC or 2 AC 230
• Aux. curr. requirem. at 50 Hz [A]
-
-
0.43
• Aux. curr. requirem. at 60 Hz [A]
-
-
0.49
Pulse frequency
3
[kHz]
3
3
3
3
3
Load class II to EN 60 146-1-1
Base load current
[A]
0.91 x rated output current
Base load duration
[s]
240
Overload current
[A]
1.36 x rated output current
Overload duration
[s]
60
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor conv. cosϕU
< 0.98
≥ 0.98
Efficiency η (rated operation)
Power loss
[kW]
0.12
0.13
0.16
0.27
0.37
0.49
Cooling-air requirement [m³/s]
0.009
0.022
0.022
0.028
0.028
0.054
Sound pressure levels, types of construction, dimensions, weights
Sound pressure level IP00[dB(A)]
60
60
60
60
65
65
Type of construction
A
B
B
C
D
D
90
425
350
135
425
350
135
425
350
180
600
350
270
600
350
270
600
350
8
12
12
21
32
32
Dimensions
[mm]
• Width
• Height
• Depth
Weight approx.
[kg]
Table 17-2
Air-cooled AFE inverters (Part 1)
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
17-3
Technical Data
01.2001
Designation
Order No.
Value
6SE70... 26-0ED81
Rated voltage
27-2ED81
[V]
• Input
• Output
Rated frequency
3 AC 380 (-20 %) to 460 (+5 %)
DC 600 to 740
[Hz]
Rated current
50 / 60
[A]
• Input
• Output
3 AC
DC
Rated output
[kVA] 38.7...46.5 47.3...56.7
Auxiliary current supply
59
65
72
80
[V]
DC 24 (20 - 30)
• Max. aux. curr. requirement [A]
Standard version at 20 V
2.3
• Max. aux. curr. requirement [A]
Maximum version at 20 V
3.5
Auxiliary current supply fan [V]
1 AC or 2 AC 230
• Aux. curr. requirem. at 50 Hz [A]
0.43
• Aux. curr. requirem. at 60 Hz [A]
0.49
Pulse frequency
[kHz]
6
6
Load class II to EN 60 146-1-1
Base load current
[A]
0.91 x rated output current
Base load duration
[s]
240
Overload current
[A]
1.36 x rated output current
Overload duration
[s]
60
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor conv. cosϕU
< 0.98
Efficiency η (rated operation)
≥ 0.98
Power loss
[kW]
Cooling-air requirement [m³/s]
0.7
0.86
0.054
0.054
Sound pressure levels, types of construction, dimensions, weights
Sound pressure level IP00[dB(A)]
65
65
Type of construction
D
D
270
600
350
270
600
350
32
32
Dimensions
[mm]
• Width
• Height
• Depth
Weight approx.
[kg]
Table 17-3
17-4
Air-cooled AFE inverters (Part 2)
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
18
Environmental Friendliness
Environmental Friendliness
Environmental
aspects during
development
The number of components has been significantly reduced over earlier
converter series by the use of highly integrated components and the
modular design of the complete series. Thus, the energy requirement
during production has been reduced.
Special significance was placed on the reduction of the volume, weight
and variety of metal and plastic components.
Plastic components
used
ABS:
PMU board
LOGO
LDPE: Capacitor ring
PA6.6: Fuse holder, mounting strip,
capacitor holder, cable holder,
terminal blocks, terminal strip,
supports, PMU adapter, covers,
cable holders
PC: Covers
PP: Insulating plates
bus retrofit
PS: Fan housing
UP: Clamping section
fastening bolts,
tensioning washer
Halogen-containing flame retardants were, for all essential
components, replaced by environmentally-friendly flame retardants.
Environmental compatibility was an important criterion when selecting
the supplied components.
Environmental
aspects during
production
Purchased components are generally supplied in recyclable packaging.
Surface finishes and coatings were eliminated with the exception of the
galvanized sheet steel side panels.
ASIC devices and SMD devices were used on the boards.
The production is emission-free.
Environmental
aspects for disposal
The unit can be broken down into recyclable mechanical components
as a result of easily releasable screw and snap connections.
The plastic components are to DIN 54840 and have a recycling symbol.
Once the product has reached the end of its service life, it must be
disposed of in accordance with the relevant national regulations
governing waste disposal.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
18-1
01.2001
19
Certificates
Certificates
Automation and Drives
Confirmation
Erlangen, 01.05.1998
This confirms that
Equipment
• Type
AC drive converter
• Order No.
6SE70...
SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES
is manufactured in conformance with DIN VDE 0558, Part 2 and EN 60204, Part 6.2
(= DIN VDE 0113, Part 6.2).
This equipment fulfills the protection requirements against electric shock according
to DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 when the following safety rules are observed:
• Service work in operation is only permissible at the electronics box
• The converter must be switched into a no-voltage condition and isolated from
the supply when replacing any part/component
• All panels must be closed during operation.
Thus, this equipment conforms to the appropriate regulations in Germany according
to VBG 4 §2 (2) (VBG is a German regulatory body for safety-related issues).
The local operating regulations (e.g. EN 50110-1, EN 50110-2) must be observed
when operating the equipment.
A&D DS A P1
Mickal
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
19-1
Certificates
01.2001
Automation and Drives
Test certificate
Erlangen, 01.10.2000
Equipment
AC drive converter
• Type
SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES
• Order No.:
6SE70...
1)
The routine testing according to these
test instructions
475 100.9000.00 QP size A - D
476 100.9000.00 QP size E - G
476 200.9000.00 QP size J - L
Test contents:
I. Insulationstest
• refer to EN 50178, Part 9.4.5.2
and UL508/CSA 22.2-14.M 91,
Part 6.8
II. Functions test
acc. to EN 50178
•
•
•
•
III. Run-In
IV. Functions test
acc. to EN 50178
Initialization and start-up
Customer terminals
Power section inspection
Inspection of protection and
monitoring devices
• Continuous test
ambient temperature 55 °C
• see II. Functions test
The equipment complied with the test requirements.
The test results are documented within the production data base
1) For complete type, serial number and technical data please see rating plate.
A&D MC GWE P3
Schlögel
19-2
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6KD80 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
01.2001
Certificates
Factory certificate
*
regarding electromagnetic compatability
4SE.476 000 0001.00 WB EMV
Manufacturer:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Automation & Drives Group
Address:
Business Division
Variable-speed drives
Sub-Division
AC-Drive systems
P.O. Box 3269
D-91050 Erlangen
Product name:
SIMOVERT
Type 6SE70 Chassis units AC-AC and DC-AC
When correctly used, the designated product fulfills all the requirements of
Directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility.
We confirm the conformance of the above designated product with the Standards:
EN 61800-3
10-1996
EN 61000-4-2 (old IEC 801-2)
EN 61000-4-4 (old IEC 801-4)
EN 61000-4-5 (old IEC 801-5)
IEC 1000-4-3 (old IEC 801-3)
EN 55011
(DIN VDE 0875 Part 11)
Note:
These instructions relating to EMC-correct installation, correct operation,
connecting-up conditions and associated instructions in the product
documentation supplied must be observed.
Erlangen, 01.05.1998
H. Mickal
A&D DS A P1
*) acc. to EN 10204 (DIN 50049)
This declaration does not guarantee any features.
A&S DS 4102x
Copyright () SIEMENS AG 1997 All rights reserved
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6KD80
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
Page 1 of 1
19-3
Bisher sind folgende Ausgaben erschienen:
Ausgabe
Interne Sachnummer
AA
478 201.4000.00 J
Ausgabe AA besteht aus folgenden Kapiteln:
Kapitel
Änderungen
Seitenzahl
Ausgabedatum
1
Definitionen und Warnungen
Erstausgabe
4
01.2001
2
Beschreibung
Erstausgabe
3
01.2001
3
Erstinbetriebsetzung
Erstausgabe
2
01.2001
4
Transportieren, Lagern, Auspacken
Erstausgabe
1
01.2001
5
Montage
Erstausgabe
10
01.2001
6
EMV-gerechter Aufbau
Erstausgabe
1
01.2001
7
Anschließen, Verdrahten
Erstausgabe
17
01.2001
8
Grundfunktionsprüfung
Erstausgabe
3
01.2001
9
Erläuterung von Begriffen und Funktionalität des AFE
Erstausgabe
2
01.2001
10
Funktionspläne
Erstausgabe
2
01.2001
11
Parametrierung
Erstausgabe
10
01.2001
12
Parameterliste
Erstausgabe
40
01.2001
13
Prozeßdaten
Erstausgabe
21
01.2001
14
Störungen und Warnungen
Erstausgabe
9
01.2001
15
Wartung
Erstausgabe
5
01.2001
16
Formieren
Erstausgabe
2
01.2001
17
Technische Daten
Erstausgabe
4
01.2001
18
Umweltverträglichkeit
Erstausgabe
1
01.2001
19
Bescheinigungen
Erstausgabe
3
01.2001
The following editions have been published so far:
Edition
Internal Item Number
AA
478 201.4000.00 J
Version AA consists of the following chapters:
Chapter
Changes
Pages
Version date
first edition
4
01.2001
1
Definitions and Warnings
2
Description
first edition
3
01.2001
3
Initial start-up
first edition
2
01.2001
4
Transport, Storage, Unpacking
first edition
1
01.2001
5
Installation
first edition
10
01.2001
6
Installation in Conformance with EMC Regulations
first edition
1
01.2001
7
Connecting-up and wiring
first edition
17
01.2001
8
Basic function check
first edition
3
01.2001
9
Explanation of terminology and functionality of the AFE
first edition
2
01.2001
10
Function diagrams
first edition
2
01.2001
11
Parameterization
first edition
10
01.2001
12
Parameter list
first edition
40
01.2001
13
Process data
first edition
21
01.2001
14
Faults and alarms
first edition
9
01.2001
15
Maintenance
first edition
5
01.2001
16
Forming
first edition
2
01.2001
17
Technical Data
first edition
4
01.2001
18
Environmental Friendliness
first edition
1
01.2001
19
Certificates
first edition
3
01.2001
Group: Automation and Drives (A&D)
Division: Variable-Speed Drive Systems
Postfach 3269, D-91050 Erlangen
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Subject to change
Bestell.-Nr.: 6SE7087-6KD80
Printed in the federal Republic of Germany
01.2001
SIMOVERT Master Drives
Einspeise-Einheit
Bauform E
Common Rectifier
Size E
Ausgabe / Edition: D
Betriebsanleitung
Operating Instructions
Bestell-Nr. / Order-No.: 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
02.96
Allgemeines
Von dieser Betriebsanleitung sind folgende fremdsprachige Ausgaben lieferbar:
These Operating Instructions are available in the following languages:
Sprache
Language
Französisch
French
Spanisch
Spanish
Italienisch
Italian
Bestell-Nr.
Order-No.
6SE7087-7AE85-0AA0
6SE7087-8AE85-0AA0
6SE7087-2AE85-0AA0
Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung dieser Unterlage, Verwertung und
Mitteilung ihres Inhalts nicht gestattet, soweit nicht ausdrücklich
zugestanden. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle
Rechte vorbehalten, insbesondere für den Fall der Patenterteilung oder
GM-Eintragung.
Wir haben den Inhalt der Druckschrift auf Übereinstimmung mit der
beschriebenen Hard- und Software überprüft. Dennoch können
Abweichungen nicht ausgeschlossen werden, so daß wir für die
vollständige Übereinstimmung keine Garantie übernehmen. Die Angaben
in dieser Druckschrift werden jedoch regelmäßig überprüft und
notwendige Korrekturen sind in den nachfolgenden Auflagen enthalten.
Für Verbesserungsvorschläge sind wir dankbar.
SIMOVERT ist ein Warenzeichen von Siemens
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is
not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for
damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or
registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.
We have checked the contents of this document for conformity with the
hardware and software described. However, this does not absolutely
preclude deviations, and we therefore cannot guarantee complete
conformity. The information in the document is subjected to regular
scrutiny. Any necessary corrections will be made in subsequent editions.
We also welcome any suggestions you may have in the way of
improvement.
Siemens AG 1994 All rights reserved
SIMOVERT Registered Trade Mark
02.96
Contents
ENGLISH
Contents
0
Definitions ................................................................................................................... 0-5
1
Description .................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1
Applicability....................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2
Principle of operation ........................................................................................................ 1-1
2
Transport, unpacking, assembly ....................................................................... 2-1
2.1
Transport, unpacking........................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2
Storage ............................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.3
Assembly .......................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.4
Dimension drawing ........................................................................................................... 2-3
3
Connection .................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1
Power connections ........................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2
Power supply / control ...................................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.1
Electronic power supply / fault signal ............................................................................... 3-5
3.2.2
Signalling relay X36 ('Warning' signal) ............................................................................. 3-5
3.2.3
Settings on the module A23.............................................................................................. 3-6
3.2.4
Fan (X19).......................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.3
Control terminal strip of options ........................................................................................ 3-7
3.4
Measures for keeping to RFI suppression regulations ..................................................... 3-8
3.5
Single-line diagram with suggested circuit arrangement .................................................. 3-9
3.6
Power sections ................................................................................................................. 3-10
4
Start-up ......................................................................................................................... 4-1
5
Blank
6
Blank
7
Malfunctions and warnings.................................................................................. 7-1
7.1
Fault signals...................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2
Warning signals ................................................................................................................ 7-2
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
0-3
Contents
02.96
8
Maintenance ............................................................................................................... 8-1
8-1
Maintenance recommendations........................................................................................ 8-1
8.2
Replacing components ..................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.1
Replacing the fan.............................................................................................................. 8-2
8.2.2
Replacing modules ........................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.3
Replacing thyristor modules ............................................................................................. 8-3
9
Options ......................................................................................................................... 9-1
9-1
A50 additional power supply PSR for optional modules ................................................... 9-1
9.2
Options which can be integrated into the electronics box................................................. 9-2
9.3
Power supply .................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.4
Actual-current sensing module ......................................................................................... 9-3
9.5
Mechanical components ................................................................................................... 9-4
10
Spare parts .................................................................................................................. 10-1
11
Blank
12
Blank
13
Environmental compatibility................................................................................ 13-1
14
Technical data............................................................................................................ 14-1
14-1
Power reduction at increased coolant temperature .......................................................... 14-5
14.2
Power reduction at altitudes > 1000m above MSL ........................................................... 14-5
14.3
Applied standards ............................................................................................................. 14-6
15
Index .............................................................................................................................. 15-1
0-4
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
10.94
0
Definitions
Definitions
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
within the meaning of these operating instructions or the warning information on the product itself, are
persons who are entrusted with installation, assembly, commissioning and operation of the product and who
avail of qualifications corresponding to their activities, e.g.:
1. training or instruction or authorisation to activate and deactivate, to earth and to mark circuits and
equipment in accordance with the standards of safety engineering.
2. training or instruction in accordance with the standards of safety engineering in the care and use of
suitable safety equipment.
3. training in First Aid
DANGER
within the meaning of these operating instructions or the warning information on the product itself, indicates
that death and/or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
within the meaning of these operating instructions or the warning information on the product itself, indicates
that severe personal injury and/or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
within the meaning of these operating instructions or the warning information on the product itself, indicates
that slight personal injury or property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTE
within the meaning of these operating instructions indicates important information about the product or the
respective part of the operating instructions to which attention is drawn.
NOTE
For reasons of clarity, these operating instructions do not contain all details of all types of the product and can
also not take into account every conceivable installation, operation or maintenance circumstances.
You can consult your local Siemens branch if you should require further information or if particular problem
occur that are not dealt with in adequate detail in the operating instructions.
Attention is also drawn to the fact that the contents of this instruction manual shall not become part of or
modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment or legal relationship. The sales contract, which also
contains the complete and solely valid warranty stipulations, contains the entire obligations of Siemens. These
contractual warranty stipulations are neither extended nor limited by the statements given in instructions and
documentation.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
0-5
Definitions
10.94
CAUTION
Electrostatically Sensitive Devices (ESDs)
The equipment contains electrostatically sensitive devices. These components may be destroyed very easily
by improper handling. Please observe the following notes if you nevertheless have to work with electronic
modules:
Electronic modules should only be touched if absolutely necessary to carry out work on them.
If modules nevertheless have to be touched, you must discharge your own body directly beforehand (this is
best done by touching an earthed conductive object such as the PE contact of a socket).
Modules must not come into contact with highly insulating materials e.g. plastic films, insulating desktops
or synthetic fibre clothing items.
Modules must only be placed on conductive surfaces.
When soldering modules, the tip of the soldering iron must be earthed.
Modules and components must only be stored or dispatched in conductive packaging (e.g. metallised
plastic boxes or metal tins).
If packagings are not conductive, modules must be placed in a conductive envelopment prior to packaging.
In this case, use can be made of conductive foam rubber or domestic aluminium foil, for example.
The necessary protective measures for ESDs are elucidated once again in the following figure:
a
=
conductive floor
d
=
ESD coat
b
=
ESD desk
e
=
ESD armband
c
=
ESD shoes
f
=
earthing terminal on cabinets
d
d
b
e
e
f
Sitting position
0-6
f
f
c
a
ENGLISH
d
b
a
Standing position
f
f
c
a
Standing / Sitting position
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
10.94
Definitions
WARNING
When operating electrical equipment, certain parts of such equipment are inevitably live.
Owing to the dc link capacitors, hazardous voltages are present on the equipment up to
5 min. after deenergisation (power terminal and electronic power supply). This is why it is
not permitted to open the housing until after waiting for 5 minutes.
Non-observance of warning notices can result in death, severe personal injury or
considerable property damage.
Such personnel must be thoroughly acquainted with all warnings and maintenance
activities.
Perfect and safe operation of the equipment requires proper transport, expert storage,
installation and assembly and cautious operation and maintenance.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
0-7
Definitions
0-8
ENGLISH
10.94
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
02.96
Description
1
Description
1.1
Applicability
The common rectifier in the SIMOVERT Master Drives series is a power electronics device. From the threephase mains, it generates a dc network and is used as a dc supply unit for one or several units in the
SIMOVERT Master Drives inverter series with a dc link.
A three-phase mains is connected to the input. One or more inverters and a brake chopper can be connected to
the DC output. The total of the rated currents of the installed inverters may then exceed the rated current of the
common rectifier. It must however be ensured in the course of system planning that at no moment in time is the
total of DC load currents greater than the rated DC current of the common rectifier. Feedback to the mains is not
possible.
Refer to the technical data in Chapter 14 for details of voltage and current ranges.
1.2
Principle of operation
The common rectifier consists of a 6-pulse thyristor bridge for controlled rectification of the three-phase mains.
The trigger equipment is independent of the rotary field and is frequency-compensated from 46 to 64 Hz. After
the electronic power supply and the mains voltage have been applied, the dc link is precharged by shifting of the
phase control firing angle within one second (adjustable to two seconds).
The maximum DC link capacitance of a group drive must not exceed three times the capacitance of a single
inverter whose DC link rated current corresponds to the rated current of the incoming unit. Units for operation
with higher DC link capacitance on request.
If the DC link voltage drops below a given proportion of the average mains voltage as the result of mains power
failure or a drop in the mains voltage, the pulses are blocked immediately and precharging takes place again as
soon as the mains returns. This prevents excess currents as the result of charging of the dc link capacitors at
too fast a rate when the mains voltage returns.
Tapping of load current is not possible during precharging.
An earth fault of a connected converter is checked before precharging to protect its frewheeling diodes against
excess current.
The mains voltage, phase failure, excess temperature of the power section, earth faults and the electronic power
supply are monitored. Monitoring triggers deactivation and a fault signal in the event of any hazard. The current
is not monitored.
Fault signals are acknowledged by deactivating the mains voltage or the electronic power supply.
The power for the electronics is supplied externally via a 24 V DC input.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
1-1
Description
1-2
ENGLISH
02.96
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
02.96
Transport, unpacking, assembly
2
Transport, unpacking, assembly
2.1
Transport, unpacking
The units are packed at the manufacturing works in conformity with the order. A product packaging plate is
attached to the box.
Avoid extreme vibrations and hard impacts during transport, e.g. when lowering the unit.
Pay attention to the notes on the packaging relating to transport, storage and proper handling.
The converter can be installed after unpacking it and checking the consignment for completeness and
damage.
The packaging consists of cardboard and corrugated cardboard. It may be disposed of in accordance with
local cardboard disposal regulations.
You should notify your freight forwarder immediately if you discover any transportation damage.
2.2
Storage
The units must be stored in clean dry rooms. Temperatures between 25 °C (13 °F) and + 70 °C (158 °F) are
permissible. Temperature fluctuations > 20 K per hour are not permissible.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
2-1
Transport, unpacking, assembly
2.3
02.96
Aids to assembly
The following are required for securing:
4 M8 bolts
dimension drawing (figure 2.2 for size E)
WARNING
For safe operation of the unit, it is presumed it will be assembled and commissioned by
qualified personnel, paying attention to the warning notes given in these operating
instructions.
Particular note must be taken both of the general and national erection and safety
regulations regarding work on power installations (e.g. VDE) and regulations regarding the
proper use of tools and of personal protective equipment.
Non-observance of warning notices can result in death, severe personal injury or
considerable property damage.
The unit must be protected against the ingress of foreign matter as otherwise proper
functioning and safety will not be guaranteed.
Requirements for the installation site
Local guidelines and standards must be observed in relation to assembly.
Operating facilities must be dry and dust-free. Air fed in must not contain
any gases, vapours or dusts that are electrically conductive or detrimental
to functioning. Air containing dust must be filtered.
Dissipated
power
WARNING
Dimension cabinet ventilation according to the
dissipated power! (Technical data in Chapter 14)
The unit’s ambient climate in operating rooms must not exceed the values
of code 3K3 as detailed in DIN IEC 721 Part 3-3 /04.90. A reduction of
power as detailed in Chapters 14.1 and 14.2 is necessary in the event of
temperatures > 40 °C (104 °F) and altitudes >1000m. The terminal
voltage has to be reduced for altitudes > 2000m.
Carry out assembly in accordance with the dimension drawing in
Chapter 2.4.
6SE70
Cooling air
≤ 40 °C (50 °C)
Figure 2.1 Installation in control cabinets
2-2
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
2)
6)
44,5
9)
17
41
X37
1025
10
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
H6
H4
H2
A23
100
∅17
30
U1/ V1/ W1/
L1 L2 L3
PE
148
94,5
3)
∅13
X29 X19
F1 F2
X36
X9
F3
F4
H1
H5
H3
S1
S500 R617
S501
170
228
C/L+ D/L-
269
180
2)
1)
941
1) 9)
352
7)
8)
V11 to V16
4)
8)
b
1050
25
Front view
17
70
292
30
168,5
PE
Exhaust air
∅13
∅17
E1
A23
350
340
294
212
9
1000
Air intake
5)
Dimension
a (mm)
400
450
500
500
600
400
450
500
500
600
400
500
500
600
Dimension
b (mm)
300
350
400
400
500
300
350
400
400
500
300
400
400
500
Dimension: mm
Weight: refer to section 14
No displacement of the centre of gravity
9) Transportbleche vor Inbetriebnahme entfernen!
6SE7031-7EE85-0AA0
6SE7032-7EE85-0AA0
6SE7033-8EE85-0AA0
6SE7034-6EE85-0AA0
6SE7036-1EE85-0AA0
6SE7031-4FE85-0AA0
6SE7032-4FE85-0AA0
6SE7033-5FE85-0AA0
6SE7034-2FE85-0AA0
6SE7035-4FE85-0AA0
6SE7032-2HE85-0AA0
6SE7033-5HE85-0AA0
6SE7034-2HE85-0AA0
6SE7035-4HE85-0AA0
Unit
8) Space required for connection and cooling the unit
7) Fan-Customer connection (X19)
6) Connector for power supply DC24V and fault signal
5) Front cover (door) and terminal cover only with IP20 version
4) Hole for crane hook ∅30mm
3) Connection for PE, mounted:
M16 for 6SE7036-1EE85-0AA0, 6SE7034-2FE85-0AA0, 6SE7035-4FE85-0AA0,
6SE7034-2HE85-0AA0 and 6SE7035-4HE85-0AA0
M12 for every other units
2) Mounting hole for power connections and PE:
M16 for 6SE7036-1EE85-0AA0, 6SE7034-2FE85-0AA0, 6SE7035-4FE85-0AA0,
6SE7034-2HE85-0AA0 and 6SE7035-4HE85-0AA0
M12 for every other units
1) Mounting hole for srew M8.
2.4
a
5)
02.96
Transport, unpacking, assembly
Dimension drawing
Figure 2.2 Dimension drawing Size E
ENGLISH
2-3
147
Transport, unpacking, assembly
2-4
ENGLISH
02.96
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
02.96
Connection
3
Connection
WARNING
The units are operated with high voltages.
Only carry out connection work after disconnecting the voltage!
All work on the unit must only be carried out by qualified persons.
Non-observance of warning notices can result in death, severe personal injury or
considerable property damage.
As the result of the dc link capacitors in the connected SIMOVERT Master Drives, the unit
still contains a hazardous voltage up to 5 min. after isolation. This is why it is only permitted
to open the unit after observing an appropriate waiting time.
The power terminals and control terminals may carry a voltage even when the motor is at
standstill.
When working on the open unit, pay attention to the fact that live parts are exposed.
The user is responsible for ensuring that the rectifier unit, converter, motor and other units
are installed and connected in accordance with the technical regulations recognised in the
country of installation (in Germany: VDE, VBG4) and other regionally valid regulations. In
doing so, particular attention must be paid to cable dimensioning, fusing, earthing,
deactivation, isolation and overcurrent protection.
CAUTION
The power cables must be secured mechanically outside of the unit.
NOTES
The choice of components used and the definition of creepage distance and clearances conforms to the
specifications for safe isolation of VDE 0160 / prEN 50178.
It is the responsibility of the user to take these specifications into account when selecting an external power
supply.
An external 24 V power supply is required in order to operate the unit (see Chapters 3.5 and 9.3).
3.1
Power connections
DC link
(DC output)
C
L+
U1
L1
V1
L2
D
L-
W1
L3
A23
Mains
Mains fan
PE
Figure 3.1
X19
PE
Mains connection
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
3-1
Connection
02.96
WARNING
Incorrect connection to the mains will destroy the unit!
The excitation coils of contactors and relays connected to the same mains network as the
unit, or which are located in its proximity, must be wired with surge arresters, e.g. RC
networks.
The unit must not be operated via a current-operated earth-leakage circuit-breaker (DIN
VDE 0160).
A voltage may only be applied to the unit after connecting SIMOVERT Master Drives.
Swapping or shorting the dc link terminals will destroy the SIMOVERT Master Drives
inverter!
The units are intended for permanent connection to the mains in conformity with DIN VDE 0160 Section 6.5.2.1.
PE conductor connection: minimum cross-section 10mm2.
The units must be fused on the mains side with semiconductor fuses as detailed in Table 3.2. To avoid
retroactive effects on the mains and to limit harmonics, the mains should be connected via a 2 % commutation
choke as detailed in Table 3.3. Mains plus commutation activity must be 3% uk (ac load carrying capacity of
the dc link capacitors in the inverter). See Table 3.2 for details of order numbers for fuses.
The conductor cross-sectional areas listed in Table 3.1 are maximum connectable cross-sections. The data is
given for multicore cable.
Unit order No.
6SE70
Rated
input-
Conductor
U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3
Conductor
C/L+, D/L-
Conductor
PE
Spannung
Strom
max.
max.
max.
max.
(V)
(A)
mm2
AWG 1)
mm2
AWG 1)
mm2
AWG 1)
31-7EE85-0AA0
380 to 460
149
2x120
2x4/0
2x150
2x300
70
2/0
32-7EE85-0AA0
380 to 460
233
2x120
2x4/0
2x150
2x300
120
4/0
33-8EE85-0AA0
380 to 460
326
2x240
2x500
2x300
2x600
185
350
34-6EE85-0AA0
380 to 460
403
2x240
2x500
2x300
2x600
240
500
36-1EE85-0AA0
380 to 460
526
2x240
2x500
2x300
2x600
300
600
31-4FE85-0AA0
500 to 575
123
2x120
2x4/0
2x150
2x300
70
2/0
32-4FE85-0AA0
500 to 575
203
2x120
2x4/0
2x150
2x300
120
4/0
33-5FE85-0AA0
500 to 690
307
2x240
2x500
2x300
2x600
185
350
34-2FE85-0AA0
500 to 690
366
2x240
2x500
2x300
2x600
185
350
35-4FE85-0AA0
500 to 690
465
2x240
2x500
2x300
2x600
300
600
32-2HE85-0AA0
660 to 690
193
2x120
2x4/0
2x150
2x300
95
3/0
33-5HE85-0AA0
660 to 690
307
2x240
2x500
2x300
2x600
185
350
34-2HE85-0AA0
660 to 690
366
2x240
2x500
2x300
2x600
185
350
35-4HE85-0AA0
660 to 690
465
2x240
2x500
2x300
2x600
300
600
Table 3.1
Mains connection
1) American Wire Gauge
3-2
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
02.96
Connection
Unit order No.
6SE70
Mains supply cable fuses
Column 1
Column 2
Column 3
Siemens gR
(SITOR)
Preferred type
Siemens (SITOR)
Bussmann
US-standard
A
Type
A
Type
A
Type
31-7EE85-0AA0
160
3NE1224-0
250
3NE3227
250
170M3616
32-7EE85-0AA0
250
3NE1227-0
400
3NE3232-0B
400
170M3619
33-8EE85-0AA0
350
3NE1331-0
500
3NE3334-0B
550
170M3622
34-6EE85-0AA0
450
3NE1333-0
630
3NE3336
700
170M4617
36-1EE85-0AA0
560
3NE1435-0
800
3NE3338-8
900
170M5615
31-4FE85-0AA0
—
160
3NE3224
200
170M3615
32-4FE85-0AA0
—
315
3NE3230-0B
350
170M3618
33-5FE85-0AA0
315
3NE1230-0
500
3NE3334-0B
—
34-2FE85-0AA0
400
3NE1332-0
560
3NE3335
—
35-4FE85-0AA0
500
3NE1334-0
800
3NE3338-8
—
—
315
3NE3230-0B
—
32-2HE85-0AA0
33-5HE85-0AA0
315
3NE1230-0
500
3NE3334-0B
—
34-2HE85-0AA0
400
3NE1332-0
560
3NE3335
—
35-4HE85-0AA0
500
3NE1334-0
800
3NE3338-8
—
Table 3.2
Column 1:
Recommended mains fuses
This fuse with gR characteristic protects the semiconductors. At the same time, they also have
line protection characteristic which can be used if the appropriate conductor cross-sections are
chosen, e.g. in accordance with DIN VDE 0100 Part 430 (to be applied for preference).
Column 2, 3: Semiconductor protection only, lines are not reliably protected. Discriminative line protection is
assured only by correlating the line protection fuses to the installed conductor cross-section in
accordance with the applicable regulations - e.g. DIN VDE 0100 Part 430.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
3-3
Connection
02.96
Unit order No.
Rated inputvoltage
current
(V)
(A)
31-7EE85-0AA0
380 bis 460
149
32-7EE85-0AA0
380 bis 460
33-8EE85-0AA0
6SE70
Commutation choke 2 %
Type
Voltage / Frequency
Rated current
(V / Hz)
(V / Hz)
(A)
4EU2451-2UA00
400 / 50
460 / 60
160
233
4EU2551-5UA00
400 / 50
460 / 60
250
380 bis 460
326
4EU2751-7UA00
400 / 50
460 / 60
315
34-6EE85-0AA0
380 bis 460
403
4EU2751-8UA00
400 / 50
460 / 60
400
36-1EE85-0AA0
380 bis 460
526
4EU3051-5UA00
400 / 50
460 / 60
560
31-4FE85-0AA0
500 bis 575
123
4EU2451-1UA00
500 / 50
140
32-4FE85-0AA0
500 bis 575
203
4EU2551-6UA00
500 / 50
200
33-5FE85-0AA0
500 bis 690
307
4EU3051-3UA00
690 / 50
315
34-2FE85-0AA0
500 bis 690
366
4EU3051-4UA00
690 / 50
400
35-4FE85-0AA0
500 bis 690
465
4EU3651-5UA00
690 / 50
500
32-2HE85-0AA0
660 bis 690
193
4EU2751-6UA00
690 / 50
224
33-5HE85-0AA0
500 bis 690
307
4EU3051-3UA00
690 / 50
315
34-2HE85-0AA0
500 bis 690
366
4EU3051-4UA00
690 / 50
400
35-4HE85-0AA0
500 bis 690
465
4EU3651-5UA00
690 / 50
500
Table 3.3
Recommended commutation choke
3.2
Power supply / control
WARNING
Where the unit is operated in conjunction with a power system, one phase of which is
earthed and not the starpoint, the plant management must ensure that power supply to
the fan circuit (terminals X19-1, X19-2) and to the main contactor circuit (terminal X9-4,
X9-5) is taken from this phase and the starpoint.
Where this cannot be ensured, the power supply to the fan circuit, to the main contactor
circuit and to the signalling circuit must be taken via an isolating transformer.
In addition, the power supply to terminals X19-1, X19-2, X9-4, X9-5, X36-1, X36-2 must
be taken via an isolating transformer, when:
the connection to ground - electronic ground is interrupted (refer to Chapter 3.2.3
"Settings on the module A23"),
the power supply unit is operated in conjunction with a non-grounded power supply
system.
3-4
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
02.96
Connection
3.2.1
Electronic power supply / fault signal
The electronic power supply is not included in the scope of supply of the common rectifier.
Plug-in terminal X9
Terminal
Function description
perm. conductor
cross-section
(mm2)
(AWG)
X9
1
DC 24V (tolerance range 20V - 30V) 2)
max. current consumption 2A at +24V
0.2 to 2.5
24 to 14
1
2
3
4 5
X9
2
Reference potential
0.2 to 2.5
24 to 14
3
not connected (N.C.)
0.2 to 2.5
24 to 14
4
Fault signal 2)
0.2 to 2.5
24 to 14
5
2)
0.2 to 2.5
24 to 14
Table 3.4
M
P
max. current consumption without
options: 0.3A
Fault signal
ext. SV
DC 24V Fault signal
AC 230V
3000VA
Figure 3.2 DC 24 V power supply
and fault signal
connection
Permissible connection cross-sections for the power supply and the fault signal
Terminal X9.1 fused with fuse T2A/250V träge/time-lag 5x20mm
(19198-T2A/250V Messrs. Wickmann-Werke GmbH respectively
0034.3993 FSD Messrs. Schurter)
Terminal X9.2 fused with fuse T3,2A/250V träge/time-lag 5x20mm
(19198-T3,2A/250V Messrs. Wickmann-Werke GmbH respectively
0034.3998 FSD Messrs. Schurter)
NOTE
The exciter coil of the main contactor must be wired with surge arresters, e.g. an RC network for AC or a diode
for DC.
3.2.2
Signalling relay X36 ('Warning' signal)
Plug-in terminal X36
Terminals
X36-1
X36-2
Table 3.5
Function description
Signalling contacts to switch extra-low voltage between terminals
1 and 2 at a switching voltage of DC 30 V max.DC 5 A, at a
switching voltage of AC 60 V max. AC 5 A at cos 0,4
perm. conductor
cross-section
(mm2)
(AWG)
0,2 to 2,5
24 to 14
Warning
2) Contacts for switching the main contactor between terminals 4 and 5 ; switching voltage AC 230V max. AC 5A at cos 0.4; max.
switching capacity 3000 VA ; at switching voltage DC 30V max. DC 8A
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
3-5
Connection
3.2.3
02.96
Settings on the module A23:
R617: 0 resistance as earth - reference potential M connection
On delivery, M is connected to earth. Remove this resistor only to avoid disturbances from earth loops,
i.e. if the electronic reference potential is otherwise connected to earth (e.g. via the reference potential
connection terminal of the power supply unit. The 0 resistor R210 on the A50 module must additionally
be removed when using the additional power suppy A50 (see Chapter 9.1).
S500: Adjust the rated voltage range with S500 (DIP-Fix) (see Chapter 4)
The start-up enabling status can be switched through to the 'Warning' output (terminal X36) with S1
(DIP-Fix). When S1 is open, the 'Warning' relay is opened only in the event of an excess temperature.
S1:
S501: Close switch S501 only for flexible compliance (only allowed with increased pre-chokes)
Works setting and normal operation = open
between soldering terminals A and B can be removed to increase the ramp-up time from 1 to 2 seconds.
R9
3.2.4
Fan (X19)
Terminals
Function description
perm. conductor
cross-section
X19-1
AC 230V 10%, 50 to 60Hz 5% mains connection for the fan
X19-2
current consumption 0.84A
Table 3.6
(mm2)
(AWG)
0,2 to 2,5
24 to 14
Fan
Terminal X19 fused with the fuses (F3 and F4):
T2A/250V time-lag 5x20mm
(19198-T2A/250V Messrs. Wickmann-Werke GmbH respectively 0034.3993 FSD Messrs. Schurter)
or
T2A/250V time-lag 6,3x32mm (¼“ x 1¼“)
(19343-T2A/250V Messrs. Wickmann-Werke GmbH respectively 0034.5231 FSD Messrs. Schurter)
3-6
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
02.96
Connection
3.3
Control terminal strip of options
CAUTION
The unit must be in the deenergised state in order to connect the control lines to X9, X36
and X37.
A50 additional power supply PSR for optional modules
Connector X37
Connector X37
Function description
Pin 1
DC 24V connected to terminal X9-1 via a 2A slow-blow fuse
Pin 2
Electronic reference potential connected to terminal X9-2 via a 3.2A slow-blow fuse
Table 3.7
Connection of additional power supply
Connecting control lines of optional modules (in preparation)
NOTE
When installed, control lines must be shielded and isolated from the power cables, laying them at a minimum
distance of 20 cm. The shield must be connected on both sides. On the unit's housing, the shield is connected
with shield clamps. Handling of these clamps is shown in Figure 3.2.
When they intersect, control and power cables must be laid at an angle of 90°.
Fitting the shielding clamp
15 mm
Cable binder
7.5 mm
5 mm
Connector
Slide on shield and
secure with
shrink-on tubing, for
example
Adapt length
to design
35
Do not bend
spring over
Releasing the shielding clamp
Shield
Manually or using a screwdriver,
press the clamp together and extrac
it in the upward direction.
Caution!
The clamps are sharp-edged!
Figure 3.3 Connecting the control lines and handling the shielding clamps
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
3-7
Connection
3.4
02.96
Measures for keeping to RFI suppression regulations
The following points must be observed in order to comply with the radio-frequency interference suppression
requirements:
Grounding
Radio frequency interference results from operation of the converters. Such interference voltages should be
returned to the source by means of low-resistance connections (cross-section of the ground connection cross-section of the power supply system connection).
On installation of the power supply unit and of any optional RFI filters use should be made of the best
available method of grounding (e.g. mounting plate, earthing wire, earthing bus). Connect all conductive
housings together so as to make contact over a large area.
Not only the cross-section (governed also by the safety regulations which should be observed to obviate the
effects of a fault) but also the contact surfaces are of vital importance for RFI suppression, since high
frequency interference currents do not flow through the entire cross-section but mainly on the outer surface of
the conductor.
Shielding
The following measures are required in order to attenuate interference and to meet the RFI suppression
requirements
use of shielded cable between the output of the converter and the motor and
use of shielded control cables.
The shield must be connected to earth potential at both ends.
Filters
The RFI suppression filters must be connected directly before the power supply unit. The housings must be
interconnected by means of an electrically conductive connection.
Type A1 RFI suppression filters are recommended for compliance with the RFI suppresssion requirements.
3-8
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
1AC 50-60Hz, 230V
3AC 50-60Hz, 400V
3AC 50-60Hz, 500V
3AC 50-60Hz, 690V
Figure 3.4
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
On
Off
24V-power supply unit
A50 (C98043-A1699)
Additional power supply PSR
for optional modules
X19-1
X19-2
X36-2
X36-1
X9-5
X9-4
X9-3
X9-2
X9-1
X37-2
X37-1
F3
F4
Warning
M
+24V
C/L+
D/L-
A23
C98043-A1691
Malfunction
N.C.
F2
F1
X29-1
X29-2
X29-3
X30-2
X30-1
ϑ
R100
X1: C/L+
12
X1: D/L-
E1
1~
M
X1: U1 V1 W1 PE
L1 L2 L3
Filter
(optional)
V11-V16
3.5
U1/L1 V1/L2 W1/L3
K1
02.96
Connection
Single-line diagram with suggested circuit arrangement
Single-line diagram with suggested circuit arrangement, size E
ENGLISH
3-9
V1/L2
AK
AK
U1/L1
K
K
V13+ V16
G2 G1
A
G2 G1
A
V11+ V14
X16 X13
X14 X11
D/L-
W1/L3
V15+ V12
AK
K
G2 G1
A
X12 X15
A50 (C98043-A1699)
Additional power supply PSR
for optional modules
Warning
Malfunction
24V-power supply unit
X37-2
X37-1
X36-2
X36-1
X9-5
X9-4
X9-3
X9-2
X9-1
X30-1
X30-2
R100
X29-1
K761-2
K760-2
X29-3
K101-2
A23
C98043-A1691
N.C.
F2
T3,2A
F1
T2A
M
1~
E1
X29-2
3-10 ENGLISH
X19-1
-
+
F3
T2A
230V~
F4
T2A
X19-2
ϑ
X15-1
X15-2
X13-1
X13-2
X11-1
X11-2
X1: C/L+
C/L+
K
K
K
U1/L1
A601
V15+V12
G1
V13+V16
G1
V11+V14
G1
AK
AK
W1/
L3
G2
G2
G2
PE
C98043-A1696
AK
V1/
L2
V1/L2
Figure 3.5
W1/L3
X1: D/L-
D/L-
A
A
A
A23
C98043-A1691
D/L=
X12-2
X12-1
X16-2
X16-1
X14-2
X14-1
3.6
C/L+
Arrangement of thyristor modules
Termal sensor
on the heatsink
X1: U1/
L1
Connection
02.96
Power sections
Power section, 6SE7031-7EE85-0AA0 (380-460V / 173A)
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
X14
V13+ V16
V1/L2
V11+ V14
U1/L1
AK
G2
G1
K2 A K1
AK
X16
K
X11
K
G2
G1
K2 A K1
X13
D/L-
X12
W1/L3
V15+ V12
AK
K
G2
G1
K2 A K1
X15
A50 (C98043-A1699)
Additional power supply PSR
for optional modules
Warning
Malfunction
24V-power supply unit
X37-2
X37-1
X36-2
X36-1
X9-5
X9-4
X9-3
X9-2
X9-1
X30-1
X30-2
X29-1
K761-2
K760-2
X29-3
K101-2
A23
C98043-A1691
N.C.
F2
T3,2A
F1
T2A
X29-2
M
1~
E1
X19-1
-
+
F3
T2A
230V~
F4
T2A
X19-2
ϑ
R100
X15-1
X15-2
X13-1
X13-2
X11-1
X11-2
X1: C/L+
C/L+
K
K
K
U1/L1
A601
V15+V12
K1 G1
V13+V16
K1 G1
V11+V14
K1 G1
V1/
L2
PE
V1/L2
C98043-A1696
K2 G2
K2 G2
K2 G2
W1/
L3
W1/L3
Figure 3.6
C/L+
Arrangement of thyristor modules
Termal sensor
on the heatsink
X1: U1/
L1
X1: D/L-
D/L-
A
A
A
A23
C98043-A1691
D/L=
X12-2
X12-1
X16-2
X16-1
X14-2
X14-1
02.96
Connection
Power section, 6SE7032-7EE85-0AA0 (380-460V / 270A)
ENGLISH
3-11
X14
X11
X16
X13
V13+V16
AK
V1/L2
AK
U1/L1
K
K
V11+V14
A
K2 G2 G1 K1
A
K2 G2 G1 K1
D/L-
X12
X15
W1/L3
AK
V15+V12
K
A
K2 G2 G1 K1
A50 (C98043-A1699)
Additional power supply PSR
for optional modules
Warning
Malfunction
24V-power supply unit
X37-2
X37-1
X36-2
X36-1
X9-5
X9-4
X9-3
X9-2
X9-1
X30-1
X30-2
X29-1
K761-2
K760-2
X29-3
K101-2
A23
C98043-A1691
N.C.
F2
T3,2A
F1
T2A
M
1~
E1
X29-2
3-12 ENGLISH
X19-1
-
+
F3
T2A
230V~
F4
T2A
X19-2
ϑ
R100
X15-1
X15-2
X13-1
X13-2
X11-1
X11-2
X1: C/L+
C/L+
K
K
K
U1/L1
A601
V15+V12
K1 G1
V13+V16
K1 G1
V11+V14
K1 G1
V1/
L2
PE
V1/L2
C98043-A1696
K2 G2
K2 G2
K2 G2
W1/
L3
W1/L3
Figure 3.7
C/L+
Arrangement of thyristor modules
Termal sensor
on the heatsink
X1: U1/
L1
X1: D/L-
D/L-
A
A
A
A23
C98043-A1691
D/L=
X12-2
X12-1
X16-2
X16-1
X14-2
X14-1
Connection
02.96
Power section, 6SE7033-8EE85-0AA0 and 6SE7034-6EE85-0AA0 (380-460V / 375A and 463A)
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
X14
X11
X16
X13
V13+V16
AK
V1/L2
AK
U1/L1
K
K
V11+V14
A
K2 G2 G1 K1
A
K2 G2 G1 K1
C/L+
D/L-
X15
W1/L3
AK
V15+V12
K
A
K2 G2 G1 K1
X12
Arrangement of thyristor modules
A50 (C98043-A1699)
Additional power supply PSR
for optional modules
Warning
Malfunction
24V-power supply unit
X37-2
X37-1
X36-2
X36-1
X9-5
X9-4
X9-3
X9-2
X9-1
X29-1
X29-2
K761-2
K760-2
X29-3
A23
C98043-A1691
N.C.
F2
T3,2A
F1
T2A
K101-2
X19-1
-
+
F3
T2A
X19-2
F4
T2A
X15-1
X15-2
X13-1
X13-2
X11-1
X11-2
X1: C/L+
K
K
K
V15+V12
K1 G1
V13+V16
K1 G1
V11+V14
K1 G1
C
A601
R11
U1.1
X30-1
X30-2
R14
U1.2
230V~
R13
V1.1
M
1~
R16
V1.2
E1
R15
W1.1
ϑ
R100
1U2.1
1U2.2
PE
K2 G2
K2 G2
K2 G2
W1/
L3
C98043-A1683
R12
W1.2
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
1V2.1
Termal sensor
on the heatsink
V1/
L2
1W2.1
Figure 3.8
1V2.2
X1: U1/
L1
1W2.2
D
X1: D/L-
A
A
A
A23
C98043-A1691
D/L=
X12-2
X12-1
X16-2
X16-1
X14-2
X14-1
02.96
Connection
Power section, 6SE7036-1EE85-0AA0 (380-460V / 605A)
ENGLISH
3-13
V1/L2
AK
AK
U1/L1
K
K
V13+ V16
G2 G1
A
G2 G1
A
V11+ V14
X16 X13
X14 X11
D/L-
W1/L3
V15+ V12
AK
K
G2 G1
A
X12 X15
A50 (C98043-A1699)
Additional power supply PSR
for optional modules
Warning
Malfunction
24V-power supply unit
X37-2
X37-1
X36-2
X36-1
X9-5
X9-4
X9-3
X9-2
X9-1
X30-1
X30-2
X29-1
K761-2
K760-2
X29-3
K101-2
X19-1
-
+
F3
T2A
A23
C98043-A1691
N.C.
F2
T3,2A
F1
T2A
M
1~
E1
X29-2
3-14 ENGLISH
230V~
F4
T2A
X19-2
ϑ
R100
X15-1
X15-2
X13-1
X13-2
X11-1
X11-2
X1: C/L+
C/L+
K
K
K
U1/L1
A601
V15+V12
G1
V13+V16
G1
V11+V14
G1
V1/L2
AK
AK
W1/
L3
G2
G2
G2
PE
C98043-A1696
AK
V1/
L2
W1/L3
Figure 3.9
C/L+
Arrangement of thyristor modules
Termal sensor
on the heatsink
X1: U1/
L1
X1: D/L-
D/L-
A
A
A
A23
C98043-A1691
D/L=
X12-2
X12-1
X16-2
X16-1
X14-2
X14-1
Connection
02.96
Power section, 6SE7031-4FE85-0AA0 (500-575V / 142A)
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
X14
V13+ V16
V1/L2
V11+ V14
U1/L1
AK
G2
G1
K2 A K1
AK
X16
K
X11
K
G2
G1
K2 A K1
X13
D/L-
X12
W1/L3
V15+ V12
AK
K
G2
G1
K2 A K1
Warning
Malfunction
A50 (C98043-A1699)
Additional power supply PSR
for optional modules
X15
24V-power supply unit
X37-2
X37-1
X36-2
X36-1
X9-5
X9-4
X9-3
X9-2
X9-1
X30-1
X30-2
X29-1
K761-2
K760-2
X29-3
K101-2
A23
C98043-A1691
N.C.
F2
T3,2A
F1
T2A
X29-2
M
1~
E1
X19-1
-
+
F3
T2A
230V~
F4
T2A
X19-2
ϑ
R100
X15-1
X15-2
X13-1
X13-2
X11-1
X11-2
X1: C/L+
C/L+
K
K
K
U1/L1
A601
V15+V12
K1 G1
V13+V16
K1 G1
V11+V14
K1 G1
V1/
L2
PE
V1/L2
C98043-A1696
K2 G2
K2 G2
K2 G2
W1/
L3
W1/L3
Figure 3.10
C/L+
Arrangement of thyristor modules
Termal sensor
on the heatsink
X1: U1/
L1
X1: D/L-
D/L-
A
A
A
A23
C98043-A1691
D/L=
X12-2
X12-1
X16-2
X16-1
X14-2
X14-1
02.96
Connection
Power section, 6SE7032-4FE85-0AA0 (500-575V / 235A)
ENGLISH
3-15
X14
X11
X16
X13
V13+V16
AK
V1/L2
AK
U1/L1
K
K
V11+V14
A
K2 G2 G1 K1
A
K2 G2 G1 K1
C/L+
D/L-
X15
W1/L3
AK
V15+V12
K
A
K2 G2 G1 K1
X12
Arrangement of thyristor modules
A50 (C98043-A1699)
Additional power supply PSR
for optional modules
Warning
Malfunction
24V-power supply unit
X37-2
X37-1
X36-2
X36-1
X9-5
X9-4
X9-3
X9-2
X9-1
X29-1
X29-2
K761-2
K760-2
X29-3
A23
C98043-A1691
N.C.
F2
T3,2A
F1
T2A
K101-2
X19-1
-
+
F3
T2A
X19-2
F4
T2A
X15-1
X15-2
X13-1
X13-2
X11-1
X11-2
X1: C/L+
K
K
K
V15+V12
K1 G1
V13+V16
K1 G1
V11+V14
K1 G1
C
A601
1U2.2
1U2.1
PE
K2 G2
K2 G2
K2 G2
W1/
L3
C98043-A1684
R11
U1.1
X30-1
X30-2
R14
U1.2
230V~
R13
V1.1
M
1~
R16
V1.2
E1
R15
W1.1
ϑ
R100
R12
W1.2
3-16 ENGLISH
1V2.1
Termal sensor
on the heatsink
V1/
L2
1W2.1
Figure 3.11
1V2.2
X1: U1/
L1
1W2.2
D
A
A
A
X1: D/L-
A23
C98043-A1691
D/L=
X12-2
X12-1
X16-2
X16-1
X14-2
X14-1
Connection
02.96
Power section, 6SE7033-5FE85-0AA0 and 6SE7034-2FE85-0AA0 (500-575V / 354A and 420A)
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
X14
X11
X16
X13
V13+V16
AK
V1/L2
AK
U1/L1
K
K
V11+V14
A
K2 G2 G1 K1
A
K2 G2 G1 K1
D/L-
X12
X15
W1/L3
AK
V15+V12
K
A
K2 G2 G1 K1
A50 (C98043-A1699)
Additional power supply PSR
for optional modules
Warning
Malfunction
24V-power supply unit
X37-2
X37-1
X36-2
X36-1
X9-5
X9-4
X9-3
X9-2
X9-1
X30-1
X30-2
X29-1
K761-2
K760-2
X29-3
K101-2
A23
C98043-A1691
N.C.
F2
T3,2A
F1
T2A
M
1~
E1
X29-2
ϑ
R100
X19-1
-
+
F3
T2A
230V~
F4
T2A
X19-2
Figure 3.12
C/L+
Arrangement of thyristor modules
Termal sensor
on the heatsink
X15-1
X15-2
X13-1
X13-2
X11-1
X11-2
X1: C/L+
K
K
K
R13
R15
C15
R11
C13
C11
V15+V12
K1 G1
V13+V16
K1 G1
V11+V14
K1 G1
X1: U1/
L1
V1/
L2
R12
R16
R14
K2 G2
K2 G2
C12
C16
C14
PE
K2 G2
W1/
L3
X1: D/L-
A
A
A
A23
C98043-A1691
D/L=
X12-2
X12-1
X16-2
X16-1
X14-2
X14-1
02.96
Connection
Power section, 6SE7035-4FE85-0AA0 (500-575V / 536A)
ENGLISH
3-17
X14
G2
G1
K2 A K1
V13+ V16
V1/L2
V11+ V14
U1/L1
AK
X16
AK
X11
K
G1
K1
K
G2
K2 A
C/L+
X13
D/L-
X12
W1/L3
V15+ V12
AK
K
G2
G1
K2 A K1
Arrangement of thyristor modules
Warning
Malfunction
A50 (C98043-A1699)
Additional power supply PSR
for optional modules
X15
24V-power supply unit
X37-2
X37-1
X36-2
X36-1
X9-5
X9-4
X9-3
X9-2
X9-1
X29-1
X29-2
K761-2
K760-2
X29-3
A23
C98043-A1691
N.C.
F2
T3,2A
F1
T2A
K101-2
X19-1
-
+
F3
T2A
X19-2
F4
T2A
X15-1
X15-2
X13-1
X13-2
X11-1
X11-2
X1: C/L+
K
K
K
V15+V12
K1 G1
V13+V16
K1 G1
V11+V14
K1 G1
C
A601
R11
U1.1
X30-1
X30-2
R14
U1.2
230V~
R13
V1.1
M
1~
R16
V1.2
E1
R15
W1.1
ϑ
R100
1U2.2
1U2.1
PE
K2 G2
K2 G2
K2 G2
W1/
L3
C98043-A1684
R12
W1.2
3-18 ENGLISH
1V2.1
Termal sensor
on the heatsink
V1/
L2
1W2.1
Figure 3.13
1V2.2
X1: U1/
L1
1W2.2
D
X1: D/L-
A
A
A
A23
C98043-A1691
D/L=
X12-2
X12-1
X16-2
X16-1
X14-2
X14-1
Connection
02.96
Power section, 6SE7032-2HE85-0AA0 (660-690V / 222A)
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
X14
X11
X16
X13
V13+V16
AK
V1/L2
AK
U1/L1
K
K
V11+V14
A
K2 G2 G1 K1
A
K2 G2 G1 K1
C/L+
D/L-
X15
W1/L3
AK
V15+V12
K
A
K2 G2 G1 K1
X12
Arrangement of thyristor modules
A50 (C98043-A1699)
Additional power supply PSR
for optional modules
Warning
Malfunction
24V-power supply unit
X37-2
X37-1
X36-2
X36-1
X9-5
X9-4
X9-3
X9-2
X9-1
X29-1
X29-2
K761-2
K760-2
X29-3
A23
C98043-A1691
N.C.
F2
T3,2A
F1
T2A
K101-2
X19-1
-
+
F3
T2A
X19-2
F4
T2A
X15-1
X15-2
X13-1
X13-2
X11-1
X11-2
X1: C/L+
K
K
K
V15+V12
K1 G1
V13+V16
K1 G1
V11+V14
K1 G1
C
A601
1U2.1
1U2.2
PE
K2 G2
K2 G2
K2 G2
W1/
L3
C98043-A1684
R11
U1.1
X30-1
X30-2
R14
U1.2
230V~
R13
V1.1
M
1~
R16
V1.2
E1
R15
W1.1
ϑ
R100
R12
W1.2
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
1V2.1
Termal sensor
on the heatsink
V1/
L2
1W2.1
Figure 3.14
1V2.2
X1: U1/
L1
1W2.2
D
A
A
A
X1: D/L-
A23
C98043-A1691
D/L=
X12-2
X12-1
X16-2
X16-1
X14-2
X14-1
02.96
Connection
Power section, 6SE7033-5HE85-0AA0 and 6SE7034-2HE85-0AA0 (660-690V / 354A and 420A)
ENGLISH
3-19
X14
X11
X16
X13
V13+V16
AK
V1/L2
AK
U1/L1
K
K
V11+V14
A
K2 G2 G1 K1
A
K2 G2 G1 K1
D/L-
X12
X15
W1/L3
AK
V15+V12
K
A
K2 G2 G1 K1
A50 (C98043-A1699)
Additional power supply PSR
for optional modules
Warning
Malfunction
24V-power supply unit
X37-2
X37-1
X36-2
X36-1
X9-5
X9-4
X9-3
X9-2
X9-1
X30-1
X30-2
ϑ
R100
X29-1
K761-2
K760-2
X29-3
K101-2
A23
C98043-A1691
N.C.
F2
T3,2A
F1
T2A
M
1~
E1
X29-2
3-20 ENGLISH
X19-1
-
+
F3
T2A
230V~
F4
T2A
X19-2
Figure 3.15
C/L+
Arrangement of thyristor modules
Termal sensor
on the heatsink
X15-1
X15-2
X13-1
X13-2
X11-1
X11-2
X1: C/L+
K
K
K
R13
R15
C15
R11
C13
C11
V15+V12
K1 G1
V13+V16
K1 G1
V11+V14
K1 G1
X1: U1/
L1
V1/
L2
R12
R16
R14
K2 G2
K2 G2
C12
C16
C14
PE
K2 G2
W1/
L3
X1: D/L-
A
A
A
A23
C98043-A1691
D/L=
X12-2
X12-1
X16-2
X16-1
X14-2
X14-1
Connection
02.96
Power section, 6SE7035-4HE85-0AA0 (660-690V / 536A)
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
02.96
4
Start-up
Start-up
WARNING
The units 6SE70 are operated with high voltages.
All work on the unit must only be carried out by qualified persons.
The unit must only be operated with the factory-fitted front covers.
Non-observance of warning notices can result in death, severe personal injury or
considerable property damage.
Owing to the dc link capacitors, a hazardous voltage still prevails inside the unit for up to
5 min. after deactivation. This is why it is only permitted to open the unit after a
corresponding waiting period.
Despite the fact that the power section is voltage-isolated, hazardous voltages are present
in the unit due to the external power supply for the fan.
When working on the open unit, pay attention to the fact that live parts are exposed.
Even when the motor is at standstill, the following parts of the unit may be carrying a live
voltage:
- the mains connection terminals U1/L1, V1/L2 and W1/L3
- the output terminals C/L+ and D/L- the terminals of the control terminal strip
- the fan terminals
The user is responsible for ensuring that the rectifier unit, converter, motor and other units
are installed and connected in accordance with the technical regulations recognised in the
country of installation (in Germany: VDE, VBG4) and other regionally valid regulations. In
doing so, particular attention must be paid to cable dimensioning, fusing, earthing,
deactivation, isolation and overcurrent protection.
NOTES
If there are high capacitances (noise suppression capacitors) between the star point of the mains (earth) and
the dc link, and the dc link is unloaded, it may charge up by 2 more than is normally the case.
No precharging takes place if the rated ac-side voltage is set too high (with S500). The fault signal
(OVERVOLTAGE) is issued if it is set too low.
Operation with a main contactor and a latching circuit is recommended to prevent unexpected switching after
malfunctions (see Chapter 7.1 for details of how to acknowledge a fault).
The fan is deactivated only in the event of faults.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
4-1
Start-up
02.96
WARNING
When using parallel converters, it is imperative to connect the positive and negative poles
(C/L+ and D/L-) of the DC link correctly, since the freewheeling diodes in the circuit are not
protected against overcurrent by the fuses of the incoming unit.
The sequence of the following LEDs corresponds to their position on the module A23.
LED
Name
Colour
Meaning
H1
SUPPL.
OK.
green
Electronic power supply ok
H6
EARTH
FLT.
red
Earth fault on the converter
H5
EXC.
TEMP
PREW.
red
Excess temperature prewarning of the power
section
H4
PHASE
FAIL.
red
Mains phase failure
H3
EXC.
VOLT.
red
Excess mains voltage
H2
EXC.
TEMP.
red
Excess temperature of the power section
Table 4.1
LED indications
See Chapter 7 for an explanation of the LEDs.
4-2
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
02.96
Start-up
Rated ac-side voltages Un 15% (see first column of the following tables)
Rated voltage Un
chained in Vrms (A.C.)
(set parameter P071 = Und on the
SIMOVERT Master Drive)
280 - 310
208 - 230
Table 4.2
dc link voltage range Und in V
(DC) = 1,35 x Un
380 - 460
510 - 620
500 - 575
675 - 780
660 - 690
890 - 930
Settings of the parameter P071 on the SIMOVERT Master Drive as a function of the rated ac-side voltage
The following commissioning steps must be carried out after connecting the unit (as detailed in Chapter
3):
The rated ac-side voltage range must be set with the switch S500.
Unit order number
Rated ac-side voltage range
Excess voltage
when
S500 closed
Excess voltage
when
S500 open
S500 closed
AC (V)
S500 open
AC (V)
AC (V)
AC (V)
6SE70..-.EE85-0AA0
208 - 230
380 - 460
309
548
6SE70..-.FE85-0AA0
500 - 575
—
680
not permitted
6SE70..-.HE85-0AA0
—
660 - 690
not intended
867
Table 4.3
Rated ac-side voltage ranges
The start-up enabling status can be switched to the 'Warning' output (terminal X36) with the switch jumper S1
(DIP-Fix). When S1 is open, the 'Warning' relay is opened only in the event of an excess temperature
prewarning.
Works setting:
S1 open
Close switch S501 only for flexible compliance (allowed only with increased prechokes)
Works setting and normal operation = open
Switch on the mains and electronic power supply.
Enable the converter.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
4-3
Start-up
4-4
ENGLISH
02.96
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
02.96
Malfunctions and warnings
7
Malfunctions and warnings
7.1
Fault signals
The fault relay K760 at terminals X9-4 and X9-5 interrupts.
The LEDs only serve the purpose of diagnostics. Their indications are volatile.
Signal
Description
Remedy
SUPP. OK. (green) not lit
Electronic power supply is less
than DC 20 V or the internal
generation of auxiliary voltages
is defective.
Check the 20 to 30 V electronic
power supply; check fuses F1
and F2.
EARTH FLT. (red) lit
Earth fault at the output of a
converter before precharging
longer than for 2 seconds
Eliminate earth fault or extreme
soiling
Wait for 2 minutes until PTC test
thermistors have cooled down.
PHASE FAIL. (red) lit
Phase failure for longer than 1
second
Check mains connections
EXC. VOLT. (red) lit
Excess voltage for longer than 4 Check rated ac-side voltage and
ms
unit setting (S500)
EXC. TEMP. (red) lit
Excess temperature of the
Reduce current tapping; check
power section
air throughput; check ingoing air
Switching threshold = 90C 5C temperature
If one of these faults occurs, the pulses are blocked immediately and the ramp-function generator is reset. If the
fault lasts for longer than 100 ms, the fault relay drops out and remains dropped out until the fault is
acknowledged.
The fault is acknowledged by deactivation of the mains voltage (pause > 100 ms) or the electronic power supply
(pause > 200 ms).
Table for the excess voltage fault signal:
Unit order number
Rated ac-side voltage range
Excess voltage
when
S500 closed
Excess voltage
when
S500 open
S500 closed
AC (V)
S500 open
AC (V)
AC (V)
AC (V)
6SE70..-.EE85-0AA0
208 - 230
380 - 460
309
548
6SE70..-.FE85-0AA0
500 - 575
—
680
not permitted
6SE70..-.HE85-0AA0
—
660 - 690
not intended
867
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
7-1
Malfunctions and warnings
7.2
02.96
Warning signals
The warning relay K761 at terminals X36-1 and X36-2 interrupts.
Signal
Description
Remedy
EXC. TEMP PREW. (red) lit
Excess temperature prewarning
of the power section
Switching threshold = 6C below
the fault signal threshold (90C
5C)
Reduce current tapping; check
air throughput; check ingoing air
temperature
none
If the DIP-FIX switch S1 is
Open the DIP-FIX switch S1.
closed, a warning is issued in the
event of pulse blockage, i.e.
before precharging and in the
event of all faults.
7-2
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
02.96
8
Maintenance
Maintenance
WARNING
The units SIMOVERT Master Drives are operated with high voltages.
All work on the unit must be carried out in agreement with the national electrical regulations
(in Germany: VBG 4).
Maintenance and repair work must only be carried out by qualified personnel.
Use must only be made ofd spare parts approved by the manufacturer.
It is imperative to observe the prescribed maintenance intervals and the repair and
replacement instructions.
Owing to the dc link capacitors, hazardous voltages still prevail in the unit up to 5 min. after
deenergisation (power terminal and electronic power supply). This is why it is only permitted
to open the unit after a corresponding waiting time.
The power terminals, fan terminals and control terminals may still be live even in the even
of motor standstill.
If work on the activated unit is necessary:
do not touch any live parts.
use only proper measuring equipment and protective work clothing.
stand or sit on an unearthed and isolated surface that does justice to ESD requirements.
Non-observance of warning notices can result in death, severe personal injury or
considerable property damage.
You should know the order and factory numbers of your unit when consulting the service department. You will
find these numbers and other important data on the rating plate of the unit.
8.1
Maintenance recommendations
Dust deposits inside the unit must be removed at least once annually by qualified personnel. If required, cleaning
must take place at shorter intervals. The unit must be cleaned with a brush and vacuum cleaner and in
inaccessible locations with dust-free dry compressed air at a maximum of 1 bar.
The AC-230V fan is designed for an operating life of 40 000 hours at an ambient temperature of 40 °C. It must
be replaced in good time to maintain the availability of the unit.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
8-1
Maintenance
02.96
8.2
Replacing components
8.2.1
Replacing the fan
WARNING
The fan must only be replaced by qualified personnel.
Owing to the dc link capacitors, a hazardous voltage prevails for a further 5 min.
after deenergisation.
Despite the fact that the power section is voltage-isolated, hazardous voltages
are present in the unit due to the external power supply for the fan.
Non-observance of warning notices can result in death, severe personal injury or
considerable property damage.
Size E
X29
The fan is located on the right underside of the unit.
Undo the M4 x 8/T20 Torx screw securing the fan
Extract the plug-in terminal X29
M4 x 8
Torx T20
Undo the M4 x 8/T20 Torx screw for earth connection
Pull the fan out of the unit towards the front left
Install a new fan in reverse order
Before commissioning the unit, check that the fan does not
rub and also check the air flow direction. The air must be
discharged from the unit in the upward direction.
Fan E1
Figure 8.1 Fan (AC 230V) for size E
8.2.2
Replacing modules
WARNING
Modules must only be replaced by qualified persons.
Modules must not be removed or inserted under a live voltage.
Non-observance of warning notices can result in death, severe personal injury or
considerable property damage.
CAUTION
The modules contain electrostatically sensitive devices. You must discharge your own body
before touching an electronic module. This is best done by touching a conductive earthed
object (e.g. a bare metal part of the control cabinet) directly beforehand.
8-2
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
02.96
Maintenance
Replacing modules in the electronics box
(option)
Undo the securing screws of the modules
above and below the insertion /removal aids
S lo t 1 (P S R )
S lo t 3 (O p tio n s )
By means of the insertion /removal aids,
carefully pull the module out of the
electronics box, making sure that the module
does not get stuck
S lo t 2 (O p tio n s )
Carefully insert the new module in the guide
rails until it moves no further in the
electronics box
Firmly screw down the module with the
securing screws above and below the
insertion / removal aids.
Figure 8.2 Electronics box, equipped with PSR (slot 1)
and options (slots 2 and 3)
8.2.3
Replacing thyristor modules
The thyristor modules are secured with self-tapping screws. When replacing the thyristor modules, it is
imperative to use original-length screws with locking elements to secure them.
Also use original-length screws when screwing the thyristor modules to the busbars.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
8-3
Maintenance
8-4
ENGLISH
02.96
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
02.96
Options
9
Options
9.1
A50 additional power supply PSR for optional modules
Z = K90
Spare part order no.: 6SE7090-0XX85-0KA0
The additional power supply A50 is connected to the module A23 by means of a 2-pole cable and inserted on the
left in slot 1. The module is secured on the electronics box by means of the screws of the extraction aid (earthreference potential connection: see Chapter 3.2.3).
CAUTION
The maximum total power that can be extracted is 19 W (taking into account the maximum
consumption of the common rectifier and common 2 A fuse for the DC 24 V power supply
on the module A23).
Output voltages and possible currents at the corresponding pins of connector X107
Designation
Voltage
Current
Overload protection
Tolerance
P5
+5 V
0 to 3.5 A
Current limiting
2%
P15
+15 V
0 to 0. 8A (0.65A 1) )
Current limiting
3%
N15
-15 V
0 to 0. 33A (0.3A 1) )
Current limiting
3%
P24_AUX
+24 V
0 to 0.2 A
NTC thermistor
Corresponds to the
DC 24V power supply
Table 9.1
Output voltages and possible currents of additional power supply
Input
Plug-in terminal X37 on A50 (corresponds to the output plug connector X37 on A23):
Terminal
Table 9.2
Function description
1
DC 24V power supply tolerance: 20V - 30V (fused with 2 A slow-blow on module A23)
2
Reference potential (fused with 3.2 A slow-blow on module A23)
Connection of additional power supply
1) maximum load current on switch-on
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
9-1
Options
02.96
9.2
Options which can be integrated into the electronics box
One or two option boards, listed in Table 9.3, can be inserted in the electronics box using the LBA option (local
bus adapter).
The options are supplied with the option description.
Designation
Description
LBA
Local bus adapter for the electronics box. This is
Board
required for installing T300, CB1, TSY, SCB1 and SCB2 description
6SE7090-0XX84-4HA0
6SE7080-0CX84-4HA0
T100
Technology board
Board
description
6SE7090-0XX87-0BB0
6SE7080-0CX87-0BB0
T300
Technology board for controlling technological
processes
Board
description
6SE7090-0XX84-0AH0
6SE7080-0CX84-0AH0
SCB1
Serial communications board with fiber-optic cable for
serial I/O system and peer-to-peer connection
Board
description
6SE7090-0XX84-0BC0
6SE7080-0CX84-0BC0
SCB2
Serial communications board for peer-to-peer
connection and USS protocol via RS485
Board
description
6SE7090-0XX84-0BD0
6SE7080-0CX84-0BD0
Use of the serial interface with USS protocol
Application
description
6SE7087-6CX87-4KB0
Communications board with interface for SINEC- L2DP, (Profibus)
Board
description
6SE7090-0XX84-0AK0
6SE7087-0CX84-0AK0
Use of the PROFIBUS DP interface
Application
description
6SE7087-6CX87-0AK0
CB1
Table 9.3
Order No.
Option boards and bus adapter
Electronics box
Slots in the electronics box
Boards
Left
Slot 1 (PSR)
PSR
Center
Slot 3 (options)
CB1 / SCB1 / SCB2
Right
Slots 2 (options)
CB1 / SCB1 / SCB2 / T100 / T300
NOTE
Only one of each option board type may inserted in the electronics box.
TB (technology boards, e.g. T300) must always be inserted at slot 2. When a TB board is used, a TSY board
my not be inserted.
If only one option board is used it must always be inserted at slot 2.
Option board Order Nos. and their descriptions are found in Section 9 "Options".
Table 9.4
Slots in the electronics box
Current input of DC 24V power supply:
Boards
The figures are required in addition to the 0.3A
consumed by the basic unit.
CB1
ENGLISH
190
SCB1
50
SCB2
150
T100
550
T300 without tacho
620
Table 9.5
9-2
Current drain (mA)
24V DC supply
Current drain of the option boards
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
02.96
Options
9.3
Power Supply
A SITOP power supply as described in Catalog KT10 is recommended for the common rectifier (connector X9).
9.4
Actual-current sensing module
Z = K91
Replacement parts, Order No. for module: 6SE7028-8FC85-0OA0
for one current transformer: 6SY7010-5AA02
Unit
Jumper
Irated output
Ri total
A
J14
605
33,222
J13
536
37,507
J12
463
43,432
J11
420
47,886
J10
375
53,647
J9
354
56,849
J8
270
74,557
J7
235
85,677
J6
222
90,720
J5
173
116,421
J4
142
141,887
J3
94
214,464
J2
86
234,523
J1
72
280,230
keine
41
492,381
Size
E
B and C
Table 9.6
Jumpers for actual-current sensing module
The compliance voltage at the rated output current is 10V.
The transformation ratio of the current transformers is 2000 : 1
Source resistance Ri total as per table.
NOTE
When measuring equipment is connected to the unit, the effective load impedance and thus the voltage will
vary in accordance with the internal resistance of the equipment.
For the lowest rated output current of Type E units, 142A, jumpers J1 to J4 should be closed and J5 to J14 open.
For the maximum rated output current of 605A, all jumpers (J1 to J14) should be closed.
Example: For a unit with a rated output current of 222A, jumpers J7 to J14 should be open.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
9-3
Options
02.96
X47
9.5
1
X50
+ I_IST
6SE7028-8FC85-0OA0
- I_IST
C98043-A1697-L1
2
Replacement units are supplied with all jumpers closed (J1 to J14). Before start-up the unit, therefore, the
jumpers should be positioned as appropriate to the rated output current (see rating plate) and accordance with
Table 9.6.
J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8 J9 J10 J11 J12 J13 J14 J15 J16 J17
Mechanical components
Order code for
option
Description
Retrofit assembly
Order No.
Z = M08
Boards painted on both sides
Factory option only
Z = M20
Degree of protection IP20
6SE7090-0XE85-0TC0 or factory option
Z = M72
Tinned bus-bars
Factory option only
Table 9.7
9-4
Mechanical options
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
02.96
10
Spare parts
Spare parts
For common rectifiers, size E
Equipment
identifier
Designation
Order number
Used in
-A23
PCB electronics phase control
6SE7036-0EF85-0EA0
6SE7031-7EE85-0AA0
6SE7032-7EE85-0AA0
6SE7033-8EE85-0AA0
6SE7034-6EE85-0AA0
6SE7036-1EE85-0AA0
-A23
PCB electronics phase control
6SE7035-4HF85-0EA0
6SE7031-4FE85-0AA0
6SE7032-4FE85-0AA0
6SE7033-5FE85-0AA0
6SE7034-2FE85-0AA0
6SE7035-4FE85-0AA0
6SE7032-2HE85-0AA0
6SE7033-5HE85-0AA0
6SE7034-2HE85-0AA0
6SE7035-4HE85-0AA0
-A601
PCB- snubber RC network
6SE7032-2FC85-0JA0
6SE7031-7EE85-0AA0
6SE7031-4FE85-0AA0
6SE7032-4FE85-0AA0
-A601
PCB- snubber RC network
6SE7034-6EC85-0JA0
6SE7032-7EE85-0AA0
6SE7033-8EE85-0AA0
6SE7034-6EE85-0AA0
-A601
PCB- snubber RC network
6SE7031-4HE85-1JA0
6SE7033-5FE85-0AA0
6SE7034-2FE85-0AA0
6SE7032-2HE85-0AA0
6SE7033-5HE85-0AA0
6SE7034-2HE85-0AA0
-A601
PCB- snubber RC network
6SE7034-6EE85-1JA0
6SE7036-1EE85-0AA0
-V11 bis V16
Thyristor module
6SY7010-0AA01
6SE7031-7EE85-0AA0
-V11 bis V16
Thyristor module
6SY7010-0AA02
6SE7032-7EE85-0AA0
-V11 bis V16
Thyristor module
6SY7010-0AA03
6SE7033-8EE85-0AA0
-V11 bis V16
Thyristor module
6SY7010-0AA05
6SE7034-6EE85-0AA0
-V11 bis V16
Thyristor module
6SY7010-0AA04
6SE7036-1EE85-0AA0
-V11 bis V16
Thyristor module
6SY7010-0AA06
6SE7031-4FE85-0AA0
-V11 bis V16
Thyristor module
6SY7010-0AA07
6SE7032-4FE85-0AA0
-V11 bis V16
Thyristor module
6SY7010-0AA10
6SE7033-5FE85-0AA0
6SE7033-5HE85-0AA0
-V11 bis V16
Thyristor module
6SY7010-0AA11
6SE7034-2FE85-0AA0
6SE7034-2HE85-0AA0
-V11 bis V16
Thyristor module
6SY7010-0AA12
6SE7035-4FE85-0AA0
6SE7035-4HE85-0AA0
-V11 bis V16
Thyristor module
6SY7010-0AA08
6SE7032-2HE85-0AA0
-F1
Fuse link
6SY7010-2AA01
all unit types
-F2
Fuse link
6SY7010-2AA02
all unit types
-F3, F4
Fuse link
6SY7010-2AA03
all unit types
-R100
NTC thermistor
6SY7010-6AA01
all unit types
-E1
Fan
6SY7010-7AA01
all unit types
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
10-1
Spare parts
10-2 ENGLISH
02.96
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
02.96
13
Environmental compatibility
Environmental compatibility
Environmental aspects during development
The number of parts has been reduced substantially by the use of highly integrated components and by a
modular structure of the complete converter series. This reduces energy consumption during production.
Particular attention was paid to reducing volume, mass and type diversity of the metal and plastic parts.
Plastic parts used:
ABS:
fan
PP:
hinge
insulating plate
handle
bus retrofit
PC:
Protection against accidental contact
PA6:
insulating films
terminal housing
On all essential parts, flame retardants containing halogen and insulating material containing silicone have been
substituted by materials that are devoid of noxious substances.
Environmental compatibility was an important criterion in the selection of externally source items.
Environmental aspects during production
Externally sourced items are mainly transported in returnable packaging. The packaging material itself is
recyclable, consisting mainly of cardboard.
With the exception of the hot galvanised side plate, surface coatings have been dispensed with.
Production is emission-free.
Environmental aspects of disposal
The unit can be dismantled into recyclable mechanical components by means of easily removable screw and
snap joints.
The pc boards can be disposed of thermally. The number of components containing hazardous substances is
only slight.
The plastic parts are marked in conformity with DIN 54840 and bear the recycling symbol.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
13-1
Environmental compatibility
13-2 ENGLISH
02.96
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
02.96
14
Technical data
Technical data
In the event of conditions of use other than those listed in this chapter, please contact your local Siemens branch
or national subsidiary.
Coolant temperature
0 °C to +40 °C
Storage temperature
25 °C to +70 °C
25 °C to +70 °C
Transport temperature
Environmental class
3K3
DIN IEC 721-3-3 / 04.90
Soiling
2
DIN VDE 0110 Part 1 / 01.89
moisture not permitted
Overvoltage category (power section)
III
DIN VDE 0110 Part 2 / 01.89
Overvoltage resistance class
(with converter connected)
Type of protection
Standard
Option
1
E DIN VDE 0160 / 04.91
IP00
IP20
DIN VDE 0470 Part1 / 11.92 =
^ EN 60529
Interference immunity
IEC 801-2, IEC 801-4
Mechanical strength
DIN IEC 68-2-6 / 06.90
Frequency range
Hz
10 to 58
stationary use
Constant Amplitude of
deflection
acceleration
mm
m/s2 (g)
0.075
more than 58 to 500
9.8 (1)
3.5
during transport
9.8 (1)
The units can also be operated in load class II. The permissible values must be taken from the following tables.
I
(A)
Load class ΙΙ
136%
Load class Ι
100%
91%
60s
240s
t/(s)
Figure 14.1 Power output according to load class II
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
14-1
Technical data
Common
rectifier
02.96
6SE70..-.....-0AA0 31-7EE85 32-7EE85 33-8EE85 34-6EE85 36-1EE85
Rated voltage, rated frequency, rated current, rated power
Rated voltage
Input Un
Output Udn
V
3 AC 380 to 460V ±15 % 1)
DC 510 to 620V ±15 %
Rated frequency fn
Input
Output
Hz
46 to 64
D.C.
A
Rated current In
Input (rms value) AC
Output (average) DC
149
173
233
270
326
375
403
463
526
605
157
246
341
421
551
632
826
Load class II acc. EN 60146-1-1
Rated output current average
A
Base load duration
s
Excess output current
average
A
Excess current duration
s
240
236
369
512
60
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor
Mains cos1N
1
Power dissipation
Maximum
kW
0,62
0,86
1,07
1,32
1,67
Cooling air requirement
m3/s
0,2
0,2
0,2
0,2
0,2
Sound pressure level, dimensions, weight
Sound pressure level of fan
Size
Width
Height
Depth
Standard
Option
Weight app.
dB(A)
75
75
75
75
75
mm
mm
E
269
1050
E
269
1050
E
269
1050
E
269
1050
E
269
1050
mm
mm
340
350
340
350
340
350
340
350
340
350
kg
35
35
44
45
46,5
1) 3AC 208 to 230V Input voltage: see Chapter 4 Commissioning
14-2 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
02.96
Common
rectifier
Technical data
6SE70..-.....-0AA0 31-4FE85
32-4FE85
33-5FE85
34-2FE85
35-4FE85
Rated voltage, rated frequency, rated current, rated power
Rated voltage
Input Un
Output Udn
V
3 AC 500 to 575V ±15 %
DC 675 to 780V ±15 %
Rated frequency fn
Input
Output
Hz
46 to 64
D.C.
A
Rated current In
Input (rms value) AC
Output (average) DC
123
142
203
235
307
354
366
420
465
536
129
214
322
382
488
Load class II acc. EN 60146-1-1
Rated output current average
A
Base load duration
s
Excess output current
average
A
Excess current duration
s
240
194
321
483
573
732
60
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor
Mains cos1N
1
Power dissipation
Maximum
kW
0,65
0,97
1,25
1,27
1,74
Cooling air requirement
m3/s
0,2
0,2
0,2
0,2
0,2
Sound pressure level, dimensions, weight
Sound pressure level of fan
Size
Width
Height
Depth
Standard
Option
Weight app.
dB(A)
75
75
75
75
75
mm
mm
E
269
1050
E
269
1050
E
269
1050
E
269
1050
E
269
1050
mm
mm
340
350
340
350
340
350
340
350
340
350
kg
35
35
45
46,5
50
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
14-3
Technical data
Common
rectifier
02.96
6SE70..-.....-0AA0 32-2HE85 33-5HE85 34-2HE85 35-4HE85
Rated voltage, rated frequency, rated current, rated power
Rated voltage
Input Un
Output Udn
V
3 AC 660 to 690V ±15 %
DC 890 to 930V ±15 %
Rated frequency fn
Input
Output
Hz
46 to 64
D.C.
A
Rated current In
Input (rms value) AC
Output (average) DC
193
222
307
354
366
420
465
536
202
322
382
488
573
732
Load class II acc. EN 60146-1-1
Rated output current average
A
Base load duration
s
Excess output current
average
A
Excess current duration
s
240
303
483
60
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor
Mains cos1N
1
Power dissipation
Maximum
kW
1,08
1,33
1,58
2,02
Cooling air requirement
m3/s
0,2
0,2
0,2
0,2
Sound pressure level, dimensions, weight
Sound pressure level of fan
Size
Width
Height
Depth
Standard
Option
Weight app.
14-4 ENGLISH
dB(A)
75
75
75
75
mm
mm
E
269
1050
E
269
1050
E
269
1050
E
269
1050
mm
mm
340
350
340
350
340
350
340
350
kg
37
45
46,5
50
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
02.96
Technical data
14.1
Power reduction at increased coolant temperature
The rated current must be reduced according to Figure 14.2 for cooling medium temperatures exceeding 40°C.
Cooling medium temperatures > 50°C are not permissible.
permissible rated current
in %
100
90
80
75
70
60
Coolant temperature
in °C
10
20
30
40
50
Figure 14.2 Maximum permitted rated current depending on coolant temperature
14.2
Power reduction at altitudes > 1000m above MSL
The rated current must be reduced as shown in Figure 14.3 in the event of installation altitudes > 1000 m above
mean sea level. Installation altitudes > 2000 m above MSL (please enquire)
permissible rated current
permissible rated voltage
in %
in %
100
100
90
90
80
80
70
70
60
60
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
0
1000
Installation altitude
in m above sea level
Figure 14.3
2000
3000
4000
Installation altitude
in m above sea level
Maximum values for rated current and rated voltage depending on installation altitude
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
14-5
Technical data
14.3
02.96
Applied standards
DIN VDE 0100
Part 540 A11.91
DIN VDE 0106
Part 1 A05.82
Part 100 A03.83
Erection of power installations with rated voltages up to 1000 V,
Selection and erection of electrical equipment, earthing, PE conductor,
equipotential bonding conductor
Protection against electric shock:
Classification of electrical and electronic equipment (IEC 536)
Arrangement of actuation elements in the proximity of shock-hazard parts
DIN VDE 0110 Part 1 and 2
A01.89
Isolation coordination for electrical equipment in low-voltage installations
DIN VDE 0113
Safety of machines: electrical equipment of machines,
General requirements (EN 60204-1:1992)
Part 1 A06.93
DIN VDE 0160 E04.91
Equipping power installations with electronic equipment
DIN VDE 0298
Use of cables and insulated cables for power installations:
Recommended values for the current carrying capacity of cables with rated
voltages U0 / U to 18/30 kV
Recommended values for the current carrying capacity of cables
Part 2 A11.79
Part 4 A02.80
DIN VDE 0470 Part 1 A12.92
Types of protection, shock, foreign body and water protection for electrical
equipment (EN 60529: 1991)
DIN VDE 0558 Part1 A07.87
Semiconductor converters: general regulations and special regulations for
line-commutated converters
DIN VDE 0843
Electromagnetic compatibility of instrumentation and control equipment in
industrial process engineering:
Interference resistance to static electricity discharges; requirements and
measurement methods (IEC801-2) Ersetzt durch DIN EN 60801, Teil 2
(09.87)
Part 2 A09.87 Z
DIN VDE 0875
Part 11 A12.88 Z
Part 1 A07.92
RFI suppression of electrical equipment and installations:
(EN 55014: 1987) Ersetzt durch DIN VDE 0875, Teil 14 und DIN VDE 0075
(EN 55011: 1991)
DIN 41494
Part 5 A9.80
Equipment practice for electronic facilities; subracks and modules
DIN 41651
Part 1 A9.89
Connectors for printed circuits for connecting ribbon cables with round
conductors; indirect insertion, grid dimension 2.54 mm
DIN IEC 68
Part 2
Elektrotechnik; Grundlegende Umweltprüfverfahren; Prüfungen
Part 3 A08.87
Electrical engineering; classification of environmental conditions:
classes of influencing quantities
Part 4
Electromagnetic compatibility for industrial - process measurement and
control equipment
Electrical fast transient / burst requirements
DIN IEC 721
IEC 801
EN 60146-1-1: 1993
Part 1-1
14-6 ENGLISH
Semiconductor converters;
General requirements and line-commutated converters:
Definition of basic requirements (IEC146-1-1991)
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
02.96
Technical data
Sources
DIN standards and foreign standards:
Beuth-Verlag GmbH
Burggrafenstraße 6
10787 Berlin
DIN VDE regulations:
VDE-Auslieferungsstelle
Merianstraße 29
63069 Offenbach
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
14-7
Technical data
14.4
02.96
Manufacturer's declaration
14-8 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
11.94
15
Index
Index
in preparation
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
15-1
Index
11.94
15-2
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
02.96
Bisher sind folgende Ausgaben erschienen:
The following versions have appeared so far:
Ausgabe
Version
interne Sachnummer
Internal Part number
A
C98130-A1235-A2-01-7447
B
C98130-A1235-A2-02-7447
C
C98130-A1235-A2-03-7447
D
C98130-A1235-A2-04-7447
Ausgabe D besteht aus folgenden Kapiteln
Version D consists of the following chapters
Kapitel
Chapter
Seiten
Pages
Ausgabedatum
Date of Edition
0
Allgemeines / General
8
02.96
1
Beschreibung / Description
2
02.96
2
Transportieren, Auspacken, Montieren /
Transport, unpacking, assembly
4
02.96
3
Anschließen / Connection
20
02.96
4
Inbetriebnahme / Start-up
4
02.96
5
Leerkapitel / Blank
0
6
Leerkapitel / Blank
0
7
Störungen und Warnungen / Malfunctions and warnings
2
02.96
8
Wartung / Maintenance
4
02.96
9
Optionen / Options
4
02.96
10
Ersatzteile / Spare parts
2
02.96
11
Leerkapitel / Blank
0
12
Leerkapitel / Blank
0
13
Umweltverträglichkeit / Environmental compatibility
2
02.96
14
Technische Daten / Technical data
8
02.96
15
Stichwortverzeichnis / Index
1
11.94
Bereich
Gerätewerk Wien
Postfach 83, A-1211 Wien
Antriebs-, Schalt- und Installationstechnik von Siemens
Drives and Standard Products from
Siemens
Equipment Plant Vienna
P.O. Box 83, A-1211 Vienna
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Einspeise-Einheit Betriebsanleitung
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
Änderungen vorbehalten
Subject to change without notice
Bestell-Nr. / Order-No.: 6SE7087-6AE85-0AA0
Printed in Austria
SIMOVERT Master Drives
Einspeise-Einheit
Bauform H und K
Common Rectifier
Sizes H and K
Ausgabe / Edition: D
Betriebsanleitung
Operating Instructions
Bestell-Nr. / Order-No.: 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
02.96
Allgemeines / General
Von dieser Betriebsanleitung sind folgende fremdsprachige Ausgaben lieferbar:
These Operating Instructions are available in the following languages:
Sprache
Language
Französisch
French
Spanisch
Spanish
Italienisch
Italian
Bestell-Nr.:
Order-No.:
6SE7087-7AK85-0AA0
6SE7087- 8AK85-0AA0
6SE7087-2AK85-0AA0
Gerätesoftwarestand: ab 3.0
Unit Software Release: starting with 3.0
Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung dieser Unterlage, Verwertung und
Mitteilung ihres Inhalts nicht gestattet, soweit nicht ausdrücklich
zugestanden. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle
Rechte vorbehalten, insbesondere für den Fall der Patenterteilung oder
GM-Eintragung.
Wir haben den Inhalt der Druckschrift auf Übereinstimmung mit der
beschriebenen Hard- und Software überprüft. Dennoch können
Abweichungen nicht ausgeschlossen werden, so daß wir für die
vollständige Übereinstimmung keine Garantie übernehmen. Die
Angaben in dieser Druckschrift werden jedoch regelmäßig überprüft
und notwendige Korrekturen sind in den nachfolgenden Auflagen
enthalten. Für Verbesserungsvorschläge sind wir dankbar.
SIMOVERT ist ein Warenzeichen von Siemens
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents
is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be
liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or
registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.
Conformity
We have checked the contents of this document for conformity with the
hardware and software described. However, this does not absolutely
preclude deviations, and we therefore cannot guarantee complete
conformity. The information in the document is subjected to regular
scrutiny. Any necessary corrections will be made in subsequent
editions. We also welcome any suggestions you may have in the way
of improvement.
Siemens AG 1994 All rights reserved
SIMOVERT Registered Trade Mark
12.96
Contents
ENGLISH
Contents
Page
0
Definitions ................................................................................................................... 0-7
1
Description .................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1
Applicability....................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2
Principle of operation ........................................................................................................ 1-1
2
Transport, unpacking, assembly ....................................................................... 2-1
2.1
Transport, unpacking........................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2
Storage ............................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.3
Assembly .......................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.4
Dimension drawings ......................................................................................................... 2-3
3
Connection .................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1
Power connections ........................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.1
Short-circuit withstand capability ...................................................................................... 3-6
3.2
Power supply and main contactor .................................................................................... 3-6
3.3
Control terminal block and serial interface ....................................................................... 3-8
3.3.1
Connectors for the control terminal block ......................................................................... 3-8
3.3.2
Connecting the control leads ............................................................................................ 3-8
3.3.3
Terminals and setting elements on the CUR (A10) module ............................................. 3-9
3.3.4
Connecting-up the parameterizing unit (PMU) ................................................................. 3-11
3.4
Measures for keeping to RFI suppression regulations ..................................................... 3-11
3.5
Single-line diagrams with suggested circuit arrangements .............................................. 3-12
3.6
Power sections ................................................................................................................. 3-14
3.7
Parallel connection of parallel unit(s), size K ................................................................... 3-17
3.7.1
Single-line diagram with suggested circuit arrangement for parallel connection.............. 3-20
3.8
12-pulse mode (only possible with the optional RS485 interface).................................... 3-21
3.8.1
General information on 12-pulse mode, application ......................................................... 3-21
3.8.2
Hardware requirements, configuration of the power sections .......................................... 3-22
3.8.3
Parameterization for 12-pulse mode ................................................................................ 3-23
3.8.4
Control/status word for 12-pulse mode (r599) and control word 2, bit 23......................... 3-25
3.8.5
Start-up with 12-pulse mode ............................................................................................ 3-26
3.8.6
Redundancy mode .......................................................................................................... 3-28
3.8.7
RS485 interface cable for the peer-to-peer link on SST2 ................................................ 3-29
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
0-3
Contents
12.96
4
Start-Up............................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1
Introduction and handling start-up .................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1
Handling the start-up instructions ..................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2
General explanation of the terminology and functional scope of the
rectifier/regenerating unit .................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2
Initial start-up .................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.1
Preparatory measures ...................................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.2
Parameterization "Standard application" .......................................................................... 4-5
4.2.3
Parameterization for "Expert application" ......................................................................... 4-7
4.2.5
Simple application examples for connecting process data with connection assignment.. 4-9
4.3
Start-up aids ..................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.3.1
Process data..................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.3.1.1
Control word (control word 1 and control word 2)............................................................. 4-10
4.3.1.1.1
Introduction and application example ............................................................................... 4-10
4.3.1.1.2
Overview of the control word (control word 1 and control word 2) ................................... 4-12
4.3.1.1.3
Selecting the source for control word 1 (bit 0-7) ............................................................... 4-13
4.3.1.1.4
Selecting the source for control word 1 (bit 8-15) ............................................................. 4-14
4.3.1.1.5
Selecting the source for control word 2 (bit 16-23) ........................................................... 4-15
4.3.1.1.6
Selecting the source for control word 2 (bit 24-31) ........................................................... 4-16
4.3.1.1.7
Significance of control word- (1 and 2) commands........................................................... 4-17
4.3.1.2
Status word (status word 1 and status word 2) ................................................................ 4-22
4.3.1.2.1
Introduction and application example ............................................................................... 4-22
4.3.1.2.2
Overview of the status word (status word 1 and status word 2) ....................................... 4-23
4.3.1.2.3
Selecting the destinations for the status word (bits 0 - 31) ............................................... 4-24
4.3.1.2.4
Significance of the status word messages........................................................................ 4-25
4.3.1.3
Setpoints........................................................................................................................... 4-27
4.3.1.4
Actual values .................................................................................................................... 4-28
4.3.2
Binary inputs ..................................................................................................................... 4-29
4.3.3
Binary outputs................................................................................................................... 4-29
4.3.5
Analog output.................................................................................................................... 4-30
4.3.6
Serial interfaces ................................................................................................................ 4-33
4.3.6.1.1
Basic converter interface SST1 ........................................................................................ 4-33
4.3.6.1.2
Basic converter interface SST2 (A2-X117), see Section 9.6, Options ............................. 4-33
4.3.6.2
Dual-port RAM (DPR for SCB, CB, TB)............................................................................ 4-33
4.3.9
Function selection
4.3.9.1
Generating the factory setting
4.3.9.2
Initialization (MLFB setting) (P052 = 2)........................................................................... 4-36
4.3.9.3
Download or upread (P052 = 3)....................................................................................... 4-37
4.3.9.4
Hardware configuration
4.3.9.5
Drive setting
(P052 = 5) ................................................................................................. 4-39
4.3.9.6
Form DC link
(P052 = 20) .............................................................................................. 4-40
4.3.9.7
Circuit identification
0-4
ENGLISH
(P052) .............................................................................................. 4-34
(P052 = 1)...................................................................... 4-34
(P052 = 4)................................................................................ 4-38
(P052 = 21).................................................................................... 4-41
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
12.96
Contents
4.3.9.8
Display modified parameters
(P052 = 22) ..................................................................... 4-43
4.3.10
Functions .......................................................................................................................... 4-43
4.3.10.1
WEA (automatic restart) .................................................................................................. 4-43
4.4
Function diagrams ............................................................................................................ 4-45
5
Parameter list ............................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1
Operation display.............................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2
General observation parameters ...................................................................................... 5-4
5.3
General parameters.......................................................................................................... 5-6
5.4
Drive data ......................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.5
Hardware configuration .................................................................................................... 5-10
5.6
Data of the DC link............................................................................................................ 5-11
5.7
Control .............................................................................................................................. 5-12
5.8
Convenience functions ..................................................................................................... 5-14
5.9
Setpoint channel ............................................................................................................... 5-16
5.10
Control and status word.................................................................................................... 5-17
5.11
Analog input/output........................................................................................................... 5-27
5.12
Communications ............................................................................................................... 5-30
5.13
Diagnostics ....................................................................................................................... 5-35
5.14
Modulator.......................................................................................................................... 5-37
5.15
Factory parameters .......................................................................................................... 5-38
5.16
Profile parameters ............................................................................................................ 5-39
6
Operator control ....................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1
Operator control elements ................................................................................................ 6-1
6.2
Displays
6.3
Structure ........................................................................................................................... 6-3
7
Fault and Alarm Messages ................................................................................... 7-1
7.1
Fault messages ................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.2
Alarm messages............................................................................................................... 7-9
8
Maintenance ............................................................................................................... 8-1
8-1
Maintenance recommendations ....................................................................................... 8-1
8.2
Replacing components ..................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.1
Replacing the fan.............................................................................................................. 8-2
8.2.2
Replacing modules ........................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.3
Replacing thyristor blocks................................................................................................. 8-6
8.2.3.1
Disassembling the thyristor blocks for size H ................................................................... 8-6
8.2.3.2
Disassembling the thyristor blocks for size K ................................................................... 8-7
.......................................................................................................... 6-2
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
0-5
Contents
12.96
9
Options ......................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1
Options which can be integrated into the electronics box................................................. 9-1
9.2
Interface boards................................................................................................................ 9-2
9.3
Power Supply.................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.4
Operator control................................................................................................................ 9-3
9.5
RS485 interface (PTP1).................................................................................................... 9-3
9.5.1
Order designation ............................................................................................................. 9-3
9.5.2
Assembly .......................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.5.3
Function and terminal description..................................................................................... 9-4
9.5.4
Parameterization............................................................................................................... 9-4
9.6
SIMOVIS........................................................................................................................... 9-5
10
Spare parts .................................................................................................................. 10-1
11
Blank
12
Logbook........................................................................................................................ 12-1
13
Environmental compatibility................................................................................ 13-1
14
Technical data............................................................................................................ 14-1
14.1
Power reduction at increased coolant temperature .......................................................... 14-5
14.2
Power reduction at altitudes > 1000m above MSL ........................................................... 14-5
14.3
Applied standards ............................................................................................................. 14-6
15
Index .............................................................................................................................. 15-1
0-6
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
05.95
0
Definitions
Definitions
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
within the meaning of these operating instructions or the warning information on the product itself, are
persons who are entrusted with installation, assembly, commissioning and operation of the product and who
avail of qualifications corresponding to their activities, e.g.:
1. training or instruction or authorization to activate and deactivate, to earth and to mark circuits and
equipment in accordance with the standards of safety engineering.
2. training or instruction in accordance with the standards of safety engineering in the care and use of
suitable safety equipment.
3. training in First Aid
DANGER
within the meaning of these operating instructions or the warning information on the product itself, indicates
that death and/or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
within the meaning of these operating instructions or the warning information on the product itself, indicates
that severe personal injury and/or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
within the meaning of these operating instructions or the warning information on the product itself, indicates
that slight personal injury or property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTE
within the meaning of these operating instructions indicates important information about the product or the
respective part of the operating instructions to which attention is drawn.
NOTE
For reasons of clarity, these operating instructions do not contain all details of all types of the product and can
also not take into account every conceivable installation, operation or maintenance circumstances.
You can consult your local Siemens branch if you should require further information or if particular problem
occur that are not dealt with in adequate detail in the operating instructions.
Attention is also drawn to the fact that the contents of this instruction manual shall not become part of or
modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment or legal relationship. The sales contract, which also
contains the complete and solely valid warranty stipulations, contains the entire obligations of Siemens. These
contractual warranty stipulations are neither extended nor limited by the statements given in instructions and
documentation.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
0-7
Definitions
05.95
CAUTION
Electrostatically Sensitive Devices (ESDs)
The equipment contains electrostatically sensitive devices. These components may be destroyed very easily
by improper handling. Please observe the following notes if you nevertheless have to work with electronic
modules:
Electronic modules should only be touched if absolutely necessary to carry out work on them.
If modules nevertheless have to be touched, you must discharge your own body directly beforehand (this is
best done by touching an earthed conductive object such as the PE contact of a socket).
Modules must not come into contact with highly insulating materials e.g. plastic films, insulating desktops
or synthetic fibber clothing items.
Modules must only be placed on conductive surfaces.
When soldering modules, the tip of the soldering iron must be earthed.
Modules and components must only be stored or dispatched in conductive packaging (e.g. metallized
plastic boxes or metal tins).
If packagings are not conductive, modules must be placed in a conductive envelopment prior to packaging.
In this case, use can be made of conductive foam rubber or domestic aluminum foil, for example.
The necessary protective measures for ESDs are elucidated once again in the following figure:
a
=
conductive floor
d
=
ESD coat
b
=
ESD desk
e
=
ESD armband
c
=
ESD shoes
f
=
earthing terminal on cabinets
d
d
b
e
e
f
Sitting position
0-8
f
f
c
a
ENGLISH
d
b
a
Standing position
f
f
c
a
Standing / Sitting position
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
05.95
Definitions
WARNING
When operating electrical equipment, certain parts of such equipment are inevitably live.
Owing to the dc link capacitors, hazardous voltages are present on the equipment up to
5 min. after deenergization (power terminal and electronic power supply). This is why it is
not permitted to open the housing until after waiting for 5 minutes.
Non-observance of warning notices can result in death, severe personal injury or
considerable property damage.
Such personnel must be thoroughly acquainted with all warnings and maintenance
activities.
Perfect and safe operation of the equipment requires proper transport, expert storage,
installation and assembly and cautious operation and maintenance.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
0-9
Definitions
0-10 ENGLISH
05.95
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Description
1
Description
1.1
Application
The SIMOVERT Master Drive power supply units type 6SE70 are power electronic units of compact design.
They function as a DC power supply unit for the SIMOVERT Master Drive inverter series type 6SE70. The power
supply unit generates a DC voltage of fixed amplitude (depending on the mode of operation and the voltage
tolerance) from a three-phase AC power supply system.
One or more inverters and braking DC choppers can be connected to the output of the unit. The sum of the rated
currents of the installed inverters may not exceed the rated current of the power supply unit. On planning the
installation it must be ensured that the sum of the instantaneous load compensation currents at no time exceeds
the rated current of the power supply unit. Feedback of energy to the power supply system is not possible.
The output current can be increased by connecting power sections of size K in parallel. Up to 2 parallel units of
the same rated current can be connected in parallel with one basic unit (see Section 3.7 for further details on
parallel connection)
You can make technological adaptations and expansions over a defined interface in the control section.
Harmonic loading on the supply network can be reduced by coupling 2 units for "12-pulse mode" (for further
details on "12-pulse mode", see Section 3.8).
1.2
Principle of operation
The power section of the power supply unit comprises a six-pulse thyristor bridge for controlled rectification of
the three-phase AC power supply. Control of the link circuit voltage is effected by means of a digital controller
module with microprocessor.
A 24V external supply is required for operating the units (see Sections 3.5 and 9.3).
The common rectifier is suitable for connecting several inverters to a common DC bus. This permits the
exchange of energy between motoring and generating drives, and thus saves energy.
Once the DC link capacitors have been precharged, the inverters are ready for operation.
The common rectifier is controlled from an operator panel which is on the electronics box. The operator can also
control the unit over a terminal block or through a serial interface.
Optional interfaces and intelligent I/O modules are available in conjunction with programmable controllers and
other automation equipment for controlling the common rectifiers.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
1-1
Description
1-2
ENGLISH
02.96
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
12.96
Transport, Unpacking and Assembly
2
Transport, Unpacking and Assembly
2.1
Transport and unpacking
The units are packed at the manufacturing works. A product packaging label is attached to the box.
Avoid extreme vibrations and hard impacts during transport, e.g. when lowering the unit.
Pay attention to the notes on the packaging relating to transport, storage and proper handling.
The converter can be installed after unpacking it and checking the consignment for completeness and
damage.
The units are bolted onto pallets with fixing pieces in their usual operating position and packed with
cardboard.
The packaging may be disposed of in accordance with local cardboard disposal regulations.
You should notify your freight forwarder immediately if you discover any transportation damage.
2.2
Storage
The units must be stored in clean dry rooms. Temperatures between 25 °C (13 °F) and + 70 °C (158 °F) are
permissible. Temperature fluctuations > 20 K per hour are not permissible.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
2-1
Transport, Unpacking and Assembly
2.3
12.96
Aids to assembly
The following are required for securing size H:
four M8 bolts
dimension drawing (Figure 2.2 for size H)
The following are required for securing size K:
six M8 bolts
dimension drawing (Figure 2.3 for size K)
WARNING
For safe operation of the unit, it is presumed it will be assembled and commissioned by
qualified personnel, paying attention to the warning notes given in these operating
instructions.
Particular note must be taken both of the general and national erection and safety
regulations regarding work on power installations (e.g. VDE) and regulations regarding the
proper use of tools and of personal protective equipment.
Non-observance of warning notices can result in death, severe personal injury or
considerable property damage.
The unit must be protected against the ingress of foreign matter as otherwise proper
functioning and safety will not be guaranteed.
Requirements for the installation site
Local guidelines and standards must be observed in relation to assembly.
Operating facilities must be dry and dust-free. Air fed in must not contain
any gases, vapors or dusts that are electrically conductive or detrimental
to functioning. Air containing dust must be filtered.
Dissipated power
WARNING
Dimension cabinet ventilation according to the
dissipated power! (Technical data in Chapter 14)
The unit’s ambient climate in operating rooms must not exceed the values
of code 3K3 as detailed in DIN IEC 721 Part 3-3 /04.90. A reduction of
power as detailed in Chapters 14.1 and 14.2 is necessary in the event of
temperatures > 40 °C (104 °F) and altitudes >1000m. The terminal
voltage has to be reduced for altitudes > 2000m.
Carry out assembly in accordance with the dimension drawings in
Section 2.4.
6SE70
Cooling air
≤ 40 °C (50°C)
WARNING
In the case of units, all plastic covers must be
mounted to ensure correct air flow and cooling for
the units.
2-2
ENGLISH
Figure 2.1 Installation in control cabinets
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
950
45
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
119
270
Mounting holes for wall mounting
with M8 bolts
X9 4)
X19 5)
3)
PMU
X300
A10
Options
1)
PE1
U1/L1
234
40
F11 F14
92
61
V1/L2
40
508
X9
X29
F5 F1 F2
X27
X19
F4
F3
F13 F16
376
119
26
63
A23
F15 F12
W1/L3
40
70
C/L+ D/L-
26
67
26
7)
255
50
6)
PE2
1)
2)
2)
7)
250
50
125
Level B
W1
L3
551
PE1
Exhaust air
T1
T2
Level A
U1
L1
Air intake
PE2
V1
L2
D/L- C/L+
285
225
155
130
85
X19
X9
7)
Dimension: mm
Weight: refer to Section 14 (Technical Data)
No displacement of the centre of gravity
When the units are installed in cabinets,it must
be ensured that the air intake and exhaust is
adequate (for air requirements and intake air
temperature, see Section 14 "Technical Data").
7) For cabinet installation:
Insulate this part of the unit against the
cabinet walls and door
6) Remove transport plates before start-up
5) Fan connection
4) Connector for 24 V DC power supply
and main contactor
3) Screen connection for cables
2) M12 thread
1) Mounting hole for M12 screw
2.4
40 50
Front view
12.96
Transport, Unpacking and Assembly
Dimension drawings
Figure 2.2 Dimension drawing, size H
ENGLISH
2-3
1050
X19
X9
6a)
3)
6b)
205
PE2
550
Level B
A23
U1 V1 W1 C
L1 L2 L3 L+
Level A
PE1
D
L-
400
340
270
200
130
85
26
26
ENGLISH
1)
87
X9 4)
X19 5)
6a)
A23
3)
PMU
X300
A10
Options
PE1
50
U1/L1
26
V1/L2
710
800
C/L+
420
310
40
175
26
40
W1/L3
PE2
26
D/L-
26
40
40
40
2)
483
708
Air intake
Dimension: mm
Weight: refer to Section 14 (Technical Data)
No displacement of the centre of gravity
1)
6) For cabinet installation:
a) Insulate this part of the unit against
the cabinet walls and door.
b) Loosen fixing screws for fan casing
(M8/SW13) and lift up plastic cover
as far as the cabinettop panel.
Tighten screws again.
5) Fan connection
4) Connector for 24 V DC power supply
and main contactor
3) Screen connection for cables
2) M12 thread
1) Mounting hole for M12 screw
6a)
258
Exhaust air
Mounting holes for wall mounting
with M8 bolts
1300
When the units are installed in cabinets,it
must be ensured that the air intake and
exhaust is adequate (for air requirements
and intake air temperature, see Section
14 "Technical Data").
1400
665
555
50 62
122,5 50
2-4
45
Front view
Transport, Unpacking and Assembly
12.96
Figure 2.3 Dimension drawing, size K
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
12.96
3
Connection
Connection
WARNING
The units are operated at high voltages.
Only carry out connection work after disconnecting the voltage!
All work on the unit must only be carried out by qualified persons.
Non-observance of warning notices can result in death, severe personal injury or
considerable property damage.
Damage or destruction can result if the unit is incorrectly connected.
As the result of the dc link capacitors in the connected SIMOVERT Master Drives, the unit
still contains a hazardous voltage up to 5 min. after isolation. This is why it is only permitted
to open the unit after observing an appropriate waiting time.
The power terminals and control terminals may carry a voltage even when the motor is at
standstill.
When working on the open unit, pay attention to the fact that live parts are exposed. The
unit may only be operated with the front covers attached.
The user is responsible for ensuring that the common rectifier, converter, motor and other
units are installed and connected in accordance with the technical regulations recognized in
the country of installation and other regionally valid regulations. In doing so, particular
attention must be paid to cable dimensioning, fusing, earthing, deactivation, isolation and
overcurrent protection.
CAUTION
The power cables must be fixed in position mechanically outside the unit.
NOTES
An external 24 V power supply is required for operation of the units (see Chapters 3.5 and 9.3).
Operational range of the unit: 20 V to 30 V.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
3-1
Connection
3.1
12.96
Power connections
DC-link 1)
(DC output)
DC-link 1)
(DC output)
C/L+ D/LC/L+
D/L-
PE1
Mains 1)
U1/L1
V1/L2
W1/L3
U1/L1
PE1
V1/L2
Mains fan
X19
W1/L3
Mains 1)
PE2
Mains fan
X19
X9
PE2
X9
Figure 3.1 Mains connection size H
Figure 3.2 Mains connection size K
1) Due to the press-in nuts, cable lugs or DC rails can only be connected to the terminal rails from the front.
WARNING
The operating coils of contactors and relays that are connected to the same supply network
as the unit or that are located in close proximity of the unit must be connected to overvoltage limiters, e.g. RC circuits.
An RCCB (residual-current-operated circuit-breaker) must not be used to protect the
rectifier/regenerating unit (DIN VDE 0160).
Voltage is only permitted to be applied to the unit when SIMOVERT Master Drives are
connected. Operation without a connected DC link capacitor is not permitted!
If the DC link terminals are connected incorrectly or short-circuited, the SIMOVERT Master
Drives inverter will be destroyed!
In order to prevent feedback of interference to the power supply system, limit harmonics
and reduce the current ripple, the total inductance of the power system incoming feeder
connection (power system inductance including commutating reactor) a total relative shortcircuit voltage uk of at least 3% .
Connect the fan power supply to X19.
The fan continues to run for about four minutes or until a certain cooling element
temperature threshold is undershot (provided its power supply is connected) after the unit
has been switched off, following fault messages, on canceling the enable signal and after
isolating the system supply connection.
Despite switching the voltage off at the power terminals, a voltage may still exist on
terminal X19 due to the external fan supply.
3-2
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
12.96
Connection
NOTES
Commutating reactors: Selection of the power system commutating reactors with uk = 2% should be based
on Table 3.4 and Catalog DA93.1.
Fuses: Refer to Table 3.3. for fuse order numbers.
Output reactors in the DC circuit are not permitted (even with the parallel connection of power sections or in
12-pulse mode), because the DC link voltage is measured at the unit output terminals.
Function
Terminal
Connected load / Description
Incoming supply terminals
X1-U1/L1
X1-V1/L2
X1-W1/L3
See Technical Data
Chapter 14
Protective conductor
PE/GND
Power terminals
DC link voltage
(inverter)
X1-C/L+
X1-D/L-
See Technical Data
Chapter 14
Fan terminals
X19-1
X19-2
Supply connection for fan
230V AC ±10%, 50 to 60 Hz ±5%
Size H
Current consumption: at 50 Hz: 2.6 A, at 60 Hz: 3.3 A
Size K
Current consumption: at 50 Hz: 5.2 A, at 60 Hz: 6.6 A
Table 3.1
Power connections
Terminal X19 fused with fuse (F3 and F4):
T2A/250V time-lag 6.3x32 mm (¼“ x 1¼“)
(19343-T7A/250V Messrs. Wickmann-Werke GmbH or 0034.5243 FST Messrs. Schurter)
WARNING
Where the unit is operated in conjunction with a power system, one phase of which is
earthed and not the starpoint, the plant management must ensure that power supply to
the fan circuit (terminals X19-1, X19-2) and to the main contactor circuit (terminal X9-4,
X9-5) is taken from this phase and the starpoint.
Where this cannot be ensured, the power supply to the fan circuit and to the main
contactor circuit must be taken via an isolating transformer.
In addition, the power supply to terminals X19-1, X19-2, X9-4, X9-5 must be taken via an
isolating transformer, when:
the connection to ground - electronic ground is interrupted (refer to Chapter 3.3.3
"Connection terminals on CUR card"),
the power supply unit is operated in conjunction with a non-grounded power supply
system.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
3-3
Connection
12.96
The units are designed for permanent connection to the system in keeping with DIN VDE 0160 Section 6.5.2.1.
Protective conductor connection: Min. cross-sectional area 10 mm2.
The conductor cross-sectional areas listed in Table 3.2 are maximum connectable cross-sections. The data is
given for multicore cable. The cross-sections actually connected must be determined in accordance with the
applicable regulations - e.g. DIN VDE 100 Part 523, DIN VDE 0276 Part 1000.
Unit Order No.
Rated
input
Mains
DC link
Protective conductor
Conductor
U1/L1, V1/L2,W1/L3
Conductor
C/L+, D/L-
Conductor
PE
voltage
current
max.
max.
max.
max.
(V)
(A)
mm2 1)
AWG 2)
mm2 1)
AWG 2)
mm2 1)
AWG 2)
38-2EH85-0AA0
380 to 460
710
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
K 4x300
S 60x10
4x600
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
41-0EH85-0AA0
380 to 460
888
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
K 4x300
S 60x10
4x600
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
41-3EK85-0AA0
380 to 460
1156
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
K 6x300
S 100x10
6x600
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
41-8EK85-0AA0
380 to 460
1542
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
K 6x300
S 100x10
6x600
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
37-7FH85-0AA0
500 to 575
671
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
K 4x300
S 60x10
4x600
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
41-0FH85-0AA0
500 to 575
888
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
K 4x300
S 60x10
4x600
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
41-3FK85-0AA0
500 to 575
1119
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
K 6x300
S 100x10
6x600
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
41-5FK85-0AA0
500 to 575
1306
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
K 6x300
S 100x10
6x600
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
41-8FK85-0AA0
500 to 575
1633
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
K 6x300
S 100x10
6x600
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
37-7HH85-0AA0
660 to 690
671
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
K 4x300
S 60x10
4x600
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
41-0HH85-0AA0
660 to 690
888
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
K 4x300
S 60x10
4x600
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
41-3HK85-0AA0
660 to 690
1119
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
K 6x300
S 100x10
6x600
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
41-5HK85-0AA0
660 to 690
1306
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
K 6x300
S 100x10
6x600
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
41-8HK85-0AA0
660 to 690
1633
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
K 6x300
S 100x10
6x600
K 4x300
S 100x10
4x600
6SE70
Table 3.2
Connection cross-sections
1) C=Cable, R=Rail
2) American Wire Gauge
3-4
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
12.96
Connection
Unit
Built-in branch fuses F11 to F16
Order No.
6SE70
Siemens SITOR
A
Type
Bussmann
US standard
A
Type
38-2EH85-0AA0
630
3NE3336
700
170M4717
41-0EH85-0AA0
800
3NE3338-8
900
170M5715
37-7FH85-0AA0
560
3NE3335
630
170M5696
41-0FH85-0AA0
800
3NE3338-8
900
170M5699
37-7HH85-0AA0
560
3NE3335
630
170M5696
41-0HH85-0AA0
800
3NE3338-8
900
170M5699
Built-in branch fuses F111 bis F162
41-3EK85-0AA0
630
3NE3336
41-8EK85-0AA0
800
3NE3338-8
41-3FK85-0AA0
560
3NE3335
630
170M5696
41-5FK85-0AA0
710
3NE3337-8
630
170M5696
41-8FK85-0AA0
800
3NE3338-8
800
170M5698
41-3HK85-0AA0
560
3NE3335
630
170M5696
41-5HK85-0AA0
710
3NE3337-8
630
170M5696
41-8HK85-0AA0
800
3NE3338-8
800
170M5698
Table 3.3
Built-in branch fuses
Semiconductor protection only, lines are not reliably protected. Discriminative line protection is assured only by
correlating the line protection fuses to the installed conductor cross-section in accordance with the applicable
regulations - e.g. DIN VDE 0100 Teil 430.
Unit Order No.
Rated input
Commutating reactor 2%
Type
voltage
curr.
(V)
(A)
38-2EH85-0AA0
380 bis 460
710
41-0EH85-0AA0
380 bis 460
41-3EK85-0AA0
6SE70
Voltage / Frequency
Rated
current
(V / Hz)
(V / Hz)
(A)
4EU3651-8UA00
400/50
460/60
720
888
4EU3651-0UB00
400/50
460/60
910
380 bis 460
1156
4EU3651-1UB00
400/50
460/60
1120
41-8EK85-0AA0
380 bis 460
1542
4EU3951-2UB00
400/50
460/60
1600
37-7FH85-0AA0
500 bis 575
671
4EU3651-3UA00
500/50
710
41-0FH85-0AA0
500 bis 575
888
4EU3651-4UA00
500/50
910
41-3FK85-0AA0
500 bis 575
1119
4EU3951-2UA00
500/50
1120
41-5FK85-0AA0
500 bis 575
1306
4EU3951-3UA00
500/50
1250
41-8FK85-0AA0
500 bis 575
1633
4EU4351-2UA00
500/50
1600
37-7HH85-0AA0
660 bis 690
671
4EU3651-7UA00
690/50
710
41-0HH85-0AA0
660 bis 690
888
4EU3951-0UA00
690/50
910
41-3HK85-0AA0
660 bis 690
1119
4EU3951-5UA00
690/50
1120
41-5HK85-0AA0
660 bis 690
1306
4EU4351-0UA00
690/50
1400
41-8HK85-0AA0
660 bis 690
1633
4EU4551-0UA00
690/50
1600
Table 3.4
Recommended commutating reactor
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
3-5
Connection
3.1.1
12.96
Short-circuit withstand capability
In the event of a line-side short-circuit in front of the super-fast built-in fuses, the power fed in from the supply
depends on the protective devices provided on the system-side (NH fuses or circuit-breakers).
To ensure that the forces and temperatures that result from short-circuits of this type can be kept within
acceptable limits for the units, the following values calculated in accordance with DIN VDE 0660 Part 500 must
be complied with by the supply and by the fuses or circuit-breakers connected before the unit.
Size H:
Rated short-time withstand current: Icw = 27.86 kA / 1s or Icw = 88.1 kA / 0,1s
Rated surge withstand current:
Ipk =85 kA
The power rails must be mechanically buffered to absorb the short-circuit forces directly in front of their entry
point into the unit.
Size K:
Rated short-time withstand current: Icw = 69,86 kA / 1s or Icw = 220 kA / 0,1s
Rated surge withstand current:
Ipk =85 kA
The power rails must be mechanically buffered to absorb the short-circuit forces directly in front of their entry
point into the unit.
3.2
Power supply and main contactor
WARNING
Where the unit is operated in conjunction with a power system, one phase of which is
earthed and not the starpoint, the plant management must ensure that power supply to
the fan circuit (terminals X19-1, X19-2) and to the main contactor circuit (terminal X9-4,
X9-5) is taken from this phase and the starpoint.
Where this cannot be ensured, the power supply to the fan circuit and to the main
contactor circuit must be taken via an isolating transformer.
In addition, the power supply to terminals X19-1, X19-2, X9-4, X9-5 must be taken via an
isolating transformer, when:
the connection to ground - electronic ground is interrupted (refer to Chapter 3.3.3
"Connection terminals on CUR card"),
the power supply unit is operated in conjunction with a non-grounded power supply
system.
NOTE
The main contactor’s operating coil must be protected, for example, by RC elements (Chapter 9).
3-6
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
12.96
Connection
The power supply and main contactor control circuit are connected through five-pin connector X9 (at the bottomleft of the unit).
Single-core cables with conductor cross-sections of 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG: 24
to 14) can be connected to X9 (finely stranded 1.5 mm2 with core end ferrules).
PS
24V DC
M
P
The main contactor is driven over isolated contacts X9.4 and X9.5.
Technical specifications of main contact control circuit: 230V
max. 5A at p.f.0.4; max. making capacity 3000VA;
with switching voltage of 30 V DC, max 8A DC
X9
Main contactor
control
1
2
3
4
5
230V AC
Figure 3.3 24 V DC and main
contactor control
connections
Terminal
X9-1
Function description
DC +24V (tolerance range 20V - 30V) max. current consumption 2A at +24V
max. current consumption without options:
1A for basic unit (master)
0.3A for parallel unit (slave)
X9-2
Reference potential for DC X9-1
X9-3
not connected (N.C.)
X9-4
Main contactor control circuit
X9-5
Main contactor control circuit
Table 3.5
Connector X9 pin assignments for auxiliary power supply and main contactor control
Terminal X9.1 fused with fuse (F1) T2A/250V time-lag 5x20mm
(19198-T2A/250V Messrs. Wickmann-Werke GmbH or 0034.3993 FSD Messrs. Schurter)
and for parallel unit via connector x27 (for size K):
fused with fuse (F5) T2A/250V time-lag 5x20mm
(19198-T2A/250V Messrs. Wickmann-Werke GmbH or 0034.3993 FSD Messrs. Schurter)
Terminal X9.2 fused with fuse (F2) T7A/250V time-lag 6.3x32mm (¼“ x 1¼“)
(19343-T7A/250V Messrs. Wickmann-Werke GmbH and/or 0034.5243 FST Messrs. Schurter)
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
3-7
Connection
3.3
12.96
Control terminal block and serial interface
WARNING
The common rectifier must be isolated before connecting the control leads to the CUR
You can control the common rectifier over the following interfaces:
Control terminal block on the CUR electronic module
RS 485 serial interface on the CUR electronic module
Operator panel OP 1 (see Chapter 9 Options)
RS485 and RS232 serial interface on the PMU X300
CAUTION
The CUR incorporates ESD-endangered components that may be destroyed if improperly
handled. See also under the measures recommended to protect ESD-endangered
components in the introductory chapter entitled "General".
3.3.1
Connectors for the control terminal block
Conductors with cross-sectional areas of 0.14 to 1.5 mm2 (AWG: 26 to 16), or 1 mm2 (AWG: 18), finely stranded
with core end ferrules, can be connected to the connectors (Recommended: 0.5 mm2 (AWG: 20)).
3.3.2
Connecting the control leads
NOTE
When installed, control leads must be shielded and isolated from the power cables, laying them at a minimum
spacing of 20 cm. The shield must be connected at both ends. On the unit's housing, the shield is connected
with shield clamps. Handling of these clamps is shown in Figure 3.4.
If they intersect, control and power cables must be run at an angle of 90° to each other.
3-8
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
12.96
Connection
Fitting the shielding clamp
15 mm
7.5 mm
5 mm
Connector
Slide on shield and
secure with
shrink-on tubing, for
example
Adapt length
to design
Do not bend
spring over
Releasing the shielding clamp
35
Shield
Manually or using a screwdriver,
press the clamp together and extrac
it in the upward direction.
Caution!
The clamps are sharp-edged!
Figure 3.4 Connecting the control leads and handling the shielding clamps
3.3.3
R135
Terminals and setting elements on the CUR (A10) module
A10
CUR
PMU
X100
S1
S2
X101
X102
R136
X104
Figure 3.5 Control terminals and setting elements on the CUR
Setting elements:
DIP switches S1, S2: Both open: No bus termination for the RS485 interface (terminals X100-1 to X100-4)
Both closed: Bus termination for the RS485 interface active (1500 between
RS485P and RS485N, 3900 from RS485P to +5V supply, 390
from RS485N to earth)
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
3-9
Connection
12.96
R135 and R136:
0 resistances as earth-frame (M) connection
M is connected to earth when the unit is supplied. Remove these resistances only to
avoid faults due to earth loops, i.e. if the electronics frame is connected in some other
way to earth (e.g. through signal leads or the frame terminal of the power supply unit).
If option modules are used, a further earth-frame (M) connection may have to be
removed. (please refer to the description of these modules).
Electronics terminals:
Function
Terminal
Connected loads/Description
Serial interface
RS485 (Bus)
X100-1
X100-2
X100-3
X100-4
X100-5
RS485P
Plus line
Send and receiveRS485N
Minus line
line
RS485P
Plus line
(difference input/output)
RS485N
Minus line
Signal frame
For functions see Section 4.3.6.1
Binary inputs
X101-6
P24S +24V power supply for external
contacts, max. load 100mA
Frame for binary signals
Frame for binary signals
Binary input 1
Binary input 2
Binary input 3
Binary input 4
Binary input 5
X101-7
X101-8
X101-9
X101-10
X101-11
X101-12
X101-13
Low level: -0.6V - 3V or floating terminals
High level: 13V - 33V
Input current at 24V: ca. 10mA
For functions see Section 4.3.2
Analog outputs
X102-14
X102-15
X102-16
Analog output resolution 8 bits,
For functions see Section 4.3.5
Frame for analog outputs
Actual current value: 0V - 5V corresponds to
0A - rated DC current
Display range: 0 - 10V, max. 5mA load, current limited
Binary outputs
X104-17
X104-18
Binary output 1, pin 1
Binary output 1, pin 2
X104-19
X104-20
Binary output 2, pin 1
Binary output 2, pin 2
The binary outputs are normally-open relay contacts
At 50V AC max. switching voltage, the following applies:
Max. switching current 1A~ at p.f. =1
Max. switching current 0.12A AC at p.f. = 0.4
At max. 30V DC switching voltage, the following
applies::
Max. switching current 0.8A (resistive loads)
For functions see Section 4.3.3 and 4.3.1.2 (status
word)
Table 3.6
Control terminal block
3-10 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
12.96
Connection
3.3.4
Connecting-up the parameterizing unit (PMU)
A serial connection to automation unit or a PC can be realized via connector
X300 on the PMU. Thus, the rectifier/regenerating unit can be controlled and
operated from the central control station or control room.
X300
P
5
4
9
3
8
2
7
1
6
Figure 3.6 Parameterizing unit (PMU)
PMU -X300 Description
1
Housing ground
2
Receive line, RS232 standard (V.24)
3
Transmit- and receive line, RS485, two-wire, positive differential input/output
4
RTS (Request to send; for direction reversal in the case of interface converters
5
Ref. potential (ground)
6
5 V power supply for OP
7
Transmit line, RS232 standard (V.24)
8
Transmit- and receive line RS485, two-wire, negative differential input/output
9
Ref. potential for RS232 or RS485 interface
Table 3.7
Connector pin assignment for interface X300
3.4
Measures for keeping to RFI suppression regulations
The following points must be observed in order to comply with the radio-frequency interference suppression
requirements:
Grounding
Radio frequency interference results from operation of the converters. Such interference voltages should be
returned to the source by means of low-resistance connections (cross-section of the ground connection cross-section of the power supply system connection).
On installation of the power supply unit and of any optional RFI filters use should be made of the best
available method of grounding (e.g. mounting plate, earthing wire, earthing bus). Connect all conductive
housings together so as to make contact over a large area.
Not only the cross-section (governed also by the safety regulations which should be observed to obviate the
effects of a fault) but also the contact surfaces are of vital importance for RFI suppression, since high
frequency interference currents do not flow through the entire cross-section but mainly on the outer surface of
the conductor.
Shielding
The following measures are required in order to attenuate interference and to meet the RFI suppression
requirements
use of shielded cable between the output of the converter and the motor and
use of shielded control cables.
The shield must be connected to earth potential at both ends.
Filters
The RFI suppression filters must be connected directly before the power supply unit. The housings must be
interconnected by means of an electrically conductive connection.
Type A1 RFI suppression filters are recommended for compliance with the RFI suppresssion requirements.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
3-11
Figure 3.7
3-12 ENGLISH
RS485
5
4
3
2
1
M
R16
M
TTL
RS485
A2
C98043-A1690
X117
N
P
N
P
R15
P5
RS485
Option modules
PMU
X308
X300
5
4
3
2
1
X107
X116
X115
M
X100
X101
7
M
10nF
R136
R135
820k
10nF
S2
S1
P5
150 Ω
RS485N
390 Ω
RS485P
X109
M
Iact
14 15 16
A01
17 18 19 20
binary selecting outputs
X104
BO
Microprocessor selection:
Open and closed-loop
control of the DC link
voltage
BI
9 10 11 12 13
analog outputs
X102
M
390 Ω
8
P24 M M
6
A10
C98043-A1680
X108
RS485 ê OP1, SIMOVIS
RS232 ê SIMOVIS
F2
Power supply
F1
X9-3
X9-3
X239
X9-4
X9-4
K1-2
X9-5
X9-5
X27
A23
C98043-A1685
+5V +15V -15V +24V
F5
X9-2
X9-2
X9-1
X9-1
-
+
24V-power
supply unit
RESET
F4
1AC 230V
X19-1 X19-2
X19-1 X19-2
F3
Voltage
measurement
Fuse
monitoring
Load
X29.2
X29.1
X29.3
X30-2
X30-1
X21.2
12
3
X1: C/L+
R100
ϑ
PE
Filter
(optional)
X20.2
E1
X20.1
M
1~
X1: U1 V1 W1
L1 L2 L3
K1
X1: D/L-
3.5
L_DSAVE
binary selecting inputs
3AC 50-60Hz, 400V
3AC 50-60Hz, 500V
3AC 50-60Hz, 690V
1AC 50-60Hz, 230V
Connection
12.96
Single-line diagrams with suggested circuit arrangements
Single-line diagram with suggested circuit arrangement, Size H
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
RS485
5
4
3
2
1
M
R16
M
TTL
RS485
A2
C98043-A1690
X117
N
P
N
P
R15
P5
RS485
Option modules
PMU
X308
X300
5
4
3
2
1
X107
X116
X115
M
X100
X101
7
M
10nF
R136
R135
820k
10nF
S2
S1
P5
150 Ω
RS485N
390 Ω
RS485P
X109
M
Iist
14 15 16
A01
17 18 19 20
binary selecting outputs
X104
BO
Microprocessor selection:
Open and closed-loop
control of the DC link
voltage
BI
9 10 11 12 13
analog outputs
X102
M
390 Ω
8
P24 M M
6
A10
C98043-A1680
X108
RS485 ê OP1, SIMOVIS
RS232 ê SIMOVIS
F2
Power supply
F1
X9-3
X9-3
X239
X9-4
X9-4
K1-2
X9-5
X9-5
Connections for
parallel unit
X27
A23
C98043-A1685
+5V +15V -15V +24V
F5
X9-2
X9-2
X9-1
X9-1
-
+
24V-power
supply unit
RESET
Figure 3.8
L_DSAVE
binary selecting inputs
3AC 50-60Hz, 400V
3AC 50-60Hz, 500V
3AC 50-60Hz, 690V
1AC 50-60Hz, 230V
F4
1AC 230V
X19-1 X19-2
X19-1 X19-2
F3
Voltage
measurement
Fuse
monitoring
Load
X29.2
X29.1
X29.3
X30-2
X30-1
X21.2
12
3
X1: C/L+
R100
ϑ
E2
PE
Filter
(optional)
X20.2
M
1~
X20.1
E1
X1: U1 V1 W1
L1 L2 L3
K1
M
1~
X1: D/L-
12.96
Connection
Single-line diagram with suggested circuit arrangement, Size K
ENGLISH
3-13
230V~
Main contactor
24V-power
supply unit
A10-X109
(C98043-A1680)
Termal sensor
on the heatsink
X19-1
X19-2
X9-5
X9-4
X9-3
X9-2
X9-1
X27
X239
X31-1
X31-2
ϑ
R100
F3
T7A
F4
T7A
K1-2
F2
T7A
F1
T2A
F5
T2A
X29-2
-
+
K101-2
A23
C98043-A1685
N.C.
X20-1
X29-1
X20-2
X29-3
XW15
XW15PAR
X22-1
X22-2
X15-1
X15-2
XV13
XV13PAR
X26-1
X26-2
X13-1
X13-2
XU11
XU11PAR
X24-1
X24-2
X11-1
X11-2
K
K
K
G11
V11
G13
V13
G15
V15
C15 R15
K15
C13 R13
K13
C11 R11
K11
A
A
A
F11
L
T1
K
F14
l
k
F13
F16
F15
L
T2
K
K
K
K
K12
K16
K14
F12
l
k
W1/L3
V14
V16
V12
R12 C12
G12
R16 C16
G16
R14 C14
G14
C/L+
A
A
A
D/L-
A23
C98043-A1685
X21-2
X12-2
X12-1
X16-2
X16-1
X14-2
X14-1
X47-3
X47-2
X47-1
X47-4
R75
M
1~
V1/L2
R77
R76
X1: U1/L1
R79
R78
3-14 ENGLISH
R80
Figure 3.9
Load 1
3.6
Load 2
E1
PE
Connection
12.96
Power sections
Power section, Size H
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ϑ
R100
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
230V~
Main contactor
24V-power
supply unit
Connections for
parallel unit
X19-1
X19-2
X9-5
X9-4
X9-3
X9-2
X9-1
X27
X239
X31-1
X31-2
F3
T7A
F4
T7A
K1-2
X29-2
-
+
X20-2
X29-3
K101-2
XW15
XW15PAR
X22-1
X22-2
X15-1
X15-2
XV13
XV13PAR
X26-1
X26-2
X13-1
X13-2
XU11
XU11PAR
X24-1
X24-2
X11-1
X11-2
K
K
K
G11
G13
V13
G15
V15
C15 R15
K15
C13 R13
K13
F112
V11
C11 R11
K11
L
T1
A
A
A
F111
l
k
F142
K
L
T2
K
F151
M
1~
l
k
K
K
K
K12
K16
K14
V14
V16
V12
R12 C12
G12
R16 C16
G16
R14 C14
G14
A
A
A
D/L-
A23
C98043-A1685
X21-2
X12-2
X12-1
X16-2
X16-1
X14-2
X14-1
X47-2
X47-3
X47-1
X47-4
R75
R76
E1
C/L+
R77
R78
W1/L3
F122
X20-1
X29-1
A23
C98043-A1685
N.C.
F2
T7A
F1
T2A
F5
T2A
M
1~
V1/L2
R79
R80
X1: U1/L1
Load 1
Load 2
Figure 3.10
A10-X109
(C98043-A1680)
Termal sensor
on the heatsink
E2
PE
12.96
Connection
Power section, Size K
ENGLISH
3-15
F121
F152
F162
F161
F131
F132
F141
Connection
12.96
V11
V13
V15
Level B (rear level)
V14
V16
V12
Level A (front level)
Figure 3.11
Arrangement of the thyristor blocks, Size H (see dimension drawing in Section 2.4)
Level A
Level B
V11
V14
V13
V15
Figure 3.12
V16
V12
Arrangement of the thyristor blocks, view from right-hand side of unit,Size K (see dimension drawing in Section 2.4)
3-16 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
12.96
Connection
3.7
Parallel connection of parallel unit(s), size K
The output current can be increased by connecting up to 2 "parallel" units of identical rated current in parallel
with the power section of a common rectifier of size K (basic unit).
The following table shows for each basic unit order number, the order number for the corresponding parallel unit
that can be connected in parallel.
Order No. for basic unit
Order No. for parallel unit for
connecting in parallel
6SE7041-3EK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3EK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8EK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8EK85-0AD0
6SE7041-3FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-5FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-3HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3HK85-0AD0
6SE7041-5HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5HK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8HK85-0AD0
Table 3.8
Corresponding basic and parallel units
The parallel units have the same technical data as the corresponding basic units.
The parallel units do not include a CUR electronic module and are fitted with a C98043-A1695 (A23) Power
Interface module instead of a C98043-A1685 (A23) Power Interface module.
The parallel units do not require a separate external 24 V power supply.
A 50-core cable is used to transfer firing pulse signals and monitoring signals. It also carries the power supply for
the parallel units.
Parallel connection to a basic unit:
The female terminal strip X27 on module A23 of the basic unit is connected to the male terminal strip X28 on
module A23 of the parallel unit via a 50-core cable.
Parallel connection of a second parallel unit:
The female terminal strip X27 on module A23 of the first parallel unit is connected to the male terminal strip X28
on module A23 of the second parallel unit via a 50-core cable.
Example for equipment installation for units connected in parallel:
Parallel unit
Parallel unit
Secure cable, whose insulation has
been stripped over a length of 30mm,
by means of a shield clamp.
A23
C98043A1695
A23
C98043A1695
X27
X27
X28
Figure 3.13
Basic unit
Secure cable, whose insulation has
been stripped over a length of 30mm,
by means of a shield clamp.
A23
C98043A1685
X27
X28
Connection of firing pulse signals and monitoring signals for the parallel units
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
3-17
Connection
12.96
NOTES
The permissible output current for a parallel arrangement is reduced (due to the current division between the
power sections) by 10% as compared with the sum of the rated currents of the separate power sections.
The following is required to ensure even current distribution between the basic unit and parallel unit(s).
Use of identical power components (see above table for the corresponding parallel units and basic unit)
Identical phases for the power section connections of the common rectifiers between the basic units and
parallel unit(s)
Commutating reactors specific for each basic and parallel unit with identical technical data. Each separate
parallel path must have a minimum uk value of 2%!
Basic unit
X27
X28
Mains
DC link
Parallel unit (1)
X27
X28
Parallel unit 2
Identical fuses for basic unit and parallel unit(s)
Identical cable lengths leading to the power section connections of the basic and parallel units
Output reactors in the DC circuit are not permitted.
WARNING
Fault-free operation can only be guaranteed if the phases at the power section
terminals (U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3, C/L+ and D/L-) between the basic unit and
parallel unit(s) are identical.
Non-compliance with this condition may result in destruction of the power
sections of the basic and parallel units.
The maximum permissible total cable length between the basic unit and parallel unit 1 or parallel unit 2 (if
present) is 15 m.
A 50 pole shielded round cable is included in the scope of supply of a parallel unit
(spare parts order No.: 6SY7010-8AA00).
Order No. for one cable "10 m round, screened": 6QX5368 (other lengths on request):
On connecting this round, 50-core cable with a diameter of 14 mm, its screen has to be laid bare by cutting away
the insulation and it must be connected to earth on both devices. With regard to the immunity to interference of
the system, it is recommended that the cable be installed in a separately earthed shielded cable duct.
The cable length within the unit from the connector on the A23 module (X27 or X28) to the top edge of the unit
on the rear panel (cabinet wall) is 1m to the left and 1.8 m to the right. This includes the spare length required for
removing the A23 module with its carrier board for service purposes.
3-18 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
12.96
Connection
WARNING
When the A23 module of a parallel unit is removed for servicing, the terminals of
the current transformers are open. The parallel unit must not be operated,
otherwise the current transformers of the parallel unit can be damaged by
currents from the snubber RC network.
Non-compliance may result in the destruction of the current transformer of a
parallel unit.
Parameterization:
Parameter P076 (configuration of the power section)
P076 = 1x...... 1 parallel unit is connected in parallel with the basic unit
P076 = 2x...... 2 parallel units are connected in parallel with the basic unit
NOTES
With the parameterization P076=0x, a connected parallel unit still receives firing pulses and carries current, it is
only the monitoring for current asymmetry (over-current or under-current in the parallel power section as
compared to the current in the basic unit, -F034) that is not active.
The results of the thyristor test (selected via P353) are only conditionally applicable when units are connected
in parallel.
Start-up:
The start-up procedure is exactly the same as in the case of a single basic unit. The final cabling (parallel
connection of the power sections and coupling via the 50-core ribbon cable) must however already exist
because the parallel units also carry current during circuit identification.
Note:
In the case of 1 or 2 parallel units connected in parallel, the value of parameter P144 (DC link
capacitance) only represents a half or 1/3 of the actual DC link capacitance because parameter
P075 for the basic unit contains the rated current for a single power section.
LED display on the A23 power interface module (C98043-A1695) of a parallel unit:
Green LED (H11) lit:
The power supply on this parallel unit is operating.
Yellow LED (H12) lit:
On this parallel unit, the highest temperature of any power section connected in
parallel has been measured (this does not necessarily mean over-temperature). If the
yellow H12 LED is not lit on any of the parallel units, the highest temperature is
currently measured at the power section of the basic unit.
Red LED (H13) lit:
A fuse has fused on this parallel unit.
NOTE
On parallel connection the rating of the relay contact K1-2 (connection X9-4, X9-5) should be taken into
account (refer to Chapter 3.2).
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
3-19
3-20 ENGLISH
Power section, parallel unit
X1: C/L+
Filter
(optional)
12
3
X27
X28
X9-4
X9-3
X9-2
X9-2
X9-1
X9-1
X239
X19-1 X19-2
Voltage
measurement
Fuse
monitoring
Load
K1-2
X9-5
X9-5
12
3
X1: C/L+
K1
PE
K2
ϑ
X1: U1 V1 W1
L1 L2 L3
Filter
(optional)
1AC 230V
X19-2 X19-1
to electronics module
A10-X109
1AC 230V
X19-1 X19-2
Fan unit
X27
X9-4
X9-3
-
+
Fan unit
X19-2 X19-1
Sicherungsüberwachung
Load
Connections for
second parallel unit
Termistor
X1: D/L-
K3
24V power
supply unit
Termistor
ϑ
PE X1: U1 V1 W1
L1 L2 L3
Parallel unit
X1: D/L-
DC 510V - 620V
DC 675V - 780V
DC 890V - 930V
Basic unit
Power section, basic unit
Figure 3.14
A23
C98043-A1695
3.7.1
A23
C98043-A1685
3AC 50-60Hz, 400V
3AC 50-60Hz, 500V
3AC 50-60Hz, 690V
1AC 50-60Hz, 230V
Connection
12.96
Single-line diagram with suggested circuit arrangement for parallel connection
Single-line diagram with suggested circuit for parallel connection, size K
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
12.96
Connection
3.8
12-pulse mode (only possible with the optional RS485 interface)
3.8.1
General information on 12-pulse mode, application
12-pole operation is possible only with equipment software version 3.0 and higher.
12-pulse mode is implemented to reduce the harmonic loading on the mains supply.
Two 6SE70 units (common rectifiers) are connected in parallel on the output side and supplied on the line side
with two 3-phase AC supplies, galvanically isolated and with a phase offset of 30 degrees. One unit, the "12pulse master", controls the DC link voltage and provides the setpoint current for the other unit, the "12-pulse
slave".
Note: A unit described here as a "slave" is a completely normal common rectifier with a CUR electronic module
and is only transformed into a "12-pulse slave" by the appropriate parameterization. The term "12-pulse slave"
must not be confused with a "parallel unit" for the connection of power sections in parallel because the latter
does not contain a CUR electronic module and has a different order No. (see Section 3.7).
The two 3-phase galvanically isolated AC supplies with a phase offset of 30 degrees are usually generated using
a transformer with 2 different secondary systems (e.g. Y y6 d5, i.e. primary winding: star, secondary winding 1:
star, secondary winding 2: delta). A transformer of this type will be referred to below as a "12-pulse transformer".
To implement 12-pulse mode, the two common rectifiers must be coupled via a fast serial link. The SST2 serial
interface for the basic unit is used for this purpose which is however only available as an RS485 interface once
the optional A2 submodule (C98043-A1690) has been plugged into the A10 CUR electronic module (C98043A1680). See Sections 9.6 and 3.8.7).
The transmission protocol used for SST2 is the "Peer-to-Peer" protocol.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
3-21
Connection
12.96
3.8.2
Hardware requirements, configuration of the power sections
The sub-currents of the 3-phase AC supplies are decoupled on the line side (line side with respect to the unit
terminals) through inductances (due to the secondary leakage inductance of the 12-pulse transformer,
commutating reactors).
Note: A 12-pulse transformer alone is not always sufficient for decoupling because the two secondary windings
of the transformer are magnetically coupled. When the "12-pulse master" and the "12-pulse slave" are directly
supplied from a "high-power" 12-pulse transformer (i.e. without the intermediate connection of commutating
reactors), the DC link currents (in non-pulsating operation) each comprise 30 degree current blocks because at
intervals of 30 degrees, a commutating process takes place from secondary winding 1 to secondary winding 2 or
vice-versa. Additional commutating reactors can only be dispensed with when a 12-pulse transformer is used
that has a sufficiently large secondary leakage inductance (or sufficiently large uk value between secondary
winding 1 and secondary winding 2).
The following points must be complied with:
Supply of the power sections of the 12-pulse master and the 12-pulse slave from galvanically isolated 3phase AC systems
Decoupled supplies - i.e. commutating reactors after the 12-pulse transformer, or 12-pulse transformer with
sufficiently large secondary leakage inductances (or sufficiently large uk value between secondary winding 1
and secondary winding 2).
Identical inductances in the 12-pulse master and 12-pulse slave power section branches.
Identical voltage levels at the 12-pulse master and 12-pulse slave, otherwise with a control angle of 0
degrees, this will cause unequal current division (with a control angle of 0 degrees, closed-loop control is not
possible - the unit with the higher voltage level carries more current).
With Ud reduction, current asymmetry (as a result of a control angle of 0 degrees and differing voltage levels)
can be prevented or considerably reduced.
An output reactor must not be used in the DC link.
Recommended power section configurations:
Note: It is of no consequence whether the "12-pulse master" or "12-pulse slave" is supplied by the delta winding
of the 12-pulse transformer. It is only important that a phase offset of 30 degrees is present between the two
galvanically isolated supplies. In contrast to the following configuration examples, the "12-pulse master" and "12pulse slave" can also be exchanged with respect to their connection to the "12-pulse transformer".
a) Power section incoming feeder for two power supply units
Refer to the notes in Chapter 3.1 for details of the decoupling (commutating) reactors between the 12-pole
transformer outputs and the incoming supply rectifier bridge.
"12-pulse transformer"
Reactor
12-pulse master
X117
Mains
DC link
X117
Reactor
12-pulse slave
Figure 3.15
3-22 ENGLISH
Power section incoming feeder for two power supply units
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
12.96
Connection
b) Example of a configuration for 12-pulse mode and parallel connection of units of size K to obtain the
maximum output current
With the following power section arrangement 2 equipment groups of type of construction K operate in 12pole operation, in order to achieve the maximum possible output current. The first equipment group
comprises a basic unit configured to act as the "12-pole master“, with which 2 parallel units (containing no
CUR electronic card, refer to Chapter 3.7) are connected in parallel. The second equipment group comprises
a basic unit configured to act as the "12-pole slave“, with which likewise 2 parallel units are connected in
parallel.
Reactor
Basic unit
(12-pulse master)
X117
X27
X28
Reactor
Parallel unit
X27
X28
"12-pulse transformer"
Reactor
Parallel unit
Mains
DC link
Reactor
Basic unit
(12-pulse slave)
X117
X27
X28
Reactor
Parallel unit
X27
X28
Reactor
Parallel unit
Figure 3.16
3.8.3
Example of a configuration for 12-pulse mode and parallel connection of units of size K to obtain the maximum output
current
Parameterization for 12-pulse mode
In this application, two 6SE70 units (common rectifiers) are coupled via the SST2 serial interface (optional
RS485 interface PTP1) using "Peer-to-Peer" protocol. One unit is parameterized as a 12-pulse master and one
is parameterized as a 12-pulse slave.
Selection of the basic or reserve setting (index i001 or i002) of the appropriate "Source selection parameter“
(P554, P555, ...) is described in Section 4.1.2.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
3-23
Connection
12.96
"12-pulse master"-6SE70 unit
"12 pulse slave"-6SE70 unit
Function: Controls the DC link voltage and provides
the setpoint current for the 12-pulse slave unit via the
SST2 interface and control commands (and receives
control commands).
Function: In current control mode, receives the
setpoint current and control commands via the SST2
interface from the 12-pulse master (and sends
control commands).
P051= 3 (Access level: Expert mode)
P051= 3 (Access level: Expert mode)
SST2 interface definition:
SST2 interface definition:
P688= 1 (protocol selection "Peer-to-Peer")
P688= 1 (protocol selection "Peer-to-Peer")
P684.i003= 13 (baudrate 187500 Bd)
(factory setting)
P684.i003= 13 (baudrate 187500 Bd)
(factory setting)
P686.i003= 2 (2 process data words)
(factory setting)
P686.i003= 2 (2 process data words)
(factory setting)
P687.i003= 1 ms (telegram failure time)
(factory setting)
(see Section 3.8.6)
P687.i003= 1 ms (telegram failure time)
(factory setting)
(see Section 3.8.6)
SST2 send channel:
SST2 send channel:
P681.i001= 599 (1st process data item is
control/status word for 12-pulse mode)
(factory setting)
P681.i001= 599 (1st process data item is
control/status word for 12-pulse mode)
(factory setting)
P681.i002= 34 (2nd process data item is the setpoint
current)
(factory setting)
Use of SST2 receive data:
Use of SST2 receive data:
P573.i001 (or i002) = 6001 (1st receive data is
source for "No external fault 3")
(but should only be parameterized when the 12pulse master is required to go into the "fault" state in
the event of a 12-pulse slave fault - see Section
3.8.6)
P554.i001 (or i002) = 6001 (ON/OFF1)
P555.i001 (or i002) = 6001 (not OFF2)
(with the "fault" state for the 12-pulse master or when
"no 12-pulse mode" is selected on the 12-pulse
master (see P583.i001 or i002), OFF2 is signaled)
P561.i001 (or i002) = 6001 (Run enable)
(the 12-pulse slave only receives the run enable
when the 12-pulse master is in the "run" state)
P566.i001 (or i002) = 6001 (RESET)
(Source 2 for reset... this facilitates an external reset
from the master)
P486.i001 (or i002) = 6002 (2nd receive data item is
the setpoint current)
Definition of the unit as a 12-pulse unit:
Definition of the unit as a 12-pulse unit:
P583.i001 (or i002) = 1 (12-pulse mode is selected)
P583.i001 (or i002) = 1 (12-pulse mode is selected)
Definition of the unit as a master or slave:
Definition of the unit as a master or slave:
P587.i001 (or i002) = 0 (master)
(factory setting)
P587.i001 (or i002) = 1 (slave)
Special functions:
Special functions:
P354 = 0 (Earth short-circuit test deactivated when
the unit is supplied by a non-earthed supply - e.g.
from the delta winding of the 12-pulse transformer)
P354 = 0 (Earth short-circuit test deactivated when
the unit is supplied by a non-earthed supply - e.g.
from the delta winding of the 12-pulse transformer)
Table 9
Parameterization for 12-pulse mode
3-24 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
12.96
3.8.4
Connection
Control/status word for 12-pulse mode (r599) and control word 2, bit 23
The following table shows how the bits of the control/status word for 12-pulse mode (r599) are formed from the
bits of control words 1 and 2 (r550, r551), the bits of status word 1 (r552), the bits of the first SST2 receive data
(r599 sent from the Peer-to-Peer partner) and the internal unit status with Boolean arithmetic or how these bits
are connected together (negation is represented with a slash) :
Control/status word for 12-pulse mode (r599)
Bit
Logical linking (or meaning in the high state):
r599.0
r550.0 (ON or not OFF1) AND /r552.3 (no fault) AND r551.23 (12-pulse mode is selected)
r599.1
r550.1 (run condition or not OFF2) AND /r552.3 (no fault) AND r551.23 (12-pulse mode is selected)
r599.2
r550.2
r599.3
r552.2 (Message for RUN state)
r599.4
r550.4
r599.5
r550.5
r599.6
Message: DC link forming or current identification is being carried out
r599.7
r550.7 (fault reset)
r599.8
r550.8 (typing 1 ON) AND /r552.3 (no fault) AND r551.23 (12-pulse mode is selected)
r599.9
r550.9 (typing 2 ON) AND /r552.3 (no fault) AND r551.23 (12-pulse mode is selected)
r599.10 r550.10 (PLC control)
r599.11 r550.11 (Ud-reduction requested)
or
r599.12 r552.10 (Message: "Regenerating ready")
High when with 12-pulse mode selected (r551.23= 1), the unit is held in state r000 = "--" (because
"circuit identification" or "forming" is taking place on the partner unit, or because the unit is waiting
for the "run" state of the 12-pulse slave unit (while the slave unit is carrying out the earth shortcircuit test and the maximum waiting time of 5 s in state r000 = "--" has not yet elapsed))
Dieses Bit ist bei einer Einspeiseeinheit nicht von Bedeutung !
r599.13 /r552.3 (Message: NO fault)
r599.14 r552.14 (Message: "Motoring" (Rectifier bridge is carrying current or is ready to carry current or
neither rectifier nor regenerating bridge are carrying current))
Dieses Bit ist bei einer Einspeiseeinheit nicht von Bedeutung !
r599.15 r550.15 (No external fault 1)
Table 10
Control/status word for 12-pulse mode (r599)
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
3-25
Connection
12.96
Control word 2 (r551), bit 23: 12-pulse mode selection command
Associated source selection parameter: P583
Low state:
"no 12-pulse mode", i.e. there is only one "normal unit"
High state:
"12-pulse mode is selected"
The command is effective in the high state and effects the following changes with respect to the operational
behavior of a single unit (i.e. a "normal single unit" becomes a 12-pulse master or 12-pulse slave depending on
control word 2, bit 27, or the associated source selection parameter P587.i001 or i002):
The P-gain of the Ud controller is halved internally according to P313 and the DC link capacitance P144 of
the 12-pulse master is halved internally but only when the 12-pulse slave reports the "run" operating state to
the 12-pulse master via r599 (bit 3 of the first SST2 receive data).
During "forming" or "circuit identification", only one unit is permitted to carry current. This prevents firing of the
thyristors of the rectifier bridge in the "run" operating state on the 12-pulse master or 12-pulse slave by
forcing the state r000 = "--", when the corresponding partner unit reports via r599 (bit 6 of the first SST2
receive telegram) that "forming" or "circuit identification" is being carried out. Apart from which, on the unit
that is held in the state r000= "--", error message F061 (fault value 3) is suppressed.
On completion of "forming" or "circuit identification" of the partner unit (i.e. with the trailing edge of bit 6 of the
first SST2 receive data), the unit switches to the operating state SWITCH-ON INHIBITED (r000=°008).
On switch-on, on the 12-pulse master following the °012 operating state (test phase - earth short-circuit test),
firing of the thyristors of the rectifier bridge by forcing the state r000 = "--" is prevented until the 12-pulse slave
reports the "run" operating state via r599 (bit 3 of the first SST2 receive data) or until a maximum waiting time
of 5 s has elapsed. During this waiting time, the 12-pulse slave is given the opportunity of carrying out the
earth short-circuit test. In addition, ramping up of the pre-charging ramp (parameter P329) is prevented.
Bits 0, 1, 8 and 9 of r599 (control/status word for 12-pulse mode) are linked with control word bit 23 such that
an ON command is only passed on via r599 when control word bit 23 is 1 ("12-pulse mode is selected").
Note: The prerequisite for 12-pulse mode is that the 12-pulse master and 12-pulse slave are coupled via the
SST2 serial interface using Peer-to-Peer protocol (P688=1) and that in each case, the "control/status word for
12-pulse mode" (r599) is transmitted in word 1 of the transmission protocol (P681.i001= 599).
3.8.5
Start-up with 12-pulse mode
Linking the units via SST2 RS485 interface
Mount the optional A2 submodule (C98043-A1690) on the A10 CUR electronic module (C98043-A1680) of
master and slave (see Section 9.6) and connecting an interface cable (RS485 4-core cable, see Section
3.8.7) on the 5-pole terminal block -X117 of A2.
Parameterizing a unit as a 12-pulse master (see Section 3.8.3)
Following "Generate factory setting" (see Section 4.3.9.1), only the following parameters have to be set:
P051= 3 (expert mode)
P688 = 1 (select Peer-to-Peer protocol)
P583.i001 (or i002) = 1 (12-pulse mode is selected)
P573.i001 (or i002) = 6001 (only set when the 12-pulse master is also required to go into the "fault" state
in the event of a 12-pulse slave fault - see Section 3.8.6)
Switch off earth short-circuit test (P354 = 0), when the unit is supplied by a non-earthed supply - e.g. from
the delta winding of the 12-pulse transformer
Note: The basic setting (index i001) of the unit is used in practice for the parameterization as 12-pulse master
(with the appropriate source wiring for the ON command (P554, P555) and other external control commands),
and the reserve setting (index i002) is used to operate the unit as a stand-alone unit with user control on-site
via the OP1 or PMU.
3-26 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
12.96
Connection
Parameterizing a unit as a 12-pulse slave (see Section 3.8.3)
Using P077 = 5 or 6, almost all settings required for the parameterization as a 12-pulse slave can be carried
out automatically (see Chapter 4.3.9.1).
Meaning of P077 = 5 or 6:
P077= 5: Basic setting (index i001): 12-pulse slave (all control is carried out via the master)
Reserve setting (index i002): stand-alone unit with operator control via PMU
P077= 6: Basic setting (index i001): 12-pulse slave (all control is carried out via the master)
Reserve setting (index i002): stand-alone unit with operator control via OP1
Note: When the reserve setting is selected, the unit operates as a stand-alone unit with on-site operator
control. Changeover between the basic and reserve settings takes place via binary input 5 (P590=1005), but
the reserve setting can be set permanently via P590= 1.
Procedure for carrying out the P077-dependent factory setting (see Section 4.3.9.1):
Set P051= 3 (expert mode)
Set P052= 2 (Select "Initialize" function (set MLFB), so that P077 can be modified)
Set P077= 5 or 6 (Select the required P077-dependent parameter setting)
Set P052= 0 and press the <P> key (terminate the "initialize" function)
Set P052= 1 (select the function "Generate manufacturer setting"; when the <P> key is pressed, all
parameters are reset to their factory setting or to the P077-dependent value)
If only those parameter values that are dependent on P077 are required to be changed and all other
parameters should remain unchanged, the following procedure is necessary:
Set P051= 3 (expert mode)
Set P052= 2 (select "Initialize" function (set MLFB))
Note P070 and set P070= 0
Set P077= 5 or 6 (select the required P077-dependent parameter setting)
Set P052= 0 and press the <P> key (read in the parameter values dependent on P077)
Move the F060 error message into the "background" by pressing <P>+<H>
Set P052= 2 (select "Initialize" function (set MLFB) again)
P070= noted value (restore MLFB)
P052= 0 and press the <P> key (MLFB is read in and the dependent parameters P071, P075 and P076
are set)
Move the F060 error message into the "foreground" again by pressing <P>+<T>, and reset by pressing
the <P> key
Additional parameter settings for the 12-pulse slave:
P051= 3 (expert mode)
P688 = 1 (Peer-to-Peer protocol)
Switch off earth short-circuit test (P354 = 0), when the unit is supplied from an unearthed supply, e.g. from
the delta winding of the 12-pulse transformer
For factory settings in accordance with P077= 5 or 6, binary input 1 is a source for "No external fault 1"
and binary input 2 is a source for "No external warning 1". If this is not required, e.g. in the case of open
terminals, P575 = 1 and P588 = 1 must be set.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
3-27
Connection
12.96
Circuit identification:
Circuit identification should be carried out successively on the 12-pulse master and on the 12-pulse slave.
P052= 21 must be set on each unit for this purpose, and the switch-on command for the 12-pulse slave
comes from the 12-pulse master (the control word wiring ensures that the partner unit, in each case, does not
carry current or is held in the operating state r000= "--".
Circuit identification procedure for 12-pulse master:
Set P052= 21 on the 12-pulse master unit, switch on circuit identification is carried out on the 12-pulse
master
Circuit identification procedure for 12-pulse slave:
Set P052= 21 on the 12-pulse slave unit, switch on the 12-pulse master unit circuit identification is
carried out on the 12-pulse slave
Note: If circuit identification is carried out with the basic settings selected (operation as a 12-pulse slave,
all control is from the 12-pulse master), the switch-on command must come from the 12-pulse master and
the power terminals of the 12-pulse master unit must be connected to the supply voltage.
Note: When the reserve setting is selected on the 12-pulse slave unit (with appropriate parameterization of
index i002 of the "Source selection parameters" P554, P555, ...) it is also possible to issue the switch-on
command for circuit identification on the slave unit on-site via the PMU or OP1.
Setting additional functions:
If required, activate the "auto restart" (via P366= 2) on the master and on the slave unit. This will be effective
in the event of failure of the electronics supply voltage provided that the Peer-to-Peer telegram failure
monitoring time has been switched off via P687.i003= 0.
3.8.6
Redundancy mode
If both common rectifiers are rated such that each separate unit is capable of carrying the full load current,
the following possibilities are available with respect to redundant operation:
Uninterrupted changeover of the 12-pulse master unit to stand-alone 6-pulse mode in the event of
failure of the 12-pulse slave unit during 12-pulse mode:
If the 12-pulse master is required to continue to run in "normal" stand-alone 6-pulse mode in the event of
failure of the 12-pulse slave unit without interruption, "External fault 3" must not be "wired" to the Peer-to-Peer
interface, but instead the parameterization P573.i001 (or i002) = 1 is required on the 12-pulse master. If the
master unit is also required to continue to run without an interruption in the event of failure of the Peer-to-Peer
interface cable, the Peer-to-Peer telegram failure monitoring time also has to be switched off via P687.i003=
0 on the master.
Reconnection of the 12-pulse slave unit during operation of the master:
If (12-pulse) operation of a 12-pulse slave unit is required to be reinstated following an interruption of the
Peer-to-Peer interface cable without error message and during (stand-alone 6-pulse) operation of the master
unit, the Peer-to-Peer telegram failure monitoring time also has to be switched off via P687.i003= 0 on the 12pulse slave unit.
Changeover of the 12-pulse slave unit to stand-alone 6-pulse mode in the event of failure of the 12pulse master unit:
In the event of failure of the master unit during 12-pulse mode, it is possible for the 12-pulse slave unit to
change over to stand-alone 6-pulse mode almost without interruption, because all external control commands
that are wired to the terminals of the master unit (e.g. ON command) are also carried to the terminals of the
12-pulse slave unit. Externally implemented logic must ensure that in the event of failure of the master unit,
the 12-pulse slave is switched from the basic to the reserve setting. The 12-pulse slave must be
parameterized appropriately in the reserve setting to facilitate stand-alone 6-pulse mode with external control.
The Peer-to-Peer telegram failure monitoring time also has to be switched off via P687.i003= 0 in this case.
3-28 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
12.96
Connection
Note:
With the parameterization P687.i003 = 0 AND P681.i001 = 599, in the event of telegram failure, bits 3 and 6
of the first SST2 Peer-to-Peer receive data (i.e. the control/status word for 12-pulse mode sent from the
partner unit) are set to 0.
3.8.7
RS485 interface cable for the Peer-to-Peer link on SST2
The RS485 interface cable required for the serial Peer-to-Peer link on SST2 is in the form of a four-wire
connection.
A screened 4-core cable must be connected at the screw terminals of the 5-pole plug of terminal block -X117 on
submodule A2 (C98043-A1690). Submodule A2 is fitted to the CUR A10 electronics module (see Section 9.6).
The 4-core cable is not included in the scope of delivery.
12-pulse master
12-pulse slave
A2
A2
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
4
M
X117
Figure 3.17
M
5
X117
Connecting cable for "Peer-to-Peer" communication on SST2 (between the terminals of the A2 submodule (C98043-A1690))
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
ENGLISH
3-29
Connection
3-30 ENGLISH
12.96
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating instructions
02.96
Start-Up
4
Start-Up
4.1
Introduction and handling start-up
WARNING
Despite disconnecting the power terminals from the supply, voltage may still be
present on terminal X19 due to the external fan supply.
4.1.1
Handling the start-up instructions
NOTE
Section 4.2 First start-up:
First start-up of the common rectifier
Section 4.3 Start-up aids:
Index-type reference for start-up and use of the common rectifier, which only has to be used if actually
required!
Section 4.4 Function diagrams:
Graphical overview of the setpoint channel, open-loop/closed-loop control, analog inputs/outputs, and the
common rectifier data sets
4.1.2
General explanation of the terminology and functions of the common rectifier
NOTEx
The software used for the power supply unit is identical to that used for the power supply units and
regenerative power supply units of equipment series 6SE70.
The functional difference between power supply units and combined power supply and regenerative units is
defined by means of the parameter P070.
Any remarks concerning "regeneration" in these operating instructions (e.g. concerning control word 1) should
be ignored.
Abbreviations:
Abbreviations used: Refer to Section 15 "Information, notes "
Mode and automatic control variants of the common rectifier:
"Function block diagrams: Open and closed-loop control": see Section 4.4
Application: Power supply of the variable-voltage DC link of SIMOVERT converters of the
6SEE70 series
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
4-1
Start-Up
02.96
Closed-loop control variant:
a) Parallel connection (see Section 3.7)
The output current can be increased by connecting up to 2 "parallel units of identical rated
current in parallel with the power section of a common rectifier of size K ("basic unit"). The
"basic unit" controls the DC-link voltage. The firing pulses of the basis unit are transmitted to
the parallel unit(s) via ribbon cable. A parallel unit does not contain a CUR electronic module.
When connected in parallel, the load current must be reduced by 10 % with respect to the
total rated current.
Due to the use of identical power sections, commutating reactors as well as identical cable
lengths for connection to the mains supply, an almost symmetrical division of current
between the "basic unit" and the "parallel unit(s)" can be ensured.
b) 12-pulse mode (see Section 3.8)
Two common rectifiers are connected in parallel on the output side and fed on the line side
with galvanically isolated AC supplies, each displaced by 30 degrees. A common rectifier
controls the DC-link voltage and supplies a second common rectifier with the current setpoint.
The second common rectifier that is linked to the first via the SST2 serial interface (RS485
interface option) with peer-to-peer protocol only becomes a "12-pulse slave" after
parameterization.
12-pulse mode is used to reduce the harmonic loading on the system and to increase the
performance for high-power common rectifiers.
"Process data":
"Process data" are commands and setpoints from "outside" fed into the common rectifier, as well
as signals and actual values which are output from the common rectifier
Process data
Sources
Destinations
- Binary inputs BE
(terminals)
- Parameterizing unit (PMU)
- Operator control panel (OP)
- Serial interfaces
(SST1, SST2, SCB, CB, TB)
- Binary outputs BA
(terminals)
- Parameterizing unit (PMU)
- Operator control panel (OP)
- Serial interfaces
(SST1, SST2, SCB, CB, TB)
- Serial interfaces
(SST1, SST2, SCB, CB, TB)
Commands
"Control Word"
e.g.: "ON command" Setpoint
chanal
Op./cl-loop
control
Setpoints
Only: Id setpoint in
12-pulse operation
Messages
"status word"
e.g.: "fault
Actual values
e.g. output current
- Analog outputs AA
(terminals)
- Parameterizing unit (PMU)
- Operator control panel (OP)
- Serial interfaces
(SST1, SST2, SCB, CB, TB)
Rectifier/regenerating unit
4-2
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Start-Up
"Indexed" parameters:
Several parameter values are assigned to one parameter number, which can be accessed via
the separate indices (in brief: i001, i002, etc.).
The meaning of the indices of the respective parameter (parameter number) is explained in the
parameter list in Chapter 5.
Index1
Example:
P683
i001 = 0 Bus address for serial interface SST1 (CUR)
Index2
i002 = 2 Bus address for serial interface on the SCB module
"Data sets":
"Indexed" parameters can be sub-divided according to data sets.
A data set comprises a group of several parameter values with the same index. Depending on
the status of certain control word bits, a specific data record is accessed
(see the function diagram for "selecting the data sets " in Section 4.4).
There are two types of data set:
Data sets for basic/reserve setting (B/R) can be selected via control word 2/bit 30
Associated source selection parameter: P590
Affected parameters: P486, P554 to P557, P561, P565 to P569, P571 to P575,
P578, P579, P583 and P586 to P589
e.g. for changing over between manual and automatic operation
4 changeover reserve data sets (RDS) 1, 2, 3 or 4, selectable via the bit combination
in control word 2/bits 18 and 19.
Associated source selection parameters: P578, P579
Affected parameters: P140 to P144, P160, P161, P310 to P320, P329, P408,
P517, P518, P773 to P777
Used, e.g. for alternating operation of different inverter types on one common
rectifier
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
4-3
Start-Up
02.96
4.2
Initial start-up
4.2.1
Preparatory measures
-
Transporting, unpacking, assembling: refer to Section 2
Connecting-up: Refer to Section 3
Read "Introduction and handling the start-up instructions": Section 4.1
Forming:
If the inverter(s) connected have been switched off continuously or not connected for more than
a year, is/their link capacitors must be formed (see Section 4.3.9.6).
Connect-up the supply and electronics power supply of the converter with the front panel closed.
The common rectifier is supplied with the "factory setting" (refer to Section 5 "Parameter list", column 4)
and access stage 2 (standard mode). That means:
- The settings of the common rectifier data correspond to the unit type according to the MLFB
(i.e. converter already initialized).
When supplied, the converter is controlled and parameterized by the parameterizing unit (PMU) located on the
front side of the converter.
Displays:
Statuses
faults, alarms,
parameter numbers,
index numbers,
parameter values
Switch-on
Switch-off
P
Fault acknowledgement and
changeover between:
Parameter number
Parameter index
Parameter value
Raise/lower
to select:
Parameters
Indices
Parameter values
A detailed description of the displays as well as the parameterizing and operator control possibilities of the
common rectifier via the PMU, is provided in Section 6 "operator control".
Parameterization is realized according to Sections 4.2.2 and 4.2.3
NOTE
It is possible to jump into the appropriate sequence step (in the following flow diagrams) if incorrect entries
have been made, taking into account the access stage (P051) and a function selection (P052) which may be
required. It is recommended that the following parameters and function steps after the jump-in position are rechecked and executed due to the background calculations !
NOTE
To avoid oscillating of the link voltage in regenerative mode, it is advisable to set parameter P302 of the
SIMOVERT Master Drives FC, VC, SC (time constant for filtering the link voltage) to the value 3.
4-4
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Start-Up
4.2.2
Parametrierung „Standard-Anwendung“
P050 =
Language (only important when an OP1 is in use; see Section 9.4):
0: German, 1: English, 2: Spanish, 3: French, 4: Italian
P051 = 2
Access stage "Standard mode“
P053 =
Parameterization enable
e.g. with P053=6, the parameters from the parameterization unit (PMU) and
from serial interface 1 of the basic unit (SST1- and therefore also from the
optional user-friendly operator panel OP1) can be modified.
Commands
via OP1?
no
yes
Operator control
P554 = 2001
P555 = 2001
In order to avoid having to wait until the link circuit voltage drops below 20%
before switching off, set the parameter P554 = P555.
If the unit is to be switched on and off via the optional user-friendly operator
panel OP1:
P554=2001 Source for control command "ON/OFF1"
P555=2001 Source for control command "OFF2"
P052 = 5
Drive setting
P071 =
Supply voltage [V]
Value of the rated voltage at the input bridge
Idle time
of converter
>1year
yes
no
P408 =
P052 = 20
P key
Switch-on
Forming the DC link (if necessary, see Section 4.3.9.6)
- The common rectifier must be in status o009 less
(give SWITCH ON command)
- Set P408 (forming time: 1.0 to 600.0 minute)
- Select function (P052 = 20)
- Press P key on the PMU
- Press the I key on the PMU
- The DC link is formed.
- When forming is completed, the operating status display appears.
Forming
r000 ≤ o009
Wait to
Ud<50V
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
(see r006)
ENGLISH
4-5
Start-Up
02.96
Circuit identification
(see Section 4.3.9.7)
P052 = 21
r949.i009 = ?
P key
Switch-on
r000 ≤ o009
Identification
Acknowledge
Fault message
yes
Eliminate
cause of fault
- The common rectifier must be in operating state o009 or less
(give SWITCH OFF command!).
- Select circuit identification (P052 = 21).
- Press the P key on the PMU
- Switch on: Press the I key on the PMU
- Circuit identification takes place (takes about 10 s)
- Following circuit identification, the operating display is activated.
- If an error occurs during circuit identification, the identification
process must be repeated (error value r949 assigned to error
memory r947 can provide more information on the cause of error
(if the error in index i009 has been reset) see Sections 5.16 and
7.1)
no
r000 ≤ o009
P052 = 22
Logbook
P52 = 0
Documenting the settings
- Select the "Display modified parameters“ function (P052 = 22).
(see Section 4.3.9.8 "Display modified parameters“)
Note: Function can only be used with operator control via the
PMU
- Enter the values of the modified (i.e. system-specific) parameters
in the logbook (Chapter 12)
- Select the "Return" function (P052 = 0).
Ready
DC link voltage smoothing
- By parameterizing P302=3 (time constant for smoothing the DC
link voltage) on the connected SIMOVERT Master Drive FC the
dynamic behavior of the closed-loop control of the DC link
voltage can be improved.
4-6
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Start-Up
4.2.3
Parameterization for "Expert application"
Parameterization can be simplified by selecting an appropriate factory setting via parameter P077 using special
functions such as 12-pulse mode with two commom rectifiers coupled via a peer-to-peer link. In this case, this is
carried out by selecting the function "Generate factory setting" as described in Section 4.3.9.1 with P077 0.
Then the parameterization shown in the following diagram can be carried out.
In all other cases, the following parameterization is started immediately.
P050 =
Language (only important when an OP1 is in use; see Section 9.4):
0: German, 1: English, 2: Spanish, 3: French, 4: Italian
P051 = 3
Access stage "Standard mode“
P053 =
Parameterization enable
Commands
via OP1?
no
yes
e.g. with P053=6, the parameters from the parameterization unit (PMU)
and from serial interface 1 of the basic unit (SST1- and therefore also from
the optional user-friendly operator panel OP1) can be modified.
Operator control
P554 = 2001
P555 = 2001
P052 = 5
In order to avoid having to wait until the link circuit voltage drops below
20% before switching off, set the parameter P554 = P555.
If the unit is to be switched on and off via the optional user-friendly operator
panel OP1:
P554=2001 Source for control command "ON/OFF1"
P555=2001 Source for control command "OFF2"
Drive setting
P071 =
Supply voltage [V]
P076 =
Value of the rated voltage at the rectifier bridge
P160 =
Configuration of the power section
Idle time
of converter
>1year
yes
no
P076 = 0x No power section connected in parallel
1x 1 parallel unit connected in parallel with the basic unit
2x 2 parallel units connected in parallel with the basic unit
(also see Section 3.7)
Current limits:
P408 =
P052 = 20
P key
Switch-on
Forming
r000 ≤ o009
Wait to
Ud<50V
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
P160 = Max. supply current (in % P075 rated current of common
rectifier (factory setting: +150% only briefly available)
Forming the DC link (if necessary; see Section 4.3.9.6)
- The common rectifier must be in status o009 or less
(give SWITCH OFF command!).
- Set P408 (forming time: 1.0 to 600.0 minutes).
- Select function (P052 = 20)
- Press the P key on the PMU
- Switch on: Press the I key on the PMU
- Forming of the DC link takes place
- Following the forming process, the status display is activated.
(see r006)
ENGLISH
4-7
Start-Up
02.96
Circuit identification
(see Section 4.3.9.7)
P052 = 21
r949.i009 = ?
P key
Switch-on
r000 ≤ o009
Identification
Acknowledge
Fault message
yes
Eliminate
cause of fault
no
Change factory setting for:
r000 ≤ o009
Change
process data
connection?
no
P052 = 22
Logbook
P52 = 0
Ready
Command and setpoint sources,
Destinations for signals and
actual values
Process data: refer to Section 4.3.1
- Control word (commands) / status word (messages)
- Setpoint/actual values
yes
Connect
process data
no
Functions
required?
software
- The common rectifier must be in operating state o009 or less
(give SWITCH OFF command!).
- Select circuit identification (P052 = 21).
- Press the P key on the PMU
- Switch on: Press the I key on the PMU
- Circuit identification takes place (takes about 10 s)
- Following circuit identification, the operating display is activated.
- If an error occurs during circuit identification, the identification
process must be repeated (error value r949 assigned to error
memory r947 can provide more information on the cause of error
(if the error in index i009 has been reset) see Sections 5.16 and
7.1)
Possible process data sources/destinations:
(refer to Sections 4.3.2 to 4.3.6)
- Binary inputs, binary outputs
- Analog inputs
- Serial interface in the basic unit (SST1, SST2)
(SST2 only for optional RS485 interface PTP1)
- Option boards (SCB, CB, TB)
Simple applications: refer to Section 4.2.5
yes
Parametrize
functions
Possible functions:
WEA (automatic restart)
Parameterize functions:
Refer to Section 4.3.10 "Functions" and Section 5 "Parameter list"
Documenting the settings
- Select the "Display modified parameters“ function (P052 = 22)
(see Section 4.3.9.8 "Display modified parameters“)
Note: Function can only be used with operator control via the
PMU
- Enter the values of the modified (i.e. system-specific)
parameters in the logbook (Chapter 12)
- Select the "Return" function (P052 = 0).
DC link voltage smoothing
- By parameterizing P302=3 (time constant for smoothing the DC
link voltage) on the connected SIMOVERT Master Drive FC the
dynamic behavior of the closed-loop control of the DC link
voltage can be improved.
4-8
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Start-Up
4.2.5
Simple application examples for connecting process data with connection assignment
Connecting-up: Refer to Section 3.3 "Control terminal strip"
Factory setting:
Switch-on/off via the PMU, messages and actual values via the terminal strip.
Terminal strip only operational if binary input 5 (BE5) is energized (high signal level corresponds to "reserve").
CUR
PMU
-X104/19 BA2
-X104/20 BA2
Floating contact
Fault
P603.1 = 1002
-X101/6
-X101/9
-X101/10
-X101/11
-X101/12
-X101/13
ON/OFF1
OFF2(pulse inhibit)
Acknowledge
P554.2 = 1001
P555.2 = 1002
P565.2 = 1003
P24
BE1
BE2
BE3
BE4
BE5
-X102/15 AAM
-X102/14 AA
P590
Basic/reserve
(activates above commands)
Actual Ud value
ON/OFF1
P554.1 = 1010
= 1005
P655.1 = 37
Manual/automatic operation:
Automatic operation (BE5 high signal level): Command input from the automation unit via serial interface
(SST1), the monitoring of external faults via a terminal strip also
possible.
Manual operation (BE5 low signal level):
Command input via the terminal strip.
CUR
SST1
SST
ON/OFF1
Acknowledge
-X104/19 BA2
-X104/20 BA2
-X101/6
-X101/9
-X101/10
-X101/11
-X101/12
-X101/13
P24
BE1
BE2
BE3
BE4
BE5
-X102/15 AAM
-X102/14 AA
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
Automation unit
P554.2 = 2001
P565.2 = 2001
Floating contact
Operation
P602.1 = 1002
ON/OFF1
P554.1 = 1001
Acknowledge
Fault external 1
Basic/reserve
P565.1 = 1003
P575.1 = 1004 P575.2 = 1004 (always activ)
P590 = 1005
Actual Ud value
P655 = 37
ENGLISH
4-9
Start-Up
02.96
4.3
Start-up aids
4.3.1
Process data
Process data are commands and setpoints which are entered into the common rectifier from "outside" as well as
signals and actual values which the common rectifier outputs.
4.3.1.1
Control word (control word 1 and control word 2)
Control/status word for 12-pulse mode, see Section 3.8
4.3.1.1.1
Introduction and application example
The two control words 1 (bits 0 to 15) and 2 (bits 16 to 31) output commands and external signals (messages) to
the common rectifier.
Their status can be read-out via parameter r550 or r967 (control 1) and r551 (control word 2).
An overview is provided in Section 4.3.1.1.2 "Overview of the control word".
The significance of the possible commands and signals, entered externally, is described in Section 4.3.1.1.7
"Significance of the control word commands".
Every control word bit is assigned a selection parameter, which defines from which source(s) this bit can be
changed (refer to Section 4.3.1.1.2, right-hand column).
The selection parameters for the sources are, with the exception of P590 (source selection for control word bit
30 "basic/reserve setting") and P591 (source selection for control word bit 31 "Main contactor checkback signal")
are indexed 2x as follows:
Index i001
Basic setting
i002
Reserve setting
An overview of possible sources, which are assigned fixed values (0-6005, non-consecutively), are provided in
Section 4.3.1.1.3 to 4.3.1.1.6 "Selecting the source for the control word".
In this overview, values 0 and 1 are an exception; sources are not selected with these values, but the bits are set
permanently to 0 (LOW) or 1 (HIGH) (also refer to select parameters P554 to P591 in Section 5 "parameter list").
NOTE
The control word commands "OFF2" (bit1) and "Acknowledge" (bit7) are always simultaneously effective from
3 sources (can be parameterized) !
"Acknowledge" (bit7) is also always effective from the PMU !
NOTE
If the "On" command (bit 0) is connected to a serial interface (SST1, CB/TB, SCB-SST), then the following
must be observed for safety-related reasons:
Additionally, an "OFF2" command must be parameterized at the terminal strip/PMU, as otherwise the converter
cannot be shutdown with a defined command, when communications fail!
NOTE
In order to avoid having to wait until the link circuit voltage drops below 20% of 1.35*P071 before execution of
a switching-off command, set the parameter P554.i001 = P555.i001 and P554.i002 = P555.i002.
4-10 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Start-Up
WARNING
When making any modifications to control or other wiring, make absolutely sure that no
dangerous situations can arise!
Example
If a terminal at logic H potential is programmed as the source for the ON/OFF1 command,
the common rectifier will enter the "Run" ("R") state when the P key is pressed (activates
the value set!).
Conversely, a common rectifier that is in the "R" state will enter the "Ready" ("B") state if
the terminal is at logic L potential.
Typical application:
P554
Select.
parameter
2
3
...
...
P555
P556
P557
P...
P...
31
1: Main con. chckbk.
0: no main con. chckbk.
1: ON
0: OFF1
Meaning
1
1: Op. enable
0: Op. inhibit
0
1: Op. cond.
0: OFF2
Control word bit
P561
Basic set.
i001=
i001=
i001=
i001=
i001=
Reserve set.
i002=
i002=
i002=
i002=
i002=
P591
3001 to 4504
Options
ON/OFF1:
Basic set.:
via PMU (keys I/0)
Reserve set.:
Op. cond/OFF2:
Basic set.:
Constant value= 1= always op. cond. Reserve set.:
6001 to 6005
SST1
(Peer-toPeer)
word 1 to
word 5
Source
SST1
(Word1)
SST1
(Word4)
0000 0001 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1010 2001 2004
PMU
Value
Constantvalue = 0
Constantvalue = 1
CUR, BE1
-X101:9
CUR, BE2
-X101:10
CUR, BE3
-X101:11
CUR, BE4
-X101:12
CUR, BE5
-X101:13
Changeover using
control word bit 30
P590
via bin. input 1 of CUR
Constant value = 1 = always op. cond.
NOTE: For OFF2 and OFF3, 3 selection parameters can be assigned differently in the same index!
Op. enable/inhibit:
Basic set.:
Constant value = 1 = always op. enable.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
Reserve set.:
Constant value = 1 = via serial
interface SST1 of the CUR
ENGLISH
4-11
Start-Up
02.96
4.3.1.1.2
15
Overview of the control word (control word 1 and control word 2)
12
3
4
6
1
2
"Control word 1"
Bit High
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
5
7
9
11
13
14
0
PMU Display
(visualization parameter r550 or r967)
Low
Comments
ON
Operating condition
OFF1 (stop)
OFF2 (electrical)
Operating condition
Inhibit operation
Acknowledge
8
9
10
Inching 1 ON
Inching 2 ON
Control from the PLC
Inching 1 OFF
Inching 2 OFF
No control
11
12
13
14
15
Ud reduction requested
Regenerating enabled
No fault, external 3
Motoring
No fault, external 1
Ud reduction inactive
Regenerating inhibited
Fault, external 3
Generating
Fault, external 1
31
28
21
23
22
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
not relevant for an E unit
P571 1)
P572 1)
P573 1)
P574 1)
P575
16
PMU Display
(visualization parameter r551)
Low
RDS (reserve data set) bit 0 (LSB)
RDS (reserve data set) bit 1 (MSB)
12-pulse mode selected
No 12-pulse mode
No fault, external 2
Slave common rectifier
No alarm, external 1
No alarm, external 2
Reserve setting for
setpoints and control word
HS checkback signal
Fault, external 2
Master common rectifier
Alarm, external 1
Alarm, external 2
Basic setting for setpoints
and control word
No HS checkback signal
Comments
Source
selection
Logic operation with bit 19
Logic operation with bit 18
P578 1)
P579 1)
P583 1)
Changeover Ud/Id control
Can only connected at the converter
term. strip or SCB
1) This bit has a different meaning for the common rectifier as for the converter
4-12 ENGLISH
P565
P566
P567
P568 1)
P569 1)
17
18
"Control word 2"
Bit High
not relevant for an E unit
P561
24
26
19
20
always HIGH
Firing pulse enable
always High
always High
always High
Simultaneously effective from 3
sources and PMU;
Positive edge evaluation
Same effect as ON/OFF1
Same effect as ON/OFF1
Only effective via
CB,TB,SST1,SST/SCB
25
27
29
30
(Priority OFF 2/1)
3 sources simultaneously effective;
(Priority OFF 2/1)
Source
selection
P554
P555
P556
P557
P586
P587
P588
P589
P590
P591
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Start-Up
4.3.1.1.3
Selecting the source for control word 1 (bit 0-7)
Bit 0
Selection P. basic setting 554.1
Selection P. reserve setting 554.2
Value
2
3
4
5
6
7
561.1
565 to 567.1
555 to 557.2
561.2
565 to 567.2
Source
0000 Constant value = 0
0001 Constant value = 1
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1010
2001
CUR, BE1, -X101:9
CUR, BE2, -X101:10
CUR, BE3, -X101:11
CUR, BE4, -X101:12
CUR, BE5, -X101:13
PMU
SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5)
Word1
2004 SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5)
Word4
3001
3004
4101
4102
...
4110
4111
4112
...
4116
4201
4202
...
4210
4211
4212
...
4216
4501
4504
6001
...
6005
1
555 to 557.1
CB/TB (Word1)
CB/TB (Word4)
SCI 1 and 2, Slave 1,BE1
BE2
Consecutively to
BE10
only SCI 2, Slave 1,BE11
BE12
Consecutively to
BE16
SCI 1 and 2, Slave 2,BE1
BE2
Consecutively to
BE10
only SCI 2, Slave 2,BE11
BE12
Consecutively to
BE16
SCB-SST (USS /Peer-t-Peer) Word1
SCB-SST (USS /Peer-t-Peer) Word4
SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 1
Consecutively to
SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 5
x
xG/R
x
xG/
R
x
x
x
x
x
xG/R
x
x
x
xR for 565
x
x
1)
xG/R for 567
OPTIONS
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
xR
x
x
x
x
xG
x
x
xR for 555
x
x
x
xG for 555
x
x: Value can be assigned for the selection parameters (BE can only be assigned once in the same index of all
selection parameters!)
1) Value 1010 cannot be set, but reset is always possible from PMU.
Factory setting:
xG: for basic setting with P077=0
xR: for reserve setting with P077=0
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
4-13
Start-Up
4.3.1.1.4
02.96
Selecting the source for control word 1 (bit 8-15)
Bit
8
Selection P. basic setting 568.1
Selection P. reserve setting 568.2
Value
9
10
12
13
14
15
571.1
572.1
573.1
574.1
575.1
569.2
571.2
572.2
573.2
574.2
575.2
Source
0000
0001
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1010
2001
Constant value = 0
Constant value = 1
CUR, BE1, -X101:9
CUR, BE2, -X101:10
CUR, BE3, -X101:11
CUR, BE4, -X101:12
CUR, BE5, -X101:23
PMU
SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5)
Word1
2004 SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5)
Word4
3001
3004
4101
4102
...
4110
4111
4112
...
4116
4201
4202
...
4210
4211
4212
...
4216
4501
4504
6001
...
6005
11
569.1
CB/TB (Word1)
CB/TB (Word4)
SCI 1 and 2, Slave 1,BE1
BE2
Consecutively to
BE10
only SCI 2, Slave 1,BE11
BE12
Consecutively to
BE16
SCI 1 and 2, Slave 2,BE1
BE2
Consecutively to
BE10
only SCI 2, Slave 2,BE11
BE12
Consecutively to
BE16
SCB-SST (USS /Peer-t-Peer) Word1
SCB-SST (USS /Peer-t-Peer) Word4
SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 1
Consecutively to
SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 5
xG/R xG/R
x
xG/R
xG/R
x
xG/R xG/R
xG/R
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
OPTIONS
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x: Value can be assigned for the selection parameters
Factory setting:
4-14 ENGLISH
xG: for basic setting with P077=0
xR: for reserve setting with P077=0
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Start-Up
4.3.1.1.5
Selecting the source for control word 2 (bit 16-23)
Bit
Selection P. basic setting
Selection P. reserve setting
Value
16
17
18
19
578.1
579.1
20
21
22
583.1
23
578.2
579.2
583.2
xG/R xG/R
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
xG/R
x
x
x
x
x
x
Source
0000
0001
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1010
2001
Constant value = 0
Constant value = 1
CUR, BE1, -X101:9
CUR, BE2, -X101:10
CUR, BE3, -X101:11
CUR, BE4, -X101:12
CUR, BE5, -X101:13
PMU
SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5)
Word1
2004 SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5)
Word4
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
OPTIONS
3001
3004
4101
4102
...
4110
4111
4112
...
4116
4201
4202
...
4210
4211
4212
...
4216
4501
4504
6001
...
6005
CB/TB (Word1)
CB/TB (Word4)
SCI 1 and 2, Slave 1, BE1
BE2
Consecutively to
BE10
only SCI 2, Slave 1, BE11
BE12
Consecutively to
BE16
SCI 1 and 2, Slave 2, BE1
BE2
Consecutively to
BE10
only SCI 2, Slave 2, BE11
BE12
Consecutively to
BE16
SCB-SST (USS /Peer-t-Peer) Word1
SCB-SST (USS /Peer-t-Peer) Word4
SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 1
Consecutively to
SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 5
x: Value can be assigned for the selection parameters
Factory setting:
xG: for basic setting with P077=0
xR: for reserve setting with P077=0
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
4-15
Start-Up
4.3.1.1.6
02.96
Selecting the source for control word 2 (bit 24-31)
Bit
Selection P. basic setting
Selection P. reserve setting
Value
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
586.1
587.1
588.1
589.1
590
591
586.2
587.2
588.2
589.2
590
591
xG/R
x
x
x
x
x
xG/R
x
xG/R xG/R
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
X
X
x
x
x
x
x
Source
0000
0001
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1010
2001
Constant value = 0
Constant value = 1
CUR, BE1, -X101:9
CUR, BE2, -X101:10
CUR, BE3, -X101:11
CUR, BE4, -X101:12
CUR, BE5, -X101:13
PMU
SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5)
Word1
2004 SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5)
Word4
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
OPTIONS
3001
3004
4101
4102
...
4110
4111
4112
...
4116
4201
4202
...
4210
4211
4212
...
4216
4501
4504
6001
...
6005
CB/TB, Word1
CB/TB, Word4
SCI 1 and 2, Slave 1,BE1
BE2
Consecutively to
BE10
only SCI 2, Slave 1,BE11
BE12
Consecutively to
BE16
SCI 1 and 2,Slave 2,BE1
BE2
Consecutively to
BE10
only SCI 2, Slave 2,BE11
BE12
Consecutively to
BE16
SCB-SST (USS /Peer-t-Peer) Word1
SCB-SST (USS /Peer-t-Peer) Word4
SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 1
Consecutively to
SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 5
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x: Value can be assigned for the selection parameters
Factory setting:
4-16 ENGLISH
X: for P590 / P591
xG: for basic setting with P077=0
xR: for reserve setting with P077=0
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Start-Up
4.3.1.1.7
Significance of control word (1 and 2) commands
The status of the rectifier/regenerating unit can be read in the operating display r000: e.g. READY-TO-SWITCHON r000=009
The function sequences are described in the sequence in which they are realized.
Bit 0:
ON command ( "ON")
The command is executed with a positive edge change from L to H (L
(009).
H) only in the READY-TO-SWITCH-ON
After the command has been accepted:
Changeover to the status WAIT FOR LINE VOLTAGE (010)
The main contactor is closed.
Changeover to the status READY STATUS(011)
Changeover to the status TEST PHASE (012)
Takes place only if thyristor or ground-fault test (P353,P354) selected.
Changeover to the RUN status(014)
Pre-charging is carried out, followed by normal operation.
Bit 0:
OFF1 command (L "OFF1")
The OFF1 command (stop) is executed with an L signal.
After the command has been accepted:
The DC link discharges itself until the link circuit voltage has fallen to 20% of 1.35*P071.
The firing pulses are then inhibited and the main contactor (if installed) drops out.
If the OFF1 command is removed again (ON command) during the discharge process, the latter is interrupted
and changeover is made again to the RUN (014) status.
If the rectifier/regenerating unit is in the READY status, the firing pulses are disabled and the main contact, if
installed, drops out.
If there is no OFF2 command:
Changeover to the READY TO SWITCH ON status (009)
Bit 1:
OFF2 command (L "OFF2")
The OFF2 command (electrical) is realized with an L signal.
After the command has been accepted:
The firing pulses are inhibited and the main contact drops out.
Changeover into the SWITCH-ON INHIBIT status(008)
NOTE
The OFF2 command is simultaneously effective from three sources (P555, P556 and P557)!!
NOTE
Priority of the OFF commands
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
OFF2 > OFF1
ENGLISH
4-17
Start-Up
Bit 3:
02.96
Run enable command (H "Run enable")
The RUN ENABLE command (firing pulse enable) is implemented with an H signal.
After the command has been accepted:
If the READY status (011) still applies.
Changeover to the RUN status (014); the firing pulses are enabled and the voltage setpoint is approached
over the pre-charging ramp.
Bit 3:
Run inhibit command (L "Run inhibit")
The RUN INHIBIT command (firing pulses disabled) is implemented with an L signal.
After the command has been accepted:
If the RUN status (014) applies:
Changeover to the READY status (01); the firing pulses are inhibited.
Bit 4 to 6: reserved
Bit 7:
Acknowledge command ( "Acknowledge")
The command is executed with a positive edge change from L to H (L
H) only in the FAULT status (007).
After the command has been accepted:
All actual faults are deleted after having been previously transferred into the diagnostics memory
If no faults are present:
The drive changes into the status SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008)
If actual faults are present:
The drive remains in the FAULT status (007).
NOTE
The acknowledge command is simultaneously effective from three sources (P565, P566 and P567) and always
from the PMU!
Bit 8:
Inching 1 ON command ( "Inching 1 ON")
The command is executed with a positive edge change from L to H (L
status (009).
H) only in the READY-TO-SWITCH-ON
After the command has been accepted
an ON command is automatically executed (description, refer to control word bit 0).
Bit 8:
Inching 1 OFF command (L "Inching 1 OFF")
The command is executed with an L signal.
After the command has been accepted:
An OFF 1 command is automatically executed (description, refer to control word bit 0).
Bit 9:
Inching 2 ON command ( "Inching 2 ON")
The command is executed with a positive edge change from L to H (L
status (009).
H) only in the READY-TO-SWITCH-ON
After the command has been accepted
an ON command is automatically executed (description, refer to control word bit 0).
4-18 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Bit 9:
Start-Up
Inching 2 OFF command (L "Inching 2 OFF")
The command is executed with an L signal.
After the command has been accepted:
An OFF 1 command is automatically executed (description, refer to control word bit 0).
Bit 10: Control from the PLC command (H "Control from the PLC")
The command is executed with an H signal
Process data PZD (control word, setpoints) originating from a PLC which were sent via the SST1 interface of
CU1, the CB/TB interface (option) and the SST/SCB interface (option), are only evaluated if the command was
accepted.
If several interfaces are operational, only the process data of the interfaces are evaluated, which transmit the
H signal.
For an L signal, the last values are retained in the appropriate dual port RAM of the interface.
An H signal appears in the visualization parameter r550 "control word 1", if one of the interfaces transmits an H
signal!
Bit 11: Ud reduction command (H "Ud reduction requested")
The command is executed with an H signal.
After the command has been accepted:
The DC link voltage setpoint drops to the value set with P318:
Setpo int = 135
.
USupply,rectifier
*
P318
* 100.00%
The DC link should now discharge.
When the DC link voltage drops below the following threshold value
135
.
USupply,rectifier
*
P318
2%
.
* 100.00% + 100% * 135
* P071
the message "Ud reduced" (status word 1, bit 13) is issued.
The appearance of a trailing edge of the Ud reduction command causes the output of the ramp-up/return
element (precharging time P329) to be set to the current value of DC link voltage so that the DC link voltage
setpoint can ramp up again from this value.
The L signal of the Ud reduction command causes the "Ud reduced" message (status word 1, bit 13) to be
held low (regardless of the DC link voltage level)
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
4-19
Start-Up
02.96
Bit 12: Regenerating enable command (H "Regenerating enable")
This command is of no significance in the case of a power supply unit.
Bit 12: Regenerating inhibit command (L "Regenerating inhibit")
This command is of no significance in the case of a power supply unit.
Bit 13: Fault, external 3 command (L "Fault, external 3")
The command is executed with an L signal.
After the command has been accepted:
Changeover to the FAULT status (007) (fault F038)
The firing pulses are inhibited and the main contactor, if installed, drops out (see also Chapter 7 ""Faults and
Warnings").
Bit 14: Power direction command (H " Motoring "; L " Generating ")
This command is of no significance in the case of a power supply unit.
Bit 15: Fault, external 1 command (L "Fault, external 1")
The command is executed with an L signal.
After the command has been accepted:
Changeover to the FAULT status (007) (fault F035)
The firing pulses are inhibited and the main contactor, if installed, drops out.(see also Chapter 7 ""Faults and
Warnings")
Bit 16 and 17: reserved
Bit 18: Reserve data set RDS bit 0 (LSB) command
In conjunction with bit 19 "RDS bit 1", this command permits changeover between four possible data sets (see
"Data sets" in Section 4.1.2 and "Selecting the data sets" in Section 4.4).
NOTE
The values in the data sets must be meaningful. This is the case, for example, when current identification (see
Section 4.3.9.7) has been carried out for the currently selected reserve data set or when a valid data set has
been copied using copy parameters (see P055 in Section 5.3). Otherwise errors will be reported.
After the command has been accepted:
The parameter settings of the corresponding data set in the closed/open-loop control are activated.
Bit 19: Reserve data set RDS bit 1 (MSB) command
In conjunction with bit 18 "RDS bit 0", this command permits switches over between four possible data sets (see
bit 18).
Bits 20 to 22: reserved
Bit 23: 12-pulse mode selection command (H "12-pulse mode is selected")
The command is executed with an H signal and causes a change in operational behavior from that of a single
unit (i.e. a "normal" single unit becomes a 12-pulse master or a 12-pulse slave depending on parameter P587 or
control word bit 27). See Section 3.8.4 for further details.
4-20 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Start-Up
Bits 24 and 25: reserved
Bit 26: Fault, external 2 command (L "Fault, external 2")
The command is recognized with an L signal and does not become active until the pre-charging time (P329) and
an additional time delay of 300 ms has elapsed when the operating mode RUN is active. During formation
(P052=20) or circuit identification (P052=21), the command is ineffective.
After the command has been accepted
Changeover to the FAULT status (007) (fault F036)
The firing pulses are inhibited and the main contactor, if installed, drops out (see also Chapter 7 "Faults and
Warnings").
Bit 27: Master/slave changeover (H "Slave common rectifier"/L "Master common rectifier ")
The command switches between slave and master mode.
Slave common rectifier: The closed-loop control operates with an external DC link current setpoint
Even when a thyristor test is selected (P353=1, 2 or 3) if Ud > 5% it does not wait in
state o012 and the thyristor test is not carried out.
Master common rectifier: The closed-loop control operates with an external DC link current setpoint
Bit 28: Alarm, external 1 command (L "Alarm, external 1")
The command is executed with an L signal.
After the command has been accepted
The operating status is retained. An alarm message (A015) is output (also refer to Section 7 "Fault and Alarm
Messages")
Bit 29: Alarm, external 2 command (L "Alarm, external 2")
The command is executed with an L signal.
After the command has been accepted:
The operating status is retained. An alarm message (A015) is output (also refer to Section 7 " Fault and
Alarm Messages ")
Bit 30: Selection, basic/reserve setting command (L "Basic setting / H "Reserve setting")
The command activates the BASIC SETTING with an L signal and the RESERVE SETTING with an H signal
After the command has been accepted:
The parameter settings of the basic or reserve setting for the control word itself, the setpoint channel, and the
closed-loop control are activated (see "Data sets" in Section 4.1.2 and "Selecting the data sets" in Section
4.4).
Bit 31: Main contactor checkback signal command (H "Main contactor checkback signal")
This command permits you to include an auxiliary contact of the main contactor in the unit control circuit (an H
signal implies that the main contactor has picked up).
After the command has been accepted:
An operating status > o010 is permitted
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
4-21
Start-Up
02.96
4.3.1.2
Status word (status word 1 and status word 2)
4.3.1.2.1
Introduction and application example
Status words 1 (bits 0 to 15) and 2 (bits 16 to 31) issue messages and commands from the common rectifier to
external destinations.
Their particular status can be read-out via parameters r552 or r968 (status word 1) and r553 (status word 2).
An overview is provided in Section 4.3.1.2.2 "Overview of the status word".
The significance of the possible messages and commands to the outside is described in Section 4.3.1.2.4
"Significance of the status word messages".
Each status word bit is assigned a selection parameter, which defines, to which destination this bit is sent (refer
to Section 4.3.1.2.2, right-hand column).
The selection parameters for the destinations are indexed twice as follows:
Index:
i001
Selecting a terminal on the CU / PEU board (basic converter)
i002
Selecting a terminal on the SCI 1/2 board (option)
An overview of the possible destinations, which are assigned fixed values, is provided in Section 4.3.1.2.3
"Selecting the destinations for the status word".
NOTE
For the output of faults, alarms and switch-on inhibit of the status word (HIGH active) via the terminal strip,
then these are LOW active at the terminals (binary outputs) (i.e.: the relay drops out)!
This is also true for possible option boards!
Also refer to Section 4.3.3 "Binary outputs"
Select
parameter
P600
P601
2
3
P602
P603
...
...
P...
P...
31
1: Prech. active
0: Prech. not active
Meaning
1: Ready
0: n. ready
1
1: Ready to switch-on
0: n.ready to switch-on
0
1: Fault
0: no fault
Status word bit
1: Run
0: Pulse. inhibit
Example:
P631
i001=
i001=
i001=
i001=
Term on SCI 1/2 i002=
i002=
i002=
i002=
i002=
i002=
i002=
SCI,Slave1
BA1
0000 4101 ...
no dest.
CUR, BA1
-X104:17/18
CUR, BA2
-X104:19/20
Dest.
0000 1001 1002
no dest.
Value
4112 4201 ...
4205 ...
4212
SCI,Slave2
BA12
i001=
SCI,Slave2
BA5
i001=
SCI,Slave1
BA12
SCI,Slave2
BA1
i001=
Term. on CUR
Index 1
Index 2
Terminal on CUR
Terminal on SCI 1/2
(Option)
"Run" signal:
4-22 ENGLISH
- at terminal -X104:19/20 of the CUR
- at terminal of the binary output 5 of the SCI (option),which is coded as slave 2
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Start-Up
4.3.1.2.2
15
Overview of the status word (status word 1 and status word 2)
12
5
7
8
10
3
4
6
9
11
13
14
1
2
"Status word 1"
Bit High
0
PMU Display
(visualization parameter r552 or r968)
Low
Comments
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Ready-to-switch-on
Ready
Run
Fault
No OFF 2
10
11
12
Regenerating ready
Fault, undervoltage
Main contactor energized
13
14
15
Ud reduced
Motoring
No fault
OFF2
Switch-on inhibit
No switch-on inhibit
Alarm
No alarm
No setpt. act. val. deviation Setpt. act. value deviation
PZD control requested
31
28
21
23
22
"Status word 2"
Bit High
always High
Inverted for terminal strips!
Inverted for terminal strips!
Can be parameterized
always "High"
(for CB,TB,SST1,SST/SCB)
Inverted for terminal strips!
Can only be connector for
terminals CUR or SCI!
not relevant for an E unit
P606
P607
P608
P610 1)
P611
P612
P613 1)
P614 1)
24
26
19
20
Regenerating not ready
No undervoltage fault
Main contactor not
energized
Ud not reduced
Generating
Inverted for terminal strips!
25
27
29
30
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Not ready to switch on
Not ready
Firing pulses inhibited
Dest.
selection
P600
P601
P602
P603
P604
17
18
16
PMU Display
(visualization parameter r553)
Low
Current active
Fault, external 1
Fault, external 2
Alarm, external
Alarm i2t power sections
Fault, overtemp., p.s.
Alarm, overtemp., p.s.
Current limit not active
No fault, external 1
No fault, external 2
No alarm, external
No alarm, i2t power section
No fault, overtemp. p.s.
No alarm, overtemp., p.s.
Comments
Dest.
selection
Inverted for terminal strips!
Inverted for terminal strips!
Inverted for terminal strips!
Inverted for terminal strips!
Inverted for terminal strips!
Inverted for terminal strips!
Inverted for terminal strips!
P618 1)
P619
P620
P621
P622
P623
P624
Pre-charging active
Pre-charging not active
1) The meaning of this bit is different for the common rectifier than for the converter
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
P631
ENGLISH
4-23
Start-Up
02.96
4.3.1.2.3
Selecting the destinations for the status word
(bits 0 - 31)
For the selection parameters P600 to P631, in which the destination of the appropriate bit can be specified, then
the indices are uniformly assigned as follows:
Index
i001
i002
Selecting a terminal on the CUR board (basic converter)
Selecting a terminal on the SCI 1/2 board (option)
Selecting a terminal on the CUR board (basic converter)
Index
i001
Value
Destination
0000
1001
1002
No destination
CUR, BA1, -X104:17/18,
CUR, BA2, -X104:19/20,
Index
i002
Value
Destination
0000
4101
4102
4103
4104
4105
4106
4107
4108
4109
4110
4111
4112
4201
4202
4203
4204
4205
4206
4207
4208
4209
4210
4211
4212
No destination
SCI 1 and 2,Slave 1, BA1
BA2
BA3
BA4
BA5
BA6
BA7
BA8
only SCI 2,Slave 1, BA9
BA10
BA11
BA12
SCI 1 and 2,Slave 2, BA1
BA2
BA3
BA4
BA5
BA6
BA7
BA8
only SCI 2,Slave 2, BA9
BA10
BA11
BA12
4-24 ENGLISH
Factory setting, except P603
Factory setting, for P603
Selecting a terminal on the SCI 1/2 board (option)
Factory setting
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Start-Up
4.3.1.2.4
Significance of the status word messages
NOTE
When faults, alarms and switch-on inhibit of the status word are output (HIGH active) via the terminal strip,
then these are LOW active at the terminal strips (binary outputs) (i.e.: relay drops out)!
This is also valid for possible option boards!
Also refer to Section 4.3.3 "Binary outputs"
Bit 0:
Signal, "Ready to switch-on" (H)
An H signal indicates that the operating status SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008) or READY-TO-SWITCH-ON (009) is
available. The firing pulses are inhibited.
Bit 1:
Signal, "Ready" (H)
H An H signal, indicates that the operating status READY (011) or PRE-CHARGING (010) is available. The firing
pulses are still inhibited.
Bit 2:
Signal, "Run" (H)
An H signal indicates that the operating status RUN (014) is available. The firing pulses are enabled and the
output terminals are live.
Bit 3:
Signal, "Fault" (H)
An H signal indicates that the operating status FAULT (007) is available. If the fault is output at a terminal strip
(CUR, SCI1/2) an L signal appears there for this fault message.
Bit 4:
Signal, "OFF2" (L)
An L signal indicates that an OFF2 command is present via the control word (bit 1).
Bit 5: reserved
Bit 6:
Signal, "Switch-on inhibit" (H)
An H signal indicates that the operating status SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008) is present. The message remains as
long an OFF2 command is applied over the control word (bit 1) and/or an ON command is still applied the control
word (bit 0) (edge evaluation).
If the message is output at a terminal strip (CUR, SCB1) an L signal appears there for this message.
Bit 7:
Signal, "Alarm" (H)
An H signal indicates that an alarm (Axxx) is present. If the alarm is output at the terminal strip (CUR, SCB1), an
L signal appears there for this alarm.
Bit 8:
Signal, "Setpoint/actual-value deviation" (L)
The L signal indicates that the absolute value of the difference between the Ud setpoint and the Ud actual value
is greater than or equal to a programmable deviation (P517 "Setpoint/actual-value deviation Ud" for longer than
the "Setpoint/actual-value deviation time" (P518). The bit is again set high as soon as the absolute value of the
difference between the Ud setpoint and the Ud actual value is less than the deviation (P517).
Bit 9:
Signal, "PZD control requested" (H)
An H signal is always present.
Bit 10: Message, "Regenerating ready" (H)
Always L in the case of a power supply unit.
Bit 11: Message, "Fault" (reserved, L)
An L signal is always present. If the fault signal is output to a terminal block (CUR, SCI 1/2), an L signal appears
there for this fault.
Bit 12: Signal, "Main contactor energized" (H)
This message is identical to the status of the relay contact at terminals 9-4/5 with which a main contactor can be
driven.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
4-25
Start-Up
02.96
Bit 13: Message, "Ud reduced" (H)
An H signal indicates that the DC link voltage has been reduced below the following value:
P318
2%
135
.
.
* USupply,rectifier * 100% + 100% * 135
* P071
The signal changes from H to L when the DC link voltage exceeds the following threshold:
135
.
* USupply,rectifier *
P318 2% + P319
+
100% 100%
.
* 135
* P071
The L signal is also output provided that in control word 1, bit 11=0 ("Ud reduction not requested").
Bit 14: Message, " Motoring mode" (H)
This command is of no significance in the case of a power supply unit.
Message, " Generating mode" (L)
This command is of no significance in the case of a power supply unit.
Bits 15 to 17: reserved
Bit 18: Message, "Current limit active" (L)
An L signal indicates that the common rectifier is operating at the current limit. If the message is output at a
terminal (CUR, SCB1), an L signal appears there for this message
Bit 19: Signal, "Fault, external 1" (H)
An H signal indicates that a "Fault, external 1" is present in control word bit 15. If this fault is output at a terminal
strip (CUR, SCB1), an L signal appears there for this fault signal.
Bit 20: Signal, "Fault, external 2" (H)
An H signal indicates that a "Fault, external 2" is present in control word bit 26. If this fault is output at a terminal
strip (CUR, SCB1), an L signal appears there for this fault signal.
Bit 21: Signal, "External alarm" (H)
An H signal indicates that an "Alarm, external 1" is present in control word bit 28, or an "alarm, external 2" in
control word, bit 29.
If this fault is output at a terminal strip (CUR, SCB1), an L signal appears there for this fault signal.
Bit 22: Signal, "Alarm I2t power section" (H)
H signal indicates that the "I2t alarm power section" (A025) is present. Also refer to Section 7 "Fault and Alarm
Messages".
If this alarm is output at a terminal strip (CUR, SCB1), an L signal appears there for this fault signal.
Bit 23: Signal "Overtemperature fault signal power section (H)
An H signal indicates that an "Power section temperature too high" fault (F023) is present. Also refer to Section 7
"Fault and Alarm Messages".
If this fault is output at a terminal strip (CUR, SCB1), an L signal appears there for this fault signal.
Bit 24: Signal "Overtemperature alarm power section" (H)
An H signal indicates that the "Power section temperature too high" alarm (A022) is present. Also refer to
Section 7 "Fault and Alarm Messages". If this fault is output at a terminal strip (CUR, SCB1), an L signal appears
there for this fault signal.
Bits 25 to 30: reserved
Bit 31: Signal, "Pre-charging active" (H)
An H signal indicates that the DC link has been charged following a successful ON command.
4-26 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
4.3.1.3
Start-Up
Setpoints
The only possible setpoint selection that can be programmed on a common rectifier is the selection of the Id
setpoint for a common rectifier in slave mode (e.g. the slave common rectifier in 12-pulse operation) using
parameter
(See also Chapter 5 "Parameter list")
The control word command can be used for effecting the changeover:
"Basic and reserve settings"
See Section 4.4 "Function diagrams"
The source for the setpoint is defined using values:
Value entry in
Index1 i001
Index2 i002
active when "basic setting" selected" (control word)
active when "reserve setting" selected (control word)
Value assignment for P486 "Source Id-setpoint":
Value
0000
2002
2003
2004
Source
Constant setpoint = 0
SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5) Word2
Word3
Word4
Factory setting: P486 i001, i002
only if word 4 is not assigned for "control
word 2 with 2004 (Section 4.3.1.1)
...
2016
3002
3003
3004
consecutively to
Word16
OPTIONS
CB/TB Word2
Word3
Word4
only if word 4 is not assigned for "control
word 2 with 3004 (Section 4.3.1.1)
...
3016
4101
4102
4103
4201
4202
4203
4501
consecutively to
Word16)
SCB1 with SCI 1,Slave1, analog input AE1
AE2
AE3
SCB1 with SCI 1,Slave2, analog input AE1
AE2
AE3
SCB-SST (only Peer to Peer, Word1)
only if word 1 is not assigned for "control
word 1 with 4501 (Section 4.3.1.1)
4502
4503
4504
USS /Peer to Peer, Word2
USS /Peer to Peer, Word3
USS /Peer to Peer, Word4
only if word 4 is not assigned for "control
word 2 with 4504 (Section 4.3.1.1)
4505
4506
...
4516
6002
6003
6004
6005
USS /Peer to Peer, Word5
only USS, Word6
consecutively to
only USS, Word6
SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Peer-to-Peer, Word2
SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Peer-to-Peer, Word3
SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Peer-to-Peer, Word4
SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Peer-to-Peer, Word5
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
4-27
Start-Up
4.3.1.4
02.96
Actual values
All available parameter numbers (0 to 999) can be entered into the actual value parameters, sorted according to
destinations (refer to the following).
The parameter value of the entered parameter number is output at the selected destination.
Note: - When specifying parameter numbers, which are indexed, the value of the first index (.i001) is always
output!
- When specifying "0", no output is made to the appropriate destination!
Destinations:
P655
P680
"CUR-AA actual values"
Output via the CUR control terminal strip (Section 3.3)
Analog output 1 (-X102:14 / reference potential -X102:15)
(refer to Section 4.3.5 "analog output")
"SST1 actual values"
Output via the basic converter interface SST1
Indices:
i001
Word 01 of the telegram (PZD)
i016
Word 16 of the telegram (PZD)
(refer to Section 4.3.6.1 "basic converter interface SST1")
Destination, options:
P664
P690
"SCI-AA actual values"
Output via the SCB1 interface with SCI1
(also refer to the Instruction Manual for the option boards)
Indexes i001
Destination: Analog output 1 from slave 1
i002
Destination: Analog output 2 from slave 1
i003
Destination: Analog output 3 from slave 1
i004
Destination: Analog output 1 from slave 2
i005
Destination: Analog output 2 from slave 2
i006
Destination: Analog output 3 from slave 2
"SCB actual values"
Output via the SCB1 interface with peer-to-peer protocol or SCB2
(also refer to the Instruction Manual for the option boards)
Indexes: i001
Destination: Word 01 of the telegram (PZD)
P694
i016
Destination: Word 16 of the telegram (PZD)
"CB/TB actual values"
Output via the CB or TB interface
(also refer to the Instruction Manual for the option boards and Sections 4.3.6.2 "DPR")
Indices:
i001
Destination: Word 01 of the telegram (PZD)
i016
Destination: Word 16 of the telegram (PZD)
NOTE
For telegram data transfer (P680,P690,P694), it is generally necessary/practical to assign "Word 01 of the
telegram (PZD)" with status word 1 (r968 or r552)!
4-28 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
4.3.2
Start-Up
Binary inputs
5 binary inputs (24V) which can be parameterized at the control terminal strip (board CUR, -X101) to enter
commands, external faults/alarms as well as a checkback signal to the common rectifier control word.
Connecting-up:
Refer to Section 3.3 "Control terminal strip"
Parameterization:
Refer to Section 4.3.1.1 "Control word"
Function of the binary inputs for factory setting with P077 = 0 (see Section 4.3.9.1):
Binary input 1
ON/OFF 1 command (control word bit 0)
for RESERVE SETTING (binary input 5 = high state)
Binary input 2
OFF2 command "pulse inhibit" (control word bit 1)
for RESERVE SETTING (binary input 5 = high state)
Binary input 3
Acknowledge (control word bit 7)
for RESERVE SETTING (binary input 5 = high state)
Binary input 4
No function
Binary input 5
RESERVE/BASIC SETTING (control word bit 30)
4.3.3
Binary outputs
2 binary outputs, which can be parameterized, for the output of signals and external commands of the
common rectifier status word.
Connecting-up:
Binary output 1 on the CUR control terminal strip (connector X104 / NO contact):
Refer to Section 3.3 "Control terminal strip "
Binary output 2 on the CUR control terminal strip (connector X104 / NO contact):
Refer to Section 3.3 "Control terminal strip"
Parameterization:
Refer to Section 4.3.1.2 "Status word "
Factory setting:
Binary output 1
X104 on the CUR
Binary output 2
X104 on the CUR
No function (relay always de-energized)
Fault (status word bit 3)
NOTE
When faults, alarms and switch-on inhibit of the status word (HIGH active) are output via the terminal strip,
these are LOW active at the terminal strip (binary outputs) (i.e. relay drops out)!
Also refer to Section 4.3.1.2 "Status word".
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
4-29
Start-Up
4.3.5
02.96
Analog output
1 analog output, which can be parameterized, at the control terminal strip (board CUR, -X102 / Section 3.3) to
output actual values and other internal common rectifier quantities.
Analog output:
- Voltage range: 10V
- Resolution: 39mV (8 bits + sign)
- Accuracy: 5%
- Smoothing: 20ms
- Output current: max. 5mA
- Short-circuit proof and non-floating
Connecting-up:
Refer to "Control terminal strip", Section 3.3
Parameterization:
Also observe "Function diagram, analog output CUR", Section 4.4!
Enter the parameter number (0 to 999) whose value is to output, in P655 "CUR-AA actual values".
Set the analog output gain factor in P656 "CUR-AA gain".
(setting range: -320.00V to +320.00V / pre-setting: +10.00V gain of 1)
Set the offset in P657 "CUR-AA offset".
(setting range: -100.00V to +100.00V / pre-setting: +0.00V no offset)
The following is obtained for the calculation from the "Function diagram, analog output CUR":
Parameter value in [% ]
Uoff =
× Gain in [V ] + Offset in [V ]
100 [% ]
Pre-assignment (gain of 1 and no offset):
100% = 10V
The parameter value in [%] for the appropriate parameter number can be taken from the parameter list,
Chapter 5!
4-30 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Start-Up
Configuring examples:
Example 1: Available:
P071 (line voltage) = 400 V
Required:
Map the actual DC link voltage r037 between 400 and 600 V to 0.00V to
+10.00 V at the analog output
Connect-up parameter R037 at the analog output:
P655 "CUR-AA actual values" = 037
Converter the required output range in [%]:
r037 should be taken from the parameter list, Section 5:
Analog output: 100% = 1.35 x P071 (in this case: 1.35 x 400 V = 540 V)
Thus, the following is obtained for the range to be represented:
400 V 74.05% (Parameter value PWE1)
to be represented as Uoff1 = 0.00 V
600 V 111.07% (Parameter value PWE2)
to be represented as Uoff2 = +10.00 V
Define gain factor P656 and offset P657:
The following is obtained from the formula shown above:
Gain factor [ V ]
=
=
Offset [ V ]
Uoff1 V − Uoff2 V × 100 %
PWE1 [%] − PWE2 [%]
=
(0.00 V − 10.00 V) × 100 %
74.05 % − 111.07 %
− 10,00 V × 100
= 27.03 V
−37 %
Gain factor [ V ] × PWE1 [%]
27.03 V × 74.05 %
= Uoff1 [V] −
= 0V −
100 %
100 %
27.03 V × 74.05 %
= 0 V −
= −19.98 V
100 %
To be adjusted:
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
gain:
offset:
P656 = +27,03V
P657 = 19,98V
ENGLISH
4-31
Start-Up
02.96
Example 2: Available:
P075 (rated DC current) = 420 A
Required:
Map the output current r035 between -630 and +630 A to -10.00 V to
+10.00 A at the analog output
Connect-up parameter r035 at the analog output:
P655 "CUR-AA actual values“ = 035
Convert the required output range in [%]:
r035 should be taken from the parameter list, Section 5:
Analog output: 100% = P075
Thus, the following is obtained for the range to be represented:
-630 A -150% (Parameter value PWE1)
represented as Voff1 = -10.00 V
+630 A 150% (Parameter value PWE2)
represented as Voff2 = +10.00 V
Define gain factor P656 and offset P657:
The following is obtained from the formula shown above:
Gain factor [V ] =
Uoff1 V − Uoff2 V × 100 %
PWE1 [ %] − PWE2 [ % ]
=
Offset [V ]
=
(−10.00 V − 10.00 V) × 100 %
-150 % − 150 %
− 20.00 V × 100 %
= 6.67 V
−300 %
Gain factor [V ] × PWE1 [ %]
6.67 V × (-150.00 % )
= Uoff1 [V] −
= −10V −
100
%
100 %
= −10 V + 10.00 V = 0.00 V
To be adjusted: Gain
offset
4-32 ENGLISH
P656 = +6,67 V
P657 = 0,00 V
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Start-Up
4.3.6
Serial interfaces
4.3.6.1.1
Basic converter interface SST1
The USS protocol (universal serial interface) is implemented at the basic converter interface SST1.
The following documentation is available depending on the particular application of the SST1 basic converter
interface:
Connection of higher-level programmable controllers with USS protocol:
SIMOVERT
Master Drives
Use of the serial interface with USS protocol
Order No.:
6SE7087-6CX87-4KB0
Additional general comments regarding connecting-up and parameterization:
Connecting-up:
Also refer to "Control terminal strip" Section 3.3
NOTE
Communications can either be realized via the terminal strip of CUR -X100 (RS485 standard) or the interface
connector on PMU -X300 (9-pin SUB D connector / RS485)
Only one of the two possible connections (-X100 or -X300) may be used!
NOTE
The bus terminating resistors (total 150 ) must be switched-in at the last bus node (slave).
To realize this, jumpers of DIP-FIX switches S1 and S2 must be closed on board CUR!!
Parameterization:
Defining the interface:
P683 to P687
Define the process data (control word, status word, setpoints, actual values) for the interface:
Refer to "Process data" Section 4.3.1
Enabling parameterization:
P053 or P927
NOTE
The factory setting (refer to "Parameter list" Chapter 5) can be used if the SST1 basic converter interface is not
used!
4.3.6.1.2
Basic converter interface SST2 (A2-X117), see Section 9.6, Options
4.3.6.2
Dual-port RAM (DPR for SCB, CB, TB)
The dual-port RAM is the internal interface on the CUR (-X107) to connect possible option boards via the
backplane bus of the electronics box (LDA bus adapter required).
Possible option boards:
TB (Technology board);
SCB (serial communications board); CB (Communications board).
To connect possible option boards and parameterize the interface, also refer to the Section 3.5 "Recommended
circuits" as well as in the appropriate Instruction Manuals to the various option boards.
Additional information can be taken from Sections 4.3.1.1 to 4.3.1.4 "Control word, status word, setpoints, actual
values".
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
4-33
Start-Up
4.3.9
02.96
Function selection
(P052)
Function selection is activated via parameter P052 and permits various special functions during the start-up
phase.
Access stage 2 (P051 = 2) must be enabled and the common rectifier may only be in the "Run" (R) status. Apart
from this, P053 must be set for parameter enable (e.g. P053=6).
The following functions are available:
- Return from function selection
- Generate factory setting
- Initialization (MLFB setting)
- Download
- Hardware configuration
- Drive setting
- Forming
- Circuit identification
- Display modified parameters
(P052 = 0)
(P052 = 1)
(P052 = 2)
(P052 = 3)
(P052 = 4)
(P052 = 5)
(P052 = 20)
(P052 = 21)
(P052 = 22)
The "Generate factory setting", "Forming", and "Circuit identification" functions are automatically reset on
completion, i.e. P052 = 0 ("Return").
The other functions must be manually reset!
4.3.9.1
Generate factory setting
(P052 = 1)
This function is used to reset the parameter values, in accordance with a) the parameter list (dispatch status for
the unit; see Section 5, column 4) and b) parameter P077 (see below). Only the settings of parameters P070
(MLFB) and P077 (type of factory setting) remain unchanged.
The MLFB-dependent parameters P071, P075 and P076 are set in accordance with the type of the common
rectifier (see Section 4.3.9.2 "Initialization").
The parameters dependent on P077 are set in accordance with the table shown below.
In the normal case (P070=0), the values listed in the parameter list in Section 5 are used as factory settings, so
the table shown below does not have to be considered.
For fast parameterization of special functions, using P077=1 to 6, an appropriate set of factory settings can be
selected for certain parameters in accordance with the table shown below. In this manner, for example, certain
terminals of the basic unit can be parameterized fast as sources for certain control word functions.
The following table shows the factory settings for the parameters that are dependent on P077:
Parameters
depend.
on
P077
Designation of
the parameter
on OP1
Standard
Normal factory cubicle with
setting
terminals
P077= 0
Basic Res.
(i001) (i002)
P077= 1
Basic Res.
(i001) (i002)
Standard
cubicle with
PMU
P077= 2
Basic Res.
(i001) (i002)
Standard
Standard
cubicle with
cubicle with
PMU as
OP1 as
12-pulse slave 12-pulse slave
P077= 4
P077= 5
P077= 6
Basic Res. Basic Res. Basic Res.
(i001) (i002) (i001) (i002) (i001) (i002)
Standard
cubicle with
OP1
P486
Src Current Setp
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6002
P554
Src ON/OFF1
1010 1001 2001 1001 1003 1010 1003 2001 6001
P555 Src1 OFF2(electr.) 1010 1002 2001 1002 1003 1010 1003 2001 6001
P561
Src InvRelease
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6001
P565
Src1 fault reset
0
1003
0
1003
0
0
0
0
0
P566
Src2 fault reset
0
0
0
0
1004
0
1004
0
6001
P567
Src3 fault reset
2001 2001 2001 2001
0
0
2001 2001 2001
P572 Src RegenRelease
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6001
P575 Src No ExtFault1
1
1
1
1
1001 1001 1001 1001 1001
P583 Src 12-pulse mode
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
P587 Src Master/Slave
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
P588 Src No Ext Warn1
1
1
1
1
1002 1002 1002 1002 1002
P607
Trg Bit Warning
0
0
1001
1001
1001
The factory setting for P607.002 (responsible for the optional SCI1/2 module) is not affected by P077.
4-34 ENGLISH
0
1010
1010
1
0
0
0
1
1001
0
0
1002
6002
6001
6001
6001
0
6001
2001
6001
1001
1
1
1002
1001
0
2001
2001
1
0
0
2001
1
1001
0
0
1002
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Start-Up
In column 1, the parameters are listed for which the factory setting depends on P077. The right-hand columns
contain the factory settings for index 1 and 2 of these parameters depending on the value of parameter P077.
The values in the column "Normal factory setting" (P077=0) are the same as those listed in the parameter list in
Chapter 5 and are in accordance with the standard factory setting.
When P077 is set and the function "Generate factory setting" is selected, all parameters are set to their factory
settings, whereby the P077-dependent factory settings are taken into account.
"Generate factory setting" can be selected in the following statuses: "Switch-on inhibit" (008), "Ready-to-switchon" (009) or "Fault" (007).
Procedure:
If a special factory setting dependent on P077 is not required, i.e. P077=0, part a) of the following procedure is
not required and you start with part b).
a) Start of the procedure when a special factory setting is required, otherwise start at b) :
P051 = 3
Access stage "Expert mode" to permit access to P077
P052 = 2
Select "Initialize" function to modify P077
P key
The operating display appears (000)
P077
P052 = 0
Select the required P077-dependent parameter set in accordance with the
above table
Terminate the function "Initialize"
P key
The operating display appears. Then continue with b) .
b) Start of the procedure when a normal factory setting is required:
P052 = 1
Function selection, "Generate factory setting"
P key
The operating display appears (001),
and the following parameters can be re-assigned:
- Factory setting for all parameters according to the parameter list in Chapter 5
(also the board configuration P090/P091) taking P077 into account
- Data of the common rectifier (from the MLFB / P070)
P071 Rated voltage at the input of the rectifier bridge
P075 Rated DC current
P076 Configuration of the power section
The operating display "Switch-on inhibit" (008) or "Ready-to-switch-on" (009) appears after the
factory setting has been completed.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
4-35
Start-Up
4.3.9.2
02.96
Initialization (MLFB setting)
(P052 = 2)
This function is used to change the common rectifier MLFB (type setting).
The parameters P071, P075 and P076 are only set dependent on the new MLFB when changing the MLFB .
"Initialization" can be selected in the following statuses: "Switch-on inhibit" (008), "Ready-to-switch-on" (009) or
"Fault" (007).
Procedure:
P051 = 3
Access stage "Expert mode" to permit access to P070
P052 = 2
Function selection "Initialization"
P070
Specification of the number of the MLFB of the common rectifier (rating plate
data on the unit) according to the table at the end of this Section.
P052 = 0
Terminate the function "Initialize"
P key
The operating display appears and once the MLFB has been modified, the
following parameters are reassigned in accordance with the MLFB:
P071
P075
P076
Rated voltage at the input to the rectifier bridge
Rated DC current
Only the ones position is modified
Ones position =1: Ones position =1: only power supply
operation possible (is set automatically for P070101
(power supply unit))
The operating display "Switch-on inhibit" (008) or "Ready-to-switch-on" (009) appears after
"Initialization" has been completed
MLFB table (see next page):
Brief description of the table columns:
PWE
MLFB
I(n)
U-Kl.
BF
4-36 ENGLISH
Parameter value (to be entered at initialization / PMU / P070)
Machine-readable product designation (see rating plate)
Rated DC current in A (P075)
Voltage class, voltage range
Type of construction
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Start-Up
MLFB-table:
PWE
MLFB
0
none
I(n)
U-Kl.
0,0
BF
0
0
101
6SE7037-7FH85-0AA0
774,0 3AC 500-575V
H
102
6SE7037-7HH85-0AA0
774,0 3AC 660-690V
H
103
6SE7038-2EH85-0AA0
821,0 3AC 380-460V
H
104
6SE7041-0FH85-0AA0
1023,0 3AC 500-575V
H
105
6SE7041-0EH85-0AA0
1023,0 3AC 380-460V
H
106
6SE7041-0HH85-0AA0
1023,0 3AC 660-690V
H
107
6SE7041-3FK85-0AA0
1285,0 3AC 500-575V
K
108
6SE7041-3HK85-0AA0
1285,0 3AC 660-690V
K
109
6SE7041-3EK85-0AA0
1333,0 3AC 380-460V
K
110
6SE7041-5HK85-0AA0
1464,0 3AC 660-690V
K
111
6SE7041-5FK85-0AA0
1464,0 3AC 500-575V
K
118
6SE7041-8EK85-0AA0
1780,0 3AC 380-460V
K
119
6SE7041-8HK85-0AA0
1880,0 3AC 660-690V
K
120
6SE7041-8FK85-0AA0
1880,0 3AC 500-575V
K
4.3.9.3
Download or upread
(P052 = 3)
P052 has to be set to 3 when a "download" (write) or "upload" (read) has to be carried out for the parameters of
the common rectifier at the basic unit interface (SST1) using USS protocol (e.g. using SIMOVIS).
Download" can be selected in the following statuses: "Switch-on inhibit" (008), "Ready-to-switch-on" (009) or
"Fault" (007).
Procedure:
P052 = 3
Function selection Download
P key
The operating display appears(021)
- Using a PC at the basic converter interface (SST1) and an appropriate application
program (e.g.: SIMOVIS), all parameters can be now read and changed independently
of the operating status. The dependence on the access stage (P051) still applies, i.e. the
access stage has to be set in accordance with Chapter 5 in order to access a parameter.
P052 = 0
P key
Function selection Return
After return, the operating display appears, "Switch-on inhibit" (008) or "Ready-to-switch-on"
(009)
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
4-37
Start-Up
4.3.9.4
02.96
Hardware configuration
(P052 = 4)
This function is used to select option boards (SCB, CB, TB) in the common rectifier electronics box.
In order to install these modules, an LBA bus coupling (Local Bus Adapter) is required for the electronics box
(see Section 9.1)!
All parameters, which can be written into the "Hardware configuration" status ("H", refer to the right-hand column
in the parameter list in Chapter 5), can be changed.
The "hardware configuration" selection can be realized in the "Switch-on inhibit", "Ready-to-switch" or "Fault"
status
Procedure:
P052 = 4
Function selection Hardware configuration
P051 = 3
Access stage Expert mode ( to change the following parameters)
P090 =
P091 =
Board, slot 2 (To the RIGHT in the electronics box!)
Board, slot 3 (In the CENTER in the electronics box!)
Parameter values for P090/P091:
0:
No option board
1:
CB Communications board
2:
TB Technology board (only P090)
3:
SCB Serial Communication Board
Slot in the
electronics box
+1.B1 (LEFT)
+1.B3 (CENTER)
+1.B2 (RIGHT)
Boards
Standard board
Option boards
CUR
CB / SCB1 / SCB2
CB / SCB1 / SCB2 / TB
NOTE
Each of the option boards may only be used once in the electronics box!
When using the TB option board (e.g.: T300), this must always be inserted in slot 2 (at the RIGHT in the
electronics box!)
If only one option board is used, this must always be inserted at slot 2 (to the RIGHT in the electronics box)!
Additional parameters, depending on the option boards (refer to the associated Instruction
Manuals or Section 5)
P052 = 0
P key
4-38 ENGLISH
Function selection return
The operating display appears (r000) while parameters and interval variables
are being re-assigned
- The hardware is initialized
If error/fault message F050, F070 or F080 appears: see Chapter 7
After the selected function selection has been completed, the "Switch-on inhibit" (008) or
"Ready-to-switch-on" (009) operating display appears.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
4.3.9.5
Start-Up
Drive setting
(P052 = 5)
This function is used to change the drive setting(rectifier data, system data).
This includes all parameters that can be written in the "Drive setting" status ("A" ,see right-hand column of the
parameter list in Chapter 5).
Once you have completed the drive setting procedure, you can decide whether to implement the function
selection "Forming" (P052=20) or "Circuit identification" (P052 = 21) or whether just to reset the status (P052 =
0).
"Drive setting" can be selected in the following statuses: "Switch-on inhibit", "Ready-to-switch-on" or "Fault".
Procedure:
P052 = 5
Function selection
P051 = 3
Access stage Expert mode - (if all parameters, which can be accessed in the
"drive setting" status (A) are required)
Drive setting
All parameters, which can be written into the "drive setting" (A) status (see
right-hand column of the parameter list in Chapter 5), can be changed.
if necessary
P052 = 20
P052 = 21
P052 = 0
Function selection " Forming "
(refer to Section 4.3.9.6)
Function selection " Circuit identification "
(refer to Section 4.3.9.7)
Return
The display appears (r000) while parameters and internal variables are being
de-assigned, depending on the function selected.
The "Switch-on inhibit" (008) or "Ready-to-switch-on" (009) operating display appears after the
selected function or selection has been completed
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
4-39
Start-Up
4.3.9.6
02.96
Form DC link
(P052 = 20)
DANGER
The "Form DC link" function may only be implemented if the common
rectifier and the converter(s) connected have the same voltage class
(9th digit position of the MLFB).
If the converters have been left to stand idle for more than a year, the DC link capacitors must be re-formed. If
the converters are taken into service within a year of being delivered (factory number, rating plate); it is not
necessary to re-form the DC link capacitors. For more details on this subject, please refer to Section 4.3.12 of
the converter's operating instructions
The DC link capacitors are formed as described below.
The "Form DC link" function can be selected in the "Ready to switch on" status (009).
Procedure:
P408
Set the forming time (1.0 to 600.0 minutes; see Section 4.3.12 of the
converter's operating instructions
P052 = 20
Select the "Form DC link" function"
P key
The operating display appears:
The common rectifier must be switched on within 20 s, otherwise message
F091 (fault value 4) appears.
Switch on the rectifier/regenerating unit
NOTE
The firing pulses are enabled, the common rectifier carries current and the DC link is charged!
During the forming procedure, the connected SIMOVERT Master Drives FC, VC, SC must not be switched on.
4-40 ENGLISH
Forming of the DC link takes place (duration as set with P406):
While the forming time P408 is running, the control angle is reduced linearly from 120 degrees to
30 degrees and the DC link capacitor is charged up to the peak value of rectifier supply voltage.
If DC link voltage reduction is selected (control word 1 bit 11, P571), the forming procedure will
be completed on reaching a DC link voltage of P318 * rectifier network peak value.
During the forming procedure, the current limit set at P160 is not effective.
When this function has been completed, the "Ready to switch on" display (009) appears.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
4.3.9.7
Start-Up
Circuit identification
(P052 = 21)
This function identifies the DC link and the supply and re-assigns certain control parameters.
Specific closed-loop control parameters are re-assigned in connection with this function.
Only the parameters of the reserve data sets currently selected are modified (see "Data sets" in Section 4.1.2
and "Selecting the data sets" in Section 4.4).
NOTE
Circuit identification (i.e. automatic setting of the appropriate parameters) must be carried out, otherwise error
message F061 will be generated when the unit is switched on.
While circuit identification is being carried out, the constellation of supply, and reactor arrangement as well as
the capacitive load connected to the DC link terminals of the common rectifier must be identical to the
constellation for normal operation later. The main reason being that the Ud controller gain that is set depends
on the measured intermediate circuit capacitance.
If more than one inverter of the series SIMOVERT Master Drives 6SE70 are to be operated with the common
rectifier, whereby the number of inverters connected to the DC link at any one time varies, it is recommended
that reserve data set selection is implemented. Up to 4 different configurations can be formed for this purpose
that are each assigned to a reserve data set. Circuit identification has to be carried out separately for each of
these reserve data sets. During circuit identification, the appropriate configuration must exist for the selected
data set.
Circuit identification must be carried out whenever the supply network changes and/or whenever the number of
connected inverters changes.
The "Circuit identification" function can be aborted at any time with an OFF command. This triggers fault
message F091 "Circuit identification aborted by external cause".
During circuit identification, which is carried out in a series of separate stages, code numbers appear on the
PMU that indicate the current working stage.
If an error occurs during a stage, the circuit identification function is aborted. The exact cause of the abort is
indicated in the fault value r949 assigned to the fault number memory r947 (for a non-reset fault in index i001
and if reset in index i009).
You will find a detailed description of the fault messages, associated fault values and a description on the
warning messages in Chapter 7 "Faults and Warnings".
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
4-41
Start-Up
02.96
You can select the "Circuit identification" function in the "Ready to switch on" status (009).
Procedure:
P052 = 21
Select the "Circuit identification" function
P key
The display appears:
The common rectifier must be switched on within 20 s, otherwise fault
message F091 (fault value 4) appears.
Switch on the common rectifier.
NOTE
During circuit identification the trigger pulses are released, the power supply unit draws current and the link
circuit is partially charged:
Initially the control angle is reduced starting from 120 degrees until the link circuit voltage reaches 12.5 % of
the mains supply voltage, after which a single large current crest is generated by triggering a thyristor pair at a
control angle of 92 degrees. The current crest generated has a current conduction angle of approx. 40
degrees, the peak value depends on the inductance of the incoming feeder circuit.
During circuit identification the motoring plant current limit P160 is not effective. The sum of the rated currents
of the inverters connected to the power supply unit should be appreciably less than the rated current of the
power supply unit.
The operating display appears. Circuit identification takes about 10 s with a discharged DC link
capacitor. The following parameters are set automatically:
P140
P141
P144
P310
P311
P313
Circuit resistance of the rectifier bridge
Circuit inductance of the rectifier bridge
Capacitance of the DC link
Proportional gain of current controller
Integral-action time of current controller
Proportional gain of DC link voltage controller
On completion of the function, "Ready to switch on" (009) appears in the display.
NOTE
If a fault message occurs during circuit identification, the cause of the fault must be eliminated and the function
repeated (see Section 7.1).
Circuit identification for 12-pulse mode must be carried out in succession on the 12-pulse master and on the 12pulse slave units (see Section 3.8.5).
4-42 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
4.3.9.8
Start-Up
Display modified parameters
(P052 = 22)
This function is used to display all parameters (regardless of the access stage) that differ from the factory setting
(i.e. plant-specific parameters). This function only works with operator control via the PMU but not with the OP1.
Adjustable parameters that have no factory setting (P070) or whose value depends on other parameters
(P071,...) are regarded as "modified".
Those parameters that are dependent on P077 (see Section 4.3.9.1 "Factory setting") whose values differ from
the setting for P077=0 are also regarded as modified.
"Modified" parameters for "special access" are also displayed that are only accessible to specially trained
personnel using P799.
The "Display modified parameters" function can be selected in all operating statuses.
Procedure:
P052 = 22
Select the "Display modified parameters" function
P key
Only parameters that differ from the factory setting appear on the PMU (i.e.
plant-specific parameters), irrespective of the access stage (P051). It is not
possible to modify the parameter value here.
P052 = 0
Select the Return function
P key
NOTE
Parameters r990 and r991 provide a list of modified parameters for the PMU and also for the OP1.
4.3.10
Functions
4.3.10.1
WEA (automatic restart)
The Automatic Restart function can be used for the automatic acknowledgment of faults and automatic restart of
the unit following a power failure (F003, F004, F005, F007, F009 or F010) without the operator having to
intervene.
If there is no voltage on one of the terminals 1U/L1, 1V/L2, 1W/L3, X9.1, X9.2, or if their values are not within the
tolerance range and the DC link voltage has dropped below the threshold P074 * 1.35 * P071, the common
rectifier responds as follows:
P366 = 0: WEA (automatic restart) is inhibited
No automatic restart; the relevant fault message (F003, F004, F005, F007, F009 or F010) is initiated.
P366 = 1: Acknowledgment of power failure after system recovery
The common rectifier enters the operating status o008 (Switch-on inhibit) or o009 (when switching
on/off with the I/O keys of the PMU). On power recovery, a new ON command must be given to
enable the DC link to re-charge. The converter is not automatically restarted by the WEA function.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
4-43
Start-Up
02.96
P366 = 2 Restart after system recovery and pre-charging of the DC link after system recovery
While the system is down, the automatic controllers and firing pulses of the rectifier bridge are
inhibited. The common rectifier enters the status o010. On power recovery, the unit is automatically
switched on again by the WEA. The DC link is re-charged.
The unit is only switched back on again if there is still an ON command (control word bit 0) active
following system recovery. The WEA function is therefore not possible with an ON command (control
word bit 0) programmed from the PMU or operator panel OP1 provided the external 24 V supply does
not fail.
IMPORTANT: External measures must be taken to guarantee safety on an automatic restart!
Warning A065 (Automatic restart active):
This warning bit is set following a system failure if the automatic restart function is active, and reset following a
restart by the WEA and completion of the pre-charging process.
The unit can also be switched off by a manual OFF command during this restart phase. Please also refer to
Chapter 7 "Faults and Warnings"
WARNING
In the event of system failures when the WEA function has been activated (P366 = 2), the
unit may restart on system recovery and re-charge the DC link.
Consequently when the WEA function of the connected inverter has been activated
(P366 = 2 or P366 = 3) the inverter can be switched on once more.
Fatal injuries, severe bodily harm or damage to property and machinery may result if the
area surrounding the drive is entered while the drive is in this state.
NOTE
If the kinetic buffering function (KIP) is activated on a connected converter from the series SIMOVERT Master
Drives 6SE70, on the common rectifier, P366=2 must be parameterized.
If two common rectifiers for 12-pulse mode are coupled via peer-to-peer protocol via the basic unit interface
SST2, the peer-to-peer telegram failure time monitoring must be switched off via P687.i003=0 on the "12-pulse
master" unit, otherwise the automatic switch-on with the parameterization P366=2 (on both units) will not work
correctly if the electronics supply voltage fails.
4-44 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
1.35
Figure 4.4.1
Id
Ud
Uline
r035
r037
r036
Pre-charging time
P329
Controller structure
r006
P318
Ud set
reduction
2
+
-
+
r034
+
-
Ud
Id -Regler
Uline
+
+
P775
αG
Stop I comp.
Id - C
Ud
t
Load current
feedforward injection
C
P144
P320
P140
RON
P141
LON
Feedforward control
αW
+
P160
Current limit in
rect. direction
I comp. = 0
0.05%
TN
KP
P310 P311
0
P773
Rectifier
P773
6
P776
Filter time
Ud controller
TN
P314
5
P317
r038
Kp
P313
4
Shift αW
Deadband
neg. threshold
Deadband
pos. threshold
P316
3
7
r033
Trigger unit
MI
MI
MI
MI
MI
MI
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
4.4
Select
Ud set
reduction
(P571)
1
02.96
Start-Up
Function diagrams
ENGLISH
4-45
4-46 ENGLISH
Figure 4.4.2
...
3
2
1
0
P656
CU-AA gain
Analog output of the CUR module
...
...
...
Contents of parameter 001
0
P655
CU-AA actual values
Analog output of the CUR module
2
P657
CU-AA offset
3
#
DAC
4
U
1
-10 V
+10 V
20 ms
Hardware filtering
5
6
7
to terminal block
8
Start-Up
02.96
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
2
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
3
Figure 4.4.3
Selecting the data sets
Parameters involved:
P140 to P144,
P160, P161, P310 to P320, P329,
P408, P517, P518,
P773 to P777
Reserve data set selection (RDS)
Parameters involved
P486, P554 to P557, P561, P565 to P569
P571 to P575, P578, P579, P586 to P589
Base/reserve setting (Bas/Res)
1
5
6
7
.i001
RESV
GRND
.i002
P579 P578
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
3
2
1
0
P578
Q. RDS bit 0
Control word bit 18
1
0
Index
.i001
.i002
.i003
.i004
P579
Q. RDS bit 1
Control word bit 19
P590
Q. base/reserve
Control word bit 30
All grey-hatched background fields can be changed via the control word.
This is described in Figure 4.4.3.
RDS 4
RDS 3
RDS 2
RDS 1
.i004
.i003
.i002
.i001
4
8
02.96
Start-Up
ENGLISH
4-47
Start-Up
4-48 ENGLISH
02.96
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
5
Parameter List
Parameter List
Parameter list - Overview
Range of Parameter
Numbers
Function
000
Operation Display
001 - 049
General Observation Parameters
050 - 069
General Parameters
070 - 089
Drive Data
090 - 099
Hardware Configuration
100 - 149
DC Link Data
150 - 329
Control
330 - 409
Convenience functions
410 - 549
Setpoint Channel
550 - 649
Control and Status Word
650 - 679
Analog Input/Output
680 - 719
Communications
720 - 759
Diagnostics
760 - 779
Modulator
780 - 799
Factory Parameters
900 - 999
Profile Parameters (Profibus)
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
5-1
Parameter List
02.96
Parameter list; Summary of the abbreviations
Example:
PNU
OP1 - Parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Par.
P329
Pre-charging time
1)
Pre-charging time of the DC link
8)
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factory
setting
See
Modify
(access/
status)
0 to 9999
[ms]
4
5009)
35)/ BR6)
3/ BR7)
RDS parameter2)
14)
PNU=149Hex; Type=O2;3) Scaling: 1Hex 1) An
* under the parameter number means that this is a confirmation parameter, i.e. the modified value does
not become active until the P key is pressed.
2) Abbreviations for indexed parameters
RDS
G/R
Reserve data set parameter with 4 indices; changeover with control word 2, bits 18 and 19
Parameter with changeover feature for basic and reserve setting in control word 2, bit 30
3) Specification of parameter type
O2
I2
V2
L2
16-bit value without sign
16-bit value with sign
Bit-coded quantity
Nibble-coded quantity
4) Scaling for access via the PKW mechanism
If necessary: Specification of scaling group for process data (PZD)
PZD group
0 or no specification
1
PZD scaling
As for PKW scaling
4000Hex = 100%
5) Access stage (P051), starting at which a parameter can be modified or displayed
1
2
3
4
Operator input
Standard mode
Expert mode
Factory-set parameters
6) Specification of the operating states in which the parameter can be displayed
7) Specification of the operating states in which the parameter can be displayed
6) 7) Operating states:
U
H
A
B
MLFB input
Hardware
configuration
Drive setting
Ready (incl.: fault )
R
(R) Run
o000
o002, o004
o005
o007, o008, o009,
o010, o011, o012, o021
o014, o015, o018
8) An
** under the parameter number means that this parameter does not exist with a 6SE70 rectifier unit
(P070 (MLFB) 101).
9) A factory setting value in brackets means that the specified value only applies for P077=0. See Section
4.3.9.1 "Generate factory setting" for more details.
5-2
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Parameter List
PNU
OP1 parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
0 to 21
-
1/UHABR
Par.
5.1
r000
Operation display
Operation Display
Status display, faults and warnings of the S/F unit
For description, see Chapter 6 Operator control
o014
-I
II
Run
No thyristor bridge in circuit
Rectifier bridge in circuit
Regenerative bridge in circuit
o012
Test phase
Wait until the thyristor test and/or earth-fault test has been
completed (Selection function: P3530 and/or P3540).
Note: The thyristor test can only be conducted if the DC link
voltage is less than 5% of 1.35*P071. Following an ON
command, therefore, wait in operating status o012 until this
condition is satisfied!
o011
Wait for Run enable
Wait for Run enable
o010
Wait for system voltage
Wait until the system voltage has been checked.
Wait for voltage at power terminals X1-U1, X1-V1, X1-W1
(rectifier bridge)
Wait for voltage at power terminals X4-1U2, X4-1V2, X4-1W2
(regenerative bridge)
Wait for checkback signal "System contactor energized"
Waiting state before energizing the system contactor (Waiting
time P409)
or
or
or
or
o009
or
o008
or
or
or
Wait for Ready to Switch On
Wait for Ready to Switch On (OFF1 active)
Wait until internal OFF state is canceled by an external OFF
command.
Switch-on inhibit; isolation (OFF2)
Wait for acknowledgment of switch-on inhibit by activating the
SWITCH-OFF command
Isolation implemented (OFF2)
Wait until a valid USS telegram to SST1 has been received
(only if P687 is set to 0)
Wait until a valid peer-to-peer telegram to SST2 has been
received (only for P688=1, when P687.i003 is set to 0)
o007
Fault
A fault message has been received.
o021
Download
A parameter download over SST1 can be executed
o005
Drive settings
o004
Hardware settings
o002
or
Electronics initialization
The option module electronics are initialized
The basic unit electronics are initialized
o001
Establish factory setting
o000
Set MLFB
PNU=00Hex;
1
Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
5-3
Parameter List
02.96
PNU
OP1 parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
0 to 21
-
2/UHABR
0 to 1000
[V]
-
2/
BR
0 to 1
-
2/
BR
3
-
2/
BR
0.0 to 1000.0
[V]
-
2/
BR
0.0 to 1000.0
[V]
-
2/
BR
Par.
5.2
r001
General observation parameters
Status
Observation parameters for the current status of the S/F unit
0 = Enter MLFB (P070)
1 = Establish factory setting
2 = Hardware initialization
4 = Hardware settings
5 = Drive system settings
7 = Fault
8 = Restart inhibit
9 = Ready for turn-ON
10 = Wait for system voltage
11 = Ready for operation
12 = Ground fault test
14 = R/R unit is in operation
15 = Ramp generator decelerating (OFF1)
18 = Circuit identification or forming
21 = Download of parameter settings
r006
(U)
(H)
(H)
(A)
(B)
(B)
(B)
(B)
(B)
(B)
(R)
(R)
(R)
(B)
1
PNU=1Hex;
Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex DC Bus Volts
Actual DC link voltage
PNU=6Hex;
r012
Base/Reserve
MLFB-Input
Init. RFE
InitHW Conf
HW Config.
System Set.
Fault
ON Locked
Ready for ON
Line Voltage
Ready Oper
GrndFltTest
Operation
OFF 1
Circuit ID
Download
1V
Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex 0 to 16384V
0 - 100% Base / reserve settings of the process data wiring for control word bits
0:
1:
r013
Base setting
Reserve setting
1
PNU=0CHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Operat. Hours
Display of operating hours with firing pulses enabled (Run status).
All times > about 0.1s are taken into account.
i001 = days (0..9999)
i002 = hours (0..24)
i003 = seconds (0..3600)
d
h
s
The operating hours counter r013 is set to 0 when the factory setting is
established (P052=1).
r030
1
PNU=0DHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Rectifier Volts
Display of the system voltage at the rectifier bridge (phase W-U)
0.1 V
PNU=1EHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex r031
Inverter Volts
0 to 1638.4V
0 - 100% Display of the system voltage at the regenerative bridge (average value of
the three phases)
PNU=1FHex;
5-4
ENGLISH
0.1 V
Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex 0 to 1638.4V
0 - 100% Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Parameter List
PNU
OP1 parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
0.01 to 65.00
[Hz]
-
2/
BR
0.0 to 165.0
[el]
-
2/
BR
-150 to 150
[%]
-
3/
BR
-199 to 199
[%]
-
2/
BR
0 to 199
[%]
-
3/
BR
0 to 199
[%]
-
2/
BR
-199.9 to 199.9
[%]
-
3/
BR
-112.1 to 112.1
[%]
-
2/
BR
Par.
r032
Line Frequency
Display of the line frequency
PNU=20Hex;
r033
0.01 Hz,
Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex 0 to 50 Hz
0 - 100% Firing Angle
PZD gr.: 1
Display of the firing angle
PNU=21Hex;
r034
DC Amps (set)
0.1 el,
Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex 0el -180el
0 - 100% PZD gr.: 1
Display of DC link current setpoint
PNU=22Hex;
r035
0.1 %, 100% P075
Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex PZD gr.: 1
DC Amps (act)
Display of actual DC link current
PNU=23Hex;
r036
1 %, 100% P075
Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex PZD gr.: 1
DC Volts (set)
Display of DC link voltage setpoint
The setpoint 1.35*r030, limited to values of P074 up to 106.8%.
PNU=24Hex;
r037
1 %, 100% 1.35 P071
Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex *
PZD gr.: 1
DC Volts (act)
Display of actual DC link voltage
1 %, 100% 1.35 P071
Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex *
PZD gr.: 1
DC Volts Deviat.
PNU=25Hex;
r038
Display of setpoint/actual-value deviation of DC link voltage controller
1 %, 100% 1.35 P071
Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex *
PZD gr.: 1
AnalogOut Displ.
PNU=26Hex;
r039
Display of terminal X102-14 (analog output)
PNU=27Hex;
Type=O2;
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
0.1, 100% Scaling: 1Hex 10V at terminal X102-14
PZD gr.: 1
ENGLISH
5-5
Parameter List
02.96
PNU
OP1 parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
0 to 4
0
2/UHABR
2/ HABR
2
1/UHABR
1/UHABR
0
2/UHABR
2/UHAB
Par.
5.3
General parameters
P050
Language
*
Display language on the optional operation panel OP
0:
1:
2:
P051
*
*
Français
Italiano
German
English
Espanol
Français
Italiano
1 to 3
Setting of access levels; with higher access levels more parameters can be
read and/or written.
Operating via PMU or OP
Standard mode
Expert mode
1
PNU=33Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Function Select
Selection of several commissioning steps and special functions.
(See Section 4.3.9 for details)
0 = Return from on of the functions described below to the previous
status of the R/R unit
1 = Parameter-Reset: all parameters are reset to their original
settings (factory settings).
According to the Profibus profile for variable speed drives this
function is also accessible via parameter P970. After finishing
this function the parameter is automatically reset to 0.
2 = Release for MLFB setting (changing into the status 'MLFB
input'). To exit this function the parameter must be reset to 0.
3 = Download (Changing into the status 'Download'). To exit this
function the parameter must be reset to 0.
4 = Hardware configuration (Changing into the status 'Hardware
settings'). To exit this function the parameter must be reset to 0.
5 = Drive setting (change to the status "Drive setting" for assigning
the plant data parameters. To exit this function the parameter
must be reset to 0.
20 = Forming of the DC link
21 = Circuit identification: Assigning the controller parameters of the
R/R unit
22 = Display only parameters with modified values
Important: This function can only be used in conjunction with
operator control from the PMU. To exit this function the
parameter must be reset to 0 (Return).
PNU=34Hex;
5-6
3:
4:
1
PNU=32Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Access Level
1:
2:
3:
P052
German
English
Espanol
ENGLISH
Operation
Standard
Expert
0 to 22
Return
Param.Reset
Input MLFB
Download
HW Config.
System Set.
FormingCaps
Circuit ID
Changed Par
1
Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Parameter List
PNU
OP1 parameter name
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
* : Conf.
P053
Parameter Access
0 to 31
*
Release of interfaces for parameterization.
This parameter is also available as P927 in keeping with Profibus Profile
DVA.
6
1/UHABR
1/ HABR
1
PNU=35Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Display Light
0 to 1
Backlight for the optional operation panel OP
0 = Backlight always ON
1 = Backlight only ON during operation
0
3/
3/
BR
BR
always ON
dur. operat.
1
PNU=36Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Copy Parameters
011 to 144
012
3/
3/
B
B
Par.
0:
1:
2:
4:
8:
16:
none
COM BOARD
BASE KEYPAD
BASE SERIAL (SST1)
Serial I/O (SCB with USS))
TECH BOARD
(CB)
(PMU)
(SST1 and OP)
(SCB)
(TB)
Description for Setting:
Every interface is coded by a number.
Input of the number or the total of several numbers which are related to
interfaces, gives parameterization access to these interfaces.
Example:
The factory setting '6' (=4+2) means, that BASE KEYPAD (PMU) and
BASE SERIAL (SST1) have parameterization access.
P054
P055
*
This parameter permits the copying of data sets 1, 2, 3 or 4 to data sets 1,
2, 3 or 4.
Only those parameters specified in Section 4.4 "Selecting the data sets"
are affected by the copying process whereby each of these parameters has
4 indices that are assigned to the 4 data sets.
Data set 1 can be set with the parameters Pxxx i001
Data set 2 can be set with the parameters Pxxx i002
Data set 3 can be set with the parameters Pxxx i003
Data set 4 can be set with the parameters Pxxx i004
0xy
Do nothing; automatic reset value at the end of a copy
operation
1xy
The contents of data set x (x = 1, 2, 3 or 4) are copied to data
set y (y = 1, 2, 3 or 4) (data set x remains unchanged; the
original contents of data set y are overwritten).
x and y are the respective data set numbers (1, 2, 3 or 4) of the
source and destination data set.
Each copy operation is started by changing P055 to parameter mode if
P055 = xy and the unit is not in the "RUN" status. P555 is reset to P055 =
0xy at the end of the copy operation.
Important: Once a copy operation has been started, the electronic
power supply must not be switched off for at least 3 minutes to
enable the copied parameters to be passed to the EEPROM.
P055 is not stored in the EEPROM, and has the value "012" when the
electronic power supply is switched on.
PNU=37Hex;
1
Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
5-7
Parameter List
02.96
PNU
OP1 parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indies
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status
0 to 120
Depends on
unit
3/U BR
3/U
100 to 1000
[V]
acc. to P070
2/ ABR
2/ A
10 to 100
[% of P071]
or
[% of 1.35*P071]
61
2/
2/
0.0 to 3276.7
[A]
acc. to P070
2/U BR
2/U
01 to 22
02
3/ ABR
3/ A
Par.
5.4
Drive data
P070
MLFB(6SE70 ... )
*
MLFB (order number) of the rectifier/regenerating unit
On POWER ON, the "Bootstrap" function is automatically selected as
long as P070 has not been set!
P071
*
P074
Enter the code of the corresponding MLFB here (see Section 4.3.9.2)
1
PNU=46Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Line Volts
Line voltage of the rectifier bridge
RMS value of the rated voltage at which the power section is actually
operated
1
PNU=47Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Limit LowVoltage
Response threshold for undervoltage disconnection and phase failure
monitoring and threshold for DC link voltage (ssee Section 4.3.10.1).
P075
*
P076
*
1
PNU=4AHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Rtd Amps
Rated DC voltage of the R/R unit
Output DC current (average value) at the power terminals X1-C and X1-D.
0.1
PNU=4BHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Config. PCircuit
Configuration of the power section
BR
BR
x1
Motoring only
x2
Motoring and generating possible
0x
No parallel power section connected
1x to 2x
Number of power sections connected in parallel
1
PNU=4CHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex 5-8
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Parameter List
PNU
OP1 parameter name
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indies
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status
* : Conf.
P077
Factory set. type
0 to 6
*
Selective factory setting (see Section 4.3.9.1)
The parameter can be modified in the state "MLFB input" (P052=2). There
are two methods for setting the parameters dependent on P077:
1: If a MLFB is not entered (P070=0), once P077 has been entered and
"MLFB input" has been terminated (P052=0), the selected parameter
becomes valid immediately
2: Via the selection "Par.reset" (P052=1 or P970=0), "generate factory
setting" is carried out and the setting of P077 is taken into account. The
values of P070 and P077 will not be changed, but all other parameters
are reset to their factory setting
0
3/U BR
3/U
-
3/ B
Par.
RRU
Parameter values:
0: Factory setting, acc. to "Parameter list", Chapter 5
1: With this setting, the following parameters are initialized differently as
compared to "0"
P554, P555
2: With this setting, the following parameters are initialized differently as
compared to "0"
P554, P555, P565, P566, P567, P575, P588, P607
4: With this setting, the following parameters are initialized differently as
compared to "0"
P554, P555, P565, P566, P575, P588, P607
5: With this setting, the following parameters are initialized differently as
compared to "0"
P486, P554, P555, P561, P565, P566, P567, P572, P575, P583, P587,
P588, 607
6: With this setting, the following parameters are initialized differently as
compared to "0"
P486, P554, P555, P561, P565, P566, P572, P575, P583, P587, P588,
P607
r089
1
PNU=4DHex; Type=02; Scaling: 1Hex Module slot1
4
Module in slot 1 (left) in the electronics box.
4 = Module CUR
(Designation: RRU=Rectifying Regenerative Unit)
PNU=59Hex;
RRU
1
Type=02; Scaling: 1Hex Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
5-9
Parameter List
02.96
PNU
OP1 parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
0 to 3
0
3/ HBR
3/ H
0
3/ HBR
3/ H
Par.
5.5
Hardware configuration
P090
Board Position 2
*
PCB in position 2 (right) of the electronic box
0 = No optional PCBs
1 = CB Communication Board
2 = TB Technology Board
3 = SCB Serial Communication Board
none
CB
TB
SCB
Description for Setting:
Only the following combinations of PCBs and positions are admitted:
Position 3(P091)
SCB
CB
SCB
CB
P091
*
Position 2(P090)
CB
TB
SCB
CB
TB
TB
SCB
1
PNU=5AHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Board Position 3
0 to 3
PCB in position 3 (center) of the electronic box
Text as for P090
Description see P090(PCB position 2)
1
PNU=5BHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex 5-10 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Parameter List
PNU
OP1 parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
0.000 to 32.767
[ ]
4
0.000
3/
3/
BR
BR
0.00 to 327.67
[mH]
4
0.00
3/
3/
BR
BR
0.000 to 32.767
[ ]
4
0.000
3/
3/
BR
BR
0.00 to 327.67
[mH]
4
0.00
3/
3/
BR
BR
0.00 to 327.67
[mF]
4
0.00
3/
3/
BR
BR
Par.
5.6
P140
Data of the DC link
Rectifier Resist
Circuit resistance in the rectifier bridge
This parameter is automatically set when circuit identification takes place
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
P141
0.001
PNU=6EHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Rectifier Induct
Circuit inductance of the rectifier bridge
This parameter is automatically set when circuit identification takes place
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
P142
**
0.01
PNU=6FHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Inverter Resist.
Circuit resistance of the regenerative bridge
This parameter is automatically set when circuit identification takes place
(P052=21)
RDS- parameter
P143
**
0.001
PNU=70Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Inverter Induct.
Circuit inductance of the regenerative bridge
This parameter is automatically set when circuit identification takes place
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
P144
0.01
PNU=71Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex DC Bus Capacit.
Capacitance of the DC link
This parameter is automatically set when circuit identification takes place
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
PNU=72Hex;
0.01
Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
5-11
Parameter List
02.96
PNU
OP1 parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
0 to 1818Hex
-
3/ BR
0.0 to 150.0% of
P075
[%]
4
150.0%
3/
3/
ABR
A
-150.0 to 0.0% of
P075
[%]
4
-150.0%
3/
3/
ABR
A
0.01 to 1.00
4
0.15
3/
3/
BR
BR
0.001 to 1.000
[s]
4
0.015
3/
3/
BR
BR
0.10 to 200.00
4
3.00
3/
3/
BR
BR
Par.
5.7
r150
Control
Control Status
Status word of the control
15
7
14
6
13
12
5
4
11
3
10
2
9
1
8
0
Meaning of the individual segments
3
4
11
12
Rectifier current limit reached
Rectifier stability limit reached
Regerating current limit reached
Inverter stability limit reached
Segment bright: corresponding limit reached
Segment dark:
corresponding limit not reached
P160
1
PNU=96Hex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex Motor Curr Limit
Motoring current limit
The rectifier current is limited to the value set here
RDS parameter
P161
**
0.1
PNU=0A0Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Regen Curr Limit
Generating current limit
The regenerating current is limited to the value set here.
RDS parameter
P310
0.1
PNU=0A1Hex; Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex DC Curr Reg Gain
Proportional gain of the DC link current controller
This parameter is automatically set when circuit identification takes place
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
P311
0.01
PNU=136Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex DC Curr Reg Time
Integral-action (reset) time of the DC link current controller
This parameter is automatically set when circuit identification takes place
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
P313
0.001
PNU=137Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex DC Volts RegGain
Proportional gain of the DC link voltage controller
This parameter is automatically set when circuit identification takes place
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
0.01
PNU=139Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex 5-12 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Parameter List
PNU
OP1 parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
0.10 to 100.00
[s]
4
3.00
3/
3/
BR
BR
0.00 to 100.00
[%] of 1.35*P071
4
0.01
3/
3/
BR
BR
-100.00 to 0.00
[%] of 1.35*P071
4
-1.00%
3/
3/
BR
BR
0.00 to 100.00
[%] of 1.35* Supply
voltage at the
rectifier bridge
4
80.00
3/
3/
ABR
A
0.00 to 100.00
[%] of 1.35xP071
4
6.00%
3/
3/
ABR
ABR
0 to 9999
[ms]
4
5
3/
3/
BR
BR
0 to 9999
[ms]
4
500
3/
3/
BR
BR
Par.
P314
DC Volts RegTime
Integral-action (reset) time of the DC link voltage controller
This parameter is automatically set when circuit identification takes place
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
P316
0.01
PNU=13AHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex DC V-Reg +Limit
Positive threshold for the dead band of the setpoint/actual-value difference
of the Ud controller
A setpoint/actual-value deviation signal for the DC link voltage is not
applied to the Ud controller until the deviation of the DC link voltage
exceeds the value set here.
RDS parameter
P317
0.01
PNU=13CHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex DC V-Reg -Limit
Negative threshold for the dead band of the setpoint/actual-value difference
of the Ud controller
A setpoint/actual-value deviation signal for the DC link voltage is not
applied to the Ud controller until the deviation of the DC link voltage drops
below the value set
RDS parameter
P318
0.01
PNU=13DHex; Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex DC V(set,red)
DC link voltage setpoint when selecting the DC link voltage reduction
function
RDS parameter
P319
0.01
PNU=13EHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex DC V(set,red)Hys
Hysteresis for Ud < Ud(set,red)
(message "Ud reduced")
RDS parameter
P320
0.01
PNU=13FHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Smooth Load Amps
Smoothing time for feedforward load current injection
RDS parameter
P329
1
PNU=140Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex PreCharge Time
DC link pre-charging time
RDS parameter
1
PNU=149Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
5-13
Parameter List
02.96
PNU
OP1 parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
0 to 3
0
3/
3/
BR
B
2
3/
3/
BR
B
Par.
5.8
Convenience functions
P353
Thyristor Test
*
Function test of the S/F unit thyristors
0
1
2
3
Thyristor test inactive
Thyristors are tested when the first ON command is given after
switching on the electronics power supply
Thyristors are tested at each ON command
Thyristors tested at the next ON command. If no fault occurs,
parameter P353 is reset to 0.
not active
first ON
every ON
next ON
Important: When units are connected in parallel (see Section 3.7), the
thyristor test results are only conditionally useful.
Note: The thyristor test can only be carried out if the
DC link voltage is less than 5% of 1.35*P071. Following an ON
command, therefore, the unit waits in operating status o012
until this condition is fulfilled!
Exception: In slave mode (control word bit 27=1), the thyristor
test is only carried out when Ud 5%. When Ud 5%, a
selected thyristor test (P353>0) is ignored (with P353=3, P353
remains at 3).
The thyristors of the regenerating bridge are also fired for the
purposes of the thyristor test in the case of "regenerating
inhibited" (control word 1, bit 12, corresponding source P572
selected).
P354
*
1
PNU=161Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Ground Fault Test
0 to 3
Checking the S/F unit for ground faults
This is not a protective function as defined by the VDE guidelines!
0
1
2
3
Ground fault test inactive
Ground fault test when the first ON command is given after
switching on the electronics power supply
Ground fault test at each ON command
Ground fault test at the next ON command. If no fault occurs,
parameter P353 is reset to 0
inactive
First ON
Any ON
Next ON
Note: The ground fault test is only carried out if the DC link voltage is
less than 50% of 1.35*P071; otherwise it is automatically
skipped!
1
PNU=162Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex 5-14 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Parameter List
PNU
OP1 parameter name
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
* : Conf.
P366
Auto Restart
0 to 2
*
Auto restart after power outage
If the power fails at one of the terminals U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3, 1U2/1T1,
1V2/1T2 1W2/1T3, X9.1 and X9.2, or if the voltage is not within the
permissible tolerance range and the DC link voltage has dropped beneath
the P074 * 1.35 * P071 threshold, the S/F unit responds as follows::
0
3/
3/
1.0 to 600.0
[min]
4
10.0
2/ ABR
2/ AB
0.0 to +120.0
[s]
0.0
3/ BR
3/ B
Par.
0
Auto restart inhibited
No automatic restart; the corresponding fault message (F003,
F004, F005, F007, F009 or F010) is triggered.
BR
BR
OFF
1
Acknowledgment following power outage
The rectifier/regenerating unit enters status o008 (switch-on
inhibit) or o009 (switch on/off from the I/O keys of the PMU). On ON Reset
power recovery, a new ON command must be given to enable
the DC link to re-charge. The inverter is not automatically
restarted by the WEA (auto restart) function.
2
Restart following power recovery and pre-charging of the DC
link
During the power outage, the controllers and firing pulses of the
PZD R/R are inhibited. The rectifier/regenerating unit enters
status o010. On recovery of the voltage, the DC link is charged
again as quickly as possible (see Section 4.3.10.1).
ON Always
Important: The necessary external measures must be taken to guarantee
safety on an automatic restart!
P408
1
PNU=16EHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Caps FormingTime
Forming time of the DC link
This parameter is used when forming the DC link (P052=20).
RDS parameter
P409
0.1
PNU=198Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Contactor Delay
Closing delay of the line contactor
Closing of the line contactor is delayed by the time set here with respect to
the "Switch on" command.
This parameter can be used to implement time grading when energizing the
line contactors of several drive units in order to prevent the inrush currents
of the autotransformers for regenerative mode overloading a supply
transformer.
0.1
PNU=199Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
5-15
Parameter List
02.96
PNU
OP1 parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
0 to 6005
2
(0)
3/
3/
BR
BR
0.00 to 100.00
[%] of 1.35*P071
4
2.00
3/
3/
BR
B
0.00 to 10.00
[s]
4
0.10
3/
3/
BR
B
Par.
5.9
Setpoint channel
P486
Src Current Setp
*
Setpoint source
Parameter values:
As per PZD wiring of the setpoint channel (see Section 4.3.1.3)
Only effective if slave drive (control word 2, bit 27 =1)
G/R parameter
P517
1
PNU=1E6Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex DC Volts Dev Lim
Setpoint/actual-value deviation of Ud:
If the deviation between the Ud setpoint and the actual Ud is considerable,
the "Setpoint/actual-value deviation" message is generated (status word 1
Bit 8 (r552))
Compare P518 (min. duration of deviation)
RDS- parameter
P518
0.01
PNU=205Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Deviation Time
Min. deviation time:
If there is a deviation (P517), the "Setpoint/actual-value deviation" message
(status word 1 bit 8 (r552)) is generated after this minimum time has
elapsed
RDS parameter
0.01
PNU=206Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex 5-16 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Parameter List
PNU
OP1 parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
-
2/
BR
-
2/
BR
-
2/
BR
-
2/
BR
0 to 6005
2
(i001=1010)
(i002=1001)
2/
2/
BR
BR
1 to 6005
2
(i001=1010)
(i002=1002)
2/
2/
BR
BR
Par.
5.10
r550
Control and status word
Control Word 1
Display of the control word 1 bits 0 to 15, see Section 4.3.1.1.2
15
7
r551
14
6
13
5
12
4
11
3
10
2
9
1
8
0
1
PNU=226Hex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex Control Word 2
Display of the control word 2 bits 16 to 31, see Section 4.3.1.1.2
31
30
23
22
r552
29
28
21
20
27
26
19
18
25
24
17
16
1
PNU=227Hex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex Status Word 1
Display of the status word 1 bits 0 to 15, see Section 4.3.1.2.2
15
7
r553
14
6
13
5
12
4
11
3
10
2
9
1
8
0
1
PNU=228Hex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex Status Word 2
Display of the status word 2 bits 16 to 31, see Section 4.3.1.2.2
31
30
23
22
P554
*
29
28
21
20
27
26
19
18
25
24
17
16
1
PNU=229Hex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex Src ON/OFF1
Source of the 'ON/OFF1' command (control word 1, bit 0)
0:
OFF1
1:
Not allowed
1001: CUR, binary input 1
1010: PMU ON/OFF keys
Other values: see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data
wiring of the control word)
B/R Parameter
P555
*
1
PNU=22AHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Src1 OFF2
Source 1 of the 'OFF2' command (control word 1, bit 1)
0:
Not allowed
1:
Condition for operation
1002: binary input 2 of the CUR board
Other values: see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data
wiring of the control word)
B/R Parameter
1
PNU=22BHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
5-17
Parameter List
02.96
PNU
OP1 parameter name
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
* : Conf.
P556
Src2 OFF2
1 to 6005
*
Source 2 of the 'OFF2' command (control word 1, bit 1)
2
1
2/
2/
BR
BR
1 to 6005
2
1
2/
2/
BR
BR
1 to 6005
2
(1)
2/
2/
BR
BR
0 to 6005
2
(i001=0)
(i002=1003)
2/
2/
BR
BR
0 to 6005
2
(0)
2/
2/
BR
BR
0 to 6005
2
(2001)
2/
2/
BR
BR
Par.
Description see P555
B/R Parameter
P557
*
1
PNU=22CHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Src3 OFF2
Source 3 of the 'OFF2' command (control word 1, bit 1)
Description see P555
B/R Parameter
P561
*
1
PNU=22DHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Src InvRelease
Source for the "Run enable" command (control word 1, bit 3)
0:
Pulse inhibit
1:
Automatic "Run enable" at end of waiting times
Other values: see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data
wiring of the control word)
B/R Parameter
P565
*
1
PNU=231Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Src1 Fault Reset
Source 1 of the 'Reset' command (control word 1, bit 7)
0:
No source selected
1:
Not allowed
1003: Binary input 3 of the CUR board
Other values: see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data
wiring of the control word) whereby "Reset" from the
PMU is always possible
Note: The "Acknowledge" control command is edge-triggered
B/R parameter
P566
*
1
PNU=235Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Src2 Fault Reset
Source 2 of the 'Reset' command (control word 1, bit 7)
Description see P565
B/R parameter
P567
*
1
PNU=236Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Src3 Fault Reset
Source 3 of the 'Reset' command (control word 1, bit 7)
Description see P565
B/R parameter
1
PNU=237Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex 5-18 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Parameter List
PNU
OP1 parameter name
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
* : Conf.
P568
Src Jog1 ON
0 to 6005
*
Source of the 'Jog 1' command (control word 1, bit 8)
2
0
2/
2/
BR
BR
0 to 6005
2
0
2/
2/
BR
BR
0 to 6005
2
0
2/
2/
ABR
ABR
0 to 6005
2
(1)
2/
2/
BR
BR
1 to 6005
2
1
2/
2/
BR
BR
Par.
0:
No Jog operation
1:
Not allowed
Other values: see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data
wiring of the control word)
B/R-Parameter
P569
*
1
PNU=238Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Src Jog2 ON
Source of the 'Jog 2' command (control word 1, bit 9)
Description see P568
B/R parameter
P571
1
PNU=239Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Src Reduce DC V
*
Source for the "Reduce Ud" control command (control word 1, bit 11)
Wait for Ud reduction
0:
Ud reduction inactive
1:
Ud reduction requested (permanent Ud reduction)
other values: see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data
wiring of the control word)
B/R parameter
P572
*
**
1
PNU=23BHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Src RegenRelease
Source for the "Regenerating enable" control command (control word 1, bit
12)
0:
Regenerating inhibited
1:
Regenerating enabled
Other values: see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data
wiring of the control word)
B/R parameter
P573
*
1
PNU=23CHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Src No ExtFault3
Source for the "External fault 3" control command (control word 1, bit 13)
L signal causes disconnection of the faulted drive.
0:
Not allowed
1:
No external fault 3
1003: Binary input 3 of the CUR board
Other values: see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data
wiring of the control word)
B/R parameter
1
PNU=23DHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
5-19
Parameter List
02.96
PNU
OP1 parameter name
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
* : Conf.
P574
Src Motor/Regen
0 to 6005
*
Source for the "Generating/motoring" control command (control word 1, bit
14)
2
0
2/
2/
BR
BR
1 to 6005
2
(1)
2/
2/
BR
BR
0 to 6005
2
0
3/
3/
BR
BR
0 to 6005
2
0
2/
2/
BR
BR
Par.
**
0:
Control command ineffective (motoring and generating mode
permitted
1:
Not allowed
Other values:
see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data
wiring of the control word)
B/R parameter
P575
*
1
PNU=23EHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Src No ExtFault1
Source for the "External fault 1" control command (control word 1, bit 15)
L signal causes disconnection of the faulted drive.
0:
Not allowed
1:
No external fault 1
1003: Binary input 3 of the CUR board
Other values:
see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data
wiring of the control word)
B/R parameter
P578
*
1
PNU=23FHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Src RDataSetBit0
Source for bit 0 (control word 2, bit 18) for selecting the reserve data set
(RDS)
0:
RDS bit 0 has the value 0
1:
RDS bit 0 has the value 1
Other values:
see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data
wiring of the control word)
B/R parameter
P579
*
1
PNU=242Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Src RDataSetBit1
Source for bit 1 (control word 2, bit 19) for selecting the reserve data set
(RDS)
0:
RDS bit 1 has the value 0
1:
RDS bit 1 has the value 1
Other values:
see allowed settings in section 4.3.1.1 (process data
wiring of the control word)
B/R parameter
1
PNU=243Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex 5-20 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Parameter List
PNU
OP1 parameter name
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
* : Conf.
P583
Src 12-Pulse Mode
1 to 6005
*
Source for control command "12-pulse mode is selected" (control word 2,
bit 23)
2
(0)
3/
3/
BR
BR
1 to 6005
2
1
2/
2/
BR
BR
0 to 6005
2
(0)
2/
2/
BR
BR
1 to 6005
2
(1)
3/
3/
BR
BR
1 to 6005
2
1
3/
3/
BR
BR
Par.
0:
No 12-pulse mode
1:
12-pulse mode is selected
Other values: see allowed settings in section 4.3.1.1 (process data
wiring of the control word)
B/R parameter
P586
*
1
PNU=247Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Src No ExtFault2
Source of the 'External fault 2' message (control word 2, bit 26)
L signal causes disconnection of the faulted unit after a pre-charging time
of + 200ms if the rectifier/regenerating unit is in the "RUN" status.
0:
Not allowed
1:
No external fault
1004: Binary input 4 of the CUR board
Other values: see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data
wiring of the control word)
B/R parameter
P587
*
1
PNU=24AHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Src Master/Slave
Source for the master/slave drive changeover (control word 2, bit 27)
0:
Master drive: The control works with an internal current setpoint
1:
Slave drive: The control works with an external current setpoint
Other values: see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data
wiring of the control word)
B/R parameter
P588
*
1
PNU=24BHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Src No Ext Warn1
Source of the 'External warning 1' message (control word 2, bit 28)
0:
Not allowed
1:
No external warning
Other values:
see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data wiring of
the control word)
B/R- parameter
P589
*
1
PNU=24CHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Src No Ext Warn2
Source of the 'external warning 2' message (control word 2, bit 29))
0:
Not allowed
1:
No external warning
Other values: see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data
wiring of the control word)
B/R parameter
1
PNU=24DHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
5-21
Parameter List
02.96
PNU
OP1 parameter name
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
* : Conf.
P590
Src Base/Reserve
0 to 6005
*
Source of the 'Base / reserve settings' switching command (control word 2,
bit 30)
1005
3/
3/
BR
BR
1 to 4216
1
3/
3/
BR
BR
-
2/
BR
0 to 4212
2
0
3/
3/
BR
BR
0 to 4212
2
0
3/
3/
BR
BR
Par.
0:
Base setting
1:
Reserve setting
1005: Binary input 5 of the CUR board
Other values: see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data
wiring of the control word)
No base/reserve changeover possible
P591
*
1
PNU=24EHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Src ContactorMsg
Source of the 'Main contactor energized' message(control word 2, bit 31)
0:
1:
1001 to 1005:
4101 to 4116:
4201 to 4216:
Not allowed
No main contactor checkback signal
CUR terminals
SCB-SCI1- terminals (serial I/O)
SCB-SCI2- terminals (serial I/O)
For details see Section 4.3.1.1
Notes:
If the function is active, pulses are released as soon as the message is
available.
No base / reserve settings possible
r599
1
PNU=24FHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex CW/SW 12-Pulse
Display of control/status word for 12-pulse mode, bit 0 to 15, see Section
3.8.4.
15
7
P600
*
14
6
13
5
12
4
11
3
10
2
9
1
8
0
1
PNU=257Hex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex Trg Bit Ready On
Destination of the status bit 'ready for turn ON' (status word 1, bit 0)
Power is ON, the drive may be turned on.
Depending on the selected index all settings according to Section 4.3.1.2
(process data wiring of the status word) may be selected.
i01:
i02:
P601
*
GG:
SCI :
selection of a base drive terminal
selection of a SCI1/2 terminal
1
PNU=258Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Trg Bit Rdy Oper
Destination of the status bit 'Ready for operation' (status word 1, bit 1)
All the settings specified in Section 4.3.1.2 (process data wiring of the
status word) are permissible, depending on the index selected
Parameter values, indices: as P600
1
PNU=259Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex 5-22 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Parameter List
PNU
OP1 parameter name
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
* : Conf.
P602
Trg Bit Operat
0 to 4212
*
Destination of the status bit 'Run' (status word 1, bit 2)
The unit is in operation.
2
0
2/
2/
BR
BR
0 to 4212
2
i001=1002
i002=0
2/
2/
BR
BR
0 to 4212
2
0
3/
3/
BR
BR
0 to 4212
2
0
3/
3/
BR
BR
0 to 4212
2
(0)
2/
2/
BR
BR
0 to 4212
2
0
3/
3/
BR
BR
0 to 4212
2
0
3/
3/
BR
BR
Par.
Parameter values, indices: as P600
P603
*
1
PNU=25AHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Trg Bit Fault
Destination of the status bit 'Fault' (status word 1, bit 3)
Note:
For issuing the fault message via a terminal the active status (bit has Hlevel) is inverted (broken wire proof).
Parameter values, indices: as P600
P604
*
1
PNU=25BHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Trg Bit No OFF2
Destination of the status bit 'No OFF2 command' (status word 1, bit 4)
Parameter values, indices: as P600
P606
*
1
PNU=25CHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Trg BitONblocked
Destination of the status bit 'Turn-ON locked' (status word 1, bit 6)
Note:
For issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H-level) is
inverted (broken wire proof).
Parameter values, indices: as P600
P607
*
1
PNU=25EHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Trg Bit Warning
Destination of the status bit 'Warning' (status word 1, bit 7)
Note:
For issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H-level) is
inverted (broken wire proof).
Parameter values, indices: as P600
P608
*
1
PNU=25FHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Trg Bit Deviat.
Destination wiring of the status bit "Ud set = Ud act“ (status word 1, bit 8) cf. P517
Parameter values, indices: as P600
P610
*
1
PNU=260Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Trg Regen Ready
Destination wiring of the status bit "Regenerating ready" (status word 1,
Bit 10)
Parameter values, indices: as P600
1
PNU=260Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
5-23
Parameter List
02.96
PNU
OP1 parameter name
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
* : Conf.
P611
Trg Low Voltage
0 to 4212
*
Destination of the status bit 'Undervoltage' (status word 1, bit 11)
2
0
3/
3/
BR
BR
0 to 4212
2
0
3/
3/
BR
BR
0 to 4212
2
0
3/
3/
ABR
ABR
0 to 4212
2
0
3/
3/
BR
BR
0 to 4212
2
0
3/
3/
BR
BR
0 to 4212
2
0
3/
3/
BR
BR
Par.
Note:
For issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H-level) is
inverted (broken wire proof).
Parameter values, indices: as P600
P612
*
1
PNU=263Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Trg Bit Contact
Destination of the status bit 'Energize main contactor' (status word 1, bit 12)
H level: energize contactor!
Important: Relay X9-4/5, whose function cannot be programmed, is
provided for controlling the main contactor.
Parameter values, indices: as P600
P613
*
1
PNU=264Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Trg DC V reduced
Destination wiring for the status bit "Ud reduced“
(status word 1, bit 13)
Parameter values, indices: as P600
P614
*
**
1
PNU=265Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Trg Motor/Regen
Destination wiring for the status bit "Regenerative/motoring mode" (status
word 1, bit 14)
Parameter values, Indices: as P600
P618
*
1
PNU=266Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Trg Current Lim.
Destination wiring of the status bit "Current limit active"
(status word 2, bit 18)
Note:
For issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H-level) is
inverted (broken-wire proof).
Parameter values, indices: as P600
P619
*
1
PNU=26AHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Trg Bit Ext Flt1
Destination of the status bit 'External fault 1' (status word 2, bit 19)
Note:
For issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H-level) is
inverted (broken wire proof).
Parameter values, indices: as P600
1
PNU=26BHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex 5-24 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Parameter List
PNU
OP1 parameter name
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
* : Conf.
P620
Trg Bit Ext Flt2
0 to 4212
*
Destination of the status bit 'External fault 2'
(status word 2, bit 20)
Note:
For issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H-level) is
inverted (broken wire proof).
If an ON command is active, L-level causes fault trip after 200 msec.
2
0
3/
3/
BR
BR
0 to 4212
2
0
3/
3/
BR
BR
0 to 4212
2
0
3/
3/
BR
BR
0 to 4212
2
0
3/
3/
BR
BR
0 to 4212
2
0
3/
3/
BR
BR
Par.
Parameter values, indices: as P600
P621
*
1
PNU=26CHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Trg Bit ExtWarn
Destination of the status bit 'External warning'
(status word 2, bit 21)
Note:
For issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H-level) is
inverted (broken wire proof).
Parameter values, indices: as P600
P622
*
1
PNU=26DHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Trg Bit i2t Inv
Destination of the status bit 'Warning unit overload'
(status word 2, bit 22);
Note:
For issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H-level) is
inverted (broken wire proof).
Parameter values, indices: as P600
P623
*
1
PNU=26EHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Trg BitFltTmpInv
Destination of the status bit 'Fault unit overtemperature'
(status word 2, bit 23
Note:
For issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H-level) is
inverted (broken wire proof).
Parameter values, Indices: as for P600
P624
*
1
PNU=26FHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Trg BitWarTmpInv
Destination of the status bit 'Warning unit overtemperature'
(status word 2, bit 24
Note:
For issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H-level) is
inverted (broken wire proof).
Parameter values, indices: as P600
1
PNU=270Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
5-25
Parameter List
02.96
PNU
OP1 parameter name
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
* : Conf.
P631
Trg Bit Charging
0 to 4212
*
Destination of the status bit 'Charging active' (status word 2, bit 31)
2
0
3/
3/
Par.
BR
BR
Note:
For issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H-level) is
inverted (broken wire proof).
Parameter values, indices: as P600
1
PNU=277Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex 5-26 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Parameter List
PNU
OP1 parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
0 to 999
37
2/
2/
BR
BR
320,00
[V]
10.00
2/
2/
BR
BR
-100.00 to 100.00
[V]
0.00
2/
2/
BR
BR
0 to 3
0
2/
2/
BR
BR
Par.
5.11
P655
Analog input/output
CUR AnaOutActVal
Number of the parameters whose value is to be output at the analog output
of the CUR, (terminal X102-14).
P656
1
PNU=28FHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex CUR AnaOut Gain
Gain for the analog output of the CUR (terminal X102-14)
P656 = desired analog output voltage at PWE=100%, if offset=0
The output voltage is calculated with the following formula:
U(out)= [(PWE/100%) * P656] + P657
P657
0.01 V
PNU=290Hex; Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex CUR AnaOutOffset
Offset for the analog output on the CUR (terminal X102-14)
The analog output can represent voltages of -10V to +10V.
P658
*
0.01 V
PNU=291Hex; Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex AnaOut Conf Curr
Configuration of terminal X102-16 (actual current display)
0
Output with correct sign
(positive voltage: motoring current)
(negative voltage: regenerative current)
1
Output absolute value (positive voltage only)
2
Signed output, inverted
(positive voltage: motoring current)
(negative voltage: regenerative current)
3
Output of absolute value, inverted (negative voltage only)
signed
absoluteVal
inverted
inv. absVal
1
PNU=292Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
5-27
Parameter List
02.96
PNU
OP1 parameter name
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
* : Conf.
SCI AnalogInConf
0 to 2
6
0
3/
3/
BR
BR
0 to 15
6
2
3/
3/
BR
BR
-320.00 to 320.00
[V]
6
0.00
3/
3/
BR
BR
Par.
P660
Configuration of the SCI analog inputs; defines the kind of the input signals
Parameter values
0:
1:
2:
Terminals
X428/3, 6, 9
-10 V ... + 10 V
0 V ... + 10 V
Terminals
X428/5, 8, 11
- 20 mA ... + 20 mA
0 mA ... + 20 mA
4 mA ... + 20 mA
Notes:
Only one signal can be wired per input; alternatively voltage or current
signals can be evaluated.
Voltage and current signals must be connected to different terminals.
Settings 1 and 2 only allow unipolar signals, i. e. the internal process data
are also unipolar.
At setting 2 an input current < 2 mA causes a fault trip (broken wire proof)
The offset scaling of the analog inputs is done via P662.
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
Sl11
Sl12
Sl13
Sl21
Sl22
Sl23
Slave 1, analog input 1
Slave 1, analog input 2
Slave 1, analog input 3
Slave 2, analog input 1
Slave 2, analog input 2
Slave 2, analog input 3
Condition:
The related SCB board must be reported via P090 and P091, respectively
P661
1
PNU=294Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex SCI AnaInSmooth
Filter time constant of the SCI analog inputs
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
P662
Sl11
Sl12
Sl13
Sl21
Sl22
Sl23
Slave 1, analog input 1
Slave 1, analog input 2
Slave 1, analog input 3
Slave 2, analog input 1
Slave 2, analog input 2
Slave 2, analog input 3
1
PNU=295Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex SCI AnalogInOffs
Offset scaling of the SCI analog inputs
Description for setting see SCI manual
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
Sl11
Sl12
Sl13
Sl21
Sl22
Sl23
Slave 1, analog input 1
Slave 1, analog input 2
Slave 1, analog input 3
Slave 2, analog input 1
Slave 2, analog input 2
Slave 2, analog input 3
0.01 V
PNU=296Hex; Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex 5-28 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Parameter List
PNU
OP1 parameter name
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
* : Conf.
SCI AnaOutActVal
0 to 999
6
0
3/
3/
BR
BR
-320.00 to 320.00
[V]
6
10.00
3/
3/
BR
BR
-320.00 to 320.00
[V]
6
0.00
3/
3/
BR
BR
Par.
P664
Actual value output via SCI analog outputs
Description for setting:
Enter the parameter number of the quantities, which are to be issued; for
details see SCI manual.
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
Sl11
Sl12
Sl13
Sl21
Sl22
Sl23
Slave 1, analog output 1
Slave 1, analog output 2
Slave 1, analog output 3
Slave 2, analog output 1
Slave 2, analog output 2
Slave 2, analog output 3
Condition:
The related SCB board must be reported via P090 and P091, respectively
P665
1
PNU=298Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex SCI AnaOut Gain
Proportional gain of the SCI analog outputs
Description for setting: see SCI manual
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
P666
Sl11
Sl12
Sl13
Sl21
Sl22
Sl23
Slave 1, analog output 1
Slave 1, analog output 2
Slave 1, analog output 3
Slave 2, analog output 1
Slave 2, analog output 2
Slave 2, analog output 3
0.01 V
PNU=299Hex; Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex SCI AnaOut Offs
Offset of the SCI analog outputs
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
Sl11
Sl12
Sl13
Sl21
Sl22
Sl23
Slave 1, analog output 1
Slave 1, analog output 2
Slave 1, analog output 3
Slave 2, analog output 1
Slave 2, analog output 2
Slave 2, analog output 3
0.01 V
PNU=29AHex; Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
5-29
Parameter List
02.96
PNU
OP1-parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
0 to 999
16
i001=968
i002=0
...
i016=0
3/
3/
BR
B
0 to 999
5
i001=599
i002=34
i003=0
i004=0
i005=0
3/
3/
BR
B
0 to 5
0
3/ HBR
3/ H
2
0
3/
3/
Par.
5.12
Communications
P680
Scom1 Act Value
*
Process data assignment for actual-value output over serial interface SST1.
Defines the parameter positions in the telegram.
Notes:
Word 1 should be assigned status word 1 (r552=r968).
The length (number of words) of the process data part in the telegram is set
with P686, Index i001.
i001=Word 01 of the (process data part of the) telegram
i002=Word 02 of the (process data part of the) telegram
...
i016=Word 16 of the (process data part of the) telegram
P681
*
1
PNU=2A8Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Scom2 Act Value
Selection of the process data to be transmitted over serial interface SST2
(actual values) with peer-to-peer protocol selected (P688=1).
Defines the parameter positions in the telegram.
Notes:
The length (number of words) of the process data part in the peer-to-peer
telegram is set with P686, Index i003.
i001=Word 1 of the (process data part of the) telegram
i002=Word 2 of the (process data part of the) telegram
...
i005=Word 5 of the (process data part of the) telegram
P682
*
1
PNU=2A9Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex SCB Protocol
SCB can be operated as
master for the SCI boards or as
serial communications board
(see SCB manual).
0 = SCI-Module: Master for SCI boards
1 = 4 wire USS
2 = 2 wire USS
3 = Peer to Peer
4 = Option-1: not used
5 = Option-2; not used
SCI-Module
4 wire USS
2 wire USS
Peer 2 Peer
Option 1
Option 2
Condition:
SCB board must be reported via P090 and 0P91, respectively
P683
*
1
PNU=2AAHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex SCom/SCB BusAddr
Bus address of the serial communication interfaces
0 to 30
BR
B
i001 = SST1: bus address of serial comm. interface 1 (CUR)
i002 = SCB: SCB baud rate, if P682=1, 2
1
PNU=2ABHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex 5-30 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Parameter List
PNU
OP1 parameter name
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
* : Conf.
P684
SCom/SCB Baud
1 to 813
*
Serial interfaces baud rate
2
i001=6
i002=6
i003=13
3/
3/
BR
B
0 to 127
2
i001=127
i002=127
3/
3/
BR
B
0 to 16
3
2
3/
3/
BR
B
Par.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
300 Baud
600 Baud
1200 Baud
2400 Baud
4800 Baud
9600 Baud
19200 Baud
38400 Baud
57650 Baud
76800 Baud
93750 Baud
115200 Baud
187500 Baud
300 Bd
600 Bd
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd
57650 Bd
76800 Bd
93750 Bd
115200 Bd
187500 Bd
i001 = SST1: serial comm. interface 1 (CUR)
i002 = SCB: SCB, if P682=1, 2, 3
i003 = SST2: serial comm. interface 2 (CUR with PTP1 option)
P685
*
1
PNU=2ACHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex SCom/SCB #PKWDat
Number of words (16 bit) of the parameter data part in the net data block of
the telegram.
0:
No parameter data part in the telegram
3, 4 Parameter data part is 3 (parameter identifier, Ind, parameter
value), 4 words long
127 Variable parameter data length for the transfer of parameter
description and texts
i001 = SST1: serial comm. interface 1 (CUR)
i002 = SCB: SCB, if P682=1, 2
P686
*
1
PNU=2ADHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex SCom/SCB # PrDat
Number of words (16 bits) of the process data part in the net data block of
the telegram.
i001 = SST1: serial comm. interface 1 (CUR)
i002 = SCB: SCB, if P682=1, 2, 3
PWE=0 means that no process data are expected in the USS protocol and
that none are sent.
i003 = SST2:
serial comm. interface 2 (CUR with PTP1 option), if
Peer-to-Peer protocol is selected (P688=1), from 1 to 5 net
data words can be sent.
1
PNU=2AEHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
5-31
Parameter List
02.96
PNU
OP1 parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
0 to 6500
[ms]
3
i001=0
i002=0
i003=1
2/
2/
BR
BR
0 to 1
0
3/
3/
BR
B
5
0
3/
3/
BR
BR
Par.
P687
SCom/SCB TlgOFF
*
Telegram OFF time of CUR and SCB
If no correct telegram is received within the parameterized time a fault trip
is set.
Description for setting:
Value 0:
No monitoring, no fault trip; must be parameterized for sporadic
(acyclic) telegrams, e. g. operator panel OP at serial comm. interface 1.
i001 = SST1: serial comm. interface 1 (CUR)
i002 = SCB: SCB, if P682=1, 2, 3
i003 = SST2: serial comm. interface 2 (CUR with PTP1 option), if
Peer-to-Peer protocol is selected (P688=1).
With active Peer-To-Peer protocol (P688 = 1) and telegram
failure time P687.i003 0, the unit remains in operating state
o008 until telegram traffic is correct (see P688).
With P687.i003 = 0 AND P681.i001 = 599 in the case of
telegram failure, bits 3 and 6 of the first SST2 Peer-to-Peer
receive data (the control/status word sent from the partner unit
in 12-pulse mode) are set to 0.
P688
*
1ms
PNU=2AFHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex SST2 Protocol
Selection of the protocol for SST2 (serial interface 2 (CUR with PTP1
option))
0
1
P689
Interface is provided for factory-internal diagnostics purposes, 7
data bits + 1 parity bit, even parity,1 stop bit)
Peer-to-Peer protocol
(8 data bits + 1 parity bit, even parity,1 stop bit)
With active Peer-To-Peer protocol (P688 = 1) and telegram
failure time P687.i003 0, the unit remains in operating state
o008 until telegram traffic is correct.
1
PNU=2B0Hex; Typ=O2; Normierung: 1Hex SCB Peer2PeerExt
factory-internal
Peer to Peer
0 to 1
Immediate transfer on of data received via the peer to peer protocol of
SCB.
Mark of these words of the received peer to peer telegram which are to be
transferred on immediately.
0:
1:
No immediate transfer (only to CUR)
Immediate transfer (and passing to CUR)
CUR only
Transfer
i001 = W01: Word 01 of the (process data part of the) telegram
i002 = W02: Word 02 of the (process data part of the) telegram
.....
i005 = W05: Word 05 of the (process data part of the) telegram
Condition: P682 = 3 (peer to peer protocol)
1
PNU=2B1Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex 5-32 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Parameter List
PNU
OP1 parameter name
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
* : Conf.
P690
SCB Act Values
0 to 999
*
Actual value output via the serial communications interface of the SCB
board.
Defines, which parameter is to be transferred at which telegram address.
16
i001=968
i002=0
...
i016=0
3/
3/
BR
B
0 to 999
16
i001=968
i002=0
...
i016=0
3/
3/
BR
B
0 to 6500
[ms]
20
3/
3/
BR
BR
0 to 65535
0
3/ HBR
3/ H
0 to 65535
0
3/ HBR
3/H
Par.
Notes:
Word 1 should be set for status word 1 (r552=r968)
The length (number of words) of the process data part of the telegram is set
with P686, Index 02
i001 Word 01 of the (process data part of the) telegram
i002 Word 02 of the (process data part of the) telegram
...
i016 Word16 of the (process data part of the) telegram
P694
*
1
PNU=2B2Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex CB/TB Act Values
Actual-value output over the serial interface of the CB and/or TB module
Defines which parameter is to be transferred at which telegram address.
Note:
Word 1 should be set for status word 1 (r552=r968)
If "0" is entered (factory setting from i002 to i016), the option module does
not pass the current value of r000 to the control system (e.g. SIMATIC), but
the constant value "0".
i001 Word 01 of the (process data part of the) telegram
i002 Word 02 of the (process data part of the) telegram
...
i016 Word16 of the (process data part of the) telegram
P695
*
1
PNU=2B6Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex CB/TB TlgOFFTime
Telegram lag time of CB and TB
If no correct telegram is received within the parameterized time a fault trip
is set.
Monitoring is carried out at intervals of 20 ms, therefore it is only
appropriate to set values that are multiples of 20 ms.
Description for setting:
0:
no monitoring, no fault trip; must be parameterized for sporadic
(non-cyclic) telegrams, e. g. operator panel OP at serial comm.
interface 1.
P696
1 ms
PNU=2B7Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex CB Parameter 1
Communication board parameter 1.
See manual of the used communication board.
Parameter is only needed if a communication board is reported (P090 or
P091 = 1)
The communication board checks, if the set value is valid. If the value is not
accepted, the fault message 80 is issued with fault value 5
P697
1
PNU=2B8Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex CB Parameter 2
Communication board parameter 2
see P696
1
PNU=2B9Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
5-33
Parameter List
PNU
OP1 parameter name
* : Conf.
02.96
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
CB Parameter 3
0 to 65535
0
3/ HBR
3/ H
0 to 65535
0
3/ HBR
3/ H
0 to 65535
0
3/ HBR
3/ H
0 to 65535
0
3/ HBR
3/ H
0 to 65535
0
3/ HBR
3/ H
0 to 65535
0
3/ HBR
3/ H
0 to 65535
0
3/ HBR
3/ H
0 to 65535
0
3/ HBR
3/ H
Par.
P698
Communication board parameter 3
See P696
P699
1
PNU=2BAHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex CB Parameter 4
Communication board parameter 4
See P696
P700
1
PNU=2BBHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex CB Parameter 5
Communication board parameter 5
See P696
P701
1
PNU=2BCHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex CB Parameter 6
Communication board parameter 6
See P696
P702
1
PNU=2BDHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex CB Parameter 7
Communication board parameter 7
See P696
P703
1
PNU=2BEHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex CB Parameter 8
Communication board parameter 8
See P696
P704
1
PNU=2BFHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex CB Parameter 9
Communication Board Parameter 9
See P696
P705
1
PNU=2C0Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex CB Parameter 10
Communication board parameter 10
See P696
1
PNU=2C1Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex 5-34 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Parameter List
PNU
OP1 parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Par.
5.13
r720
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
3
3/U
BR
3
3/U
BR
3
3/U
BR
3
3/U
BR
-
3/
Diagnostics
SW Version
Software version of the PCBs in positions 1, 2 and 3 of the electronic box.
Indices:
i001: Pos1: Software version of the PCB in position 1
i002: Pos2: Software version of the PCB in position 2
i003: Pos3: Software version of the PCB in position 3
r721
Pos1
Pos2
Pos3
0.1
PNU=2D0Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex SW Generat. Date
Software generation date of the CUR board.
Indices: i001= Year
i002= Month
i003= Day
r722
Year
Mon
Day
1
PNU=2D1Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex SW ID
Extended software version ID of the modules in slots 1, 2 and 3 of the
electronic box for internal purposes.
Indices:
i001: SPL1: Software code of the PCB in position 1
i002: SPL2: Software code of the PCB in position 2
i003: SPL3: Software code of the PCB in position 3
r723
0.1
PNU=2D2Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex PCB Code
Identification code of the PCBs in positions 1, 2 and 3 of the electronic box
Indices:
i001: SPL1: PCB code of the PCB in position 1
i002: SPL2: PCB code of the PCB in position 2
i003: SPL3: PCB code of the PCB in position 3
PCB codes:
CUR: 105
CB:
140 - 149
TB: 130 - 139
SCB: 120 - 129
r725
1
PNU=2D3Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex HeadroomCalcTime
0 to 100%
[%]
Headroom of the CPU on the CUR module.
1%
PNU=2D5Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex BR
PZD gr.: 1
100% computer time free
Analog output: 100% Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
5-35
Parameter List
02.96
PNU
OP1 parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Par.
r730
SCB Diagnostics
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
16
3/ HBR
32
3/ HBR
24
2/ BR
SCB diagnostics
All values in HEX display
If a quantity is represented, overflow takes place at FF Hex.
The meaning of several Indices depends of the selected SCB protocol
(P682).
i001: flTC
i002: Terr
i003: Ferr
i004: Orun
i005: Prty
i006: STX
i007: ETX
i008: BCC
i009: L/KL
i010: T/An
i011: BCd0
i012: BCd1
i013: Warn
i014: Sl1?
i015: Sl2?
i016: IniF:
r731
Number of error-free telegrams
Number of error telegrams
Number of byte frame-errors
Number of overrun errors
Parity error
STX error
ETX error
Block check error
USS/Peer to Peer: incorrect telegram length
SCI modules: required maximum number of terminals
according to process data wiring (P554 to P631).
USS: Timeout
SCI Modules: required analog inputs / outputs
according to process data wiring of the setpoint
channel and actual value output via SCI (P664) .
PCB code word 0
PCB code word 1
SCB-DPR- warning word
Information, if slave 1 needed and if yes, which type.
0: no slave needed
1: SCI1
2: SCI2
Information, if slave 2 needed and if yes, which type.
0: no slave needed
1: SCI1
2: SCI2
with 'SCI modules': initialization fault
1
PNU=2DAHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex CB/TB Diagnostics
For detailed information see manuals of the used communication boards
(CB) or technology boards (TB).
r748
1
PNU=2DBHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Fault Time
The instants at which faults occur (reading of the hours counter r013 at the
instant the fault occurs)
See parameter r947 for details
Trip description by:
r947
r949
r951
P952
Fault number
Fault value
List of fault texts
Number of faults
1
PNU=2ECHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex 5-36 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Parameter List
PNU
OP1 parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
0.01 to 100.00
[%]
4
0.01
3/
3/
BR
BR
-100.00 to -0.01
[%]
4
-3.00
3/
3/
BR
BR
0 to 120
[el]
4
0
3/
3/
BR
BR
120 to 165
[el]
4
150
3/
3/
BR
B
0.00 to 100.00
[%] of P075
4
20.00
3/
3/
BR
BR
Par.
5.14
P773
Modulator
Deadband Convert
The reversing threshold of the auto-reversing module (in rectifier direction)
If the (signed) setpoint of the DC link current (output of the DC link voltage
controller on the output side of the limiting module) exceeds the value of +
0.05% set with this parameter, the firing pulses of the rectifier bridge are
enabled. These pulses are inhibited if the setpoint of the DC link current
drops below the value set here.
RDS parameter
P774
**
0.01 %
PNU=305Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Deadband Invert
The reversing threshold of the auto-reversing module (in regenerating
direction)
If the (signed) setpoint of the DC link current (output of the DC link voltage
controller on the output side of the limiting module) exceeds the value of 0.05% set with this parameter, the firing pulses of the rectifier bridge are
enabled. These pulses are inhibited if the setpoint of the DC link current
drops below the value set here..
RDS parameter
P775
0.01
PNU=306Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Min Gating Angle
Alpha G limit (rectifier stability limit)
RDS parameter
P776
1 el
PNU=307Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Max Gating Angle
Alpha W limit (inverter stability limit)
RDS parameter
P777
1 el
PNU=308Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Max Gating Angle Ramp
Transition ramp of the alpha W limit from pulsating to continuous DC (for
currents < pulsating threshold, the control angle is limited to 165°, for
currents > (pulsating threshold+P777) to P776 with linear interpolation
inbetween)
RDS parameter
1%
PNU=309Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
5-37
Parameter List
02.96
PNU
OP1 parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
0 to 1
1
3/ HBR
3/ B
0.01 to 1.00
[s]
0.03
3/
3/
0 to 65535
-
3/U BR
3/ BR
Par.
5.15
P785
*
P793
Factory parameters
I2t Control Word
2
Control word for the i t power section
2
0
Response of the i t monitor for the power section (i.e. 100% of
2
the i t value has been reached) results in an automatic
reduction of the limit for the current setpoint to the rated DC
current until the absolute value of the current setpoint has
dropped below the rated DC current before its limit, and the
calculated equivalent junction temperature rise is again below
the unit-specific response threshold. The current setpoint limit is
then raised again.
1
Response of the i t monitor for the power section (i.e. 100% of
2
the i t value has been reached) results in fault F022 and
disconnection.
2
1
PNU=311Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Line Voltage Delay
Stabilizing time for the line voltage
BR
BR
If the "Switch-on" command is given, the unit waits in status o010 for
voltage to be applied to the power section. The line voltage is not assumed
to be applied to the power terminals until amplitude, frequency and phase
symmetry lie within the permissible tolerance range for longer than the time
set with this parameter. The parameter applies to both the rectifier and
regenerative power terminals.
P799
0.01 s
PNU=319Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Special Access
Parameter for special access
1
PNU=31FHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex 5-38 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Parameter List
PNU
OP1 parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
0 to 7
0
3/
3/
3 to 126
3
3/ HBR
3/ H
0 to 31
6
3/
3/
BR
BR
0 to 6005
1005
3/
3/
BR
BR
Par.
5.16
Profile parameters
P917
Change Reports
*
Control word for spontaneous messages
If the value of an active parameter is changed, the new value is reported to
the programmable controller connected by means of the spontaneous
reporting mechanism. This function can be activated and de-activated for
each interface.
BR
B
Important:
When the control word is modified, spontaneous message buffers can be
deleted with the loss of spontaneous messages!
0
1
2
4
No spontaneous messages
Output of spontaneous messages over the DPR interface
(TB/CB)
Output of spontaneous messages over the BASE SERIAL
interface (SST1)
Output of spontaneous messages over SCB with USS protocol
inactive
TB/CB
SCom
SCB (USS)
Setting help:
Each interface is coded with a number.
Enter the number and/or the sum of several numbers assigned to the
interfaces to enable the spontaneous message mechanism for the relevant
interface(s).
P918
1
PNU=395Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex CB Bus Address
Protocol depending bus address for communication board; see manual of
this board.
Notes:
The communication board checks, if the set value is valid. (The bus
addresses 0 to 2 are reserved for master stations and therefore cannot be
set). If the value is not accepted, the fault message 80 is issued with fault
value 5
Condition:
P090=1 or P091=1 (communication board installed)
P927
*
1
PNU=396Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Parameter Access
Release of interfaces for the parameterization.
This parameter performs the same function as P053.
Parameter P053 can always be modified.
For description, see P053.
P928
*
1
PNU=39FHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Src Base/Reserve
Source of the switching command 'base / reserve settings' (control word 2,
bit 30)
This parameter performs the same function as P590.
For description, see P590.
1
PNU=3A0Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
5-39
Parameter List
02.96
PNU
OP1 parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Par.
r947
Fault Memory
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
64
2/
BR
64
2/
BR
Display of the faults which have occurred at the last trips. Each fault
number has a fault value and a fault time assigned to it (see Chapter 7 for
details of fault numbers and fault values). The relationship between the
responsible parameters is shown in the diagram below.
The fault numbers for the last (8 max.) faults are stored under the indices of
parameter r947. The fault number for the current (not yet reset) trip is
indicated by r947.001, the fault number for the last reset fault is indicated
by index 9, the fault number of the last-but-one reset fault is indicated by
index 17, etc. The entry "0" here means that no previous fault has occurred.
In contrast to the converter (SIMOVERT Master Drive FC, VC, SC), in the
case of the rectifier/regenerating unit only one fault can occur for each trip,
therefore the only significant indices are 1, 9, 17, 25, 33, 41, 49 and 57.
A fault value in the appropriate index of parameter r949 is assigned to
every fault number. This provides more detailed information on the type of
fault.
Apart from this, for each trip, the fault time which is the actual value of the
operating hours counter (r013) is stored in parameter r748. The data for the
current (not yet reset) trip is present as "day", "hours" and "seconds" in
indices 1 to 3. The data for the already reset, previous trips is present in
groups of 3 elements on the following indices.
r947
Fault number
Current
Index 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1st ack.
Index 9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Index 17 2nd ack.
...
r949
Fault value
Current
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1st ack.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2nd ack.
...
r748
Fault time
Curr. d
Curr. h
Curr. s
1st ack. d
1st ack. h
1st ack. s
2nd ack. d
2nd ack. h
2nd ack. s
...
Index 1
Index 4
Index 7
Index 10
Plain text describing the fault numbers is available under the corresponding
index of parameter r951.
If the electronics supply voltage fails, all fault numbers are saved, but only
those fault values and fault times relating to the last trip are stored. After
the supply voltage has been restored, the other indices have the value "0".
r949
1
PNU=3B3Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Fault Value
Fault values of the faults; allows a more detailed diagnosis at several faults.
The fault values are saved in the same indices as the related fault numbers
(r947) - see parameter P947.
1
PNU=3B5Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex 5-40 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Parameter List
PNU
OP1 parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Par.
r951
Fault Texts List
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
116
2/
BR
0
2/
2/
BR
BR
-
3/
BR
-
3/
BR
-
3/
BR
-
3/
BR
List of fault texts; every fault text is saved in the index equivalent to its fault
number.
P952
1
PNU=3B7Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex # of Faults
Number of faults stored in the fault memory (max. 8).
If the parameter is set to '0', the diagnosis memory (r748 - trip times, r947 fault number, r949 fault value) is cleared.
r953
1
PNU=3B8Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Warning Param 1
0 to 8
Warning Parameter 1
If a warning (numbers 1 to 16) is active, the related bar in the display is ON
16
8
15
7
14
6
13
5
12
4
11
3
10
2
9
1
For the meaning of the individual warnings, see Chapter 7.
r954
1
PNU=3B9Hex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex Warning Param 2
Warning Parameter 2
If a warning (numbers 17 to 32) is active, the related bar in the display is
ON
32
31
24
23
r955
30
29
22
21
28
27
20
19
26
25
18
17
1
PNU=3BAHex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex Warning Param 3
Warning Parameter 3
If a warning (numbers 33 to 48) is active, the related segment in the display
is ON
48
47
40
39
r956
46
45
38
37
44
43
36
35
42
41
34
33
1
PNU=3BBHex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex Warning Param 4
Warning Parameter 4
If a warning (numbers 49 to 64) is active, the related segment in the display
is ON
64
63
56
55
62
61
54
53
60
59
52
51
58
57
50
49
1
PNU=3BCHex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
5-41
Parameter List
02.96
PNU
OP1 parameter name
* : Conf.
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Par.
r957
Warning Param 5
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
-
3/
BR
-
3/
BR
-
3/
BR
-
3/
BR
-
2/
BR
-
2/
BR
1
3/
3/
B
B
Warning Parameter 5
If a warning (numbers 65 to 80) is active, the related segment in the display
is ON
80
79
72
71
r958
78
77
70
69
76
75
68
67
74
73
66
65
1
PNU=3BDHex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex Warning Param 6
Warning Parameter 6 (CB-warnings)
If a warning (numbers 80 to 96) is active, the related segment in the display
is ON
96
95
88
87
r959
94
93
86
85
92
91
84
83
90
89
82
81
1
PNU=3BEHex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex Warning Param 7
Warning Parameter 6 (TB-warnings 1)
If a warning (numbers 97 to 112) is active, the related segment in the
display is ON
112
111
104
103
r960
110
109
102
101
108
107
100
99
106
105
98
97
1
PNU=3BFHex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex Warning Param 8
Warning Parameter 6 (TB-warnings 2)
If a warning (numbers 113 to 128) is active, the related segment in the
display is ON
128
127
120
119
r967
126
125
118
117
124
123
116
115
122
121
114
113
1
PNU=3C0Hex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex Control Word 1
Display parameter of control word 1 (bit 0-15)
Identical with r550 (control word 1)
r968
1
PNU=3C7Hex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex Status Word 1
Display parameter of status word 1 (bit 0-15)
Identical with r552 (status word 1)
P970
*
1
PNU=3C8Hex; Type=V2;Scaling: 1Hex Factory Settings
0 to 1
Parameter reset to factory settings
Parameter reset: all parameters are reset to their original values Param.Reset
(factory settings). After this the parameter is reset to '1'.
1:
no parameter reset
Return
Note: This function can also be selected via P052=1.
0:
1
PNU=3CAHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex 5-42 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Parameter List
PNU
OP1 parameter name
Description
Value range
[phys. unit]
Selection text
Display
Indices
Factorysetting
See
Modify
(access /
status)
* : Conf.
P971
EEPROM Storing
0 to 1
*
Passing of the parameter values of the RAM to the EEPROM on a change
from 0 auf 1.
It takes about 15s to process all of the values. During this time, the PMU
stays in the Values mode.
0
3/
3/
BR
BR
116
3/
BR
116
3/
BR
116
3/
BR
116
3/
BR
Par.
r980
1
PNU=3CBHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex PNU-Lst. 1 avail
List of the available parameter numbers; part 1.
The parameter numbers are listed in a positive sequence.
The first existing '0' shows, that no more parameter numbers are available.
Index range: 1 to 116.
As special function the value of i116 is the number of the parameter which
contains the next following part of the list. If i116 has a value of '0' then
there are no more parts of the list.
r981
1
PNU=3D4Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex PNU-Lst. 2 avail
List of the available parameter numbers; part 2
See r980.
r990
1
PNU=3D5Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex PNU-Lst.1 chnged
List of the changed parameter numbers; part 1.
The parameter numbers are listed in a positive sequence.
The first existing '0' shows, that no more parameter numbers are changed.
Index range: 1 to 116.
As special function the value of i116 is the number of the parameter which
contains the next following part of the list. If i116 has a value of '0' then
there are no more parts of the list.
r991
1
PNU=3DEHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex PNU-Lst.2 chnged
List of the changed parameter numbers; part 2
See r990.
1
PNU=3DFHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
5-43
Parameter List
5-44 ENGLISH
02.96
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Operator Control
6
Operator control
The rectifier/regenerating unit can be controlled via:
the PMU (Parameterization Unit) on the CUR module
the control terminal strip on the CUR (Section 3.3 “Control terminal strip“)
the OP1 operator control panel (Section 9.4 “Options/Operator control“)
the SST1 serial interface (RS485 and RS232) on PMU-X300
the optional SST2 serial interface (RS485) for peer-to-peer coupling
Operator control using the PMU (see diagram below) is described in this section.
Seven-segment displays
On key
Reversing key
Raise key
Off key
Changeover key, operator control level
Lower key
P
X300
Figure 6.1 Parameterization unit
6.1
Operator control elements
Operator control elements
Function
Rectifier/regenerating unit switch on (standard).
For faults: Return to the fault display.
Rectifier/regenerating unit shutdown depending on the parameterization of
OFF1 or OFF2 (P554 to P557).
No function
1) Changeover between parameter number, index and parameter value
levels (see Figure 6.2), whereby the command only becomes effective when
the key is released.
2) Resetting the current fault message (see Figure 6.3)
3) In conjunction with the arrow keys <raise> and <lower>, additional
functions are possible (refer to Figs. 6.2 and 6.3), whereby <P> is pressed
first followed by the other key. This command becomes effective once the
other key has been pressed.
P
Changing the parameter number when the parameter number level is
displayed, changing the index when the index level is displayed, or the
parameter value when the parameter value level is displayed.
,
Table 6.1
Function of the operator control elements on the PMU
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
6-1
Operator Control
6.2
02.96
Displays
Tables 6.2 and 6.3 below give an overview of the displays that can be shown on the PMU:
Visualization
parameters
Setting
parameters
Table 6.2
Parameter number
Index
Parameter value
e.g.
e.g.
e.g.
Basic converter
Technology board
Basic converter
Technology board
Displaying visualization and setting parameters on the PMU
Actual value
Parameter value
not (yet)
possible
Alarm
Fault
Display
Table 6.3
Status display on the PMU
NOTE
The parameters are described in Chapter 5 and the fault and alarm messages are described in Chapter 7.
Once the electronics supply voltage has been switched on, either the PMU operating display shows the current
operating state of the rectifier/regenerating unit (e.g. o009) or a fault or alarm message is displayed (e.g. F060).
The operating states are described in Section 5.1 and the fault and alarm messages are described in Sections
7.1 and 7.2.
As described in Section 6.3 (Figures 6.2 and 6.3), it is possible to change over from one display level to another.
By pressing <P>, it is possible to change from the status display (e.g. o009) to the parameter number level in
which the separate parameters can be selected via <raise> or <lower>. The selected access level (P051) and
the operating state (r000, r001) determine here which parameters are displayed. All parameters are not always
visible (see Chapter 5/overview of the abbreviations/footnotes 5 to 8)!
Pressing <P> again switches to the index level for indexed parameters (see Section 4.1.2) but directly to the
parameter value level for all other parameters and the index or the value can be modified via <raise> and
<lower>. The same conditions apply for changing a parameter value as were described for the parameter
number, i.e. a parameter value can only be modified under an appropriate access level and an appropriate
operating state.
If the 4 characters of the seven-segment display are insufficient for displaying a parameter value, only 4 figures
will be displayed initially (see Figure 6.4). The presence of further figures to the right or left of this "window" is
indicated by flashing of the left-hand or right-hand figure. If <P>+<lower> or <P>+<raise> are pressed
simultaneously, this "window" can be moved to view the parameter value.
By pressing <P> again, it is possible to switch back to the parameter number level..
6-2
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
6.3
Operator Control
Structure
Ready-to-switch-on
Operating display
P
Parameter number level
Fast changeover
P
P
+
P
P
P
+
+
+
P
P
Parameter
indexed
+
Fast changeover
P
no
yes
Index level
Highest
index
P
P
P
Parameter value level
Highest
value
P
P
P
Return to parameter
Figure 6.2 Operator control structure using the PMU
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
6-3
Operator Control
02.96
After
delay
time
Fault
P
+
P
Fault
acknowledged
Fault
not
acknowledged
P
+
Display before
fault/alarm
P
Fault
acknowledged
Fault
not
acknowledged
Alarm
Alarm
cause
removed
with a fault
condition
P
or
P
Alarm
cause or
removed
or
or
Figure 6.3 Operator control structure of the PMU for alarms and faults
Handling of fault and alarm messages (reset, move into the "background" in order to parameterize) is described
in Chapter 7 in detail.
P
+
P
+
Figure 6.4 Shifting the PMU display for parameters
values with more than 4 digits
6-4
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Fault and Alarm Messages
7
Fault and Alarm Messages
When a fault or alarm is generated, it is displayed immediately on the PMU as well as on the optional OP1 (see
Section 6.3, Figure 6.3). An alarm disappears automatically from the display when the problem has been
corrected. A fault message must be reset by pressing the P key on the PMU or the reset key on the OP1 after
the problem has been corrected, before it is possible to return to a normal operating state.
NOTE
A current fault message or alarm can be "moved into the background" by pressing the P + keys on the PMU
simultaneously, in order to parameterize or to read the fault value via r949.001. Via the optional operator panel
OP1, in spite of an active fault message or alarm it is still possible to parameterize. If no key is pressed on the
PMU for 30 s, the fault message which was moved into the background or active alarm appears automatically
on the PMU. The message can be brought back into the foreground by simultaneously pressing the P + keys
on the PMU at the parameter number level..
7.1
Fault messages
General information on faults
The following information is available for each fault:
Parameter
r947
r949
r951
P952
r748
Fault number
Fault value
Fault text list
Number of faults
Time of fault
For detailed information on the organization of the fault memory, see r947 in Section 5.16.
If a fault message is not acknowledged before the electronics power supply is switched off, this fault message
will appear again the next time the power supply is switched on. The unit will not start up unless this message is
acknowledged (except if auto restart has been selected; see under P366 and Section 4.3.10.1).
NOTE
The software used for the power supply unit is identical to that used for the power supply and regenerative
power supply units of the equipment series 6SE70.
The functional difference between power supply units and combined power supply and regenerative units is
defined by means of the parameter P070.
Any remarks concerning "regeneration" in these operating instructions (e.g. concerning control word 1) should
be ignored.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
7-1
Fault and Alarm Messages
Fault
No.
F001
02.96
Fault description
Feedb Cont.
Fault
value
Meaning
Possible causes
Countermeasures
-
-
-
-
- Check P591 Q.HS checkback
signal.
The parameter value must match
the main contactor checkback
signal connection
- Check the main contactor
checkback signal circuit.
- Line overvoltage
- P071 set to wrong value
-
-
- Line undervoltage
- Monitoring too finely or wrongly
set (P074, P071)
1
Frequency of the regenerative
bridge
< 45Hz
Frequency of the rectifier bridge
< 45Hz
Frequency of the regenerative
bridge
> 65Hz
Frequency of the rectifier bridge
> 65Hz
-
-Line frequency < 45Hz or > 65Hz
No checkback signal from main contactor
If a main contactor checkback signal is
configured and is not received within 500
ms after the power-up command.
F003
Line Over V
Line overvoltage
F004
Voltage at terminals X1-U1/L1, or X1W1/L3 and/or X4-1U2/1T1, X4-1V2/1T2 or
X4-1W2/1T3 greater than the response
threshold (120% of P071).
Line Under V
Line undervoltage
F005
Voltage at terminals X1-U1/L1, or X1W1/L3 and/or X4-1U2/1T1, X4-1V2/1T2 or
X4-1W2/1T3 lower than the response
threshold (P074 and P071).
Line Frequ.
Line frequency outside permissible range
This fault message is generated if the line
frequency is lower than 45 Hz or higher
than 65Hz.
F006
Bus Over V
2
3
4
-
-
DC link voltage
The unit was shutdown due to an
excessive DC link voltage.
F007
Line voltagerange
380 V to 460 V
500 V to 575 V
660 V to 690 V
AuxPowerOFF
Shutdown threshold
835 V
1042 V
1244 V
Failure or overvoltage of the electronics
supply voltage in "Run" status
or
at least one power section connected in
parallel reports "Power supply faulted"
F009
Rec PhaseFlt
1, 2, 3
5
1
Phase failure in the rectifier bridge
The rms line voltage calculated from the
area of each line voltage half-wave
(average rectification value x peak value)
must be greater than the response value
for phase-failure monitoring
The interval between two identical line
voltage zeros of the voltage for the
rectifier converter must not be greater
than 450 deg.
7-2
ENGLISH
2
Electronics supply voltage of the
rectifier/regenerating unit too low
Power interface module of the
rectifier/regenerating unit or
parallel power section reports
"Power supply faulted"
Voltage failure in the rectifier
bridge (X1-U1/L1, X1-V1/L2 or X1W1/L3)
Waiting time in status o010
elapsed
- Check electronics power supply
- Power supply fuse for parallel
units blown
- Internal fault on the power
interface module of a slave unit
- Parameter P074 wrongly set
- Phase failure in the rectifier
bridge
- Line contactor dropped out in
operation
- Fuse blown on three-phase side
of rectifier bridge
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Fault and Alarm Messages
Fault
No.
F010
Fault description
Inv PhaseFlt
Fault
value
Meaning
Possible causes
Countermeasures
1
Voltage failure in the regenerative
bridge (X4-1U2/1T1, X4-1V2/1T2
or X4-1W2/1T3)
Waiting time in status o010
elapsed
- Parameter P074 wrongly set
- Phase failure in the rectifier
bridge
- Line contactor dropped out in
operation
- Fuse blown on three-phase side
of rectifier bridge
- in the case of a power supply unit
F010 has the same significance
as F009 (the incoming mains
supply voltage is wired internally
to the regenerative unit mains
voltage measuring circuit)
- Drive operated too long under
overload conditions
- Check to see whether the rated
current of the R/G unit is
adequate for the specific
application
Phase failure in regenerative bridge
The rms line voltage calculated from the
area of each line voltage half-wave
(average rectification value x peak value)
must be greater than the response value
for phase-failure monitoring
The interval between two identical line
voltage zeros of the voltage for the
regenerating converter must not be
greater than 450 deg..
F022
I2t Overload
2
-
-
1
Heat sink temperature > 95 C
1
2
3
Channel V-U faulted
Channel V-W faulted
Channel W-U faulted
-
-
- Short-circuit in the DC link
F031
The monitor responds if the following
conditions obtain for longer than 0.5 sec:
- The current limit of the
rectifier/regenerating unit is reached
(this condition does not apply during
circuit identification or during DC link
forming)
- The rectifier or regenerative current is
greater than 10% of the rated DC
current (P075)
- The DC link voltage is less than 5% of
1.35*P071
Fuse Blown
-
-
- Thyristor branch fuse faulted
F032
Fuse blown in a thyristor branch of the
rectifier/regenerating unit or of a parallel
power section.
Phase Sequ.?
-
-
- Phase sequence of the rectifier
bridge different from that of the
regenerative bridge
2
I t monitor of the power section has
responded
F023
The monitor responds when 100 % of the
calculated I2t value of the power section is
reached.
Temp Overl.
Temperature of the power section too high
A check is made to see whether the heat
sink temperature measured using
thermistor(s) is > 95 C
F029
Measure Flt
Fault in line voltage measurement
F030
An offset > 5% has been detected when
attempting to compensate for the offset of
the line voltage measurement
DC Bus Short
- Heat sink (air inlets and outlets)
contaminated
- Heat sink temperature sensor not
connected to X31, X32 on A1681
and/or A1682 module ("slave
unit")
- Fan has no voltage
- Fan faulted
- Fan running in the wrong
direction
- Fan fuse (F3, F4) defective
NOTE:
- Measure inlet air ambient
temperature. If > 40 ºC, note
reduction curves. See Section
14.1.
- Fault in the voltage path on the
power interface module (A1681
and/or A1682 and/or A1685) or
on the electronic module (CUR)
DC link short-circuit
Wrong phase sequence
A check is make to see whether the phase
sequence of the rectifier bridge is the
same as that of the regenerative bridge.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
7-3
Fault and Alarm Messages
Fault
No.
F033
Fault description
DC Bus Open
02.96
Fault
value
Meaning
Possible causes
Countermeasures
-
-
- Rectifier fuse defective
- No inverter connected
1
Current asymmetry (overcurrent or
undercurrent in the parallel power
section compared with the current
in the rectifier/regenerating unit)
- One of the thyristors is not firing
- Different current ripple in the
rectifier/regenerating unit and
parallel power section due to
different commutating reactors
- Cable connection between the
rectifier/regenerating unit and a
parallel power section is
interrupted or faulted
-
-
- There is an "External fault 1"
signal at the selected binary input
(P575/source for "Ext. fault 1")
- The line to the corresponding
binary input is interrupted.
-
-
- There is an "External fault 2"
signal at the selected binary input
(P586/source for "Ext. fault 2")
- The line to the corresponding
binary input is interrupted..
-
-
- There is an "External fault 3"
signal at the selected binary input
(P573/source for "Ext. fault 3")
- The line to the corresponding
binary input is interrupted..
1
"Parameter value outside the
permissible range".
2
"EEPROM location defective"
3
"EEPROM fault"
- Software has been replaced
- Excessive interference (e.g. by
contactors without RC elements,
unshielded cables, faulty
shielding connections ...)
- Countermeasures:
Acknowledge the fault
Check EMC measures
Set MLFB (Section 4.3.9.2)
Establish factory setting (Section
4.3.9.1)
Repeat system start-up (Section
4.2.3)
- Hardware defect
- Severe EMC noise
- Countermeasures:
Replace the CUR module
Check EMC measures.
- As for 1
-
-
The monitor responds if the following
conditions obtain for longer than 30sec in
the "RUN“ status:
- DC link current <1%
- Output voltage of the thyristor bridge
oscillates severely
F034
Par PwrSectF
Fault in power sections connected in
parallel
F035
At least one parallel power section is
connected, has been selected with
parameter P076 and reports the fault
message "Current asymmetry between
rectifier/regenerating unit and parallel
power section".
Ext Fault 1
External fault 1
F036
A parameter-programmable fault input has
become active.
Ext Fault 2
External fault 2
Active in the "RUN“ when the pre-charging
time (P329) + 3s (200 ms for SW<3.0) has
elapsed.
F038
A parameter-programmable fault input has
been activated.
Ext Fault 3
External fault 3
F041
A parameter-programmable fault input has
been activated.
EEprom-Fault
Parameter range fault
Software monitoring of the permissible
value range of the parameters and the
functionality of the EEPROM chip
(permanent memory) on electronic module
CUR (type: X28C64, 8192 bytes)
F042
Buffer OFlow
Internal buffer overflow
Software monitoring of various software
buffers.
7-4
ENGLISH
- CUR module faulted
- Excessive interference (e.g. by
contactors without RC elements,
unshielded cables, faulty
shielding connections ...)
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Fault and Alarm Messages
Fault
No.
F047
Fault description
Fault
value
Meaning
Possible causes
Countermeasures
-
-
- CUR module faulted
- Excessive interference (e.g. by
contactors without RC elements,
unshielded cables, faulty
shielding connections ...)
-
-
- RAM defective (replace the CUR
module)
-
-
An internal hardware counter in the
microprocessor checks to see whether the
program for calculating the firing pulses is
executed at least about every 400 ms (on
average, it is executed every 2.7 to 3.3
ms). If this is not the case, the counter
triggers a Reset. F047 then appears.
No MLFB
-
- CUR module defective
- Excessive interference (e.g. by
contactors without RC elements,
unshielded cables, faulty
shielding connections)
-
- After acknowledging in
BOOTSTRAP, enter a suitable
parameter value for the unit with
P070 MLFB (6SEE70..) (only
possible with the corresponding
access stages of the two access
parameters; see Section 4.3.9.2).
- Carry out circuit identification
(P052 = 21)
Int Fault
Non-permissible microprocessor status
F048
The microprocessor is monitored by
internal hardware for non-permissible
states
RAM Fault
RAM defective
F049
Software-based checking of the
functionality of the RAM chips on the CUR
module
Watchdog!
Watchdog timer has triggered a Reset
F060
P070=0
F061
WrongPar Set
3
F065
Parameter wrong or not yet set
SST1 Telegr.
P141 (Rectifier Induct.) or P144 (C
of DC link) are = 0.00
-
-
- Cable break
- Fault in the USS master
-
-
- Cable break
1
2
5
6
10
-
SCB not plugged in or SCB module
code wrong
SCB not compatible
Wrong initialization data
Timeout when initializing
Error in the configuration channel
-
- Plug in the SCB
- Check the SCB and/or replace it
- Correct the initialization data
F073
SCB no longer processes the heartbeat
counter.
Sl1 AnaIn1
-
-
F074
Current at analog input 1, slave 1, under 4
mA
Sl1 AnaIn2
- Check the connection between
the signal source and the SCI1module (slave 1) -X428:4, 5
-
-
- Check the connection between
the signal source and the SCI1module (slave 2) -X428:7, 8
USS telegram to SST1 failed
Active from the first reception of a valid
protocol in all operating states
F066
Following receipt of a valid telegram, no
further telegrams were received for longer
than the time set with parameter
P687.i001
SST2 Telegr.
Peer-to-peer telegram to SST1 failed
F070
Following receipt of a valid telegram, no
further telegrams were received for longer
than the time set with parameter
P687.i003
SCB Initial
SCB initialization error
An error has occurred when initializing the
SCB.
F072
SCB Heartb.
SCB heartbeat
Current at analog input 2, slave 1, under 4
mA
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
- Replace the SCB
- Check the connection between
the module rack and the option
module
ENGLISH
7-5
Fault and Alarm Messages
Fault
No.
Fault description
02.96
Fault
value
Meaning
Possible causes
Countermeasures
F075
Sl1 AnaIn3
-
-
F076
Current at analog input 3, slave 1, under 4
mA
Sl2 AnaIn1
- Check the connection between
the signal source and the SCI1module (slave 3) -X428:10, 11
-
-
F077
Current at analog input 1, slave 2, under 4
mA
Sl2 AnaIn2
- Check the connection between
the signal source and the SCI1module (slave 3) -X428:4, 5
-
-
F078
Current at analog input 2, slave 2, under 4
mA
Sl2 AnaIn3
- Check the connection between
the signal source and the SCI1module (slave 3) -X428:7, 8
-
-
F079
Current at analog input 3, slave 2, under 4
mA
SCB Telegr.
- Check the connection between
the signal source and the SCI1module (slave 3) -X428:10, 11
-
-
- Check connection to the SCB
An error has occurred when initializing the
module at the DPR interface.
1
2
5
6
7
TB/CB not plugged in
TB/CB not compatible
Error in initializing data
Timeout when initializing
TB/TC module code wrong
TB/CB Heartb
-
-
- Contact problem in connection
between module rack and TB
and/or CB
- Slot does not agree with
assignment (P090, P091)
- Wrong module code r723
- Wrong module compatibility r724
- Contact problem in connection
between module rack and TB
and/or CB
- Hardware fault (replace TB
and/or CB)
1
2
3
4
5
CB alarm channel faulty
TB alarm channel faulty
TB error channel faulty
CB task channel (CB CUR)
faulty
CB answer channel (CUR CB)
faulty
Internal error
TB task channel (TB CUR) faulty
TB answer channel (CUR TB)
faulty
Internal error
CB/TB Telegram failure
PMU task channel (CUR TB)
faulty
PMU answer channel (TB CUR)
faulty
CB/TB setpoint channel faulty
CB/TB actual value channel faulty
For = 30° Ud remains < 12.5 %
of 1.35*incoming mains supply
voltage
P141 (Rectifier Induct.) and/or
P144 (C for DC link) could not be
identified
A time delay of 20s has already
elapsed, however, circuit identification cannot be carried out, because
the link circuit voltage is too high
(Ud>12.5% of 1.35*incoming
mains supply voltage)
SCB telegram failure
F080
F081
Following a correctly received telegram,
no further telegram has been received
within the time set with parameter
P687.i002.
TB/CB Init.
TB/CB heartbeat error
F082
TB or CB has stopped processing the
heartbeat counter.
TB/CB Telegr
TB/CB telegram failure
The exchange of data has been
interrupted.
P695 defines the telegram failure time
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
21
22
F090
Circuit ID F
2
Circuit identification not possible
3
4
7-6
ENGLISH
-
- Connection interrupted to DC link
capacitor
- Commutating inductance too low
(see Section 3.1)
- Connection to DC link interrupted
- Another unit is supplying the DC
link
- Wait until the DC link has
discharged sufficiently, then start
circuit identification again
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Fault
No.
F091
Fault and Alarm Messages
Fault description
Circuit ID C
Fault
value
Meaning
Possible causes
Countermeasures
1
The abort took place because the
RUN or "R" status was exited for
some reason (e.g. brief power
outage) during forming or circuit
identification.
The abort took place because the
reserve data set selection changed
during forming or circuit
identification.
The abort took place because the
OFF command was given.
The abort took place because an
ON command was not given within
20 sec after selecting the forming
function (P052=20) or the circuit
identification function (P052=21).
-
Circuit identification or forming aborted
due to external cause.
If circuit identification is aborted, only
those parameters are modified whose
assignment was completed before this
fault occurred.
2
3
4
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
7-7
Fault and Alarm Messages
Fault
No.
F103
Fault description
Thy/Grnd Flt
Fault when conducting the
thyristor/ground-fault test
This fault message can only occur if the
thyristor/ground-fault test is activated with
parameters P353 / P354.
A software check is made to see whether
all thyristors have blocking capability,
whether they can be fired, and whether
there is a ground fault
Identification of the firing lines and the
associated thyristors should always be
made with the aid of the relevant wiring
diagram (see Section 3-5 "Power
terminals").
02.96
Fault
value
Meaning
1
2
3
4
5
6
Short-circuit of thyristor V11 or V24 - Thyristor defective
Short-circuit of thyristor V12 or V25 - Thyristor externally shorted
Short-circuit of thyristor V13 or V26
(e.g. by ground fault in grounded
Short-circuit of thyristor V14 or V21
system and ground fault in the
Short-circuit of thyristor V15 or V22
motor)
Short-circuit of thyristor V16 or V23 - Connection to DC link interrupted
(e.g. fuse blown)
9
Possible reasons for the thyristor
being defective:
- Interruption in the RC circuit
- Converter and compensation
control not optimized (excessive
current peaks)
- Cooling not guaranteed (e.g. fan
not running, ambient temperature
too high, to little air intake, heat
sink severely contaminated)
- Excessive voltage peaks in
supply system
Ground fault in DC link or in motor / - Ground fault
rectifier fuse defective
- Connection to DC link interrupted
(e.g. fuse blown)
I = 0 - Message defective
- CUR module defect
11
12
13
14
15
16
Thyristor cannot be fired (X11)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X12)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X13)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X14)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X15)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X16)
17
2 or more thyristors of the rectifier
bridge cannot be fired
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Thyristor cannot be fired (X21)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X22)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X23)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X24)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X25)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X26)
2 or more thyristors of the
regenerative bridge cannot be fired
Thyristor cannot block
(gate X11 or X21)
Thyristor cannot block
(gate X12 or X22)
Thyristor cannot block
(gate X13 or X23)
Thyristor cannot block
(gate X14 or X24)
Thyristor cannot block
(gate X15 or X25)
Thyristor cannot block
(gate X16 or X26)
-
8
31
32
33
34
35
36
F116
bis
F150
7-8
Fault on the intelligent I/O module
Possible causes
Countermeasures
-
- Firing pulse line to relevant
thyristor interrupted
- Ribbon cable X109 not correctly
plugged in or interrupted (and
ribbon cable X27 in the case of
power section connected in
parallel)
- Defect in electronics and/or
power interface module
- internal interruption on the gate
line in the thyristor module
- Connection to DC link interrupted
(e.g. fuse blown)
- As under 11 to 16
- As under 11 to 16
- Parameter P076 wrong
- As under 11 to 16
- As under 1 to 6
-
See User's Manual of the TB module
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
7.2
Fault and Alarm Messages
Alarm messages
The warning message appears periodically as A=Alarm/Warning and a three-digit in the display of the PMU A
warning cannot be acknowledged. It extinguishes automatically when the cause of the warning is eliminated.
Several messages may occur at the same time, in which case they appear one after the other in the display.
If the common rectifier is operated with the OP1 operator panel, the warning appears in the bottom line of the
display. The red LED starts blinking first (see the operating instructions for the OP1)
Alarm
No.
Parameter
No.
Description
Countermeasures
P953
ext.Warn 1
Parameter-programmable external warning input 1
has been activated
External warning arrived! Check whether the line to the
relevant binary input is interrupted.
Check parameter P588 Src No Ext Warn 1.
See also Section 4.3.2.
Bit No.
A015
14
A016
P953
ext. Warn 2
Parameter-programmable external warning input 1
has been activated
External warning arrived! Check whether the line to the
relevant binary input is interrupted.
Check parameter P589 Src No Ext Warn 2.
See also Section 4.3.2.
P954
Heatsk Temp
Check r011 Heat sink temperature.
The heat sink temperature is > 90 ºC
Measure inlet air and/or ambient temperature. If >
40°C, note the reduction curves. See Section 14.1.
15
A022
5
Check
- whether fan -E1(-E2) is connected and rotating in the
right direction.
- whether the air inlet and outlet openings are clean and
clear.
- the connection of the temperature sensor to -X30 (X31, -X32).
A025
P954
8
I2t Warning
2
The I t value of the power section is too high. The
warning is triggered when 90% of the permissible
I2t value is reached. See also under fault F022 and
parameter P785. The permissible I2t value is
reached at the maximum permissible load cycle
(see Section 14, Figure 14.1)
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
Check whether the rated DC current of the common
rectifier is adequate for the specific application.
ENGLISH
7-9
Fault and Alarm Messages
Alarm
No.
Parameter
No.
02.96
Description
Countermeasures
no Slave
In the case of serial I/O (SCB1 with SCI1/2), no
slave is connected and/or the fiber optic conductor
is interrupted or the slaves have no voltage.
P660 SCI AnalogInConf
Check the slave.
Check the cable.
P956
Slave not ok
Check P660 SCI AnalogInConf
In the case of serial I/O, the slaves required
according to the parameter settings are not
available (slave number an/or slave type).
Bit No.
A049
P956
0
A050
1
A051
P956
Peer Bdrate
In a peer-to-peer connection, the baud rate
selected is too high and/pr different
2
A052
P956
Peer PrD-L
Reduce the number of words
In a peer-to-peer connection, an excessive
process data length has been set (>5).
P686 SCom/SCB # PrDat.
P956
Peer Lng f.
In a peer-to-peer connection, the process data
length of the sender and receiver do not agree
Match the word lengths of the sender and receiver
P686 SCom/SCB # PrDat
3
A053
4
A065
Match the baud rates of the SCB modules connected to
each (P684 SST/SCB Baudrate)
P957
Auto Restart
The line voltage is outside the tolerance band at
the moment (e.g. power outage). The firing pulses
are therefore inhibited. On power recovery,
however, the WEA option (P366) implements an
auto restart.
0
A081..
r958
A096
Important
An auto restart may constitute a danger for persons and
property. Make sure you really want to have auto restart
(WEA).
If necessary, change P366 WEA.
CB Warning 1...16
See user's manual for the CB module
0...15
A097..
A112
r959
TB Warning 1 16
See user's manual for the TB module
0...15
A113..
A128
r960
TB Warning 17...32
See user's manual for the TB module
0...15
7-10 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
8
Maintenance
Maintenance
WARNING
The common rectifiers are operated with high voltages.
All work on the unit must be carried out in agreement with the national electrical regulations
(in Germany: VBG 4).
Maintenance and repair work must only be carried out by qualified personnel.
Use must only be made of the spare parts approved by the manufacturer.
It is imperative to observe the prescribed maintenance intervals and the repair and
replacement instructions.
As the result of the dc link capacitors in the connected SIMOVERT Master Drives, the unit
still contains a hazardous voltage up to 5 min. after isolation (power terminal and electronic
power supply). This is why it is only permitted to open the unit after observing an
appropriate waiting time.
In spite of de-energisation of the power connections and discharge of the DC link the
snubber capacitors remain charged with the gate control module A23 disconnected.
The power and control terminals may still be live even in the event of motor standstill.
Despite disconnecting the power terminals from the supply, terminal X19 may still be live
due to the external fan supply.
If work on the activated unit is necessary:
do not touch any live parts.
use only proper measuring equipment and protective work clothing.
stand or sit on an unearthed and isolated surface that does justice to ESD requirements.
Non-observance of warning notices can result in death, severe personal injury or
considerable property damage.
You should know the order and factory numbers of your unit when consulting the service department. You will
find these numbers and other important data on the rating plate of the unit.
8.1
Maintenance recommendations
The fans are designed for a service life of 40,000 hours at an ambient temperature of T A = 40 °C. To guarantee
the availability of the unit at all times, the fans must be replaced in good time.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
8-1
Maintenance
02.96
8.2
Replacing components
8.2.1
Replacing the fan
WARNING
The fan must only be replaced by qualified personnel.
As a result of the DC link capacitors and snubber capacitors in the connected
inverters, a hazardous voltage still exists for up to 5 min after isolation.
Non-observance of warning notices can result in death, severe personal injury or
considerable property damage.
Size H
The fan is located in the fan box on the top of the unit.
M8
Unplug X20.
M8
Fan E1
Undo both M8 (SW 13) fixing screws.
X20
Loosen the two M4 fixing screws and swing the plastic
cover out sideways..
M4
Pull the fan box out of the unit forwards as far as the
stop.
Then lift it up over the stop (at the back) and remove it
completely from the unit.
Figure 8.1 Fan (AC 230V) for size H
Installation is carried out in reverse order.
Important!
The two M8 fixing screws are used to earth the fan box,
so they must be screwed down firmly.
Size K
M8
The two fans are located in the fan box on the top of the
unit.
Unplug X20.
Undo both M8 (SW 13) fixing screws.
Fan E1
Fan E2
Pull the fan box out of the unit forwards.
Installation is carried out in reverse order.
X20
Figure 8.2 Fan (AC 230V) for size K
WARNING
The fan box weighs approx. 16 kg for size H, and approx. 32 kg for size K. This must be
taken into account when removing the fan box.
Non-observance of warning notices can result in severe personal injury or considerable
property damage.
8-2
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
8.2.2
Maintenance
Replacing modules
WARNING
Modules must only be replaced by qualified persons.
Modules must not be removed or inserted under a live voltage.
Non-observance of warning notices can result in death, severe personal injury or
considerable property damage.
CAUTION
The modules contain electrostatically sensitive devices. You must discharge your own body
before touching an electronic module. This is best done by touching a conductive earthed
object (e.g. a bare metal part of the control cabinet) directly beforehand.
Replacing modules in the electronics box
(option)
Undo the securing screws of the modules
above and below the insertion /removal aids
S lo t 1 (C U R )
By means of the insertion /removal aids,
carefully pull the module out of the
electronics box, making sure that the module
does not get stuck
S lo t 2 (O p tio n s )
S lo t 3 (O p tio n s )
Carefully insert the new module in the guide
rails until it moves no further in the
electronics box
Firmly screw down the module with the
securing screws above and below the
insertion / removal aids.
Figure 8.3 Electronics box, equipped with CUR (slot 1)
and options (slots 2 and 3)
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
8-3
Maintenance
02.96
Assigning the "Start-up" parameters for the CUR option module (A10)
For general information see Chapter 4
F060
P and Higher key
Switch over from fault display to parameterization
P051 = 3
Access stage "Expert mode“
P052 = 2
MLFB setting (initialization)
WARNING
P070 =
Initialization is mandatory.
Specify the ID number of the MLFB in P070 of the
common rectifier (rating plate on the unit) as per MLFB
table Section 4.3.9.2.
P052 = 0
P and Lower key
P-key
Return from setting MLFB
Change back to fault display and acknowledge F060
See Section
4.2.2 or 4.2.3
WARNING
Replacing firing-circuit module A23
Carry out circuit identification after replacing the A23 (see Chapter 4).
The earth connection must be restored by tightening the screws marked with an earthing
sign on the electronics box (size H) or on the electronics slide-in unit (size K).
8-4
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Maintenance
Replacing the EPROM on the CUR module (upgrading to a new software version)
On setup and during servicing work, the current parameter settings in the logbook in Chapter 12 should be
saved For information on reading out the parameters changed from the factory settings easily, see Section
4.3.9.3 (saving the parameter values using SIMOVIS) and Section 4.3.9.8 (displaying modified parameters). It
should be checked that these entries are up-to-date before the EPROM is replaced because when the
electronics supply voltage is switched on again, the function "generate factory settings" is carried out
automatically (see Section 4.3.9.1). Then only the values of parameters P070 and P077 are retained.
WARNING
The EPROM must only be replaced by qualified persons. The EPROM must
not be removed or inserted under a live voltage.
Non-observance of warning notices can result in death, severe personal injury
or considerable property damage.
The EPROM is located in slot D14 of module CUR.
CAUTION
The modules contain electrostatically sensitive devices. You must discharge your own
body before touching an electronic module. This is best done by touching a conductive
earthed object (e.g. a bare metal part of the control cabinet) directly beforehand.
Procedure for replacing EPROMs:
Switch off electronics supply voltage
Undo fixing screws for module CUR above and below the insertion/removal aids.
Remove the module from the electronics box carefully with the help of the insertion/removal aids.
Remove old EPROM carefully from the socket and replace it with a new EPROM. It is important to ensure
that the EPROM is mounted the right way round (pin 1 aligned correctly) and that pins are not bent.
Slide module into the electronics box carefully in the guide rails as far as the stop.
Screw the module into place again using the fixing screws.
After switching the electronics supply voltage on again, wait until the function "generate factory setting" is
complete. Then restore the parameter values in accordance with the logbook or reload the values saved
using SIMOVIS into the unit.
If the parameters are restored in accordance with the logbook, circuit identification (see Section 4.3.9.7) must
be carried out (due to special parameter P772).
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
8-5
Maintenance
02.96
8.2.3
Replacing thyristor blocks
8.2.3.1
Disassembling the thyristor blocks for size H
2
1
8
8
11
11
7
G
K
7
G
K
2
8
10
G
K
G
K
G
K
10
7
5
Level B
Level A
4
6
12
9
5
3
Front thyristor block, level A (weight of a thyristor block, approx. 4kg)
Swing up the door after loosening the 2 M4 slit Torx screws .
Detach cable from the modules and the screen fixture.
Remove the 2 M6 hexagon head screws and swing out the electronic assembly tray to the stop.
Only in the case of disassembly of the centre thyristor assembly, open the 4 twist-loks and release the
cable for the thermocouple sensor, which is mounted on the centre heat sink only.
Unplug the gate and cathode cables (G, K) .
Remove the 2 M8 hexagon head screws and swing out the thyristor assembly to the front.
Loosen M6 nut and pull the thyristor block out upwards at an angle.
Rear thyristor block, level B (weight of a thyristor block, approx. 4 kg)
Unplug the gate and cathode cables(G, K) 10.
Remove 2 M8 hexagon-head bolts 11.
Loosen M6 nut 12 and pull the thyristor block out upwards at an angle.
The thyristor blocks are installed in the reverse order.
8-6
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Maintenance
8.2.3.2
Disassembling the thyristor blocks for size K
2
1
3
8
Level B
GK
GK
6
GK
12
8
Level A
6
10
1
12
7
13
9
5
3
11
5
4
11
5
4
3
Front thyristor block, level A (weight of a thyristor block, approx. 12 kg)
Remove the 2 covers by loosening 4 M4 hexagon head screws and 3 M4 hexagon head screws .
Remove the copper plate by removing 4 M10 hexagon-head bolts .
Unplug the gate and cathode cables (G, K) .
Only in the case of disassembly of the centre thyristor assembly, remove the thermocouple sensor, which is
mounted on the centre thyristor assembly only by loosening the screw (Torx drive T25).
Loosen the two M10 hexagon-head screws and swing the thyristor block out forwards
Loosen M10 nut and pull the thyristor block out upwards at an angle.
Rear thyristor block, level B (weight of a thyristor block, approx. 12 kg)
Unplug gate and cathode cables (G, K) 10.
Remove 2 M10 hexagon-head screws 11.
Remove 2 M10 hexagon-head screws 12.
Loosen M10 nut 13, swing the thyristor block out forwards and pull the thyristor block out upwards at an
angle.
The thyristor blocks are installed in the reverse order.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
8-7
Maintenance
8-8
ENGLISH
02.96
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Options
9
Options
9.1
Options which can be integrated into the electronics box
One or two option boards, listed in Table 9.1, can be inserted in the electronics box using the LBA option (local
bus adapter).
The options are supplied with the option description.
Designation
Description
LBA
Local bus adapter for the electronics box. This is
Board
required for installing T100, T300, CB1, TSY, SCB1 and description
SCB2
6SE7090-0XX84-4HA0
6SE7080-0CX84-4HA0
T100
Technology board
Board
description
6SE7090-0XX87-0BB0
6SE7080-0CX87-0BB0
T300
Technology board for controlling technological
processes
Board
description
6SE7090-0XX84-0AH0
6SE7080-0CX84-0AH0
SCB1
Serial communications board with fiber-optic cable for
serial I/O system and peer-to-peer connection
Board
description
6SE7090-0XX84-0BC0
6SE7080-0CX84-0BC0
SCB2
Serial communications board for peer-to-peer
connection and USS protocol via RS485
Board
description
6SE7090-0XX84-0BD0
6SE7080-0CX84-0BD0
Use of the serial interface with USS protocol
Application
description
6SE7087-6CX87-4KB0
Communications board with interface for SINEC L2DP, (Profibus)
Board
description
6SE7090-0XX84-0AK0
6SE7087-0CX84-0AK0
Use of the PROFIBUS DP interface
Application
description
6SE7087-6CX87-0AK0
CB1
Table 9.1
Order No.
Option boards and bus adapter
Slots in the electronics box
Boards
Left
Slot 1 (CUR)
CUR
Center
Slot 3 (options)
CB1 / SCB1 / SCB2
Right
Slots 2 (options)
CB1 / SCB1 / SCB2 / T100 / T300
NOTE
Only one of each option board type may inserted in the electronics box.
TB (technology boards, e.g. T300) must always be inserted at slot 2.
If only one option board is used it must always be inserted at slot 2.
Table 9.2
Slots in the electronics box
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
9-1
Options
02.96
Current input of DC 24V power supply:
Boards
The figures are required in addition to the 1A
consumed by the basic unit.
CB1
190
SCB1
50
SCB2
150
T100
550
T300 without tacho
620
Table 9.3
9.2
Current drain (mA)
24V DC supply
Current drain of the option boards
Interface boards
The boards, listed in the following table must be externally mounted and wired-up on the external system side.
Designation
Description
SCI1
Serial I/O board (only in conjunction with SCB1).
Analog and binary input and outputs for coupling to the
SCB1 via fiber-optic cable
SCI2
Serial I/O board (only in conjunction with SCB1)
Binary inputs and outputs for coupling to the SCB1 via
fiber-optic cable.
Table 9.4
Order No.
Board
description
6SE7090-0XX84-3EA0
6SE7080-0CX84-0BC0
Board
description
6SE7090-0XX84-3EF0
6SE7080-0CX84-0BC0
Interface boards
9.3
Power Supply
A SITOP power supply as described in Catalog KT10 is recommended for the common rectifier (connector X9).
9-2
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
9.4
Options
Operator control
Option
Description
OP1
User-friendly operator control panel with plain text
display
Order No.: 6SE7090-0XX84-2FF0
Table 9.5
Fault
Operator control options
Run
The optional user-friendly operator panel OP1 is connected to
the SST1 serial interface of the basic unit.
I
O
The following parameters influence the function of the OP1 or
the interface SST1:
P050, P051, P053, P054, P683 to P687
Jog
For further information, see the OP1 manual.
P
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
+/-
Reset
Figure 9.1 OP1
9.5
RS485 interface (PTP1)
The SST2 serial interface for the basic unit is not available until submodule A2 (C98043-A1690-L1) has been
plugged into the CUR electronics module (A10).
With the parameterization P688=1, the peer-to-peer transmission protocol is implemented on SST2.
The RS485 interface cable required for peer-to-peer coupling to a second unit is described in Section 3.8.7.
9.5.1
Order designation
Three different versions of this module (short designation PTP1, item number C98043-A1690-L1, equipment
identifier A2) can be ordered. The order numbers (MLFB) for these versions are:
1. Module PTP1 with two spacers (1 module)
MLFB: 6SE7090-0XX85-1NA0
2. Standard package for 12-pulse mode (2 PTP1 modules with two
spacers for each of two units)
MLFB: 6SE7090-0XX85-1TA0
3. Retrofitting package for 12-pulse mode (2 PTP1 modules with two
spacers, 2 CUR control electronics modules and two EPROMs
with up-to-date software for two units)
MLFB: 6SE7090-0XX85-1TB0
Versions 1 and 2 require a CUR control electronics module of hardware version 06 or higher (indicated on the
fourth number block of the item number on the module: C98043-A1680-L1-06, C98043-A1680-L1-07, ...) and
software version 3.0 or higher (see the label on the EPROM, fourth number block must be 30 or higher: V98113A1800-A001-30, V98113-A1800-A001-31, ... The software version can also be read from parameter r720.01.
The contents must be 3.0 or greater).
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
9-3
Options
02.96
9.5.2
Installation
Undo the fixing screws of the CUR (A10) above and below the
removal handles .
Remove the module carefully from the electronics box using the
handles .
Versions 1 and 2: Module PTP1 is a submodule of the CUR. The
PTP1 is fitted to the electronics module using the preassembled
spacers. The female rods X115 and X116 must be fitted onto the
corresponding male pins on the CUR.
Version 3: The PTP1 and EPROM are already fitted to the CUR.
Slide CUR module (A10) with PTP1 (A2) into the electronics box
carefully along the guide rails as far as the stop.
Screw the module into position with the fixing screws above and
below the removal handles .
À
Á
A10
CUR
PMU
X100
X101
X117
A2
X116
X104
Á
À
9.5.3
X115
X102
Â
Function and terminal description
See circuit diagram in Section 3.5 "Single-line diagrams with suggested circuit arrangements".
Function
Terminal
Connected values / Description
RS485 serial interface
X117-1
RS485R + receive cable RS485 positive
(SST2)
X117-2
RS485R - receive cable RS485 negative
X117-3
RS485T+ send cable RS485 positive
X117-4
RS485T- send cable RS485 negative
X117-5
Signal earth
The bus termination resistors required for peer-to-peer mode are installed on the module:
150 between terminal X117-1 and terminal X117-2
390 from terminal X117-1 to +5V supply
390 from terminal X117-2 to ground
9.5.4
Parameterization
The following parameters influence the function of the SST2 interface for the basic unit (for details see Section
5.12):
P681 (i001 to i005)
Selection of process data for transmission
P684.i003
Baudrate
P686.i003
Number of net data words for peer-to-peer link
P687.i003
Telegram failure time
P688
Selection of the protocol
Parameterization for "12-pulse mode" see Section 3.8.3.
9-4
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
9.6
Options
SIMOVIS
WARNING
Only qualified personnel who are familiar with the SIMOVIS operating
instructions and with the operating instructions of the connected devices and
their safety instructions are permitted to intervene at the drive using the PC.
Incorrect use of the software can result in death, severe personal injury or
considerable property damage.
What is SIMOVIS?
SIMOVIS is a program that runs on standard PCs for the setup and diagnostics of converters.
The connection to this unit is implemented via the RS485 interface and USS protocol.
If your PC does not have an RS485 interface, you have to connect an RS232/RS485 interface converter to the
COM1 or COM2 RS 232 interface.
An interface converter of this type is supplied under the order number 6SX7005-0AA00.
SIMOVIS functions
Menu-driven setting up using the PC: all parameters can be set that are required for operation.
Reading and writing any preferred parameter sets (Upread, Download).
Setting and monitoring all parameters of the unit using graphical methods.
Operation of the unit via screen forms. Issuing control commands.
Evaluation of faults and alarms: Overview of faults and alarms for all equipment connected to the bus.
SIMOVIS is supplied with every unit, on diskette, in the diskette pocket at the back of the manual.
The installation and operating instructions for the software is supplied in the form of a Windows WRITE file and
as an ASCII text file on the installation disks:
ANLEITNG.WRI .............Operating instructions in Windows Write format
ANLEITNG.TXT ..............Operating instructions in ASCII text format.
If WINDOWS (Version 3.1 upwards) is installed on your PC, you can load ANLEITNG.WRI into MS-WRITE and
print it out (7 pages).
It is also possible under DOS to print out the file ANLEITNG.TXT.
In order to accommodate the different number of lines per page for different printers, page divisions were
omitted.
The simplest way to print the file out is as follows:
COPY ANLEITNG.TXT LPT1:
Please note that an ASCII character set is active on a laser printer (e.g. PC-8) ; and that a printer with endless
paper is set to "Skip over perforation".
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
9-5
Options
9-6
02.96
ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
10
Spare-parts
Spare-parts
For common rectifiers sizes H and K
Equipment
identifier
Designation
Order number
Used in
A10
PCB electronics (CUR)
6SE7090-0XX85-1DA0
all unit types -0AA0
D14
Software (EPROM)
6SW1701-0DA14
all unit types -0AA0
A23
PCB- Power Interface
6SE7041-8EK85-0HA0
6SE7038-2EH85-0AA0
6SE7041-0EH85-0AA0
6SE7041-3EK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8EK85-0AA0
A23
PCB- Power Interface
6SE7041-8GK85-0HA0
6SE7037-7FH85-0AA0
6SE7041-0FH85-0AA0
6SE7041-3FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8FK85-0AA0
6SE7037-7HH85-0AA0
6SE7041-0HH85-0AA0
6SE7041-3HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8HK85-0AA0
A23
PCB- Power Interface
6SE7041-8EK85-0LA0
6SE7041-3EK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8EK85-0AD0
A23
PCB- Power Interface
6SE7041-8GK85-0LA0
6SE7041-3FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-5FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-3HK85-0AD0
6SE7041-5HK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8HK85-0AD0
PMU
Parameterization unit
6SE7090-0XX84-2FA00
all unit types -0AA0
Ebene A
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB40
6SE7038-2EH85-0AA0
Ebene B
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB41
6SE7038-2EH85-0AA0
Ebene A
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB42
6SE7041-0EH85-0AA0
Ebene B
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB43
6SE7041-0EH85-0AA0
Ebene A
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB44
6SE7041-3EK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3EK85-0AD0
Ebene B
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB45
6SE7041-3EK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3EK85-0AD0
Ebene A
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB46
6SE7041-8EK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8EK85-0AD0
Ebene B
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB47
6SE7041-8EK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8EK85-0AD0
Ebene A
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB51
6SE7037-7HH85-0AA0
Ebene B
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB52
6SE7037-7HH85-0AA0
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
10-1
Spare-parts
02.96
Equipment
identifier
Designation
Order number
Used in
Ebene A
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB53
6SE7041-0HH85-0AA0
Ebene B
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB54
6SE7041-0HH85-0AA0
Ebene A
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB55
6SE7041-3HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3HK85-0AD0
Ebene B
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB56
6SE7041-3HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3HK85-0AD0
Ebene A
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB57
6SE7041-5HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5HK85-0AD0
Ebene B
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB58
6SE7041-5HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5HK85-0AD0
Ebene A
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB60
6SE7041-8HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8HK85-0AD0
Ebene B
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB61
6SE7041-8HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8HK85-0AD0
Ebene A
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB63
6SE7037-7FH85-0AA0
Ebene B
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB64
6SE7037-7FH85-0AA0
Ebene A
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB65
6SE7041-0FH85-0AA0
Ebene B
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB66
6SE7041-0FH85-0AA0
Ebene A
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB67
6SE7041-3FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3FK85-0AD0
Ebene B
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB68
6SE7041-3FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3FK85-0AD0
Ebene A
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB70
6SE7041-5FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5FK85-0AD0
Ebene B
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB71
6SE7041-5FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5FK85-0AD0
Ebene A
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB72
6SE7041-8FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8FK85-0AD0
Ebene B
Thyristor block with snubber RC
network
6SY7010-0AB73
6SE7041-8FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8FK85-0AD0
F1, F5
Fuse link
6SY7010-2AA01
all unit types
F2, F3, F4
Fuse link
6SY7010-2AA23
all unit types
F11 to F16
Fuse link
6SY7010-2AA22
6SE7038-2EH85-0AA0
F111 to F162
Fuse link
6SY7010-2AA22
6SE7041-3EK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3EK85-0AD0
F11-F16
Fuse link
6SY7010-2AA12
6SE7041-0EH85-0AA0
6SE7041-0FH85-0AA0
6SE7041-0HH85-0AA0
F111 to F162
Fuse link
6SY7010-2AA12
6SE7041-8EK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8EK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8HK85-0AD0
10-2 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Spare-parts
Equipment
identifier
Designation
Order number
Used in
F11 to F16
Fuse link
6SY7010-2AA11
6SE7037-7FH85-0AA0
6SE7037-7HH85-0AA0
F111 to F162
Fuse link
6SY7010-2AA11
6SE7041-3FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-3HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3HK85-0AD0
F111 to F162
Fuse link
6SY7010-2AA21
6SE7041-5FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-5HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5HK85-0AD0
R100
NTC thermistor
6SY7010-6AA02
all unit types
E1
Fan
6SY7010-7AA02
6SE7038-2EH85-0AA0
6SE7041-0EH85-0AA0
6SE7037-7FH85-0AA0
6SE7041-0FH85-0AA0
6SE7037-7HH85-0AA0
6SE7041-0HH85-0AA0
E1, E2
Fan
6SY7010-7AA02
6SE7041-3EK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3EK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8EK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8EK85-0AD0
6SE7041-3FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-5FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-3HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3HK85-0AD0
6SE7041-5HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5HK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8HK85-0AD0
T1, T2
Current transformer
6SY7010-5AA03
6SE7038-2EH85-0AA0
6SE7041-0EH85-0AA0
6SE7037-7FH85-0AA0
6SE7041-0FH85-0AA0
6SE7037-7HH85-0AA0
6SE7041-0HH85-0AA0
T1, T2
Current transformer
6SY7010-5AA04
6SE7041-3EK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3EK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8EK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8EK85-0AD0
6SE7041-3FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-5FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-3HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3HK85-0AD0
6SE7041-5HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5HK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8HK85-0AD0
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
10-3
Spare-parts
10-4 ENGLISH
02.96
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
12
Logbook
Logbook
The logbook must be kept up-to-date by the operating personnel.
All service and maintenance work carried out on the common rectifier should be entered briefly in keywords into
the logbook.
NOTE
The software used for the power supply unit is identical to that used for the power supply and regenerative
power supply units of the equipment series 6SE70.
The functional difference between power supply units and combined power supply and regenerative units is
defined by means of the parameter P070.
All the parameters are listed in this chapter. Parameters, which are not employed for the power supply unit
(designated by **" in the parameter list of Chapter 5), should be ignored.
Continuous entries are important for maintenance and could be significant when it comes to warranty claims.
Similarly, in the event of software upgrading, it is important that a record of the parameter settings is available,
because during this procedure all values are reset to their original factory settings.
Location:
.......................................................
Unit Order No.: ..................................................
Serial No.:
Date
Name
..................................................
Department
Signature
Start-up settings
Start-up settings
change
ParNo.
Parameter
designation
Factory setting
Start-up setting
Start-up setting
change
P050 Language
0
P051 Access Level
2
P052 Function select
0
P053 Parameter Access
6
P054 Display Light
0
P070 MLFB(6SE70 ... )
0
P071 Line Volts
dependent on P070
P074 Limit LowVoltage
61
P075 Rtd Amps
dependent on P070
P076 Config. PCircuit
02
P077 Factory set.type
0
P090 Board Position 2
0
P091 Board Position 3
0
P140 Rectifier Resist
i001=0.000
i001=
i001=
i002=0.000
i002=
i002=
i003=0.000
i003=
i003=
i004=0.000
i004=
i004=
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
12-1
Logbook
ParNo.
02.96
Parameter
designation
P141 Rectifier Induct
P142 Inverter Resist.
P143 Inverter Induct.
P144 DC Bus Capacit.
P160 Motor Curr Limit
P161 Regen Curr Limit
P310 DC Curr Reg Gain
P311 DC Curr Reg Time
P313 DC Volts Reg Gain
P314 DC Volts RegTime
P316 DC V-Reg +Limit
12-2 ENGLISH
Factory setting
Start-up setting
Start-up setting
change
i001=0.00
i001=
i001=
i002=0.00
i002=
i002=
i003=0.00
i003=
i003=
i004=0.00
i004=
i004=
i001=0.000
i001=
i001=
i002=0.000
i002=
i002=
i003=0.000
i003=
i003=
i004=0.000
i004=
i004=
i001=0.00
i001=
i001=
i002=0.00
i002=
i002=
i003=0.00
i003=
i003=
i004=0.00
i004=
i004=
i001=0.00
i001=
i001=
i002=0.00
i002=
i002=
i003=0.00
i003=
i003=
i004=0.00
i004=
i004=
i001=150.0
i001=
i001=
i002=150.0
i002=
i002=
i003=150.0
i003=
i003=
i004=150.0
i004=
i004=
i001=-150.0
i001=
i001=
i002=-150.0
i002=
i002=
i003=-150.0
i003=
i003=
i004=-150.0
i004=
i004=
i001=0.15
i001=
i001=
i002=0.15
i002=
i002=
i003=0.15
i003=
i003=
i004=0.15
i004=
i004=
i001=0.015
i001=
i001=
i002=0.015
i002=
i002=
i003=0.015
i003=
i003=
i004=0.015
i004=
i004=
i001=3.00
i001=
i001=
i002=3.00
i002=
i002=
i003=3.00
i003=
i003=
i004=3.00
i004=
i004=
i001=3.00
i001=
i001=
i002=3.00
i002=
i002=
i003=3.00
i003=
i003=
i004=3.00
i004=
i004=
i001=0.01
i001=
i001=
i002=0.01
i002=
i002=
i003=0.01
i003=
i003=
i004=0.01
i004=
i004=
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
ParNo.
Logbook
Parameter
designation
P317 DC V-Reg -Limit
P318 DC V(set,red)
P319 DC V(set,red)Hys
P320 Smooth Load Amps
P329 PreChange Time
Factory setting
Start-up setting
Start-up setting
change
i001=-1.00
i001=
i001=
i002=-1.00
i002=
i002=
i003=-1.00
i003=
i003=
i004=-1.00
i004=
i004=
i001=80.00
i001=
i001=
i002=80.00
i002=
i002=
i003=80.00
i003=
i003=
i004=80.00
i004=
i004=
i001=6.00
i001=
i001=
i002=6.00
i002=
i002=
i003=6.00
i003=
i003=
i004=6.00
i004=
i004=
i001=5
i001=
i001=
i002=5
i002=
i002=
i003=5
i003=
i003=
i004=5
i004=
i004=
i001=500
i001=
i001=
i002=500
i002=
i002=
i003=500
i003=
i003=
i004=500
i004=
i004=
P353 Thyristor Test
0
P354 GroundFault Test
2
P366 Auto Restart
0
P408 Caps FormingTime
i001=10.0
i001=
i001=
i002=10.0
i002=
i002=
i003=10.0
i003=
i003=
i004=10.0
i004=
i004=
P409 Contactor Delay
0.0
P486 Src Current Setp
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=2.00
i001=
i001=
i002=2.00
i002=
i002=
i003=2.00
i003=
i003=
i004=2.00
i004=
i004=
i001=0.10
i001=
i001=
i002=0.10
i002=
i002=
i003=0.10
i003=
i003=
i004=0.10
i004=
i004=
i001=1010
i001=
i001=
i002=1001
i002=
i002=
i001=1010
i001=
i001=
i002=1002
i002=
i002=
i001=1
i001=
i001=
i002=1
i002=
i002=
P517 DC Volts Dev Lim
P518 Deviation Time
P554 Src ON/OFF1
P555 Src1 OFF2
P556 Src2 OFF2
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
12-3
Logbook
ParNo.
02.96
Parameter
designation
P557 Src3 OFF2
P561 Src InvRelease
P565 Src1 Fault Reset
P566 Src2 Fault Reset
P567 Src3 Fault Reset
P568 Src Jog1 ON
P569 Src Jog2 ON
P571 Src Reduce DC V
P572 Src RegenRelease
P573 Src No ExtFault3
P574 Src Motor/Regen
P575 Src No ExtFault1
P578 Src RDataSetBit0
P579 Src RDataSetBit1
P583 Src 12-Pulse Mode
P586 Src No ExtFault2
P587 Src Master/Slave
P588 Src No Ext Warn1
P589 Src No Ext Warn2
Factory setting
Start-up setting
Start-up setting
change
i001=1
i001=
i001=
i002=1
i002=
i002=
i001=1
i001=
i001=
i002=1
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=1003
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=2001
i001=
i001=
i002=2001
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=1
i001=
i001=
i002=1
i002=
i002=
i001=1
i001=
i001=
i002=1
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=1
i001=
i001=
i002=1
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=1
i001=
i001=
i002=1
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=1
i001=
i001=
i002=1
i002=
i002=
i001=1
i001=
i001=
i002=1
i002=
i002=
P590 Src Base/Reserve
1005
P591 Src ContactorMsg
1
P600 Trg Bit Ready On
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
12-4 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
ParNo.
Logbook
Parameter
designation
P601 Trg Bit Rdy Oper
P602 Trg Bit Operat
P603 Trg Bit Fault
P604 Trg Bit No OFF2
P606 Trg BitONblocked
P607 Trg Bit Warning
P608 Trg Bit Deviat.
P610 Trg Reren Ready
P611 Trg Low Voltage
P612 Trg Bit Contact
P613 Trg DC V reduced
P614 Trg Motor/Regen
P618 Trg Current Lim.
P619 Trg Bit Ext Flt1
P620 Trg Bit Ext Flt2
P621 Trg Bit ExtWarn
P622 Trg Bit i2t Inv
P623 Trg BitFltTmpInv
P624 Trg BitWarTmpInv
P631 Trg Bit Charging
Factory setting
Start-up setting
Start-up setting
change
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=1002
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
P655 CUR AnaOutActVal
37
P656 CUR AnaOut Gain
10.00
P657 CUR AnaOutOffset
0.00
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
12-5
Logbook
ParNo.
02.96
Parameter
designation
Factory setting
Start-up setting
Start-up setting
change
P658 AO Curr(act)Conf
0
P660 SCI AnalogInConf
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i003=0
i003=
i003=
i004=0
i004=
i004=
i005=0
i005=
i005=
i006=0
i006=
i006=
i001=2
i001=
i001=
i002=2
i002=
i002=
i003=2
i003=
i003=
i004=2
i004=
i004=
i005=2
i005=
i005=
i006=2
i006=
i006=
i001=0.00
i001=
i001=
i002=0.00
i002=
i002=
i003=0.00
i003=
i003=
i004=0.00
i004=
i004=
i005=0.00
i005=
i005=
i006=0.00
i006=
i006=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i003=0
i003=
i003=
i004=0
i004=
i004=
i005=0
i005=
i005=
i006=0
i006=
i006=
i001=10.00
i001=
i001=
i002=10.00
i002=
i002=
i003=10.00
i003=
i003=
i004=10.00
i004=
i004=
i005=10.00
i005=
i005=
i006=10.00
i006=
i006=
i001=0.00
i001=
i001=
i002=0.00
i002=
i002=
i003=0.00
i003=
i003=
i004=0.00
i004=
i004=
i005=0.00
i005=
i005=
i006=0.00
i006=
i006=
P661 SCI AnaInSmooth
P662 SCI AnalogInOffs
P664 SCI AnaOutActVal
P665 SCI AnaOut Gain
P666 SCI AnaOut Offs
12-6 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
ParNo.
Logbook
Parameter
designation
P680 Scom1 Act Value
P681 Scom2 Act Value
Factory setting
Start-up setting
Start-up setting
change
i001=968
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i003=0
i003=
i003=
i004=0
i004=
i004=
i005=0
i005=
i005=
i006=0
i006=
i006=
i007=0
i007=
i007=
i008=0
i008=
i008=
i009=0
i009=
i009=
i010=0
i010=
i010=
i011=0
i011=
i011=
i012=0
i012=
i012=
i013=0
i013=
i013=
i014=0
i014=
i014=
i015=0
i015=
i015=
i016=0
i016=
i016=
i001=599
i001=
i001=
i002=34
i002=
i002=
i003=0
i003=
i003=
i004=0
i004=
i004=
i005=0
i005=
i005=
P682 SCB Protocol
0
P683 SCom/SCB BusAddr
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i001=6
i001=
i001=
i002=6
i002=
i002=
i003=13
i003=
i003=
i001=127
i001=
i001=
i002=127
i002=
i002=
i001=2
i001=
i001=
i002=2
i002=
i002=
i003=2
i003=
i003=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i003=1
i003=
i003=
P684 SCom/SCB Baud
P685 SCom/SCB #PKWDat
P686 SCom/SCB # PrDat
P687 SCom/SCB TlgOFF
P688 SST2 Protocol
0
P689 SCB Peer2PeerExt
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i003=0
i003=
i003=
i004=0
i004=
i004=
i005=0
i005=
i005=
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
12-7
Logbook
ParNo.
02.96
Parameter
designation
P690 SCB Act Values
P694 CB/TB Act Values
Factory setting
Start-up setting
change
i001=968
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i003=0
i003=
i003=
i004=0
i004=
i004=
i005=0
i005=
i005=
i006=0
i006=
i006=
i007=0
i007=
i007=
i008=0
i008=
i008=
i009=0
i009=
i009=
i010=0
i010=
i010=
i011=0
i011=
i011=
i012=0
i012=
i012=
i013=0
i013=
i013=
i014=0
i014=
i014=
i015=0
i015=
i015=
i016=0
i016=
i016=
i001=968
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i003=0
i003=
i003=
i004=0
i004=
i004=
i005=0
i005=
i005=
i006=0
i006=
i006=
i007=0
i007=
i007=
i008=0
i008=
i008=
i009=0
i009=
i009=
i010=0
i010=
i010=
i011=0
i011=
i011=
i012=0
i012=
i012=
i013=0
i013=
i013=
i014=0
i014=
i014=
i015=0
i015=
i015=
i016=0
i016=
i016=
P695 CB/TB TlgOFFTime
20
P696 CB Parameter 1
0
P697 CB Parameter 2
0
P698 CB Parameter 3
0
P699 CB Parameter 4
0
P700 CB Parameter 5
0
P701 CB Parameter 6
0
P702 CB Parameter 7
0
P703 CB Parameter 8
0
P704 CB Parameter 9
0
P705 CB Parameter 10
0
12-8 ENGLISH
Start-up setting
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
ParNo.
Logbook
Parameter
designation
P773 Deadband Convert
P774 Deadband Invert
P775 Min Gating Angle
P776 Max Gating Angle
P777 Max Gating Angle
Ramp
Factory setting
Start-up setting
Start-up setting
change
i001=0.01
i001=
i001=
i002=0.01
i002=
i002=
i003=0.01
i003=
i003=
i004=0.01
i004=
i004=
i001=-3.00
i001=
i001=
i002=-3.00
i002=
i002=
i003=-3.00
i003=
i003=
i004=-3.00
i004=
i004=
i001=0
i001=
i001=
i002=0
i002=
i002=
i003=0
i003=
i003=
i004=0
i004=
i004=
i001=150
i001=
i001=
i002=150
i002=
i002=
i003=150
i003=
i003=
i004=150
i004=
i004=
i001=20.00
i001=
i001=
i002=20.00
i002=
i002=
i003=20.00
i003=
i003=
i004=20.00
i004=
i004=
P785 I2t Control Word
1
P793 Line Voltage Delay
0.03
P799 Spezial Access
0
P917 Change Reports
0
P918 CB Bus Address
3
P927 Parameter Access
6
P928 Src Base/Reserve
1005
P952 # of Faults
0
P970 Factory Settings
1
P971 EEPROM Storing
0
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
12-9
Logbook
No.
02.96
Date/time
12-10 ENGLISH
Name/department
Fault and diagnostic
messages
Measures
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
13
Environmental Compatibility
Environmental Compatibility
Environmental aspects during development
The number of parts has been reduced substantially by the use of highly integrated components and by a
modular structure of the complete converter series. This reduces energy consumption during production.
Particular attention was paid to reducing volume, mass and type diversity of the metal and plastic parts.
Plastic parts used:
ABS:
PMU support
PP:
Insulating plate
Bus retrofit
PC:
Protection against accidental contact
PA6:
Insulating films
Terminal housing
On all essential parts, flame retardants containing halogen and insulating material containing silicone have been
substituted by materials that are devoid of noxious substances.
Environmental compatibility was an important criterion in the selection of externally source items.
Environmental aspects during production
Externally sourced items are mainly transported in returnable packaging. The packaging material itself is
recyclable, consisting mainly of cardboard.
Except for the hot-dip-galvanized enclosure, no special surface coatings are used.
SMD components are used on the printed-circuit boards.
Production is emission-free.
Environmental aspects of disposal
The unit can be dismantled into recyclable mechanical components by means of easily removable screw and
snap joints.
The PC boards can be disposed of thermally. The number of components containing hazardous substances is
only slight.
The plastic parts are marked in conformity with DIN 54840 and bear the recycling symbol.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
13-1
Environmental Compatibility
13-2 ENGLISH
02.96
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
14
Technische Daten
Technical Data
In the event of conditions of use other than those listed in this chapter, please contact your local Siemens branch
or national subsidiary.
Coolant temperature
0 °C to +40 °C
Storage temperature
25 °C to +70 °C
25 °C to +70 °C
Transport temperature
Environmental class
3K3
DIN IEC 721-3-3 / 04.90
Soiling
2
DIN VDE 0110 Part 1 / 01.89
moisture not permitted
Overvoltage category (power section)
III
DIN VDE 0110 Part 2 / 01.89
Overvoltage resistance class
(with converter connected)
1
DIN VDE 0160 / 04.91
Type of protection
IP00
DIN VDE 0470 Part 1 / 11.92 =
^ EN 60529
Interference immunity
IEC 801-2, IEC 801-4
Mechanical strength
DIN IEC 68-2-6 / 06.90
Frequency range
Hz
10 to 58
stationary use
Constant amplitude of
deflection
acceleration
mm
m/s2 (g)
0.075
more than 58 to 500
9.8 (1)
3.5
during transport
9.8 (1)
The units can also be operated in load class II. The permissible values must be taken from the following tables.
I
(A)
Load class ΙΙ
136%
Load class Ι
100%
91%
60s
240s
t/(s)
Figure 14.1
Power output according to load class II
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
14-1
Technische Daten
Common
Rectifier
02.96
6SE70..-.....-0AA0 38-2EH85 41-0EH85 41-3EK85 41-8EK85
Rated voltage, rated frequency, rated current, rated power
Rated voltage
Input Un
Output Udn
V
3 AC 380 to 460V ±15 %
DC 510 to 620V ±15 %
Rated frequency fn
Input
Output
Hz
46 to 64
D.C.
A
Rated current In
Input (rms value) AC
Output (average) DC
710
821
888
1023
1156
1333
1542
1780
747
931
1213
1620
1820
2430
Load class II acc. EN 60146-1-1
Rated output current average
A
Base load duration
s
Excess output current
average
A
Excess current duration
s
240
1121
1396
60
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor
Mains cos1N
1
Power dissipation
Maximum
kW
3,29
3,70
4,85
6,24
Cooling air requirement
m3/s
0,55
0,55
1,0
1,0
85
87
85
87
87
88
87
88
mm
mm
mm
H
508
1050
551
H
508
1050
551
K
800
1400
550
K
800
1400
550
kg
130
130
260
300
Sound pressure level, dimensions, weight
Sound pressure
level of fan
Size
Width
Height
Depth
Weight app.
50Hz
60Hz
dB(A)
Parallel units (-0AD0) of size K for connecting in parallel have the same technical data as the corresponding
"basic units" (-0AA0). Please note the unit correspondence and notes of Section 3.7!
The permissible output current in parallel mode is reduced (due to current division between the power sections)
by 10 % as compared to the sum of the rated currents of the separate power sections.
14-2 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Common
Rectifier
Technische Daten
6SE70..-.....-0AA0 37-7FH85 41-0FH85 41-3FK85 41-5FK85 41-8FK85
Rated voltage, rated frequency, rated current, rated power
Rated voltage
Input Un
Output Udn
V
3 AC 500 to 575 ±15 %
DC 675 to 780V ±15 %
Rated frequency fn
Input
Output
Hz
46 to 64
D.C.
A
Rated current In
Input (rms value) AC
Output (average) DC
671
774
888
1023
1119
1285
1269
1464
1633
1880
704
931
1169
1332
1711
1998
2566
Load class II acc. EN 60146-1-1
Rated output current average
A
Base load duration
s
Excess output current
average
A
Excess current duration
s
240
1057
1396
1754
60
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor
Mains cos1N
1
Power dissipation
Maximum
kW
3,30
4,03
5,40
5,87
6,65
Cooling air requirement
m3/s
0,55
0,55
1,0
1,0
1,0
85
87
85
87
87
88
87
88
87
88
mm
mm
mm
H
508
1050
551
H
508
1050
551
K
800
1400
550
K
800
1400
550
K
800
1400
550
kg
130
130
260
260
300
Sound pressure level, dimensions, weight
Sound pressure
level of fan
Size
Width
Height
Depth
Weight app.
50Hz
60Hz
dB(A)
Parallel units (-0AD0) of size K for connecting in parallel have the same technical data as the corresponding
"basic units" (-0AA0). Please note the unit correspondence and notes of Section 3.7!
The permissible output current in parallel mode is reduced (due to current division between the power sections)
by 10 % as compared to the sum of the rated currents of the separate power sections.
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
14-3
Technische Daten
Common
Rectifier
02.96
6SE70..-.....-0AA0 37-7HH85 41-0HH85 41-3HK85 41-5HK85 41-8HK85
Rated voltage, rated frequency, rated current, rated power
Rated voltage
Input Un
Output Udn
V
3 AC 660 to 690V ±15 %
DC 890 to 930V ±15 %
Rated frequency fn
Input
Output
Hz
46 to 64
D.C.
A
Rated current In
Input (rms value) AC
Output (average) DC
671
774
888
1023
1119
1285
1269
1464
1633
1880
704
931
1169
1332
1711
1998
2566
Load class II acc. EN 60146-1-1
Rated output current average
A
Base load duration
s
Excess output current
average
A
Excess current duration
s
240
1057
1396
1754
60
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor
Mains cos1N
1
Power dissipation
Maximum
kW
3,70
4,15
5,54
5,97
7,62
Cooling air requirement
m3/s
0,55
0,55
1,0
1,0
1,0
85
87
85
87
87
88
87
88
87
88
mm
mm
mm
H
508
1050
551
H
508
1050
551
K
800
1400
550
K
800
1400
550
K
800
1400
550
kg
130
130
260
260
300
Sound pressure level, dimensions, weight
Sound pressure
level of fan
Size
Width
Height
Depth
Weight app.
50Hz
60Hz
dB(A)
Parallel units (-0AD0) of size K for connecting in parallel have the same technical data as the corresponding
"basic units" (-0AA0). Please note the unit correspondence and notes of Section 3.7!
The permissible output current in parallel mode is reduced (due to current division between the power sections)
by 10 % as compared to the sum of the rated currents of the separate power sections.
14-4 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Technische Daten
14.1
Power reduction at increased coolant temperature
The rated current must be reduced according to Figure 14.2 for cooling medium temperatures exceeding 40°C.
Cooling medium temperatures > 50°C are not permissible.
permissible rated current
in %
100
90
80
75
70
60
Coolant temperature
in °C
10
20
30
40
50
Figure 14.2 Maximum permitted rated current depending on coolant temperature
14.2
Power reduction at altitudes > 1000m above MSL
The rated current must be reduced as shown in Figure 14.3 in the event of installation altitudes > 1000 m above
mean sea level. Installation altitudes > 2000 m above MSL (please enquire)
permissible rated current
permissible rated voltage
in %
in %
100
100
90
90
80
80
70
70
60
60
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
0
1000
Installation altitude
in m above sea level
2000
3000
4000
Installation altitude
in m above sea level
Figure 14.3 Maximum values for rated current and rated voltage depending on installation altitude
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
14-5
Technische Daten
14.3
02.96
Applied standards
DIN VDE 0100
Part 540 A11.91
DIN VDE 0106
Part 1 A05.82
Part 100 A03.83
Erection of power installations with rated voltages up to 1000 V,
Selection and erection of electrical equipment, earthing, PE conductor,
equipotential bonding conductor
Protection against electric shock:
Classification of electrical and electronic equipment (IEC 536)
Arrangement of actuation elements in the proximity of shock-hazard parts
DIN VDE 0110 Part 1 and 2
A01.89
Isolation coordination for electrical equipment in low-voltage installations
DIN VDE 0113
Safety of machines: electrical equipment of machines,
General requirements (EN 60204-1:1992)
Part 1 A06.93
DIN VDE 0160 E04.91
Equipping power installations with electronic equipment
DIN VDE 0298
Use of cables and insulated cables for power installations:
Recommended values for the current carrying capacity of cables with rated
voltages U0 / U to 18/30 kV
Recommended values for the current carrying capacity of cables
Part 2 A11.79
Part 4 A02.80
DIN VDE 0470 Part 1 A12.92
Types of protection, shock, foreign body and water protection for electrical
equipment (EN 60529: 1991)
DIN VDE 0558 Part1 A07.87
Semiconductor converters: general regulations and special regulations for
line-commutated converters
DIN VDE 0843
Electromagnetic compatibility of instrumentation and control equipment in
industrial process engineering:
Interference resistance to static electricity discharges; requirements and
measurement methods (IEC801-2) Ersetzt durch DIN EN 60801, Teil 2
(09.87)
Part 2 A09.87 Z
DIN VDE 0875
Part 11 A12.88 Z
Part 1 A07.92
RFI suppression of electrical equipment and installations:
(EN 55014: 1987) Ersetzt durch DIN VDE 0875, Teil 14 und DIN VDE 0075
(EN 55011: 1991)
DIN 41494
Part 5 A9.80
Equipment practice for electronic facilities; subracks and modules
DIN 41651
Part 1 A9.89
Connectors for printed circuits for connecting ribbon cables with round
conductors; indirect insertion, grid dimension 2.54 mm
DIN IEC 68
Part 2
Elektrotechnik; Grundlegende Umweltprüfverfahren; Prüfungen
Part 3 A08.87
Electrical engineering; classification of environmental conditions:
classes of influencing quantities
Part 4
Electromagnetic compatibility for industrial - process measurement and
control equipment
Electrical fast transient / burst requirements
DIN IEC 721
IEC 801
EN 60146-1-1: 1993
Part 1-1
14-6 ENGLISH
Semiconductor converters;
General requirements and line-commutated converters:
Definition of basic requirements (IEC146-1-1991)
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
02.96
Technische Daten
Sources
DIN standards and foreign standards:
Beuth-Verlag GmbH
Burggrafenstraße 6
10787 Berlin
DIN VDE regulations:
VDE-Auslieferungsstelle
Merianstraße 29
63069 Offenbach
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
14-7
Technische Daten
02.96
14-8 ENGLISH
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
05.95
15
Index
Index
To appear shortly
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
15-1
Index
15-2 ENGLISH
05.95
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
09.97
Bisher sind folgende Ausgaben erschienen:
The following versions have appeared so far:
Ausgabe
Version
interne Sachnummer
Internal Part number
A
C98130-A1235-A3-01-47
B
C98130-A1235-A3-02-47
C
C98130-A1235-A3-03-7447
D
C98130-A1235-A3-04-7447
Ausgabe D besteht aus folgenden Kapiteln
Version D consists of the following chapters
Kapitel
Chapter
Seiten
Pages
Ausgabedatum
Date of Edition
0
Allgemeines / General
10
02.96
1
Beschreibung / Description
2
02.96
2
Transportieren, Auspacken, Montieren / Transport, unpacking, assembly
4
02.96
3
Anschließen / Connection
30
02.96
4
Inbetriebsetzen / Start-Up
48
02.96
5
Parameterliste / Parameter List
44
02.96
6
Bedienen / Operator control
4
02.96
7
Störungen und Warnungen / Fault and Alarm Messages
10
02.96
8
Wartung / Maintenance
8
02.96
9
Optionen / Options
6
02.96
10
Ersatzteile / Spare parts
4
02.96
11
Leerkapitel / Blank
0
—
12
Logbuch / Logbook
10
02.96
13
Umweltverträglichkeit / Environmental compatibility
2
02.96
14
Technische Daten / Technical data
8
02.96
15
Stichwortverzeichnis / Index
1
05.95
Bereich
Elektronikwerk Wien
Postfach 83, A-1211 Wien
Antriebs-, Schalt- und Installationstechnik von Siemens
Drives and Standard Products from
Siemens
Electronic Plant Vienna
P.O. Box 83, A-1211 Vienna
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Einspeiseeinheit Betriebsanleitung
Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
Änderungen vorbehalten
Subject to change without notice
Bestell-Nr. / Order-No.: 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Printed in Austria
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Betriebsanleitung
Operating Instructions
Einspeiseeinheit Bauform Kompakt PLUS
Rectifier Unit Compact PLUS Type
Ausgabe / Edition: AC
Bestell-Nr. / Order No.: 6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0
Änderungen von Funktionen, technischen Daten, Normen, Zeichnungen und Parametern vorbehalten.
We reserve the right to make changes to functions, technical datas, standards, drawings and
parameters.
Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung dieser Unterlage, Verwertung
und Mitteilung ihres Inhalts nicht gestattet, soweit nicht ausdrücklich zugestanden. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte vorbehalten, insbesondere für den Fall der
Patenterteilung oder GM-Eintragung.
Wir haben den Inhalt der Druckschrift auf Übereinstimmung mit der
beschriebenen Hard- und Software überprüft. Dennoch können
Abweichungen nicht ausgeschlossen werden, so daß wir für die
vollständige Übereinstimmung keine Garantie übernehmen. Die
Angaben in dieser Druckschrift werden jedoch regelmäßig überprüft
und notwendige Korrekturen sind in den nachfolgenden Auflagen
enthalten. Für Verbesserungsvorschläge sind wir dankbar
SIMOVERT ist ein Warenzeichen von Siemens
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders
will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by
patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are
reserved.
We have checked the contents of this document to ensure that they
coincide with the described hardware and software. However,
differences cannot be completely excluded, so that we do not
accept any guarantee for complete conformance. However, the
information in this document is regularly checked and necessary
corrections will be included in subsequent editions. We are grateful
for any recommendations for improvement.
Siemens AG 1997 All rights reserved
SIMOVERT Registered Trade Mark
10.98
Contents
Contents
1
DEFINITIONS AND WARNINGS............................................................................. 1-1
2
DESCRIPTION......................................................................................................... 2-1
3
START-UP ............................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1
Start-up steps ........................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2
Displays.................................................................................................................... 3-2
4
TRANSPORT, STORAGE, UNPACKING ............................................................... 4-1
5
INSTALLATION....................................................................................................... 5-1
6
INSTALLATION IN CONFORMANCE WITH EMC REGULATIONS...................... 6-1
7
CONNECTING-UP................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1
7.1.1
7.1.2
Power connections................................................................................................... 7-4
Power connections for units with a width up to 90 mm............................................ 7-4
Power connections for units with a width of 135 mm and 180 mm.......................... 7-5
7.2
Control connections ................................................................................................. 7-7
7.3
Conductor cross-sections, braking resistor and pre-charging of capacitor module7-10
8
MAINTENANCE....................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1
Replacing the fan ..................................................................................................... 8-1
9
TECHNICAL DATA ................................................................................................. 9-1
10
ENVIRONMENTAL FRIENDLINESS .................................................................... 10-1
11
CERTIFICATES ..................................................................................................... 11-1
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
1
10.98
1
Definitions and Warnings
Definitions and Warnings
Qualified personnel
For the purpose of this documentation and the product warning labels,
a "Qualified person" is someone who is familiar with the installation,
mounting, start-up, operation and maintenance of the product. He or
she must have the following qualifications:
♦ Trained or authorized to energize, de-energize, ground and tag
circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety
procedures.
♦ Trained or authorized in the proper care and use of protective
equipment in accordance with established safety procedures.
♦ Trained in rendering first aid.
DANGER
For the purpose of this documentation and the product warning labels,
"Danger" indicates death, severe personal injury or substantial property
damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
For the purpose of this documentation and the product warning labels,
"Warning" indicates death, severe personal injury or property damage
can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
For the purpose of this documentation and the product warning labels,
"Caution" indicates that minor personal injury or material damage can
result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTE
For the purpose of this documentation, "Note" indicates important
information about the product or about the respective part of the
documentation which is essential to highlight.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
1-1
Definitions and Warnings
WARNING
10.98
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during
operation.
Non-observance of the warnings can thus result in severe personal
injury or property damage.
Only qualified personnel should work on or around the equipment
This personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all warning and
maintenance procedures contained in this documentation.
The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on
correct transport, proper storage and installation as well as careful
operation and maintenance.
NOTE
This documentation does not purport to cover all details on all types of
the product, nor to provide for every possible contingency to be met in
connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems
arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes,
the matter should be referred to the local SIEMENS sales office.
The contents of this documentation shall not become part of or modify
any prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales
contract contains the entire obligation of SIEMENS AG. The warranty
contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of
SIEMENS AG. Any statements contained herein do not create new
warranties or modify the existing warranty.
1-2
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.98
Definitions and Warnings
Safety and Operating Instructions
for Drive Converters
(in conformity with the low-voltage directive 73/23/EEC)
1. General
4. Installation
In operation, drive converters, depending on their degree
of protection, may have live, uninsulated, and possibly
also moving or rotating parts, as well as hot surfaces.
The installation and cooling of the appliances shall be in
accordance with the specifications in the pertinent
documentation.
In case of inadmissible removal of the required covers, of
improper use, wrong installation or maloperation, there is
the danger of serious personal injury and damage to
property.
The drive converters shall be protected against
excessive strains. In particular, no components must be
bent and/or isolating distances altered in the course of
transportation or handling. No contact shall be made with
electronic components and contacts.
For further information, see documentation.
All operations serving transport, installation and
commissioning as well as maintenance are to be carried
out by skilled technical personnel (observe IEC 364 or
CENELEC HD 384 or DIN VDE 0100 and IEC Report
664 or DIN VDE 0110 and national accident prevention
rules).
Drive converters contain electrostatic sensitive
components which are liable to damage through
improper use. Electronic components must not be
mechanically damaged or destroyed (potential health
risks).
For the purposes of these basic safety instructions,
"skilled technical personnel" means persons who are
familiar with the installation, mounting, commissioning
and operation of the product and have the qualifications
needed for the performance of their functions.
When working on live drive converters, the applicable
national accident prevention rules (e.g. VBG 4) must be
complied with.
2. Intended use
Drive converters are components designed for inclusion
in electrical installations or machinery.
5. Electrical connection
The electrical installation shall be carried out in
accordance with the relevant requirements (e.g. crosssectional areas of conductors, fusing, PE connection).
For further information, see documentation.
In case of installation in machinery, commissioning of the
drive converter (i.e. the starting of normal operation) is
prohibited until the machinery has been proved to
conform to the provisions of the EC directive 89/392/EEC
(Machinery Safety Directive - MSD). Account is to be
taken of EN 60204.
Instructions for the installation in accordance with EMC
requirements, such as screening, grounding, location of
filters and wiring, are contained in the drive converter
documentation. They must always be complied with, also
for drive converters bearing a CE marking. Observance
of the limit values required by the EMC law is the
responsibility of the manufacturer of the installation or
machine.
Commissioning (i.e. the start of normal operation) is
admissible only where conformity with the EMC directive
(89/336/EEC) has been established.
6. Operation
The drive converters meet the requirements of the lowvoltage directive 73/23/EEC. They are subject to the
harmonized standards of the series prEN 50178/DIN
VDE 0160 in conjunction with EN 60439-1/DIN VDE
0660 Part 500 and EN 60146/DIN VDE 0558.
The technical data as well as information concerning the
supply conditions shall be taken from the rating plate and
from the documentation and shall be strictly observed.
3. Transport, storage
The instructions for transport, storage and proper use
shall be complied with.
The climatic conditions shall be in conformity with prEN
50178.
Installations which include drive converters shall be
equipped with additional monitoring and protective
devices in accordance with the relevant applicable safety
requirements, e.g. Act respecting technical equipment,
accident prevention rules, etc. Changes to the drive
converters by means of the operating software are
permissible.
After disconnection of the drive converters from the
voltage supply, live appliance parts and power terminals
must not be touched immediately because of possibly
energized capacitors. In this regard, the corresponding
signs and markings on the drive converter must be
respected.
During operation, all covers and doors shall be kept
closed.
7. Maintenance and servicing
The manufacturer’s documentation shall be followed.
Keep these safety instructions in a safe place!
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
1-3
10.98
Description
2
Description
Range of application The Compact PLUS rectifier unit consists of a rectifier module for
generating DC link voltage. It is used to feed several inverters for the
configuration of a multi-motor system with a maximum total drive power
of 100 kW.
An external high-load resistor (braking resistor) can be connected up to
an integrated braking resistor control by means of which regenerative
braking energy can be reduced.
The optional OP1S operator control panel is mounted to the front panel
where it has a connection to the RS485 interface. All inverters
connected up to the rectifier unit can be visualized and controlled by
means of this operator control panel.
The rectifier unit does not require an ON command; it is powered up
automatically after the incoming power supply is energized. This is on
the condition that the external 24 V supply has been energized.
The operating status is displayed by three LEDs in the front panel
(Run, Failure, Chopper active).
Further connections:
♦ Voltage output for the pre-charging of optionally connected capacitor
modules for supporting the DC link and for storing regenerative
energy
♦ Fault signalling relay contact
In the event of a fault, the incoming power supply of the rectifier unit
has to be powered-down and the inverters have to be disabled via
this contact.
G
Braking
resistor
H
Brake chopper
C’
D’
Pre-charging
of capacitor
module
U1/L1
C / L+
W1/L3
D / L-
Mains
connection V1/L2
DC link
connection
Rectifier
Pre-charging
PE3
PE
Fig. 2-1
Circuit principle of the rectifier unit
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
2-1
10.98
Start-up
3
Start-up
3.1
Start-up steps
After removing the packaging, please check that the unit
is intact and undamaged. Only intact units may be
started-up. Please also check that the unit is complete.
See section
"Transport,
Storage,
Unpacking"
Mount the unit
Mount the unit in conformance with the requirements at
the point of installation and the EMC instructions.
See section
"Installation" and
"Installation in
Conformance
with EMC
Regulations"
Connect the
protective conductor,
the supply cable, the
external braking resistor
and the external 24 V
incoming supply
Starting with the protective conductor, please connect
the supply cable, the external braking resistor and the
external 24 V incoming supply. When laying the cables,
please observe the EMC instructions. During this work
step, please do not yet connect the DC link buses.
See section
"Connecting-up"
and "Installation
in Conformance
with EMC
Regulations"
Unpack and
check the unit
Power up the external
24 V incoming supply
111
111
Power up the
line voltage,
carry out function test
After powering up the line voltage, the LED "Run" will
light up on the rectifier unit.
111
111
111
De-energize the line
voltage and the external
24 V incoming supply
Connect the DC link
Connect the DC link buses and form the connection to
the converters.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
See section
"Connecting-up"
3-1
Start-up
3.2
10.98
Displays
The LEDs on the front panel indicate the operating status of the rectifier
unit.
LED
Designation
Meaning
Green
Run
Precharging is finished,
the bypass relay is closed
the rectifier unit is ready for operation.
Red
Failure
Group fault,
there is a fault on the rectifier unit, the fault-signalling
relay (terminal X91) has picked up:
Yellow Chopper active
Table 3-1
NOTE
3-2
•
the 24 V supply voltage is less than 16 V
•
a mains phase failure has occurred
•
the DC link voltage is more than 800 V
•
the precharging resistors are overloaded
•
the heat sink temperature is too high
•
there is a short circuit on the brake resistor control
The braking resistor transistor is ON.
Operating statuses of the rectifier unit
The fault display is not saved to memory; it appears for only as long as
the fault exists (but for at least 1 sec) and therefore does not need
acknowledgement.
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.98
4
Transport, Storage, Unpacking
Transport, Storage, Unpacking
The units and components are packed in the manufacturing plant
corresponding to that specified when ordered. A packing label is
located on the outside of the packaging. Please observe the
instructions on the packaging for transport, storage and professional
handling.
Transport
Vibrations and jolts must be avoided during transport. If the unit is
damaged, you must inform your shipping company immediately.
Storage
The units and components must be stored in clean, dry rooms.
Temperatures between -25 °C (-13 °F) and +70 °C (158 °F) are
permissible. Temperature fluctuations must not be more than 30 K per
hour.
Unpacking
The packaging comprises board and corrugated paper. It can be
disposed of corresponding to the appropriate local regulations for the
disposal of board products.The units and components can be installed
and commissioned after they have been unpacked and checked to
ensure that everything is complete and that they are not damaged.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
4-1
10.98
5
Installation
Installation
WARNING
Safe converter operation requires that the equipment is mounted and
commissioned by qualified personnel taking into account the warning
information provided in these Operating Instructions.
The general and domestic installation and safety regulations for work
on electrical power equipment (e.g. VDE) must be observed as well as
the professional handling of tools and the use of personal protective
equipment.
Death, severe bodily injury or significant material damage could result if
these instructions are not followed.
Clearances
When installing the units, it must be observed that the mains
connection is located at the bottom section of the unit and the DC link
connection at the top section of the unit.
The rectifier unit and the inverters can be mounted flush with each
other.
In order to ensure an adequate supply of cooling air, a clearance of 100
mm must be left at the top of the unit and at the bottom of the unit
respectively to components which may considerably affect the flow of
cooling air.
When mounting in cabinets, the cabinet cooling must be designed
according to the power loss. Please refer to the Technical Data in this
regard.
Requirements at the
point of installation
♦ Foreign particles
The units must be protected against the ingress of foreign particles
as otherwise their function and operational safety cannot be
ensured.
♦ Dust, gases, vapors
Equipment rooms must be dry and dust-free. Ambient and cooling
air must not contain any electrically conductive gases, vapors and
dust which could diminish the functionality. If necessary, filters
should be used or other corrective measures taken.
♦ Cooling air
The units must only be operated in an ambient climate in
accordance with DIN IEC 721-3-3 Class 3K3. For cooling air
temperatures of more than 45 °C (113 °F) and installation altitudes
higher than 1000 m, derating is required.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
5-1
Installation
10.98
Cooling air
Fig. 5-1
Installation
100 mm
100 mm
Mounting
surface
Minimum clearances for cooling
The unit is mounted directly to a mounting surface. Fixing is by means
of two or four M5 screws.
Cutouts for
M5 screw
Mounting surface
414 mm
360 mm
250 mm
20 mm
45 mm
90 mm
135 mm
180 mm
220 mm
15 kW
Side view
Fig. 5-2
5-2
50 kW
Front view
100 kW
Dimension drawing of the rectifier unit
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.98
6
Installation in Conformance with EMC Regulations
Installation in Conformance with EMC
Regulations
The following contains a summary of general information and
guidelines which will make it easier for you to comply with EMC and CE
regulations.
♦ Ensure that there is a good conductive connection between the
housing of the rectifier unit and the mounting surface.The use of
mounting surfaces with good conducting properties (e.g. galvanized
steel plate) is recommended. If the mounting surface is insulated
(e.g. by paint), use contact washers or serrated washers.
♦ All of the metal cabinet parts must be connected through the largest
possible surface area and must provide good conductivity.
If necessary, use contact washers or serrated washers.
♦ Connect the cabinet doors to the cabinet frame using grounding
strips which must be kept as short as possible.
♦ Power cables must be routed separately away from signal cables (at
least 20 cm apart). Provide partitions between signal cables and
power cables. The partitions must be grounded.
♦ Eliminate any unnecessary cable lengths because these will
produce additional coupling capacitances and inductances.
♦ Use cables with braided shields. Cables with foil shields have a
shielding effect which is worse by a factor of five.
♦ Use a radio interference suppression filter in the incoming
powerline.
Connect the interference suppression filter to ground through a large
surface area.
It is best to directly mount the interference suppression filter on the
same good conductive mounting surface as the rectifier unit and the
inverters.
You must insert a line reactor between the radio interference
suppression filter and the unit.
♦ Contactor operating coils that are connected to the same supply
network as the rectifier unit or that are located in the close proximity
of the rectifier unit must be connected to overvoltage limiters (e.g.
RC circuits, varistors).
You will find further information in the brochure "Installation Instructions
for EMC-correct Installation of Drives"
(Order No.: 6SE7087-6CX87-8CE0).
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
6-1
10.98
7
WARNING
Connecting-up
Connecting-up
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES units are operated at high voltages.
The equipment must be in a no-voltage condition (disconnected from
the supply) before any work is carried out!
Only professionally trained, qualified personnel must work on or with
the units.
Death, severe bodily injury or significant property damage could occur if
these warning instructions are not observed.
Hazardous voltages are still present in the unit up to 5 minutes after it
has been powered down due to the DC link capacitors. Thus, the
appropriate delay time must be observed before working on the unit or
on the DC link terminals.
The power terminals and control terminals can still be live even when
the motor is stationary.
If the DC link voltage is supplied centrally, the converters must be
reliably isolated from the DC link voltage!
When working on an opened unit, it should be observed that live
components (at hazardous voltage levels) can be touched (shock
hazard).
The user is responsible that all the units are installed and connected-up
according to recognized regulations in that particular country as well as
other regionally valid regulations. Cable dimensioning, fusing,
grounding, shutdown, isolation and overcurrent protection should be
particularly observed.
NOTE
Due to their physical characteristics, converters can produce DC
residual currents. If a residual-current protective device (residualcurrent-operated circuit-breaker) is used on the supply side of the
AC/AC converter - or of the rectifier unit in the case of multi-motor
drives - for protective purposes in case of indirect touching, only type B
to IEC 755 is permitted. Due to radio-interference suppression
capacitors and as a result of the parasitic capacity of the motor cable,
leakage currents flow which can lead to undesired responding of the
residual-current protective device.
In general, operation without faults is possible only under the following
conditions:
♦ Rated residual current of the residual-current protective
device ≥ 300 mA
♦ Short motor cables (l < 20 m)
♦ No radio-interference suppression filter built in
♦ Only one converter connected per residual-current protective device
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-1
Connecting-up
10.98
Signalling relay output X91
Braking resistor X6
capacitor module
DC link bus module X3
+
External DC 24 V incoming
supply X9
−
PE3
SIEMENS
LED messages
DC 24 V output,
RS485 (USS) X100
Run
Failure
Chopper
active
X100
Operator control panel X320
Holder for operator control panel
Mains connection X1
Fig. 7-1
7-2
Connection overview of units 90 mm wide
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.98
Connecting-up
Braking resistor X6
capacitor module
Signalling relay output X91
PE
G
H
DC link bus module X3
+
External DC 24 V incoming
supply X9
−
PE3
SIEMENS
LED messages
DC 24 V output,
RS485 (USS) X100
Run
Failure
Chopper
active
X100
Operator control panel X320
Holder for operator control panel
Mains connection X1
Fig. 7-2
Connection overview of units with a width of 135 mm and 180 mm
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-3
Connecting-up
7.1
10.98
Power connections
Protective
conductor
The protective conductor must be connected up both on the mains side
and on the motor side.
On account of leakage currents through the interference-suppression
capacitors, a minimum cross-section of 10 mm² must be used in
accordance with VDE 0160. If mains connections with cross-sections
less than 10 mm² are used, the following measures can be applied.
If the unit is mounted on a grounded mounting surface via a conductive
connection, the protective conductor cross-section can be the same as
that of the supply-cable conductor.
In the case of insulated installation or a poor conductive connection to
the mounting surface, a separate protective conductor with a crosssection of 10 mm² can be connected up instead of the protective
conductor of the mains connection.
7.1.1
Power connections for units with a width up to 90 mm
Protective
conductor
On top of the unit next to terminal X6 is an extra protective conductor
connection in the form of a threaded M4 bolt.
It is used for connecting a protective conductor for units in isolated
connection.
X1 - Mains
connection
The mains connection is located on the bottom of the unit.
When connecting-up, it is not necessary to make allowance for the
direction of the rotating field of the supply system.
Terminal
Meaning
Range
PE
Protective conductor connection
3AC 380 - 480 V
U1 / L1
Phase U1 / L1
3AC 380 - 480 V
V1 / L2
Phase V1 / L2
3AC 380 - 480 V
W1 / L3
Phase W1 / L3
3AC 380 - 480 V
Connectable cross-section: 10 mm² (AWG 6)
Terminal W1 is at the right when installed.
Table 7-1
X3 - DC link bus
module
Mains connection
The purposes of the DC link bus module is to supply the connected
inverters with the generated direct voltage.
Bar
Designation
Meaning
Range
3
PE3
Protective conductor connection
2
D / L-
DC link voltage -
DC 510 - 650 V
1
C / L+
DC link voltage +
DC 510 - 650 V
Connectable cross-section: “Electro-plated copper" 3x10 mm, rounded
off according to DIN 46433.
Bar 1 is at the front when installed.
Table 7-2
7-4
DC link bus module
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.98
Connecting-up
X6 – Braking
resistor and precharging of the
capacitor module
The connection for the external braking resistor and the pre-charging of
the capacitor module is provided on the top of the unit.
C’ G H D’
Terminal
Meaning
C´
Pre-charging for capacitor module
G
Braking resistor
H
Braking resistor
D´
Pre-charging for capacitor module
Connectable cross-section: 4 mm² (AWG 10)
Terminal D’ is at the front when installed.
Table 7-3
Connection of the braking resistor and pre-charging of the capacitor
module
The connector must be firmly screwed onto the housing to provide a
reliable connection.
♦ During operation, the full DC link voltage is always present at the
terminals for pre-charging the capacitor module.
NOTES
♦ During pre-charging, the charging current of all connected capacitor
modules flows via the terminals.
♦ For reasons of protection, cables with 4 mm² Cu should be used at
connection X6!
7.1.2
Power connections for units with a width of 135 mm and 180 mm
X1 – Mains
connection
PE
U1
V1
The mains connection is to a terminal block at the bottom of the unit.
W1
Terminal
Meaning
Range
PE
Protective conductor connection
3AC 380 - 480 V
U1 / L1
Phase U1 / L1
3AC 380 - 480 V
V1 / L2
Phase V1 / L2
3AC 380 - 480 V
W1 / L3
Phase W1 / L3
3AC 380 - 480 V
Connectable cross-section:
Unit width 135 mm:
50 mm² (AWG 1/0)
Unit width 180 mm:
95 mm² (AWG 4/0)
Terminal PE is at left as viewed from the front.
Table 7-4
Mains connection
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-5
Connecting-up
X3 - DC link bus
module
10.98
The purposes of the DC link bus module is to supply the connected
inverters with the generated direct voltage.
Bar
Designation
Meaning
Range
3
PE3
Protective conductor connection
2
D / L-
DC link voltage -
DC 510 - 650 V
1
C / L+
DC link voltage +
DC 510 - 650 V
Connectable cross-section: “Electro-plated copper" 3x10 mm, rounded
off according to DIN 46433.
Bar 1 is at the front when installed.
Table 7-5
NOTE
DC link bus module
The current carrying capacity of the copper bars is 120 A.
The 100 kW feeder supplies 230 A and would overload the copper
bars. It is therefore provided with 2 busbar connections with a current
carrying capacity of 120 A each. These take the power to busbars on
the right and left of the rectifier unit.The current distribution is not
monitored. Measures must therefore be taken at the planning stage to
ensure that the current fed to each busbar does not exceed the
specified maximum.
X6 – Braking
resistor connection
PE
H
The external braking resistor is connected to a terminal block on the top
of the unit.
Terminal
Meaning
PE
Protective conductor connection
H
Braking resistor connection
G
Braking resistor connection
G
Connectable cross-section:
Housing width 135 mm:
25 mm² (AWG 2)
Housing width 180 mm:
50 mm² (AWG 1/0)
Terminal PE is at left as viewed from the front.
Table 7-6
7-6
Braking resistor connection
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.98
Connecting-up
7.2
Control connections
X9 - External
24 V supply
2
1
The unit requires an external 24 V voltage supply for operation.
The two-pole connection necessary for this is provided at the top of the
unit.
Terminal
Designation
Meaning
Range
2
+24 V
External 24 V supply
DC 18 V - 30 V
1
0V
Reference potential
0V
Connectable cross-section:
♦ For housing width 90 mm:
2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
♦ For housing width 135 mm: 4 mm² (AWG 10)
♦ For housing width 180 mm: 4 mm² (AWG 10)
Terminal 1 is at the front when installed
Table 7-7
Current loading
External 24 V supply
When sizing the 24 V power supply, you must take into account that the
voltage supply connected at connection X9, terminals 1 and 2, feeds
both the rectifier unit and all the connected inverters including the
optional boards.
Current drain of rectifier unit:
per inverter:
X100 - 24 V voltage
output, USS bus
up to housing width
of 90 mm
33
34
35
36
Type 0.3 A (max. 0.7 A)
Type 1.0 A (max. 1.7 A)
The unit is provided with a 24 V voltage output intended for supplying
the connected inverters.
The USS bus connection is linked to the internal 9-pole SUB D socket
of the serial interface and is provided for looping the USS bus.
Terminal
Designation
Meaning
Range
33
+24 V (out)
24 V voltage output
DC 24 V
34
0V
Reference potential
0V
35
RS485P (USS)
USS bus connection
RS485
36
RS485N (USS)
USS bus connection
RS485
Connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
Terminal 33 is at the top when installed.
Table 7-8
Externale 24 V supply, USS bus, housing width of 90 mm
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-7
Connecting-up
X100 - 24 V output,
USS bus from
housing width
135 mm
33
34
35
36
10.98
The unit has a 24 V voltage output which is provided to supply the
connected inverters.
The USS bus connection is linked to the internal 9-pole SUB D socket
of the serial interface and is provided for looping the USS bus.
Terminal
Designation
Meaning
Range
33
+24 V (out)
24 V voltage output
DC 24 V
34
0V
Reference potential
0V
35
RS485P (USS)
USS bus connection
RS485
36
RS485N (USS)
USS bus connection
RS485
Connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
Terminal 33 is at the top when installed.
NOTE
The power supply of the unit is designed for a current of 30 A, but the
current carrying capacity of a single plug connector is limited to 15 A.
It is essential to make sure that a connection is not loaded with more
than 15 A, because the load is not monitored.
Table 7-9
7-8
External 24 V power supply, USS bus from housing width of 135 mm
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.98
Connecting-up
X320 - Serial
interface
On the front panel there is a 9-pole SUB D socket which can be
coupled with the USS bus of the connected inverters through the
connection X100, terminals 35 and 36.
The electronics of the rectifier unit is not linked to the interface.
The rectifier unit does not have a master or slave function.
NOTE
This interface is not provided for the start-up of the connected inverters!
If the X320 interface is to be used, the USS bus connection must be
formed (loop through rectifier unit X100 terminal 35, 36 to all inverters
X100 terminal 35, 36).
The interface cannot be operated until start-up of the inverters has
been completed (addressing of slaves has been carried out).
The following can be connected to the X320 interface:
♦ The OP1S operator control panel (pluggable with a catch-lock in the
front panel) for visualization (display) and operator control of the
connected inverters,
♦ A PC with the SIMOVIS program,
♦ Or a higher-level control system.
♦ Only one unit with a master function may be connected-up to the
entire USS bus (OP1S or PC or higher-level control).
WARNING
♦ If a unit (e.g. PC with SIMOVIS) is connected up to the RS232
interface of the inverters (at X103), no unit with a master function
may be connected up at the entire USS bus.
5
9
1
6
Pin
Designation
Meaning
1
n.c.
Not connected
2
n.c.
Not connected
3
RS485P (USS)
Data via RS485 interface
Range
RS485
4
n.c.
Not connected
5
Ground
Reference potential to P5V
0V
6
P5V
5 V aux. voltage supply
+5 V, max. 200 mA
7
n.c.
Not connected
8
RS485N (USS)
Data via RS485 interface
9
n.c.
Not connected
Table 7-10
RS485
RS485 interface
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-9
Connecting-up
10.98
X91 - Signalling
relay output
If a fault occurs in the rectifier unit, the fault message is output via the
connecting contacts of the signalling relay. At the same time, the red
LED on the front panel lights up.
In the event of a fault, the contact is open.
The possible causes for a fault are described under the "Displays"
section.
Terminal
Designation
Meaning
Range
2
Kl. 13
Fault signalling relay
Imax = 1 A, 24 V
1
Kl. 14
Fault signalling relay
Imax = 1 A, 24 V
2
1
Connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
Terminal 1 is at the front when installed.
Table 7-11
7.3
Signalling relay output
Conductor cross-sections, braking resistor and precharging of capacitor module
NOTE
If the rectifier unit is mounted on a grounded mounting surface through
a conductive connection, the conductor cross-section of the protective
conductor can be the same as that of the supply-cable conductor.
Unit
power
rating
Cross section
VDE
[kW]
[mm²]
15
10
50
35
100
95
AWG
6
Mains connection
Main Connection of
c’tactor
braking
resistor,
capacitor
module
Recommended fuses
Cross section
gR (SITOR)
gL NH
[A]
3NE
[A]
3NA
40
1802-0
50
3820
Line reactor
VDE
[mm²]
4EP3700-4US
3TF44
160 1224-0 200 3140
4EU2451-2UA00
3TF50
250 1227-0 315 3252
4EU2551-5UA00
3TF50
Table 7-12
AWG
Conductor cross-sections, fuses, reactors
It is not absolutely necessary to operate the rectifier unit through a main
contactor.
WARNING
7-10
If the rectifier unit is connected to the supply system without a main
contactor which can interrupt the incoming supply in the event of a fault
or failure of the external 24 V supply (X9), the unit can suffer further
damage.
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.98
Maintenance
8
Maintenance
8.1
Replacing the fan
At the bottom of the rectifier unit is mounted a fan for cooling the power
section.
NOTE
When the 24 V supply voltage is applied, the fan operates continuously.
It is designed for a service life of L10 ≥ 35 000 hours at an operating
temperature of Tu = 45 °C. A replacement fan must be fitted in good
time to ensure the availability of the unit.
Removal
To replace the fan, the rectifier unit has to be disconnected from the
supply and removed.
After removing the X20 connector, which is protected against polarity
reversal, and carefully bending back the fastening clips, the fan can be
taken out.
Installation
When installing the new fan, attention has to be paid to the correct
direction of the air flow. The air must flow into the inside of the unit
(directional arrow on the fan housing).
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-1
10.98
9
Technical Data
Technical Data
EU low-voltage directives
73/23/EEC and RL93/68/EEC
EU directive EMC 89/336/EEC
EU machine directive
89/392/EEC
Approval
Switching at the input
Type of cooling
Permissible ambient and coolingmedium temperature
• during operation
• during storage
• during transport
Installation altitude
Permissible humidity rating
Climatic class
Degree of pollution
Overvoltage category
Degree of protection
Class of protection
Shock protection
Radio interference suppression
• Standard
• Options
Interference immunity
Paint finish
Mechanical specifications
- Vibrations
During stationary use:
Constant amplitude
• of deflection
• of acceleration
During transport:
• of deflection
• of acceleration
- Shocks
- Drop and topple
Table 9-1
EN 50178
EN 61800-3
EN 60204-1
UL:
E 145 153
CSA: LR 21 927
(For units from unit width 135 mm: in preparation)
2 switching operations per minute
Air cooling with built-in fan or
air-cooling with additional water cooling
0° C to +40° C ( 32° F to 104° F)
(up to 50° C see Fig. "Derating curves")
-25° C to +70° C (-13° F to 158° F)
-25° C to +70° C (-13° F to 158° F)
≤ 1000 m above sea level (100 % load capability)
> 1000 m to 4000 m above sea level
(for load capability. see Fig. "Derating curves")
Relative humidity
≤ 95 % during transport and storage
≤ 85 % during operation (moisture
condensation not permissible)
Class 3K3 to DIN IEC 721-3-3 (during operation)
Pollution degree 2 to IEC 664-1 (DIN VDE 0110. Part 1).
Moisture condensation during operation is not permissible
Category III to IEC 664-1 (DIN VDE 0110. Part 2)
IP20 EN 60529
Class 1 to EN 536 (DIN VDE 0106. Part 1)
to EN 60204-1 and DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 (VBG4)
to EN 61800-3
No radio interference suppression
Radio interference suppression filter for Class B1 or A1 to EN 55011
Industrial to EN 61800-3
For interior installation
to DIN IEC 68-2-6
0.075 mm in the frequency range 10 Hz to 58 Hz
9.8 m/s² in the frequency range > 58 Hz to 500 Hz
3.5 mm in the frequency range 5 Hz to 9 Hz
9.8 m/s² in the frequency range > 9 Hz to 500 Hz
to DIN IEC 68-2-27 / 08.89
30 g. 16 ms half-sine shock
to DIN IEC 68-2-31 / 04.84
on a surface and on a corner
General data
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-1
Technical Data
10.98
Name
Value
Order number
6SE70... 24-1EP85-0AA0
31-2EP85-0AA0
32-4EP85-0AA0
Rated voltage
[V]
• Input
3 AC 380 (- 15 %) to 480 (+ 10 %)
• Output
DC 510 to 650
Rated frequency
[Hz]
• Input
50 / 60 ± 6 %
Rated current
[A]
• Input
36
108
207
• Output
41
120
230
Max. braking chopper current [A]
41
120
230
Motor power rating
[kW]
15
50
100
Auxiliary power supply
[V]
DC 24 (20 - 30)
Max. aux. power requirement [A]
• Standard version at 20 V
0,5
• Maximal version at 20 V
0,7
Switching at input
max. 2 switching operations / minute
Loading Class II to EN 60 146-1-1
Base load current
[A]
0.91 x output rated current
Base load duration
[s]
300
Overload current
[A]
1.6 x output rated current
Overload duration
[s]
30
Additional short-time loading
Short-time current
[A]
3 x output rated current
Short-time cycle
[s]
1
12
Short-time duration
[ms]
250
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor cosϕ1N
0.97
Efficiency η (rated operation)
> 99 %
Power loss (fp = 10 kHz)
[kW]
0.11
0.270
0.600
Cooling air requirement
[m³/s]
0.018
0.041
0.053
Pressure drop ∆p
[Pa]
15
30
30
Sound pressure level, types of construction, dimensions, weights
Sound pressure level
[dB(A)]
37
48
59
Dimensions
[mm]
• Width
90
135
180
• Height
360
360
360
• Depth
260
260
260
Weight approx.
[kg]
3,8
10
14
Table 9-2
9-2
Technical Data
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.98
Technical Data
Derating curves
Permissible rated input voltage in %
according to VDE 0110 / IEC 664-1
(not required by UL / CSA)
100
75
50
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
Height above sea level in m
Permissible rated current in %
100
Height
[m]
Derating
factor K1
1000
1.0
2000
0.9
3000
0.845
4000
0.8
100
Temp
[°C]
Derating
factor K2
75
50
0.879
45
1.0
40
1.125
90
80
70
60
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
Height above sea level in m
Permissible rated current in %
50
25
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
Coolant temperature in °C
Fig. 9-1
35
1.25 *
30
1.375 *
25
1.5 *
*See note
below
Derating curves
The derating of the permissible rated current for installation altitudes of
over 1000 m and at ambient temperatures below 45 °C is calculated as
follows:
Total derating = Deratingaltitude x Deratingambient temperature
K = K1 x K2
NOTE
It must be borne in mind that total derating must not be greater than 1!
Example:
Altitude: 3000 m
Ambient temperature: 35 °C
K1 = 0.845
K2 = 1.25
⇒ Total derating = 0.845 x 1.25 = 1.056 (= 1)
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-3
Technical Data
10.98
Rating plate
Unit designation
Year of manufacture
Month of manufacture
Fig. 9-2
Date of manufacture
The date of manufacture can be derived as follows:
Character
Year of manufacture:
Character
Month of manufacture
J
1997
1 to 9
January to September
K
1998
O
October
L
1999
N
November
M
2000
D
December
Table 9-3
9-4
Rating plate
Assignment of characters to the month and year of manufacture
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0 Siemens AG
Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
10.98
10
Environmental Friendliness
Environmental Friendliness
Environmental
aspects during the
development
The number of components has been significantly reduced over earlier
converter series by the use of highly integrated components and the
modular design of the complete series. Thus, the energy requirement
during production has been reduced.
Special significance was placed on the reduction of the volume, weight
and variety of metal and plastic components.
Plastics
components used
ABS:
PMU board, Siemens logo
PC / ABS:
Front cover MC Large
PA6:
Front cover MC, terminal strips,
spacer bolts, fan impeller
PA6.6:
DC link terminal cover,
through terminals, terminal strips, terminal
blocks
PVC:
Optional card covers
PP:
PMU covers
PBTP:
Fan housing
PC (Makrolon):
Fan guides
HP2061 (Phenolharz):
Insulating plates
NOMEX:
Insulating paper
Halogen-containing flame retardants were, for all essential
components, replaced by environmentally-friendly flame retardants.
Environmental compatibility was an important criterium when selecting
the supplied components.
Environmental
aspects during
production
Purchased components are generally supplied in recyclable packaging
materials (board).
Surface finishes and coatings were eliminated with the exception of the
galvanized sheet steel side panels.
ASIC devices and SMD devices were used on the boards.
The production is emission-free.
Environmental
aspects for disposal
The unit can be broken down into recyclable mechanical components
as a result of easily releasable screw and snap connections.
The plastic components are to DIN 54840 and have a recycling symbol.
Units can be disposed of through certified disposal companies.
Addresses are available from your local Siemens partner.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
10-1
10.98
11
Certificates
Certificates
Automation and Drives
Confirmation
Erlangen,15.09.1998
This confirms that
Equipment
drive converter
• Type
SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES
6SE70xx-xxPxx 1)
• Order No.
is manufactured in conformance with EN 60204 Section 6.2
(corresponds to DIN VDE 0113 Section 6.2).
1) See rating plate for complete type designation, serial number and technical data
This equipment fulfills the protection requirements against electric shock according to
DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 when the following safety rules are observed:
• Service work in operation is only permissible on a unit which is not live.
• The converter must be switched into a no-voltage condition and isolated from the
supply when replacing any part/component.
• All panels and the DC link terminals must be closed during operation.
Thus, this equipment conforms to the appropriate regulations in Germany according
to VBG 4 §2 (2) (VBG is a German regulatory body for safety-related issues).
The local operating regulations (e.g. EN 50110-1, EN 50110-2) must be observed when
operating the equipment.
A&D DS A P1
Mickal
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6NP85-0AA0
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
11-1
Certificates
10.98
Automation and Drives
Test Certificate
Erlangen, 15.09.1998
Equipment
drive converter
• Type
SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES
• Order No.
6SE70xx-xxPxx 1)
The 100% inspection was performed according to test instructions
Motion Control 6SE70xx-xxPxx.
Test scope:
I. Protective conductor
test
II. Insulation test
• According to DIN VDE 0411
III. Function test
acc. to EN 50178
• Acc. to EN 50178, Section 9.4.5.2 and
UL508/CSA 22.2-14.M 91, Section 6.8
• Initialization and start-up
• Customer terminals test
• Power section inspection
• Inspection of protection and monitoring
devices
IV. RUN-IN
• Continuous test > 5 hours
ambient temperature 55 °C
V. Function test
acc. to EN